Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Charles Thorton is a fourteen-year-old boy who was shopping at Taylor's department store at a Mall not far from his parent's home. He's at the jewelry counter to find just the right necklace for his mom's 35th birthday. Unknown to Charles, three boys were caught shoplifting over $1000 worth of gaming equipment, and stopped just outside the store by store security. As they are taken back to the security office, the leader of the three boys sees Charles, and decides to get Charles in trouble by pointing a finger at Charles as being the mastermind of the theft. The head of security for Taylor's Department store at the Mall, James Conner, never identifies himself as he slaps a hand on Charles' shoulder, telling him, "You're coming with me you little bastard." That turned out to be a mistake as James found himself face down on the floor with his arm twisted behind his back and Charles' knee on the back of his neck. James is screaming at Charles to let him go, making threats about what he will do to Charles once he's let go. The commotion brings the Manager and Assistant Manager for Taylor's to the scene but they are unable to convince Charles to let go of their head of security; Charles doesn't believe anything both Managers say.
Officers William Weber and Robert Hansworth arrive, verify that James Conner is the head of security for Taylor's Department store at the Mall, and both Managers are who they claim to be. Charles finally releases James, who after getting his arm working again, almost succeeds in going after Charles, if it wasn't for Officer Weber stepping in between James and Charles. Officer Weber warns James about Charles' abilities to defend himself. Charles is told why he was 'attacked,' and told he will have to go to the security office. He makes a phone call to his mom, who tells him not to say anything until she, his father, and a lawyer from his father's firm arrive. Charles tells everyone what his mother told him, and he follows everyone to the security office. James still tries to get at Charles as they walk to the security office, but the Officers intercede, placing themselves between James and Charles, again. James won't be denied his prize, making Charles talk and getting back at Charles for how he was treated. Instead of just putting Charles in the holding room and waiting for Charles' parents, James lets Charles enter the room then he quickly goes into the room, slamming the door and locking it from the inside.
James' mistake was to take a police baton in the room with him, which he then slams down on the table in front of Charles in an attempt to intimidate Charles. Doesn't work, Charles is calm and concentrating on James. Charles responds to James shouts and threats by repeating what his mother told him about being questioned. As the Officers and Mary Myles watched on the other side of the one-way window, James starts to reach for the baton, only to see Charles holding it in his hand, and he had snapped it open. Charles warns James, but it does no good as James then tries to lunge across the table to grab Charles. James ends up with a broken collar bone and the ulna and radius in his right arm. Lynn and Jeb Thorton arrive with Terry Morgan, a lawyer in Jeb's firm. Officer Hansworth explains what happened, Mr. Obler returns upon hearing James screams and demands Charles is arrested for assault. Mary Myles proceeds to put Mr. Obler to sleep with a shot to his jaw, after being told by Mr. Obler she's fired. Officer Hansworth explains they have to take Charles in because of the charge against him, and he is put in the same holding cell as the three boys.
The next day Charles goes before Judge Ruth Walinkiewicz, who has reviewed the case and finds that the charges against Charles are lies. She is about to dismiss the case when George Strom, CEO of Taylor's, stands up in the gallery and tells Ruth if she dismisses the case Taylor's will take Charles to Federal Court and add additional charges. Recess is called and Ruth, Terry, the Prosecuting Attorney, and Charles meet in Ruth's chambers. There they discuss what additional charges could be brought against Charles if it's taken to Federal Court. Ruth has an idea to solve their problem, but it depends on Charles. Charles doesn't plead guilty, but accepts the punishment of the Court. And soon Charles finds himself on a train to Kingston, RI and Jane Thompson. It's there that Jane feels it's wrong for Charles to be with her, until she talks with Ruth and learns the whole story. Jane hatches a plan to help Charles clear his name, but only if Charles agrees to help show the leader of the three boys a side of himself he never knew existed. And Charles replied, "When do we start?"
After Jane explained what she needed Charles to do, and he accepted, plus continue helping Francis, she and Charles left the Library and went to the dining room, where Francis had set the table for their noon meal.
Francis was waiting at the dining room table as the two approached, and after being told by Jane, "Francis. Please tell Marie we are ready to eat,"
"Yes, Aunt Jane," she replied, and went into the kitchen to inform Marie. When Francis returned, she was carrying a turine of soup, which she sat in the middle of the table. Marie then came out of the kitchen carrying a platter of fresh baked bread, which she also placed in the middle of the table. Jane then indicated where Charles was to sit, but not before he helped all three ladies with their chairs; though to Francis it seemed strange for a soon to be girl to do something such as that.
When the soup course was finished, Marie and Francis cleared the table of the soup bowls and the turine, returning with bowls of potatoes, vegetables, and meat. While they had been in the kitchen, Jane had gently schooled Charles about helping a lady to sit at the table, saying young ladies don't do such things. So when Francis and Marie returned from the kitchen, Charles had to stop himself from standing and helping to seat the ladies. Jane, seeing Charles stop himself as he was starting to rise out of his chair, and the consternation written on his face, chuckled inwardly. Charles was going to be a great asset in not only helping Francis, but in clearing his name.
When they'd all had dessert, Marie went into the kitchen and returned carrying a tray with four small glasses and a decanter of wine. Francis had seen this ritual several times before, and knew what was about to happen next. Or thought she did, until she noticed all the rims of the glasses were pink, instead of one being blue. And she was further confused when after they'd drank a toast for Charles being with them, Jane told her to help Marie clear the table and then help in the kitchen. She'd take charge of Charles. But, Francis did as she was told, without her sometimes sour face showing.
It was after they'd all risen from the table that Charles said, "Marie, Francis, Aunt Jane, thank you for a lovely dinner. It was extremely enjoyable." This was something else Francis thought strange, since none of the previous boys had ever said anything so kind on their first day with Aunt Jane. Marie did give Jane a questioning look, to which Jane imperceptibly nodded toward the Library. Marie then told Francis to carry on with Jane's instructions and she'd return in a moment, as she and Jane went into the Library, where Jane told Marie her complete plans to help Charles clear his name by getting the boy coming next week to confess the lie he told in the beginning. A lie which caused Charles to be arrested, stand before Judge Ruth, and if not punished, would be taken to Federal Court by Taylor's Company. Where he could face additional charges brought by Taylor's, charges which would put Charles in Juvenile Detention until he was eighteen, then transferred to a Federal Prison.
Marie had been with Jane from the start of her Winsome Girl's School for Wayward Boys, and Jane knew the look on Marie's face said she was beyond angry at the injustice perpetrated on Charles. And like Jane, the boy coming next week was going to learn a lesson he should have learned some years ago. And they were going to learn a lesson about the boy.
When the two ladies left the Library, Francis had the table cleared, and from sounds coming from the kitchen, was starting to put things away and start washing the dishes. Charles, on the other hand, not given any instruction, stayed where he was by the dining room table, and stepped in beside Jane when she told him, "Charles, please come with me."
As she had told Charles, any time Francis was near, they both had to act as though Charles was just another boy Jane was going to teach, so Charles responded with, "Yes, Aunt Jane." As they walked out of the dining room and toward the stairs, Jane explained, in a voice only Charles could hear, what they were going to do when they reached his bedroom. And that he had a lot to learn in the short time they had before the ringleader of the three boys arrived the following week. All Charles said when Jane became silent, was, "This ought to be fun."
When they reached Charles' bedroom, Jane had him sit on the bed then sat beside him. Charles looked at Jane as she told him, "Charles, the first thing we'll do is choose your feminine name, which I believe should be Charlotte. It's close enough to your own name so you shouldn't get confused when addressed." Charles simply nodded his head in agreement. "Next, and if you'll follow me, I'll explain everything that's in that chest of drawers," and she pointed to the chest of drawers against one wall. They got up off the bed and walked over to the chest of drawers, where Jane started in the top drawer of panties, and proceeded to explain them to Charles. She told him about the style, when a particular style should be worn, or could be worn before opening the second drawer containing bras. Again, she explained styles, which bra should be worn with which panty, and when and where they should and could be worn. When she was certain Charles understood what she had told him, she opened the third drawer, which contained stockings and garter belts. She explained how to put on a garter belt, how to put on stockings and how to attach the stockings to the garter belt.
When she looked at Charles' face, she noticed it was slightly pink, causing her to chuckle inwardly at the sight. She then put her hand on his shoulder before she saw the single tear slide down his right cheek. She knew how hard it was for the boys sent to her to become young ladies and wear what they were forced to wear, so it wasn't hard for her to understand how much harder it was for Charles to do something he'd never done but volunteered to do so. She told him, "Charles, I realize this is all new to you and you're starting to have second thoughts. But if you'll trust me, really trust me, you'll get through this and perhaps learn something you'd not have learned any other way. And Charles, we will get your name cleared, I promise you." For the first time since this whole mess had started, Charles reached out and hugged Jane then started crying. As Jane held Charles she vowed that someone was going to pay for involving this sweet child in their vicious plans.
When Charles' crying slowed, then stopped, he got the hiccups, which caused him and Jane to start laughing. As his hiccups slowly stopped, Jane then took him into the bathroom so he could wash his face and get it ready for what Jane was going to do next. When she was sure he was alright, she took him back into the bedroom and to the chest of drawers, where, after opening the top drawer, she had him pick out a pair of panties. After seeing which panties he chose, she opened the second drawer and took out a matching bra and something else Charles hadn't seen before. She then explained how to put a bra on, then showed him the inserts he would wear until he visited her salon, where he would have breast forms glued to his chest. Jane had him put the bra on, then take it off and put it on again, so the action would start becoming ingrained in his mind. She then took out a garter belt, which matched the bra and panty he was wearing, and showed him how that was put on; again having him remove it and put on several times for the same reason. She'd chosen a nude pair of stockings, explaining how to bunch up one, place it over his toes, then slowly pull it up just as though he was putting on his socks. Of course, she had to get another pair, as he ran his nails through the first pair he tried putting on. His second attempt was more successful, as Jane then showed him how to attach the stockings to the garter belt; he took off and put on the stockings several times, without ruining the pair.
With his robe on, Jane took him over to the vanity, had him sit down and began a dialog about his hair and the different ways his hair could be worn. Because his hair was to his shoulders, Jane told him it was possible to have it cut in a more feminine style when they visited her salon. But for now, she was going to show him ways to make his hair look more feminine. Jane had Charles watch in the mirror as she did this and that in order to make his hair look more feminine. And when she'd finished 'fiddling' with his hair, he was shocked at the change of his appearance by just changing the look of his hair.
Jane walked over and picked up the chair sitting in the corner of the room and brought it back over where Charles was sitting. She looked Charles in the eyes and told him, "Charles, many boys have never thought of using makeup, unless they were cast members in a play, know nothing about makeup or how to apply it properly. And if they did, it was done in secret, lest they be found out by others. By your facial expression, you too find this thought difficult to accept, but for us to get your name cleared and to find out the whole truth of this matter, you must learn how to apply makeup to your face and do so in a proper manner. A proper manner which makes it appear as though you are not actually wearing makeup. When applying makeup, less can make all the difference to a girl's appearance, unless she's attending special occasions, which requires a different application. I want you to watch me in the mirror as I show you the proper way to apply your makeup. Then I'll have you clean your face and have you work through the steps I show you."
As Charles watched, Jane opened and closed several drawers in the vanity, taking out items from each drawer, and sitting them on the vanity counter. She would then pick up an item, show him the label on the bottle or kit, explain its use, and as he watched in the mirror, Jane would apply it to his face. All the while reminding him less is more, unless it's a special occasion. As Jane applied the second coat of mascara, and told Charles she was done, she watched in amusement as Charles marveled at the face he saw in the mirror. The face of a young, fourteen-year-old girl. Charles had totally disappeared. He was so mesmerized by what he saw in the mirror, that Jane had to finally shake him to get his attention.
Jane then picked up a package of cleaning wipes and told Charles, Charlotte, to follow her to the bathroom, where he was to clean off his makeup before washing his face. When his face was clean to Jane's satisfaction, they returned to the vanity, sat down, and Charles was instructed to apply his makeup following the steps Jane had just shown him. When Charles would make a mistake applying this or that to his face, instead of having Charles erase the mistake, Jane would again take him into the bathroom and have him clean his face. They'd return to the vanity where Charles would begin again; starting over after each mistake would help Charles gain muscle memory. After several false starts, Charles was finally amazed as he looked into the mirror and saw the young, fourteen-year-old girl stare back at him, the one he first saw after Jane applied his makeup. And he'd done it all himself.
Jane was pleased with how Charles, Charlotte, had progressed in such a short amount of time. Unfortunately, s/he had a lot to learn in a rather short amount of time, if her plan was to succeed. "Charles, Charlotte, I'm pleased with your progress so far, but there is much you have to learn if the plan is to succeed and your name is cleared. So, please follow me," Jane told him/her, as she stood up and walked to the closet. When Charles, Charlotte, was standing beside her in the closet, Jane began explaining about the different pieces of clothing hanging up on the clothes rack. She explained the type of material each was made of, the proper name for the color of the material, when and when they shouldn't be worn, and the requirements when Charles, Charlotte, was not in his/her room. Jane then turned her attention to explaining the shoes on a shelf at the back of the closet, and explained them in much the same way as the clothing. And again, Charles', Charlotte's, requirements when not in the bedroom.
With explanations over, Jane took a simple dress off the clothes rack, and shoes to match, and led Charles, Charlotte, out of the closet. She laid the dress on the bed and the shoes under the chair that held the robe, before having Charles, Charlotte, follow her to the chest of drawers. All Charles, Charlotte, saw when Jane opened the fourth drawer was what looked like folded up pieces of a soft material. As s/he watched, Jane took out four of the folded up pieces of soft material, closed the drawer and bid Charles, Charlotte, to return with her to the bed. Once they reached the bed, Jane sat the four on the bed, picked up the top one, unfolded it and began telling Charles, Charlotte, what it was.
"Charles, this is a slip, a garment worn under a dress. This one can be worn for everyday dresses, dresses you'd wear shopping, etc. These straps can be adjusted by pulling the strap through these metal pieces until the slip is positioned properly on your body. This slip, because it's white, can only be worn under light colored dresses. If you wish to wear this style under a dark colored dress, then a darker colored slip should be worn. That isn't to say a woman isn't daring, once in a while, and wears a dark colored slip under a light colored dress and a white colored slip under a dark colored dress, but you won't be daring while you're here at Seasons House. You WILL be properly dressed at all times." Jane watched Charles', Charlotte's, face for any signs of stress, and seeing none, laid that slip on the dress lying on the bed. Picking up the next slip, Jane went through another explanation of whens and wheres, do's and don'ts, before folding up the slip and setting it back on the bed. After showing Charles, Charlotte, the third and fourth slips, and an explanation for each one, she took the three slips back to the chest of drawers and returned them to the fourth drawer. It was now crunch time.
Jane studied Charles, Charlotte, as she walked back to the bed. It struck her that it wasn't Charles she saw any more, but Charlotte, a young, fourteen-year-old girl, and it was time she was treated as the young girl she appeared to be. Steeling herself, Jane said, "Alright, Charlotte, I want you to put on the slip so we can get it adjusted correctly." Jane watched as Charlotte gently picked up the slip and examined it, running her hand over the material to feel its softness. She watched as Charlotte bunched up the slip and was about to put it over her head, and told her, "Ah, dear, you're about to put THAT slip on backwards. Much like the shirts you wear, that slip has a tab at the collar in the back." Jane inwardly chuckled, as she watched the 'duh' look form on Charlotte's face, before she turned the slip around, bunched it up again, put her arms through the straps and let it fall over her body.
Jane stood back and examined the slip hanging on Charlotte's body. She saw it needed to be adjusted, and proceeded to show Charlotte how to adjust it so it hung correctly. She then loosened the straps and had Charlotte readjust the slip until it hung correctly on her. Jane then picked up the dress and gave Charlotte another explanation concerning the dress. She then had Charlotte put on the dress and zip it up, only to watch as Charlotte fought to get the zipper all the way to her neck. She didn't give up, and found her own way to complete the task. Jane then had her unzip the dress, take it off, and put it on again. This she did several times until Charlotte had little trouble putting on the dress and zipping the back closed.
Jane crossed her fingers mentally, as she told Charlotte to sit in the chair the robe was on. As Charlotte sat down, she sat as a boy would sit, causing Jane to gently admonish her to sweep the back of the dress under her as she sat, and to keep her knees together after she sat down. Jane instructed Charlotte to sit up straight and not to slouch as she sat, proper ladies always sat up straight. Jane then had Charlotte repeat the exercise of standing up, sweep her dress under her as she sat down, and keeping her knees together as she sat, several times until she saw it had become automatic with Charlotte.
Charlotte was then instructed to reach under the chair and take out the shoes, and to put them on her stocking covered feet. Charlotte had done well with her attitude so far, and Jane was hoping it would continue with what Jane was going to have her do next. "Have you ever worn heels before, Charlotte? Be honest with me. Have you?" Jane watched two things occur with Charlotte. The first was the shake of her head, indicating she'd never worn heels before, and the second being a questioning look on her face. Jane was not going to let the question go and asked, "You have a question, Charlotte?"
Jane believed she knew the question but let Charlotte ask it anyway. "Aunt Jane, you're now calling me Charlotte. Why?" Charles' question was sincere, without malice or anger. He was simply asking a question.
Jane smiled, walked over and knelt down before Charlotte, took both her hands in hers and told the girl, "Because we have so little time to get you used to presenting as a girl, and your girl name. Charlotte. You must be able to answer right away to that name so you don't give anything away when that young man arrives next week. It isn't to demean you in any way, just to help you adjust to something I see you've never done."
Jane could see Charles mull over what he just heard, then nod his head and tell Jane, "I guess you're right, Aunt Jane. After being called Charles for fourteen years, I wouldn't recognize who's being addressed if I was called Charlotte out of the blue. Besides, it's a rather pretty name." Jane squeezed Charlotte's hands before standing, and gently pulled Charlotte up out of the chair by her hands.
Because Charlotte kept her knees together, when she stood up her feet were together. Jane stepped back and observed Charlotte for a few moments, noticing how steady she was standing. It was rather strange that Charlotte should be steady, since she was balancing on the balls of her feet and the tiny two inch heel, and could only do so if she'd worn heels before; it was something Jane had to ask about. Something else struck Jane as being odd, as she noticed Charlotte had her hands together and hanging down in front of her. Just as though it'd been something she'd done her entire life. Standing before Jane was a beautiful fourteen-year-old young girl, there was no longer a trace of Charles Thorton. And there was no way, other than being undressed, would Charlotte be found to be other than a young girl. A young girl who was going to turn heads. Jane took several steps back then said, "Charlotte, walk over to me." She watched as Charlotte dropped her hands to her side and as though she'd done this before, walked over to Jane without so much as a by your leave. Charlotte had taken small steps, without hesitating. She'd been steady with each step, something that shouldn't have happened if Charles had never worn heels before.
Jane was suspicious Charles hadn't told her the truth, and when Charlotte was standing directly in front of her, her voice was anything but kind. "Charles, I believe you haven't told me the truth about not having dressed and acted like a girl before. I believe you've lied to me. None of the boys who came to me in the past have been able to act like the girl I've just watched you portray. You stand as a young girl would as she waited. And you walk in those heels as though you've done that before. I do not tolerate lying by my girls, it's the quickest way to have them sent home exactly as they are dressed. Or not dressed in anything."
When Charlotte had stopped in front of Jane she'd kept her eyes on Jane's eyes, watching as they changed from sympathetic to angry. An anger Charles had seen on the faces of those at Taylor's. An anger which meant his chance of clearing his name could only happen if Jane was on his side. He gave Jane a half smile then said, "Aunt Jane, I've taken self defense and Martial Arts since I was six years old. As I got older some of my instructors, and senseis, felt I could benefit from taking dance, which I did, and it helped with my balance. My standing as I did, was just a ready position when confronted by an aggressive person. I don't look threatening, so I don't give that person a reason to attack me. However, I'm in a position to act if necessary. As to walking in these heels," and Charles looked down at the heels he was wearing, "it's more of my training. Taking large steps puts a person off balance if they should be attacked. Smaller steps keep the body balanced and will allow me to react as needed. I haven't lied to you, Aunt Jane, and I never will."
Jane saw Charlotte's eyes get moist, and told her, "If those tears leave your eyes you will have to redo your face. I am sorry for being rough with you just now, Charles, but I had to know the truth. All of the truth." Jane walked over to the vanity and came back with a tissue, which she gave to Charlotte, telling her, "Blot your eyes gently, don't rub them or you'll smear your eye makeup." When she could see Charlotte had herself under control again she told her to stay where she was and not turn around, as Jane walked over to the closet door and opened it wide. When the door was in position Jane told Charlotte to turn around.
At first, Charlotte was confused as to why she was standing where Jane had told her to stand. But it didn't last as she caught sight of herself in the full length mirror on the inside of the closet door. Or rather, he caught sight of a young girl staring back at her from the mirror. Jane chuckled as Charlotte turned this way and that, all the while looking at the mirror and the reflection she saw. Charles was acting just like a girl would who was making sure she looked good for her night out. Jane chuckled even more as Charles said, "Wow, that's me? All me? I never considered how good I'd look dressed like this. In fact, I don't even see me in that mirror, just a young girl looking back at me."
As Charles continued to primp in front of the mirror, oblivious to anything around him, Jane smiled at what she saw. Charles had taken to dressing as a girl much quicker than others who'd not been given the option, and she knew right then that her plan to clear Charles' name had a chance of succeeding. What she didn't know was how he would react in front of Francis when they started their play acting, and he was punished for his attitudes. She only hoped his balance wasn't only in his posture, but his mind as well.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
As Jane watched a beautiful young girl continue to primp in front of the mirror, she had a realization that heads would turn when they viewed this lovely young girl. She also had a realization of what would be on the minds of some of those heads, and knew she or Marie had to be with Charlotte any time she was out of the house. Unless...
"Charlotte. Charlotte," Jane called to the girl now twirling around and trying to watch herself in the mirror. But Charlotte was lost in her own new world, and never heard her name called. She came out of it soon enough when she heard, "CHARLOTTE!" Charlotte instantly stopped spinning and faced Jane with a huge smile on her face, a smile that disappeared so fast it might not have formed at all. Charlotte was now staring into the face of a slightly angry Jane Thompson, a Jane Thompson who was not used to repeating herself to her girls. In controlled anger Jane said, "Young lady, when I call your name I expect you to respond instantly. And not ignore me or Marie. Do not allow me to call your name twice in a row again, or I assure you, there will be consequences. Do. You. Understand. Me. Young Lady??"
Jane was having a hard time understanding why Charles was merely staring at her instead of hanging his head in shame because of her chewing him out. He hadn't flinched, blinked, or moved in any way as Jane laid down the law. And she wasn't ready for, "I understand, Aunt Jane. And I apologize for upsetting you, it wasn't intentional," from Charles.
Jane schooled her face so Charles wouldn't see the confusion she felt over how Charles responded to her anger just now. She needed to know more about this boy. "Let's sit on the bed, Charlotte. And remember what I said about your dress before sitting down."
Jane let Charlotte move to the bed first, watching as she walked like she'd done this her whole life. And watched as she turned around, pulled the back hem of her dress forward and sat down with her knees together, placing her hands in her lap. Charles was a remarkable fast learner, Jane thought to herself as she walked over to the bed and sat beside Charlotte. Charlotte looked at Jane and could see her forming her thoughts, before she said, "Charles, I find it necessary to learn more about your personal life from you. You've explained some of the things I pointed out, but I need to know more about the training you've had." She held up her hand to stop Charles from speaking, as she continued with, "I need to know because as you've discovered, you present as an extremely attractive young lady. And because of this I'm concerned the attention you'll get when we go out could endanger your life. I need to know what training you've had and can you defend yourself if you were grabbed by some small brained individual."
Jane saw that Charles had dropped his head and seemed to be staring at his fingers, as they moved through what appeared to be a rhythmic pattern. The pattern started to get more complicated and faster, before it stopped with one hand on top of the other with the palms down in his lap. Charles looked up at Jane, before he said, "Aunt Jane, I can give you a general rundown about the training I've had, but I've given my word to my senseis, and others, not to speak of some things I know. The exercise you just saw is a prime example of just one of the things I promised not to talk about. I will tell you this, though. It is a form of self defense."
Charles then spent the next thirty minutes explaining the training he received from Officers Weber and Hansworth and the general training he received at the Dojos he attended. He then explained that because of his aptitude for Martial Arts, his senseis had taken him aside and given him individual training. Training he had been sworn not to reveal. He then answered Jane's other concerns, that yes, he could defend himself if grabbed by some moron who fancied Charlotte for something more than just to look at. And should that happen, that moron would find himself waking up in the hospital.
When Charles became silent Jane asked, "And if you should find yourself facing more than one attacker? Can you defend yourself then?" The expression Charles now had on his face, because of Jane's question, even frightened her. A woman who is never frightened of one of her wards.
When Charles answered her question, it was with a cold and precise voice. "Aunt Jane. Should I find myself attacked by multiple individuals I can defend myself. And when it's over, one or more of the attackers may lay dead on the ground. It is how I was trained to handle multiple individuals."
As Charles watched Jane got up off the bed and began pacing the length of the bedroom. Charles' last statement made her realize the lengths Charles would go to defend himself, and should that occur, he would be found out to be a young man. This could cause major problems for her and Marie, as she and Marie would be questioned by the police and possibly the State Child Protective Services. And likely end up in prison. She continued to pace as she thought over the problem.
As Jane walked back and forth the length of the bedroom, Charles had turned his head one way then the other, as he followed her pacing. It took a few more moments before he realized why she was pacing and asked her, "Are you worried by what I said there at the end? About how I'd handle a group of attackers? Because if you are, and worried what it might do to you, Marie, and your school, I can give you my word not to give the morgue any more work than it already has at the moment."
Jane stopped dead in her tracks because of what Charles just said. She turned and looked at him, then asked, "You can do such a thing? Not kill but protect yourself against multiple individuals?" When Charles nodded his head, Jane then said, "Then give me your word not to kill any attacker, but not necessarily keep them out of the hospital."
As Jane watched, Charles did something rather strange to her. He got up from the bed, walked over to her, crossed his arms over his chest, bowed and told her, "I pledge my word to do as you ask. There will be no deaths, but lessons taught that will be remembered for all time." He then straightened and took his normal ready position. Jane had to blink a few times due to what she just saw and heard. She did recognize it as a formal giving of a person's word, and knew it would not be broken no matter what.
Jane again gave Charlotte an appraising look, before mentally shaking herself and telling Charlotte, "Now, when we leave this room, and until you leave my house, you are to be Charlotte in every way. Your current posture is excellent for a young girl waiting to be heard, waiting to be told what to do, or listening to what she's being told. Francis is doing well at the moment, so you won't need to act out, in some manner, when I nod to you. Let Francis think you're the new girl in my home. Let her tell you what she thinks you need to hear. Question what she tells you, get her to explain the whys and hows. I want her to learn she can talk with you openly when she thinks I'm not listening. I want her to learn how to trust someone, something that's caused her problems in her home life. And if she's having a bad day, and you'll know it when you see it happen, let her talk with you about it. Be there with a shoulder to cry on when she gets really upset."
"We will be going to my study, the room which is used to admonish my girls. When we go in there Francis will believe you are about to get the same lesson she received on several previous occasions. What we are going to do is give you more lessons about being a girl. I'll have you practice walking around the room, so you develop a better feel for how to walk more feminine. I will also have you experience my special chair, so you'll know what Francis and our new girl experience when they are in that room with me. I also want to go over your academic record, so I can plan lessons for you to work on as I do Francis, and like our new girl will be doing. Sometimes those lessons are punishment for an infraction, and sometimes they are actually papers for a particular course they are studying. Now, because you're just starting to wear heels, remember when you descend stairs to step on the ball of your foot as you step down each tread. Coming up the stairs you'll step naturally on the ball of your foot, so that shouldn't cause you any problems. Going up or down the stairs, you will place your hand on the railing in case you lose your balance. And you will continue to use the railing even when you've gained confidence ascending and descending the stairs. And until you do become more confident, don't rush up or down, take your time. More will be explained once we're in the Study. You will follow me down the stairs, I want to be in front of you in case you suddenly stumble and start to fall. So my new girl Charlotte, let's go introduce you to the world, shall we?"
Jane opened the door to Charlotte's bedroom and Charlotte followed Jane out of the room, to the stairs, and descended behind Jane without any difficulties. When they reached the foot of the stairs, Jane pointed and told Charlotte to sit on the bench against the wall until she returned. Charlotte did as she was told, remembering to sweep the back of her dress forward before sitting and to keep her knees together. Just as she sat down, she heard the door to the kitchen squeak open and close, and squeak open and close again before Jane reappeared. Francis was behind Jane now, and all Jane did was point to the bence. Francis sat down next to Charlotte, before Jane said, "I'll call you in a moment, Charlotte. Stay seated on that bench until then."
Again, Charlotte gave Jane that same puzzling look, the one Jane questioned when she first saw it. It wasn't anger, nor arrogance, nor contempt, nor fear. It was actually a blank look, one Jane had yet learned how to read. She'd have to question Charlotte about that look. She did, however, receive an, "Yes Aunt Jane," from Charlotte.
Jane went into the Study, opened two cabinet doors and turned on the monitor that watched the bench area. She turned up the sound and waited. It wasn't long before she heard Francis say to Charlotte, "Aunt Jane must have really been rough on you before you came downstairs."
Jane watched as Charlotte turned her head to look at Francis before asking, "Why do you say that, Francis? It didn't seem Aunt Jane was rough on me. She did tell me the rules, showed me how to do my makeup, though I made several mistakes and had to start over after washing my face. She explained my wardrobe and all of the contents on that chest of drawers. It didn't seem out of the ordinary to me." The look on Francis' face spoke volumes as Charlotte spoke. Francis was confused. She saw Charles arrive at the train station, enter Aunt Jane's house, eat dinner with them, then go upstairs with Aunt Jane. Now all she saw was Charlotte, and no trace of Charles. And Charlotte said she didn't think her time with Aunt Jane in Charlotte's bedroom was out of the ordinary.
Charlotte had seen the hidden camera watching the area where she was sitting; that had been part of some training Charles pledged not to reveal. So once she spoke to Francis, she continued watching Francis and waited until Francis spoke again. And it wasn't long in coming. "How can you say it wasn't out of the ordinary? It was terrible for me! I put on and took off a bra so many times my finger tips started getting raw. Aunt Jane had me putting on a dress and taking it off until my arms ached from stretching further than they could. And when she had me put on my makeup, I washed my face so many times my skin started getting raw. And then there were the high heels, I almost broke my ankle when I first put them on and walked around the room. And then there was me being a boy dressing like a girl, it was embarrassing." Charlotte watched as Francis hung her head and tears fell into her lap. Charlotte glanced at the hidden camera and noticed a red light blink twice before going out. Charlotte then did something while Francis wasn't watching and held out two fingers and wiggled them up and down. The red light on the camera responded with two blinks. She then folded one finger in and wiggled the one finger from side to side, watching as the red light blinked twice. Jane understood one finger for 'no' and two fingers for 'yes.' And she'd use the small red light on the camera to answer.
Charlotte put an arm around Francis and pulled her into a hug, watching the light on the camera as it blinked twice. "Francis, maybe it was embarrassing right then, because unless you'd worn girls' clothing before, it wasn't something you were used to doing. Right?" When Charlotte felt Francis nod her head, she continued with, "But look at you now. All I see when I look at you is a very pretty young lady. I don't see the boy you are underneath. And just think, we're getting to experience something not many boys would get to do, see how the other half lives and how people treat them. And as pretty as you are right now, I'd even guess some boys have looked at you when you're out with Aunt Jane, right?"
When Charlotte told Francis she was a pretty young girl, Francis straightened and looked at Charlotte. "You... you really think I'm pretty? You're... you're not just saying that, are you?"
Charlotte smiled, reached and gently wiped tears off Francis' cheeks, before saying, "No Francis, I'm not just saying that. You do make an extremely pretty young girl. Even if you're a boy underneath." And she winked at Francis, letting Francis know that fact was just between the two of them. Francis suddenly reached over and pulled Charlotte into a hug, which let Charlotte spot another hidden camera, who's red light blinked twice before going dark. Charlotte gave the camera a concealed thumbs-up.
When Francis broke the hug, Charlotte told her, "Oh, you better go and fix your face. If Aunt Jane sees you right now I don't think she'll be happy to see how you look."
The red light on the camera Charlotte had spotted blinked twice and went dark, before both girls heard, "Charlotte," said by Jane from within the Study.
As Charlotte stood up, Francis grabbed her hand and told her, "Charlotte make sure to knock and wait for Aunt Jane to say 'enter' before you go into the Study. And make sure to close the door after you, or she'll get angry with you. And thank you for being here, and being kind to me."
Charlotte smiled at Francis and said, "Thank you for telling me to knock first and about closing the door after me. And Francis, I'll be here for you as long as I'm in this house." The girls squeezed hands, before Charlotte let go and walked to the Study door, where she knocked on the door and entered when Jane said "Enter."
Jane pointed to the single chair in front of her desk and said one word, "Sit." She then went back to studying the papers in front of her on the desk. The chair in front of Jane's desk, in the Study, was an uncomfortable chair, with a straight back, short seat front to back, and lacked any seat cushion. It forced the girl to sit up straight due to its design, and became quite uncomfortable over an extended period of time. When she looked up she expected to see an uncomfortable look on Charlotte's face, not the calm, patient one she saw at the moment. It was that same look which kept puzzling her, and she was going to learn why. Jane gave Charlotte a measured look before asking, "You have me puzzled, Charlotte. The times I expected certain facial expressions on your face, you presented the one I see on your face now. Why? Why do you keep presenting the same neutral facial expression? As long as I've had you sitting in that chair, you should be feeling very uncomfortable right now. But you look no different than when you first sat down. Why? Don't you find that chair uncomfortable?"
As Jane watched, Charlotte dropped her head and her fingers did another elaborate dance before once again lay in her lap, palms down, one hand on top of the other. Charlotte raised her head then said, "Aunt Jane, the neutral look you have seen on my face comes from lessons I've had in the past. Any time I face a situation unfamiliar to me, or someone intent on threatening me, I keep my expression neutral so as not to give away something I may be going to do. Also, if it's a person intent on harming me, or confronting me, a neutral look doesn't look threatening to that person. Without breaking my word, I can tell you no more than that."
When Charlotte finished speaking Jane asked in a gentle voice, "Do you consider me a threat, Charlotte?"
Jane's question touched something within Charlotte, and tears fell from her eyes as she shook her head and said in a choked up voice, "No, Aunt Jane. I consider you my friend." Charlotte then put her head in her hands and wept. Because Charlotte was a special case, Jane broke a rule she'd held since her school started. She got up out of the desk chair, walked around the desk, knelt before Charlotte and pulled the distraught girl into her, letting her cry on her shoulder. In a muffled voice, and between sobs, Charlotte asked, "Why Aunt Jane? Why accuse me for something I haven't done? Why would they believe me when I told the truth?" Few of Jane's other girls had made her want to have a few minutes with those who caused this girl grief. Charlotte was one of those girls. When the new boy arrived, Jane vowed to get the truth out of him by whatever means she had to use. She then mentally kicked herself and amended that thought. By any means short of violence.
When Charlotte had regained her composure, Jane took a tissue and gently wiped the tears off her cheeks. She then got up and returned to her desk chair, looking at the monitor as she did. Francis was wiping her eyes, likely because she'd heard Charlotte crying and knew what that could mean. That was good, it meant Francis had bonded with Charlotte, felt for Charlotte, and they could use this to help Francis more. She turned her attention back to Charlotte and asked her, "Are you feeling better, Charlotte? I think you have something more going on in your life that we might want to explore, if you'll trust me." Charlotte nodded her head and Jane continued with, "But for now, I want you to help me with Francis. She must have heard you crying, which is not a bad thing, if you've been told about boys not crying. She herself was crying, likely thinking about what might be happening in this room. What I'd like to do, if you'll go along with me, as you leave the Study, I'll angrily tell you to go and attend to your face. That I don't tolerate girls with messy faces. I then want you to yell 'fine,' and slam the door as you leave. Of course I'll be even angrier because of how you acted, and will shout for you to return to my Study. Francis will of course act shocked by your actions, making her all that much more worried about you. When you enter the Study, I'll yell at you for not knocking before entering, at which point you'll stomp out of the room, slam the door again, and this time I want you to pound on the door. Francis will hear me angrily tell you to 'enter,' at which point you come into the room, slam the door again, then come and sit in that chair. I'll then start admonishing you loudly so Francis will be able to hear everything I say. When you leave the Study again, I want you to open and close the door softly, but look angry, and mumble to yourself as you stomp up the stairs towards your bedroom, then wash your face and reapply your makeup. Okay? If what I saw on the monitor is correct, Francis will be beside herself with worry about you. That you're already in trouble with me and you just arrived."
A Mona Lisa smile appeared on Charlotte's face before she said, "Understood, Aunt Jane. This should be fun." As Jane watched, Charlotte's face took on a mean, angry look, before she said, "Okay Aunt Jane, I'm ready."
All Jane said in reply was, "Then go." As Charlotte reached the Study door, and placed her hand on the door handle, the minute the door opened, Jane started her rant.
Francis was worried about Charlotte, since she was new and didn't know the rules of the house. She had heard Charlotte crying, which caused her to cry, and was wiping her eyes again when she saw the door to the Study open and heard Jane yell, "I DON'T TOLERATE MY GIRLS HAVING MESSY FACES. GO UP TO YOUR BEDROOM AND SORT YOURSELF OUT. I WILL INSPECT YOU WHEN YOU RETURN."
Then she heard Charlotte yell, "FINE," and stomped out of the Study, slamming the door behind her.
Then Francis heard, "CHARLOTTE! GET BACK IN HERE!"
Francis' hands flew to her face, cringing at what Charlotte had just done and Jane said. She knew Charlotte was in deep trouble now, and feared Aunt Jane might send Charlotte away. She almost screamed, 'NO,' when Charlotte walked directly into the Study without knocking. She then heard Jane scream, "HOW DARE YOU WALK INTO THIS ROOM BEFORE KNOCKING. GET OUT!! AND DO AS YOU WERE TOLD BEFORE ENTERING A ROOM!!" Francis watched, tears streaming from her eyes, as Charlotte stomped out of the Study, again, slammed the door, again, then pound on it as though trying to knock it down. Francis had heard Jane use the next voice only once, and it meant she was beyond angry. "Charlotte Thorton, get your ass in here. And if you slam that door one more time you'll be on the next train back where you came from. DRESSED EXACTLY AS YOU ARE AT THE MOMENT!!"
Francis had been so intent on what Charlotte was doing, she didn't see Marie watching her. She nodded her head, seeing the effect Jane's play with Charlotte was having on Francis. She went back into the kitchen, picked up the phone, dialed two numbers, and when she heard Jane's voice, told her they were having the desired effect on Francis. Francis was worried that Charlotte would be leaving.
The minute Charlotte had closed the door to the Study, Jane put a finger to her lips, signaling Charlotte to remain quiet. As they had planned, Charlotte sat in the chair as Jane continued on. "Young lady, I don't know how people treat other people's homes where you came from, but IN THIS HOUSE, YOU DO NOT SLAM DOORS OR ACT LIKE A PETULANT CHILD. Young ladies in MY house don't throw temper tantrums, or yell at their elders. Young ladies who do find themselves writing very long papers on the subject they failed to learn at an early age. Just as you're going to do. In two weeks, you will hand me a paper of ten thousand words on the proper behavior of young ladies. It WILL be written legibly, you will use correct grammar and spelling. And if I find any mistakes, you will correct it with a fifteen thousand word paper. DO I MAKE MYSELF CLEAR, YOUNG LADY?"
Jane then motioned for Charlotte to speak, loudly. All Francis heard was, "YES, AUNT JANE!"
Then Francis heard from Jane, "Good. Then go fix your face as I told you to do the first time. And remember what I said about slamming doors.!"
As Francis waited, she saw the Study door open then softly close, and Charlotte walking by her mumbling to herself. She looked really angry. Francis caught a bit of what Charlotte was saying as she walked by. "That stupid bitch. How dare she yell at me for slamming a door. Shit, it's only a damn door. Stupid damn paper, who the fuck cares about some stupid paper."
Francis had both hands covering her mouth, a shocked expression on her face. She couldn't help herself, as she said to Charlotte, "Oh, Charlotte. Don't let Aunt Jane catch you talking like that, or it will be worse for you."
Playing the part, as Jane sat watching on the monitor with approval, Charlotte said, "Oh screw the ol' bitch," before going up the stairs in a huff.
Charlotte had played her part exceptionally well, as a worried Francis stood up and began pacing back and forth in front of the bench. Jane smiled to herself as she heard Francis say as she paced, "Oh gawd, she's going to send her away. What can I do to stop it? Oh gawd, what can I do to stop it? I need Charlotte here, I need someone I can talk to. Oh gawd, oh gawd, oh gawd." She then sat down and began to cry, crying over the thought of being alone again. Alone without anyone she could talk to. Jane smiled because Francis was finally thinking of someone other than herself.
Francis was so lost with worry that she didn't hear Charlotte come down the stairs. She did feel herself being pulled up off the bench, arms go around her, and heard, "It's going to be alright, Francis. I'm not going anywhere soon."
In a thick voice she replied with, "I'm worried Aunt Jane will send you away. I've been so lonely, I need you to be here."
Charlotte gently lifted Francis' chin so she could look her in the eye, and told her, "I'll be here for you Francis, just like I said I would. But right now I think you best go fix your face. You heard how upset Aunt Jane gets when she sees her girls with messy faces." She kissed Francis on the forehead, then gently pushed her towards the stairs. Charlotte waited until Francis had gone up the stairs before going to the Study doors, knocked, and waited until said, 'enter.'
As she entered the Study, Jane was beaming, and pointed to the chair in front of the desk. Once Charlotte was seated, Jane said, "Charlotte, that worked exactly as I hoped. You are a wonderful actress. That was a nice touch telling her to go and fix her face, acting the part of a big sister looking out for her younger sister." She then noticed a questioning look on Charlotte's face, and asked, "What bothers you, Charlotte?"
"Aunt Jane, Francis seems to have lived an isolated life. She acts like she's never had a friend, a close friend. Is it out of line for me to ask why?"
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate fits, George Strom, into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Jane evaluated Charlotte's question, trying to determine if she was wanting something to use against Francis or to help her. Given her exchange with Francis, and the comfort she gave Francis when Francis thought Charlotte was going to be sent back, she determined Charlotte was genuinely concerned for Francis.
Jane picked up a large book, held it out just far enough to make Charlotte stand to accept it, and told her, "Balance this book on your head and walk around the perimeter of the room while I tell you her story. This is something I have all my girls do first thing when they come into the Study. Every time they come into the Study. Five circuits of the room. And it's something you're to do as well, if we're to keep up appearances." Charlotte accepted the heavy book from Jane, placed it on her head, adjusted it until it was balanced, and began walking around the room. She had made it to the Study doors when Jane said, "Oh, and Charlotte. If the book falls, you start over in your count." When Charlotte was back where she started, Jane began Francis' story.
"Charlotte, Francis wasn't always a problem child, far from it. From everything that could be gathered, he was a happy young man, never causing his parents any problems. Oh, he got into mischief, but nothing that involved the law. But that all changed when his parents were murdered during a botched mugging."
"According to the police reports, what they pieced together, and a grainy video from a store across the street, his parents had just come out of a restaurant and were walking to their car, when a man stepped out of the shadows and put a gun in his father's face, demanding money. His father acted as though he was reaching for his wallet when he acted, grabbing the gun and trying to take it away from the mugger. They fought and at one point, the gun discharged, hitting Frank's father in the chest, killing him instantly."
"Careful there, Charlotte. You almost caused the book to fall. Take smaller steps. That's it, nice and steady."
"Well, you can imagine his mother's reaction when she heard the gun discharge and watched her husband fall to the ground. She started screaming, and kept screaming until the mugger shot her in the head, before running off. It took the police a while to track down a relative living close by, who could take Frank in until it was decided where he would be living. But when the police arrived at Frank's home with the relative, Frank realized something happened to his parents and completely broke down. It took several minutes before he was calm enough for the police officer and Frank's relative to explain everything to Frank, which caused him to go into shock. He had to be rushed to the hospital for treatment, and they kept him several days to make sure he was going to be all right. During that time it was decided by the CPS that Frank would stay with the relative who was with the policewoman the night they told Frank about the death of his parents. That relative happened to be his dad's sister, Penny Willows, one of Frank's Aunts. The Willows had two children, a bit younger than Frank, but according to the report from CPS, the kids got along well with Frank. Two years into Frank's stay with the Willows family, it was discovered during a routine doctor's visit that Penny had stage two cancer. And was going to need surgery and chemo. When CPS learned of this they decided that Frank's Uncle couldn't take care of his two children and Frank, and at the same time, be there for his wife. CPS contacted another Aunt, another of his dad's sister, who agreed to take Frank in. And if the report is correct, she did so reluctantly."
Frank had been happy living with the Willows, but started having problems with his second Aunt, Agnes Billard, and her family. Where the Willows had been fair in their treatment of Frank, the Billard's were much stricter. It seemed every time Frank turned around, he was breaking one of their rules. He got fed up with always being told what to do, and the families holier than thou attitudes, that he ran away. And somehow made it back to the Willows, who had to call the CPS and let them know Frank was okay. Frank's dad had a brother who wasn't married, but CPS automatically crossed him off the list of family who could care for Frank. His mother had three sisters and two brothers, so the CPS contacted the closet sister and again, she agreed to take Frank in. It was three weeks after Frank was with the Pauls, that it came to light their older son had been physically abusing Frank. Beating Frank up to get the allowance the Pauls gave Frank each week. They only learned of this after Frank ran away again, and again, somehow made it back to the Willows. CPS tried two more family members on his mother's side, and for one reason or another, he'd run away and, somehow, make it back to the Willows. The Willows, seeing that Frank always came back to them, tried to convince the CPS to let them care for Frank. But the CPS said no, even though Penny had recovered from her cancer. The CPS felt, because Frank had run away too many times, that he needed to be sent to a place where he could mature and learn to accept things he may not like. So Judge Ruth sent him to me. And so far, he hasn't liked presenting as a girl, but he is accepting it nonetheless. And he's doing well in his studies, much better than his school records showed."
"Okay, Charlotte, you may stop walking the room. Put the book on the second shelf, in the empty slot, next to the Study doors. Then come and sit down, I received information about the boy who's arriving on Monday. And remember Charlotte. When you come into the Study, you'll take that book, balance it on your head and walk five times around the room without letting the book fall. And if it falls, your count starts over."
Charlotte didn't say anything as she walked over to the book shelves and placed the heavy book in the empty slot Jane indicated, before going over to her desk and sitting in the straight backed chair. Jane had watched as Charlotte replaced the book then walked over and sat down in that hated chair, sweeping the back of her dress forward and keeping her knees together. Jane also noticed her hands were laying in her lap, almost an exact duplicate picture of Charlotte when she was standing. If Jane had to guess, this was another 'ready' position when a person was sitting in a chair.
"The boy's name who lied about you, Charlotte, is Toby Camber. And it seems, based on the report from Judge Ruth, he's had a difficult life. When he was required to change into jail clothing, the guards saw his body was covered with scars, welts, and bruises. They also noticed burn marks, which appeared to be cigarette burns. The guards notified the medical people, who notified the Judge, who notified CPS, but Toby wouldn't say how he got the scars, burns, or bruises. And besides getting your name cleared, Charlotte, we have to discover the reason behind all the marks on that boy's body. He's fourteen, your age Charlotte, he's cocky, and arrogant, though I suspect that is only for show. That he's actually scared out of his mind, but because of what, is the question. Something else we must learn, Charlotte. Oh, look at the time. It's near supper. I'm going to take you to the kitchen and help Marie prepare supper. She'll explain everything she'll want you to do. She'll also show you how we set our table. Now, when I open the Study door, we put our 'game' faces on. I'm going to admonish you for disobeying me and acting like a petulant child, so Francis will understand you've been in the Study being punished. I want you to act as though you've been schooled, and only answer with 'yes Aunt Jane," so Francis believes I've gotten through that thick head of yours. Do you understand our scene?" Charlotte smiled and replied, "Yes Aunt Jane," then curtsied. Jane gave Charlotte a meaningful look before smiling and telling her, "Careful, girl. No ad-libbing in front of Francis."
The directed scene played out as Jane had planned, and she saw the concerned look on Francis' face as Charlotte followed Jane out of the Study. Jane then said, "Come along, Francis. It's time Charlotte learns what needs to be done in the kitchen to get ready for our meals." Charlotte waited for Francis, then took her hand, and the two girls followed Jane into the kitchen, not knowing Jane was pleased how Francis willingly accepted holding hands with Charlotte as the three walked to the kitchen.
When the three ladies entered the kitchen, Marie was in the process of washing the vegetables they'd be having for their supper. She looked up after hearing the kitchen door squeak open and saw Jane nod at her before saying, "Marie, Charlotte needs instruction on our kitchen routine for preparing meals. I trust you won't be too busy to help in that area?" This is the same routine the two women followed every time a new girl arrived at Seasons House, or Winsome Girls' School for Wayward Boys. The two women looked at each other knowingly, to which Marie replied, "Ah, a new girl! Come, come, let me have a look at you, mon chère (my dear.). Ah, so beautiful she is, no? Turn, turn so I can see all of you, mon chère (my dear.). Oh, Jane, she is magnifique, oui (beautiful, yes?)? And certainement, j'ai du temps (certainly I have time) to help this beauty learn about my kitchen." Both women saw a smile come to Charlotte's lips, then heard, "Merci, grand-mère. J'apprécie ton aide (Thank you, grandmother. I appreciate your help.)." Jane gave Marie a lifted eyebrow, before Marie said, "Ah, tu parles français (Ah, you speak French?)? Bon (Good,), it will save my having to translate some things for you. Now, Francis, if you will show..." And Charlotte said, "Charlotte," after Marie paused, looking at her. "Ah, Charlotte, a beautiful name for a beautiful girl. If you will show Charlotte how to properly set our table, I'll continue washing these vegetables to ready them for cooking. Go on, se presser, we have no time to waste."
As the two women watched, and with pride in Francis, Francis took Charlotte around the kitchen and explained the things they'd need to take out of the drawers and cabinets that would be placed on the table. She had Charlotte take four of the supper plates out of one cabinet, while she took four glasses out of another. She then told Charlotte to follow her, and the two girls left the kitchen for the dining room. When the two girls were out of earshot of Marie and Jane, Marie said, "It looks as though Charlotte has already had an effect on Francis. I haven't seen her this happy for some weeks. Have you explained what she must do while she is here, how she must allow you to scold her in front of the new boy, play along so we can learn why that boy lied?"
Jane nodded her head at Marie's words, before telling her friend, "I have, Marie. I've explained in detail what I expect of her if we are to get her name cleared. I've also told her what we know of Toby Camber, and what was found on him when he had to redress in other clothing. I'm worried, Marie. I'm worried because even if everything we try to make him trust us enough to open up to us, it might not be enough. He might be more afraid of the person who gave him those scars, welts, bruises, and cigarette burns, than of us." Marie laid a hand on Jane's arm and told her, "Have faith in yourself, Jane, and Charlotte. Together you both can prevail. Now, scoot. I have a meal to prepare." She kissed Jane on the cheek, causing Jane to smile before she left the kitchen and walked to the Study, where she could watch the girls as they set the table and helped Marie in the kitchen.
Jane sat at her desk in the study and turned on the monitor, before selecting the cameras in the dining room and kitchen. As she watched, and listened in on, the dining room, she heard Francis explain to Charlotte how it was determined who sat where and why. Then Francis explained how to properly place a plate so it was in the correct position for every place on the table. Francis demonstrated this by actually placing the plates, showing how far from the edge of the table it should be, and centered. Francis then picked up all the plates and demonstrated again, only to pick them up a second time and hand them to Charlotte. Jane watched as Charlotte placed the first three plates correctly, but mislaid the fourth plate, only to have Francis call her on it. Then Charlotte did something totally unexpected. As Francis was picking up the plates again, Charlotte looked up at the hidden camera and winked, then smiled. By that time Francis had all four plates and told Charlotte to lay them again, and mind what she was told. Jane sat back in her chair, chuckled, then said to herself, "Why that cheeky bastard. He knew that camera was there and where it was placed." She chuckled again, thinking to ask Charlotte later, and went back to watching the girls set the table.
This time, Francis' instructions were more elaborate, since each piece of silverware had to be placed just so, and in the correct order, and on the correct side of the plate. Francis showed Charlotte three times before handing the silverware to Charlotte and watched as she laid the pieces down. Jane chuckled again, as Charlotte deliberately mislaid the fourth setting, looked up towards the camera, as Francis was picking up all the silverware, and winked at Jane. Jane just shook her head, now intent in learning how Charlotte knew she was being watched. Jane saw Francis hand all the silverware to Charlotte, and this time, gave her instructions each time Charlotte laid a piece of silverware down on the table. Jane saw Francis had a big smile on her face, as she complimented Charlotte for doing a fine job with setting the table, before the girls went back to the kitchen. Jane sat back and reflected back to the time Francis was Charlotte, and she too had to reset the table several times before getting it right. See one, do one, teach one. It was the way of Jane's school.
Jane watched as Francis instructed Charlotte what to take out of what cabinet, and the fridge. They then went back into the dining room, and Charlotte was again shown where everything was placed. Francis repeated everything twice, then sat the items on the edge of the table and had Charlotte place them; she even goofed so she could again look into the camera and wink. "Cheeky bastard," was all Jane said to herself. Jane watched as the girls went back to the kitchen and Marie started showing Charlotte how to cut up the vegetables she was going to fix for their supper. Marie then had Charlotte cut up more of the vegetables and stood by in case she was needed. Once Marie was satisfied with Charlotte's work, she took Charlotte and the vegetables to the stove and started explaining how the vegetables could be cooked, how long they should be cooked if done one way, and how long if done another way. Marie then told Charlotte what to use for cooking the vegetables, whether plain water, seasoned water, butter, or cooking oil. While Marie started cooking one of the two vegetables she was fixing, she instructed Charlotte how to do the other vegetable, and watched her like a hawk. Which turned out to be unnecessary, as it looked as though Charlotte was no stranger to cooking. Jane chuckled, and Marie almost lost it, as the two watched Charlotte deftly flip the pan she was using to turn the vegetables over in the pan. Jane chuckled again as Marie asked, "Chère, where did you learn to do such a thing?" Charlotte shrugged her shoulders, something Jane would mention, and told Marie, "My Uncle taught me. He has his own restaurant, and has been a chef for the past twenty years. It's where I learned to cook and bake." Jane now downright laughed, at the expression on Marie's face. Here she was believing the new girl needed to learn how to cook, and the new girl already knows how to cook. Jane laughed even harder as Marie hung her head and shook it from side to side and said, "Oh mon Dieu (my God.)." While Marie was momentarily lost in her own world, Charlotte told her, "Grand-mère (Grandmother,), these are done." Marie's head snapped up, looked into the pan Charlotte was using and replied, "Oui, chère (Yes, dear,), they are. You've done a fine job, your Uncle would be proud." Jane almost fell out of her chair laughing, as Marie looked up into the hidden camera and shook a fist at her. It was entirely possible she and Marie would have a conversation later after the girls were in bed. Jane continued to laugh.
Jane watched as Marie switched from instructing Charlotte to telling her what was needed, and watched as Charlotte deftly did what Marie had told her without Marie's help. Without looking at the camera, Marie held up her fist once more, and shook it at the camera. Jane had to reach for a tissue to dry her eyes, she was laughing so hard. She schooled her face, though, when someone knocked on the study door. After saying "enter," she watched as the door opened and Francis walked into the Study, closing the door behind her. She went to the bookshelf by the study door, took out the heavy book, balanced on her head, and proceed to circuit the study five times. When circle five was finished, Francis replaced the heavy book in the bookshelf then walked to the desk and stood in front of Jane. "Excuse me, Aunt Jane, but supper will be ready in a few minutes. Tante Marie asked that you be informed."
Francis knew better than to leave before being dismissed, as she found out the hard way shortly after she'd arrived. Jane looked at Francis for a moment, noticing how much happier the girl seemed, before telling her, "Thank you, Francis. You may go."
Francis learned the hard way to say, "Thank you, Aunt Jane," before leaving Jane's presence.
One of two things happened at their meals. Either Jane admonished one of her girls the entire meal, or she used it to find out how much they learned from their lessons. This evening's meal was going to be devoted to learning how much Charlotte knew, and if Francis was learning what Jane intended from her lessons. It would be a learning experience for Jane and Marie as well. An unexpected lesson.
After they'd sat down to eat, Jane thought to throw Charlotte a curve by asking, "Alors Charlotte, parle-moi des cours que tu suivais."
Charlotte smiled and replied, "Voulez-vous que j'utilise le français, l'allemand ou l'espagnol pour vous parler de mes cours (Do you want me to use French, German or Spanish to tell you about my courses?)?" Jane couldn't smile, though she wanted to, as she thought to herself, 'That cheeky little bastard,' Jane thought to herself.
Jane tried to throw Charlotte another curve as she said, "Ich denke, Englisch wäre am besten, da Francis nur Englisch spricht (I think English would be best since Francis only speaks English.)." Marie, like Jane, spoke several languages, so had no trouble following the conversation between the two. And like Jane, she had trouble keeping a straight face because of Charlotte's responses.
And both were surprised again, as Charlotte smiled and replied, "Dann werde ich auf Englisch sprechen, damit Francis unser Gespräch verstehen kann (Then I will speak in English so that Francis can understand our conversation.)." Something must have caught in Marie's throat, as she started coughing, and picked up her glass of water and drank for a few moments. Actually, after Charlotte's response Marie almost lost it and laughed out loud, knowing Jane had been beaten at her own game.
When Marie got herself under control she looked at Jane, who sat mesmerized by what the two women had just heard. She lightly kicked Jane under the table, and when that failed to get Jane's attention, she kicked her harder. Jane responded just as though nothing happened, as she said to Charlotte, "So, Charlotte. Why don't you tell us about the classes you'd been taking at your old school. What class were you taking?"
Charlotte smiled at Jane before saying, "In my freshman year I was taking Algebra, Biology, History, English, Art, and PE. And up to the time I was arrested for allegedly being involved with those three boys in that shoplifting at Taylor's department store in the Mall, I had an 'A' average. Now," and her voice took on a saddened quality, "I guess that average no longer holds true." The minute she finished speaking, she bolted from the table and ran into the Library, closing the door behind her. It wasn't hard for Jane, Marie, and Francis to hear what she was doing in the Library, as her crying could be heard even with both Library doors closed.
Jane started to rise from the table, when Francis asked, "Aunt Jane, may I go instead?" Jane looked at Francis and saw a concern on the girl's face she'd not had up to the time Charlotte arrived.
Jane looked at Marie and saw the slight nod from her. "Of course, Francis. Go ahead," Jane said before sitting back down in her chair.
As the two women watched, Francis walked to the Library doors, knocked, and when she heard, "GO AWAY,"
She then said, "It's Francis, Charlotte. Please, may I come in?"
It was a few moments before all three heard, "Yes, you may come in Francis." Jane and Marie both let out a breath neither knew they had been holding, and almost at the same time, sighed. It was Jane who spoke first by saying, "I hope that was the right decision, Marie."
Marie patted Jane's arm and told her, "Our Francis has been a different girl since the arrival of our Charlotte, don't you agree? She is showing more concern for another than when she first came, non? And look at our cheri now. Risking your rage at wanting to take care of something you yourself would normally handle. C'est un gros changement, non ?"
Jane, still watching the Library doors, replied, "Oui mon ami. Oui…mon ami."
When Francis walked into the Library, she saw Charlotte curled up on the sofa sitting in one corner of the Library, facing towards the large double window. She walked over to the sofa, sat down next to Charlotte, reached over and pulled Charlotte to her. Charlotte let herself be pulled up, and latched onto Francis when Francis' arms went around her. Charlotte laid her head against Francis' chest and asked, "Why didn't Aunt Jane come? I thought for sure she'd be angry with me for the way I just acted?"
Francis smiled to herself before saying, "Because I asked to come instead of her."
Francis couldn't see the questioning look on Charlotte's face as she asked, "Why would you want to come instead of Aunt Jane? Won't you be in trouble for leaving the table without permission?"
Charlotte couldn't see the smile on Francis' face as the girl told Charlotte, "I asked to come instead of Aunt Jane because I was concerned about you. You've been there for me and showed me how it felt to have someone concerned about you. Before I came here, the only family that really cared about me was the Willows family. The rest only wanted the money CPS would send them. I sort of gave up caring about others when CPS wouldn't let me stay with the Willows. And no, I won't get in trouble for leaving the table. Aunt Jane said I could come. So, you want to talk about why you ran away and will now have to face Aunt Jane because you left the table without permission?"
Charlotte could feel Francis chuckling, so she lifted her head off Francis' chest, looked at her face, and asked, "You're really enjoying this aren't you?"
Francis then laughed out loud and said, "Yes I am. For once I won't be the one Aunt Jane gets mad at for leaving the table without permission. So, why all the crying?" Charlotte's influence on Francis had done more than show her how it feels when someone cares about her. Charlotte showed her not to let the other person off the hook when something was wrong and needed to be talked about. And unload Charlotte did.
She told Francis about everything that happened at Taylor's that day. Standing before Judge Ruth, and what Mr. Strom, CEO of Taylor's, said Taylor's was going to do if Judge Ruth didn't send him somewhere. About the three boys he was with in holding. And about his ruined grade average. But most of all, of missing his parents, and how they must be worried about him.
Francis just smiled after Charlotte stopped speaking, telling her, "Before you arrived, everything felt hopeless. I just went through the motions because Aunt Jane can be a devil of a woman if you make her mad, which I have done several times. But now, with you here, it doesn't feel hopeless. I feel like it's all really worth something, because of you. So please, don't give up on yourself. Understand, it will be all right in the end. And if your parents are as you say they are, I bet they aren't sitting around waiting for you to come home." Charlotte thought about everything Francis said, and realized she was right. She couldn't give up or give in to her current situation, she had to hold on until her name was cleared. And Francis was right about her parents. They weren't going to sit around on their butts and not try to find out why Charles had been implicated in the shoplifting incident at Taylor's. Someone's head was going to roll.
When Charlotte stopped crying it got quiet in the Library, which caused Jane to worry. She got up from the dining room table and went into the Study, turning on the monitor and changing cameras to the one in the Library. As she watched, she saw Francis being the one to comfort Charlotte, much like Charlotte had done to Francis. She also noticed that Francis wasn't letting Charlotte skirt around what was bothering her, as she kept steering Charlotte back to her original question. And when Jane heard everything Charlotte told Francis, her blood boiled that someone would do such a thing to an extremely sweet boy. She reached for her phone and made a phone call, and it wasn't to Judge Ruth.
"Hello, this is Jane Thompson. May I please speak to Jeb Thorton? Thank you, I'll hold."
"Hello, Ms. Thompson. Is Charles all right? He's not in any trouble is he?"
"Mr. Thorton, please, call me Jane. I don't believe we need to stand on formalities. We do have a common interest, after all. Charles is fine, and no, he isn't in trouble."
"Then, Jane, please call me Jeb. And I agree one hundred percent. That's good to hear about Charles. How is he doing, by the way? Judge Ruth explained your school to Lynn and myself, and at first I was shocked, then understood the reasoning behind what you do. I hope Charles hasn't given you any problems, um, by having a new experience."
"On the contrary, Jeb, he's been more than willing to go through the experience in order to clear his name of those false charges. Which is why I'm calling. Has your firm started an investigation into who's actually behind the shoplifting at Taylor's?"
"Interesting you should ask that question, Jane. Our investigators have found some rather interesting things, As they looked further into what they found, they uncovered even more. I don't think it wise to say what was found over the phone, but it's leading us to the ground floor. I will tell you this, we have shared our findings, and some important people were very interested in what we discovered."
"That's good to hear, Jeb. Charles did say you wouldn't sit on your, um, posterior until you discovered the truth."
Jane heard Jeb chuckle before he asked, "He said butt, didn't he Jane?"
It was Jeb's turn to hear Jane chuckle before she replied, "Yes, Jeb, he said butt. I was trying to be polite. I'm afraid I have to go, Jeb. If you would, please, keep me informed of your progress in this matter. I really do hate to see Charles go through all this just because of a lie. And Jeb. When the owner of the ground floor is exposed, would you please give that person my regards. In whatever manner suits you?"
Jane thought she'd lost the connection with Jeb, until he said with a growl in his voice, "Jane, when we discover who owns that ground floor, there are several people who will express their opinions of that person's actions. Please give Charles my love. And call again if you need me for anything. Do you understand? Anything!"
They said their goodbyes and both hung up their phones. Jane looked at the monitor again and saw how quiet both girls were as they sat on the sofa in the Library. She argued with herself for a few moments, then turned off the monitor and left the Study.
Charlotte had talked herself out, and she and Francis just held each other as they sat on the sofa. The quiet was broken when they heard a knock on the Library door and heard, "Charlotte. Francis. It's Aunt Jane. May I come in?"
Charlotte was hesitant to reply, until she saw Francis nodding her head. Charlotte took a deep breath, then said, "Yes, please, Aunt Jane."
When Jane entered the Library, and closed the door behind her, the first thing she noticed was the black streaks running down both girl's faces, caused by their crying. She also saw how they comforted each other in order to get through this very moment. She was very proud of Francis and how she thought of another's needs before her own. She pulled a chair over to the sofa and sat down in front of both girls, pondering how to approach them without causing either one to become hostile. It was the last thing they needed right now.
Jane let the silence linger a bit longer before she told Charlotte, "Charlotte, I believe I understand why you ran away from the table. But by the same token, you could have told me you needed to be alone for a few moments and asked to be excused. Still, I might have acted the same, had I been accused of something I didn't do, had my life turned upside down, pulled from my school and lost the chance to maintain my grade average, and not being able to be with your parents." Jane had to be careful how she put the next bit of information, or she'd give away the fact she'd spied on the girls. And as Jane often did, she fudged the truth. "I received a phone call from your father, Charlotte. He asked about you and how you were coping. And he sends his love."
Charlotte lifted her head off Francis' shoulder and asked Jane, "Did he say anything about investigating any of this mess? I know the last time I saw him he wasn't altogether happy."
"Yes, Charlotte, he has investigators trying to get to the bottom of this whole thing. And he's not, um," and Jane almost said 'not sitting on his butt,' but caught herself in time and finished with, "going to give up until he learns the truth." Even though she didn't show it, she was shocked by what she heard next.
"What are we going to do to get Charlotte's name cleared, Aunt Jane?" After asking her question, Francis just looked at Jane, expecting her to answer her question.
Jane thought to herself that Francis has come a long way in a very short amount of time, then said, "We, Francis? What do you mean by we? Are you expecting to help in some way, Francis?"
In the short time Francis had been with Jane, Jane had thought she'd seen every expression Francis could make. What she saw on Francis' face now was one expression she'd never seen. With a determined expression on her face, and in her voice, Francis told Jane, "Of course I do, Aunt Jane. I can't stand by and not help Charlotte get her name cleared. It would be shameful of me not to try and help." The last time Jane saw fire in Francis' eyes was because she was angry. Now that fire said determination, determination to help someone in need of help. And from what Jane could tell, Francis wasn't going to back down. Francis had indeed come a long way in such a short period of time.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Jane studied Francis a bit longer before she decided on a course of action, one she had to discuss with Marie. Jane then told the girls, "Girls, please excuse me for a moment. I'll be right back." Jane got up from her chair, turned and started walking to the library doors.
She hadn't taken more than four steps when Francis said, "Tante Jane, I know what you do here at Seasons House, and why." Jane had just taken half of her fifth step when she froze because of Francis' statement. She brought her back foot forward, turned and glared at Francis; Francis didn't need a translator to understand what Jane was now expecting from her. Francis took a deep breath before saying, "It was because of a punishment paper you had me write that I learned what I know. In researching the paper, I came across pictures of boys dressed as girls. I followed the references for the pictures and discovered why those boys were dressed as girls. It took only a moment for me to realize that I was one of those boys, a boy dressed as a girl. I also found under the reference for those pictures an explanation why those boys, why we were dressed as girls. And to tell you the truth, Tante Jane, I was glad I was here with you and Marie, because... um... I needed the two of you in the worst way. You see, Aunt Jane, after the murder of my parents, I was only happy when I lived with the Willows. They treated me like family, they were never upset when I asked questions, or made a comment, or expressed my opinions. That's not to say they were always happy with my comments or opinions, but they weren't nasty about it either. It wasn't that way when the Judge made me live with my other Aunts or Uncles. If my comment didn't agree with theirs, they'd verbally admonish me. Or, if my opinion didn't agree with theirs, I'd get backhanded across the face. I became jaded about people and the people like that Judge, and you and Marie have helped me see I was wrong in believing everyone was like those people." Francis then looked at Charlotte and said, "Even Charlotte showed me that there are good people out there who really care about me as a person."
Jane's glare had gone from a glare to one of amazement, since neither she nor Marie could ever get Francis to talk about her feelings. Now that Francis was thinking about someone other than herself, and was determined to help that friend, she felt at ease opening up to Jane. Jane slowly walked back to the chair she had occupied, sat down and told Francis, "Young lady, why did you wait until now to say all those things? You could have said those things to myself or Marie numerous times in the past. Why now?"
Francis smiled then looked at Charlotte. "Because, Tante Jane, Charlotte needs my help."
Jane could only marvel at the boy behind the clothes and makeup. He arrived sullen and sighted only on himself. Now, after being shown kindness by another boy he didn't really know, he was willing to forego himself for the other person. Jane was actually in a daze, something that hardly happened to her. Just then there was a knock on the library door, and Marie came into the library to make sure the girls were alright, and Jane hadn't done anything rash. Closing the door behind her, and taking one look at the girls, she chuckled and told them, "Girls, le look raton laveur does not suit two beautiful young ladies such as yourselves. Maybe you two should go undo le look raton laveur?"
Marie telling both girls they looked like raccoons shook Jane out of her daze, as both women heard Francis ask Charlotte, "Um, Charlotte. What did Tante Marie tell us?"
Charlotte laughed and told Francis, "Tante Marie said we look like raccoons. Come on, let's go fix our faces."
Charlotte pulled Francis up off the sofa, then asked, "May we be excused Aunt Jane so we can redo our faces?"
Jane just nodded her head until she realized what she'd been asked and that she was nodding her head. "Yes, you are excused to fix your faces. No young lady in my house is allowed to appear as a night time wild animal. Go...GO! But return here when you're ready to look decent."
Both girls giggled at Jane's dismissal, as it wasn't like her to almost sound happy. After the girls left, and Marie walked into the room and sat down on the sofa facing Jane, Jane asked her, "Did you hear all of that, everything Francis said? And it took Charlotte coming to us and her kindness towards Francis for the girl to stop thinking only about herself."
Jane saw the kind look in Marie's eyes, and heard Marie say, "Yes, chéri, I heard everything. That's why I came. You started to come and ask my opinion of telling Francis the whole truth of our house, but she beat you to the coup de poing, by revealing what she knew and why. And it was good for her to do that, chéri, for she told us things she'd kept to herself since coming here. Things we both knew she was holding back, because she didn't trust either of us enough due to her experiences. Kindness can have great beneficial effects if offered by the right person. And the right person is with us now. We have a plan on how to clear Charles Thorton's name, which includes Charlotte. Now, there are four who will work to clear his name. And we both know another who may offer help as well, if they aren't already doing so, n'est-ce pas?"
Jane smiled at Marie and told her, "Yes, that is so, my dear friend. Maybe we all could use something to drink while I make a phone call." Marie patted Jane's knee, got up off the sofa and left the library, heading to the kitchen. Jane followed Marie out of the library, but left the door open so the girls could see the library was vacant. She had a phone call to make to a certain Judge.
When Marie and Jane returned to the library, they saw the girls sitting on the sofa with immaculately made up faces. And both were smiling at the two women. Marie sat the tray she was carrying down on a small table near the sofa, and after she did so Jane said, "Francis. Please show Charlotte the proper way to serve tea." As Francis had done in showing Charlotte the proper way Seasons House's dining table was to be set, she did the same in showing Charlotte the proper way to serve tea. She explained first, then demonstrated twice, before having Charlotte do the same thing twice. Then she had Charlotte actually serve the tea to Jane, Marie, herself and Charlotte herself last.
Marie wasn't afraid to smile at Charlotte's deft ability to pick up things quickly, as she served exactly as Jane wanted. Jane, on the other hand, merely said, "Excellently done, girls. I'm proud of you both. Now..." and Jane replayed her conversation with Judge Ruth.
"Charlotte, do you remember an older man named George Strom, the CEO for Taylor's?"
Jane's question caused Charlotte to get her 'thinking' look on her face, before she asked, "He was the big shot who wanted to take me to Federal Court if I wasn't punished by Judge Ruth."
Jane nodded her head then said, "Yes, that's the man. Judge Ruth thought something wasn't right when Mr. Strom stood up in Court, out of turn, and made that declaration. Ruth also gave him a hefty fine for his outburst. Because Ruth felt something was going on with the man, she had her investigators start looking into the man's life. And so far they've hit nothing but gold. She wouldn't tell me what they'd found, for fear that the case soon to be brought against him would be thrown out of Court. She also contacted your parents, Charlotte, and found out your dad's firm had already started an investigation the minute you were sent to me." Jane took a sip of her tea before continuing. "And according to Ruth, your dad's firm has hit more than gold. They've struck diamonds, but what type of diamonds she again wouldn't say. Ruth did say the case against Mr. Strom would be stronger if a confession could be obtained from Toby Camber, the boy arriving on Monday. And that's where Marie and I need your help. Francis, you know what we will do to Toby after he arrives here at the house, you've experienced it yourself. Because you've been here the longest, I want you to be the good, obedient girl, who's learned the proper way to act. Charlotte, because you've been here the least amount of time, I need you to be the girl who is still acting your old way, whiny when something doesn't suit you, petulant, and in some cases defiant. I will give you a nod of my head when I want you to act in some manner to what I might have said. And Francis, I want you to correct Charlotte when the three of you are together, waiting for me or Marie to call either of you. Also, explain our ways to Toby, though I expect him to scoff at your instructions, which is good. Do you girls think you can do this? Can you act your hearts out?"
Jane and Marie watched as the girls looked at each other, before big smiles broke out on their faces. Still looking at each other, they said almost in unison, "Definitely Aunt Jane." Then Francis said, "If it helps clear Charles' name, definitely."
When the girls were again looking at Jane, she focused on Charlotte and said, "Charlotte, there will be times I force you to wear clothing that might be embarrassing to you, in order to make Toby think about his choices of actions and attitudes. Will you be able to tolerate those embarrassing times? Will you be able to work through those embarrassing moments and maintain the act?"
Charlotte's face took on an extremely serious look, before she said to Jane, "Aunt Jane, Tante Marie. You both have been nothing but kind to me the entire time I've been here, though strict when my mind wandered. I did volunteer to become a girl to help clear my name, and if I must endure being embarrassed, then I will endure the embarrassment. If it will help to clear my name."
Then Jane clapped her hands and said, "Bien, we have a plan. But now you two need to get ready for bed, we have our appointments at the salon tomorrow. Charlotte, Marie will attend to you, showing you how to thoroughly cleanse your face before you shower. Make sure to wear a shower cap, we don't want to spend time drying your hair. I will attend to Francis," and she looked at Francis and smiled before continuing with, "and make sure she still remembers everything that needs done. Go now, you both need your sleep."
When the girls stood up from the sofa, Jane wasn't expecting Francis to put her arms around her in a hug and whisper in her ear, "Thank you, Aunt Jane. For everything," before she and Charlotte left the library.
Marie saw the worried look on Jane's face and told her dear friend, "Chéri, they will do just as you ask. It may take time, but Toby will give us what we want. And perhaps Sandy can instill a measure of fear in the boy, she is rather good at that aspect."
Jane turned to her old and dear friend and told her, "Oh, Marie, I'm not worried about the girls, they've set themselves a goal and will achieve it. No, I'm worried about Charles' life after his name is cleared. Word will get out about the charges brought against him and even though his name is cleared, others will still think ill of him. How will he remake his life with this hanging over his head?"
Marie just smiled at Jane and said, "Dear, he just will. It's what makes him such a fine young man. His compass points in the right direction, and he follows it, and seems to always have done so. Let's not think about that time, yet. Let's think about Monday and the boy coming to us who started all this merde. Oui?"
Jane laughed out loud, then asked Marie, "You aren't upset by all this, are you Marie?"
Marie looked at Jane then asked, "Qu'est-ce qui t'a fait croire ça, chérie ?" Both women laughed, as they left their chairs and headed to the respective bedrooms.
Charlotte found it strange, yet nice, to sleep in a girls' nightie. The fabric was soft, yet somehow comforting to Charlotte. While the nightie only came down to almost below her panties, that fact didn't seem to bother Charlotte. It did take her some time before sleep became her friend, as her mind continued to provide possible ways to play the various scenes that would be playing out when Monday arrived. The last scene of her dream was of her time with her parents during a vacation to the mountains. but something didn't seem right, as the cliff they were standing on suddenly started violently shaking.
"Charlotte, il est temps de se lever. Nous avons le salon de coiffure aujourd'hui. Allez ma fille, dépêche-toi (We have the hair salon today. Come on girl, hurry up.)." Marie shook Charlotte again and said, "Allez ma fille, réveille-toi. Nous devons nous dépêcher (Come on girl, wake up. We must hurry.)."
In a slurred voice, Charlotte replied, "Tante Marie, encore cinq minutes. Je veux finir mon strongeau rêve (Aunt Marie, five more minutes. I want to finish my dream.)." Marie smirked, as she grabbed the edge of the covers near Charlotte's face, and abruptly pulled them to the foot of the bed. Charlotte let out a screech, before saying, "Not fair, Tante Marie. Not fair at all."
Marie just chuckled and told Charlotte, "Cheri, just be glad you are not one of our regular girls. It would have been much worse if you had acted as you just did. Our regular girls do what they're told when they're told. And any gémissements and their day starts on the wrong foot. Now, come, you must shower, do your face, and dress before breakfast. We are going to the salon today so you may experience what we girls do in such a mysterious place. Déplace-le! (Move it!)"
Charlotte chuckled then said, "Yes Aunt Marie," and got out of bed.
Marie sat in the chair which always held the robe when a new girl came to Seasons House. She watched as Charlotte selected matching panties and bra, opened the closet door, took the robe hanging on a hook on the inside of the closet door, and went into the bathroom to shower. "And cheri, don't bother washing your hair, they will do that at the salon. Just wear the cap as you shower."
Marie smiled as she heard, "Yes, Tante Marie." Charles Thorton was indeed a boy to be proud of, Marie thought to herself, as she too thought of the things Toby was going to experience while in Winsome Girls' School for Wayward boys. Things that were going to test the young man to his limits. And she just smiled.
Much like the noon and evening meals, Francis showed Charlotte how to set the dining room table for breakfast. And as she did for the evening meal, she set the table twice, showing Charlotte how it was to be done, before having Charlotte do it herself. Because of the little differences between the evening meal and breakfast, Charlotte caught on much faster. Once the girls were finished setting the table they went into the kitchen to help Marie prepare breakfast, again with Francis showing Charlotte what they needed to do. Once everything was ready, the girls each carried two trays to the dining room table as Marie carried the one tray with fruit bowls and muffins on it. Because of their upcoming new girl, Jane again covered the plan they agreed to, making sure the girls knew their parts in what would be an interesting play. A play meant to elicit a confession from Toby Camber. Jane then went on to talk about the salon, mostly to Charlotte, letting her know what would be done and by whom. And to let her know not to take anything from Sandy, one of the owners of Marisha Charlet. Jane looked at Marie after telling Charlotte about Sandy, and both women smiled at each other, knowing what Sandy would try to do with Charlotte. Only to receive better than she gave.
Breakfast over, dishes done and the kitchen straightened, both girls returned to their bedrooms to attend to their teeth and faces, before returning downstairs and led by Jane, out to Jane's car. As they drove Jane asked, "How did you sleep last night, Charlotte? The clothing you wore may have seemed strange, but if we are to give a stellar performance, our characters must remain in character at all times."
Charlotte just chuckled, then said, "Aunt Jane. You could have just asked how I felt sleeping in the nightie. It felt strange at first, but became rather comforting after a while. And I dreamt about my parents, and one of the vacations we took."
Jane just humphed, then said, "Such a petulant child. That's good Charlotte. Something said like that will cause me to get upset with you but not overly angry. Something that can be verbally corrected and made known isn't to happen again."
Charlotte nodded her head, and replied with, "Backtalk without being snarky. I understand Aunt Jane." Then Charlotte said, "I have a question, Aunt Jane, concerning Sandy."
Jane was interested in what question Charlotte wanted to ask about Sandy, so she told Charlotte, "Ask your question Charlotte," and waited.
"You said Sandy might try to play me," Charlotte began, "embarrass me, make fun of how I'm dressed. How much am I allowed to turn the tables on her?"
Jane laughed out loud before telling Charlotte, "My dear child. You may do anything short of being rude or vulgar. And make sure I'm within hearing when you attack. It should be rather interesting to see the worm turn for a change."
They arrived at the salon earlier than their appointed time, and could see no one but Carolyn and Sandy by the reception desk. They entered the salon, and were greeted by Sandy. "Welcome ladies, as you can see Carolyn and I are free to start on these two lovely ladies right away." She looked at Charlotte and asked, "So you're Charlotte? My you are a pretty thing. How do you like being a young lady so far?" Charlotte could feel the compassion radiating from Carolyn, while it wasn't hard to miss the predatory look on Sandy's face. The woman oozed of mischief. Charlotte got the same feeling from her as he got from James Conner, and hoped it didn't come down to another hospitalization. Jane saw Charlotte staring at Sandy, and observed Charlotte's hands once again going through that rhythmic pattern, stopping with her hands folded in front of her. Sandy's smile grew wider, she even licked her lips.
Jane knew Sandy could get overly excited when she had a new girl at the salon for the first time. She reveled in humiliating the new girl, threatening to expose the boy dressed as a girl, if that new girl didn't act like she was enjoying the experience. Only this time, Jane saw something more on Sandy's face, something that said Sandy was going to try and do more with Charlotte than just humiliation and embarrassment. Something that could get Sandy hurt, so she acted. "Sandy, dear girl. Whatever thoughts you have about Charlotte best be put out of your mind. She quite handedly put a man half again her size in the hospital with a broken collar bone and both bones in his right forearm. You do not possess the necessary skills to take this one on, mentally or physically. So I suggest you get to know our Charlotte and style her hair to suit her facial features. The one you want will be here Monday." Jane had been using Marisha Chalet long enough to read the faces of both women. Sandy's face was telling Jane, 'fuck you Jane Thompson, I'll do what I want.' Jane sighed and just shook her head. Some lessons had to be learned the hard way, as Sandy was about to find out.
Carolyn could feel the tension building between Sandy, Jane, and Charlotte, and diffused it with, "Charlotte, come with me and will get started waxing you."
It didn't escape Carolyn's hearing, or Janes, as Sandy muttered, "Shit."
When Carolyn and Charlotte reached the waxing booth, Carolyn opened the door and let Charlotte enter first, before following her and closing the door behind her. When she turned to face Charlotte she could see Charlotte was alert and waiting, but waiting in a way Carolyn recognized. "Charlotte, I'm not Sandy. I have no intention of hurting you on purpose, though waxing can sting, but that's its nature. So, please, relax. And let's talk. Okay?" Charlotte saw the sincerity on Carolyn's face, and did relax, sitting down next to Carolyn where the woman indicated. Charlotte never reacted as Carolyn said, "Charlotte, I know you're a boy who is staying with Jane and why you're there. She also told me, and I told Sandy, you volunteered to present as a girl in order to try and clear your name. Very few of the boys who arrive at Jane's school get the choice of not becoming a girl, that alone makes you very special. I need to ask something of you and I hope you'll give me your word of honor on it. Sandy can get a bit crazy when a new girl arrives at Jane's and is brought here for the first time. Please, if she tries to get physical with you, try not to break anything. She would go stir crazy if she couldn't come here every day we're open."
Carolyn saw the smirk form on Charlotte's lips, and heard, "I give you my word of honor, I will try not to break anything. I do possess the knowledge to disable for an extended period of time, and if necessary, she may end up without the use of one of her arms for the rest of the day. It would be good to caution her before she starts on my hair."
Carolyn knew Sandy would be furious not being able to use both arms the rest of the day, but at least nothing would be broken. "Fair enough, Charlotte. Let's get you waxed, okay? Have you ever been waxed before? I know some boys do have it done, that's why I asked." When Charlotte shook her head, Carolyn then explained what would be done. She also told Charlotte it would sting as the wax was quickly removed, but she would then apply a lotion which would lessen the pain. "AND," Carolyn almost shouted, "should you need something to drink, say so. I don't need you passing out from dehydration." She also told Charlotte, "After we get you waxed, I'm going to glue breast forms onto your chest, so you won't have to use those inserts Jane has been having you use." When Charlotte was about to say something, Carolyn held up her hand and told her, "Don't worry. They can be removed without any problems. I'd like you to go behind that screen," and she pointed to a privacy screen placed in the corner of the room, "and completely undress. Wrap one of the towels your'll find behind that screen around you before coming out." Carolyn chuckled at the look on Charlotte's face and answered it with, "Yes, I will see everything on your body as you're being waxed. If you'll just relax everything will be fine. Go, get undressed." Carolyn chuckled again as Charlotte shrugged her shoulders before walking behind the screen.
Carolyn kept up a steady stream of questions, trying to learn more about Charlotte, her family, school, and plans after school. When Charlotte finally came out from behind the screen, she had a towel wrapped about her waist, something Carolyn explained by saying, "Right now! You can get away with that towel wrapped around your waist as a boy, but girls wrap towels around their chests to cover their breasts, which you'll have to remember after you receive your own breasts." As Carolyn watched, Charlotte shifted the towel so it was wrapped around her chest, just high enough to cover her breast if she had any of her own. What Charlotte didn't know was as she shifted the towel, she exposed her groin until she had the towel wrapped around her again. Carolyn decided she didn't need to know that at the moment.
Carolyn had Charlotte get up on the table and lie on her stomach, before removing the towel. She had Charlotte place her hands under her chin, then turn her head so her head was resting on her hands. She then told Charlotte, "Okay, Charlotte. I'm going to start on the back of your right leg. The wax will be hot but not scalding hot. I'll then put a cloth strip over the wax, let the wax cool, then quickly pull the cloth strip and wax off together. Are you ready?"
Charlotte laughed, then said, "Miss Carolyn, whether or not I'm ready, you're still going to wax that leg and the rest of me. This will be an experience I may never forget."
Carolyn decided to do a small patch first, just to see how well Charlotte tolerated the pain. She was rather shocked, as she pulled the cooled wax off that patch that Charlotte remained silent. Worried, Carolyn asked, "Charlotte, are you all right? Should I continue or do you want to stop for a moment?"
Charlotte chuckled, yet again, and told Carolyn, "I've been punched during some of my training that hurt much worse than what you just did. To me, what you're doing isn't painful, just a bothersome sting. And you better continue, I don't think Jane would like me to have only one bald spot on my legs."
Carolyn laughed before saying, "No she wouldn't Charlotte. Okay, here we go." When all of Charlotte's backside had been waxed, Carolyn had her turn over onto her back, placing a small towel over her groin for modesty, and again started on her legs before moving higher on her body.
Carolyn was giving Charlotte's face a long look until Charlotte asked, "Why are you eyeing me like a piece of meat on a plate?"
Carolyn shook herself, chuckled, then said, "Oh, sorry. I was studying your eyebrows, trying to decide how much to remove to give your eyebrows a more feminine look." She then took one finger and, tracing Charlotte's eyebrows, said, "I think if I remove hair here and here you will look much better." Charlotte felt Carolyn trace a line above and below both eyebrows, and because she couldn't see how she would look afterwards, Charlotte decided to just let what would happen, happen. Hair grows back, right? "Okay, Charlotte, I need you to close your eyes, so we don't remove any of your lashes. They are pretty the way they are."
This time, waxing her eyebrows to shape them, had an entirely different effect on Charlotte. Maybe it was because she'd closed her eyes, maybe it was because of the experience of waxing. Whatever the true reason, Charlotte felt completely relaxed as Carolyn waxed her eyebrows. In fact, Charlotte was almost asleep when Carolyn told her, "There, that looks much better. You're going to really knock them dead." Carolyn stood checking her work and noticed Charlotte hadn't said anything because of her comment. She also noticed Charlotte was breathing deeper than she had been. Then it hit her, the girl was asleep. She gently shook Charlotte and said, "Charlotte, honey, wake up, I've a question you need to answer."
"Hmm... what... a... question? Whoa, I must have fallen asleep. Sorry Carolyn, I just felt so relaxed as you did my eyebrows."
Carolyn laughed, then gently stroked Charlotte's left cheek and said, "That's all right, dear. You're the first of Jane's boys who've ever fallen asleep on me while being waxed. And the first one who hasn't moaned and groaned while being waxed. But yes, I've a question for you." And Carolyn moved slightly to her left and pointed to Charlotte's groin. "I know no one is going to see your groin but you and possbly Jane and Marie, that you've already learned. I can do two things to your groin, if you want, so that you look more feminine down there."
As Carolyn watched, Charlotte put her 'thinking' face on and thought back to everything she'd read about Petticoat Punishment when she was doing the paper on behavior for her Human Sexuality class. She remembered something bout 'tucking' but nothing more, so she asked Carolyn, "From the reading I've done, there's something called 'tucking,' but what else can you do to make me look more feminine down there? What would you do if I were a real girl?"
Carolyn had a questioning look on her face and asked Charlotte, "Where did you read bout 'tucking?' Boys who come to Jane never have a clue how they can appear more feminine by 'tucking' their penis back between their legs." Charlotte then explained the paper she had to write for her Human Sexuality class, and how she came across references to behavior modifications. And when she followed the references, came across articles bout Petticoat Punishment. And how 'tucking' hides a boy's penis so he has a more feminine appearance. Carolyn was nodding her head after Charlotte finished her explanation. "Jane said you were a special boy. Now I see why. You already knew what was going to happen before it even happened. And maybe that's part of the reason you fell asleep just now. Yes, 'tucking' is one method to hide your 'little boy,' but there is another method that's temporary and can be reversed without any problems. Using that method, you won't have to keep 'retucking' yourself every time you take your panites off or pull them down to pee. As to what do real girls have done? It varies from girl to girl. Some girls want to be completely hairless, so they shave their groin. Some want just a small patch of hair, and some want small patches of hair that are heart shaped. And some have a narrow patch of hair, and ask the sides to be waxed. You, though, aren't going to be showing your patch of hair to a lover, so maybe we should temporarily hide your 'little boy' and shape what hair you do have?"
Carolyn again watched as Charlotte thought about what she was just told, and heard her mutter, "In for a penny, in for a pound," before Charlotte told her, "If I'm going to do this right, then I need to look as feminine as possible down there. Hide my...little boy, and shape what hair I do have. You did say hiding my penis can be reversed, and hair does grow back, right?"
Carolyn nodded her head and replied, "Yes, I did say it can be easily reversed. And yes, hair will grow back. You just lie there and I'll be back in a moment."
Charlotte watched as Carolyn picked up a large towel and draped it over her body, telling her, "So you don't get too chilled," before leaving the room. Jane saw Carolyn coming out of the waxing room, caught her eye, and saw Carolyn just nod her head, telling Jane Charlotte was going the route the two women had discussed. Jane only smiled. It wasn't long before Carolyn returned to the waxing room carrying a small box and a small tube of adhesive. She smiled at Jane before opening the door and going inside.
Charlotte's questions, in her mind, started the moment Carolyn came back into the room carrying a small box and a small tube. She watched as Carolyn sat everything down on the small table opposite the tble she was lying on. Then her questions escaped her mind and she asked, "What's in the box? And what is in the tube?"
Before Carolyn answered Charlotte's questions, Charlotte watched as Carolyn took a pair of disposable gloves out of a box of gloves lying on the same table. After putting them on, Carolyn pointed to the small box and said, "I'll show you what's in here in a moment. As to what's in the tube? It's surgical adhesive, used by doctors to close wounds and used with stitches to keep infections at bay. I'll use it to hide your penis, and in a few weeks, the glue will wear off. So if you're here very long, we'll have to hide your 'little boy' again in a few weeks. Now, I want you to just relax as much as possible. This time, you may experience some pain, but it won't last. And it may seem strange at first, but you will soon adjust to the feeling. And remember. When you pee you will have to sit down, or you'll make a big mess."
Charlotte laughed at Carolyn's last comment. "Carolyn, with all I have to wear, sitting to pee isn't an option." Carolyn laughed with Charlotte, before she removed the towel covering her body and the towel covering her groin. "Okay, here we go," was all Carolyn said, as Charlotte laid back and concentrated on what she felt as Carolyn went to work on her groin. She did wince at one point, even emitting a small cry, but otherwise endured what Carolyn was doing to her groin. It wasn't long before Carolyn said, "There. All done. Now let's do something with your hair."
Charlotte lifted her head to look at her groin, only to see that her penis was nowhere to be seen. She laid her head back down and said, "If only mom could see me now." Carolyn just smiled as she went to work on what hair Charlotte had on her groin. Charlotte didn't try to watch what Carolyn was doing, but heard an electric clipper running for a few moments, before feeling the heat from the wax being applied.
What she wasn't expecting was the pain that shot up her body to her brain, as Carloyn pulled the cloth and wax off. "Yiiiii...please tell me you left some skin down there?"
Carolyn felt bad and chuckled at the same time, telling Charlotte, "I'm sorry, Charlotte. I should have told you this part might really hurt. Your groin region is much more sensitive than the rest of your body. And yes, you still have skin down there. Okay, here we go again." More wax was applied, another strip of cloth was applied, but Charlotte was ready this time, and only hissed as the cloth and wax were removed. As Carolyn had previously done, she rubbed the lotion into Charlotte's skin where she'd removed hair, causing the stinging/burning feeling to subside.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
"How're you doing, kiddo?" Carolyn asked Charlotte, as she stripped off the disposable gloves and threw them into a trash can under the table where the box of disposable gloves lay.
Charlotte laughed, then told her, "Well, I only have your word that I still have any skin left down there, but strangely, it feels rather interesting. A bit airy, but interesting. In fact, my whole body feels a bit airy, and not in a bad way. Is this how a girl really feels after something like this?"
Carolyn had picked up the small box off the table when Charlotte asked her question. Still holding the small box, she turned to face Charlotte, then said, "Well, I can't speak for other girls, but when I get waxed, it does. And it feels nice, doesn't it?"
Charlotte nodded to answer Carolyn's question, then nodded her head toward the box and asked, "So, now you're going to show me what's in the box?"
Carolyn smiled and said, "I'm going to do more than show you, my dear. I'm going to put them on you, with an adhesive that can't be removed unless a solvent is used. Unlike the surgical adhesive, these will stay on for as long as needed. They won't be falling off when you least expect it." Carolyn then took the breast forms out of the box, showing them to Charlotte before explaining the steps involved in putting them on her. And this time, Charlotte's help would be needed, as she helped hold the forms in place until the adhesive set up.
Charlotte tried to hold her head up so she could watch what Carolyn was doing, only to be told to lie flat so she could get the placement correct. She didn't have to watch Carolyn work, because Carolyn explained each step as she went along. Charlotte then felt the adhesive applied to the right side of her chest; it was slightly colder than room temperature. Then the breast form set in position, then Carolyn told her, "Okay, give me your right hand." Charlotte lifted her right arm, then felt Carolyn take her arm at the wrist and place her hand just so, before telling her, "Okay, press down slightly, and don't move your hand." Charlotte felt adhesive applied to the left side of her chest, before the breast form was set in place and she was told to give Carolyn her left hand. "Now all we need to do is wait for a few minutes until the adhesive has dried. Meanwhile, tell me about the boy coming on Monday," Carolyn said as she sat down in the one chair in the room.
Jane had already spoken with Carolyn about Toby, and the plan she, Marie, and the girls had in place to, hopefully, get Toby to confess that he'd lied about Charles Thorton's, aka Charlotte, involvement in the shoplifting at that Taylor's department store. But Carolyn knew any information she could get about a boy coming to Jane's school would help her and Sandy in how they treated that boy when they first came to the salon. "Well," Charlotte began, I really can't tell you much about him. I only saw him in the holding cell, and from what I saw, he was really scared but trying to act tough. And his being scared wasn't because he was in jail, it was something more. Like he was afraid of someone or someones. After the short time I've been with Jane, he's going to crack like an egg the first time she gives him her look that peels flesh off the bone." Charlotte laughed, then said, "And then maybe we'll learn why he lied about me."
Carolyn then saw the tears drip out of Charlotte's eyes, reached for a tissue from the box on the table, and walking over to Charlotte, gently wiped the tears away. "Oh, baby. It's going to be all right, you'll see. We'll get your name cleared, then you can be with your family again. You lie there and hold those forms and I'll be right back."
This time when Carolyn left the room she was the one to catch Jane's eye, and it wasn't hard for Jane to see the anger in the woman's face. Carolyn walked over to Jane and told her in a low voice, "I'm going to get something to repair some makeup, Charlotte got upset talking about Toby. If you girls aren't able to put the fear of God in that boy, and get him to talk, I'll turn Sandy loose on him. We may have to clean the chair off afterwards, but he will know the fear of God when she's through with him. And I'll make sure the shop is full of my regulars when you bring him in." Like the determined look Jane had seen on Francis' face, a look Jane had never seen on Francis, Jane saw a feral smile form on Carolyn's face. A smile Jane had never seen before. Jane understood why she was seeing that smile, Carolyn felt angry because someone had put Charlotte in her current situation. And that someone was going to pay for their mistake.
When Carolyn returned to the waxing room, she had Charlotte remove her hands and tested to make sure the adhesive had set up, before having Charlotte sit up and turn so she was sitting on the edge of the table. It didn't even occur to Charlotte that she was sitting there completely naked, as Carolyn began cleaning off her face before reapplying her makeup. "So, how are you feeling after your first waxing and tuck and boob job?"
Only then did Charlotte realize she was completely naked, and sitting in front of Carolyn, as Carolyn reapplied her makeup. "Um, well, I must be doing all right, since I'm sitting here, completely naked, in front of you, and not acting embarrassed for you to see me naked. Which I find rather strange."
Carolyn chuckled, as she put the last coat of mascara on Charlotte's lashes, then said, "That's because you are no longer a naked boy sitting in front of me, with your boy parts showing. All I see is a beautiful naked young lady sitting in front of me. And in a moment, I'll let you see her too."
Carolyn stood back, took Charlotte's chin, turned her head left then right, then said, "There, that's got you back to Jane's standards. Hop off the table and meet your new self." Carolyn then walked over to what looked like a full length cabinet, opened the cabinet door, revealing a full length mirror.
She then stood back and watched as Charlotte just stood looking at herself in the mirror. She turned sideways in one direction then the other. She ran her hands over her now smooth body. She even explored her groin, pulling on the folds of skin she saw. "Wow, so this is what a young girl actually looks like? I've just seen pictures of girls in bikinis but never completely naked."
In the reflection of the mirror, Charlotte saw the look Carolyn had on her face, which Charlotte interpreted as trying to make a decision. She was right in her interpretation as Carolyn told her, "You breathe a word of what I'm about to do and I'll make sure Sandy knows you're a pervert who made a play for me. You read me, MISTER?"
It wasn't hard for Charlotte to see how serious Carolyn was right at that moment. She turned to Carolyn and said, "You have my word of honor not to say anything to anyone."
As Charlotte watched, Carolyn started to undress, until she was completely naked. She then stood next to Charlotte as they both faced the mirror, letting Charlotte compare her new body to her own. She didn't even flinch as Charlotte bent down to look at her groin, before looking at her own groin. Then Charlotte chuckled before saying, "If anyone saw me down there, they wouldn't think me anything but a girl. I know this might be strange to say, but seeing me like this," and she waved her hand from head to toe, before finishing with, "I feel different. I feel vulnerable. Is this normal, Carolyn?"
Carolyn was getting dressed as Charlotte asked her question. She thought for a minute, then said, "It can be for some girls, Charlotte. Some haven't developed a good sense of self confidence yet. Some never do. And some see what they have as an asset, and use it for all they can get. Then there are those who have a good grasp of their self worth, and what they see in the mirror doesn't bother them. This," and she waved her hand in front of Charlotte, "is all new to you. So it might make you feel different for a time. But you're still the same person inside you always were, and don't let what you see now change that. When Jane takes you out shopping, you will attract a lot of attention from the boys, you're too beautiful like this to ignore. Keep your wits about you, don't forget what you know about protecting yourself. And don't be afraid to protect yourself if some asshole hasn't learned to keep his hands to himself. A girl can get away with kicking the shit out of some guy who thinks he's an octopus. Now, here," and Carolyn picked up the bra lying on the table and handed it to Charlotte. "The bra you were wearing will be too small for the forms I glued to your chest. And don't be surprised when you get back to Jane's house if you find all your bras have been replaced with this bra size. Go ahead and get dressed, I'll let Sandy know you're ready to have your hair done. Come out when you're ready."
She then walked over to Charlotte, turned Charlotte to face her, kept her hand on Charlotte's shoulders, then said, "Sandy and I will help get your name cleared. That boy will either eventually tell Jane the whole truth, or Sandy and I will get him to spill his guts. Either way, he will recant his story, and get your name cleared." Carolyn saw the tears in Charlotte's eyes, and told her, "You let those tears fall and we'll have to redo your face." She then pulled Charlotte into a hug, and held her until she stopped shaking. "It will be all right, sweetheart. Trust me on that." Carolyn felt Charlotte nod her head, before she broke the hug then shooed Charlotte to get dressed.
When Charlotte walked out of the waxing room, it wasn't hard for Jane to see she'd been upset. Sandy was finishing up with Francis, so Jane motioned for Charlotte to come sit beside her. "Are you all right, Charlotte? You look a bit upset. It's not because of something Carolyn did or said, is it?"
Charlotte shook her head at Jane's last question, then said, "We were just talking while the adhesive for my breasts set up and I told Carolyn about Taylor's. I got upset when I told her about Toby. Why Aunt Jane? Why do people do things like that? I never even knew someone was stealing anything in that store until James put his hand on my shoulder. I never even saw those three boys. And yet, they accused me of being involved with the theft. And here I am, presenting as a girl, a beautiful girl, from what all of you have told me." Charlotte laughed then said, "And I even have breasts that match my age. Imagine, the only thing I wanted a few days ago was to buy my mom a present for her 35th birthday. And now I'm about to get my hair done in a beauty salon." Charlotte turned her head so she was looking at Jane and asked, "Aunt Jane. Do you think I was supposed to go through all this not just to help clear my name, but for some other purpose? This all seems a bit surreal just to be something to clear my name."
In that instant after Charlotte asked her last question, Jane pictured in her mind Toby hung by his wrist, and her standing behind him with a cat-o-nine tails, swinging them in Toby's direction and hearing him cry as they hit his body, demanding he tell the truth about Charles Thorton. She mentally shakes herself then tells Charlotte, "Sweetheart, people do things like this for a variety of reasons. And sometimes their actions cause the innocent to suffer, or profit, from getting caught in the middle. Why Toby wanted to cause you harm, we must wait to see if he will tell us his reason. It did him no good, he was caught stealing and placed in jail, and sent to me. He is, though, going to have an experience such as he's never known, one, I hope, puts his life on a different path. As to your last question, that is difficult to answer. No one can know the grand scheme of things, it's too big. All we can do is take with us the experiences we encounter and hopefully allow them to guide us further in our lives. Very few young men will ever experience what it's like to be a young lady in this world. While it isn't something you wanted to do, you are now getting to see life from a different perspective. To be a bit vulgar about it, you are now the piece of meat the lions would like to devour. And hopefully when you leave me you'll have an appreciation how not to treat the opposite sex, because you saw and experienced how they are actually treated. Sandy is finished with Francis, it's your turn now. And remember your promise to me." Noises from the back room caught Jane's attention. Noises that were anything but happy. Jane patted Charlotte's knee, stood up and walked to the back room, opening the door and closing it behind her after entering.
Charlotte looked up when Sandy said, "Okay, sissy boy, your turn." Once again, Charlotte saw the feral grin on Sandy's face, a look that put Charlotte on guard. Charlotte got up out of the chair, walked over to face Sandy's station, and stopped in front of the stylist's chair. "Well, sissy boy, what are you waiting for? Get your ass into this chair," and Sandy pointed to the chair in front of her. When Charlotte didn't move Sandy growled, "If you don't sit your ass down in this chair I'll drag you outside and let the whole world see the new sissy boy for itself. NOW SIT DOWN!"
Sandy didn't recognize Charlotte's ready position, her hands down in front of her, one hand over the other, her weight balanced on both feet. She studied Sandy for a moment, before telling her, "Any attempt of physical violence on your part and I will defend myself. Any attempt to grab me and I will defend myself." Charlotte saw how red Sandy's face had gotten since she had spoken, and she saw it even before Sandy moved. Sandy came around from behind the chair and reached her left arm towards Charlotte, before screaming, "GET YOUR ASS IN THIS CHAIR!!" Quicker than Sandy could blink, Charlotte had captured Sandy's wrist and elbow, pushing her wrist backward and pulling forward on Sandy's elbow.
Jane was in the back room with Carolyn, trying to console the woman after she heard Charlotte's story. "Jane, I just want to strangle that boy because of what he's done to Charles. Charles is exactly what you try to get your boys to realize. Oh, I just wa..." Carolyn never gets to finish what she was going to say, as both women hear Sandy screaming at Charlotte, then hear her screaming in pain. They both rush out of the back room and find Charlotte holding Sandy's left arm with both of her own hands. Sandy is kneeling on the floor, screaming because Charlotte is holding Sandy's wrist and pushing it backwards. Jane barks an order which Charlotte ignores at first, "CHARLOTTE! LET GO OF SANDY'S WRIST, NOW!!" Jane sees that Charlotte is locked onto Sandy, watching her in case she does something else. Jane barks twice more before she finally gets through to Charlotte, who immediately releases Sandy's left arm and steps back two paces, again taking up her ready stance.
Sandy is now holding her left wrist, then sees Jane and Carolyn standing there. "YOU GET THAT FUCKING PIECE OF SHIT OUT OF HERE RIGHT NOW. GET THAT PRICK OUT OF HERE OR I SWEAR I'LL TELL THE WHOLE WORLD WHAT YOU DO UP THERE, THOMPSON"
Jane calming walks over to where Sandy is kneeling on the floor, reaches down and grabs Sandy's chin, lifts it until she is staring into Sandy's eyes, then calmly tells her, "You tell the whole world what I do, and you'll be included in it as well. You won't get away scott free because I have dozens of witnesses who WILL testify on my behalf that you were also involved. How do you think you'll fare behind bars, Sandy? And should you decide to go through with your threat, I know people who can make you disappear without so much as a trace. Your body will never be found. No trace of you will be left." Jane let go of Sandy's chin, stood, turned and asked Francis, "Francis, what happened here?"
Francis then repeated, vertatum, what happened. Leaving nothing out. Jane turned back to the still kneeling Sandy and asked her, "Weren't you listening when you were explicitly told not to physically attack Charlotte? Did it not register with you at the time? And now, because you tried to grab Charlotte, you're kneeling on the floor with a hurt wrist. All because you saw fresh meat and just had to do things your own way."
Carolyn then looked down at her friend and told her, "It seems to me Sandy, because of how you just acted, you caused the problem and should be the one leaving. But we can't do that, I can't run this place without you. But sometimes you go too far, cause too many problems because you DON'T listen. Oh, and have you given any thought what would happen to me if you opened your mouth about our business with Jane? You think you'd be alone in that jail cell? I'm part owner of our salon, so I'd get half the blame for what we do for Jane." Carolyn crossed her arms under her breasts then humphed.
Charlotte knew she hadn't pressed Sandy's hand that far back to cause her that much pain. She pressed her hand back far enough to only maintain control of Sandy. Something else was wrong with that wrist. As Carolyn and Jane watched, Charlotte walked over to where Sandy was still kneeling and knelt in front of her. Causing Sandy to flinch backward a bit. "Please, give me your hands, Sandy," Charlotte said in a soft voice. Sandy eyed the girl, then looked at Jane then Carolyn, seeing the glares coming from both women. Hesitantly, she extended her arms until her hands were directly in front of Charlotte, who gently took both of Sandy's hands and proceeded to compare the joints between the forearms and the hands. Charlotte then gently felt each joint, causing Sandy to wince when Charlotte felt a spot on Sandy's left wrist. "Have you been in an accident in the past? Or has someone twisted your arm? The bone right here," and Charlotte pointed to a place on the back of Sandy's left wrist, "is out of place and may have been for some time. You've had trouble using your left hand, haven't you?"
Sandy was now giving Charlotte a questioning look, wondering how this prissy boy could know anything about her wrist. Or guess about her arm being twisted. She looked at Carolyn, who nodded her head, before Sandy told Charlotte, "I was in a bad relationship several years ago. He came home drunk one night and started in on me. At one point he had my arm twisted up behind my back, and that hand hasn't been the same since. How do you know all of this about bones? You learn it in school, or something?"
As Sandy was talking, Charlotte had been manipulating Sandy's left wrist, which caused her to wince when a sudden 'pop' was heard. "There, see if that doesn't feel better. And to answer your question. Yes I learned about bones and their placement in school. At a University near my home. Because of my grades I was granted a special dispensation to take a semester of Anatomy and Physiology. Plus, in the training I had been taken, until this mess happened, it's sometimes necessary to pop something back into place, if you get hit too hard during sparring. How's your wrist feeling now?"
Everyone watched as Sandy made a fist, then moved it side to side and up and down. She then opened her hand and did the same thing. She opened and closed her hand several times before saying, "Oh my gawd! It doesn't hurt anymore. It's been so long since I was able to move it as I just did without it hurting." She then looked at Charlotte, a bit sheepishly, and told her, "I'm...um...sorry, Charlotte, for the way I acted. I've had some real bad experiences with boys and men some years ago. I guess you standing up to me like you did, brought it all back. My problems aren't yours to suffer through. Um, if you still want, how about we get to work on your hair?"
Charlotte smiled, stood up and offered her hands to Sandy, helping the woman to stand. She looked over her shoulder at Jane and in a whiny voice said, "Oh, all right. If I have to." Francis chuckled because of how Charlotte acted, gleaning a glare from Jane before she too chuckled. "Just remember, Charlotte. Not to 'over the top,' and wait until I signal you to begin."
Charlotte replied with, "Yes Aunt Jane," before she sat down in Sandy's styling chair and began asking Sandy which style would look good on her.
Neither Charlotte nor Sandy saw Carolyn and Jane look at each other, or raise their eyebrows, or look up to the ceiling before both shook their heads and walked over to sit near Francis. Those two were deep in conversation about hairstyles. And it was Francis who brought an old saying out when she said, "That was rather a close one, wasn't it Aunt Jane?"
Francis was watching the woman and young girl discussing hairstyles, and didn't see Jane nod her head and said, "Indeed it was, Francis. Indeed it was a close one. And the style you chose this time is excellent for your face. Well done Francis."
As Jane, Carolyn, and Francis watched Sandy worked on Charlotte's hair, a person would think they'd been close friends for years, because of the way they chatted and joked with each other. And when Sandy spun the chair around so Charlotte could see herself in the mirror, Charlotte let out a squeal of delight at how her hair turned out. The three watched, unbelieving, as Charlotte jumped, jumped, out of the chair and hugged Sandy, telling the woman, "It looks wonderful, Sandy. Thank you." Sandy had a smile on her face, Francis giggled, but Jane and Carolyn were shocked as they watched Charlotte twirl in front of them and asked, "Well, what do you think, Aunt Jane?"
Charlotte stopped twirling when she saw the look on Aunt Jane's face. Charlotte looked at Francis, who merely shrugged, before shaking Jane, who shook herself and said, "Ah, it looks good on you Charlotte. It makes you even more beautiful than you are already."
Jane then turned to Francis and said, "And you, young lady...thank you for shaking some sense into me." Jane turned back to Charlotte and told her, "Remember, Charlotte. Don't go overboard being happy. You're supposed to be a petulant child, who hates being here. You must get that across to Toby when he arrives on Monday."
Carolyn, Jane, and Francis stood and together with Charlotte and Sandy, walked to the front of the salon. Jane settled her account, then before leaving the salon, told Charlotte and Francis, "Girls, I think we'll do a bit of window shopping at the mall. Charlotte needs to learn how to deal with those who watch her as she shops. And remember, Charlotte. Keep your wits about you at all times." Charlotte hugged Sandy again, then Carolyn, and thanked both for helping her, before she followed Jane out of the salon and to Jane's car. After Jane backed out of the parking spot, and pulled out of the parking lot, she told Charlotte, "I'm proud of how you handled that situation with Sandy, Charlotte. I know it could have been much worse, but you showed great restraint. And you impress me again, young lady. You didn't have to help Sandy with her wrist, yet you did. That shows a good deal of compassion on your part, especially because of what Sandy was about to do to you. And you, young lady," and she'd turned her attention to Francis, "I'm proud of you for the way you behaved today. You're doing quite well, Francis."
And almost together, the girls said, "Thank you, Aunt Jane," before they both giggled.
Jane snorted, then said, "Humph, petulant children," which caused Charlotte and Francis to giggle again.
They arrived at the mall within a few minutes, Jane parking her car close to an entrance. Once Jane had shut off the engine, she turned to look at Charlotte sitting in the backseat. "One of the things I do with my girls, Charlotte, is to have them walk around the mall, so they can become accustomed to people looking at them as they present as a young girl. So far, you've demonstrated confidence while presenting as Charlotte, so I'm not too worried about your reaction when boys and men start eyeing you as you window shop or go into a store to shop. Understand, I will never tell one of my girls all of this, but your case isn't typical, you volunteered in order to help clear your name from an injustice. Again, your word you won't break anything should a moron not understand that their attention is unwanted."
Jane didn't tell Charlotte about those appearing to shop, but who were really there to protect Charlotte just in case. "Aunt Jane," Charlotte began, "I've given you my word before not break anything, and it still holds now. I also said there's no guarantee they won't need medical attention, but nothing will be broken."
Jane patted Charlotte on the knee then told her, "Good enough Charlotte. Let's go shopping."
The three women exited Jane's car and walked towards the entrance, Charlotte noticing the admiring looks they were receiving from the men leaving the mall, as they walked towards the mall entrance. Jane heard Charlotte say to no one in particular, "Do I do the same as those men?" Francis held the door open to let Jane then Charlotte go into the mall first.
Once they were inside, Jane told Charlotte, "Charlotte, Francis, and I will go on our own to shop, you continue without us. Mind now, if you need to use the restroom, go to the food court, don't use the ones down any of the narrow hallways. Those can lead you to doing more than just needing to use the restroom. And possibly breaking your word to me. Also, understand. There are dozens of morons walking around this mall, looking for the right girl to try and 'pick up,' so keep an eye out for those people. Francis and I will meet you in the food court in one hour from now. And of course, if you do see something you'd like to buy, remember where you saw it and we will return to have you try it on and if it fits, or we can find one in your size, we will buy it."
Everything Jane just told Charlotte, apart from where they'd meet in one hour, would never be told to a new 'regular' girl of Jane's. She would be left, in much the same way, to experience what girls have experienced for ages. Because Charlotte was more than a special girl of Jane's, her awareness was heightened because of all the training she'd been receiving the past few years. And it didn't take her long to spot several of the animals she was likely to attract in the hour she had before again meeting up with Jane and Francis. As she casually started to window shop, she muttered to herself, "In for a penny, in for a pound."
The first animal bit as Charlotte was admiring the fashions in one store, though that animal was only walking by her. "Hey, sweet cheeks. Lookin' mighty fine today." Then to emphasize his animalistic thoughts, he provided kissing sounds as well. Charlotte saw his reflection in the glass of the shop as he walked by her. Charlotte mentally told herself, 'Gads, what a jackass.' Then a sudden thought hit her. As Charles, had she done the same thing to a beautiful girl window shopping? Had she, as Charles, made some lude comment, or any comment, to any girl in that way? She put those thoughts away for further study as she continued window shopping.
As she followed the line of stores, she noticed a group of four boys, likely teenagers, standing in front of the Gaming R Us store. As Charles, he enjoyed gaming, if for no other reason than the challenge of beating the game. But as Charlotte, she reasoned gaming would be something she'd be interested in, so she walked by the store. As she walked by the four boys, she could feel them turn to stare at her, and hear a few murmurs of delight at what they saw. She stopped at another store and was admiring the fashions displayed when out of the corner of her eye she saw the four boys standing not far away, acting like they were looking at something. She slowly moved along the store front, and the boys followed. She had learned not to confront trouble unless trouble was directed at her or someone who did need help. And right now, while trouble was directed at her, it wasn't directly directed at her. So she moved on. Trouble became real as she stepped into the nook of a store to view their fashions, and when she turned to move on, the four boys were blocking her path. Charlotte then took her ready stance.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
To the four boys, Charlotte's stance meant nothing, they just saw a pretty girl standing in front of them. Charlotte's feet were close together, but not heel touching heel. Her hands were hanging down in front of her, one palm against her body and the other palm on top of the other hand. Her face expressionless, unreadable by the four boys.
Charlotte saw the two Mall Security guards just across the way, and decided to let them know she needed help. "Excuse me, but you're blocking my way. Kindly move out of the way so I can continue my shopping." She already knew by saying this, one of two things would happen.
Either they'd move and let her pass, or act like the jackasses they were. They chose the jackass route, as one boy said, "Now why would we want to get out of the way of such a pretty girl like you? We came to find out if you want to have some fun with us?"
Charlotte smirked, a bad sign with Charlotte, before telling the moron, "To answer the question you asked, because you might end up in the hospital. As to your suggestion, I'll decline, thank you. Now, please move out of my way." She had raised her voice this time when asking the boys to move, which attracted the attention of the Security Guards. The guards didn't start walking her way until the boy asking her the question made the mistake of trying to stroke Charlotte's cheek. Everyone in the vicinity could hear the boy screaming, as Charlotte did to him as she'd done to Sandy. And it was only her word to Jane that kept the boy from needing a cast on his left arm.
"Are you having trouble, miss," one of the security guards asked, as the two were now standing behind the three boys still standing.
"Yes I am, sir. It seems these four have a problem moving out of my way. And the boy you see kneeling made the mistake of trying to touch me. I'm just explaining to him that it isn't polite to touch a girl unless he's invited to do so."
The same guard said, "Ah, I see, miss. That's quite an effective explanation, I've used it a few times myself. If your explanation is concluded, maybe we can be more explicit in our explanation, so you don't have any more trouble?" Unknown to the boys, the same guard gave Charlotte a head nod, indicating she'd done a nice job controlling the boy without actually hurting him. Charlotte released the boy's hand, then took a step back, assuming her ready stance again.
People can be stupid in all sorts of ways, and the boy Charlotte had made to kneel was no exception. Instead of getting the message Charlotte gave him by controlling her arm as she bent his hand backward, when he got up off the floor he stupidly tried to punch Charlotte for what she'd done to him. Unfortunately, both Security Guards were standing behind the other three boys, which blocked them from the boy who suddenly found himself put to sleep, as Charlotte blocked his punch and administered a more effective one to the boy. He was actually asleep before he hit the floor with a thud. The three boys and the two Security Guards actually followed the boy as he fell to the floor, but when they looked up at Charlotte she was again standing in her ready stance. Giving no hint that anything had just happened.
"All right, you three, get over here out of the way," the second guard told the other three boys. The guard who'd been speaking moved to the fallen boy to make sure he was not badly hurt. When he saw the boy was all right, he turned to Charlotte and asked, "Where in the hell did you learn to punch like that, miss?"
Charlotte smiled, then said, "Two police officers and several senseis, sir."
The guard whistled then said, "This boy got lucky if you've had that much training. He could have been hurt much worse."
Charlotte nodded her head at the guard's comment, before saying, "That's true, sir. However, I gave my word to my Aunt not to break anything should I be confronted."
The guard keyed his two-way and told the person answering that they'd need an ambulance, and where, for a boy who tried to accost a young lady and lost the battle. He answered general questions about the boy's physical health at the moment, before it was decided an ambulance wasn't necessary at the moment. One of their own medically trained staff members could look the boy over and make a further determination. Of course, Charlotte would have to go with the Security Guards to make a formal statement as to what happened. Charlotte was worried how Jane would react when she didn't arrive at the food court within the hour they'd agreed to. But she didn't have to worry about that small problem, since Jane and Francis had just walked out of the store opposite to where Charlotte was at the moment. And because Jane misses nothing, when she saw the boy lying on the ground, and the three boys talking with a Security Guard, and Charlotte talking to the other guard, she had to find out what happened.
Charlotte saw Jane and Francis walking her way, and indicated her Aunt to the guard speaking with her. "Charlotte, explain yourself, young lady," Jane said in her usual no nonsense manner.
"Aunt Jane, I saw these four," and she pointed to the boy lying on the ground and the three with the other guard, "standing outside a gaming store. I walked by them and didn't acknowledge them in any way. As I was admiring the fashions displayed in the store windows, I caught sight of them following me. And when I stepped into the knook to see what this store offered, they blocked my path and refused to move so I could leave. This one," and she pointed to the boy on the ground, "asked why they should move out of the way of such a pretty girl,. He said they wanted to know if I wanted to come with them to have some fun. And then he made a mistake and tried to touch me, and ended up kneeling on the floor, his hand bent backward. These two gentlemen," and Charlotte pointed to the two Security Guards, "arrived and this gentleman," she pointed to the one she'd been talking with, "asked me to let go of the boy, which I did. I guess the boy was upset because of what I did to him, because once he got off the floor he tried to punch me. But as you can see, he missed, I didn't. And as promised, Aunt Jane, nothing is broken. He's merely sleeping."
By Jane's estimation, the boy is a good 5-6 inches taller than Charlotte, and a few pounds heavier, but is lying on the floor nonetheless. Jane had to put her hand over her mouth to hide the smile that wanted to show Charlotte how proud she was of her for keeping her word. Jane then addressed the guard standing by Charlotte, asking, "I suppose you'll want my niece to accompany you in order to make a formal statement?"
The guard nodded his head then said, "Ah, yes ma'am. It's standard procedure in a case like this. And we'll need to know if you'll be pressing charges against the boy. And of course, we'll be calling the parents of all four of these boys." It was right then a staff member arrived carrying a medically marked gym type bag, knelt beside the fallen boy and began taking the boy's vitals. She then removed a vial, broke it and waved it under the boy's nose, causing the boy to stir and started coughing from the ammonia vial fumes.
The boy rolled over and sat up without being asked, but still looked dazed. The staff member waved the ammonia vial under his nose again, only to have the boy swat it away from his nose. He looked around and saw the staff member kneeling beside him, then the Security Guard, then an older woman and young girl, then Charlotte. This boy was a very slow learner as he tried to get up after saying, "You, you stupid bitch. You're going to pay for this."
He never got to his feet, as the staff member put her hand on his shoulder and kept him seated. "Whoa there son, you just sit your butt right where it is. You've been unconscious for a time and I want to make sure you're okay before we have you stand and come with us to our office. And you ain't gonna make no girl pay for you acting like a jackass and trying to touch her like you did. You got exactly what you deserved. You really should count yourself lucky, it could have been worse, from what I hear."
The boy glared at Charlotte, who was nodding her head. Then she told them, "She's right, I could have done more to you before you even hit the floor. But I gave my word not to break anything if I was threatened."
The boy showed just how much of a slow learner he was by saying, "I better not catch you up here again or I'll finish what I started. No girl ain't gonna make a fool out of me."
Charlotte again smiled, looked at Jane, then said, "I expect I'll be coming to the Mall often," Jane nodded her head. Then, looking at the boy, she told him, "I have no wish to hurt you again. But attack me, and my word or not, you will have to be put into the hospital for a sizable amount of time. It would be best if you learn from this experience and not do it again."
The staff member, the Security Guard, Jane, Francis, and Charlotte, watched as the boy shook his head, then said, "Not a chance, girly. Your ass is mine."
Jane stepped closer to where the boy was sitting on the floor, telling the boy, "You are an extremely stupid boy to make such threats in front of these witnesses." While still looking at the boy Jane told Charlotte, "Charlotte, I rescind my request to not break anything should this idiot or his friends attack you when you're here in the Mall or anywhere else. If he isn't willing to learn the lesson he just received, then a more severe lesson must be applied. Young man, I would strongly suggest you not come after this girl," and she pointed to Charlotte. "When she gets through with you and your friends, all of you will be wearing casts on the major parts of your bodies. If she doesn't kill all of you first."
Jane stood back as the staff member helped the boy to stand. He was then taken by the arm by the guard who'd spoken to Charlotte. Jane, Charlotte, and Francis followed the six to the Security offices, where Charlotte gave her statement and the four boys tried to explain what happened to their parents. After the four boys tried to blame everything on Charlotte, the parents talked with Charlotte, who regaled them with her story, backed up by the two Security Guards who witnessed the last part of the encounter. When the four boys discovered they'd been caught in a lie, one of the other three told what really happened and why. The threat made to Charlotte would never be carried out. The parents of the boy who threatened Charlotte, had told him if he got in trouble again, he would be going to a boarding school that wouldn't tolerate his attitude. The trouble he caused today was his third strike, and in the morning he and his parents would be driving to his new school. An all girls school, specializing in helping boys learn how to become better citizens. Of course the boy wouldn't find out about it being an all girls school until after his parents had left the school to drive home. Or that he too would become one of the girls of the school.
After giving her statement, and the three women left the security offices, Charlotte said to Jane, "Aunt Jane, I apologize for causing this trouble, I should have seen it coming the minute I decided to step into that knook to look at the fashions offered by that store. It looks as though I still have a lot to learn about being a girl."
When Jane stopped dead in her tracks, so too did Francis and Charlotte. With a serious look on her face Jane turned to Charlotte and told her, "Charlotte, did you invite those four boys to follow you? Did you invite them to stand in your way when you wanted to move on from that one store? Did you invite that boy to try and touch you? The answer to those questions is NO, you did none of those things. What you did do is show great restraint in how you dealt with that situation. You protected yourself without doing more than what was needed at the time. Don't you dare apologize for something that wasn't your fault. Any young girl, or woman, should have been able to do as you were doing without fear of animals like those boys causing distress on the part of the girl or woman." Just by looking at Charlotte, Jane could see that Charlotte still felt bad for what she had done. She reached out, pulled Charlotte into a hug, so much out of character for Jane, but needed this time, and softly told the girl, "You did nothing wrong, Charles," and felt the girl start to shake, knowing they would have to visit the lady's room to fix Charlotte's face.
Once Charlotte's face had been repaired, the three sat for a while in the food court, savoring the wetness of their drinks. Jane still saw how bad Charlotte felt and decided another tact was needed to take the girl's mind off her recent experience. "So, Charlotte. Did you see anything you liked as you window shopped? If so, let's go there and see how it looks on you."
Jane watched as Charlotte chuckled before telling the woman, "Aunt Jane, that's a very old tactic, trying to distract a person so they don't dwell on a bad experience."
Jane just humphed before saying, in as serious a voice as she could, "Such a petulant child! Did you or did you not see something you liked?"
Charlotte smiled again before telling Jane, "Yes, Aunt Jane. I saw a really cute dress I think would look good on me."
Jane nodded her head then said, "Then let's go and see if they have one in your size, and see how it looks on you."
Before Jane could get out of the chair, Charlotte had stood up, leaned over and kissed Jane on the cheek, telling her, "Thank you for being here, Aunt Jane. I hope you continue being my Aunt when this is all over. I love you."
Jane Thompson is a hard woman to surprise or embarrass, but Charlotte had done both by what she just done and said to Jane. Jane had to clear her throat several times before she could say, "You are such a petulant child. We won't know if that cute dress will fit you unless we go and you try one on."
Francis, like Charlotte, had stood when Jane said they should go to that store, and had heard everything Charlotte said to Jane. She then bent down, since Jane was still sitting, and lightly kissed Jane's other cheek, telling Jane, "I agree with Charlotte, Aunt Jane."
Jane humphed again, saying, "Another petulant chile. The pair of you are nothing but petulant children. Now stand back so I may stand. Petulant children are such a bother." Charlotte and Francis stood back and allowed Jane to stand, Jane not seeing both girls smiling at each other. Neither girl knew how much it meant to Jane what they'd just done or said to her, or that Jane was amazed how much of an influence Charlotte had been on Francis. Trying to maintain her serious manner, after what the girls did and told her, Jane asked Charlotte, "Where is that cute dress, Charlotte?" Charlotte told Jane the name of the store, and the three walked back the way they'd entered the Mall. The girls giggled when they heard Jane say, more to herself than to the girls, "Such petulant children."
Not only did the correct size dress fit Charlotte perfectly, but so did one they found for Francis. Jane would let the girls leave the store until they found shoes and other accessories as well. After Jane paid for their purchases, the girls were acting just as teenage girls would after shopping, they chatted. Only to have Jane remind them they were young ladies and not barkers at some carnival. Both girls giggled before calming down, not seeing the small smile that creased Jane's lips.
As they drove back to Jane's home, she reminded Francis that she still had lessons to do, and for Charlotte to come to the Study after she properly put her new things away. It wasn't long before they pulled up to Jane's home, got out of the car and went into the house. Marie came out of the kitchen as they walked into the house and watched as the two girls carried their shopping bags up the stairs to their bedrooms. "And girls, if your dresses and shoes aren't properly put away, you will be taking everything out of your closets and putting it all back in correctly."
Jane had said this in her usual headmistress voice, which got an, "Yes Aunt Jane," from both girls. Jane then motioned for Marie to join her in the Study, so she could keep an eye on both girls. Once both women were in the Study, and Jane had turned on the monitor, she then told Marie about their experience in the Mall. And what the girls told her as they started to leave the food court.
Marie smiled at Jane and said, "It seems our Charlotte has been good for our Francis, oui? It is terrible she was forced to come to us but, it is still good she is here now. N'es-tu pas d'accord (Don't you agree?)?"
Jane nodded her head then replied, "Yes, I agree with you. But still, it's an injustice that caused it to happen. And that still makes it wrong." Jane watched both girls by way of the monitor before telling Marie, "Francis will be in the library working on her lessons, and I will be giving Charlotte academic tests to see what she has learned. That injustice has caused us to make sure we help Charlotte keep up with her studies. I'm hoping when this is all over that her grades here can be transferred to her old school. Or I may have to rely on some old friends I have to help make it happen."
Jane watched as both girls started to leave their bedrooms, turned off the monitor, and heard Marie say before leaving the Study. "Jane, sometimes an injustice turns out to be a good thing. Have Foi, everything will be all right in the end." Marie patted Jane's hand before getting up out of the chair and walking out of the Study.
Jane had moved to the table by the window in the Study. She heard a knock on the Study door and said, "Enter." The door opened and Charlotte walked into the Study, closing the door behind her. "Ah, good, Charlotte. Come sit with me."
Charlotte had stopped by the bookshelf which contained the book she had used to balance on her head as she traversed the room five times before. She looked at Jane and said, "I will, Aunt Jane, after I follow your instructions about coming into the Study." Jane watched as Charlotte took 'the book' from the bookshelves, placed it on her head until it balanced, and proceeded to walk around the room. Jane would have been torn if Charlotte had forgotten to walk the room with the book balanced on her head. She would have had to admonish her for forgetting Jane's instructions, but couldn't feel obligated to do so because of Charlotte's special situation. She would have been conflicted either way, since in some things she had to treat Charlotte as she would any of her girls.
Jane watched as Charlotte completed her first circuit of the room, before asking, "Charlotte, how did you find the classes at your old high school? Did they challenge you or did you find them boring?"
Jane could see Charlotte was thinking about her questions, as she started her second circuit of the room. She was behind Jane's desk when she said, "They were rather boring, Aunt Jane. I had worked my way through the Algebra book, going by the examples in the book, and when I asked to be allowed to take Geometry, I was told no. I had to stay with my class. My Algebra teacher thought I was trying to pull a fast one and gave me a midterm and final exam. She couldn't believe it when I scored one hundred on both tests. But I couldn't advance. I did the same in my History class, read the entire textbook. When my teacher drilled me I was able to answer every question put to me. But, again, I had to stay with the class. Science was the same, as was English. I even had to take tests I'd already proven I could pass. I sure messed up the bell curve in my classes." Charlotte completed her second circuit as she finished answering Jane's first question. As she started her third circuit, she told Jane, "And no, Aunt Jane. None of my classes challenged me in the slightest. In fact, I had to fight in order to stay awake, which got me into trouble at times. A teacher would call on me, thinking I wouldn't know the answer, and get upset when I answered their question perfectly. I made the mistake, one time, of correcting a teacher because the book contradicted what she had said. And I showed her where it said it in the book." Charlotte had reached the location behind Jane's desk as she finished answering Jane's last question. Charlotte couldn't see Jane, so she didn't see Jane shaking her head in disgust.
Both were quiet as Charlotte made her fourth and fifth circuits of the Study, before returning the book to the bookshelf where it belonged. She then walked over to the table where Jane sat, pulled out the chair opposite Jane and sat down. After Charlotte sat down, Jane said to her, "Charlotte, your parents were able to get a copy of your current school records, and faxed them to me. I know how you did in school, but what I need to know is how much you really know. The results of these tests will help me plan the lessons you will be taking, geared to your level of knowledge, not grade level as is done in school. I will not time you but I want you to work as quickly as you can. When you finish one set of papers, turn it over, set it off to the side, and take another set and work your way through it. We are getting close to dinner, so I will come and get you to help when it's time to set the table and help Marie. At that time, if you haven't finished a set of papers, turn it over in front of you and set your pencil on top of it. That way I'll know you haven't finished that set of papers. When you finish all of the sets of paper, please come find me so we can look at your results together, I may have questions for you about each set of papers. I will be looking in on you from time to time, but don't let my looking in on you distract you from your work. Do you have any questions for me before you begin?"
Jane again watched the 'thinking' look formed on Charlotte's face, before she told Jane, "No Aunt Jane. I don't have any questions at this time." Jane then handed Charlotte one of several pencils lying on the table, before handing her the top set of papers. Charlotte turned it over and began to work through the math problems. Jane quietly left the table and the Study, going to the library to look in on Francis.
As Jane entered the library, she saw Francis standing and looking out the large windows, the paper she'd been writing lying on the table near where she stood. Francis heard the door close and without turning said, "It isn't fair, Aunt Jane."
Jane walked over to stand beside Francis and asked the girl, "What isn't fair, Francis?" Francis was doing a lesson on Capitalism and its influence throughout history. Jane looked down at the desk near them and could see several sheets of paper which had been turned over, the ones Francis had already written on. Jane waited a moment before asking Francis, "Something is bothering you about the lesson, Francis. What is it?"
She watched as Francis slowly shook her head and said, "Why is it all through the ages, people with wealth make rules for everyone to follow but themselves? Why do they build their wealth on the backs of those who do the actual work, but don't pay, reward, or compensate those who do the actual work with more than peanuts? Then they turn around and price everything so high that those doing the work can't get out of the hole the wealthy put them in in the first place. It isn't fair, Aunt Jane. It just isn't fair."
Jane looked down at her ward and saw tears sliding down her cheeks. She put her arm around Francis' shoulder and pulled her into a hug. "No Francis, it isn't fair. But that's how it's been for ages. Why does it happen? There are several reasons. Greed, lack of concern for those doing the actual work, lack of concern for anyone, egos, selfishness, hate, anger, the list goes on and on, Francis. For every word that depicts a hateful action, there's a person who commits that act against another. And all we can do, Francis, is make sure we don't become a part of it. That we treat others as we want to be treated. That we're fair to others if they work for us in some venture. That we treat them with respect, never demean them for the work they do, no matter how demeaning it may seem. And should you ever become so wealthy you can afford to hire many others, remember this lesson and be better than those you've read about. Come, we better get ready for dinner. I'll go get Charlotte to help." Jane turned Francis around and together they walked to the library door, where Francis opened it and allowed Jane to leave the library first. A hard previous lesson taught her to close doors behind her, and she did that to the library door after stepping out of the library.
When Francis first arrived at the Winsome Girl's School for Wayward Boys, she had a bad habit of leaving doors open when she entered or left a room, if the door started out being closed. As was Jane's way, she scolded Francis twice about her leaving doors open, and for a day Francis closed doors behind her. But when she continued her habit of leaving doors open on the next day, Jane had Francis stand outside the study doors, knock, wait for Jane to say "Enter," then open the door, enter the study and close the door behind her. She then had to ask permission to leave the study and when it was granted, open the door, leave the study and close the door behind her. She did this thirty times in a row. She never left a closed door open again.
Francis had calmed down a bit, by the time everyone sat down to dinner. Jane brought up the subject that had bothered Francis, and listened as both girls offered their opinions and views on the subject. With each opinion or view the girls gave, Jane would offer another question based on each girls' comments. When they'd finally run the gamut of comments and questions, Jane asked Charlotte how she was getting on with her testing.
Charlotte's answer caused Jane to look at Charlotte suspiciously. "I've completed the math set of papers, Aunt Jane, and have finished about half of the History set of papers." Charlotte could see the skepticism on Jane's face, so she asked if she could be excused from the dining table for a moment. Jane wasn't sure what Charlotte was up to, but granted her request. The three then watched as Charlotte walked to the study, entered, closed the door behind her, and in a few moments, the study door opened, then closed, as Charlotte walked out of the study carrying a set of papers. Charlotte handed the set of papers to Jane, the completed math set of papers, before returning to her seat at the dining room table. Jane had the master correction sheet locked in her desk in the Study, but could see as she flipped through the papers, that every problem had the formula and computations written out beside the problem. And the papers were all complete.
Jane excused herself and went into the Study to grade Charlotte's set of math papers. She didn't look happy when she returned, and asked Charlotte, "Would you care to explain how you answered every problem on these pages," and she waved the set of papers in the air, "correctly, when you have yet to have even taken any classes other than Algebra? If I didn't know you as I do, I would say you cheated while taking this exam."
Charlotte just smiled at Jane, then told her, "No, Aunt Jane, I didn't cheat on that exam, as you know I wouldn't. When I had my free period at school, I chose to spend it in the Library--we were allowed to choose where to spend our free periods--and discovered the Library had copies of our textbooks for those students who forgot their textbooks in their lockers. I'd already worked my way through our Algebra textbook so I found the textbooks for the Trig and Calculus classes and worked my way through them. To me, both were easy to work through, by following the examples in both books. Once I'd worked my way through each book, I did the same for Chemistry and Physics, and any other class I found interesting. As I told you, Aunt Jane, I found most of my classes rather boring, since I'd already read through the textbooks for those classes."
Marie could see the stunned expression on Jane's face, and gently took the set of papers out of her hand. She slowly flipped through the set of paper, not seeing what they often saw when Jane gave this particular test. Red marks indicating an incorrect answer. She furled her brow, then looked through the set again, and again did not see any red marks. She held up the set of papers then said to Charlotte, in an astonished voice, "Chère, you answered each problem correctly. And in such a short amount of time."
Charlotte was about to shrug her shoulders, but caught herself in time, then said, "I found all of them easy to work, Tante Marie. I don't understand why it's such a big deal. I was given a test, I took the test, and went on to the next test. It's that simple." 'It's that simple' was the closest Charlotte could come to shrugging her shoulders, lest Jane get upset at her again.
If the two women hadn't had serious expressions on their faces, Francis and Charlotte would have giggled at their expressions. But both women were serious, now, and looking at each other before returning their gaze to Charlotte. "Chère, I don't think you realize what this means. To you, it's not a big deal, because you don't find it unusual. But to us, it is a big deal since you've never had any lessons in either Trigonometry or Calculus. You learned each subject all on your own, because you were bored with your classes. Mon Dieu, mon enfant, there are only a handful of people in this world who could do such a thing, and you are one of them." This time, as both women and Francis watched, Charlotte did shrug her shoulders, it was the only response she had to Marie's comment. Charlotte still didn't see why it was such a big deal.
Jane and Marie looked at each other, again, both thinking the same thing. If Charlotte was able to pass the Math test, and those sections she only learned on her own, it was highly probable she was going to score extremely high on each and every set of papers in those areas where she'd never had a class on that subject. And learned everything on her own. If they were correct in their assessment of Charlotte, Jane would need to make some phone calls and ask for help from those educated in the higher form of the subjects Jane was planning for Charlotte. Otherwise, she wouldn't benefit from the lessons Jane would plan for her.
Jane set the Math set of papers aside, and they carried on with their noon meal, both girls helping with dessert and when time, clearing the table and helping clean up the kitchen. The girls then went back to their previous work, Francis to the library and Charlotte to the study, where Jane found her walking the study circuit as she looked in on her. Jane chuckled to herself as she saw Charlotte walking the parameter of the study with the book balanced on her head, before she'd get back to the tests.
When Charlotte finished all the sets of papers, she did as Jane had instructed and went in search of Aunt Jane. As she stepped out of the study, closing the door behind her, she heard muffled voices coming from the kitchen, Marie and Jane's voices. She walked to the kitchen door but stopped when she heard Jane tell Marie, "Marie, those fools don't realize what they have in Charlotte. Any student who can do what Charlotte did on that set of math papers, without formal lessons, needs more than what that school is capable of giving them." Their talk stopped when there was a knock on the kitchen door, and Charlotte slowly came into the kitchen. The kitchen was the one place where nothing was said about knocking on the door then waiting to be allowed to enter. But Charlotte felt it was the polite thing to do before walking in on Jane and Marie's conversation.
Jane saw the look on Charlotte's face, and asked, "You heard?"
Charlotte nodded her head then replied, "Yes, I heard, Aunt Jane. And I've been trying to get them to let me take advanced courses, even my parents have asked that I be allowed. But they always come back with 'We feel he needs the social structure granted him by staying with his peers.'" As the two women watched, Charlotte pulled out a chair at the kitchen table, sat down, and put her head down on the kitchen table, on top of her hands. "Aunt Jane, Tante Marie, I'm so bored at that school I've often thought of quitting school. Of going out on my own to learn what I want, what I need to learn. I told my parents that and thought WWIII had begun. What can I do, Aunt Jane? My parents won't let me quit. I'm not allowed to take advanced courses. I'm shuttled along with the rest of the herd, 'for my own good.'"
Jane and Marie had no trouble recognizing the desperation in Charlotte's voice, and would have to wait until they graded her tests to devise a plan to get Charlotte the academic help she needed. "You finished the sets of papers?"
Jane asked Charlotte, who said in a despondent voice, "Yes, Aunt Jane. I left them on the table by the window, face down as you instructed." Had the situation been different, Jane would have stripped flesh off Charlotte's back for the way she answered Jane's question, with her head down on the table and using a discouraged voice. Instead, Jane excused herself and went to the Study to grade Charlotte's papers.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Marie sat down by the discouraged young girl and told her, "Ah mon cheri, hold your head up, it's so beautiful. One of such beauty shouldn't be seen in such a manner."
Charlotte laughed at Marie's attempt to cheer her up, and sat up and became the proper young lady sitting in a chair. "Marie, I know the material of the classes I'm currently taking. I know the material for the classes I'll take next year and the year after that. I can work Algebra, Trig, and Calculus problems in my sleep. I can quote dates, places, and people in my History class without missing a beat. I know the material for Chemistry and Physics, but no one at that school will grant me advance placement because 'it's for my own good.' I've ruined the bell curve in every one of my classes because I ace each and every test. I've been called teacher's pet, show-off, snob, and a few words that would upset Aunt Jane if I said them. I'm no longer learning anything at that school, but, 'It's for my own good,'" Charlotte said with contempt in her voice. Marie pulled a tissue out of the pocket in her apron and gave it to Charlotte, just as Jane returned to the kitchen carrying all of the sets of papers. She handed them to Marie before sitting down across from Charlotte, who was blotting her eyes to try and keep tears from spoiling her makeup.
The three were silent as Marie perused the first set of papers, before turning it over and setting it aside. This went on until she turned the last set of papers over and set them aside, and said, "Eh bien je serai (Well I will be.)," before looking at Jane, and telling her, "She is further along than we can deal with, cheri. Neither you nor I can possibly provide what she now needs. And neither can that school of hers. Do you have a plan in mind, oui?"
What had astonished Marie, as she looked over each set of papers, wasn't what she saw but what was missing. Red marks, marks which would indicate the answer to a question was incorrect. There were none. Each set of papers had a '100' written on the front page, indicating the answers within that set of papers were all correct. This is why Marie knew she and Jane were out of their league in planning lessons for Charlotte, she was far beyond anything they usually planned for their girls.
Jane had smiled to herself when she saw Charlotte sitting up like a proper young lady, when she returned to the kitchen. She looked at Charlotte's red eyes, and knew she'd made the correct decision not to admonish the girl because of her posture. It may have done more harm than good. "Oui, Marie, I have a plan, which has been put in place. Charlotte, starting Monday you will have a special tutor who can meet your needs academically. She was like you in school, bored, passed every test in all of her classes, studied on her own, and like you, was refused advance placement. It wasn't until her parents pulled her from the public school and sent her to a school that allowed her to learn as fast as she wanted, that she showed what she could truly do. I believe you'll find she WILL challenge you Charlotte, so be prepared to work hard. She already told me she won't tolerate any whining on your part, or excuses of why you didn't get the work completed. Shall I call her back and tell her you aren't interested in a greater challenge than what you've faced at your old school? Or are you hungry for more?"
The silence that lingered was like the time it takes for a drop of water to fall from the end of a facet to the sink. "Please don't make the call," Charlotte said, tears building in her eyes, "I need her as much as I need you and Tante Marie." Her emotional bank was too full, and Charlotte broke down and cried. Marie was sitting the closest to Charlotte, and scooted over to Charlotte to pull her into a hug as the girl cried. "Tout ira bien, mon amour, you wait and see." When Marie looked at Jane she could see the fury in Jane's eyes. Here is a girl who has the weight of the world on her shoulders, and doesn't know what to do. First they learn she's been falsely accused of being involved in a shoplifting incident, now they learn she may be a genius in her own right and her old school thinks it best she stays with her own class. Thereby preventing her from taking advanced classes. Marie knew what Jane wanted to do. She also knew Jane wouldn't do it because she'd never lower herself to the level of morons.
Marie and Jane were so focused on Charlotte that they didn't hear Francis come into the kitchen. It wasn't until Francis said, with a catch in her voice, "Um, Aunt Jane. I've finished my paper," the two women looked up and took in Francis, standing just inside the kitchen with tears flowing down her cheeks.
They saw her holding the paper she'd been writing and also saw she was shaking. Jane stretched out her arm and told Francis, "Please let me have your paper, Francis." Francis walked closer to Jane, handed her the paper, then was shocked when Jane pulled to her and held her. Tears flowing freely down Francis' cheeks, she asked, "Is Charlotte going to be okay? I can try to help her if you want."
Jane reached up and wiped tears off Francis' cheeks before telling the girl, "Charlotte is feeling everything she's been through, right now. She needs our help to get through it, so if you wish to help, continue being her friend."
It wasn't much longer until Charlotte stopped crying. And much longer until they heard, "Danke, dass du hier bist, Tante Marie (Thanks for being here, Aunt Marie.)," from Charlotte. She chuckled and said, "I must look a fright."
Marie lifted Charlotte's head by the chin and said, "Ja, wie ein Waschbär. Nochmal (Yes, like a raccoon. Again.)." Both laughed, then Charlotte took a tissue and wiped her eyes, before seeing Jane holding Francis, who looked the same.
She then chuckled and told Francis, "We've done it again, Francis. We look like raccoons. Aunt Jane, may we be excused to redo our faces?"
Jane laughed then said, "If you two keep this up, we'll run out of makeup for the two of you." Then nodding her head towards the kitchen door, Jane told them, "Go. Go and freshen up. Then come back and help get our supper ready." The two women watched as Francis waited for Charlotte to meet up with her, before they put their arms around each other and left the kitchen. Jane looked to the ceiling, then told Marie, "Those two are having an effect on us, my dear friend. I can't find it within myself to be my usual grizzly bear that I know I should be with those two girls."
Marie nodded her head in understanding, then told Jane, "Maybe not with these two girls, cheri. But you and I will get our chance on Monday, when the one who caused all of this arrives." Marie saw the fury return to Jane's eyes. Toby was in for a bumpy ride when he arrived on Monday. And he didn't know it. Yet.
The girls had freshened their faces and were now setting the dining room table for supper, before going into the kitchen and helping Marie prepare what they'd be having that evening. Jane had gone to the Study in order to calm down and make plans for their new girl arriving Monday. She went through the exercises learned years ago, and often practiced during a particular trying time with one of her girls, before pulling up the records she'd received on Toby Camber.
She first looked at his school records, noticing while not a high achiever, he wasn't failing any of his classes. She also noticed notations which had been placed in his file by his school counselor, stating that, 'While Toby doesn't achieve high academic scores, he is hiding his ability to actually achieve higher scores. He is also hiding something which prevents him from doing better in his classes. Something which frightens him more than failing school.' Jane mulled over 'frightens him more than failing school,' and wondered what could frighten a boy more than failing his classes. His home life, perhaps? Being threatened by someone he knew or by bullies in school or in his neighborhood? It can't be because he is coming here, she thought, since all of this occurred before he was caught shoplifting at Taylor's. And since nothing was said about his causing trouble at school, or being involved in trouble at school, then it had to be his home life or something in his neighborhood. Jane dismissed that for right now, they'd eventually learn the truth. And it'd be a truth that would send Jane into an almost murderous rage.
It was Charlotte who knocked on the Study door, waited until Jane said, "Enter," and came into the study to inform Jane that supper was now ready. Jane thanked Charlotte then asked, "How are you feeling dear?"
"Better, Aunt Jane. Thank you for asking." Then, as per the instructions Jane had given the girls about coming into the study, after informing Jane supper was ready, Charlotte took 'the book' off the bookshelf and proceeded to circuit the study the required five times. When Charlotte had finished her five circuits of the study with 'the book' balanced on her head, they left the study together, Charlotte opening the study door and letting Jane leave first, then following her and closing the door behind her.
Jane steered the conversations away from academics, in case Charlotte wasn't as 'better' as she claimed, and started asking Charlotte about her hobbies and other areas of interests. When they finished supper, and the table had been cleared, and the kitchen cleaned, Jane gave the girls the rest of the evening as free time, hoping they'd spend the time together, getting to know each other better.
When 9 p.m. arrived, Jane sought out the girls, finding them in the library discussing a book they both had read not long ago. They tried to get Jane involved, asking her opinion about this character or that character, but Jane told them she would discuss the characters with them another time, since it was time they got ready for bed.
Jane had gone up with Francis, as usual, while Marie went up with Charlotte. As Charlotte was undressing she asked, "Tante Marie, aren't we going to bed rather early? We've been getting ready for bed at 10 p.m. since I've been here."
Marie chuckled, sat Charlotte down with her on the bed, then told her, "Tomorrow, you are going to experience what Jane has her girls do not long after they arrive. You will need to be quick and accurate, or Jane will be very upset with you. You must also remember what she told you to do when you enter the study, or she will increase the number of times it must be done. Because of this, you will need all the sleep you can get. So, dépêchez-vous (hurry up). Clean your face and get your shower. Jane does not want you to perdre du temps." Charlotte leaned over, kissed Marie on the cheek, stood up and continued undressing, placing her dress in the laundry hamper. She unhooked her stocking from the garter belt she wore, removed them and as she'd been shown, folded them before placing them in the correct drawer in the dresser. She removed the garter belt, put it away before selecting clean panties and a matching bra from the appropriate drawers. She then went into the bathroom, and as Marie watched, cleaned off her makeup, checking in the mirror to make sure she'd removed it all. Marie then stepped out of the bathroom as Charlotte removed her panties and bra and stepped into the shower, remembering to put on a shower cap. Once she finished her shower, had dried off and removed the shower cap, put on her bra and panties, she returned to the chest of drawers and chose a nightie to sleep in. The one she chose complimented the bra and panties she was wearing, something not lost on Marie. Charlotte then sat down at the vanity and proceeded to apply moisturizing cream to her face and arms and legs, something she thought felt nice, but not something Charles Thorton would think of doing.
After getting into bed, Marie kissed her on the forehead and bid her, "Bonne nuit et fait de beaux rêves."
Charlotte smiled then replied, " Merci, tante Marie. Et pour toute votre aide." Marie smiled, then shut off the overhead light before closing Charlotte's bedroom door as she left the bedroom, causing the night vision camera and motion sensor to activate.
The next morning Charlotte's bedroom door banged open, startling her out of a deep sleep. "Time to get up, Charlotte," Jane curtly told Charlotte. Charlotte caught the tone of Jane's voice, so did as she was told. After Jane had walked to the window and opened the shade, she turned back to Charlotte and, again, curtly told her, "You have 45 minutes to shower, dress, put on your makeup, and be downstairs to help get breakfast ready. If you find yourself unable to meet that goal, then I will find something else you can practice at until you are able to reach that goal. Don't get your hair wet as you shower. Make your bed and put your nightie under your pillow after folding it properly. Also, make sure to put on a clean pair of panties and bra. I suggest you hurry, Miss Thorton, you have already lost several minutes simply standing there gaping like a fish." And with that said, Jane turned on her heel and left the bedroom without another word.
Charlotte didn't know what was going on, but didn't waste any more time, as she hurriedly stripped, dropped her nightie, bra and panties on the bed, before going to the dresser and getting a clean pair of panties and matching bra. She then quickly moved to the bathroom, where she started the shower before putting on a shower cap. As Charles, she was used to taking a quick shower, and that familiarity helped her now. The dried herself, put on her panties and bra, rushed out of the bathroom to first put her dirty bra and panty in the laundry hamper, then making her bed before folding her nightie and placing it under her pillow. She then opened the drawer in the dresser and took out a matching garter belt, put it on, then after closing that drawer, opened another drawer, took out a nude pair of stockings, and went back to her bed to put them on. Once she had them attached to the garter belt, she then went into her closet and chose a dress that she'd been told would suit being worn around the house, and matching shoes. Once dressed, she sat down at the vanity and put on her makeup, making sure it was done to Jane's standards. With her makeup put away, and the vanity straightened, Charlotte went to the open door of her bedroom, turned and examined her room, making sure everything was as it should be. Closing the door behind her she hurried, but didn't rush, down the stairs only to find Jane waiting at the bottom of the stairs.
Jane looked at the watch on her wrist, then said, "Not bad, Miss Thorton. Forty minutes. Well done. Stand over there," and Jane pointed to a spot on the floor a few feet to her left, then began walking around Charlotte, inspecting her with a critical eye. Jane stopped behind Charlotte, and Charlotte felt Jane's hand run down her back, then tug at the sides of her dress, before Jane continued walking around her, stopping now and then, making comments to herself. When she was again standing in front of Charlotte, Jane grabbed Charlotte's chin and pulled it up, turning Charlotte's head first to the left then to the right, before releasing Charlotte's chin. "You've done well, Miss Thorton. You have a slight mistake with your eye makeup, Miss Thorton, but what boy had ever worn eye makeup before. You'll have a chance to practice correcting that mistake. The dress you chose is appropriate for wearing around the house, but not for being out in public. Of course with your boy's body, we can't expect it to fit as it would on a 'real' girl, now can we? Your appearance will do for now, Miss Thorton. But after breakfast we'll work to improve your appearance. Now, I believe you have duties in the kitchen, Miss Thorton?"
Charlotte didn't know why Jane had suddenly become the woman from hell, after how she'd treated Charlotte the previous days. But right now that didn't matter, because she knew Jane was expecting, and received, "Yes Aunt Jane," from Charlotte.
Charlotte then asked, "May I be excused, Aunt Jane?" Jane just nodded her head, since her voice would give away the fact she hated how she was going to treat Charlotte during the morning. But as she and Marie had discussed, it had to be done if Charlotte was to play her part in breaking Toby Camber and getting him to tell them the truth. Charlotte had to experience what Jane was going to put him through, as she'd put all of her other girls through. She had to experience the anxiety felt in needing to meet a deadline to be dressed properly as a young lady. Jane went into the study to calm down. And shed a few tears.
When Jane came out of the study, she heard, "Charlotte, come here right this minute," from Marie. She saw Charlotte come out of the kitchen and then heard, "I believe Francis instructed you on the proper way to set a table, did she not? Then why haven't you set this table properly? Pick everything up and set this table correctly. JETZT, Mädchen (NOW, girl!)!" As Jane watched Charlotte start picking up the plates and silverware, she also saw the hurt look on Marie's face. Like Jane, she hated to put Charlotte through the same thing they'd put their other girls through, and what Toby would be put through, but felt Charlotte needed to know how it felt to be ordered to redo something she'd already done correctly. When Charlotte had relaid the table, Marie, like Jane had done with Charlotte, walked around the dining room table and took it all in with a critical eye. "Viel besser, Charlotte (Much better, Charlotte.). Next time don't be in such a hurry, that's how mistakes are made. You may return to the kitchen." Once Charlotte was in the kitchen, Jane watched as Marie leaned against a chair and hung her head. She knew just how the woman felt.
Marie felt Jane's arms go around her from behind, and she grabbed Jane's hands before saying, "Dieu, je déteste faire ça à ce gentil enfant (God, I hate doing this to this sweet child.)."
Jane nodded then told Marie, "I do understand, but we both know it's necessary if she is to understand how Toby feels as we run him through the same thing. Come, let's go see how she's holding up." Together, holding each other, they went to the study, where they watched Francis and Charlotte in the kitchen on the monitor.
When Charlotte walked into the kitchen, Francis was cutting up fruit that would be part of their breakfast. She walked over to Francis and asked, "Francis, have I done something to upset Aunt Jane? She banged open my bedroom door this morning, shocking me out of a sound sleep. Then ordered me to get out of bed, told me to quickly take a shower, put on clean panties and a bra, get dressed and do my makeup. She even ordered me to make my bed and place my folded nightie under my pillow. And she said I had forty-five minutes to have it all done correctly. Is Aunt Jane mad at me, Francis?"
Francis had kept her head down as Charlotte spoke and asked her questions. She put the cut up fruit in a cauldron, took it to the sink and ran cold water over the fruit. She shook off the excess water before placing the fruit in a bowl and placed the bowl in the refrigerator, before rinsing off her hands and drying them on a towel. All the while remaining silent. She was about to do another of her instructed chores when Charlotte blocked her path by standing in front of her, asking, "Francis? What's going on? Why won't you talk to me?"
Francis tried to move around Charlotte, but Charlotte kept blocking her path. When she finally looked up at Charlotte, Charlotte could see the anxiety and confliction written on Francis' face. "Talk to me Francis? Why won't you say anything?"
As Charlotte watched, Francis started shifting her weight from foot to foot, all the while wringing her hands hanging in front of her. Tears were welling in her eyes, and starting to overflow, and as she started to wail, she whispered, "I can't," and fell to the floor in a heap. Charlotte got down on the floor with Francis, and held the girl as she bawled.
It wasn't long before Charlotte understood that Francis had been ordered not to tell Charlotte what was happening to her. She looked up into the hidden camera, knowing Jane and Marie had to be watching, and listening, and yelled, "THIS IS REALLY CRUEL, AUNT JANE! FRANCIS SHOULDN'T BE PUT IN THE MIDDLE OF WHAT YOU'RE HAVING ME DO! NO, THIS IS MORE THAN CRUEL, IT BARBARIC, AUNT JANE. FORCING THIS GIRL TO FOLLOW YOUR ORDERS WHEN YOU KNOW HOW SHE FEELS ABOUT ME. WHEN YOU'VE COME OUT OF YOUR CAVE, WE'LL BE UP IN MY BEDROOM. AUNT JANE."
Charlotte helped Francis up off the floor, before leading her out of the kitchen and up the stairs to her bedroom. She opened her bedroom door, not bothering to close it behind her, guided her up the stairs, entered her bedroom, and sat with Francis on her bed, holding Francis as she cried. "I'm here, Francis. It's going to be all right, just have patience. I stick with my friends."
Francis looked up into Charlotte's face and through blinding tears, and with a raspy voice asked Charlotte, "You're my friend? I've never had a real friend before, just people who wanted me to help them with this or that. And once I did, they'd throw me away like a piece of trash. Thank you for being my friend." She laid her head back on Charlotte's chest, and held her tightly. Tears slid down Charlotte's cheeks, angry tears, that Jane would have the gall to make Francis choose between following Jane's orders or face punishment for disobeying her and helping her friend. And no matter her reasoning, Jane may have done more harm to Francis than good. Because Jane deliberately put Francis into a no-win situation. Damned if she did and damned if she didn't.
It wasn't long before Jane and Marie arrived at Charlotte's bedroom, both coming into the room. Neither woman had to ask how Charlotte was feeling because it was plainly written on her face. She was furious. Charlotte didn't wait for Jane, or Marie, to speak first, she let go with both barrels. "What you've done to Francis is despicable, putting her into an untenable situation like you did. Obey your precious orders or face punishment by answering my questions. And I actually thought you cared about her. Instead you caused her to fold up because she wasn't equipped to handle the situation. So it was sink or swim, was it? Obey me, Lady Jane, or be punished for helping a friend. And if hurting Francis helps get my name cleared, then to HELL with clearing my name. Francis is more important!" Charlotte was so angry tears were flooding down her cheeks, and her voice quivered as she spoke. Charlotte watched as Jane tried to say something, but turned and walked out of her bedroom.
Marie looked at Charlotte and saw the fire in her eyes, she saw a mother protecting its cub. "That was cruel of you, Charlotte, it was beneath you. You're better than that," Marie told Charlotte. She went on with, "You don't understand how hard it was for Jane to do what she had to do, how she agonized over it. She didn't want to order Francis not to tell you what was going on, but it was necessary for you to learn how it felt what Toby was going to be put through. And he won't be getting any answers either. You had to understand what Jane and I are going to do when Toby arrives on Monday. Jane is furious because of the injustice that put you here, even though it has greatly helped Francis. Jane had another boy sent to her, under false pretenses, and vowed she'd never let it happen again."
Marie saw the fire die in Charlotte's eyes, as she said, "But she hurt Francis, Marie. That wasn't right. Francis has nothing to do with my learning how Toby was going to feel when he was run through the same gauntlet. She was an innocent bystander, who was threatened one way and wrought with anxiety the other way. And she crashed. Rationality can't be used to hurt another person, it isn't right."
In all the years she and Jane had been working with the boys sent to them, never had she seen two of their girls who were more worried about the other one than themselves. Charlotte was willing to throw away the chance to clear her name in order to see that Francis never got hurt. She was willing to throw herself on the sword instead of letting the sword reach Francis. Marie could only shake her head at seeing such self sacrifice. "Cheri, I think you have some place you need to go. I'll look after our Francis."
Marie's soft words found their way to Francis, who told Charlotte, "She's right, Charlotte. Jane needs you right now."
Marie sat down on the bed and took Francis in her arms, nodding her head towards the open bedroom door. Not caring how she looked, or caring if Jane was upset by her look, Charlotte let Marie take Francis and left her bedroom. She went down the stairs, to the study and knocked on the study doors. When there was no response, she opened the door, entered the study, closed the door behind her and walked over to Jane's desk, where Jane sat with her head on the top of the desk. Charlotte walked around behind the desk and pulled Jane to her and held her, as Jane cried on her shoulder. What Jane couldn't see were more tears finding their way out of Charlotte's eyes and down off her face. One thought sped through Charlotte's mind as she held Jane, 'Why is it so hard to be human?'
She voiced that thought by asking, "Why is it so damn hard to be human, Aunt Jane? If we do this, there will be someone who thinks it's wrong. If we do that, someone else will think it's wrong. If we don't do what someone wants, they think we're wrong for not doing what they wanted. This person says this is right, and another disagrees. We're told this is how things are, only to learn it's a lie. Aren't there any truths a person can lean on to have a happy life, Aunt Jane? Truths that hold up no matter the situation?"
She laid her head down on Jane's back, and let the tears flow. Everything had caught up with Charlotte, the lie of her involvement in the shoplifting, hearing what George Strom told Judge Ruth if she wasn't punished, the loss of being at school, the loss of being with her parents, the loss of being herself, and now watching as her friend was placed in a situation where she would be wrong no matter what she did. It was Jane's turn to hold Charlotte as the girl let out an agonizing wail, which continued as they both felt arms incircle them. It had been Charlotte's wailing that brought Marie and Francis into the study, the two having heard Charlotte even from Charlotte's bedroom, and the doors of the study closed.
They held each other for what seemed like hours, but lasted for only fifteen minutes. When Charlotte had cried herself out she said, "I've buggered things, haven't I. I got angry with you Aunt Jane because you did what was necessary. And it wasn't you who put Francis in that untenable situation, it was me, by asking her those questions. I ruined what you were trying to have me learn, I am sorry Aunt Jane. Truly I am."
Charlotte had to stop talking, as her voice was no longer steady. Jane pushed Charlotte away so she could look into her eyes and told her, "Never, ever, apologize for standing up for your friends. I should have realized how close you and Francis had become, and it was her you'd go to for answers. I put us all in a no-win situation, Charlotte. But to answer your current questions. Humans are not simple animals, with simple needs. We are more than finding food, mating, and running from predators. Humans are more complicated because their brains are more complicated, and that complication can cause untold problems when it involves relationships. We are not rational creatures, Charlotte, even though there are those who try to make that claim. Given the right circumstances, even those people will break down into being a mere human. Truths, constant truths? Ones you can hold onto in every situation? Many claim to have a constant truth, Charlotte, until they are put into a situation that is out of their comfort zone. Then their truth breaks down. There is a truth that can stay true in any situation if a person has the understanding of what it is and how to use it. It's quite simple, but hard to follow, always be true to yourself. Always be centered in what you believe. Never let others sway you because they disapprove of your beliefs, as long as your beliefs don't harm others. Never let others expect you to believe as they do, unless you've delved into what they've said and find it to be true. And be true to your own beliefs. Charlotte, we actually control our own lives, by how we respond, or react, to any given situation. And it's when we are not centered that problems arise. If you watch those others, you will find they are true to themselves. They know themselves. They are confident of themselves and what they can and can't do. They have a good sense of self worth, and know what they want out of life. And they do it all without the need to harm others. They will even become shepherds to others, helping them gain a better understanding of themselves. They are the people whose funeral is filled to overflowing because of the compassion, true compassion, they had for others. And it was all because they were true to themselves, Charlotte."
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Silence lingered for a time after what Jane told the girls. It gave the girls time to start thinking about what it was Jane had really meant. Because it was something neither girl had ever heard before. Jane broke the silence as she said, "Girls. I think we need some fresh air. Charlotte, have you ever rode a horse before? There are some excellent trails on my property, which allow a rider to ride at a leisurely pace. And if we're lucky we might see some of the animals that live on my property."
Jane saw the expression on the girl's face, before Charlotte said, "Um, Aunt Jane. I once rode a pony at a fair when I was younger. All it did was walk around in a circle."
Jane saw the apprehensive look on Charlotte's face, then said, "Charlotte, all of the horses I buy are very gentle. They have to be gentle because like you, many of the girls who come to me have never ridden." Jane then took in the girl's faces, and realized her's must look the same. "And girls, if I look like the two of you, then I must look like a raccoon also, so we need to freshen our faces. Charlotte, Marie will go with you and show you the proper clothing, and footwear, a young lady wears when riding. If you have trouble getting dressed, Francis can assist you, as she's ridden with me and knows how to dress properly. And make sure you fix your faces properly, or our riding will be delayed as you're sent back to your rooms to fix your mistakes."
Both girls replied with, "Yes, Aunt Jane," before following Marie out of the study.
Jane sat for a few minutes longer, thinking back through the decisions she'd made that caused this all to happen. "How could I not see how close those two have become without doing what I did? How could I not see how far Francis has come to be concerned about someone other than herself, except by doing what I had to do?" She finished talking to herself, closed her eyes, looked towards the ceiling and told herself, "I must be more careful or this might happen again. And it can't happen while Toby is here." Jane sighed, opened her eyes, lowered her head, got up from her chair and walked out of the study and headed to her bedroom to get dressed for riding and to reapply her own makeup. It had been a stressful morning.
Marie went with Charlotte into her bedroom, walking into Charlotte's closet after opening the door. She then pointed out the pants, top, and boots Charlotte would be wearing to ride in, then took her to the dresser and showed her the undergarments Charlotte should wear so her legs and bottom didn't get chapped while riding. Before leaving Charlotte's bedroom, Marie told her to clean her face after undressing and before getting dressed in their riding clothes. And to redo her makeup after she put the top on, in order not to smear her makeup. Once Marie was sure Charlotte knew what to wear for riding, she went back downstairs to see about Jane.
Marie walked to the end of a hall forbidden to the girls, and entered Jane's bedroom without knocking. As she entered, she found Jane sitting on her bed, her head in her hands. Marie sat down on the bed beside Jane, put her arm around her and pulled Jane to her. "Don't beat yourself up over what happened, you know it had to be done, mon amie. You also had to know how far Francis had progressed in caring for others. Do you know why this time hurt more than the other times?" Jane looked up at Marie when she'd asked her question. When Jane didn't answer her, Marie said, "Because Charles shouldn't be here. Because he's caught up in an injustice, just like Kennth. And you're angry that Ruth had no choice but to send him here or he would be facing additional charges in Federal Court. And, because he is where we want all of our girls to eventually be before leaving us. We can't help her academically because she is beyond our abilities. But we can help him learn how to accept his feminie side and experience how girls feel most of the time when they leave their homes. Charlotte has already had one experience, but we both know there are many more that don't involve putting people to sleep."
Jane chuckled when Marie mentioned the boy Charlotte decked when he tried to hit her. "Yes, our Charlotte can certainly take care of herself," Jane told Marie. Then Jane said, "I vowed never to do this again, Marie. After Kennth, I swore I'd never let another boy be sent to us who shouldn't be here." Jane sighed, then continued with, "But if he hadn't been sent to us he'd be facing more charges in Federal Court. Charges that would be based on a lie." Then Jane hissed, "Damnitall."
Marie patted Jane's knee then told her, "Go, get yourself ready to ride. Go show Charlotte your babies. Show them a good time in the fresh air, you three need it." Jane nodded her head before kissing Marie on the cheek, and thanking her for her counsel. Marie left Jane to get herself ready to ride, and fix her face, while she went to check on the girls. She could do with some quiet time of her own.
Jane took a bit longer getting dressed, and remaking her face, than the girls because she had more on her mind than the girls. When she finally emerged from her bedroom, dressed for riding and her makeup immaculately applied, she found the girls sitting on the bench waiting for her. She had both stand and walked around both girls to inspect them with a critical eye. She then used the same critical eye to check their makeup, holding each girl's chin and turning their heads left and right. "I see Marie had given you both pointers with your clothing. I hope you both thanked her and will remember what she taught you. And you're both doing better applying your makeup." Critical Jane had returned, but not tyrannical Jane. She would return Monday, with a vengeance. With a smile on her face, Jane told the girls, "Let's go out so you can meet my babies, Charlotte. I know they'd like to meet both of you."
They followed Jane down the hall past where the bench sat, and out a back door. As they walked to the stable, Jane explained to Charlotte how to act around her horses, or any horse for that matter. And that she'd teach her how to saddle the horse she chose to ride, and what had to be done after they brought the horses back to the stable. When they reached the stable, and went inside, three of the four horses whinnied as they saw Jane and Francis. One of the horses, a Pinto, was standing in the back of its stall, an uneasy look about it. Francis walked over to a basket holding apples, took one and walked over to the horse she'd ridden before. As Charlotte watched, Francis held the apple in her flat hand and offered it to 'her' horse, with the horse readily accepting her offer. Jane did the same, only with the other two horses. When Jane turned her attention to Charlotte, she saw her standing at the stall of the Pinto, looking at the horse. "Why is this one afraid, Aunt Jane?"
Jane walked over to stand by Charlotte before telling her, "She's had a bad experience with her last owner. The fool thought he knew everything about horses and how to train them. Unfortunately, a whip seldom gets a horse to do what you want."
Without saying a word, Charlotte walked over to the basket and took two apples, putting one in the pocket of her riding pants. She then walked back over to the Pinto's stall, and extending her arm, held one of the apples in the flat of her hand. And waited. Jane backed away, sat down on a bale of straw, and watched.
The muscles in Charlotte's extended arm were starting to scream, but she was determined not to drop her arm, as she held the apple out to the Pinto. She saw the Pinto thinking of coming to her, as it had moved its front left leg in her direction, but pulled it back instead. Even with the muscles in her arm screaming at her, she resolved to help this frightened animal. Looking the horse in the eye, Charlotte told it, "Come on, sweetheart, I won't hurt you. I'd never think of hurting you. You are a beautiful horse, and need someone to care for you. I do know how you're feeling, being scared, I was scared before coming to this place. I didn't know how I was going to be treated, or what I would have to do. But three people have helped me get over my fears, and I'd like to help you get over yours." As Charlotte softly spoke to the horse, she saw it take its first tentative step in her direction, and continued softly encouraging it to come to her. She remained statue still, as the Pinto sniffed the apple in her hand before taking it. She continued talking to the horse softly as she gently rubbed the horse's muzzle. Even though she knew nothing about horses, other than they were big, she knew enough about responses to know when the Pinto pushed its muzzle into her ministrations of its muzzle, it liked what she was doing. It walked forward until its chest was up against the stall gate, allowing it to extend its head out into the stable. Charlotte then extended her rubbing to follow down as far as she could to the horse's left flank. While rubbing the Pinto's left flank, the horse gently moved its head and started rubbing the left side of Charlotte's face. She slowly brought her arms up and used both hands to gently rub both sides of the horse's face, before pulling out the second apple and offering it to the Pinto.
She then did something that caused Jane to stand, and almost shouted for her to stop, as she opened the gate to the stall and took a step towards the big horse. She wrapped her arms around the big horse's neck and hugged it, feeling the horse put its head on her back. They stayed like that for some minutes before Jane heard Charlotte ask the horse, "Would you like to go riding with me? I've never been on a real horse before so I'm kind of scared being up on one of you." She pulled back so she could look the horse in the eye then asked, "How about it, will you let me ride you?" She got her answer as the horse again gently started rubbing the left side of her face with its large head. Charlotte smiled then said, "I take that is a yes?" She again wrapped her arms around the big animals' neck, hugging it as it laid its head again on her back. Jane just shook her head as she watched Charlotte interact with the Pinto. In the two months she'd had the horse, it had never reacted to anyone the way she watched it react to Charlotte. Perhaps it knew it had found a human who knew exactly how it was feeling, Jane mused to herself. And knew exactly how the human was feeling.
Jane walked over to one wall where bridles were hung, and took one down. She turned to Charlotte and siad, "Charlotte, see if Pinto will follow you out of the stall. We need to put a bridle on her if you're to ride her." With her hand on the big horse's neck, Charlotte coaxed Pinto out of its stall and to where Jane was standing holding the bridle. But the minute Pinto saw the bridle she backed up until she was again in her stall and standing against the back wall. Puzzled, Charlotte slowly walked into the stall and up to the horse, speaking softly as she moved. "It's okay, Pinto. Aunt Jane isn't going to hurt you. You can trust her like you trust me, since I won't let anything hurt you." Jane slowly followed behind Charlotte but when she raised the bridle, Pinto quickly moved off to a corner of the stall.
Jane thought back to what she'd been told about Pinto, and an idea struck her, as she left the stall and came back empty handed. Charlotte was standing next to Pinto, trying to calm her, as Jane slowly approached with her hands clearly visible. Pinto let Jane get close enough that Jane was able to stroke its muzzle, and in doing so noticed something that angered her. She gently put her hand on the right side of Pinto's muzzle and moved the big horse's head so she could look at the other side of its mouth. "Stupid fool," she hissed, and rubbed Pinto's muzzle again before leaving the stall.
This time as she slowly entered the stall, she was carrying a hackamore, a bridle without a bit. This time when she held it up, Pinto didn't move, but let Jane put the hackamore on her. "Charlotte look here," Jane told Charlotte, as she pointed to the corner of Pinto's mouth. "See this long scar, there's a matching one on the other side of her mouth. That fool I bought her from not only abused her with a whip, but with a bridle as well. That's why she shied away when she saw the bridle. This hackamore won't hurt her mouth but will allow you to control her just the same." Jane backed away so she was standing in front of Pinto and had Charlotte try to lead Pinto out of the stall by the reins attached to the hackamore. Pulling gently, and speaking softly to Pinto, Charlotte urged Pinto to come with her. Since the big horse wasn't being hurt by the hackamore, she followed Charlotte and she was led out of the stall.
As Charlotte was leading Pinto out of her stall, Jane told her, "Take her to your right, Charlotte, outside through that end of the stables." As Jane followed the two, she picked up a rubber curry comb off the shelf near where the bridles were hung. Catching up with the two, she told Charlotte to stop Pinto when they were just outside the stable. Jane stood in front of Pinto and showed her the curry comb, looking for any reaction from the horse. When she saw none, she told Charlotte, "I'm going to show you how to use a curry comb. I prefer to use rubber ones since they are gentler than the metal ones." Jane talked as she started using the comb on Pinto, explaining, "You want to move in circular motions, be firm but gentle at the same time. This will work off any loose hair or dirt that's accumulated on the horse's skin. Here, you try it now," and Jane handed the curry comb to Charlotte.
Jane was about to tell Charlotte not to start on Pinto's muzzle, but as she watched Charlotte curried the horse's muzzle, she realized Pinto actually liked it. As Jane watched she realized Charlotte seemed to have an instinct for currying a horse. After Pinto's muzzle, Charlotte then started at the top of Pinto's head and worked down the side of her head to beneath her jaw. She then started on Pinto's back and worked her way to Pinto's belly. This she did the entire length of Pinto on both sides of the horse. And Pinto did move a muscle. In fact, as Jane stood watching, she swore the horse had gone to sleep, since its eyes were closed.
When Charlotte had finished currying the other side of Pinto, she walked back to stand in front of the big horse. She handed the comb to Jane then using both hands, started stroking the sides of Pinto's face, while calling her name. "Pinto, sweetheart, did you go to sleep on me?" Pinto's eyes blinked open, and she whinnied before stepping forward and began rubbing the side of Charlotte's face with the side of her muzzle. As Pinto rubbed the side of Charlotte's face, she softly told the big horse, "Ah, you're welcome." Jane just stood there watching, amazed at the bond Charlotte had formed in a short time with a horse no one could do anything with in the two months Jane had her. It seemed to Jane, as she watched the interaction between Pinto and Charlotte, whether it was horse or human, when they meet and recognize a need, it doesn't take long for a mutual bond to form. And one had definitely formed between Pinto and Charlotte today. Then Jane thought to herself, 'Now, if that moron hasn't ruined her for a saddle.'
Jane went back into the tack room, and came back out with a saddle blanket. She started to walk in front of Pinto, stopped and told Charlotte, "Charlotte, take this saddle blanket and hold it out while standing in front of Pinto. We need to know if she's had a bad experience with something like it."
Charlotte took the offered blanket, and standing in front of Pinto, held it up for her to see. Pinto sniffed it, then stepped forward and again rubbed her muzzle against the side of Charlotte's face. "Well, Aunt Jane, guess Pinto is okay with this blanket. What now?"
Jane surveyed Pinto with a critical eye, looking for any minute indications she was nervous. Seeing none, she told Charlotte, "Walk around so you're standing by her left flank, and place the blanket on her back, with the long side hanging down on the top of her flanks. That's it. Now, walk her around by the reins, and let's see if it bothers her." Charlotte took the reins in her right hand, and started walking to Pinto's right. She didn't really pull the reins to get Pinto to follow her, Pinto actually started walking after Charlotte on her own; the reins were slack the whole time.
Jane had Charlotte bring Pinto back where they'd started, and watched as Charlotte softly spoke to the horse, telling her how good she was doing. Charlotte didn't see Jane go back into the tack room or return carrying a saddle. "Charlotte," Jane said, getting Charlotte's attention again, "here is the saddle you'll be using to ride Pinto. Take it and do the exact same thing you did with the saddle blanket. If that fool I bought her from has spoiled her for a saddle, she'll let us know right away." Jane first showed Charlotte how to hold the saddle for carrying, and taking the saddle from Jane, again stood in front of Pinto. Again, Jane appraised the horse, again looking for any minute indication Pinto was afraid of the saddle.
She was rather surprised when Charlotte asked Pinto, "Well, what do you think? Is this saddle okay with you?" She was even more surprised when Pinto whinnied then nodded its head up and down, almost as though it completely understood what Charlotte had asked.
Jane then pulled a step box over from the side of the stable, positioned it near Pinto's left side and said to Charlotte, "She's doing fine so far," Jane chuckled and continued with, "even acting like she understands everything you're saying. Okay. Again, go over to her left side and step up on the step box. Go slowly, let's let her get used to you moving around her carrying something. You're high enough so putting the saddle on her will be easier. The part standing proud of the saddle is called the pammel, it goes in front, towards her head. When you place the saddle on her back, for now, be gentle, we still don't know how she'll react with it on her back. As you put it on her back, make sure the right side stirrup and cinch strap don't get hung up under the saddle, which is why it's best if you place them over the saddle toward you as you put the saddle on. Once the saddle is on, you can then let them down from the other side." Jane watched as Charlotte did as Jane had instructed, first putting the right side stirrup then the cinch strap over the saddle as Jane had said, then gently setting the saddle on her back. 'So far so good,' Jane thought to herself. 'Now we'll see how she takes to the cinch strap.' "All right, Charlotte. Go around to the far side and, reaching under Pinto, hand me the cinch strap, then come back around so I can show you how to affix the cinch strap." As Charlotte walked back around to where Jane was standing, Jane had been explaining about tightening the cinch strap. "Remember, Charlotte, you want the cinch strap tight enough so the saddle is firmly on your horse's back, but not so tight that your horse has trouble breathing. You also have to understand, if you don't get it tight enough in the beginning, and as you ride, the cinch strap loosens, you and the saddle might find yourselves on the ground. In that case, the saddle will get dirty or banged up, you might be in worse shape."
As Charlotte watched, Jane lifted the left stirrup out of her way as she held the cinch strap in her left hand. She then ran, what she called the latigo, through the buckle at the end of the cinch strap with her right hand, then pulled it up and ran it down through a 'D' ring on the saddle. She brought it across itself in the front, then went back through the 'D' ring from behind and down through the opening created when she crossed the latigo over itself. Much like tying a tie. Jane undid everything and showed Charlotte the steps again, before taking it apart and having Charlotte make the tie. She had Charlotte untie the latigo and tie it again. When Charlotte had finished her third tie, Jane shook the saddle to make sure it was secure, complimenting Charlotte on a nice job of securing the cinch strap.
All through securing the saddle to Pinto, Pinto had stood patiently. Now as Charlotte lowered the left stirrup, Pinto brought her head around and gently nudged Charlotte, whinnying and nodding her head. "Aunt Jane, I think someone wants to go for a ride."
Chuckling, Jane told Charlotte, "It does appear that way. But first, walk her around a bit, then we can see if she's comfortable with the saddle on her back, and then we'll recheck the cinch strap again before we go on our ride." As Charlotte did before, she walked off to Pinto's right, with the horse not so much being led, but following after Charlotte; the reins again were slack. After three circuits, Jane had Charlotte stop Pinto where they'd put the saddle on her, and rechecked the cinch strap, having to untie the latigo and pull a bit of slack out of the cinch strap before retying the latigo.
"Take Pinto to the tank, over there," and Jane pointed to a water tank just off the stable, "and see if she'll take some water. If she doesn't take any, then she doesn't need it, so don't try and force her to drink. While you're doing that I'll get my horse and help Francis get her horse ready. Once you see if she'll take some water, bring her back and let her stand in the shade. There's no since having her get hot before we go riding."
After going back into the stable, Jane checked to see if Francis had any trouble saddling her horse, double checking she'd tied the latigo properly. Satisfied with Francis' work, she took her horse out of its stall and got it ready to ride. Leading their horses out of the stable, Jane told Francis to ride abreast of Charlotte, watching for any signs Pinto was about to bolt. When the two reached Charlotte, Jane then instructed her how to mount Pinto, which took Charlotte a couple of tries before she finally sat atop Pinto. As Jane watched Charlotte finally get into the saddle, she swore Pinto acted like a human saying, 'jezzz,' as Pinto first brought her head up then down, then moved it side to side. Jane handed the reins to Charlotte, showing her how to guide Pinto if she wanted to go left, right, or to stop. Francis, having already mounted her horse, watched as Jane mounted hers and led off down a path leading away from the stable. As instructed, Francis rode next to Charlotte, talking to her about nothing in particular, just to help keep Charlotte calm if she was nervous.
Jane had been right, there was some pretty views on her land, as Charlotte took in all of the greenery, flowers, birds, and smells. There was a freshness of the area, both to the eye and the nose. Jane led them to a small pond, tucked away behind a tall stand of trees and flowering bushes. When Francis and Charlotte had stopped their horses next to Jane, she asked Charlotte, "Is Pinto doing all right? Have you had any problems with her? And how are you doing, for your first time on a real horse?"
Six pairs of eyes turned to look at Charlotte, Pinto's being the third pair. She had turned her head as far as she could, and was looking at Charlotte after Jane asked her questions. Charlotte reached down and patted Pinto on the side of her neck, before telling Jane, "She's been a gem, Aunt Jane. She's been gentle with me for my first time on a horse. And it seems she's enjoying the ride. I have noticed one thing though, my butt is a bit sore right now. But otherwise, when can we ride again?"
Jane nodded her head when Charlotte mentioned her butt, something new riders discover after a while. Both Jane and Francis chuckled, with Jane saying, "Your body isn't used to how you're sitting, Charlotte. You're astride something with a wide body, whereas your body is used to sitting in some type of chair. The muscles in your legs will likely be sore after our ride, so you'll need to soak in a warm bath when we get back to the house."
Two things hadn't gone unnoticed by Jane, how Pinto reacted when Jane questioned Charlotte, and that Pinto whinnied when she and Francis chuckled at hearing about Charlotte's butt. Jane got the feeling Pinto actually understood human speech. The three sat quietly on their horses, for some time, listening and watching the life on and around the pond. They saw a family of Mallards moving across the surface of the water on the far side of the pond. A bullfrog loudly called from the reeds off to their right. And the mournful call of a Loon seemed to fill the entire pond. Jane reined her horse to the left, then told the girls, "Come on, girls, let's continue on."
Charlotte had enjoyed looking at the pond, with its serenity and beauty, and had barely moved the reins to the left as Pinto turned left and started following Jane's horse. Feeling confident, Charlotte leaned down close to Pinto's left ear and told her, as she gently patted her neck, "You're doing fine, Pinto. Thank you." Pinto threw her head up and down, just as though she was saying 'you're welcome.' The path Jane led them on, traversed a good portion of one corner of her property. Allowing them to move from the lush green of that surrounding the pond, to grassy, to slightly hilly. The path returned them to the stable from a different direction than when they'd left, a little over an hour later.
Jane and Francis couldn't help themselves and laughed, as they watched Charlotte get down off Pinto, and immediately found it difficult to stand without learning about her sore legs and butt. She tried to walk around but found it difficult to walk correctly because her thigh muscles didn't want to cooperate. She even put her hands on her butt, as she walked, trying to ease the pain she was feeling. It didn't help when Pinto whinnied and just shook her head, causing Charlotte to walk her best until she was standing in front of her horse. "Oh, so you think it's funny my legs are sore and my butt hurts, do you?" Pinto whinnied again and threw her head up and down. Smarting from the pain she felt, but with a grin on her face, Charlotte told Pinto, "See if I give you any more apples, you big goof." This seemed to set Pinto off, as she continued whinnying for several minutes, just as though she was laughing.
More serious now, Jane instructed Charlotte to remove Pinto's saddle and blanket, then walk her around and see if she'd take some water. She then showed Charlotte how to tell if Pinto had cooled down, before showing her how to brush Pinto before putting her back in her stall. All three horses were then given fresh feed to eat at their leisure, as Jane and Francis walked back to the house, with Charlotte approximating someone walking beside them. Marie met them as the three entered the house, noticing how Charlotte was walking. She chuckled then told Charlotte, "Ah, mon cheri, you take a hot bath, and soak. When you're done I'll rub some cream on those parts now screaming at you. It will help with your outside, but you'll have to be patient with your inside and let it get better."
It was hard for Jane not to laugh out loud, as she watched Charlotte start to climb the stairs, saying with each step, "Gawd, that hurts! Oww, gawd that hurts!" Francis had followed Charlotte slowly up the stairs, and when she was out of sight, the two women did chuckle, with Marie asking Jane, "How did she do, cheri?"
Marie looked shocked when Jane told her, "She rode Pinto." Both women had tried for the two months Pinto had been with Jane, to get Pinto out of her stall, even interact with them. But she would have none of it, she stayed as Charlotte had first seen her, only coming up towards the gate of the stall to eat.
"How could she have ridden Pinto, it wouldn't even do anything for either of us?" Jane smiled, told Marie she needed a cup of tea, before they sat down at the kitchen table and Jane told Marie everything that had happened. Including her belief that Pinto actually understood human speech.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
After telling Marie about how Charlotte and Pinto interacted, Jane went to her bedroom to clean up after their ride, while Marie, still shaking her head, went up the stairs to Charlotte's bedroom. It wasn't long after Jane left the kitchen that Marie, Francis, and Charlotte appeared in the kitchen and began getting things out of the cabinets, drawers, and refrigerator needed to set the table for supper. As Marie watched Charlotte, she couldn't help chuckle to herself as she watched Charlotte carefully move or she'd hear, "Oww...gawd that hurts," as she'd stooped to get something out of a cabinet, or reach high in a cabinet too quickly. Marie thought back to the recent conversations she and Jane had about Charlotte, and how Marie felt there was a reason Charlotte had been sent to them. Now, after hearing how Pinto had responded to Charlotte, not only coming out of her stall but allowing Charlotte to ride her, Marie was more convinced than ever that Charlotte had been sent to them for more than just to keep her out of a Federal Court. And she honestly felt Charlotte's real task was yet to come. Marie's musing ended as the girls came back into the kitchen to help her prepare the food they would be having for supper. And she continued chuckling to herself as she often heard, "Oww...gawd, when will it stop hurting?" coming from Charlotte.
It was hard for Francis to not laugh a little, as Charlotte gingerly reached to place items on the dining room table. Or not to laugh as they all watched as Charlotte took her seat at the table to eat. She kept shifting in her chair, trying to find a spot on her bottom that didn't complain as she sat her weight on that spot. Charlotte looked up and caught all three women smirking and chuckling at Charlotte's predicament, and told them, "It's not funny, it hurts." She tried to keep a straight face but she couldn't, and laughed along with the other three at the table.d
"Charlotte," Jane started, "you'll be sore for a few days because you've used muscles not normally used. It'd be the case no matter what new event you tried. Unless you use a particular muscle group regularly, you will end up sore afterwards. Perhaps tomorrow we can ride again, so your body can adjust to riding a horse. And I believe Pinto would enjoy another time with you."
As she usually did, Jane used their meals as a learning session, after they'd discussed the possibility of riding again tomorrow. Jane asked about a current event that happened a day ago, and what both girls thought. When both confessed they knew nothing about the event, they received a stern look and gained another assignment to read the newspaper Jane received and to look at a website she named which provided good information about recent events. And they'd be asked their thoughts at every meal from now on.
After finishing supper, Jane retired to the study, while Charlotte and Francis cleared the table and helped Marie in the kitchen. The girls left the kitchen when their work was done, with Francis going into the library to start on her current events assignment, and believing Charlotte had gone up to her bedroom. It was a half hour later when Francis had gone looking for Charlotte, that she ended up knocking on the study door. She heard Jane say, "Enter," before she entered the Study and closed the door behind her. Marie and Jane had been talking before Francis entered the Study, but after Francis' question of, "Have either of you seen Charlotte?" Both women went into action. Jane told Francis to go with Marie and search the house, she didn't want Francis to know about the cameras she monitored in the study. Jane opened the cabinet and turned the monitor on and began changing from camera to camera in search of Charlotte. There were a few rooms in her house without cameras, but they were kept locked at all times. As she changed between interior cameras to exterior cameras, something caught her eye as she viewed the image from the camera that watched the back of her house. There was a soft light being emitted from the stable, which should have been dark. She shut down the monitor, closed the cabinet doors, locked it, before going in search of Marie and Francis. She had a good idea where they'd find Charlotte.
"How're you doing girl?" Charlotte asked Pinto, as she gently used the curry comb on 'her' horse. "I had a good time with you today, and Aunt Jane said we might ride again tomorrow. Would you like that?" Pinto threw her head up and down, the whinnied, again acting as though she understood every word Charlotte said. "You know, one day I'll be able to go home, a home I miss, and parents I miss. I'll hate leaving here, and you. Aunt Jane, though strict at times, has become like my real Aunt. There are times I'd like to have a real Aunt like her. And Marie, I really like her. And this is the first time I've been a sister to a sister, feels kind of good, since I'm an only child. There, all done, you should be feeling better now."
When Charlotte finished currying Pinto, the horse turned until she was facing Charlotte, walked forward and placed its head on her shoulder, letting her hug its neck as she cried. She missed her family, school, her life, such as it was. She missed buying the present she had planned on buying for her mom's 35th birthday. She was going to miss her mom's birthday. Because of her sheltered life, she still had no idea why someone would lie about her being involved in a crime, causing her to be sent here with Jane and Marie.
Pinto had remained silent, even though she saw the three standing outside her stall, watching and listening. "Well, girl, I guess I better get back to the house and let you get some sleep. I hope no one is angry with me needing to come and see you, you seem to understand how I'm feeling right now. Someone wronged you too." She then kissed Pinto on her muzzle, turned and froze, as she took in Jane, Marie, and Francis standing just outside Pinto's stall. She then did the one thing Jane absolutely hated to see her do, she shrugged her shoulders before saying, "I needed to be with her right now. I needed to be with her because she knows how I'm feeling right now." As Charlotte looked at the three women, Francis was nodding her head. Marie had a look of understanding, and compassion on her face. But Jane. Jane had her Jane face on, even though inside she was crying because of what she heard Charlotte tell Pinto.
"What do you mean coming out here without telling anyone, young lady? We searched the entire house looking for you, because you didn't tell anyone where you were going. Well, not any more. From now on you don't go anywhere unless you get permission from me. You don't go to your bedroom, the bathroom, anywhere, without MY permission. DO. YOU. UNDERSTAND. ME?"
Even though Jane acted angry with Charlotte, the girl saw through Jane, and walked up to her, put her arms around Jane and told her, "And I love you too, Aunt Jane." Jane fought hard not to let tears well up in her eyes, but lost the battle.
She too loved this young girl, as though she was her very own niece. But she had to be herself with her right now and asked Charlotte, "Did you understand what I just said, Charlotte? You go nowhere without my permission!"
Jane didn't see the trap she just laid, one Charlotte was about to point out to her. "Yes, Aunt Jane. I understand and I'm sorry I worried you. But how'd you know I was in the stable? And if I have to ask for permission before going anywhere, that will mean I'll have to come and find you if I wish to go to sleep or shower, or go in and out of the kitchen when helping get our meals ready. It will mean I'll need your permission to go into and out of my closet when I get dressed, or to and from my dresser and vanity. It will mean I'll have to find you and get your permission when I'm studying in the library and need to get a book from one of the shelves. Or even walk around the Study with the book balanced on my head. It will mean..." But Charlotte never finished what she was about to say to Jane. She'd been hugging Jane as she spoke, so couldn't see Marie or Francis' faces, both holding their hands over their mouths to keep from laughing.
Jane hadn't been specific in her instructions, and Charlotte was reminding Jane of that fact with what she'd told Jane. "All right, Charlotte, you may stop now. I get your point. I would have to be with you joined at the hip in order for you to follow my instructions. Impertinent child. Then let me amend my instructions. You do not leave the house without my permission." She then reached down, took Charlotte's chin in her right hand, lifted it until she was looking into Charlotte's eyes and asked, "Is THAT clear enough for you, young lady?"
Charlotte nodded her head then said, "Yes, Aunt Jane. Quite clear," as tears slid down her cheeks. "And thank you for caring about me so much."
Jane looked up to the underside of the stable roof and said, "Why do you make it so hard for me to be angry with you, you sweet child," and pulled Charlotte into a hug, letting her own tears fall as they may.
Charlotte hadn't closed the gate to Pinto's stall, when she'd turned and walked out to hug Jane. Jane was looking down at Charlotte when she felt something heavy lay across her left shoulder. When she looked up she saw Pinto standing there, with her head on Jane's shoulder. She felt, more than saw, the concern coming from Pinto, as said aloud, "Not only do I have a petulant child, but a horse too." It wasn't planned, or rehearsed, but together, as on cue, Charlotte laughed at the same time Pinto whinnied. Jane looked at Pinto and told her, "You, back in your stall." Then looking down at Charlotte, she said, "And you, young miss, a shower then bed." Pinto was standing there looking at Jane, with what Jane could only believe was a smile on the horse's muzzle. "Well, what are you looking at? Go on, get back into your stall, this girl needs her sleep." And she reached up and gently stroked Pinto's muzzle, softly telling her, "And so do you." As Charlotte had done, she leaned forward and lightly kissed Pinto's muzzle, before watching Pinto walk backwards into her stall. Jane was now trusted by Pinto.
Francis closed the gate for Pinto's stall, and walking alongside Marie, the two followed Jane and Charlotte back to the house. Jane's arm around Charlotte's shoulder as Charlotte leaned into Jane as they walked. Marie's words to Jane about Charlotte came back to her, as they'd watched a horse they'd had for two months, a horse that had been abused by its former owner, a horse who wouldn't so much as come to the gate of its stall for them, give its trust to a young girl who gave her trust to the horse. And because of the trust it had been given, and how it saw the girl being treated, it finally gave its trust to them. Marie knew she'd been right in what she told Jane, Charlotte was here for more than to be kept out of Federal Court. Much more.
Jane went up to Charlotte's bedroom with her, and Marie with Francis. As Charlotte took off her shoes and dress, and as she was standing before Jane in her bra, panties, garter belt and stocking, Jane inspected Charlotte's appearance before telling her, "While you shower you need to save yourself. I see a bit of hair that needs to be removed before it becomes noticeable to others. And soak yourself in the bath after showering, it will help ease some of the soreness you're still feeling. I'll return after you're through in the bathroom." After Jane left Charlotte sat down on her bed and removed her stockings, before taking off the garter belt and putting both back in the correct drawers in the dresser. She then took out a clean bra and matching panties, and taking her robe with her, went into the bathroom to do as Jane had instructed. Charlotte's mind started to wander as she waited for the water to get hot, and continued to wander as she stepped into the bathtub and started letting the warm water wash over her body. She thought back to Taylor's on that day, and everything she'd done. She thought about being accused of a crime she knew she hadn't been involved with. She thought back to her parents, school, and the life she had, and compared it all to what she now had. She was with two women who, while firm in their demands, did so out of love for her and Francis. A love for wanting them to have a better life than they previously had. She also thought back to Jane telling her she was at the stage Jane wanted all her girls to be before leaving her, and if that was so, then why had she been sent here and not to a detention center? She thought back to earlier today, and how Pinto responded to her, even though she'd been with Jane for two months. Why had Pinto responded to her and not Jane or Marie? Surely both could be trusted by Pinto? Or was it because they reminded her of the man who'd abused her? She also thought back to getting Jane angry with her because she left the house without asking Jane. But how Jane found it hard to be angry with her. Her thoughts continued as she rinsed shampoo off her hair and applied the conditioner.
She now thought back to her time in the holding cell with the other three boys, the ones who'd been caught shoplifting at Taylor's. She clearly saw the boy who'd wet himself, and the one who idolized their leader, and Toby, their leader. The one who tried to intimidate him but retreated because of how he was looking at Toby. Toby. The boy who was arriving in two days. The boy he had every right to treat in a detestable way for what he'd done to him. The boy he knew was more afraid of someone than being in holding or being sent to Jane's. The boy Charlotte knew she'd help change the life he had been living so he'd be happier leaving that when he arrived. She'd become his Pinto, and show him a trust he'd likely never experienced before. She rinsed the body wash off herself before grabbing the razor and shaving her body, as another thought crossed her mind. She stopped shaving and wondered, '>What's the real reason I've been sent here>?' No answer came to her, as she resumed shaving then changed from shower to bath, and let the bath fill so she could soak.
Jane had been watching Charlotte as she showered, and could see from her facial expressions that she'd been thinking. She guessed about today, about what she'd told Pinto, and by one expression, Toby arriving on Monday. Jane couldn't help chuckle as Charlotte lowered herself into the bath water, after the water was high enough to cover her. "Owwweee...gawd that hurt. Makes me wonder if I want to ride again if it's going to hurt this much every time. But if I don't ride, what about Pinto? She seemed to enjoy the ride. I can't let her down. Ah, well, a few aches and pains are worth going through for a friend."
When Jane saw Charlotte open the drain of the bath and start to get out of the bathtub, she shut off the monitor, concealed it with the doors of the cabinet, and went up to Charlotte's bedroom, asking when she arrived, "Charlotte, are you through taking a shower and soaking in the tub?" And opened the door to the bathroom to see Charlotte drying herself.
"Yes Aunt Jane, just now. Aunt Jane, I have a question I'd like to ask."
Jane nodded her head then said, "You may ask me your question as we dry and set your hair. Now hurry and finish. You've had a long, and interesting, day and need your sleep."
Charlotte came out of the bathroom wearing her clean bra, panties, and her robe. Jane pointed to the chair in front of the vanity and Charlotte walked over and sat down facing Jane. Jane had been ready to help Charlotte blow dry her hair and asked Charlotte, "What's your question, Charlotte?"
Jane just picked up a brush when Charlotte asked, "Aunt Jane, why am I really here? I could have been sent to a detention center and been all right there, given my self defense skills. But I wasn't, I was sent here. And you've told me yourself that I'm where you want all your girls to be before they leave you. So if I don't need to be here to learn how to live a better life, why am I really here?"
Charlotte's question had stopped Jane cold, still holding the hair dryer in her left hand and the brush in her right. She stared at Charlotte, realizing her question was the same one she and Marie had asked themselves. Jane dropped her hands and told Charlotte, "Truthfully, Charlotte? I don't know. Marie and I have asked ourselves the same question. And we aren't any closer to realizing an answer. And you are correct, after our girls are here for some time, you are where we hope they are when they're ready to leave us. So that isn't the reason you're here. And yes, you could have been sent to a detention center and survived with your skills, but you would have been wasted there. The only possible conclusion Marie and I could arrive at was that your very nature was needed at this time. You were needed here to help Francis, Pinto, and we believe help Toby, the boy who falsely accused you of his crime. Is any of this the truth? We don't know. But I think the change in Francis and Pinto is proof positive that it is your nature that's supposed to be here at this point in time. We'll have to wait and see about Toby. Now, sit still so I can get your hair dried. Watch what I do, you'll be doing this from now on."
When Charlotte's hair was thoroughly dried, Jane replaced the hair dryer and brush in the drawers of the vanity. She then took Charlotte's chin in her right hand, and turning the girl's face left and right, proclaimed, "You've done a good job removing your makeup," before telling Charlotte to brush her teeth then apply moisturizer to her face, arms, and legs. After Charlotte had climbed into bed, Jane sat down next to her and said, "Thank you for today, Charlotte. You made it quite interesting. You also made me realize a few things about myself as well. And one of those things is continuing to be your Aunt after you leave. If you'll have me."
Charlotte reached and took Jane's hands in hers. "Aunt Jane, I couldn't think of two more wonderful ladies I'd like for my Aunts. Of course, you'd be my favorite, you understand," which was said with a smirk on Charlotte's face. Jane kissed Charlotte goodnight on the forehead, before she walked over to the door, turned out the light and closed the door behind her and she left Charlotte's bedroom.
As Jane walked down the stairs, and to the Study, she mused to herself, 'Where has my dragon gone. The one that spits fire at my girls?' She took a few more stairs before chuckling and thinking, 'Its found its queen. It found the one sent to save it from itself.'
Charlotte had an abrupt wakening the next morning, as the covers on her bed were thrown off her to the tune of Jane saying, "Auf und los, Sonnenschein. Vor dem Frühstück müssen wir arbeiten." Jane reached down when Charlotte groaned, roughly shook her and told her, "Get up, girl, NOW!"
At Jane's 'NOW' Charlotte abruptly sat up in bed, telling Jane, "I'm up, I'm up." She swung her legs out of bed, glanced at the window, then told Jane, "It's still dark outside. What needs to be done in the dark?"
Jane reached down and took Charlotte's chin in her left hand, pulled her head up so she was looking into Charlotte's eyes and told her, "Work, young lady. Work. Now get out of that bed, put on a clean bra and panties, use the bathroom, then I'll show you what to wear before breakfast. Now, MOVE!" Again used her command voice, which as it always did, made Charlotte literally jump off the bed and rush to the dresser for a clean bra and panties. Once she would have been embarrassed to let Jane see her naked, but that notion was lost the first time she hesitated in doing so at Jane's command.
While her need to use the toilet was starting to become urgent, she quickly made her bed, folded her nightie and placed it under her pillow before heading straight to the bathroom. As Jane stood waiting, she heard the toilet flush, the sink faucet run, and a freshly washed Charlotte almost come running out of the bathroom, stopping inches from running over Jane. She started walking around Jane, heading for the vanity, but was stopped when Jane said, "You can do that after we come back into the house, you'll have to shower anyway. Follow me." Jane led Charlotte into her closet, where she pointed to pants, shirts, and boots that she told Charlotte to wear for the work they'd be doing. She then told Charlotte she'd need a pair of socks to wear with the boots, and to take everything she'd indicated and quickly get dressed. She'd meet Charlotte downstairs in fifteen minutes. Jane smiled to herself as she watched Charlotte 'grab' everything and rush out of the closet, dropping it all on the bed before going to the dresser for a pair of socks. She left Charlotte to sort herself out and went downstairs to see if Charlotte made it there within the fifteen minutes given to her.
When Jane reached the bottom of the stairs, she found Francis sitting on the bench properly dressed for the work they'd do before breakfast. She looked at Francis, as Francis said, "You didn't tell her, did you?"
With a smirk on her face Jane said, "I did not, and neither are you. Do you understand?"
Francis' reply of, "Yes, Aunt Jane," was the result of just such an occasion not long after she arrived at Jane's home. She made the mistake of thinking what Jane didn't know wouldn't hurt, as she told the new girl what they were about to do. The reward for what she'd been told NOT to do was to muck out all three stalls, by herself, for the next two weeks. Now, any time Jane said, 'Do Not,' Francis did not.
With two minutes to go, Charlotte came hurrying down the stairs. She'd learned the difference between hurrying, hurrying with abandonment, and running the stairs after the exercise Jane had her do because she ran up the stairs that one time. Twenty trips up and down the stairs in a row makes for a lasting memory. Jane looked at her watch, then at Charlotte, then said, "Good, you made it with two minutes to spare. With practice you'll become even faster getting dressed. Okay girls, follow me." With Jane in the lead, and Francis getting up off the bench and falling in beside Charlotte, the two girls stepped out into the semi-blackened morning; the beginning of the rising sun could be seen off in the distance. Charlotte gave Francis a questioning look but received a head shake in return. Charlotte stuck her tongue out at Francis, who giggled because of the antics. Without turning around, or even possibly knowing what Charlotte had just done, Jane told her, "Charlotte, young ladies don't stick out their tongues. It isn't polite." This time Francis gave Charlotte the, 'I haven't a clue,' gesture as Charlotte's shocked face looked at Francis. Then to further shock Charlotte, Jane told her, "It wasn't hard to figure out what you'd just done, Charlotte. I instructed Francis not to tell you what we'd be doing this morning, so your frustrated response to her silence would be sticking out your tongue at her."
Charlotte saw they were heading to the stable, and looked at Francis again, getting the same response as before. She kept her tongue in her mouth, but let Francis see she wasn't pleased to be kept ignorant. Again Jane shocked her by saying, "Stop trying to get Francis to tell you what we're going to do, Charlotte. Francis has learned what I mean when I tell her not to say anything. I can show you the same lesson she encountered if you'd like, Charlotte. If you keep trying to get Francis to tell you what we're going to do." Francis was vehemently shaking her head after what Jane just said, making it clear Charlotte didn't want the same lesson.
When they entered the stable, Jane turned on the lights, then told Charlotte what they were going to do; they meaning she and Francis. "Charlotte, you and Francis are going to muck out all three stalls. Francis will show you where the gloves are, where the pitchforks are stored, where the broom and scoop are, and the cart used to take the old straw out of the stable. She's had plenty of practice doing this, so pay attention to what she tells you and shows you. Or you might get plenty of practice on your own." Charlotte looked at Francis, who quickly looked up, rolled her eyes, then shook her head side to side. Charlotte got the message loud and clear.
Francis started by telling Charlotte, "Follow me," and took her over where the gloves were stored, helping her pick out a pair that fit her hands. Then she took her to another room where the cart, broom, scoop, and pitchforks were stored. She placed two of each tool into the cart before wheeling the cart out next to Pinto's stall. She then took Charlotte into the tack room, and took down two halters and hackamore, explaining, "We'll use these to secure the horses so they don't run off on their own. I didn't do that my first time, and oh was Aunt Jane mad. She had to chase that horse clear down to the pond." Francis led her back to Pinto's stall, letting Charlotte talk to Pinto before opening the gate and giving the hackamore to Charlotte. She talked Charlotte through placing the hackamore on Pinto, before leading her out of the stall so they could muck it out. Taking everything out of the cart, Francis gave Charlotte one of the pitchforks, taking the other one, and talking Charlotte through what they were to do.
With both girls working together, and Charlotte letting Francis know what she thought of the odor, it wasn't long before the old hay and body waste had been removed. Francis then had Charlotte set her pitchfork down and take one of the brooms, again showing her what they'd do with the brooms. As Charlotte watched, and held her broom, Francis got the scoop and had Charlotte push what they'd swept up into the scoop. After dumping the scoop into the cart with the old straw, she then came back with a bucket of sawdust which she spread on the floor of the stall. She told Charlotte it will help absorb any moisture left after taking out the old straw. Once that was swept up, Francis took Charlotte to the new hay bales. Carrying a bale together one at a time, they put enough new straw in Pinto's stall to cover the floor several inches thick. When they had finished, Jane came to inspect their work. Satisfied, she told them to keep going, after giving each girl a bottle of bottled water. After Pinto was put back into her stall, and after the girls had drank some water, they repeated the process with the next stall, and with the stall holding Jane's horse. It wasn't until they'd put away the tools, halters and hackamore, and gloves that Jane told them, "You girls did a fine job this morning. So I won't need to be out here with you tomorrow morning to supervise."
Francis knew what was coming, Charlotte stood there in shock, then asked, "Every morning? Really?"
Jane glared at Charlotte before telling her, "Yes, Charlotte, every morning. Not only is that straw their bedding but their bathroom too. And it needs to be replaced every morning. Of course, if you found working with Francis too difficult, I could let her sleep in and have you to muck out the stalls by yourself."
Charlotte knew right then she'd stepped into a big pile, and told Jane, "Ah, no, Aunt Jane. Mucking out the stalls in the morning is a fine job to start a person's morning."
Jane nodded her head, then put her Jane smile on her face before saying, "I thought you'd agree with me, Charlotte. You two go shower and get ready for the day. I'll inspect the both of you after you come down to help Marie with breakfast."
She stood and watched both girls head back to the house, before walking over and taking an apple out of the basket. She then walked over and held it out to Pinto, who gently took it out of her hand. "Well, Pinto, how'd I do this morning? Was I too rough on our Charlotte?" Swallowing the chewed up apple pieces, Pinto threw her head up and down before side to side. Jane had done all right this morning with their Charlotte.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Before going back to her house, Jane gave the horses fresh feed and water, so it couldn't be said Jane hadn't helped. She turned off the lights then slowly walked back to her house, thinking as she walked. Francis had math lessons to complete, a weak subject for her, but not for Charlotte. So after breakfast was finished Charlotte would go with Francis and tutor her in her math assignment. An evil smile appeared on her face, as she thought of the one place a boy would never think of going. Time to see how her Charlotte reacted to those places. They'd go shopping in the afternoon, and maybe Brenda needs a model to show a client or two how their choice of fashion would look on a girl of their age?
She made a phone call after going into her house, letting Brenda know she'd be bringing a new girl into her Boutique in the afternoon. She made another phone call, this time to Carolyn, asking if she'd be busy tomorrow and if she could get Charlotte and Francis in for the works. Brenda was thrilled to have a new model for a few hours and Carolyn would be busy but could fit Charlotte and Francis in. Carolyn laughed, then told Jane, "In fact, Jane, if you bring the girls around in the afternoon, I believe Charlotte would welcome the chance to be my model for the young girls' makeup class." Jane realized she'd have to be 'that' Jane to Charlotte, if the girl balked, but she needed to know how well Charlotte could handle being in front of other women and girls her age while modeling various outfits, and when the salon she was going to visit was extremely busy with other women and young girls, and she was put on display. She crossed her mental fingers.
After cleaning up herself, she went in search of Francis and Charlotte, finding both of them in the kitchen helping Marie. "Girls, let me look at you. Stand over there," and Jane, in Jane mode, pointed to an open space on the floor in the kitchen. She walked around the two girls, taking in how they were both dressed. Making sure their stockings weren't laddered, or their slips showing. She appraised their sense of style, making sure the shoes they wore complemented the dresses they had on. She moved to their hair, noticing both did need Carolyn's help. But they'd both done well styling their hair. She then moved on to their faces, looking first at Francis then Charlotte. There too she noticed a different 'style' in their looks. Neither had done a 'bad' job applying their makeup, for boys, but she stared too long at Charlotte, wondering how she'd fare tomorrow when Carolyn used her as a model in her makeup class.
"Is something wrong, Aunt Jane?" Charlotte had felt uneasy as Jane stared at her, wondering if she'd again made a mistake putting on her makeup.
Charlotte's question brought Jane out of herself and she replied with, "Oh, no, Charlotte. Nothing is wrong, you both have done a fine job with your makeup." Jane had almost told them what they'd be doing this afternoon, and tomorrow, but decided since she never told any of her girls they'd become models, but used that to force them to acquiesce or be exposed as boys dressed as girls, thus making them act differently. She decided 'dragon' Jane had to be present when Charlotte found out.
"Girls, after breakfast and you're finished in the kitchen, I believe Francis has her math assignments to complete." When Jane mentioned math, Francis looked as though she'd eaten something worse than a lemon. She had a dejected, horrid, loathing look on her face, that brightened, somewhat, as Jane continued with, "And because I know you've been struggling with that assignment, Charlotte will be your tutor in the subject. She has, after all, shown herself to understand math to a higher degree. Isn't that so, Charlotte?"
Jane's mini-dragon was addressing Charlotte, who recognized there was only one answer Jane would accept to her question, "Ah, that's true, Aunt Jane. I'd be more than willing to help Francis with her math assignment."
The mini-dragon smiled, showing her teeth in the process. "That's very thoughtful of you Charlotte. I'm sure Francis will appreciate your help." Francis had learned, from experience, when Aunt Jane's voice took on a cold edge it was best to agree even if she said to eat a fish raw.
She shook herself remembering the consequences of not understanding what that cold voice meant not long ago. "Yes, Aunt Jane. I'd appreciate any help in math I could receive. And thank you Charlotte for offering to help me." Both girls thought they saw Jane's eyes flash, as both took the hint and accepted what Jane told them.
Jane, as usual, used their meals to quiz the girls over various subjects, including their personal lives. And if Jane chose their personal lives, the meal became quite uncomfortable for the girl being grilled. So much so that once one of Jane's girls refused to come to the next meal. And as usual, Jane didn't tolerate any of her girls not sitting down with everyone to eat. Jane finally used the threat of sending her home as she was dressed to get her down to the dining room table. But she never answered another question Jane put to her about her personal life, and lived through the consequences of her decision.
It was only after one particular trying time for the girl that she finally broke down. And during that time told Jane how her father killed her mother and younger brother while in a drunken rage. She'd been out of the house during that time, but found her mother and brother dead when she arrived home. Her mother was lying on the living room floor, her brother embedded in one of the living room walls. Her father had slammed him into the wall at the exact location of a wall stud. Her young brother had been slammed so hard into the wall that he'd been impaled on the wall stud. She found her father passed out on the kitchen floor. After that experience, Jane made sure to get all the details she could about the girl's personal life before touching on questions of that nature.
As the girls cleared the breakfast table, then began helping Marie in the kitchen, Jane went into the study and pulled up Toby Camber's personal information. As she looked through the file she'd been given by Ruth, she noticed there wasn't much about his personal life. She picked up the phone, dialed a number and when her call was received, she told the person answering her call, "Hi, it's Jane. I need some personal information on a boy named Toby Camber, he's arriving on Monday. I need to know what kind of family life he has, number of family members, the usual things. And at our usual agreed rate, plus your expenses."
Some years ago Jane had helped the woman she was speaking to out of a very sticky situation. One which could have cost the woman her life, and she never forgot Jane for risking her own life to help her. "I'll have what you need by tomorrow." And Jane heard the connection go dead. The woman was the same girl whose father killed her mother and younger brother. Who finally broke and told Jane everything. The girl who eventually became a girl because her father was hunting her after he was released from prison. Because he thought she'd seen what he'd done and had helped send him to prison. He did find her, after the change, and held her in an old rooming house.
During one of his drunken sprees she was able to get a message to Jane by telling her father she was ordering them some pizza. Jane was only an hour away and managed to get to her in forty-five minutes. Jane then knocked on their door to the room, said, "Pizza delivery," and when the girl's drunken father opened the door, Jane stunned him with a stun gun. They both thought he was unconscious as the girl told Jane where she'd find the key to unlock the handcuffs locking her to a long chain. But as Jane was unlocking the cuffs, the girl's father came around and went after Jane with a knife, even though he was drunk. Jane had freed the girl by then and used the chain to fend off the man until he became angry that he couldn't reach her. By chance, as the man rushed her, he stumbled and lost his balance, giving Jane a clear chance at his throat. She used the chain to catch him around his throat and let him pass her by. Now being behind the man, she crossed her arms as tightly as she could, until the man stopped moving. She grabbed the girl's hand and rushed them to her car, where she called the police. With Jane's statement, and the girl's statement, and testimony for Jane, Jane's actions were ruled self defence of herself and another person.
Jane later learned the girl had become a licensed investigator, but somewhat of a recluse because of her experiences. But if she said she'd have the information Jane needed by the next day, Jane would have it by the next day. She always kept her word to Jane. Jane realized that until she learned more about Toby Camber's personal life she couldn't make any more plans for his educational course. That girl's case made a lasting impression on Jane.
She then opened the cabinet and turned on the monitor, switching to the cameras in the library. As she watched and listened, Charlotte was slowly explaining Factoring Algebraic Expressions to Francis, going by what was written on the chalkboard in the library.
Charlotte was sitting besides Francis, holding her and tears ran down her face. "Charlotte, I just don't get all this. I've read what's in the book but can't understand what's being said."
"It's okay, Francis. I'll go over it again until you understand how it's done. Francis, not everyone learns in the same way, and you're not alone in having trouble understanding what you read. Many have trouble comprehending what they read, so they have to resort to other methods of learning. Some find it easier if they are shown how to do something, or it's explained to them." Francis nodded her head, knowing she had to finish this math assignment or explain why it didn't happen.
Jane watched as Charlotte walked to the chalkboard and wrote the number 45 on the board. "Okay, Francis. Tell me every possible way you can think of to get the number 45."
As Jane listened, Francis actually fired off several normal combinations of numbers used to get the number 45. "You have 9 x 5, 1 x 45, 36 + 9, 39 + 6, 42 + 3, 43 + 2..." and Francis continued until Charlotte called a halt. Charlotte had written the number 45 on the right side of the board. Charlotte had spaced out the combinations Francis had said, leaving space between each combination. Then, in between each combination she placed an equal sign before placing the final one before the number 45. After Charlotte had called a halt, and stood back, Francis saw equal signs between every combination she'd given Charlotte, and a final equal sign before the number 45. Charlotte stood and looked at Francis, who was examining what Charlotte had written.
Then Jane heard Francis say something she'd do nothing about, this time, as Francis dropped her head down then said, "Aw, shit, so that's factoring. But how do you apply this to an algebraic expression?"
As Jane watched, Charlotte started out simple, by writing 3x on the board. Then she asked Francis, "What does 3x actually mean?"
Francis shrugged her shoulders, shook her head and said, "3 times x." Charlotte then stood and looked at Francis, who again caught Jane's attention with, "Shit, that's the factor of 3x." The fire had been lit, and Francis started answering Charlotte's questions as she wrote more and more complicated expressions on the board. And Francis gave the factor of each expression without hesitation.
As her fire had been lit, Jane watched as Francis then went back to the set of papers with algebraic expressions on them and completed the twenty five problems in a matter of minutes. She saw Charlotte look up at something, then tell Francis, "It's time for us to go help Marie get dinner ready, Francis."
Francis had just turned the last page face down as Charlotte said they needed to go help Marie. Jane chuckled as she heard Francis exclaim with a sigh, "Gads, I'm glad that's done. I would never have finished those pages without your help, Charlotte. Thank you."
Charlotte just smiled then said, "You're welcome. Come on, we better get going."
Francis knew that Jane had expected her to finish that math assignment before dinner, so after turning off the monitor and closing and locking the cabinet doors, Jane left the study to once again become the Jane who could send chills up the spines of her girls. She found Francis and Charlotte setting the dining room table, and as she stood in the entrance to the dining room, she asked, in her Jane persona, "Francis, did you complete that math assignment as you were instructed?"
Francis looked at Charlotte, smiled, then told Jane, "Yes, Aunt Jane. The pages have been completed and are laying face down on the table as you instructed."
Jane gave Francis a sharp stare before saying, "We shall see, Francis." Both girls watched as Jane walked to the library, opening the door and closing it behind her after entering.
Charlotte noticed that Francis looked nervous, and told her, "Don't worry, Francis. I watched you work, and you answered every one of those problems correctly. You did, after all, have a grreeaatt teacher!"
Francis looked to the ceiling, rolled her eyes, then told Charlotte, "If your head gets any fatter it won't fit through your bedroom door." Both girls laughed and finished setting the table for dinner.
Jane was standing in front of the chalkboard, admiring Charlotte's teaching technique. She'd shown Francis non-algebraic numbers and how they were formed. Then she used a simple algebraic expression and that helped Francis to understand what she couldn't comprehend from reading the algebra book. She then picked up the papers Francis claimed to have completed, sat down at the table and started looking through the pages. She was glad to see how with Charlotte's help, Francis had been able to answer each problem correctly. She took the pencil lying on the table and wrote a 100 on the top of the first page. Jane was beginning to form an answer to one of Charlotte's previous questions, why she was with Jane at that point in time. Because she was needed.
Jane left the library with the set of papers in search of the girls, finding them in the kitchen helping Marie. She walked over to Francis, handed her the papers, and watched as a huge smile formed on Francis' face. When Charlotte saw the smile on Francis' face, and caught a glimpse of the 100 on the first page, she cleared her throat in a dramatic fashion and told Francis, "See, I told you I was a grreeaatt teacher, Francis." Francis giggled at Charlotte's silliness, but Jane was not amused, as she slowly turned to face Charlotte and gave the girl her best 'Jane is not amused' expression. Seeing Jane's face, Charlotte had a feeling she might have overdone things and said, "Um, sorry, Aunt Jane. I was just happy for Francis." Jane just humphed, before turning and leaving the kitchen, both girls not seeing the smile on Jane's face.
Jane used their dinner time to question Francis about her recent math assignment. She asked why Charlotte had to show her how to work the problems instead of her just reading the explanation in her algebra book. "Aunt Jane, I did read the explanations given in the book, and read them and read them, but couldn't understand what was being said. I don't know, it just seems I've always had that problem with reading. But when Charlotte started showing me, and let me see what she was saying, well, it all seemed to click." Jane realized Francis may have just told her why she found it so hard to learn in a classroom, and made a mental note to call one of her former girls who was now a leading educator at a University. She would also call the woman who was to become Charlotte's tutor, and talk with her about Francis' reading comprehension problem. Maybe between the two teachers they could help Francis overcome her problem. Jane also felt this may be part of Francis' real problem, being frustrated because she couldn't comprehend what she was reading. She'd have to wait and see if one helped with the other.
Jane times her next question just as Charlotte had taken a bite of her dessert. "Charlotte, have you ever been to a boutique?" Seeing Charlotte furrow her brows, Jane asked, "Are you familiar with boutiques? Do you know what they sell?"
Her additional questions gave Charlotte time to quickly chew the bite she'd taken, swallow it and answer, "Ah, no ma'am. I know the word, but not the store."
Jane nodded her head sagely, then said, "Well, then you should enjoy our afternoon. Because we are going shopping at a boutique, and I think you'll find it an interesting experience."
Charlotte looked at Jane and had a feeling she hadn't been told everything. She then looked at Marie, then Francis, who quickly picked up her glass of water and appeared to be drinking, though Charlotte noticed the girl wasn't swallowing. Charlotte had seen the same look on her parents faces, when they were expecting an answer or reaction. She turned back to Jane and asked, "I'm not going to enjoy this trip, am I Aunt Jane?"
Jane smiled and said, "What was it your parents said about new experiences?"
Charlotte chuckled, dropped her head, shook it, and said, "Hoisted by my own petard. Well, as I did say once, 'in for a penny in for a pound.' Okay, Aunt Jane, I guess another new experience won't hurt."
Francis was now drinking her water, and started choking when she heard Jane's sweet voice say, "It's good to hear you say that, Charlotte. Volunteering is so much easier on you, you know?" Seeing Jane's face as she spoke, yes, she did know it had been wise to volunteer for the new experience. No telling what Jane would have her do otherwise. Charlotte tried to smile at the prospect of visiting a boutique, and do whatever else they were going to do. But it came out lop-sided, and she could see Jane wasn't all that happy at her half smile.
Having experienced it herself, Francis knew what was coming next, after seeing how Charlotte reacted to Jane's news. Jane leaned forward, and in her 'send chills down the spine' voice said, "Charlotte, I would suggest you have a change of attitude by the time we arrive at the boutique. While you may believe you are ready for this new experience, your face tells a different matter. Should you continue at the boutique with this same attitude, you may find yourself helping out at that boutique every day in the afternoon." Francis cringed when she saw Jane's sweet smile, which she knew, from experience, was anything but sweet.
Charlotte quickly examined her options, which were slim and none. She knew, as did Francis, there was only one answer from her Jane would accept, and she gave it. "Of course, Aunt Jane. I apologize for not seeming to be enthusiastic about visiting a boutique. I will do better."
Charlotte watched as Jane nodded her head then said, "See that you do, young lady. See that you do." Even though Charlotte's smile now was a full smile, Jane could tell by Charlotte's eyes that she was still apprehensive. But Jane could live with that, she'd gotten her message across to Charlotte. Do what you're told or else.
When they'd finished dinner and the kitchen work was done, Jane told Francis and Charlotte to change their clothes for a shopping trip. In Jane's language that meant a dress that was dressy without being formal looking, with matching or complementing shoes. Makeup which was more than needed around the house but less than going to a formal gathering. And their hair neatly brushed and suiting their appearance. In short, they were to look like 'proper' young ladies according to Jane's standards. Both dressed accordingly but still had to pass the 'Jane' inspection, which took place the minute both girls had come down from their bedrooms. As Jane gave both girls a critical eye, both girls wondered if they would be the one Jane would single out to start over getting dressed. As both stood holding their purses, Jane walked about them twice before pronouncing them fit to leave the house. Neither girl sighed, but it wasn't far from their wants at that moment.
As they drove to town Jane used the opportunity to tell Charlotte, "Charlotte, dear, you'll like Brenda Franson, owner of The Style Shoppe. She'll be more than willing to help you choose a selection of fashions and lingerie. And I'm sure she'll delight in you volunteering to help her for a few hours while Francis and I look for a few things Francis needs. And I'm quite confident you'll be more than happy to help her in any way you can. Isn't that so?"
Charlotte hadn't been with Jane but a few days, and yet in those few days she'd learned the difference between Jane asking and commanding. Jane's voice told her she wasn't asking Charlotte to help Brenda, but commanding her to help Brenda. And as usual there was only one reply possible, "Of course, Aunt Jane. I'll be glad to help any way I can." Charlotte didn't have to see Jane's face to know which smile graced her lips.
She could tell which one Jane wore when she said, "That's good to hear, Charlotte. VERY good to hear."
Silence gained its grip in the car as Jane drove on, giving Charlotte time to reflect on her current situation. She had volunteered to become one of Jane's girls, but at the same time, not one of Jane's girls, since those boys didn't volunteer to become one of Jane's girls. And yet, even though she volunteered, and Jane had treated her differently than Francis, Jane still could make her do what she wanted when she wanted just by the use of her voice. And giving her the idea that if she didn't cooperate, the consequences would be worse than had she just done what Jane wanted. Charlotte had taken down James Conner after being threatened and attacked by him. Yet, here she was with a woman who had gained control of Charlotte without resorting to physical violence.
That thought caused Charlotte to chuckle, and Jane to ask, "You find something amusing, Charlotte?"
Charlotte chuckled silently to herself, shook her head, knowing it hadn't been wise to draw Jane's attention to her, before telling Jane, "I was just musing about my current situation."
After a moment of silence Jane said, "I see. So you find your current situation difficult, do you?"
Charlotte had always been up front with Jane, and decided that would still be the best approach when talking with her. "No, Aunt Jane. Not difficult, just...interesting. I took down a man taller than me and several pounds heavier when he failed to identify himself, then when he tried to attack me. Even when he tried to make me answer his questions I never gave in or feared him. And yet, here I find myself doing what you want without the fear of physical violence if I don't. It's the implication of consequences that cause me to do as you bid."
Silence prevailed again, until Jane said, "So it's the consequences of not doing what you're told that you fear, Charlotte?"
Jane looked at Charlotte using the rear view mirror and saw her wipe a tear off her cheek. "No, not the consequences, Aunt Jane. I fear I may disappoint you if I don't do as you say, Aunt Jane." Jane thought it wise not to say anything more, her voice would have given away how touched she was that Charlotte would think of disappointing her.
They reached the Mall, Jane found a parking space near an entrance, and led the two girls into the Mall and to The Style Shoppe. When they walked into the boutique they heard, "I'll take care of these ladies, Carol," as a middle aged woman approached. "Jane, how nice to see you again. And you too Francis. I see you have a new girl, Jane, might we be introduced?"
Jane and Brenda exchanged hugs before Jane said, Brenda, this is Charlotte Thorton. Charlotte, this is Brenda Franson, owner of The Style Shoppe."
It was Charlotte who first said, "It's nice to meet you Ms. Franson. Aunt Jane has told me I would enjoy my experience while I was here."
Brenda knew Charlotte had been told by Jane 'to' enjoy the experience or else. "My, she is polite Jane. It's my pleasure to meet you Charlotte. I'm sure you'll enjoy your experience while you're here."
Brenda then looked at Jane, and raised an eyebrow, causing Jane to say, "Charlotte has volunteered to help you any way she can, while Francis and I shop for a few things Francis needs. I believe it will be very educational for her." No one had been paying any attention to Francis, who was remembering her time 'volunteering' at The Style Shoppe. And how embarrassed and humiliated she'd been when she learned just what she'd been volunteered to do. And she couldn't tell Charlotte, or else.
"Oh, I'm so happy Charlotte is willing to help out for a few hours," Brenda gushed. "It will be an experience she won't forget." Charlotte looked from Jane to Brenda, and back to Jane, and seeing both looking at her, silently said to herself, 'I'll bet I won't forget it.' But for both women, she just smiled.
Apprehension graced Charlotte as she watched Jane and Francis leave The Style Shoppe, causing her to wonder if it had been wise of her to volunteer to become one of Jane's girls in order to clear her name. Up to now, nothing she'd had to do had been THAT bad, or THAT humiliating or THAT embarrassing, and it all had been a new experience, one she'd never have had if she hadn't volunteered. Jane did leave it up to her, after all, whether or not to become a girl for the duration. Charlotte turned back to face Brenda, who put to words what Charlotte was feeling at the moment.
"You're wondering if you did the right thing in helping to clear your name in this fashion," and she waved her hand head to toe in front of Charlotte. Brenda put her arm around Charlotte's shoulder then said, "Come, let's talk. I'd like to hear your story." As they walked towards the back of the store, Brenda kept up a steady flow of conversation, designed, she hoped, to calm Charlotte before revealing what she'd have Charlotte do that afternoon.
"Jane has told me how much you have helped just by being here, and whether or not you believe this, you have actually been a Godsend for her. You've helped Francis get where she is right now, which is, I'll tell you, much better than she was several months ago. Or even a few weeks ago. She is now like the difference between a sunny day and one which threatens rain. And I could see by the expression on her face, she actually cares about you, again, a first for her since she arrived. You helped her see it was possible to care again, without fear you'd want something in return. Even though she wasn't allowed to tell you what you'll be doing this afternoon, she actually was worried you wouldn't enjoy your experience. That it would upset you. And I also understand you talk to horses, one in particular, which wouldn't respond to Jane no matter what that woman tried. Always remember, Charlotte. Never let your experiences jade who you are inside. Decide how you want to respond to those experiences, how you want to use those experiences as you go through life. While they may be outside your comfort zone, they give you a view of the world you may never have had."
When they reached the back room, Brenda asked Charlotte how she took her tea, before pouring them each a mug of tea. After taking a seat, Brenda asked, "So, Charlotte, what's your story? How is it you find yourself with Jane Thompson?" Charlotte took a sip of her tea then gave Brenda an account of how she found herself with Jane.
How she was shopping for a necklace to give her mom on her 35th birthday. How she put Jame Conner, head of security for that Taylor's store, on the floor when Charlotte thought the man wanted to harm her. How he then locked them in the holding room at Taylor's and tried to intimidate her but eventually ended up with a broken collar bone and the ulna and radius in his right forearm. And how Mr. Strom, CEO of Taylor's, threatened to take her to Federal Court if she wasn't punished by Judge Ruth. She told of the meeting the Prosecutor, her lawyer, Terry Morgan, and Judge Ruth had in the Judge's chambers, and the judge saying something smelled funny, and until they could get to the bottom of it, she would be safe with Jane. "So here I am, going through something I would never have dreamed of experiencing. And I'm doing it in order to clear my name and get my life back, though I'll see things a bit differently when I get home. Which, I believe, will be a good experience for me in the long run."
Brenda was every bit as sharp as Jane in picking up on nuances while people spoke, and a few things caught her attention now with Charlotte. She took a sip of her tea then asked Charlotte, "Tell me, Charlotte. Are you angry with that boy for getting you into this situation? For making you experience something like this? Do you plan to make him pay for what he's done to you?" Brenda had been able to read people as far back as her middle school days, and had no trouble seeing that Charlotte was thinking about the questions she'd asked her.
She then saw that Charlotte had formed her response and did so with, "The short answer to your questions, no. I'm not angry with that boy, or for having to go through this experience. Or plan to make him pay for what he's done to me. I am angry with how I was treated at Taylor's, but my dad's law firm handled that problem nicely. No...that boy, Toby Camber, has more going on in his life than anyone knows about, so it doesn't make sense to be angry with him for responding as he did. He was more afraid of someone than being in that holding cell we were in. And, after watching him as I did, I believe his actions are those of self preservation. Sort of like Jane's 'do it or else' commands. Only in Toby's case, the 'or else' is much more severe."
Like Jane, Brenda was astounded by Charlotte's assessment of what she viewed, and caused her to ask, "Charlotte, what plans do you have for your future? I ask because you just sounded like a clinical psychologist."
Charlotte chuckled, then told Brenda, "I had planned on becoming a psychiatrist, that is, of course, if I ever get out of this mess and get my name cleared. And if my name can't be cleared, then I don't know. I never made plans which included this situation." Brenda nodded her head, understanding that this type of situation could never be factored in with someone's plans for their life.
She smiled at Charlotte, telling her, "Based on what I've heard from Jane, and just listening to you here, you'll make a fine psychiatrist. You have the passion needed to help others, like you've done for Francis and that horse. And if I know Jane, Toby is going to recant his story or wish he'd lived somewhere else in this world." She stood up, took Charlotte's empty mug then said, "Okay. Let's talk about what you'll be doing the rest of this afternoon. And please, understand I want you to have fun with it, enjoy yourself. Because it isn't everyday you get to model teenage girl's clothing." Brenda carefully studied Charlotte's reaction to what she just said, noting the eye roll and shake of her head. Typical, she found, of someone who's resigned themselves to do what they're told.
She then laughed out loud when Charlotte said, "Well, my parents always say that new experiences are great teachers. So, how do I act like a model? I haven't exactly spent my years watching fashion shows."
Brenda smiled after what Charlotte said, knowing from experience she'd do fine modeling the clothing. Brenda then went on to explain what clothing she would be modeling. How she'd start at the back of the 'runway' and walk forward, pause, turn, pause again, turn so she was facing left, pausing again, then turning to face right. Pausing again before she walked back the way she came. She also told Charlotte to walk as Jane had had her do while balancing the book on her head, the way she walked into The Style Shoppe. If she did that, no one would ever know what really lies beneath the clothing. Brenda did have one question, before taking Charlotte back to get ready. "Um, Charlotte, this may seem personal, but I need to know how you're hiding your genitals. And what type of assistance Jane has provided for your breasts."
She was surprised when Charlotte looked at her with complete calmness on her face, without seeming to be embarrassed. "Brenda, my genitals were temporarily glued away at the salon, it was an option I was given. And I'm wearing breast forms, which I've been told would require a close inspection to tell they are false. So unless someone will be getting up close and personal, I should be good to go."
Brenda just clapped her hands together and said, "Splendid," and putting her arm around Charlotte's shoulders again, led her back to the changing area, explaining as they walked the order of the clothing they'd be modeling. And she emphasized again, "Charlotte, I realize this is all strange to you. But please, enjoy it for what it is. An experience you'd never otherwise have in your life. Okay?"
Charlotte smiled, nodded her head, and told Brenda, "Okay, Brenda. I'll try to enjoy what I'm about to do, even though the thought of it is a bit scary." Brenda just hoped she'd have that same attitude when she modeled the items which weren't mentioned.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
When they reached the changing room, Charlotte saw four girls either getting dressed, having their hair done, or having their makeup done. "Girls, may I have your attention," Brenda said to the four girls. "This is Charlotte, and she'd volunteered to help us this afternoon. She's a bit scared since it's her first time, so give her the same help you received the first time you modeled." Brenda then turned to Charlotte and said, "Charlotte, since this is your first time modeling, we've put you last, so you can watch the other girls and see how they walk down the runway, stand, turn, and hold their hands. And remember also, I do have to give Jane a report about your attitude throughout this presentation. So just do the best you can. And have fun with all this." Brenda smiled at Charlotte, before she walked away, leaving her standing, not knowing what to do next. It wasn't until she heard her name called that she went over to the girl doing the makeup.
"Hi, Charlotte, I'm Gale. Gale Walters. I do makeup and hair, and it sure was fortunate Brenda found you, 'cause it gives us more time backstage to get you girls ready for the next run. So, you've never modeled before? I find THAT hard to believe, since you're so beautiful. But enough of me gabbing, let's get you ready so you can get your first set on." For maybe the first time in her life, Charlotte was lost for words, at least words that could cut through Gale's rapid speaking. She actually never had a chance to answer Gale's question as Gale had pulled her over to a dresser's chair and shoved her down into it. She then put a band around Charlotte's head to hold her hair back, then grabbed a wipe and quickly removed all of Charlotte's makeup. As quickly as she'd removed Charlotte's makeup, she just as quickly redid Charlotte's face, shocking Charlotte when she saw herself in the mirror in front of her.
Charlotte was looking at the face of what appeared to be a seventeen or eighteen-year-old girl. She was so engrossed in her appearance that she never realized Gale had taken the band off her head or was now working on her hair. She was so engrossed with her new appearance she didn't notice when Gale finished with her hair and had spoken to her. "Hey, kiddo. You still with me? You're all ready to go." Gale leaned around to look Charlotte in the eyes, then looked into the mirror, then back at Charlotte. "Pretty neat, huh, kiddo? See, I told you you were beautiful. Now come on, let's get you dressed."
Gale had to gently shake Charlotte's arm to get her attention, and when she had Charlotte's attention Charlotte just said, "That's really me?"
Gale put her face near Charlotte's, looked into the mirror with Charlotte, then said, "Yep, that's you. One hundred percent you. And you're gorgeous. Come on, sweetheart, we need to get you dressed."
The first dress they put on Charlotte was a Summer dress. It was light, airy, had spaghetti straps and a scooped neckline that allowed a hint of Charlotte's breast to be seen. It was a floral print in a light sky blue that was complemented with white sandals, a crystal in a heart necklace, and matching earrings. When she was ready to walk the runway, she stood where she could watch the other four girls, noticing how they walked, held their bodies, how they used their hands, and how they stopped and turned. She then watched as they walked back up the runway before the next girl started her walk. Charles exerted himself now, since it was her turn to walk the runway, and used his training to center himself just as Charlotte stepped onto the runway and began her walk. As Charlotte walked, she couldn't help herself and smiled as she walked. She reached the end of the runway, paused as she faced those watching, before turning so they could see the back of the dress she wore. She gave herself a count of five before turning to her left, pausing, then turning to the right, pausing for another five count before turning and walking back up the runway, her smile never leaving her lips.
The three girls dressed and waiting their next turns, gave Charlotte high-fives, telling her she looked wonderful for her first time. High-fives were all they could manage as Charlotte was ushered back to the changing room to change dresses.
After her last walk, Charlotte heard Brenda announce a ten minute break from the changing room. Charlotte's ears perked up when she heard Brenda announce, "And after the break, the girls will model our swimsuit line. Please, help yourselves to the provided refreshments." Charlotte was standing where she could see all four of the other girls, who were now completely undressing. Standing before Charlotte were four beautiful young girls who were completely naked, each starting to put on two piece swimsuits.
Gale noticed the look on Charlotte's face, came over to her and asked, "You okay, sweetheart? Aren't used to undressing in front of a bunch of girls, huh? It's okay, sweetheart, the girls who model for us their first time have the same problem. Don't worry, sweetheart, they aren't going to stare at you or make fun of you. Just breathe, take it slow, and before you know it, you'll be wearing one of those beautiful two piece swimsuits." And in a conspiratorial voice, Gale said, "And I'll bet you knock the socks off of everyone when they see you in our swimsuits."
Gale's antics finally got to Charlotte, who giggled, smiled, then said, "Thanks, Gale. I can't believe I'm going to wear a two piece swimsuit for everyone to see. My mom would have a heart attack if she saw me in one."
Charlotte had been undressing as she spoke to Gale, and heard a low whistle from Gale before she told Charlotte, "Girl, you got some body there." Then she shocked Charlotte by leaning close to Charlotte so only she could hear, "And Sandy and Carolyn did a good job with you. So don't worry, no one will suss you out. Have fun with it. Shake what you got, girl."
Charlotte rolled her eyes, looked to the ceiling, shook her head, then chuckled. "So you know about me too, huh?" Gale smiled, winked, then told Charlotte to hurry, as they were starting the show again.
Charles had worn swimsuits before, without a second thought. Now though, as Charlotte, he had to concentrate to do as he'd done while wearing a dress. Only barefooted. Brenda was standing behind those seated watching the show. As Charlotte reached the end of the runway, she saw Brenda give her a 'thumbs-up,' and carrying the biggest smile she'd seen on anyone's face. Then Brenda put both hands together and gave her a champion wave, before giving her another 'thumbs-up.' Charlotte couldn't help herself, after watching Brenda. The smile she'd been wearing became even wider, because she was trying not to laugh. She didn't know it at the time, but her trying to hold in laughter, and making her smile even wider, went over big with those watching the show.
After the girls each made three trips down the runway another break was called, letting them drink water and to munch on a few things kept in the dressing area. When the show resumed the girls did sleepwear, with each girl modeling pajamas, night shirt, and babydolls. And even though all this was new to Charlotte, Charles, she was a trooper each time she took the runway. Another break was called, and it was now Brenda crossed her mentle fingers. This time the girls would be modeling bras, panties, and garter belts, something she didn't tell Charlotte about. Something she deliberately didn't tell Charlotte about in order to see how Charlotte would react. Something Jane asked her to do with any of Jane's new girls.
When Charlotte reached the dressing area again, after her last walk on the runway, a frown appeared on her face when she heard Brenda announce, "We'll take another break to give our girls time to refresh themselves and then resume with showing our more...intimate apparel." Brenda had positioned herself so she could watch Charlotte and her reaction when she heard intimate apparel. Gale had also been told to keep an eye on Charlotte when they reached this stage of the show. They both watched, as Charlotte's gaze took in the other four girls again completely undressing and putting on matching bras and panties. She also saw two of the girls put on garter belts, then sit down and roll stockings up their legs before fastening them to the garter belts. Charlotte suddenly felt her legs go rubbery, and sat down in the closest chair near her, and just stared at what the other four girls were doing. She didn't realize Gale had kneeled beside her until Gale said, "It's okay sweetheart. You're doing marvelous. You have those women eating out of the palms of your hands. They love watching you do your thing on that runway."
Charlotte tried to say something but all she could do was move her lips. She shook herself, looked at Gale and asked, "You expect me to walk out there just in underwear? And a garter belt and stockings? And heels?" Charlotte started shaking her head, saying over and over, "That's just too much, I can't do that."
Gale finally reached up and caught Charlotte by the chin to stop her shaking her head, and held it. She looked Charlotte in the eyes and asked her, "So what's the difference if those women see you in your underwear or a two piece swimsuit?" She lowered her voice then asked, "Aren't you covered up in all the right places? Have you heard any of those women or young girls, or those four girls, saying anything about a boy modeling fashions? No. You. Haven't. And neither have I. All they've seen is an extremely attractive young lady who's been enjoying herself while she models clothing. And that's all I have seen too. Don't throw up your hands now, finish what you started. Go out there and wow them one more time with that body you have, and that dazzling smile you've been carrying along with you."
Still looking apprehensive, Charlotte nodded as much as she could with Gale still holding her chin, sighed, then said, "Okay, I'll give it a go, though I'm still not comfortable parading around in my underwear in front of strangers."
Charlotte had been concentrating on Gale and didn't notice two of the other girls walk up to her. One girl knelt down in front of Charlotte, took Charlotte's hands in hers and told her, "We all were nervous our first time modeling underwear, because, well, we've all been taught not to let others see what we're wearing under our clothes. Right? I mean, my mom still has to remind me to keep my legs together so the boys don't get a free show." Charlotte laughed at the image of a boy doing his best to see what a girl was wearing if she let her legs drift apart. "And it's not, like," the girl continued, "we aren't covered everywhere it counts, right? And, like, so what if some boys might stand outside the store and watch? It just marks them as boys none of us want to meet anyway. Come on, it'll be fun, flaunting something those pricks won't get their hands on except in their dreams."
When the girl said pricks, Charlotte must have looked shocked, as the girl had a look on her face that said she'd said something wrong. But when Charlotte said, "Pricks, you said pricks," and started laughing, it wasn't long before the two girls and Gale joined her. "You called them pricks," Charlotte repeated in between laughs. "My gawd, that's just too funny," Charlotte said as she stood up out of the chair and allowed Gale to help her put on what she'd be wearing on her first of three walks down the runway. She was still chuckling, and repeating 'pricks' to herself as she stepped up on the runway and flaunted her stuff to the end of the runway. She even caught sight of boys standing outside of the store, and really played it up, causing all of the boys to suddenly grab themselves and run towards the restrooms. Watching the boys' reactions caused Charlotte to giggle, which caused her to smile even wider, before she'd begun to complete her first walk on the runway. And she wanted to do it again.
Gale had to shush the girls as Charlotte and three of the other girls were laughing after watching what those boys did. One of the girls said, "Like, totally, they're pricks," which started the girls laughing again. Gale sternly told the girls to be quiet, but inside was happy Charlotte had lost her apprehension for walking out in her underwear. She wouldn't tell the girls this, but she enjoyed watching Charlotte tease those boys watching the girls, and what she caused to happen in their pants. She looked at Charlotte, getting dressed for her next walk, and thought to herself what a wonderful kid his parents have. If only those she was used to dealing with could be like him, then this would be a heck of a world.
None of the four girls had modeled anything in black, just pastels. And when Gale held up the black outfit Charlotte would be wearing, she saw a smirk form on her lips. When the girls had started their walk on the runway, they'd walked out from behind a curtain and walked to the end of the runway, before giving the audience a front, back, and side view, pausing in between moves. Then they'd turn and walk back down the runway, where the next girl would step out from behind the same curtain and do the same thing.
When Charlotte saw the black outfit she'd be wearing, the smirk Gale saw, and wouldn't understand until she watched what occurred, she decided to really give those women and young girls, and those boys watching from outside the store a real show. As Gale helped Charlotte put on the black lacy bra, and black lacy panties, and lacy garter belt, and watched as she sat to put on the black stockings with a floral design at the top of the stockings, Charlotte's face took on a look Gale interpreted immediately. Not meaning to, but did anyway, she voiced, "Oh, this ought to be good." When Charlotte was ready, and the last girl had walked off the runway, she motioned to the four girls to come with her and they all stood where they could see the entire runway. All she told the four girls was, "You girls have got to watch this."
Charlotte had followed the girls in that when the last girl had reached the curtain, she would then step out and start her walk. Not this time, this time the first thing the women and young girls saw was a left, black clad leg being sensually extended onto the runway from behind the curtain. That was followed up by the right leg being extended in much the same way, until Charlotte stood facing the audience with her hands on the hips. She slowly turned, looked over her left shoulder with a 'come hither' look on her face, before turning to the side and running her hand through her hair. Gale and the girls heard the boys standing outside the store, and watched as Charlotte did one of the most sultry walks Gale had ever seen a girl her age do while walking down the runway. When she reached the end of the runway, she went through more sultry moves, causing Gale and the girls to laugh as they saw more boys grab themselves before running to the restrooms. Charlotte played with her hair while facing the women and young girls. When she turned, she ran her hands up and down her body, licking her lips when, while facing to her left, turning her head to face those watching. And when Charlotte turned to face the other way, she struck a pose Gale had only seen professional models make. She then turned and started sauntering back up the runway, running her hands over her butt as she walked. When she reached the end, with her back still to the audience, she looked at the audience over her right shoulder, gave them an air kiss, before stepping behind the curtain.
Gale glanced at the women sitting in the small audience, and saw some of them fanning themselves and others wiggling in their seats. She and the girls then rushed back behind the curtain and saw a joyous Charlotte, lounging in a chair, fanning herself as well. Gale looked at the smiling girl and asked, "Where in the hell did you learn to walk like that?" The other girls were gathered around Charlotte, telling her how hot she looked as she walked the runway.
One of the girls let slip that, "My boyfriend would go ape shit seeing me dressed like that."
Charlotte laughed at the girl's comment, before saying, "You did see what it did to those pricks standing outside the store, right? Surprise your boyfriend."
When the chatter died down, and the girls went to change back into their everyday clothes, Gale pulled Charlotte aside and asked her again, "Where did you learn to walk like that? I've never seen a girl your age be able to pull off something like that."
Gale suddenly got chills down her spine as the expression Charlotte got more than serious. "I'm not permitted to tell you, Gale. And it's best if you don't know or find out."
Gale continued staring at Charlotte, nodding her head as she said, "All right, Charlotte. All right, forget I asked." She then brightened and told Charlotte, "Oh girl, you were wonderful out there today. And from what I've seen, the store is going to have super sales this afternoon. And it's because of your help. I think Jane will be proud of how you did today. Take what you're wearing with you as a reminder of your time as a model. In fact, everything you wore today will be given to you. Now you've got something to really tell your grandchildren."
As Charlotte undressed and put on the clothes she wore into the store, Gale's words about grandchildren rang through her mind. Would she have grandchildren some day? Doesn't that require she first have a girlfriend, and children of her own?
Charlotte had finished dressing and as she was walking out of the dressing area, Brenda rushed up and told her, "Charlotte, that was one of the most marvelous shows I've ever had. You were magnificent, especially your last walk. I don't know when we've sold so many of that outfit you were wearing in one day. Thank you, sweetheart." Then Brenda got a serious look on her face and asked Charlotte, "So, was it as bad as you thought? You looked like you WERE having fun."
Charlotte smiled and replied with, "No, it wasn't as bad as I feared it'd be. And, I hate to admit it, but I did have fun. I will definitely look at models differently from now on, knowing what they have to do to get ready. And thank you for giving me the opportunity to do this. I know at the beginning I was reluctant to even give it a try. But looking back, I really did have fun."
Gale walked up just then carrying a store bag with all the clothes Charlotte had worn inside. Charlotte saw Jane and Francis walk into The Style Shoppe, bid Brenda and Gale goodbye, and went over to Jane, who gave the bubbling Charlotte a critical eye and asked her, "And why are you so excited, young lady?"
A smiling Charlotte looked Jane straight in the eyes and told her, "Because, Aunt Jane, I had fun this afternoon. I had fun."
Jane smirked then told Charlotte, "Let's see how much fun you have writing a five page paper about your experiences here this afternoon."
Charlotte's smile never wavered as she told Jane, "Oh, I won't be able to write just a five page paper. No, it will have to be longer if I'm to write down all my experiences here today."
Inwardly Jane smiled, outwardly she humphed, then said, "Petulant children. That's all they ever send me." Francis chuckled after Jane spoke, knowing Jane was pleased with Charlotte's performance this afternoon. She only hoped Charlotte's enthusiasm lasted with what Jane had in store for her tomorrow.
Jane must have read Francis' mind, as she looked down at her and slowly shook her head. Francis gulped before answering, "Yes, Aunt Jane."
As they drove back to Jane's house, it was quiet in the car. Quiet until Jane and Francis heard, "Oh my gawd," from Charlotte. "Oh my gawd," she repeated, then started laughing, and laughing hard.
She was laughing so hard she never heard Jane ask, "What's so funny, young lady?" Charlotte was gripped with ruckus laughter, which caused her to fall over onto her back in the backseat of Jane's car. Again Jane asked her question, and again Charlotte never heard it because she was laughing so hard. Jane found a place to pull over to get out of traffic, before shutting off the engine, getting out of the car and attending to Charlotte, who was still in the throes of laughter. Because Charlotte was lying down on the backseat facing the passenger side, Jane opened the rear passenger side door, reached in and pulled Charlotte upright and held onto her. Charlotte never acknowledged she'd been pulled up or that Jane was holding her. It wasn't until Jane shook her hard, several times, that Charlotte finally saw Jane and started calming down.
She giggled a few times before saying, "Sorry, Aunt Jane. But it's just so darn funny." Even Jane's glare didn't phase her at this moment, she was still giggling at what she just realized. Still being held by Jane, she reached up and wiped her eyes, giggling a few more times before she could actually speak. "Sorry, Aunt Jane, I was just thinking about the modeling I did this afternoon, when I realized something. There I was, a boy presenting as a girl, in a changing room with four other attractive girls and I got to watch them change for each walk of the runway. Me, a boy, got to see what many boys only dream of, four girls who were completely naked as they changed into our next outfits."
Then Jane saw the somber look replace the joyous one, as Charlotte then said, "And you know what, Aunt Jane. I didn't react to what I saw as any boy would. I was never aroused by what I saw, or tempted to do anything. Does that make me strange? Shouldn't seeing four beautiful girls naked have caused me to be at least a bit aroused? Or tempt me to do something?" Jane saw the tears slide down Charlotte's cheeks, as she asked, "Does that make me weird, Aunt Jane? Because I didn't get aroused as other boys would?"
The only thought Jane had at that moment, seeing the anguish look on Charlotte's face, was to make sure Toby Camber have the best experience Jane could devise. Whether he liked it or not. She took a deep breath to calm herself, and looking Charlotte in her eyes, told her, "No, Charlotte, you are not weird, never have been and never will be. You are a remarkable young man, who as I told you before, you are where I want all my girls to be before they leave me. You are kind, caring, and thoughtful. You help, at times, without realizing you're helping. You are a young man a mother can be extremely proud of, as every boy should be. As to your not becoming aroused upon seeing four naked young ladies? You didn't become aroused because you weren't seeing them through the eyes of a boy. You saw them through the eyes of a young lady, you. You became one with them as you modeled the clothes Brenda had you wear. You were having fun doing something you'd never have done had Charles been in that store. Don't look down on yourself as being a failure of a boy because you weren't aroused. Think of yourself as a boy who's matured in ways other boys could never understand. For a few hours you saw four beautiful young girls not as sex objects, but as people, like yourself. And you treated them AS people, and not as sex objects. I'm very proud of how you handled that fashion show. Some day it's going to be a story worth telling. But for now, come on, let's get home and something to eat." Charlotte nodded her head, hugged Jane, then moved back onto the backseat, wiping her eyes as she did. " Raton laveur (Raccoon,)," Jane said, which caused Charlotte to laugh.
"Yes. I guess I do look like a raccoon, again." Jane smiled before closing the passenger side rear door and getting behind the wheel of her car.
As she drove, one part of her asked if she could get away with using a bullwhip on the person who caused all this heartache for Charles. She knew several desolate places where no one would hear them scream. Her other part said it wouldn't be the right thing to do, and she'd have to settle with using what she found that does work and works well. Toby was going to see a taskmaster like no other taskmaster who ever lived. And one way or another, he WAS going to tell her the whole, unvarnished, truth.
As they entered Jane's home, they were directed to bathe and dress for supper, before helping Marie in the kitchen. Jane did the same, going to her study afterwards. The light on the fax machine was blinking, indicating an incoming fax was ready to print out. Jane entered a code, then hit 'print' and watched as several pages were spit out of the machine. She sat down in her desk chair and began to read what she had been sent.
From: Ruth Walinkiewicz
To: Jane Thompson
RE: More information concerning shoplifting
Jane,
We have uncovered more information about the shoplifting at Taylor's and about Toby Camber. That incident at Taylor's is only one of many events that have been occurring throughout the area, many not being realized until the store's regular inventory was taken. So far, close to $125,000 has been stolen, and it is felt was done in much the same way as it was done at Taylor's that day Charles was accused of being involved, by teams of three boys or both boys and girls. We've been able to backtrack and have identified the persons involved in the actual theft, but it was felt we'd learn more if they were put under surveillance rather than being arrested now. It's a case of using the small fish to catch the big fish. The stores involved have agreed with our assessment, and have agreed to notify those involved in the investigation when they spot another theft taking place. We've also notified other large chain department stores to be on the lookout for theft, or attempted theft, in their stores and not to interfere but watch and record the persons and to notify the investigators when it occurs.
As to Toby Camber, I don't know where to start, as his life up to being caught that day at Taylor's has not been a bed of roses. He lived with his dad and older brother, dad working three jobs to try and keep food on their table and the debt collectors off his back. Toby's mother walked out when Toby was five, the promise of bright lights and a better life luring her away. She's now a junky, turning tricks to support her habit, the guy who promised her a better life responsible for getting her hooked on heroin. From the time his mother left Toby had literally been under the thumb of his older brother, and we suspect he is the one forcing Toby to do the stealing. You'll understand why I say forcing when you see Toby after he falls asleep. Words can't do justice in explaining what Toby's had to endure his whole life under his brother's thumb, you'll understand fully when you see with your own eyes. And maybe what you see will temper your anger because of what he did to Charles. When I know more then you'll know more.
Ruth
Jane read the fax again, ruminating over Ruth's inability to describe how Toby was forced to steal. Several things came to mind, but none of them were the ones used to force Toby to steal, as she would soon learn. There was a knock on the study door, "Enter," she said, and watched the door open and Charlotte come into the study. After Charlotte shut the study door, she went to the bookcase and took 'the book' off the shelf, balanced on her head, and proceeded to walk the five circuits of the study. Stopping at the study door after completing circuit five, Charlotte replaced 'the book' in the bookshelf before walking over and standing in front the desk Jane was sitting at. "Aunt Jane, supper will be ready in a few moments," Charlotte told Jane, who was looking at Charlotte but wasn't looking at her.
"Thank you, Charlotte." After asking to be excused, and being given permission, as Charlotte turned and started walking to the study doors, Jane said, "Oh, Charlotte, please come and sit down for a moment." Charlotte was halfway to the study doors but abruptly stopping when Jane called her name.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Instead of indicating the straight back chair in front of her desk, Jane indicated the chair to her left. After Charlotte sat down, without saying a word, Jane gave her the fax she'd received from Judge Ruth, and watched as Charlotte read what Ruth had to say. Charlotte had been with Jane long enough for her to interpret Charlotte's facial expressions, which were at this moment, going from a surprised look to a questioning look. It was the questioning look Charlotte had on her face when she looked up from reading the fax and asked Jane, "What does it mean 'you'll see for yourself?' What's to see?"
Jane was shaking her head at Charlotte's question, and replied with, "I don't know, Charlotte. I wish I did, it might change my plans for Toby. And because Ruth believes he's been forced to steal, that alone might be enough to change my plans. And how I want you to act. So maybe, because of this fax," and Jane tapped the fax in Charlotte's hands, "it would be better if you played the part of a proper young lady until we learn more. And if I do give you a nod, just sass or question why you have to do something. Don't overdo it, I don't want to appear as a dragon until we learn more about Toby." Jane held out her hand and Charlotte gave the fax back, with Jane saying, "You better go and help finish getting our supper ready."
After responding, "Yes, Aunt Jane," Charlotte got up out of the chair and started walking to the Study doors.
Her hand was on one of the door handles when Jane said, "Oh, and Charlotte. Keep this to yourself. Francis isn't to know anything about this. Not yet at least."
With another, "Yes, Aunt Jane," Charlotte opened the study door and closed it behind her as she walked out of the study. Jane's monster was again suggesting using a bullwhip, but now, maybe not on Toby.
Jane started to get up out of her desk chair when the fax machine pinged, indicating an incoming fax. She waited until the machine said it was ready to print, before inputting a code, pressing the print button and waiting. Given the fax from Ruth, she expected it was another fax from her, but was pleasantly surprised when it turned out to be from Jeb and his law firm.
From: Jeb Thorton, et al.
To: Ms. Jane Thompson
Jane,
I've spoken with Ruth and learned she'd given you some of the information we have discovered about the rash of shoplifting thefts in the area. I want to add to this information.
Our firms' investigators have been following Toby's brother everywhere he goes, and they discovered some interesting things. He meets up with a mixed group of boys and girls, about Toby's age, at an abandoned warehouse every day at the same time. Our people staked out the building and watched as the group of boys and girls, around twenty, went into that warehouse carrying bundles and came out empty handed. They waited until the brother had left before going inside and finding a storehouse of stolen goods, still marked with the store's price stickers. We passed this information to our contact within the police department, and they've put a stakeout team on that warehouse.
I hope you're sitting down because we think we've learned who is the actual mastermind behind this whole theft ring. None other than George Strom, CEO of Taylor's. Toby's brother was videoed meeting with Mr. Strom on several occasions, even going with the brother to the warehouse.
And that isn't all. Mr. Strom was then tailed and met up with a woman who the FBI has had their eye on for a long time, but didn't have enough physical proof to do anything. When our police contact learned of this, she immediately contacted her FBI contact, and they in turn put a tail on this woman.
I wish I could tell you, and Charles, that arrests have been made and the whole truth has been told in regards to his being implicated in the thefts, but I can't. We don't have enough physical proof yet. We do, however, have proof that Mr. Strom is living beyond his means. The FBI obtained a search warrant to have a forensic accountant look into Mr. Strom's bank account and other financial records. Seems he has acquired more than his yearly salary pays him. They're still digging because of what they initially found, and from what I've been told, Mr. Strom has a lot to explain not only to the FBI but the IRS as well. I believe once everything is tied up with a nice neat bow, arrests will be made, and the whole truth about my son will finally see the light of day.
Give our love to Charles
Kindest regards,
Jeb
Jane read the fax from Jeb again, and now sat trying to decide if she should tell Charlotte about this or keep it to herself. She weighed the pros and cons of telling her, not wanting to get her hopes up only to see them dashed. Her thoughts were interrupted by a knock on the study door, which she acknowledged and was told by Francis that supper was ready when she stepped into the study. Francis then took 'the book' off the bookshelf, but Jane just shook her head. Francis put 'the book' back on the bookshelf, then stood and watched Jane get out of her chair, walk past her, never saying a word, leaving Francis to follow her out of the study, closing the door behind her. When they sat down to supper Marie could see the concern on Jane's face, but got a surreptitious head shake from Jane just before she could ask her question. Instead of getting an answer as to why Jane was concerned, she received a full report from Charlotte about her time modeling clothing at The Style Shoppe, and her concern that she didn't react like a boy her age would act around young girls in the act of changing clothes. Where Jane gave Charlotte one reason, Marie gave her another reason, "Because you aren't like other boys. You are a gentleman, chère. And a gentleman knows the proper way to act around women in the state such as you saw."
With supper over and the kitchen duties completed, Jane reminded Charlotte she had a paper to write about her experiences modeling, and Francis had History to read for her paper on the Napoleonic Wars. It was only after the girls had entered the library to do their homework that Jane took Marie with her to the study, and let her read both faxes she'd received. When Marie finished reading the one from Jeb, she put it down and told Jane, "So, you are wondering if you should tell Charlotte about what's been discovered? Thinking maybe if you do she'll get her hopes up only to have them dashed if nothing comes of what's been discovered?" Jane just nodded, it's the only answer she had at that moment. Marie sat the faxes on Jane's desk, looked at Jane, then said, "What can you tell her that can really help her believe her name will be cleared? Nothing. Absolutely nothing that she doesn't already know. I presume you showed her the fax from Ruth?" Jane nodded, picked up the faxes, unlocked a drawer before placing the faxes in the drawer and relocking it. "Then, tell her nothing more than she already knows. She has enough going on right now and doesn't need to be told something which might or might not clear her name. The time to tell her will come, and that time will be when her name can be cleared. N'est-ce pas (Is not it?)?" Jane nodded her head before opening the cabinet, turning on the monitor to check on her wards. As she listened, Charlotte was talking with Francis concerning her assignment, helping to clarify a few points. Maybe she could get away with using a guillotine on someone.
A clock in the downstairs portion of the house struck nine times, the ninth time fading as the energy given to the air dissipated. The girls heard a knock on the library door before it opened and Jane came into the room. "How is your reading coming, Francis? Are you ready to write your paper yet?" Jane couldn't let her know she'd been watching her, as Francis had started writing her paper or she'd learn things Jane wanted to stay hidden.
"I've finished the reading, Aunt Jane. I had to ask Charlotte if she knew anything about the Napoleonic Wars because I had some questions. And because of her answers I've started writing my paper."
Jane sagely nodded her head, then turned to Charlotte. "And the paper about your experiences from today? Has it helped you see an answer to some of your own questions?"
Charlotte smiled at Jane, then told her, "It's basically done, Aunt Jane. I say basically because most of what I've written is about what I did as I modeled."
Jane looked at Charlotte and asked her, "But you're having trouble writing down how you FELT while you modeled, oui? Because you're having trouble sorting out the answer to some of your questions?"
Jane watched as Charlotte nodded her head before saying, "Yes, Aunt Jane, that's exactly why it's basically done. If I sit and think about how I felt, not only do I think about my feelings but about me as a boy and my masculinity. And when I think about that, well, my thoughts start down another path then branch to another, and several more, before coming back to my original thought."
Jane had sat down in a chair next to Charlotte, looked at her, smiled, then told her, "So your thoughts are a Mobius Loop, starting and ending at the same place. No real beginning and no real end, perhaps you need to make a beginning and an end. Perhaps you need to cut the loop at branches in the path so you have an end and a new beginning. Perhaps how you felt while modeling, and the answer to some of your questions, lies in the parsaled sections of the thoughts you separate into strips of thoughts. Perhaps your current thoughts are a sheet of writing paper, and you lay a ruler lengthways on that paper so you can tear that paper into strips and then examine each one individually. Do you understand what I'm saying Charlotte?" Jane saw the half confused and half accepting look on Charlotte's face, then told her, "Don't be concerned by your thoughts going off in tangents before returning to the beginning. Take the tangent thought, pull it out separately and examine it on its own merits. Then do the same for each thought. A jigsaw puzzle has to be assembled piece by piece. Each piece fits an exact place in the puzzle as a whole. And it's only by examining each piece can the puzzle be assembled into a whole picture."
Jane saw the light go on in Charlotte's eyes, and watched as she chuckled to herself then said more to herself than to Jane, "Guess I'm not as smart as I thought I was. I should have realized that." Charlotte had dropped her head after what she said, feeling stupid for not realizing what Jane had just said.
Jane reached over, put her fingers gently under Charlotte's chin, lifted her head and told her, "No, chère, you are smart. You could not have known to break down your thoughts because you are not in your usual situation. You are used to thinking in literal terms, this happens, that's the response. Being here, with me, has caused you to relearn how to think, how to reevaluate what you see and do. You are Charlotte now, chère, and Charlotte doesn't always think in literal terms of this happening and that's the response. Because Charlotte has never existed before and is as a baby taking its first step. Learn to let Charlotte learn. Don't compare her to Charles, because Charles has not only learned how to walk but run as well. Because as Charlotte, you are just learning how to walk. Keep working on your paper, it will be complete when you're ready for it to be completed. It's time for you two girls to get to bed, we've a busy day tomorrow."
As they always did, Jane went up with Charlotte and Marie with Francis. When Jane and Charlotte were in Charlotte's bedroom, Charlotte asked, "Aunt Jane, why is there so much disparity between males and females? Both are human mammals. Their anatomy is different in some aspects, as is their roles in procreation, but they share the same type of feelings, needs, and desires, even though males seldom let on they do. So why should one be treated better than the other? Why should it be thought that males are superior to females in many ways?" Charlotte had walked into the bathroom to clean her face, brush her teeth, and use the toilet before getting into bed, after asking Jane the questions.
Jane stood dumbfounded by Charlotte's questions, wondering where this child obtained such questions. Wondering if the school she attended knew just what type of a student they had or her intelligence, or cared. Charlotte may not realize how deep her questions went, or how difficult they could be to answer. When Charlotte came out of the bathroom, Jane gave her face a good inspection, pronounced her face clean, and told Charlotte, "You dear, child. Those questions are not some a person your age would even think of, much less ask about. Where did they come from and why do you ask?"
Jane sat down on the edge of Charlotte's bed and patted the space beside her, indicating for Charlotte to sit beside her. She watched as Charlotte formed her thoughts before she heard, "It's what I saw during the fashion show, Aunt Jane. Oh, not just my seeing four naked young girls who were beautiful in their own right, but how others reacted when they saw us walking down the runway. As I watched the women and young girls in the audience react, they were excited by the items we wore, the young girls particularly interested in everything they saw. Their mothers, I assume they were their mothers, were more subdued when we came out in swimsuits, sleepwear, and underwear, some telling their daughters, 'No way in hell,' I believe one mother put it. But none acted as though we were anything but young ladies modeling clothing."
"As you know, The Style Shoppe has a large glass front, which allows shoppers to see into the store without any trouble. As we modeled I saw from the runway, and from behind the curtain, the large number of young boys and men who stopped and watched us as we modeled. It wasn't difficult to see how aroused many were as they stood and watched."
Charlotte laughed at the remembrance of the boys who held themselves as they ran to the restroom. "You found something funny about being watched, Charlotte?" Jane had to wait until Charlotte stopped laughing to hear an answer to her question.
"Aunt Jane," Charlotte said, as her laughing slowed to a chuckle, "During one of the girls' walk, we were wearing two-piece swimsuits at the time," and she chuckled again before continuing, "I watched from behind the curtain as several boys grabbed themselves and ran off to the mens restroom. As I watched from behind the curtain, until it was my turn, each time a girl walked the runway wearing the swimsuit, more boys would grab themselves and run off. When it was my turn, I watched, and after watching me, a boy presenting as a girl, more did the same. And it got even worse when we switched to sleepwear and underwear, because now it wasn't just the boys who grabbed themselves, but men as well. That's when I decided to really ham it up while wearing the all black underwear, and there were only a few boys or men left standing watching the show from outside of the store."
Jane didn't have to imagine how Charlotte hammed it up while wearing the all black underwear, she watched her do it from a room in Brenda's store. What she saw Charlotte do made her wish Art had been there with her. She shook off that thought and started thinking of answers to Charlotte's questions.
"Charlotte," and Jane paused, gathering her thoughts. "Answers to your questions are simple yet complicated. You saw with your own eyes how those men and boys reacted to you girls as you modeled the clothing. You can look to nature and see the same thing occur, and none are wearing what we'd consider clothing. The male brain is wired to find a female attractive, attractive enough to copulate in order to procreate our species, it happens with every species. By the same token, it's up to the female to decide whether or not the male who wants her is the one she wants to become the father of her children. Boys your age, and some men who never grew up, have trouble controlling themselves when they see beautiful women or young girls. The boys because their hormones are running wild and they have yet to learn to master the desires their hormones produce. The men know better, but possess the desire to mate with any female they find attractive, whether they are mated or not. By mated I refer to being married. As to why women are treated differently than men? It stems from long ago, a man had to protect the woman he was with or she'd be taken away from him by other men. Men are built differently than women, so are able to deal with situations women would have found difficult to handle. That isn't to say all women would find the tasks difficult, but the majority would. Because men began to think of women as the 'weaker' sex, it was believed women didn't posses the abilities or intellect to do what many men were capable of doing. And when 'modern' women wanted to stop being 'babied' and started exerting themselves, many men felt threatened. They felt as though they were losing control of everything around them. They never discover what some men discover, that a woman completes the man, that the woman makes the relationship whole. That she is the right hand the man had been missing his entire life. You didn't see those men who discovered the truth watching you as you and those girls modeled, Charlotte. You saw those men who wanted to possess something they couldn't have, watching you. To them, you five girls were nothing more than a desire to have sex with you and then move on. They had no interest in becoming your soul mates."
Jane again saw that Charlotte was thinking, and learned what she was thinking when she asked, "But if a person really loves someone, the true part of that person, not what they see that person present, should it matter if it's more than just man and woman?"
Jane marveled at the depth of Charlotte's question, because it's a question that has caused a great deal of strife. "Charlotte, very few people ever learn to love the true self of a person, they can't get past the presentation they see in the other person. Many don't even know there is a true part to every person, because it isn't what they've been told while growing up. If you watch television, read a magazine, listen to the radio, or see any type of media that displays products produced by others, you will see the vast majority deal with the appearance of the individual, and not their true self. They have the world believing that it's more important how you look than how you conduct yourself in the presence of others. They have convinced the world that men want women who are the most beautiful. They have convinced women they want men who ripple with muscles and stand tall above other men. But not one, to a letter, has ever said that it's more important to seek a person's true self and not look at the outside package. They are the ones who've made it difficult for women to show they are capable of doing what men can do, and in some cases, better than a man. It would be nice, Charlotte, if everyone sought the other person's true self and not how the person looked, it would keep so much trouble from happening. But we, as humans, aren't mature enough for that to happen. We, most of us anyway, are still trying to learn how to walk. Enough talk. Let's get you into bed. You've an interesting day tomorrow."
As Charlotte told Jane goodnight, and Jane left her bedroom, closing the door behind her, she wondered if she could get away with just pushing the SOB off a short plank hanging out over a deep canyon. Her other self told her 'no.'
"You've an interesting day tomorrow," was replayed in Charlotte's mind, as she lay in bed wondering what her next adventure was going to be. She had closed her eyes, trying to relax and let sleep overtake her, but her mind kept going over the events at The Style Shoppe, and the role she played.
"Charlotte, Charlotte, wake up, you're dreaming. It's just a dream, wake up."
Her sight was blurry as her eyes fluttered open, and she saw Jane standing over her. "Aunt Jane? Why are you here? Is it time to get up?"
Charlotte had to clear her throat several times while she spoke, it was raw for some reason. "You were screaming in your sleep, Charlotte. You must have been having a nightmare. Can you recall what you were dreaming? Try hard, it might be important for me to know."
Charlotte caught a glimpse of her dream, which helped her recall the whole dream and that caused her to burst into tears. Jane sat on the edge of Charlotte's bed and held her while she cried, coming up with more ideas which her other self told her she still couldn't do. Slowly, Charlotte calmed down, and when she had stopped crying Jane asked, "Can you tell me about your dream now?"
Charlotte remained silent for several long minutes, before saying, "We'd gone to the mall. You left me to window shop while you took Francis to get some much needed items. You didn't say it, but you did that so I'd see I was only seen as a girl. I started walking past this one empty store, one of the single stores, when hands came out of nowhere, grabbed me, and drug me into that empty store. I was dragged to the back of that store, someone held my hands up over my head on the floor, two others held my legs down and apart, then I felt my dress ripped up the center and my panties torn off and then someone was on me and in me," and Charlotte broke down again as she croaked, "and there wasn't anything I could do to stop it." And even though she was crying, Jane managed to understand her when she got out, "And they all took turns raping me."
Jane remembered a story she'd read for fun about invaders who'd treated those they'd conquered badly, especially one woman. She was repeatedly raped by several men at the orders of their commander. As fate would have it, the invaders were finally driven out, and that commander captured. The woman, with the help of several other men, stripped that ex-commander naked, held him down on the ground as they drove a sharpened stake up into his rectum and out his back, making sure not to hit any vital organs. They then raised the stake impaling the man, and it was set into the ground so that the cross piece against the man's rectum kept his feet from touching the ground. And they left him there to rot. Her other self told her again, no.
Charlotte is a boy, who, according to all the information she'd received, had never had such a sexual experience as she was describing. So why had Charlotte dreamt about that horrible event? Charlotte had calmed down again, holding on tight to Jane. Jane decided to try working backwards to see if Charlotte could give her any clues which lead to the nightmare. "Charlotte. Can you remember what you were dreaming before the dream of the rape? Or can you remember what you were thinking about as you went to sleep?"
Charlotte sniffed her nose, wiped her eyes, then told Jane, "I was dreaming I WAS a girl modeling, like today. I was having fun wearing all the clothing, even the sexier ones. I wore ball gowns, mini skirts, skirts girls could wear to school and some underwear that'd rev up any man's motor. And then you and Francis were there and, well, you know the rest. I had trouble falling asleep because I kept thinking about being a model for the afternoon, and how it turned out to be fun. And then started thinking about those four other girls and the boys getting aroused watching us, and I woke up with you shaking me. Could I have wanted to do to those four girls what those boys watching wanted to the five of us? Is that why I dreamt of being raped? Was my mind showing me how I'd feel if I done that to those four girls? But I never had any feeling to act that way even when those four were completely naked while changing. Never, Aunt Jane. You got to believe me. I would never do something like that to any girl, it isn't who I am inside, Aunt Jane. I don't understand why I had a dream of me being a girl and being raped?"
Jane so wanted to kill the bastard who's mentally hurt this boy, but elected to take deep breaths in order to calm herself down. "Charlotte, no one knows why we dream of events we'd never think of doing in the real world. Some try to explain it away by saying the desire is buried deep in our subconscious, that it's our self consciousness that keeps the subconscious in check in the real world so that deep desires are never allowed to occur. They claim that during sleep the subconscious takes over and manifests in our dreams. You are a male, Charles, not unlike the males on this planet. You have a desire to have sex with women, but unlike most of the males on this planet, the desire to have sex with a woman doesn't control your life. Your self awareness, your moral code of life, your knowing right from wrong all work together to show you how to live your life. That is what drives your life, not an animalistic desire. Are you feeling better? Do you think you can go back to sleep now?" Jane felt Charlotte nod her head and felt Charlotte release her, moving to lie back down in her bed. Neither said any more to the other, Jane just quietly left Charlotte's room, turning off the light and closing the door behind her.
Jane didn't go immediately back to bed, but went to the kitchen instead, finding Marie there fixing two cups of tea. "Is she all right now, Jane?"
Jane nodded her head and told Marie, "Yes, she seems to be now. The modeling she did at The Style Shoppe got to her more than she realized, it played on her subconscious. She dreamt she'd been window shopping and was grabbed by several guys, dragged into an abandoned shop, held down and raped. Repeatedly by all of those holding her. It would seem that being Charlotte, even for this short time, has really played into her subconscious. Charles may have been doing more analyzing of being Charlotte than he realizes, actually putting himself in the shoes of the girl named Charlotte." Jane picked up her cup of tea with shaking hands but sat it back down, afraid she'd spill the entire cup if she tried to take a sip. Marie laid a hand on Jane's hands, held them until Jane's hands stopped shaking. Jane looked over to Marie and growled, "Maire, I'd like to kill the bastard who caused this sweet boy all of these troubles. I wouldn't care what happened to me if I could make sure he didn't do this to another boy like Charles."
Marie nodded her head at Jane's words, totally understanding how Jane felt. "I know, chère, I feel the same. But...we both know that isn't the right way for us to proceed. We both know our role lies here, at Seasons House, doing what we do best in helping young boys find the path they should be walking and not the path they've decided to take. We have to trust those who are looking into all this, trust they will find the truth and all of those behind this. Try to drink your tea, chère, then go back to bed. I'll keep an eye on our Charlotte tonight."
Jane nodded her head, picked up her cup of tea, and together the two women sat silently and sipped at their tea until they saw the bottom of the cups. Both women thinking the same thoughts without saying a word to each other. Perhaps there's more of Charlotte in Charles than Charles realizes. Perhaps Charles isn't that far from actually becoming Charlotte, even though he seems comfortable being himself. It was as though a silent signal had been given and both women looked at each other, nodding towards the other before Marie said, "Perhaps we need to have him speak with someone better versed in that area than we are, oui?"
Jane slowly nodded her head in agreement with what Marie said, "Oui, ce serait peut-être pour le mieux. But he will have to speak with me first," Jane said, a smile forming on both women's lips.
Marie giggled then told Jane, "You two must remember there are children in the house, so you must not speak too loudly, as you yourself often do when the two of you speak."
Jane playfully swatted Marie's arm, saying, "I do not speak that loudly when he and I are in discussion. He causes me to um...rephrase my responses to his, um...inquiries. That's all."
Marie eyed Jane with a look that said, 'Uh, huh, sure,' before both women broke out laughing. Patting Marie's hand, she told her, "Wake me if you need me. I think after talking to me she'll sleep through what's left of this night."
"I will, chère, go get some sleep," Marie replied, and watched Jane leave the kitchen.
Marie picked up both tea cups, took them to the sink, rinsed them out before placing them on the counter; she'd wash them in the morning. As she walked up the stairs to her bedroom, she thought back to all the boys who'd affect Jane as Charlotte was doing, and could only think of a few that got under Jane's skin. She wondered when she'd need to be the one who'd need help getting over those who'd been sent to her but shouldn't have been here. She wondered if there would come a time when she would have to say enough, and go find her own peace.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Charlotte had slept soundly the rest of the night, apparently her talk with Jane resolved issues her subconscious had with her now living as Charlotte. Marie silently crept into Charlotte's bedroom, and quietly told her, "Cheri, it's time to get up, you've a big day today."
Marie had awoken Charlotte for the past few days, and had learned how the girl was going to react each time. "Yeah...okay...tante Marie...just a few more minutes," Charlotte mumbled and turned back over and went back to sleep.
Marie couldn't help herself and giggled before she grabbed the end of the covers over Charlotte and threw all of them to the foot of the bed. Charlotte did, and said, the same thing each and every time Marie did that, "Aww, Marie, that isn't playing fair."
Marie laughed then told Charlotte, "Peut-être pas, mais vous êtes maintenant réveillée, jeune fille." Charlotte rolled over, tried to give Marie a death glare, but failed, then said, "Que le vent soulève ta jupe un jour."
Marie laughed again, telling Charlotte, "Dépêchez-vous, shower, makeup, dress because you're going out today. Dépêchez-vous, dépêchez-vous, cheri. You must hurry."
Marie watched as Charlotte did her now famous look to the ceiling, rolled her eyes then said, "All right, Marie, I'm up. I'm up. Rush rush rush, that's all we seem to do. Is there really a purpose to all of this rushing?"
Marie bent down to Charlotte sitting on the edge of her bed, took her face in both hands, looked Charlotte in the eyes, and told her, "Because you are now a young lady, cheri. And young ladies often take more time getting ready for the day. Especially ones who haven't gotten out of bed. Now, dépêchez-vous, alle!" Marie released Charlotte's face, stepped back and watched Charlotte do her now famous head and eye movements, before she got out of bed, got a clean bra and panties, go into the bathroom, and closed the door behind her. "Dépêchez-vous, cheri. Dépêchez-vous," Marie said loudly to the bathroom door before leaving Charlotte's bedroom.
Jane had been watching Marie wake Charlotte, and heard the banter between the two. She was now listening to Charlotte talk to herself as she showered, causing Jane to laugh and chuckle at what was being said. "Rush rush rush, everything in this house is rush rush rush. You'd think the world was coming to an end. I'm surprised we aren't rushed to use the toilet, which would be a good trick at times. Wonder if mom and dad would take me on a nice, relaxing, vacation? Where rush is a four letter, a word not to be spoken." Jane continued listening as Charlotte prattled on, causing Jane to almost lose it completely because of some things Charlotte said to herself. When Charlotte finished in the bathroom, Jane watched as Charlotte swiftly put on her garter belt, stockings, slip, and the dress she'd wear for their outing today. She then watched as Charlotte placed a towel around her neck to keep makeup off her dress, before applying her makeup. Jane was impressed how quickly Charlotte was now able to apply her makeup, and doing a good job at the same time. She watched as the towel came off her neck, a brush taken to her hair, and Charlotte pronouncing, "Sehr gut," before she got up from the vanity chair, made her bed, placed her neatly folded nightie under the pillow, and left her bedroom. Once Charlotte reached the dining room, she went on through to the kitchen, telling Marie, "Bonjour," before getting the necessary plates and silverware to set the table for breakfast.
When Francis came down, and saw Charlotte setting the table, and doing it according to Jane's standards, she went into the kitchen, said, "Good morning, tante Marie," before she started taking the other items out of the cabinets and refrigerator to set on the dining room table. When the table had been set, both girls then donned aprons and helped Marie finish getting their breakfast ready.
After seeing both girls setting the table for their breakfast, Jane went into the study and noticed the fax machine was holding another fax to be printed. After inputting a code, and after letting the machine print out the fax, she sat down in her chair and began reading.
From: Jeb Thorton, et al.
To: Ms. Jane Thompson
Re: Progress report, for your eyes only.
Jane,
I wanted to update you on the progress of all the investigations into the rash of shoplifting thefts in the area. As I've seen so far, there is enough evidence to make several arrests, but that would only take the low level thieves off the street. Those in law enforcement want those who are in charge, issuing the orders to those actually doing the stealing.
I've been shown what's been found on Mr. Strom, he doesn't know it but his days are numbered. Once enough evidence is gathered on the real mastermind of this problem, several arrests will be made at once. His included.
Something that was surprising was what turned up when the store employees were investigated to rule out their involvement. Like Mr. Strom, several of the store managers, including Mr. Obler, the ex-store manager for Taylor's where the three boys were caught, are living a long way beyond their salaries. Several have other houses they own outright, costing several million dollars, which would be hard for them to do on their $75,000 a year salary. Others are driving cars which fall into the same category as the homes, on salaries just a bit higher. When this was discovered, records were backtracked and it was discovered these people paid cash for the items. Cash for items costing several million dollars on salaries of $75,000 and a bit higher. None listed any other income on their latest IRS returns, or even had that much in savings. Teams have been assigned to tail all of these people.
I sat in Court when Toby Camber stood before Judge Walinkiewicz, and he is a piece of work. I thought for a moment Ruth was going to come down from the bench and slap the snot out of him, because of his mouth and attitude. But she refrained, and is sending him to a special school which she said, "She hopes can instill a decent attitude and upright standards in him." I sure hope the people at that school are ready for him.
When I receive any more information I'll pass it on to you. Give Charles our love.
Kindest regards,
Jeb
So, Jane thought to herself, 'Some of the employees of those stores were involved in the thefts. I wonder how many more patsies were arrested?' She looked on the fax and found Jeb's email address and sent him an email concerning her thoughts of others being in the same situation as Charles. The reply seemed instantaneous, "We hadn't considered that, thank you for bringing it to our attention. Jeb" There was a knock on the study door, which Jane acknowledged, and saw Charlotte enter the Study. Charlotte then went to the bookshelf, took out 'the book', balanced it on her head and began walking the study. After her fith circuit finished, she replaced 'the book' and told Jane, "breakfast is ready, Aunt Jane." Jeb's fax was still on her mind, so she simply nodded recognition of Charlotte's message. She unlocked a drawer, placed the fax there, relocked the drawer, before getting out of her chair and walking out of the study before Charlotte, with Charlotte closing the door behind her..
"Girls," Jane said, to get their attention, just as both girls had taken a bit of scrambled eggs, "Today we're going to the salon to get you two ready for Monday and our new guest. I want to remind you to be on your best behavior because, as you know, Francis, Sandy and Carolyn are usually quite busy on Saturday. And I don't believe either of you wants to be found as boys dressing as girls, correct?" Still chewing, the only way they could answer Jane was to shake their heads, caught in another of Jane's little actions. "And Charlotte, Carolyn hold classes on Saturday for young girls. I think she'd enjoy it if you'd participate in the morning class. It would be another new experience for you."
Charlotte didn't have to be told that being suggested she participate was Jane's way of telling her she WAS going to participate. Charlotte also knew the correct response, "Yes Aunt Jane." She thought back to how she felt when finding out she was going to model clothing, and now felt the same knowing she was going to participate in something at the salon.
She thought her muttering hadn't been heard, but Jane asked, "What was that Charlotte?" Charlotte put her tongue in her cheek and said, "I was just saying it should be interesting, Aunt Jane." Looking at Jane, Charlotte knew Jane knew exactly what she had said, but chose to accept what Charlotte said out loud. She also saw the look on Jane's face when Jane knew she scored the very thing she wanted, her ward's unbridled cooperation.
"Girls," Jane began, just after they'd sat down to breakfast, "I've received more information about the investigations into your problem, Charlotte. I don't want to get your hopes up, but your father, his investigators, other investigators, and the police, have found a lot more than they had when Toby and the other two boys were caught at Taylor's department store. Charlotte, the shoplifting done that day at Taylor's is just a small part in a much larger ring of thefts that have been occurring in the area. And, Charlotte, somehow Mr. Strom, the CEO of Taylor's, is involved. It seems he garnered attention to himself when he spoke out at your hearing that day." Jane saw the excited look on Charlotte's face and told her, "Don't get too excited, Charlotte, it may be several more weeks before they have all the 'i's' dotted and the 't's' crossed, to make sure any case they bring forward stands up in Court. They must make sure of everything if they are to prove you were never involved in any way." Charlotte's excitement shifted to one of dismay at the thought of having to spend several more weeks with Jane. Or the possibility of not getting her named cleared right away. What Jane said next made Charlotte believe Jane really could read a person's mind, as she said, "A few more weeks won't be that bad, Charlotte. Just think of all the fun times you'll be having. And, think of helping with Toby Camber." It passed so fast Jane almost missed it, the flicker of anger that crossed Charlotte's face when she'd mentioned Toby. 'So, she hides her anger well, our little Charlotte. Hopefully she won't release it when Toby arrives,' Jane thought to herself. It was also something she could use as a teaching tool in the coming days.
The girls were then drilled about their lessons, something never wasted at any of the meals. When they'd finished breakfast, and everything was put away and the kitchen done, Jane directed the girls, "Okay girls, get your purses, make sure you've freshened your faces, make sure you teeth are clean, before we go to the salon to make you two ready for Monday. I want Toby to see two very proper young ladies when he steps off the train. Two young ladies who are properly dressed and groomed. Oh, and Charlotte. Don't forget Carolyn will be expecting your help with her morning class, so you are to do as she says when she says."
Jane gave Charlotte the 'look,' resulting in Charlotte's, "Yes Aunt Jane," answer. Jane then glared at Francis, who was dancing from foot to foot, wanting to say something to Charlotte but understood Jane's unspoken message.
Francis stopped dancing and like Charlotte, replied, "Yes Aunt Jane." Marie hid a smile as she watched the girls follow Jane out to her car.
It was only after they'd closed the front door that Marie said to herself, "I hope our cheri can do as she did modeling."
Parking this time was not simply pulling up in front of Merisha Chalet, getting out of the car and walking into the salon. Today, because of the number of cars present, they had to park some distance away and walk to the salon, something Jane knew about and made sure to watch Charlotte for any reaction from her. The scene Charlotte witnessed when they walked into the salon was completely different than her first time in the salon. The waiting area chairs were full of women and young girls. Young girls were at the reception desk looking through magazines, trying to show the receptionist the hairstyle they wanted or the makeup look they thought would look good on them. Several women and young girls were under hair dryers, and the styling chairs were full. Charlotte noticed several young girls, about her age, going and coming in and out of the back room, and more girls in the room every time the door opened.
The Merisha Chalet was always a madhouse on Saturday, so Sandy and Carolyn had extra help from girls who worked other jobs during the week but were licensed hairdressers and liked the extra money they made on the weekends. It was Carolyn who came to the reception desk when she saw Jane and the girls come into the salon and told them, "Good morning Jane, girls, you're right on time. Francis, Sandy is just finishing up with the girl in her chair so it'll be just a few moments then you can go back. And Charlotte, I'm ready for you. It's time to see how everything is with you." Because no one but Sandy and Carolyn knew the truth about Jane's girls, they were both circumspect when discussing what they'd do for the girls. And because Carolyn helped Charlotte her first time in the salon, Charlotte understood exactly what Carolyn meant by 'seeing how she was doing.' A young girl, about Charlotte's age, walked out of Sandy's station as the three walked to the back of the salon. "Ah, there she is, my favorite young lady. How are you today, Francis? I hope you haven't been giving your Aunt any trouble. I know you're such a sweet girl when you're here." Sandy still scared the bejesus out of Francis, and Sandy knew it. Francis was still under the impression she would be outed if she didn't do what Sandy or Carolyn told her to do. And Jane wanted it kept that way. "Hi Sandy. Yes, I'm doing fine this morning, and ready for whatever you have in mind." Jane smiled at Francis' response, as did Sandy, both knowing Sandy had Francis exactly where both women wanted her. Afraid she'd be outed if she didn't behave and do what she was told.
Carolyn took Charlotte into the waxing room and closed the door behind her, directing Charlotte to step behind the screen in the corner and get completely undressed. In a low voice, and while Charlotte was undressing, Carolyn asked, "How have you been coping, Charlotte? Has it been as bad as you expected, or have you been having fun with it all?"
Charlotte chuckled because of Carolyn's questions, and answered with, "Well, Carolyn, it has been an experience. Even getting to model at The Style Shoppe. After I calmed down, the modeling was fun, though I encountered something I didn't think would happen. Otherwise, yes, if I was truthful, it all has been fun. When would I otherwise be able to experience how it feels to wear girl's clothing and not have the adults in the know get upset?"
Charlotte came from behind the screen with the towel wrapped around her body, as any naked girl would do. Carolyn didn't miss Charlotte saying she encountered a problem while modeling and went straight at Charlotte to get her to explain about the problem she faced. "So, what was the problem you encountered while modeling, Charlotte? Hop up on the table face down, I'll do your backside first. So, the problem you encountered?" Carolyn saw how red Charlotte's face became when she'd asked about the problem, and how slow she was to get up on the table. And as she watched, a very naked Charlotte didn't lie down on her stomach on the table but sat on the edge, her legs dangling over the edge.
Carolyn sat down on the table beside Charlotte and waited, watching as Charlotte fought with herself in trying to answer Carolyn's question. She saw the resignation reach Charlotte's face and heard, "While I was modeling we'd have to change into the next set of clothes we'd wear. Several times while we all changed, I saw the other four girls completely naked and never once got aroused, as most boys would do." Carolyn saw the tear form in Charlotte's eyes, and slowly leave her eyes for her cheeks. "I only realized that after Jane had picked me up and we were driving home. I asked Jane why I didn't get aroused, why I didn't react like a normal boy. I asked her if not getting aroused made me weird." Tears were running freely down her cheeks now, as her voice cracked during her last statement. Carolyn reached over and put her arm around Charlotte, pulling her to her and into a hug. Carolyn hadn't been around Charlotte but once, but it was enough to see just what type of boy Charles was and why he questioned himself when he realized he hadn't reacted like a 'normal' boy seeing four naked girls.
"And let me guess," Carolyn said, reaching over to wipe the tears off Charlotte's cheeks. "Jane said you weren't weird. She said you were more mature than other boys your age. She said those four girls accepted you as one of the 'girls,' and thought nothing of you when you were naked. Right?" She felt Charlotte nod her head against her chest, then continued. "Charlotte, Charles, you are more mature than other boys your age. You don't put a premium on seeing girls as sex objects, only interested in getting between their legs in order to pleasure yourself. You see girls for who they are, girls, who feel much like you do, who want to be treated as people, like you do. And just because you didn't get aroused when you saw those four girls naked doesn't make you weird. I'm not saying that one day a special girl, one meant for you, won't get you aroused, just that you've been taught, rightly so I might add, how to treat other people properly. Boys or girls. You are a very sweet boy, Charles Thorton, and more boys could learn a thing or two from you." She held Charlotte for a bit longer then asked, "Feeling better? Want to get that nice looking butt up on my table so we can de-hair you?" That caused Charlotte to giggle, then nod, as Carolyn released her and watched as she swung her legs up onto the table and rolled over onto her stomach.
As Carolyn was waxing the back of Charlotte's legs, Charlotte asked, "Carolyn. What do girls, or women, want from a boy, or man? Are they as driven by wanting to have sex as boys or men?" If Carolyn was taken back by Charlotte's questions, she didn't show it, as she kept on working.
The room was quiet for several minutes before Carolyn said, "Charlotte, to answer your last question first, yes. There are some girls, and women, who are driven to have sex with boys or men. Sometimes women feel their clock to get pregnant is running out and because they want a child, they become driven by that belief. And some men think themselves to be a god women would be lucky to have sex with. Their egos are bigger than our planet. Of course, there are those who are addicted to sex, it's become like a drug to them and their fix is to have sex whenever the chance occurs. And often with whoever they can. Then we come to boys and girls who are going through puberty, their hormones raging throughout their bodies. Those hormones are new to them, almost driving them during this time of their lives. Most girls learn how to control the feelings they have during puberty, knowing the results of having sex can be pregnancy. But some girls don't care and give in to those feelings and have sex with boys, often getting a reputation of being easy."
"Boys, unlike you, are like wild animals who are often left to fend for themselves. They are often left out when the girls have 'the talk,' with their moms or classes at school. And if boys do get 'the talk,' at home or school, they are better at coping with their feelings, though sex isn't far from their thoughts. And then there are boys like you, Charles, boys who know about sex but find other interests more important to them. Boys who've had 'the talk,' understand the ramifications of having sex, but have a level of maturity that helps them deal with feelings produced by hormones. I'm guessing when you were modeling there was a crowd of men and boys standing outside the store watching? And more than one of the boys had a problem and ran off to take care of it?" She watched as Charlotte nodded her head. "I thought so, it happens every time Brenda has a showing. What you witnessed was a group of immature boys, who are governed by their raging hormones. Who sit around and talk about having sex with this or that girl. Who, when crunch time comes, talk louder than they have the courage to perform."
"As to what the majority of girls and women want from a boy or man? How do you want to be treated, Charlotte? I mean, when you're Charles? Don't you want to be respected for who you are, not what others can get from you? Don't you want to have your opinions respected, regardless of the topic? Do you want girls to throw themselves at you, thinking you'd be lucky to be with them? Don't you want to be respected as a person? A person who loves, is loved, and can give love to others? Or do you just want to be seen as an object to be used and thrown away? An object used by some to increase the size of their bank account, then when you're worn out, throw you away like a piece of trash?"
"Charlotte, girls and women, the majority of girls and women, I should say, want a boy or man who's sensitive, who can show his emotions without caring what others think. Who can make them laugh when they are hurting or need a lift from the daily grind of life. They want a man or boy who makes them feel secure, knowing no matter what happens, that man or boy will stay with them. They want their opinions respected, regardless of the topic. They don't want to be seen as airheads who don't know what they're talking about. And most of all, Charlotte, they want a man or boy who knows what real love is, and how to give it freely, without wanting anything in return. Isn't that what you want as Charles, Charlotte? Okay, your backside is done, roll over onto your back. I need to remove your breast forms and check you down there," and Carolyn pointed to Charlotte's groin, "to make sure everything is holding."
Carolyn worked to remove Charlotte's breast forms and continued with, "Charlotte, too many people have forgotten what it means to love or be loved without expecting anything in return. Things have changed since you were born, but when a man took a woman out on a date, there was never the thought of getting to home plate." Carolyn laughed when Charlotte gave her a questioning look after she said 'home plate.' "Charlotte, when a man took a woman on a date, or a woman went on a date with a man, it was never expected they'd have sex afterwards. She might get a kiss goodnight, or they might kiss for a while before he left, but the expectation of sex was not there. It was considered improper. Now, though, many guys expect to have sex with their dates because he paid for the meal and entertainment. And their attitude is, 'Well, I paid for everything, so she can pay me back by letting me get between her legs.' And Charlotte, there are some women who want sex with their date, and do expect to have sex with him. And that causes problems when a decent woman or man comes along who doesn't want to have sex or expects to have sex. Most times there's a lot of shouting and arguing, but sometimes it gets violent, and the woman ends up in the hospital. Or in the morgue.
"The questions you ask are really rather hard to answer, since there are so many different standards out there any more. It doesn't help that advertisers, in order to sell a product, show men and women having a good time in many different ways. Including those that suggest they're having sex or about to have sex. They show how happy those people are, how much fun it looks like they're having. They don't show the downside, Charlotte. They don't show the men and women who end up dead or in the hospital, or in jail because they just wanted to have the same fun they saw in an advertisement. Charlotte, keep to the standards I saw in you the first time Jane brought you into this salon. The standard Jane saw in you the minute you stepped off that train. It's a standard that would do other boys your age good to have. It's a standard that would make a lot of girls' lives much easier. It would help to keep many from making a mistake they later regret. A mistake that results in pregnancy, running away, or worse, their death because they couldn't face their parents after what they'd done. You didn't get aroused when you saw those girls naked, Charlotte, because you are a decent young man. A decent young man who knows how to treat other people like he wants to be treated."
Carolyn had been talking the entire time she waxed Charlotte's front, using it to distract her from any pain she might have felt as the strips were yanked off. "Okay, if you'll put your hand here," and Carolyn took Charlotte's right hand and placed it on the freshly applied breast form, "and hold it until the adhesive sets up, I'll make it so you don't look lopsided."
Carolyn laughed again when Charlotte said, "Lopsided?"
Carolyn gave Charlotte a 'duh' look then asked, "Do you want your breasts to be one sided? Flat on one side and bulging on the other?" She then gently tapped a finger to Charlotte's head, telling her, "Think girl. The other breast form has to be applied so you don't look...lopsided. Duh!" The silliness of it all made Charlotte laugh, a good sign to Carolyn that Charlotte was doing okay with what they were doing. "Okay, the adhesive should be set up, so you can get up now. I want you to put on just your bra and panties, then put on that robe," and she pointed to a white robe hanging on the wall near the privacy screen, "and wear it while Sandy does your hair. Something you need to remember when wearing a dress, skirt, or that robe, which is opened in the front. If you don't keep your knees together when you sit down, you're going to flash whoever happens to be looking at you. They're going to get a good view of your panties. So, when you sit down, sweep the back forward before you sit down, keep your knees together, and either cross one leg over the other with that leg resting on your thigh, or cross your feet at your ankles. Got it?"
Charlotte nodded her head as she got off the table, "I understand," she replied as she stepped behind the screen, emerging a moment later wearing just her bra and panties.
And as she was putting on the robe, Carolyn said, "You're going to be helping me with my morning makeup class. You're going to be my model."
As Carolyn watched, Charlotte became as white as the robe she was wearing. Carolyn could tell Charlotte was about to imitate a falling tree and quickly scooted the chair behind her just in time to let it catch the collapsing Charlotte. She kneeled down in front of Charlotte, took both of her hands just as Charlotte had started, "Bu...bu...but I can't be your makeup model. Those girls will see I'm not a real girl, they'll be real close, they'll see I'm not a real girl. I...I..."
Carolyn made gentle shushing sounds, trying to calm Charlotte down before she spoke. When Charlotte had calmed down, a bit, she told her, "No one is going to suss you're anything but a beautiful young girl. No matter how close they get to your face. Has anyone discovered your true gender up to now? Didn't Jane take you to the mall and let you walk around while she took Francis elsewhere?" Charlotte just nodded her head, her throat had gone dry. "Well, did anyone see that you were a boy presenting as a girl, or just a beautiful girl looking around? And what about the modeling you did at The Style Shoppe? Were you outed for being a boy modeling girls clothing? When you walked into our salon, did you hear anyone laugh because they spotted you as a boy dressed as a girl?"
Carolyn got up and opened the small fridge in the corner of the room, took out a bottle of water and handed it to Charlotte, who almost drank the entire bottle in one gulp. "Better?" Carolyn asked, watching as Charlotte nodded her head. "So. Have you been outed as a boy since you've been presenting as Charlotte?"
She saw the tears form in Charlotte's eyes as Charlotte whispered, "No. I've just been seen as a girl."
Carolyn then took Charlotte's face in her hands, lifted it until she was looking into Charlotte's eyes, and told her, "Then no one in my makeup class is going to see you as anything but a very beautiful girl who wanted to help them learn how to apply makeup. You just sit there and let me apply different makeup to show them how to get different looks for different occasions. You act like this is something you always do, don't make it a big deal, and they won't know any difference. Okay?"
Carolyn released Charlotte's face, and watched Charlotte nod her head before saying, "Okay. In for a penny, in for a pound."
Carolyn took Charlotte's arm, pulled gently, and helped Charlotte out of the chair. "Go on, Sandy should be ready to do your hair. And remember what I said about flashing people." Charlotte laughed after hearing Carolyn say 'flashing people,' and left the waxing room, heading to Sandy's station to get her hair done.
Sandy had a smirk on her face when Charlotte walked into her station. "So...you get to be Carolyn's makeup model today. You best be nice or they'll see the boy Carolyn is using." Sandy hadn't forgotten the last time she tried to get physical with Charlotte, so was extra careful to keep her hands to herself. But that didn't mean she couldn't try and get under the boy's skin by talking. "So, prissy, boy, you looking forward to being a makeup model? You goin' to let Carolyn put makeup all over your prissy face?" Sandy had kept her voice low, low enough so only Charlotte could hear what she was saying. "You know, a real boy wouldn't let anyone put makeup on their face. A real boy wouldn't be dressed as a girl, and prance around trying to look like a girl."
Charlotte had remembered Carolyn instructions when sitting in the robe, and had her left leg crossed over the thigh her right one, as she'd seen girls and women do. Sandy had said a few things which she knew weren't true, as her mind located the memory location.
Charlotte laughed when she found the memory and told Sandy, "You're so wrong, Sandy. In fact there have been several famous female impersonators who are quite popular. Francis Leon, Miss Shangay Lily, John Epperson, RuPaul, Pabllo Vittar, Zsa Zsa Shakespeer and many more if you ever care to look them up. And some of them are so good, if they'd walk into this salon, not even you could tell they were anything but women. Did you also know that during Shakespeer's day, all female roles were played by men. Even today, those who perform authentic Shakespeer plays, use men to fill the rolls of the women characters. So save your attempted insults for one of Jane's regular girls, like the one arriving Monday. Him you will be able to scare enough to get him to wet himself, that I know for sure." Sandy tried a few more of her insulting words, but always got a comeback that shut her up.
Jane had been watching Sandy try to get under Charlotte's skin, chuckling when Charlotte gave better than she got. She saw how mad Sandy was at being rebuffed, but was pleased Sandy didn't take her anger out on Charlotte's hair. Or Charlotte herself, knowing what could happen if she did.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about this sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
With a bit of smoke coming out of her ears, because she'd more than met her match in Charlotte, she wasn't expecting what Charlotte did next. As Charlotte looked into the mirror, after getting out of the hairdressing chair, she thanked Sandy then gave her a hug and a peck on the cheek, telling her, "You do wonderful work, Sandy," before she left Sandy's station. Carolyn was standing there as Charlotte walked out of Sandy's station, and did a 'come with me' finger gesture that told Charlotte her new modeling job was about to begin.
Carolyn took Charlotte into the back room, closing the door after Charlotte had entered. What met Charlotte's eyes were about fifteen teenage girls, in every manner of dress, hairstyle and makeup. Charlotte remembered what Carolyn had told her, and what Brenda had told her, and screwed up her courage and stood listening as Carolyn addressed the girls. "Girls, if I can have your attention. If you all will take a seat, we'll get started." Carolyn waited patiently until all the girls were seated then went on with, "Today we have a volunteer with us who has generously offered to allow me to use her as a model for this morning's makeup class. Girls, meet Charlotte. She's staying with her Aunt for a while and thought the experience would not only help you girls, but herself as well."
For the next two hours Carolyn went over the proper way to remove makeup, she had to remove the makeup Charlotte was wearing. How to moisturize their skin, which she did to Charlotte's skin, even talking about the different types available. She then went over color matching and how what one girl wore might not be the right color for another girl; little did they know it also applied to the boy being their model. She covered foundations, powders, blush, lip and eye liners, brow pencils, shadows, and the application of each as she demonstrated on Charlotte. "Now understand, girls. What I've done to Charlotte's face would be considered a daytime look, where you're wearing makeup but it doesn't seem you're wearing anything. You're not going to a special occasion, or party, or any such event. You're out with your friends, shopping, going to the movies, anything along those lines. Now, while I clean Charlotte's face, over on that table," and she pointed to a table to her right, "you'll find a box of facial cleaning wipes that you can use on your own faces. You want to make sure you have a clean palette when you start putting on your makeup. So, don't be shy, go ahead, grab a box and have at it."
Charlotte watched as all but one girl enthusiastically grabbed a box of wipes off the table. She watched as the girl waited until all of the other girls had taken a box before she slinked in to take one of her own. Charlotte watched the girl go back to a seat in the very back, and as she slowly opened the box and took out a wipe. While the other girls happily cleaned their own faces, or helped the girl sitting next to her, that girl just sat there, holding the wipe in her hand. In a low voice, meant only for Carolyn, she asked, "Carolyn, why is that girl in the back row just sitting there holding the facial wipe?"
Carolyn moved to position herself to appear wiping at a place on Charlotte's face so she could see the girl pointed out to her. Responding in a low voice, meant only for Charlotte, she told her, "That's Barbara Wells, Charlotte. She has a pretty good case of acne, and she's embarrassed by how it makes her appear. As I no doubt you've seen, the other girls don't seem to want anything to do with her. And it hurts."
Then Charlotte did something that really didn't surprise Carolyn, she asked, "Have you cleaned off my face?" When Carolyn said she had, Charlotte told her, "Since it looks like the girls are still cleaning their faces, I'll be right back." As Carolyn stood and watched, Charlotte walked back to where Barbra was seated. There was an empty chair next to Barbra and Charlotte asked, "Is there anyone sitting here," and she pointed to the chair next to Barbra.
When Barbra looked up at Charlotte, Charlotte saw the tears in Brabra's eyes, though they had yet to reach her voice. "Ah...no, it's empty," she told Charlotte. Barbra dropped her head, again, after answering Charlotte's question, giving Charlotte a good side view of her face. Even wearing a foundation, it was clear to see how much acne covered Barbra's cheeks.
"You're worried about what the other girls will think if you take off your makeup, aren't you?" Charlotte's question brought more tears to Barbra's eyes, causing some to slide down her cheeks. "Yes, I am," she whispered. "Because of my face I'm treated like some freak."
Charlotte smiled, placed her left hand gently under Barbra's chin, lifted her head and told her, "I don't think you're a freak. Judging by your eyes, there's a beautiful young girl inside that others are missing. They're too blind to see past your skin and see the real you."
All the hurt she felt, all the teasing she'd suffered, all the unkind words she'd heard about her face finally came out, as she leaned onto Charlotte's shoulder and cried. Charlotte felt her own tears well in her eyes, as she muttered a few things under her breath about such people to cause this beautiful girl so much pain. As Barbra started to calm down, Charlotte quietly told her, "Come on, let's go talk with Carolyn and see if she doesn't know of something you can use to get rid of that acne. I'm guessing you've seen a doctor?"
Charlotte asked, feeling Barbra nod her head, then heard, "Yeah, but nothing they gave me did any good. It doesn't matter how hard I work to keep my face clean, or not eat greasy foods, it won't go away." Charlotte helped Barbra out of her chair and held her and they walked up to Carolyn. Carolyn could only smile at what she saw Charlotte doing, something she's wanted to do ever since Barbra's mom forced her to come in on Saturday morning. She wanted to do what Charlotte was doing but every time she approached Barbra, the girl would shy away and leave.
"Carolyn," Charlotte addressed the woman, "this is Barbra Wells, and she has a problem, and I wonder if you could help her?" Barbra was again shy, and looked like she was ready to leave, if not for Charlotte's arm around her waist.
"Yes, I think I have something that might help. Let me go get it and I'll be right back." Charlotte had Barbra sit down in the chair she'd been using, then offered to clean the makeup off Barbra's face. Reluctantly, Barbra gave the wipe she was still holding to Charlotte, and Charlotte gently started cleaning the makeup off Barbra's face; she'd finished just as Carolyn returned carrying a green bottle.
"Barbra, this is made by a company who has perfected a treatment for acne, and it's new to the market."
With her makeup removed it was easy to see that Barbra had a bad acne problem. "But will it work for me?" She asked in an almost resigned voice. "I've tried so many and none did any good."
Carolyn saw the tears well up in the girl's eyes and almost cried with her. Instead, she gently put her fingers under Barbra's chin, lifted her head, looked her in the eyes, and told her, "Oh, yes it will, sweetheart." Carolyn looked out over the girls and said, "Patty, where are you girl? Oh there you are. Come here for a minute, would you please."
When Patty reached Carolyn, Charlotte, and Barbra, she took one look at Barbra and said, "Ooohh, you got it bad, don't ya girl?"
Charlotte gave Patty a dirty look, while Carolyn only said, "Don't be cruel, Patty. You were much worse if I remember right."
Patty chuckled, then said, "Sorry, girl. Yeah, I was worse than you. Here, wait a minute." The three watched as Patty returned to her chair, grabbed her purse and came back to the three. They watched as she took out a wallet size folder, which she flipped through, then showing Barbra the picture, said, "That's what I used to look like. And boy did I feel like shit."
Barbra looked at the picture for a long moment, then looked up at Patty, then again at the picture. Then she reached up and gently touched Patty's cheek, saying, "No way. This can't have been you, your skin is so soft and smooth."
Patty turned around and almost yelled, "Hey, Mel. Get your butt up here." When Mel arrived Patty told them, "Guys, this is Melissa, who goes by Mel. Mel, is that or is that not my picture from a month ago?"
Mel looked at the picture and said, "Yep, that's your old ugly face all right. But that's nothing, I'll show you one better." This time it was four who watched as Mel returned to her seat and grabbed her purse before coming back to the four. Like Patty, she then pulled out a wallet size folder, flipped through the pictures it held, then said, "Take a look at that mess." The picture Barbra and Charlotte looked at showed a face with a massive acne infection. Neither girl could see a clear place on Mel's face in the picture.
As she did with Patty's picture, she looked at Mel, then her picture, then Mel, and could only say, "Wow."
She handed the folder back to Mel, who told them, "School was hell for me back then. I never knew people could be so mean." She reached up and backhanded tears out of her eyes, then told Barbra, "That stuff Carolyn's holding really works. It took more than a couple of months to clear up my face, but ain't I purty now?" She said, as she thrust out one hip, putting a hand on that hip and one behind her head.
Mel's silliness caused the five to laugh, and Barbra asked Carolyn, "May I buy that today. I've tried about everything else, one more something won't hurt."
Patty popped in with, "You got that right, it doesn't hurt. Use it twice a day, morning and before you go to bed. Wash your face real well before you put it on. Your face ain't as bad as mine or Mel's faces were, so those pretty eyes will soon have a pretty face to go with them. Right Mel?"
"Got that right," Mel replied, before saying, "Why don't you come sit with us, we'll show you some tricks we used before our faces cleared up. What'd ya say?"
Barbra looked at Charlotte, who was nodding her head, and softly saying, "Go on, let them help you."
Barbra nodded her head, as she let Charlotte help her out of the chair, following Mel and Patty back to their seats. Carolyn put her arm around Charlotte's shoulder and told her, "That was a nice thing you did for her, Charlotte. You helped her without making her feel any worse because of the acne. What's that boy's name who's arriving on Monday?"
The rest of the time Carolyn worked with each girl to find the color that fit their skin tones. She then, using Charlotte, showed the girls a different look, before having the girls try it on their own faces. Charlotte kept an eye on Barbra, and saw how much happier she was as Mel and Patty worked with her by showing some of the tricks they'd learned to hide their acne before their faces cleared. By the time the two hours were up, not only was Barbra happy but so was Charlotte, again only thought to be just another girl by the rest of the girls in the class.
Carolyn took Charlotte back to the waxing room so she could get dressed, before speaking with Jane. When Charlotte came out of the room, she noticed Francis was upset, she could almost see smoke coming out of her ears. She sat down next to Francis and quietly asked her, "So, would you care to tell me about it now or wait until later? You look like you're about to explode."
Francis took several deep breaths before saying one word, "Sandy." After taking several more breaths, Francis told Charlotte what Sandy had said while doing her hair, and it was extremely personal.
Charlotte looked up and saw Sandy watching them, then watched as Sandy smiled and finger waved at her. Looking at Sandy, Charlotte reached up and scratched the top of her nose with her middle finger, smiling as she did. Charlotte got an even bigger smile as she watched Sandy storm off to the back of the shop, muttering to herself along the way. Neither Jane nor Carolyn saw the exchange between Sandy and Charlotte, but they did see Sandy storm off and hear her muttering as she headed to the back of the salon. Both women turned to look at the two girls, Jane giving Charlotte a questioning look before asking, "Is there something wrong, Charlotte? Sandy seemed rather put out about something."
Carolyn hadn't seen the expression now on Charlotte's face, but Jane had, and knew it was serious. "Yes, Aunt Jane, there is. Sandy verbally attacked Francis' parents with lewd suggestions. I merely showed her how I felt about her for what she did."
Jane furrowed her brows, then asked, "And how did you show her your displeasure, Charlotte?"
Charlotte smiled, then said, "Well, I had an itch on the top of my nose, and scratched it." Carolyn chuckled, Jane did too but inside, as both women now knew exactly what Charlotte had done.
Maintaining her Jane persona, she told Charlotte, "We'll discuss this later, Charlotte."
Francis finally caught on to what Charlotte had done, and giggled, whispering, "Way to go girl." Neither girl saw the smile on Jane's face as she'd turned back to face Carolyn, who was smiling because once again Sandy got better than she gave.
They had to wait a few minutes more before Charlotte could finally get her nails done, and left the salon shortly after, with Charlotte getting a 'well done' from Carolyn. It was once they were in Jane's car, and driving to the Mall, that Jane finally broached the subject of what Charlotte had done to Sandy. "That was admirable of you to stand up for Francis, Charlotte, and help Barbra during the makeup class. The gesture you showed Sandy, while most unladylike, was discrete, and might not have been understood by everyone. Sandy does have a habit of overdoing things, and Carolyn will speak to her... again. That's twice now you've bested her, and she isn't happy. Hopefully Carolyn can get across to her how to limit herself... again. Now. You, Charlotte, will be on your own to explore the shops at the Mall while I take Francis to acquire some needed things. You may visit any of the stores you want. Francis and I will meet you at the food court in one hour."
Jane knew that Charlotte knew exactly what Jane was doing, so Charlotte said, "This is another time for me to get used to being seen as a girl, isn't it Aunt Jane?"
Jane chuckled before she replied. "Yes, Charlotte, that's exactly what you are doing. You have a different appearance now, and you need to see how that appearance affects those around you. And, Charlotte, you have my permission to protect yourself should the situation arise."
When they reached the Mall, and Jane had parked her car near a Mall entrance, she gave Charlotte a Debit card, telling her the amount on the card, before they entered the Mall. Once they reached the main concourse Jane and Francis went one way and Charlotte the other, Jane reminding Charlotte where they'd meet. It was much busier than it had been the first time Charlotte had been there, with more teens walking around. Charlotte started window shopping much like she'd done the first time, going into the stores which had something she wanted to get a closer look at. She'd just come out of one store carrying her purchase, a nice dress, when a group of girls came by. "Whoa, get a load of miss prissy, girls? Ain't she a looker." The group stopped in front of Charlotte, blocking her path, all of them looking her up and down. "So, miss prissy, you from some charm shit house, or something? I never seen you around here before. What school do you go to?"
Charlotte smiled, gave the five girls the same up and down look, before she told them, "A school none of you are qualified to attend. Now if you'll excuse me I've more shopping to do." Charlotte made to step past the girls, only to be blocked by the one doing the talking.
"I don't think I like your attitude. Maybe we should teach you some manners."
Charlotte smiled at the girl, watching as the girl produced an uneasy look on her face, before she said to the girl, "Girl, you couldn't show manners to a goat. You have to know what manners are before you can teach them to anyone." Charlotte watched as the girl's face became fire engine red, before one of her hands came up to slap Charlotte's face. Charlotte was quicker, catching the hand by the wrist and squeezing it. The pain Mouthy girl felt in her wrist, now showed on her face, and heard the growl in Charlotte's voice, as Charlotte told her, "See, you can't teach manners if you don't have them first. I would suggest, if you don't want this to get very ugly, to take your little group and move on out of my way."
This time when Charlotte made to step around the five girls, they parted to let her go by them. As Charlotte walked off, Mouthy girl, still rubbing her wrist, hollered, "BITCH." Charlotte turned around to face the girl, and scratched the top of her nose. As Charlotte observed during her shopping, more girls seemed to be at the Mall than boys, and more girls eyed her in much the same way as the five girls had done. It wasn't lost on Charlotte how the boys reacted as she walked by them, some getting down right lewd in their speech. As she was standing looking in one window a boy came up beside her and actually told her what he'd like to do with her, getting a response from Charlotte that caused him to grab her by the arm and tell her, "No bitch talks to me that way." His bravado was short lived, as he suddenly found himself, nose first, up against the window of the store they were in front of, his arm twisted painfully behind his back. The growl in Charlotte's voice left no doubt she was pissed, as she leaned in close to his left ear and told him, "So you must be the dick who thinks he's the God to all of us girls around here. Well, dick, you're no God, but an asshole who hasn't the brains God gave a jackass. If you don't want to end up in the hospital you'll leave me alone. And if you grab me again, you will." Then in a sweet voice she asked, "Do you understand what I said, asshole?"
Charlotte saw blood from the boy's nose on the glass, and watched as he nodded his head in understanding. Charlotte stepped back as she released his arm, ready for anything the boy might do next. As she watched, he wiped the blood from his nose with the back of her hand, telling her as he started walking away, "You wait until I see you at school. I've got some friends who'll love fucking you."
Charlotte waited until she was sure the boy wasn't coming back before bending down and picking up the store bag she'd dropped out of her way. "Are you all right, miss?" A voice asked, caming from her left.
She turned to see a store employee standing there, a cloth held in her hands. "Yeah, I'm all right, and sorry about the mess on the window. Assholes like him really piss me off."
The woman smiled, used the cloth to wipe off the blood on the glass, before telling Charlotte, "I know what you mean. Some men and boys just don't understand how to properly treat women or girls. By the way, that was a nice move you did. Had a bit of training, haven't you?"
Charlotte smiled at the woman and said, "Oh, just a bit."
Neither Charlotte or the store employee had noticed the small crowd that had gathered to watch Charlotte take care of the boy who'd grabbed her arm. Nor did they notice when it broke up and two Mall security guards appeared. "Excuse me, miss. Are you okay? We saw the trouble on our cameras and got here as fast as we could," the female security told Charlotte.
Charlotte turned to face her, and her male partner, smiled, then told her, "Yes, ma'am, I'm fine. But he," and she pointed towards the boy stomping down the concourse, "got a bloody nose out of his efforts. Oh, and looky there, he's at it again. Down there in front of the sporting goods store."
The two guards looked towards the sporting goods store and watched as the boy was bothering a girl standing in front of the store. The male guard let out a sigh before saying, "Oh, crap. Not him again. Miss, you're not the first young lady he's bothered, and he's been warned by us and his parents. It looks like he's a slow learner. Come on, Heather, let's go toss Romeo out the door." Charlotte and the store employee stood and watched as the two Mall security guards reached the boy. Each took one of the boy's arms and frog marched him down the concourse and turned where the concourse led to an entrance.
"Well, hopefully he won't be a problem any more," the woman store employee said, before turning and walking back into the store.
Charlotte looked around and found a clock hanging from a rod on one of the store walls, it was time to meet Jane and Francis at the food court. And likely explain herself...again.
When Charlotte reached the food court she saw Aunt Jane and Francis sitting at a table sipping their drinks. As she walked up to the table Jane said, "Ah, there you are, Charlotte. I take it you took care of that problem in a proper manner. You didn't send him to the hospital, did you? Go get something to drink, then we'll talk." It wasn't hard for Jane to see the still smoldering embers in Charlotte's eyes, telling her Charlotte was still angry over what happened. Charlotte came back to the table with her drink, sat down and stayed silent, slowly sipping her cola. When Jane could see she'd calmed down a bit she said, "Tell me what happened. You need to get it off your chest."
Charlotte was silent for a long while before she told Jane everything she'd been doing before she was accosted by the boy. She explained how she'd tried to tell the fly to go away but that the boy didn't take kindly to being spoken to in the way Charlotte spoke to him. And when he grabbed her arm, she reacted, and the boy found himself face first into the glass window of that store. She also told Jane of the boy going after another girl standing in front of the sporting goods store, and of the two security guards who then escorted the boy out of the Mall. As Charlotte talked, Jane could see her calming down, until she was her normal self again. "I'd say, under the circumstances, you acted appropriately, Charlotte. You should never allow any boy to lay hands on you, unless he's trying to save your life. Now, I think we are done here for today and time for us to leave," Jane said, as she stood up from her chair. As the three walked back to the entrance they'd used to come into the Mall, they passed the two security guards, who waved at Charlotte, and she waved back.
They turned from the main concourse and started walking toward the entrance, just as Charlotte spotted the boy she gave the bloody nose too standing outside the doors. "Aunt Jane, see that boy pacing back and forth, wearing the blue shirt? That's the boy who caused the problem. And the one the guards must have thrown out of the Mall."
Jane had seen a boy pacing just outside the Mall entrance doors, but thought nothing of it. Until now. "Yes, Charlotte, I see him. Let's hope he doesn't display any more of his ignorance." After saying that, Jane led the way out of the Mall, watching the boy as she did, just as Charlotte was watching him and getting herself ready in case there was another display of stupidity.
As the three emerged from the Mall, the boy saw them and stopped pacing and stared daggers at Charlotte. "YOU STUPID BITCH. YOU GOT ME THROWN OUT OF THE MALL. THAT'S GOING TO COST YOU PLENTY THIS TIME," the boy yelled, as he started walking towards them.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to this few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in . So if you haven't read , the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
As the boy walked towards them, Jane said, "Young man, it appears you didn't learn anything from your first lesson. I would advise you to turn around and walk away now while you still can." Jane didn't have to see that Charlotte had already taken her ready stance, and would have no trouble handling the boy if he reached her. Only that didn't happen, as the boy stretched out his left hand to push Jane out of the way, he found himself with his arm twisted in pain. Jane had reached across with her right hand and grabbed the boy's hand just under the thumb. She then rotated his hand outward until his entire arm was rotated in that direction, threatening to twist the boy's arm off at the shoulder. She then used that force to push the boy to the ground and hold him there, just as the same two Mall security guards came running out of the Mall, breathing hard. They had no trouble determining who had the upper hand, as the boy was screaming his head off because of the pain he was experiencing in his left arm.
Because her concentration was solely on the boy, Jane didn't know which guard said, "Aw, shirt, don't you ever learn, kid?"
The boy's day got even worse as a police patrol car pulled up to the curb where the action was happening. Both officers got out of their patrol car, one saying when he saw the boy, "Gawd, Grant. Why is it always you causing problems here at the Mall?"
Neither officer could see Jane clearly, as her back was to them, but when they both walked where they could see her, the second officer said, "Hello, Ms. Thompson. Teaching another lesson I see."
Despite the situation, Jane chuckled, then replied, "Officer Brinkley, yes, unfortunately that is the case. I take it you two know this... uncouth youth?"
The first officer was on his cell phone, as the second officer relieved Jane of the boy's hand. "Stand up, Peter. I think you are well aware of what you were told by your parents the last time you got your butt in trouble. My partner is calling them now." She then looked at the two Mall security guards and asked, "I take it you've kicked him out of the Mall for good?"
Both nodded their heads, with the woman guard saying, "Yeah, he bothered this young lady there," and she pointed to Charlotte, "and got a bloody nose for his troubles. He wasn't through, though, as he had another go at another young lady. Plus, he's caused problems before. Yeah, he's banned from the Mall this time."
About ten minutes later a car pulled up behind the police patrol car, a man and woman getting out of the car and angrily walking over to the small group. "Officers," Martin Grant said as she stopped next to the officers.
"Mr. Grant, Mrs. Grant, I'm sorry to see you both, again, under these circumstances. But Peter here," and he pointed to Peter, "either didn't listen the last time we talked, didn't listen to your last lecture, or didn't understand what this young lady here," he pointed to Charlotte, "told him when he grabbed her arm while in the Mall. Oh, and he's been banned from the Mall this time."
Peter turning a pale gray wasn't lost on Jane, or Charlotte, who had developed a keen eye after years of training. The look on Peter's face told it all, he knew he was in deep trouble. Martin walked over until he was standing in front of his son, then said, "Peter. Your mother and I love you very much, but we can't allow this behavior to continue any more. We have tried to instill a sense of morality in you, but I guess you find what your 'friends' say more important. Your mother and I have been talking, and have contacted a school we think will help you learn a lot about yourself, values, and instill a sense of morality in you."
The color in Peter's face returned to normal until he heard, "Son, it's an all girls school. You will become a member of that student body as just another girl in the school." Peter's face went white, just before he yelled, "YOU CAN'T BE FUCKING SERIOUS! I WON'T GO, YOU CAN'T MAKE ME GO. I AIN'T GONNA BECOME NO SISSY BOY." Martin reached up and firmly took hold of Peter's chin. "Young man, the next vulgar word out of your mouth and you, me, and one these security guards are going to the men's room and I WILL wash your mouth out with soap!" Then with a growl in his voice, Martin finished with, "DO. YOU. UNDERSTAND. ME?"
Peter found it hard to nod his head with his dad firmly holding his chin, but he did. "As to your not going, that's fine, then you can go with these two officers and I'm sure this woman would be happy to have charges brought against you for attacking the young lady with her. That would mean you'd be put in jail. Behind bars. With people who eat people like you for lunch, and don't blink an eye when they do. But it's up to you." Martin released his son's chin, stood back and watched his son work through what he'd just been told. He looked up at the police officers, noticing one was holding a pair of handcuffs, twirling it around one of his fingers. Jane recognized what Martin was doing, giving Peter the chance of choosing the lesser of two evils; she'd used it often enough herself. They all watched as Peter sighed, a sign of resignation, before he said in a defeated voice, "All right, I'll go. But I won't like it. And if anyone finds out I'll be the laughing stock of school." Martin looked at Jane, who smiled and nodded her head at Martin, who smiled and nodded back.
Jane then gently placed a hand under Peter's chin, raised his head, and told him, "Young man, you shouldn't take this as a defeat. Think of it as a learning experience. Seldom do boys have the opportunity to learn how it feels to be treated as a young lady. Seldom do they finally understand what many girls suffer because of boys like you are at the moment. I've no doubt you will get a taste of the very things you did to my niece and the other young lady. And maybe that experience will open your eyes wider than your so-called friends."
Jane just finished saying, 'So-called friends,' when three boys came walking towards the small group. "Hey, Peter, how're they hanging today? Loose, right?" The three laughed at what the boy said. "Sorry we're late, but George here," the boy said, pointing to the boy on his right, "had to finish fucking his girlfriend. Boy you should have heard her screaming, he was pounding her hard." The three stopped a few feet from where the Grants were standing before the first boy asked, "So... what's goin' on? We're still goin' inside to have some fun, right? What's with the four cops, someone rob a bank?"
The three boys laughed right after what the first boy said. Martin turned to his son and asked, "So you call these morons your friends? These illiterate degenerate morons? You think being with them is better than what your mother and I have been trying to teach you all these years?"
The first boy didn't seem to understand why the adults were looking at them as though they were something gooey that had just been stepped in, and ignoring what Martin just asked Peter, went on with, "Well, you comin' or not, Peter? Saturday is always prime shopping day. There are girls just waiting to be felt up."
Martin looked at the boy and told him, "Peter isn't going with you today, tomorrow, or any time, from now on. His attitude, the attitude he picked up from you three, has gotten him into trouble and he'll be leaving today for a boarding school. Where he'll learn what his mother and I have been trying to teach him for years. Where he won't be associating with morons like you three."
The first boy stepped closer to Martin, looked up at him and asked, "Who you calling a moron, old man?"
Jane chuckled before saying, "Mr. Grant, it would seem your assessment of this jeune cochon (young pig) is accurate. As is his being a degenerate moron." Jane could see that her words hit the boy right between his eyes, as he turned to her and took a step towards her.
What he wasn't ready for was the sudden appearance of Charlotte between him and Jane. "It also appears you are as illiterate as well as a degenerate moron," Charlotte said, smiling and standing ready. "You don't even recognize you've just been called a young pig, which is quite fitting." Just as she had as Charles sitting in the holding room at Taylor's department store, when James Conner started reaching for the police baton lying on the table, Charlotte saw the boy's intentions before he moved, and blocked the hand that had swung up to slap her across the face. There was both a look of surprise and of pain on the boy's face as the toe of Charlotte's kitten heels planted itself squarely into the boy's solar plexus, causing him to drop to his knees gasping for breath. George, the boy who'd been to the right of the first boy, came at Charlotte, but never saw her right hand come up and deliver a palm strike straight to his chin. He also didn't realize he was lying down until he came too several minutes later.
The adults had been so focused on the first boy and George that they never saw the big man approaching from the same direction as the boys had, until they heard a cry of pain and looked in the direction of the sound. What they saw was how the third boy had been grabbed by a huge hand, from behind, at the base of the boy's neck. And how the man's fingers almost met at the boy's throat. The man bent down, and in a deep voice, said, "I guess you didn't understand me when I told you to stay away from those two assholes. I guess you forgot what I said was going to happen if I ever caught you with those two assholes. I guess you thought I was kidding when I told you your mother and I had been discussing a new location for you to attend school so you wouldn't be around those two assholes. "WELL! DID YOU FORGET WHAT YOU WERE TOLD? OR ARE YOU JUST TOO STUPID THAT YOU CAN'T SEE WHAT KIND OF ASSHOLES THEY ARE?" If Peter had turned white when he learned he'd be attending an all girls school, this boy turned almost translucent by what his father said. "Well, boy, I'm waiting for an answer?" The big man then looked up and said, "Hello, Martin, Millie, Ms. Thompson. I hope my son hasn't caused you any problems. He does, however, have a problem right now. Young lady, that was some fancy work you just did on those two buttheads, guess they weren't expecting something like that from a girl."
It was Millie who spoke up as she said, "Did I understand you correctly, Brad? You and Doris have discussed the possibility of sending Roger to a different school?" And in saying that, Millie took a brochure out of her purse, "Then I might have the perfect solution for you." She extended the brochure in Brad's direction, and letting go of his son, said, "You move and it might be the last thing you do on this Earth," before stepping up to Millie and taking the brochure. Except for the first boy still trying to regain his breath, and the sleeping George, everyone was quiet while Brad read through the brochure.
He then looked up, then looked at Peter, then at Martin and Millie and said, "Really? Peter? Oh that's beautiful, simply beautiful." He turned to face his son and told him, "Well, Roger, you might get to hang out with Peter after all. He's going to a very good boarding school. A girls boarding school. An all GIRLS boarding school, where, according to this brochure, they can even teach the most stubborn boy how to live a happy and better life. And gain a new perspective on life." They all watched as Roger just up and fainted. Brad laughed then said, "Guess he's a bit surprised by his new school."
Because of what the two boys attempted to do, the police officers took charge of the first boy and George; they'd call paramedics to have both boys checked over before moving either boy. Peter finally got into the family car with Millie sitting beside him and Martin driving, the three starting the hour long drive to Peter's new school; the school would have everything Peter would need so they didn't need to take anything with them. Brad all but frog marched Roger back to their car, explaining to his wife over his cell phone about the new school he'd learned about, and how he felt it was the perfect place for Roger.
With that excitement over, Jane and the girls finished their walk to Jane's car, Jane saying as they walked, "Charlotte, did you not think I was capable of dealing with that degenerate moron? Didn't it cross your mind he might have known more than you do? Or that you might have gotten hurt?"
Jane sensed Charlotte had stopped walking, turned to face her and heard, "Aunt Jane, no one who truly studies the arts treats others the way that... um... moron treated you and the Grants. They show respect for those they don't know and those who are older in age. As to you not being able to apply a bit of education, I've no doubt he would have regretted his actions against you. But you are my Aunt, and as such, no asshole is going to try and hurt you if I'm around and can do anything to stop it."
Jane saw the tears forming in Charlotte's eyes and did something that was out of character with her girls. She stepped up to Charlotte, put her arm around her shoulders before doing the same to Francis, and told them, "Girls, I know of a place that sells the best homemade ice cream around. I think this one time it would do us good to see if it's still as good as I remember. What do you two say?"
The girls changed clothes when they'd returned to Seasons House, then helped set the table for their noon meal. Jane relayed everything to Marie about their morning, even how Charlotte stood to protect her. "Ah, mon chère, have we not said she is special? She is like our girls are when they leave us, and she has adopted you as her Aunt. That doesn't always happen, and you know it, chère." Their conversation was interrupted by the girls coming into the kitchen, getting what they'd need to set the table.
After their noon meal, and the kitchen cleaned, Jane sent Francis to work on her lessons, while she took Charlotte into the study to apply a fine polish before Toby arrived on Monday. Jane didn't have to see that Charlotte had taken 'the book' off the bookshelf, put it on her head and started her walk around the study, as she went to her desk and sat down. She checked her emails as she waited, finding one from Jeb.
From: Jeb Thorton, et al.
To: Jane Thompson
Re: Progress report of theft ring
Jane,
This is an update of what we have learned so far, during all of the investigations that have been taking place. The police have arrested more of the three boy/girl shoplifting teams, thereby slowly cutting off the supply line of merchandise George Strom and the woman receive. They believe by doing this it will put pressure on the two to come up with something else in order to be able to fill their contracts with their buyers. They hope this makes them desperate, as we have learned that some of their buyers don't take breaking contracts well.
Because the police are going after the thieves at this point, cutting off the supply line as I said, even Toby's brother is starting to feel the pressure from those above him. The police noted he'd been to the ER several times in the past few weeks. They believe some of his trips to the ER are the result of trying to recruit more boys and meeting fathers who've explained their dislike of him. I say believe because they are taking no action against any of those fathers. They want Toby's brother to be frustrated at his inability to fulfill his obligations to George Strom and the woman.
I hope Charles is doing well and not causing you any problems. Please, send him my and his mother's love.
Kindest regards,
Jeb
Jane closed the email just as Charlotte sat down in 'the chair' in front of the desk. "Charlotte, your father sends his and your mother's love, and things are getting closer to the day when it will be possible to clear your name." She saw Charlotte's eyes glisten, but nothing fell as she went on with, "Now. When Toby arrives Monday you are to become just one more of my girls. You are not to be my protector, though it was admirable of you to do so today. You will be one of my new girls, still learning how to be a young lady, one who gets corrected on occasion and who has yet to learn to do what you're told without complaint. I will nod to you when I want you to complain after being told to do something, but remember, don't go overboard. Complain like a petulant young girl would do, not a five-year-old toddler. Can you do that?"
Charlotte smiled then said, "Yes, Aunt Jane. I can whine like the best girl who doesn't want to do what she's told."
Jane nodded at Charlotte's statement, then said, "There will be a time where punishment for not doing what you're told without complaint will be strange to you, but please, don't overreact because of the situation. And no, I'm not going to tell you what some of that punishment will be," she told Charlotte when she saw the questioning look on Charlotte's face. "My reason for keeping it from you is to make sure your reaction is honest, sudden, and straight forward. We have to impress on Toby what he too could face if he too complains when told to do something. Do you understand?"
She again saw Charlotte smile and heard, "Improvacation, Aunt Jane. I believe that's what you're wanting me to do. Deal with the situation when it occurs, don't preplan, don't think it out in advance, just react to the situation."
Jane smiled, nodded her head, and uttered one word, "Precisely." They talked a bit more before she sent Charlotte off to work on her lessons, staying in the study to go over her plans for Toby.
Sunday, after breakfast, and the kitchen was cleaned, Jane had the girls dress for riding. It had been a few days since they'd ridden and Charlotte had seen Pinto. After inspecting the girls, Jane led them to the stable, where they found all three horses standing at the gate of their stalls, Pinto whinnying when she saw Charlotte. Charlotte walked over to the basket of apples, kept in the stable, and taking one, walked back over to Pinto and offered her the apple. "Hi, Pinto. You look much better today. Would you like to go riding again?" Jane marveled as the horse threw its head up and down, while chewing the apple. Francis missed the event, as she'd taken the third horse out of its stall and was in the process of brushing it down.
Charlotte turned to Jane and, laughing, said, "Looks like six of us want to go riding, Aunt Jane." Charlotte then walked to the tack-room and brought out the hackamore and gently put it on Pinto before opening the stall gate and leading Pinto out of her stall. She then took a brush setting near the stall and began to gently brush Pinto down, getting her ready for the saddle blanket and saddle. Every so often, while she brushed Pinto, the horse would turn its head and gently push Charlotte in the back, whinnying after doing so. Charlotte would then slowly turn her head to look at the eyes that were looking at her and say, "Oh, you think that's really funny, do you?" She'd then turn to face Pinto's face, still looking at her, put her hands on her hips and tell her, "Well maybe now I don't want to ride you. What'd you think of that?" And just like a dog who'd been scolded, Pinto would turn her head facing forward then drop her head. Then Charlotte would say, "Oh gads, if you're going to pout, then I guess I'll take you riding." Upon hearing this, Pinto would lift up her head, whinny, and throw her head up and down.
Jane had kept an eye on Pinto and Charlotte, marveling at the game the horse was playing with Charlotte. And how quickly Charlotte realized it was a game. After saddling her horse, she first checked Francis' saddle, making sure she'd secured it properly, before checking Charlotte's. Once she was satisfied they'd be safe in the saddle, she led the girls out of the stable and after they mounted their horses, led them off in a different direction than they'd taken before.
Jane was taking them to a part of her property which was thick with wild grass, wild flowers, and low lying shrubs. The trees in the area were scattered so far apart it would take 5-10 minutes to ride from tree to tree. "Girls, take a good look around you as we ride through this area. This is what you might have seen had you been with those who crossed the prairie. As you can see, the grasses vary, in both species and height. And if you look over there," and Jane pointed to her right, "you'll see how some birds are able to use the taller grasses as perches. It also gives them a good vantage to spot predators if any are in the area. Have either of you studied history about The Dust Bowl, and what contributed to its occurrence?" Both girls said they'd heard about The Dust Bowl but didn't know why it occurred. "Francis, in two weeks you will present a research paper on The Dust Bowl. When it occurred, what contributed to it, how widespread it was, what was taking place at the time, how it affected the lives of those living in the area, and its duration. Charlotte, you will do a research paper, also due in two weeks, about the flora and fauna of the prairie. Also include wildlife which lived on the prairie."
And as usual, the only response accepted by Jane was, "Yes, Aunt Jane."
Both girls were busy looking around them as they rode through the area. It was Charlotte who spotted fresh dirt by some of the scrub bushes, and what looked like a hole going under the scrub. As they approached one particular scrub Charlotte saw another spot of fresh dirt piled up and away from the scrub. Jane had passed that scrub a few feet before both girls, but when they reached the scrub both let out an, "EWWW... what's that smell?" Jane knew the smell was there but didn't react to the pungent odor. She reigned her horse, turned it around so she was facing the girls, and had to strongly school herself as she saw both girls had stopped their horses and were pinching their noses shut.
She let them sit there, thinking they should have realized stopping there was a bad idea, and asked them, "What odor? I don't smell anything from HERE?" Both girls got the hint and spurred their horses on, only to stop where Jane's horse was standing. Jane had to again school herself as she watched first Charlotte then Francis slowly let go of their noses and test the air around them.
It was Francis who first found the air more pleasant as she said, "Oh, that's much better. That odor was just rank. What caused it, Aunt Jane?" Jane looked at Charlotte, who was just now following Francis' example and letting go of her nose.
"Charlotte, can you answer Francis' question?"
Charlotte looked at Francis, who shrugged her shoulders, before looking back at Jane and telling her, "Ah, no, Aunt Jane. I have no idea what caused that putrid smell."
Jane looked from Francis to Charlotte before asking, "Surely you girls have heard or seen a skunk?" When both admitted they'd heard about skunks and had seen pictures of them, but not a live one, Jane shook her head and told them, "What you smelled was the defensive measure a skunk uses as a last resort when it's threatened. What you smelled is not fresh, or you both might be vomiting right this minute, it's that revolting. It won't take both of you long to produce a paper by Friday about skunks. Where they can be found, their active times, what they eat, and, since you smelled one method they use, other methods they use to warn off threats. And you'll also include a possible danger skunks pose. It's something dogs can get if they've not been vaccinated. Let's press on. There's a nice little area up ahead I believe you both will enjoy, if you're quiet." And with that said, Jane turned her horse and started it slowly walking in the direction they'd been headed. Jane parted one last bit of information as they resumed their ride. "Oh, and girls. That hole, where you saw the disturbed dirt? It could very well be the den of a skunk, where they sleep during the day. That odor should be a clue for you not to investigate what lives at the bottom of that hole. In fact, girls. Unless you know what animal lives there, you will find it safer to not become curious. There are, after all, animals living out her who are more aggressive than a skunk, and really hate to be roused from their sleep."
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Sitting atop their horses, the girls had an excellent view of the surrounding area, much better than had they been walking. The height afforded them the opportunity to watch cottontail rabbits feeding, running away as they advanced down the trail, or engaging in an activity which caused both girls to chuckle. They also saw several different species of birds flying overhead, perched on the scrub bushes, grasses, or running through the scrub and grasses in groups. "Aunt Jane," Francis called. "What are those birds running around in groups? They all have some type of small feather sticking up on top of their heads."
Without turning around, Jane said, "Those are likely quail, Francis. I'm sure once you finish your paper about the quail, you'll have your answer." Jane heard Charlotte chuckle, because of Francis' plight. She pointed off to her left and asked Charlotte, "Do you see that black bird with the red on its wings, Charlotte? The one hanging onto that tall grass?"
Jane waited until she heard, "Yes Aunt Jane."
Then continued with, "Your own paper will give you all the information on that bird you need as well." Francis slapped her hand over her mouth, trying to stifle the laugh bubbling up from her throat. Charlotte heard the throaty laugh from Francis, turned to her and stuck her tongue out at her.
Both were totally shocked when Jane said, "Charlotte. It isn't ladylike to stick your tongue out at someone."
Charlotte started to notice how the trail started going downward, and that not far in the distance it seemed to disappear. "Aunt Jane. Why does it seem this trail disappears up ahead?"
Jane smiled to herself then replied, "It isn't that it disappears, Charlotte, but drops down. From here on out you must be very quiet if you are to see something you may never have seen." Charlotte looked over at Francis, who shrugged her shoulders, as they rode on in silence.
The girls watched as Jane stopped her horse, then motioned for them to stop on both sides of her. When they were both on either side of her she whispered, "We must be very quiet. Look down there." As the girls looked where Jane pointed, they saw the trail wander down into a meadow, created by a beaver dam.
Francis whispered back, "What's that large pile of sticks, Aunt Jane?" Before Jane could respond, Charlotte whispered, "It's a beaver lodge, Francis. It's where the beavers, who built that dam, live."
Before them lay a meadow, formed when the beavers dammed the stream which flowed from their left to their right. Over time, a pond formed, which seeped out into the surrounding ground, and nourished other plant life that made the area a perfect habitat for wildlife. They were fortunate in that their silent approach hadn't scared away what wildlife they now saw. They were also fortunate in that they saw the actual builders of the dam and lodge, busy working on their dam. Several species of duck swam in the pond, ducking their heads every now and then below the surface of the water. On the far side of the pond several deer were drinking at the edge of the pond, looking up every so often. They saw several ripples on the surface of the pond, indicating there was life below the surface of the water. That fact was made quite clear as a very large bird flew in low over the water, dipped its feet into the water and flew away carrying a fish in its talons. All three watched as the bird repositioned the fish so its head was facing the direction the bird flew. Strange as it seemed, even Jane let out a soft "WOW."
Jane spoke quietly to both girls in telling them, "Girls, gently pull back on both reigns at the same time. You want your horses to back up." Pinto seemed to get the message without Charlotte's request, as she started backing up just as Jane's horse did; Francis' horse followed a moment later. When they were far enough away where the trail dropped down into the meadow, Jane said, "I think we best be getting back, girls. We've seen quite a lot today, and you girls have papers to write." Jane chuckled as both girls let their heads fall back, then brought them forward and shook their heads. She was still chuckling when she told them, "Oh come on girls, just think what you'll learn by writing those papers." With Jane in the lead, the girls again formed up behind her, both thinking about the papers they had to write about the animals Jane had indicated.
Jane pointed out other things as they made their way back to the stable, where they unsaddled their horses and walked them until they'd cooled down. They then let them drink what they needed, before brushing them down and returning each horse to its stall. After making sure each horse had plenty of feed and water, they returned to the house where they showered and dressed before the noonday meal. As the girls went to the kitchen, Jane went into her study, where she checked for more emails from Jeb and to review Toby's file. Jane put the file away in a locked drawer when she was informed lunch was ready.
Jane had the girls tell Marie everything they saw on their ride, and had them retell some when they neglected to tell Marie about the skunk smell they encountered. Marie laughed, then said, "Ah, oui, puanteur de mouffette, nasty, very nasty to the nose. If you want to keep your friends close, avoid it at all costs. But, if you wish to clear a room...," and she gave the girls a Gallic shrug, causing both to laugh in understanding. When their meal was over, Jane returned to her study while the girls cleared the table and helped Marie in the kitchen; she'd given them orders to start on the papers they had to write after they finished in the kitchen.
As Jane sat reading Toby's file for the umtenth time, her computer chimed, signaling she had just received an email. Opening up the email program, she saw it was a new email from Jeb, hopefully with good news about getting Charles' name cleared.
From: Jeb Thorton, el al.
To: Jane Thompson
Re: Update
Jane,
I would like to say the police are about to close the theft case, but that's not to be. They've started finding bodies of young boys and girls who they feel were part of the shoplifting teams. It's possible those in charge were worried one or more of the kids would talk, so silencing them made sure that didn't happen. Because of the deaths, those already arrested are scared they could be next, and are now refusing to say anything to anyone. They have simply stopped talking, period.
The news isn't all bad, as the police do have some leads as to who might be responsible for the deaths. Unfortunately, it will take time to check each lead they have. Meanwhile, they are arresting more of the three boy/girl teams, when they're caught in the act. But they too refuse to say anything other than 'lawyer.'
I'll keep you informed of any further developments.
Kindest regards,
Jeb
"They've started finding bodies of young boys and girls...," Jane read again. Jane was trying to wrap her mind around why anyone would start killing young kids to keep them quiet when better means of violence could be used. Whoever decided killing was needed to silence them has just waved a red flag in the face of the police, who will now break their backs to bring the killers to justice. And Jane knew she couldn't get involved in finding who was killing those kids, no matter how badly she wanted to. She knew people who might help track them down, but then they'd have to explain why they got involved. She was infuriated.
She closed down the computer, made sure to put Toby's file in the drawer, locked it, then went in search of Marie, she'd have to watch over the girls while she was out. She had to gain some peace. She found Marie in the living room, reading, sat down beside her and said, "They're killing the kids who are stealing for them, to shut them up. Those who've been arrested have become clams, they aren't saying anything to anyone. Marie, I...," Marie had put down the book she was reading when Jane sat down beside her. She put a hand on Jane's leg and told her, "Go, do what you love to do when you get like this. I'll watch the girls. Go get changed. Aller (Go!)!"
Jane smiled at the woman, patted the hand resting on her leg, got up off the sofa and walked to the library, knocking on the door before entering. "Girls, I'll be out for a while. Marie will be watching you while I'm gone. You both know what you have to do so keep working on your papers." Jane never let Francis or Charlotte ask where she was going, as neither should have questioned her, but backed out of the library and went straight to her bedroom to change into her riding clothes.
It wasn't long before the girls came out of the library and were standing in front of Marie. "Is Aunt Jane okay, tante Marie?" Francis asked, seeing a sad look on Marie's face. Marie was silent for several minutes, trying to decide if she should scold Francis for asking or give her an honest answer. She remembered how Francis was when she first came to the house, thinking only of herself, not that she was selfish, just that she was in the habit of looking out for herself because of her living condition.
And now, in part thanks to Charlotte, here she stood, concerned about another person. "No, mes filles, she is not all right. Sit, and I'll explain."
When Jane came from her bedroom, and saw the girls sitting next to Marie on the sofa, and not working on their papers, she was filled with rage. Marie saw the anger in Jane's face, and shaking her head, said before Jane could say anything. "Votre colère est mal dirigée. Ne t'en prends pas à eux (Your anger is misdirected. Don't take it out on them!)!" Marie spoke too quickly for Charlotte to follow, but heard the cry of anguish from Jane and watched as she turned and all but ran out of the house.
"Will she be all right, Marie?" Charlotte asked, wiping tears from her eyes. "Can we do anything to help her?"
Marie put her arms around the girls and told them, "She is hurting right now because of what she just learned. She needs time and peace to gain herself again. We can help her by giving her that time, and making her proud of us by doing our best. So maybe you two best get back to your papers? Oui? I'll bring you something in a little while." Both girls nodded their heads, giving Marie kisses on her cheeks before getting up from the sofa and returning to the library.
Jane had to keep wiping her eyes as she walked out to the stable. When she opened the gate for her horse's stall, the big mare felt the anguish coming from Jane. Much like Pinto did to Charlotte, her horse came over to her and placed its head on her shoulder, giving Jane the opportunity to hug its neck. It stood stock still as Jane hugged the big horse, and cried. Hard. When Jane's crying had eased, unbidden by Jane, the big mare slowly walked herself and Jane out of her stall, letting Jane know she wanted to be ridden. Jane looked up into the left eye of her horse and chuckled, saying, "So you figured it out, did you? And I suppose you know where I want to go?" This time she laughed as the mare threw its head up and down. It wasn't long before the mare was saddled and Jane on her back, the mare taking Jane to where she could find the peace she needed.
Usually Jane guided her horse in the direction she wanted to go, but because her mind was mulling several thoughts at the same time, her horse guided Jane where it knew she needed to go. The reins were loose in her hands, her eyes seeing but not seeing, questions running through her mind so fast she could hardly pin one down to examine it. The question which almost shouted the loudest was 'Why do I continue doing this? Why continue showing these boys a better way to live their lives? Why continue when I see where most come from and how they've been treated? And the hurt caused by the losses? And now the killing of young kids who never knew a different way to live. Why stay involved? Why continue to get hurt?' Unknown to Jane, as her horse walked on, it would occasionally turn its head in order to make sure its rider was still there. It slowly crested the ridge and continued its walking pace down towards the meadow, causing those there to pause and watch rider and horse come closer. Causing some to panic and run, while others stayed and watched, knowing the reason for their presence.
The horse stopped at the bench setting by the pond, whinnied, then threw its head towards the bench. Since Jane didn't climb off her back, she whinnied louder and threw her head around to get Jane's attention. Jane reached down and rubbed the horse's neck, telling her, "Sorry, my friend. I was lost in thought." She laughed as the horse threw its head again in the direction of the bench, Jane telling her horse, "Thank you, my friend." As Jane climbed down off the back of her horse, it remained still until it saw her sit down on the bench, then wandered off to graze.
Those who knew the woman went back to what they were doing, others stayed hidden and watched to see what would happen. A small group of ducks came near Jane and swam in front of her, quacking encouragement as they did. Those who ran to hide were shocked to see a doe with her fawn lay down some few feet away from Jane, acting as though there was nothing wrong with having this person in their midst. None recognized the tears that slowly found their way out of Jane's eyes and down her cheeks, caused by her thinking about how cruel people could be to kill, so they could stay free. Her mind went back to the boys who'd come to her, the ones who left totally different young men, and the ones she couldn't reach. And the friend she lost because her twisted mind wanted a daughter instead of a son. She thought of how her girls were treated by Sandy at Marisha Chalet, and of Charlotte besting Sandy. Of her forcing the girls to help Brenda at The Style Shoppe, and the experience they had modeling. All of her thoughts seemed to be leading her in one direction, trying to make her understand that all her and Marie's efforts were not in vain. That with all but a few, each boy who'd come to her was living a better life than they would have without their guidance. That even though she and Marie had experienced heartache and disappointment at times, they did it so others could have a better life. And right now, her grief wasn't because of being unsure if she wanted to continue changing lives, but the grief felt of lives lost because of greed. Yes, she and Marie knew people who would take care of the problem for her, but it wasn't how she wanted things to end. Because if it ended that way, Charles would never have his name cleared, he would always have a record.
The doe and its fawn slowly got up off the ground and wandered away. The ducks took themselves to another part of the pond, feeding as they went. A sudden weight was on Jane's shoulder, the massive muzzle rubbing Jane's cheek. She reached and stroked the top of its nose, saying, "Thank you old friend. I suppose we better return to the house, eh?" A soft whinny answering Jane's question, as her horse lifted its head off Jane's shoulder, allowing her to stand and remount her. They rode back to the house as one, the reins a bit tighter in Jane's hands, though not giving directions through them. Jane felt more at peace as they reached the stable, though the thought of the killings were still with her. Once cooled down, watered, and brushed, the mare walked back into its stall on its own accord, turning and putting its head on Jane's shoulder once again. Hugging the big mare, Jane told her, "Thank you for being here, my old friend. And for understanding." Jane released the horse's neck, stepped back and closed the stall gate, checking for adequate food and water. Her heart was still heavy over the loss of life, but her resolve was to push on in their attempt to better the lives of those boys sent to Seasons House, and the Winsome Girls' School for Wayward Boys.
There was no need to look in on the girls, Marie would have been doing that, making sure they were doing the assigned work. She went straight to her bedroom to shower and change; it was getting near their evening meal. Coming out of her room, hearing voices coming from the kitchen, Jane headed in that direction. As she passed the dining room table she caught sight of two papers sitting in front of her place at the table. Picking them up, and reading them, she saw they were the two papers she had directed the girls to write on two of the animals in the area they rode through that morning. She hadn't given them explicit instructions, so wasn't expecting research papers, but saw they provided the necessary relevant information. She sat each paper at its proper place on the table, as they would discuss them over dinner.
It's Monday morning, the day Toby Camber arrives at Seasons House, Winsome Girls' School for Wayward Boys. Jane came out of her bedroom in full headmistress mode. She was wearing a light gray skirt suit, the skirt reaching 2" above her knees. She wore a long sleeved, high necked white cotton blouse, adorned at the neck by a blue backed camio broach. She wore off black stockings with three inch closed toe heels. Her hair was in a tight bun, and her makeup, as always, immaculately applied. And her expression? One that said, 'take no prisoners.' She was on a mission. A mission to get Charles' name cleared, to find who was killing young kids just to shut them up. If she had to, she'd use Toby to reach those ends.
She knew Marie would have already woken the girls, but she made it a practice to look in on them to make sure then hadn't fallen back to sleep.
After going upstairs, Jane walked to Francis' bedroom door, opened it, and quietly walked inside. It didn't take Jane but a moment to realize her bedroom had changed. It was tidy and clean. Quietly closing the door behind her, Jane took a moment to gaze around Francis' bedroom. The dress Francis had chosen to wear today was hanging neatly on the hook attached to the closet door. There was no clothing thrown around the room as she had done before. Books and nick-nacks were placed neatly on shelves or on the vanity. The bed was neatly made, with her chosen lingerie lying neatly on the bed, minus her bra and panties, and her low heeled shoes were sitting neatly on the floor just under the edge of the bedspread. Jane walked over to the bed and lifting the pillow, finding Francis' nightgown neatly folded and where it should be kept.
Jane heard water running in the en suite and walked to the bathroom door, opening it softly. She took a step inside and saw Franics' silhouette behind the shower curtin. Jane also saw Francis' bra and panties lying neatly on the vanity counter top. Scanning the bathroom, Jane was surprised how clean it now had become, compared to time past. She looked behind the bathroom door and found Francis' robe hanging on the hook attached to the back of the door. Then she heard something that surprised her, Francis was humming. Jane listened for a moment before leaving the en suite and quietly closing the door behind her. She would have to question Francis about the changes, changes that had recently occurred. Changes that were new for Francis. Changes that marked a step in the right direction for Francis. Might Charlotte had a hand in the changes? That was another question to ask, privately.
After leaving Francis' bedroom, Jane walked the short distance to Charlotte's bedroom. She didn't expect to see anything out of place in her bedroom, Charles is an orderly individual. Quietly opening the bedroom door, Jane stepped inside and quietly closed the door before surveying the room. As she expected, nothing was out of place. No dust sat on anything Jane could see. Like Francis, or Francis like Charlotte, her chosen dress was neatly hung on the hook attached to the closet door. Lingerie, minus her bra and panties, were lying neatly of her made bed, her shoes right below on the floor and back under the edge of the bedspread. She found Charlotte's neatly folded nightgown under the pillow, as it should be.
Water could also be heard running in Charlotte's en suite. Quietly opening the bathroom door, Jane watched as Charlotte's silhouette moved around behind the shower curtain. A neatly folded bra and panties were sitting on the vanity counter top, and Charlotte's robe was hung on the hook attached to the back of the bathroom door. Scanning the rest of the en suite, Jane was not surprised by its cleanliness.
As with the surprise she heard from Francis, she heard, "Good morning, Aunt Jane," from Charlotte, as she'd stepped out of the en suite and started to quietly close the door. She stepped back into the ensuite and asked, "How did you know, Charlotte?"
Jane heard Charlotte laugh before she said, "One was logical, the other physical. Marie had already been here, so it would only be logical that it was you who'd look in on us. As to the physical way... opening that door creates an air current. The current is strong enough to move the shower curtain."
Jane chuckled at what she heard. "You are an interesting person, Charles Thorton," she commented, deciding she could question Charles now. "Charles, have you been helping Francis? Talking with her about her attitude and demeanor?"
Charles was silent for a moment before he said, "Thank you for speaking to Charles, Aunt Jane. It means a lot to me. As to your question, yes. I've been talking with Francis. She opened up to me about her home life, and how she's been treated. I listened and held her as she cried. I waited until she'd calmed down, then told her no one can take away her dignity if she doesn't let them. Her name can change, but only she could lose her dignity. She asked questions about dignity, self respect, and dealing with how she's treated at home. I told her the only way to deal with the demeaning things her Aunt Agnes says to her, is to not care what she had say. Let her say what she want, and don't react. I told her that if she ignores what Aunt Agnes says to her, and doesn't react in any way, her Aunt loses that particular hold over her. I may have gone a bit too far when I explained your goal for her. That you care more than she understands. How it wasn't fair how she'd been acting, when all you're doing was trying to make her see she can live a different life and have a better attitude toward life. She may have opened up to you, eventually, Aunt Jane. But to her, right now, you're an intimidating woman, you remind her of how she's treated at home. Aunt Jane, how would you stand up to a barrage of insults, put downs, and slights simply because you were born? How would you handle doing the best you know how to do, and being berated for simply doing it? She was fed up doing what she was told and being reamed every way possible afterwards. Aunt Jane, Frank can't go back to live with his Aunt Agnes when he leaves here. She didn't want to take Frank in after her sister, Penny, was diagnosed with cancer. She didn't want him and that's how she's been treating him. If he does have to go back to live with Agnes, someone needs to give her a good dose of whup-ass before he gets home."
The water running may have hid the snicker Jane made at Charles' last statement. It was also good Charles was still behind the shower curtain, because he would have seen Jane wipe her eyes after what he said to her. When she felt she had control of her voice, she told Charles, "Thank you for helping Francis, Charles. And please continue doing so when it's needed. Now hurry up and finish your shower and get dressed. You still have to help with breakfast."
Jane almost lost it again when starting to leave the en suite and heard Charles say, "I love you too, Aunt Jane!" She had to clamp her jaw shut to keep from crying out."
Jane left Charlotte's bedroom and went down to the living room, to wait for the girls and their daily inspection. She mulled over everything Charles had said, wondering if she was too intimidating and if maybe that's why some boys never went along with her program. If she was being perceived by Frank to be like his Aunt, then she'd have to devise another method of reaching him. She'd have to make sure he realized he was wanted and valued. She'd also have to talk with Ruth to have her see if any of Franks family knew how he was being treated at home, and if any would be willing to take him in to get him away from such a toxic environment.
As Jane waited in the living room, she heard first one bedroom door open and close and steps echoing down the hallway, then another bedroom door open and close, with another set of steps being added to the echo. As Jane stood facing the stairs, with her arms hanging in front of her, and the palm of one hand over the back of the other, she watched as Francis was the first to be seen descending the stairs, followed closely by Charlotte. Jane could already see the change in Francis, with her hair neatly styled, instead of the 'not really caring look' it had before Charles arrived. The dress she chose was even more appropriate than the ones she'd worn pre Charles. Even her choice of makeup was more fitting to her age, as was her choice of hosiery.
Jane watched as Francis waited at the bottom of the stairs until Charlotte was standing beside her, then both girls walked into the living room together, stopping three steps in front of Jane. Jane spotted the enigmatic smile on Charlotte's face, causing her to question its purpose and to frown at Charlotte until it disappeared; she'd have to question Charlotte about that in a few minutes. As Jane inspected both girls from where she stood, taking in their clothing, hosiery, shoes, hair, and makeup, she asked, "Francis, I noticed your bedroom was in a much better state than it had been. Is there a reason for that to occur?" Jane had stepped up to the girls and was looking both up and down, from the front and back as she'd asked the question. She was now standing in front of Francis. Francis dropped her head, as Jane had seen her do on multiple occasions in the past. The fingers of Jane's right hand went gently under Francis' chin, slowly lifting it until Francis was looking at her. Jane saw that tears were threatening to escape Francis' eyes after what she had asked. Thinking back to what Charles had said to her, Jane quickly said, "Thank you for what you've done to your bedroom. It looks really nice." Jane could see the questioning look on Francis' face, before a huge smile erupted on her face. "You're also much improved in the choice of clothing and makeup that best suits your person. Did you have help in that endeavor?"
Jane waited for an answer, watching the inner turmoil of emotions playing across Francis' face, despair not being one of them. Jane saw that a decision had been made, and with her whole body exhibiting confidence, Francis said, "Yes, Aunt Jane, I had help. I had help from Charlotte." Jane tried her best not to show her head mistress face so as not to shut Francis down. Frank needed this moment. Francis chuckled before she told Jane, "She sat me down and basically read me the riot act. She told me I'd been unfair to you by my actions, because you were only trying to help me see a better way to live and think. She told me I was being very rude by not keeping my bedroom clean and organized, as a guest should do. We went through my closet and drawers so she could help me learn how to determine what would look best on me and what paired well together. She even helped with my makeup, showing me much of the same." Then Jane almost lost it when Francis' voice got husky and she told Jane, "I'm sorry, Aunt Jane, for my past behavior. You've done nothing but try and help me and I treated you like I treated my Aunt with my bad behavior." Tears were now sliding down Francis' cheeks, as she suddenly stepped into Jane and engulfed Jane with her arms. In a muffled voice, Francis said, "Thank you Aunt Jane for caring."
Jane had to muster every ounce of self control she possessed so she wouldn't break down after what Francis said. Jane gently push Francis back and looking directly into her eyes, told her, "I do care about you, Francis. I care very deeply and I only want you to see that there is another way you can live your life and a better way to react to terrible situations." Offering Francis a hint of a smile, Jane went on to say, "Now, dry your eyes and go help Marie get things ready for breakfast. We have a new girl arriving today and we have to be ready for her." Francis nodded her head before walking over to the end table and taking a tissue from the box sitting on that table. Jane watched her walk through the dining room and pushing the kitchen door open before the door hid her from view as she walked into the kitchen. She then turned her attention to Charlotte, who was now wearing a big smile. Jane stepped in front of Charlotte, trying her best to put her head mistress look on her face. "Alright, Miss Thorton!! Would you explain to me the smiles you aren't supposed to have on your face during this time!" If anything, Jane's head mistress look backfired, as the smile on Charlotte's face grew even bigger.
The first words out of Charlotte's mouth were, "I love you too, Aunt Jane," almost causing Jane to flat out lose it. "Francis has started opening up to you, Aunt Jane. She told you that she isn't being treated well at home, she may even tell you more, now that she knows you really care about her."
Jane simply looked at Charlotte, shaking her head as she told her, "You are a remarkable young man, Charles Thorton. And I absolutely hate that you have to be here. But your dad, and others, are getting close to learning the whole truth."
Charlotte was nodding her head at the last of what Jane said. "I can tell how much you deplore my being here, and how upset you are about everything that's happening. But being Charlotte hasn't been all that bad, it's given me a perspective I never would have had any other way. And for that, I think you. I also thank you for this experience because it's made me take a look at myself, how could it not, dressed and presenting as a girl.
Jane jerked her head towards the direction of the kitchen, indicating that Charlotte was to help with getting breakfast ready. She watch as Charlotte walk towards the kitchen, thinking, for a boy, he makes a cute girl. She shook off that thought and went to her study, opening the door, walking inside before closing the door behind her; one of the girls would let her know when breakfast was ready.
After sitting down behind the study desk, she unlocked her computer and checked her emails. One email caught her eye immediately, it was from Jeb. Quickly opening it, she read the following:
From: Jeb Thorton, el al.
To: Jane Thompson
Re: More arrests made
Jane,
The police have made more arrests of the shoplifting trios. Most have been young boys, but there have been a few young girls about Charles' age involved. They have the girls speaking with women officers for obvious reasons. They would like to have each girl examined by a doctor, again, for obvious reasons. But since they show no outward signs of needing medical attention, their hands are tied without parental consent.
Several of those arrested, the girls included, give the impression they'd like to talk to officers in order to help themselves. As the kids have been observed, those leading the three teen crews have made it clear what's going to happen if anyone snitches. The police think if the power of those leading the crews can be neutralized, those wanting to talk will talk. The police have a plan, though it will depend on finding a few male and female officers who can easily pass as young teens.
I'll keep you posted of any further developments. Give Charles our love.
Kindest regards,
Jeb
Jane bristled after reading Jeb's email. If they gave her five minutes with those leaders, they'd have all the information they'd need. She took several calming breaths, she had to recenter herself to fully deal with Toby when he arrived. Just then there was a knock on the study door. "Enter," Jane loudly said, and watched as the door opened and Francis came into the study. After closing the door, Jane watched as Francis walked to the book case, took 'the book' off the shelf, balanced it on her head, and started the first of five walks around the study with the book balanced on her head, knowing that if the book fell, she'd have to start over..
When round five was completed, Francis replaced 'the book' on the bookshelf. She then walked to Jane's desk, stopping two steps in front of the desk. "Aunt Jane, breakfast is ready," she told Jane as she stood up straight, with her shoulders back and her arms hanging in front of her, with her hands lying on top of each other.
Jane had watched every movement Francis made. Right now, she was evaluating Francis' mood and whether she could be the 'good' girl in front of Toby. "Francis, do you remember how Sonya acted when you first arrived? Do you remember what happened to her when she acted out?"
Jane watched Francis' face as the girl was searching her memory. "Yes, Aunt Jane, I remember some of how she acted and the consequences. If I may ask, why do you want to know if I remembered?"
Jane pointed to a chair while saying, "Please bring that chair over to where you're standing and be seated. I have something to ask of you." Jane watch as Francis walked over to the chair, stood in front of it and lifted it off the floor by the arms. Careful as she walked carrying the chair, Francis brought the chair to the place where she previously stood. Sitting the chair down by bending her knees, instead of bending over as she'd done earlier in her being at Seasons House, Francis turned around, smoothed the back of her dress and sat down in the chair. She sat ramrod straight, crossing her ankles, and placed her hands in her lap. Looking straight at Jane, she then waited for Jane to speak.
Jane leaned forward in her chair, placed her arms on her desk with her hands clasped, then said, "Francis, I want you to remember you are playing the good girl to Charlotte's new/bad girl when Toby arrives. When I give Charlotte a nod, she is going to act different than she does now, and that will be your que to become the good girl. Don't be snobby, or criticize Charlotte for her actions, just let Toby know that Charlotte will suffer the consequences for her actions. And remember, you explain what's expected from all my girls. And as I told Charlotte, don't go overboard, act as you've started acting since Charlotte arrive. Can you do all of that?"
Jane watched as Francis' head dropped to her chest, and when she again looked up at Jane, tears were running down her cheeks and dripping onto her dress. "Aunt Jane," Francis began in a choked up voice. "I've given you nothing but grief since I've been here. My bedroom has been a mess, I've just gone through the motions, which I now see has caused you stress, and you're still asking me to be the 'good' girl? Why, Aunt Jane? Why not Charlotte, she's a better example of a 'good' girl?"
The situation, this time, at Seasons House was unlike any Jane had previously faced. Yes, she had girls like Francis, girls who's home life caused them to act out, end up before Judge Ruth and ultimately here. But none like Charlotte and the killings taking place just to keep someone free from justice.
Jane had already broken her rule of not getting visibly emotionally involved with her girls, the situation had warranted it being done. And she did so again, as she stood up from her chair, walked around the study desk, knelt before Francis, took the girl's hands in hers and told her, "Sweetheart, yes you did all the things you said. Yes it caused me stress because nothing I did or had you do brought you out of your shell. But look how far you've come since Charlotte has been here. You listened to her, cared about her, and come to realize how terrible you've been acting since you arrived at my house. I think you've earned the right to be my 'good' girl and show Toby how he's supposed to act."
Jane watched the girl sitting before her, tears still streaming down her cheeks. Jane waited, as she could see that Francis was arranging her thoughts. When she finally spoke, it was hardly about a whisper. "You could have sent me back at any time but you didn't, Aunt Jane," Francis said as she sniffed her nose. "You've been stern, but kind to me in your own way, too. And now you want me to be your 'good' girl after everything I've done. Aunt Agnus would have thrown me out of the house permanently for the things I've done while being here." With her face wet, and a big smile on her face, Francis told Jane, "Yes, Aunt Jane. I'll be your 'good' girl."
Francis had come a long way in the last few days. 'Thank you Charles Thorton', she thought to herself. "Thank you Francis for agreeing to this, we'll talk more after Toby arrives. Now, though, you need go and change your dress and fix your makeup before we eat." Jane released Francis' hands, stood up and stepped back, giving Francis room to stand. Jane watched as Francis turned around, picked up the chair without being told, and moved it back where it had been. Then, as she had now started doing, Francis asked, "Aunt Jane, my I please be excused?"
Schooling herself, Jane replied with, "Yes, Francis. You may be excused." When Francis turned to leave the study, Jane caught up to Francis, and breaking her normal rule again, put her arm around Francis' shoulder as they walked to the study door. Francis opened the door, waited until Jane had walked through of the study before following her and closing the door behind her. The two then went their separate ways, Jane to the dining room and Francis to her bedroom. Jane never saw the big smile on Francis' face as she climbed the stairs. And no on saw the smirk on Jane's face as she walked to the dining room. Charlotte was right in her assessment of Francis, kind words did indeed go further with Francis than Jane's usual dragon words.
Breakfast began after Francis came down from her bedroom, having changed her dress and redoing her makeup; it turned into a planning session when Toby Camber arrived. Jane discussed how he would be treated at the train station, when he arrived at Seasons House, the toasting of his arrival, for Charlotte's benefit, and the roll of the girls after Jane woke him from his nap. She reminded the girls what was at stake in getting Toby to "tell all" about the shoplifting ring. She cautioned them to not be direct in asking about it, but to try and guide Toby in that direction. Jane also laid out contingency plans in case Toby recognized Charlotte, asking Charlotte not to hurt Toby should he attack her after recognizing her.
Author's Note:Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Of all the girls arriving at Seasons House, Toby may be the most important. He might have first hand knowledge about the shoplifting gangs; he was also the one who lied about Charles' involvement in the shoplifting. While Toby wasn't the only source of information about the shoplifting gangs, he was the only one who could exonerate Charles.
With breakfast over, the dining room table cleared, dishes washed and the kitchen cleaned, Jane instructed the girls to freshen their lipstick and to get their purses and wraps. It was time to go pick up Toby at the train station.
The drive to the train station, as usual, was uneventful. Jane pulled her car into the parking lot in front of the station, shut the car's engine off before going over the plans again with Francis and Charlotte. Again, reminding Charlotte not to hurt Toby should he recognize her. The three got out of Jane's car, and calmly walked to the station platform. As usual, Jane guided the girls to her usual spot to wait for the train's arrival. Somehow, those working the platform knew when Jane and her girls were coming, since the near end of the platform was clear of carts, freight, and people. Many of the men and young men working the platform had been one of Jane's girls in their teens or pre-teens, so it wasn't unusual for Jane to receive slight head nods as she waited. Even after receiving nods in return, none approached Jane while she and the girls waited for the train to arrive, carrying Jane's next new girl. An air horn sounded in the distance, signaling the approach of the 11:00 a.m. train. The sound increased as the train came nearer, until the sound of the diesel electric engine itself could be heard, along with a ringing bell. The engine slowly pulled the cars into the station, stopping when all the cars had lined up with the platform. That's when the platform burst into action.
It was like someone stirred an ant hill with a stick, with passengers coming out of the waiting room, full luggage carts heading to the baggage car, as luggage and freight was unloaded from the baggage car onto empty carts. Passengers were disembarking from the passenger cars as fast as they embarked. Jane tried to spot Toby before he left the train, but couldn't see him until he was standing at the door of the car nearest them. Pitched only for their ears, Charlotte said, "He looks scared, Aunt Jane. And why is he wearing a long sleeve shirt in this weather? It isn't long sleeve weather yet."
Jane had noticed the same thing, and thought the same thing too. With a sideways glance at Charlotte, Jane thought to herself, 'That boy would make an excellent lawyer or psychologist. Maybe even going into the medical field.' Doing the same as Charlotte, Jane, pitching her voice only for the girls, replied, "I saw that too, Charlotte. Wearing long sleeves in such warm weather does seem strange."
"If he's scared, why does he also look happy?" Francis asked, keeping her voice only for the three.
Jane and Charlotte both gave Francis a glance before looking at each other. Charlotte smiled while Jane simply nodded her head several times. Looking back at Toby, the three watched as Toby stepped onto the platform, carrying a medium size backpack. He looked around the platform, glancing at Jane and the girls, before dismissing them and starting to walk to his left. A station worker, pushing a laden cart, stopped in front of Toby, jerked his head to his left and stared at Toby. He jerked his head again to his left, then said, "It's the lady you want, lad. The one at the end of the platform with the two girls. Treat her right, lad, she'll do you a solid. She's a bit stern, she is, but she'll give you the right best education you've ever had." The man looked at Jane, doffed his cap, nodded, and received a nod back from Jane. "Go on, lad. You best not keep Jane Thompson waiting."
Toby thanked the man, something not lost on Jane and Charlotte, and apparently Francis too, as she said in a low voice, "Isn't he supposed to be a mean, terrible person? Why did he just thank Marcus? Would a mean, terrible person do that?" Again, Jane and Charlotte gave Francis a glance before looking at each other. Once again, it was a smile on Charlotte's face and a nod from Jane. Francis was starting to form opinions based on observations. She was learning to think of more than her desires and/or wants. She was growing.
As Toby walked away from Marcus, he turned back and thanked Marcus again, receiving a nod in return. Toby walked up to Jane and the girls, stopping three steps from Jane and asked, "Excuse me, ma'am. Are you Ms. Jane Thompson? I'm Toby Camber, I was told to ask for a Ms. Jane Thompson."
Jane gave Toby her best headmistress look as she replied, "Yes, young man. I'm Ms. Jane Thompson, and I already know who you are. You may address me as Ms. Thompson or Aunt Jane." She indicated the girls and told Toby, "And these are my wards, Francis and Charlotte." The girls did a slight curtsy as Jane said their names.
Toby nodded his head and said, "It's nice to meet you Francis, and you Charlotte. I hope we can become friends."
Jane saw that Toby's actions mirrored the school councelors notes. He wasn't the trouble maker he'd been made out to be. As always, she couldn't let on she suspected something, so asked instead, "Is that all the luggage you have with you?" Jane asked, pointing to the backpack Toby had slung over his right shoulder.
As polite as he'd been the minute he stepped onto the platform, he replied, "Yes, ma'am. This is all I've ever had... " and his voiced dropped off, sounding sad at the thought that he carried everything he owned.
The change in his voice wasn't lost on Jane or Charlotte, but Jane pushed on with, "Very well, please follow us to my car. We must hurry if we are to be at my house for lunch."
And again, Toby was polite by responding with, "Yes, ma'am," before wincing as he took his backpack off his right shoulder and slung it over his left shoulder. Wincing again as the backpack settled onto his left shoulder. Both expressions weren't lost on the three standing before him, but none said anything to him.
Jane looked over at Charlott and Francis, and said in her best headmistriss voice, "Girls, come with me, please." Jane turned on her heel and strode off, with the girls two steps behind her and to her right, walking side by side. Toby followed, being two steps behind the girls.
Thankfully, or it was fate, the wind was blowing into their backs, as Charlotte spoke so only Jane could hear, "Er ist verletzt, Tante Jane (He's hurt, Aunt Jane.)."
Jane turned her head slightly to the right and replied with, "Das habe ich auch gesehen, Charlotte (I saw that too, Charlotte.).
Of course, Francis felt left out and asked Charlotte in a whisper what she said to Aunt Jane. In a whisper, Charlotte replied with, "He's hurt."
Because Toby was tail-end-Charlie, and far enough away from the three, he didn't hear the short conversation that had taken place between the three. And the three didn't see him wince as the backpack slapped his back with each step he took. Or when he reached behind his neck and pulled his shirt away from his back. Or how he hissed with each arm movement. But the three would, in time, learn why Toby was hurting.
When they reached Jane's car, Toby hurried around to the driver's side and once Jane had unlocked the car, opened the driver's door for Jane. With a curt, "Thank you, Toby," Jane got into the car. Jane had signaled the girls to wait before she got into the car, just to see if Toby would open the doors for them as well. He did, after closing the driver door and hurrying around to the passenger side, receiving a "Thank you, Toby," from both girls after opening and closing the doors for the girls.
Two things were observed by Jane and Charlotte about Toby. He was in a lot of pain, it showed as he opened and closed the car doors. And this wasn't the same boy who tried to intimidate Charlotte in the jail cell. Pain was slowing Toby down, as he walked around the back of the car to the driver's side passenger door. In the time it took him to walk around to that door, Charlotte had time to tell Aunt Jane, "Aunt Jane, something isn't right here. He's not the same person now as he was in jail. And he's in a lot of pain."
Jane had just enough time to say, "I agree, Charlotte," before Toby opened the driver's side passenger door and got into the car. Once Toby had closed the door, Jane said, "Everyone fasten your seatbelts. We don't move until that's been done." As Jane listened, three clicks could be heard as the girls and Toby fastened their seatbelts. Jane started her car, backed out of the parking space, and left the parking lot by way of the same entrance she'd used when they came to the station. Jane kept an eye on Toby using the rearview mirror, asking short questions not requiring elaboration. Charlotte also kept a surreptitious eye on Toby, noticing how he kept shifting in the seat. She also noticed that he never leaned back against the seatback, which had her wondering just how bad he was hurt.
Finally arriving at Jane's home, after Jane parked her car and shut off the engine, she told Francis, "Francis, please take Toby up to his bedroom and show him everything in the room and en suite. Only!! Toby, please go with Francis, and listen carefully to what she tells you. Charlotte, you'll come with me."
Getting an "Yes, ma'am," from Toby, and two, "Yes, Aunt Jane," one each from Francis and Charlotte, they all got out of Jane's car and walked up to the house, where Jane opened the front door and entered her home, followed by Francis, Toby, and Charlotte, who closed the door behind her. Jane was standing to the side and watched as Francis led Toby up the stairs.
When the two had reached the second floor and walked down the hall, Jane told Charlotte, "Let's go into the study and talk." Charlotte led the short way to the study, opened the door, stood back and let Jane enter first before following her in and closing the door. She started to take out 'the book' to circuit the study, but Jane told her, "Not this time, Charlotte, we need to talk." Jane didn't go behind the desk or have Charlotte sit in the high back chair, instead she went to the table by the window and sat down in one of the three chairs around the table. She motioned for Charlotte to sit across from her and said to Charlotte, "Tell me everything you saw or think you saw. Leave nothing out, even if it's just a hunch. Something doesn't sit right with me about Toby."
Jane watched as Charlotte put her 'thinking' face on and waited a few moments before she heard, "Aunt Jane, that isn't the same boy I was with in jail. He's not even the same boy that was at Taylor's. That boy was arrogant, angry, hateful, a nasty piece of work. This Toby... this Toby is not that person at all. He was respectful with Marcus, you, and Francis and I. And he's actually happy, which is 180 degrees from the boy I first saw. And, Aunt Jane, he's in a lot of pain. You saw him wince as he shifted his backpack from his right shoulder to his left shoulder. He never leaned back in the seat all the way from the station until we were home. And he was squirming in his seat the entire time. If I didn't know better, Aunt Jane, someone has really beat him before he came here. Maybe to remind him to keep his mouth shut."
Jane had been nodding her head at everything Charlotte had said, she'd noticed the same things with the rearview mirror as they drove home. "I too observed those very things, Charlotte, and that has me worried. Who would beat him and want him to remain silent. Maybe Toby knows a lot more than he's supposed to know. Our observations will be answered in time. You best get to the kitchen and help Marie with lunch, and say nothing about our conversation. Oh, and Charlotte, you did a find job walking the study with 'the book' balanced on your head." Jane winked at her after telling her that.
After Charlotte left the study, asking permission before leaving, Jane went to the cabinet, unlocked it, and turned on the monitor to watch Toby's bedroom. When the camera came up, Jane saw a still respectful Toby listening intently to Francis as she explained everything but what was in the closet or drawers. Looking at the clock in the room, Francis had Toby lay his backpack in the robe chair and follow her back downstairs. Jane turned off the monitor, closed and locked the cabinet, before leaving the study. Toby and Francis were almost to the first floor as Jane stepped out of the study. "Francis, please help set the table and help Marie prepare lunch. Toby, you may wait in the living room, quietly, until lunch is ready." Receiving acknowledgements from the two, Jane led Toby to the living room, then followed Francis into the kitchen..
Once in the kitchen, Jane went to a cabinet, unlocked it, turned on a monitor, and selected the living room camera. As the four watched, Toby slowly inspected everything in the living room. But he never sat down, he just kept slowing walking around in the living room. Again, out of the mouth of babes, Francis asked, "Why doesn't he sit down? He just keeps walking around?"
Jane shut off the monitor, closed and locked the cabinet doors, then said, "That's a good question, Francis. A very good question. You girls better hurry and set the table, we don't want to keep Toby waiting too long." Acting the proper ladies, Francis and Charlotte did as Jane said, calming walking out of the kitchen carrying plates and utensils and placing them as they'd done many times before.
When Toby saw the girls setting the table, he asked, "May I help with anything?"
It was Charlotte who answered Toby with, "Not right now, Toby. You need to relax after you journey." The girls watched as Toby went back into the living room, and continued his walk, finally stopping in front of the big window and turning to look out the window. Where Jane found him to tell him lunch was ready.
Jane walked over and stood besides Toby, asking, "Beautiful country, isn't it?" Have you ever ridden a horse, Toby? I believe there are some things on my land you may not have seen." Jane didn't press the boy, but she wasn't amiss of the tears sliding down his face.
It wasn't long in coming as Toby said, "I've done some bad things, Aunt Jane. I've lied and got another kid in trouble because I was angry how free he was, and because... um, I was just angry. I've stolen, not that I had much choice if I wanted to remain alive. I... " but he never finished what he was about to say. Turning to look at Jane he said instead, "Yes, Aunt Jane, it is beautiful country. I could live here if I could."
Jane was looking at Toby now, and able to see the anguish in his eyes. She had to restrain herself from reaching up and wiping the tears off his cheeks. She also didn't miss that he'd addressed her as Aunt Jane, not Ms. Thompson, or ma'am. The rage Jane felt at that moment threatened to reached her face, if not for her iron will to keep it in check... at that moment. Jane wanted to pull this boy to her, hug him, comfort him, but she couldn't, she had to follow the plan they had made. Instead she told Toby, "Come, Toby, lunch is ready."
He surprised Jane again as he indicated with his hand, "After you, Aunt Jane," and followed Jane into the dining room. As they reached the dining room table, Toby watched where Aunt Jane was headed and followed her, pulling out the chair for her. As Jane sat down, after thanking Toby, he helped her move the chair in towards the table. And he did this for Marie, Francis, and Charlotte, shocking each in turn. Only after the ladies were seated did Toby take a vacant seat at the table next to the girls. While he may not have see the looks that passed between the four women, they each lifted an eyebrow as the look went from woman to woman. And from the looks each gave the other, even from Francis, they all knew something was right about the whole Toby situation.
Before Jane had a chance to address Toby, they all watched as Toby bowed his head for a moment before looking back up and saw the four women looking at him. Puzzled, Jane asked, "Why did you bow your head just now, Toby?" Jane's voice wasn't her usual strip flesh off the bone sharp, but it was demanding nonetheless.
Toby's eyebrows did the equivalent of a shoulder shrug as he replied, "Just a short prayer of thanks for the food, Aunt Jane. I apologize if I wasn't supposed to do that... it's what my Aunt taught me to always do before eating." Jane kept staring at Toby, making Toby feel he'd really cocked up this time. "Really, Aunt Jane, I'm sorry if I made any of you uncomfortable."
Jane finally shook herself and told Toby, "No... no Toby, you did nothing wrong. And no one was offended. In fact, it's rather admirable of you." Jane was staring at Toby not because he'd done anything wrong, but because there was nothing in the file she was sent that mentioned who had taught Toby such things. (Reference Toby's recorded life in Chapter 11 in Ruth's fax to Jane.) The monster once again threatened to surface until Jane said, "Excuse me for a moment. There's something I must attend to." Before Jane could push her chair back, Toby was behind her, helping to move her chair back so she could get up from he table. Her monster was now just below the surface. She thanked Toby, who remained in place, before she walked in a manner towards the study that told the three women that someone was about to have a very unpleasant conversation with Aunt Jane.
When Jane returned to the dining room table a few moments later, it was obvious to those who knew her that she had calmed down somewhat, though they all knew the fire was still burning. As Toby help Jane sit again, she thanked him, watched as he returned to his seat, and they all began eating. Jane kept the conversation light, asking Toby about his trip, where he went to school, what class he was taking, etc. Jane had learned from Ruth about Toby's home life, but no one had said anything about who really took care of Toby. Who it was who had instilled the manners he was now exhibiting. Something that was contrary to what Charlotte had seen in the jail cell. Being sorry Jane understood. But not the 'where' of the manners he learned.
Another shock came as Toby addressed Marie and the girls by saying, "That was a wonderful meal, Miss Marie, Francis, Charlotte. Thank you." And as the four watched Toby's face and heard his voice, both laden with a sadness that bordered on depression, Toby continued with, "It's been a long time since I've had such a fine meal." The tears standing in Toby's eyes weren't lost on the four either.
Jane's monster was clawing its way up, wanting to be released. She held it at bay by saying, "You're very welcome, Toby. We have one more tradition we hold when we receive a new student. Marie, if you would please." Marie started to push her chair back, only to find Toby once again helping her. She thanked him before going into the kitchen and coming back carrying a tray upon which sat four pink rimmed and one blue rimmed cordial glasses. Two of the pink rimmed glasses would be half full of wine, those were for Jane and Marie. The other two pink rimmed glasses, containing less than a forth of a glass of wine, were for Francis and Charlotte. The blue rimmed glass, Toby's glass, also contained less than a forth of a glass of wine but with a sleeping draught mixed in. Toby would be tired from his train trip, and the draught would ensure he would sleep for a few hours so Marie could retrieve all of his boy belongings, and begin the boy's adventure into girlhood.
After Toby had helped to reseat Marie, he returned to his own chair, causing the four to once again give each other raised eyebrows before Jane spoke. "Toby, we have a tradition here at Seasons House to toast the arrival of a new student with a small amount of wine. We want to welcome you and hope you learn well while you're here. To Toby, welcome...," Jane finished, and raised her glass in Toby's direction, followed by Marie, Francis and Charlotte. Jane and Marie only took a sip of their wine, as their glasses were half full. The girls, on the other hand, were able to empty their glasses because they had what amounted to a gulp to begin with. As the four watched, tears slid down Toby's cheeks and his lips trembled as he tried to speak.
In a raspy voice he told them, "That's the kindest anyone has treated me in a long time, and I thank you for that." He then drank down the glass of wine just as the girls had done. Jane and Marie knew it would be but a few minutes before the draught started making Toby sleepy, so as Marie started to rise from the table, Toby started to stand up but dropped back into his seat, saying, "I guess I'm more tired than I thought. I did sleep some on the train."
"That's understandable, Toby, it is a long trip," Jane told him. "Francis, please escort Toby to his bedroom so he can rest."
What none of them were expecting from Toby was, "May I be excused, Aunt Jane?"
Francis had already asked to be excused, and all eyes turned to stare at Toby after asking to be excused. Lost on Toby, the four eyed each other again, before Jane answered simply by telling Toby, "Yes, Toby. You may be excused." Jane's monster was screaming now to be released. It wanted someone's head on a platter and it wanted it NOW!
Marie saw the effort Jane was exerting to keep herself under control and told her, "Nicht jetzt, Jane. Nicht jetzt (Not now, Jane. Not now.)." Charlotte goaded Francis to move, and escort Toby to his bedroom. She too could see that Aunt Jane was about ready to explode because of what they've witnessed and what she'd been told by others.
"Aunt Jane, may I please be excused? I'll help Francis get Toby to his bedroom." Charlotte planned to carry Toby's backpack, so he wouldn't be in as much pain as he was in. The girls wouldn't help him undress or anything, but they would make sure he made it inside the bedroom and to the bed.
In a very controlled voice, Jane said, "Yes, Charlotte. You may be excused. And yes, you may help Francis get Toby to his bedroom. But the two of you return quickly, the table must be cleared, dishes done, and the kitchen cleaned."
Toby had pushed his chair back, and the girls helped him to stand; he wasn't very stable on his feet. Charlotte retrieved his backpack from the bench, where it had been put after they'd come into the house, as they reached the stairs. Charlotte suggested Francis let Toby go up the stairs near the banister so he could hold onto it and he climbed. Charlotte climbed directly behind Toby, in case he lost his footing and fell backward. They manage to get him into his bedroom, asking if he'd be okay now. He nodded his head and told the girls he'd be fine now, now that he could undress and get some sleep. The girls wished him a good nap and left his bedroom, returned to the dining room and their chore of clearing the table and getting the dishes and the kitchen cleaned.
While the girls had helped Toby to his bedroom, Jane had gone into the study. When the girls returned to the dining room and started clearing the table, Marie left the girls to their chore and went into the study, where she found her dear friend pacing back and forth across the study.
"Tu dois te ressaisir, Jane (You need to pull yourself together, Jane.). We can only do what we always do when a new girl arrives. Let the others do their jobs, let them find and catch the ones responsible for this whole merdique mess."
Jane stopped dead in her tracks, turned and looked at Marie. Marie seldom gets angry, nor uses words as she just used, she's the motherly figure to Jane's dragon. Even though Jane could see Marie was extremely angry, because of the word she used Jane couldn't help herself and started laughing. She staggered over the the edge of the desk, leaned against while she laughed in order to keep from falling down laughing. When Jane had control of herself, she told Marie, "Oh, thank you my dear friend. I'm sorry I was laughing at what you said, but you're right. We can do only what we do. And thank you for making me see that." Jane looked at the clock on the wall before saying, "Toby should be sound asleep by now, it's been ten minutes. And judging how fast that draught hit him, I won't be surprised if you don't have to completely undress him." Jane walked over to Marie, hugged her and was hugged back by the woman who'd stayed with her all these years. "You better go," was Jane's final words to Marie, before she kissed Jane on the forehead, turned and left the study.
Just then, the fax machine chimed, signaling a fax was ready to print out. Jane walked over to the fax machine, entered a series of numbers, and watched as the machine printed out the fax it had received. Taking is off the machine, she sat down at her desk and began to read the fax.
From: Jeb Thorton, et al.
To: Jane Thompson
RE: The Police Ruse Worked
Jane,
The police ruse worked like a charm. They found four officers, two men and two women, who could pass as teenagers without any problems. The makeup squad, the ones who makeup those going undercover, made them look exactly like fourteen-year-old street kids. The number of boys arrested are being held in two different jail cells. The undercover men were literally thrown into each cell and spoken to as though they were street kids who've broken the law. Because the number of girls arrested was less, they were put into one jail cell. As with the men, the woman were thrown into that jail cell and spoken to like the men. Both the men and women did what the kids did when they were thrown into the cells, and yelled back at the guards.
Both men and both women played their parts well, acting at though they recognized the leaders then asking what kind of deal they received because of what they told the police. I watched it all unfold on a security camera, and when it finally got through to the rest of the kids that their leaders might be getting a deal they weren't getting, the guards had to rush into the cells to keep the leaders from getting hurt worse than they'd already been hurt. After the gang members had been pulled off the leaders, they all wanted to talk and also get some kind of a good deal. Of course, the parents of the two undercover men and women arrived, and they'd been bailed. Their jobs were done.
I haven't heard what the kids are saying, there are a lot of statements to be taken. But once I hear what they're saying, I'll pass it on to you.
Give Charles our love.
Kindest regards,
Jeb
Jane sat back and digested what Jeb had said. As usual, when Francis and Charlotte finished a chore, they were instructed to sit on the bench and await for further instructions. The girls heard it first, "Oh mon dieu oh mon dieu oh mon dieu, JaneJaneJaneJane... (Oh my god oh my god oh my god, JaneJaneJaneJane…)" and saw Marie actually running down the stairs. They watched as she ran to the study door, threw it open, causing it to hit the bookcase, before running into the study.
Marie's yelling, then the noise of someone running down the stairs, brought Jane out of her musements. But when the study door was thrown open and it hit the bookcase, followed by Marie running into the study, that had her full attention. "Oh mon dieu oh mon dieu oh mon dieu, qu'est-ce que ces putains d'animaux ont fait à ce pauvre enfant (Oh my god oh my god oh my god what did these fucking animals do to this poor child?)? Come quick, Jane, you have to come quick. Animaux. Ce sont tous des putains d'animaux!!" She then turned, without waiting for Jane, and ran back out of the study and back up the stairs. Seeing Marie didn't even bother to close the study door behind her, caused Jane to rocket out of her chair and almost run after Marie; Jane didn't take the time to close the study door herself.
Francis looked at Charlotte, her eyes wet, and asked, "Do you think he's hurt badly, Charlotte?"
Charlotte took Francis' hands in hers and replied with, "You've been here longer than I have. Have you ever seen those two actually run in the house? Yeah, Francis, I think he might be hurt badly."
As Charlotte held Francis to comfort her, Jane came into view on the stairs and told Francis, "Francis," which caused Francis to sit back up, breaking Charlotte's hold of her. "Please go into the library and look through the rolodex until you find the phone number for Jill Peters. Call her office. When they answer, tell them doctor Jill Peters is urgently needed at Seasons House. Do you understand my instructions Francis?" Francis repeated the instructions back you Jane perfectly and then heard, "And not running in the house has been temporary recended. Go, NOW!" Jane and Charlotte watched as Francis was off like a shot. Charlotte looked at Jane and didn't have to ask the question on her lips. Jane read the question on her face and said, "Yes, it's bad. Answer the front door when Jill arrives, then show her up to Toby's bedroom. Knock, then leave. You are not to enter the room, understand?" The look on Jane's face told Charlotte Jane was absolutely serious, and would beg no other questions or accept anyone disobeying her orders. Jane knew what Charlotte's reaction would be if she saw what had been done to Toby, which is why she forbade her from entering Toby's bedroom. And she couldn't handle two problems at the moment, Toby's immediate needs had to come first.
"Yes, Aunt Jane. I understand. Is there anything else Francis and I can do?"
The monster was at the back of Jane's throat, and if she spoke now, it would be with angrily words. So she remained silent and forced herself to shake her head no and went back upstairs. Francis returned, not in as big of a hurry as she had been when she was given instructions by Jane. Francis caught just a glimpse of Jane retreating up the stairs. Before sitting down, and still looking up where Jane had been, asked, "It's really bad, isn't it, Charlotte?"
Charlotte patted the bench and Francis sat down. She pulled Francis to her and told her, "Yeah, it's really bad." It wasn't long before Francis felt tears falling on her, looked up and saw Charlotte had her head back, her eyes closed, her lips trembling and tears flowing from her eyes. She untangled herself from Charlotte's grasp and reversed it, holding Charlotte as she cried.
Charlotte had cried herself out, and fifteen minutes later there was a knock on the front door. "I have to answer that," Charlotte told Francis, as she pulled away from Francis, got up, picked up a tissue from the tissue box on the side table, dabbed her eyes as she walked to the front door.
When Charlotte opened the front door, she saw a sandy haired woman, maybe in her late 30's, with deep blue eyes, about Marie's height, with a fierce look on her face. "I'm doctor Jill Peters, you have an emergency for me?"
It took Charlotte a few moments to get over the shock of seeing such a beautiful woman standing before her, as she shook her head and said, "Yes, we do, doctor Peters. If you'll follow me, please." After doctor Peters stepped inside the house, and Charlotte had closed the front door, she told doctor Peters, "Jane instructed me to take you up to Toby's bedroom, knock on the door and leave. He must be in real bad condition because she explicitly told me not to enter the bedroom." Charlotte had stopped walking and turned to face doctor Peters before saying, "Please, doctor Peters, do everything you can for him. Besides needing all the help we can give him, he may be able to help me as well." She then turned and started ascending the stairs, followed by Jill.
"Here we are," Charlotte said, as she stopped at the door just past her own bedroom but on the left side of the hallway. She knocked on the door, started to leave but turned back and said one word, "Please." Charlotte was halfway down the hallway as she heard the door to Toby's bedroom open then close. Even though the bedroom door was closed, she still heard doctor Peters say, "Oh my God!"
Jane had been the one to open Toby's bedroom door to let Jill enter, and Jill had been watching Jane as she entered the bedroom, hoping Jane would tell her what happened. Jane flicked her head towards the bed, but the worst of Toby's injuries were blocked from view because Marie was standing at Toby's back, keeping an eye on Toby. When Jane said, "Marie," Marie turned to her left and took a step back, giving Jill a view she'd never seen in her life.
"Oh my God! What happened to that boy? Who did that to him?" She quickly walked over to the bed, bent down and started examining Toby from head to toe. What sent Marie running to get Jane, wasn't just what she saw when she pulled the covers completely to the foot of the bed. What sent her was what she saw after removing Toby's briefs. It was the same thing that caused Jill Peters to ask, "Who in the hell did all this to that boy?"
Toby's back and legs were a mass of old scars, healing wounds, and seeping wounds that had occurred recently. It looked like someone had used some type of strap and repeatedly beat Toby until they broke the skin. But his butt was a different matter, as it looked like he'd been paddled until blood had risen to the surface and then the skin broke. Toby's butt was a mass of weeping scabs and several old scars near his hips. And his arms were a mass of deep purple bruises, from his shoulder to his wrists. When Jill looked closer at his wrists and ankles, she could see marks that said Toby had been restrained with something like rope. Jill pulled out her cell phone and call the hospital, telling them she needed an ambulance at Seasons House. And to keep it low key. Most, if not all of Kingston, knew what Jane and Marie did at Seasons House. Many of the men in the town had been a student of Jane's in their teen years. And the ones who disapproved were kept quiet by the ones who benefitted from Jane's lessons. That included a few of the local police and sheriff deputies. After Jill made her call, Jane left the bedroom to give more instructions to Charlotte. While Jane was gone, Jill had taken out sterile gloves from her case, several sterile gaze packets, and a roll of surgical tape. She then proceeded to cover Toby's back, butt, and legs with the sterile gaze and secure it in place with the surgical tape.
When Jane returned, she was followed by two paramedics with a stretcher. After opening the door, she stood back and let the paramedics enter first. She followed them into the bedroom and listened as Jill issued instructions on how to place Toby on the stretcher to prevent any more pain than the boy was already feeling. Toby let out a groan, as the paramedics gently picked him up and placed him on his left side on the stretcher. After strapping him to the stretcher, and after Jane opened the bedroom door, they wheeled the stretcher out of the bedroom, carried it down the stairs, before wheeling it out of the open front door that Charlotte had opened for them. Jill packed up her material, closed her case, turned to Jane and told her, "I hope you catch the bastards who did this to that boy. And do worse to them," before rushing out of the bedroom, down the stairs, and out of the house.
Jane never closed the bedroom door, but walked over and sat on the bed next to Maria. Both were quiet, thinking about what they'd just seen and that there was an extremely vile person out there willing to do anything to keep their freedom. Their reverie was broken when there was a knocked on the open bedroom door and Francis asked, "Are you two alright? Will Toby be alright?"
Jane's head shot up in anger, she'd told the girls to stay sitting on the bench. She was about to rip into them until Marie laid a hand on her leg, causing Jane to look at her. "No, mon chère ami, no (No, my dear friend, no.)."
Hearing Marie's words, Jane laid her head back, realizing that she was about to take her anger out on the girls. Instead, she motioned for the girls to come and sit beside her and Marie, and proceeded to tell them everything about what they saw on Toby. There wasn't a dry eye in that room as Jane replayed the seen she'd seen when she first walked into Toby's bedroom. Jane's monster was standing just behind her front teeth, and it had a belly full of fire, ready to release it on the right person. Hopefully it would get its chance.
When everyone had settled down, somewhat, Jane said, "Let's go downstairs." The four women got up off the bed at the same time, but only Jane, Marie, and Charlotte started walking towards the bedroom door. Francis had stayed behind and started making up Toby's bed. When Jane realized Francis wasn't with them, she turned to watch as Francis had just finished making up the bed. "Francis, why did you make up Toby's bed," Jane asked, as she slowly walked over to Francis.
In the past, Francis would have hung her head believing she'd done something wrong, this Francis looked straight into Jane's eyes and told her, "Toby can't do it, so I'm helping him."
Jane pulled Francis into a hug before telling her, "That's very thoughtful of you, Francis. Come on, let's go downstairs."
They followed Marie down the hallway, down the stairs and into the dining room, where Marie pointed at the dining room table before disappearing into the kitchen. She returned a short time later with four glasses of iced tea, which she sat down in front of the three already seated at the table. Taking the last one, she sat down at her regular spot and nodded to Jane. "Girls, I'm going to the hospital, since I'm responsible for Toby. Marie will be watching you tonight, and I want you to be on your best behavior for her. Understand? Her authority is the same as mine, so any missteps and you'll receive the same punishment as I would give you. Do you two fully understand what I'm telling you?"
Both girls nodded their heads and said together, "Yes, Aunt Jane. We understand." They then looked at each other, and both Jane and Marie saw a silent message being passed, as they turned their heads back to face Jane before telling her, "And we love you too, Aunt Jane." Jane's throat had become to tight to speak. She could only shake her head as she got up from the table and walked down the short hall to her bedroom. Charlotte turned to Marie and asked, "Did we overdo it Tante Marie?"
Marie could only smile at Charlotte as she replied, "No chère, you didn't overdo it. You two did it just right. Now, finish your drinks then go freshen up your faces. Seasons House doesn't allow ratons laveurs (raccoons) to run around in this house."
What Francis said next caused Marie and Charlotte to laugh. "Not again? Do I look that bad?"
Charlotte and Marie laughed before saying together, "Oui!"
Author's Note:Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
After getting herself ready, Jane gave final instructions to the girls before leaving for the hospital. Once there, she inquired at the front desk as to where Toby Camber was being treated, explaining that he was her ward. After being told the floor and room number, Jane walked to the elevators, pressed the call button and waited until the first available elevator arrived. Once the elevator arrived, and the doors opened, she stepped into the elevator, pressing the button for the third floor. Upon reaching the third floor, and after stepping off the elevator, Jane walked to the nurse's station and asked, "Excuse, me. Where would I find room 325?"
The nurse at the nurse's station had been busy filling out patient charts and hadn't noticed Jane when she approached the nurse's station. It was only when Jane asked her question that the nurse looked up and recognized Jane right away. She got up from her chair, walked out from behind the partition, and told Jane, "Come this way, Ms. Thompson. Doctor Peters wanted to keep things quiet because of the nature of the situation, so she had him brought directly to a more secluded room. She also instructed us to refer to him as the boy in room 325, for obvious reasons." The nurse led Jane down a hallway that took them to the back part of the hospital floor, away from prying eyes and bit quieter. "Here we are, Ms. Thompson, you may go right in, doctor Peters is still with the boy."
Jane knocked before entering and slowly pushed the door open then entered the room. Jill was a bit tense when she heard the knock on the door, but relaxed when she saw it was Jane. "How is he?" Jane asked as she walked into the room, noticing the 'IV' and the monitor connected to Toby by various cords and tubes.
"He still has me puzzled," Jill replied. "He was severely dehydrated, had to be in a lot of pain given everything that was done to him. Yet managed to arrive here on the train. We've had to keep him sedated while we cleaned out every open wound on his back, butt, and legs. And we'll keep him sedated for the next day or so, until we make sure there's no more infection to be removed. We also have him on pain medication, nothing he'll get addicted to, but it will make him much more comfortable. Jane, do you know who did all this to that boy? They should be arrested and imprisoned." Jill saw the look on Jane's face, asking, "What is it Jane? You know you can trust me."
At Jill's question, as to who was responsible for Toby's current condition, Jane mulled over whether or not to tell Jill everything, or almost everything. She wondered if telling Jill about Toby would affect any case brought against those involved with the shoplifting ring. She also reasoned, by not telling Jill the whole story, and how sensitive a situation they were in, she might let slip about the boy in room 325 at the hospital, causing others to get curious. "Do you have time for a story, Jill?" Jane asked, before sitting down in one of the three chairs in the room.
Jill snorted and told Jane, "I'll make the damn time. But wait one minute before you begin." Jill took out her cell phone, dialed a number then said, "Hi, Penny, it's Jill. I want you to make it clear to one and all that no one is to enter room 325 until I give the all clear... Just tell them it's doctor's orders...There shouldn't be anyone else nosing around... Thank you Penny." She cut the connection, sat down in the chair next to Jane and said, "You were going to tell me a story, I believe."
For the next half hour, Jane told Jill the whole story, if for no other reason than to impress upon her the gravity of the situation. Jane told Jill about everything that happened at Taylor's. How the security guard ended up on the floor and why. How the same security, being angry, tried to get at Charles in the interrogation room but ended up with a broken collar bone and the ulna and radius in his right arm. She told of Charles being in the holding cell with Toby and two other boys caught at Taylor's, and how the three were acting. She told of Judge Ruth not finding any evidence against Charles and how the CEO of Taylor's threatened to take Charles to Federal Court if Ruth didn't find him guilty. How the minute the CEO of Taylor's threatened to take Charles to Federal Court, Ruth started an investigation into the CEO. How Judge Ruth, the Prosecutor, Charles' lawyer, and Charles met in Judge Ruth's chambers and of Ruth knowing Charles would be safe with me. Of Charles' dad's law firm with their own investigation going on. That members of the shoplifting gangs were being killed by someone just to keep them quiet. How she suspected Toby was bailed out of jail by the person taking care of him, but still had to stand before Judge Ruth. And of how he was when he stepped off the train this morning, different from how he was in jail. And how polite he'd been ever since he arrived. How he was actually happy to be here and he'd live here if he could.
Jane couldn't look at Jill as she told the woman everything, or she'd have fallen apart. When she ended the story and finally looked at Jill, Jill had her hand over her mouth and her eyes were wet with tears. "My God. That's horrible, Jane. What type of person are they looking for? How depraved does a person have to be to beat a boy like that," and she flicked her head towards where Toby lay, "and to kill 'kids' just to shut them up? Jane, you're talking about a rabid animal here. Someone not fit to breathe the same air we breathe. My God, Jane." They sat quietly for a moment before Jill suddenly said, "Wait a minute. You think this boy was beaten this badly in order to keep him from talking? That he might be the one to not only clear Charles of the charges against him, but reveal who beat him and who runs the shoplifting rings?" Jane remained silent, but nodded her head in affirmation. "No wonder you want this kept quiet. If they found out where he is right now, they'd try to kill him this time."
"Plus," Jane said, as she used a tissue to dab her eyes, "if word got out about Toby's condition, CPS might learn of his condition and take matters into their own hands. If they did that, they could jeopardize not only the ongoing investigations but Charles getting his name cleared. So you see why his condition must be kept confidential. Why no one in this hospital can say anything about Toby. NOTHING. Absolutely nothing to anyone. And you best let them know if anything about Toby gets out, his name, where he is, his condition, anything, they'll have to deal with me when I learn of the breech. And believe me when I say, after everything that's been done to this boy, Charles, and those kids killed, I'll kill and bury the son of a bitch who talks to anyone outside this hospital. Doctors included."
Jill had known Jane for more years than she could remember, and knew what Jane did at Seasons House. She'd seen Jane mad at her girls, at some other fool, but she'd never seen Jane this mad. Even the look in the woman's eyes said don't doubt her words. She would kill and bury the first person who said anything about this boy to anyone outside of the hospital. And she just might get away with it, too.
They sat silent again, before Toby stirred, causing Jill to get out of her chair and check on him. She checked the 'IV' bag and the monitor, before turning to Jane, accessing her condition and telling her, "Jane, go home. Toby's doing alright now and there's nothing you can do for him right now. This whole affair has you worn down, even I can see that. Go. Home. Those are doctor's order."
Jane saw the serious look on Jill's face after she turned to face Jane. "You know I'm not good at talking orders, don't you? But I am rather good at giving them." Jane's words did nothing to change the look on Jill's face. Jill was now pointing to the door, flicking her hand up and down, an indication for Jane to leave, get out, go home. Jane chuckled, stood up, then said, "But you'll call me if there are any changes. RIGHT? Despite what Jane just said, and the serious look on her face, Jill's face remained resolute, and her hand kept flicking towards the door.
Jill stepped up to Jane, took her in a hug before telling her, "It'll be alright Jane. Have faith." Jill was a bit shorter than Jane, but had felt Jane put her head on her shoulder. After a few moments, she felt her blouse under Jane's head getting wet, telling her again, "It will be alright, Jane." Jill silently let tears slide down her own cheeks, hoping those who are doing all this are thrown into the deepest canyon on Earth. Jill finally pushed Jane back, handed her a tissue, then much softer than she had told her at first, "Go home to your girls and Marie. Let them be your strength, you lovely woman."
Jane used the tissue she had used to wipe her eyes, then wipe the tears off Jill's cheeks. She couldn't speak or she'd break down again. So she just nodded her head, kissed Jill on the forehead, picked up her purse and left Toby's hospital room. She needed her girls and her dear friend.
As Jane drove home, her monster was showing her everything it wanted to do to the person who put Charles in his current situation, and who beat Toby so badly that he had to be hospitalized. The monster wanted Jane to call on those she knew who could deal with it all, but her iron will forced the monster back down so she could drive safely. The drive allowed her to reexamine everything from the beginning until now. Allowed her to question if she'd done this or that right, in regards to Charles. She still found it hard for a boy to withstand her dragon when it was released, but Charles had and done so without so much as a flinch. Even in modeling at The Style Shoppe, he'd been unsure at the start, but ran with it, and with more gusto than Jane had seen any of her previous boys had. Kenneth's plight came back to her, and her vowing never to let it happen again. But here she was, with not one but two boys who shouldn't be with her. One severely beaten into submission by an animal Jane would like to deal with. And the other because the one had been severely beaten into submission and lied about his involvement. She willed her monster back down once again.
When Jane arrived home, she could feel the tiredness down to her bones. She took a deep breathe before getting out of her car, locking it and walking up to the front door. She opened the front door, took one step into the house and was met with a shock as she saw Marie and the girls standing on either side of her, and the girls dressed in riding clothes. No instructions were given, no one said a word, but the girls walked up to Jane, took her hands and led her down the short hall to her bedroom. It was only then Francis said, "Charlotte and I will met you at the stable. Everything will be ready when you arrive." Having said that, the girls turned and headed to the hallway that led to the backdoor. Jane saw Marie looking at her, her arms crossed in front of her and a 'do as you're told look' on her face. Jane chuckled, shook her head, then turned and entered her bedroom to dress for riding.
When Jane reached the stable, all three horses were saddled and ready to ride. Walking through the stable, she stopped to look at the horses and the two girls standing with them. She started to say something but Charlotte cut her off by saying, "Not a word, Aunt Jane. You need to just listen to the friends you've made while being here. Let them talk to you and help you get through this moment. I'm sorry if I'm out of line, but it's for your own good." Jane muffled a cry, as she rushed forward, tears freely flowing, and pulled both girls into a hug. Not one word was said, as Jane gave the girls a final squeeze before letting them go, mounted the big mere, and didn't bother tightening the reins as the big mere started the ride on her own volition. The girls mounted up and followed Jane, moving so Francis was on Jane's right and Charlotte on Jane's left. Not a word was said as they rode out or back. This ride was about listening to what the genuine world had to say to their souls. To listen and let those in the genuine world speak to the hurt and anguish felt down to their very souls. To give them the strength to continue doing what had to be done, should be done, for the good of those who came to the Winsome Girls' School for Wayward Boys. And for the two who were there now.
As the horses grazed, the three sat on the bench near the pond. It wasn't long before the largest flock of ducks Jane had ever seen were swimming towards them. More frogs than she'd seen at one time hopped out of the pond and sat in front of them on the edge of the pond. A small herd of deer came out of the woods on their left, followed by two raccoons and a mated pair of skunks. When the ducks reached the shore, they all walked out of the water and formed a line in front of the three, and they all sat where they had stopped walking. The small herd of deer stopped not far away and laid down on their right, while the two raccoons and the mated pair of skunks did the same on their left. The three looked at all the creatures that had come to them, and it was Francis who said, "It looks like their waiting for something." No sooner had she said that then two porcupines came walking out of the forest, following the footpath that went into the forest; the footpath was only a step away from the bench where the three women sat.
When the porcupines reached the three, they stopped directly in front of them, turned to face the women, and gazed at them. No sound was made, but a message, a conversation, was exchanged between the three and those that had come to give them strength, to give them affirmation of what they were doing, to show an empathy for the hurt and pain they were feeling, and to help them understand that all would be well in the end. The assembly made it clear the three were needed, will be well, as three fawns stood, walked over to the women, each standing in front of a woman, then dipping their heads, and licked the hands that laid in the lap of each woman. No one had any tissues to catch the tears that fell into the laps of the three women, as the fawns returned to where they had lain. It was then the breeze conveyed its own admiration of what Jane did and had done. It even praised the girls for helping and caring for Jane. No signal was given, no sound was made, as the porcupines turned to their left and walked back into the forest. The frogs disappeared, the ducks got up and walked back into the water. The small herd of deer stood, turned and followed the porcupines, as did the raccoons and skunks. The usual sounds heard at the pond returned, and the breeze continued on as it had always done.
The women heard Pinto whinny, causing all three to turn their heads and see that the horses were standing two paces from the bench. "Sounds like someone what's to go home," Charlotte said, and Pinto whinnied again then threw her head up and down.
Jane laughed and told Charlotte, "I swear that horse understands everything we say." Pinto's lips were separated in only what could be described as a smile, as she whinnied again while throwing her head up and down. Jane patted both girl's leg before saying, "Come on girls, let's get home. And thank you for this. I will never forget what you two have done for me today. Ever."
They were silent as their horses took them back home. Each lost in their own thoughts, examining not only the days activities but the past days. When they reached the stable, the girls shooed Jane away, telling her they'd take care of the horses. Jane shook her head, pulled the girls into a hug, then silently walked the short distance back to her home. She was a bit surprised when the backdoor opened and there stood Marie with a big smile on her face. "Ces deux-là sont vraiment quelque chose, n'est-ce pas ?"
Stepping into the house and past Marie, Jane turned and replied with, "Ils sont ça et bien plus encore."
After closing the door, Marie stepped up to Jane, put an arm around her waist, and started walking with her as they headed towards Jane's bedroom. "You get cleaned up. Rest, oui? The girls and I will get everything ready for supper. Go." She kissed Jane on the cheek before pushing her towards the bedroom door. Once again Jane had to stay quiet or she'd break down. She nodded her head and disappeared into her bedroom.
It wasn't long before the girls came into the house. Marie saw them walk in and without being told, headed up the stairs to their bedrooms to clean up and change for supper. Marie called to the girls just as Francis had taken three steps up the stairs and Charlotte two. "I can't express in words how proud I am in what you two did for Aunt Jane. You two are more than can be expressed in just words. Thank you for what you did for Jane, you don't know how much all of this has been upsetting her."
Francis started shaking her head, then said, "No, Tante Marie. We know how upset she's been. We know, that's why we did this for her." After saying that, she and Charlotte turned and continued climbing the stairs. Marie went to find herself a tissue.
Talk around the dinner table that evening led away from school work and lessons, but centered around Toby and the experience they had at the pond. Jane asked the girls for their observations and opinions, bringing out points the girls may have missed in the observations. Then serious Jane returned. "Girls, this may be hard to hear but I believe you've earned the right to hear about Toby. According to doctor Peters, someone had restrained Toby by the wrists and ankles then severely beat him with not only something like a belt but used a paddle on his butt until blood came to the surface and broke the skin. Whatever belt like object they used on him, was administered so many times that it eventually broke the skin. They also used some cord like object and did the same to his legs. Most, if not all of his wounds were infected, and he was sedated so the doctors could clean out the infection. He was severely dehydrated so they are giving him 'IVs'. He's being given medication to help fight the infection, ease the pain, and to keep him sedated. I'll go see him tomorrow, so Marie will again be in charge. I expect you two to work on your lessons, do your chores, and be on your best behavior. And...," Jane had to pause as her throat had tightened once again. It had tightened because of what she had to say to the girls about what they did for her that day. When she was sure she could say it, she said, "Girls, words aren't sufficient enough to say how grateful I am for what you did for me this evening. None of the girls I've had here at Seasons House have ever done anything of that nature. While I am still your headmistress and will growl at you when necessary, your unselfish actions tonight will never be forgotten. Now," Jane growled, "don't you have a table to clear and a kitchen to clean."
Both girls smiled at Jane and said in unison, "We love you too, Aunt Jane. May we be excused?" Receiving permission from Jane to leave the table, after getting out of their chairs, they went and stood by Marie, Francis on her left and Charlotte on her right. Charlotte bent down, kissed Marie on the cheek, then told her, "Merci pour tout, tante Marie (Thank you for everything, Aunt Marie.)." Then looking at Francis, Charlotte whispered, "Go ahead."
Before Marie could turn to look at Francis, she too bent down, kissed Marie on the cheek and said, "Um... Merci... um... oh what was it, oh yeah... pourr... um... pour... um... tout, tante Marie. That's it," then looking at Marie, Francis told Marie, Merci pour tout, tante Marie (Thank you for everything, Aunt Marie.). And I really mean that."
No one saw Jane wipe her eyes after what the girls told Marie. The also didn't see Jane smirk as Marie asked, with a serious look on her face, "Alors, tu parles français maintenant ?" Marie had to school herself or the smile that wanted to split her face wide open would be seen by Francis.
"Um, let's see. Tu is, um, means, you. Parles means speak, and français means French. But I don't know the meaning of alors or maintenant."
Marie then let her smile show and she told Francis, "I said 'so you speak French now.' And who, if I didn't know better," and she turned to look at Charlotte, "has been teaching you?"
This time Francis really shocked Marie and Jane as she said, without any flaws, "Mon professeur est Charlotte Thorton (My teacher is Charlotte Thorton.)."
Charlotte laughed at seeing the expressions on Marie and Jane's faces. "Francis asked me one day to teach her how to speak in French. I taught her while we sat on the bench and during our free times. Or after we finished our lessons."
Jane and Marie had turned to look at Charlotte as she spoke. It was Jane who asked Francis, "Alors vous voulez apprendre à parler français (So you want to learn to speak French?)?"
All three watched as Francis bobbed her head, squinted her eyes, before she answered with, "Oui. Si je peux (Yes. If I can.)."
Jane being Jane, threw in a monkey wrench with, "Was ist mit Deutsch (What about German?)?"
Again the three watched as Francis gyrated before answering with, "I think you asked if I wanted to learn German."
Again, the eyes of Marie and Jane fell on Charlotte, who almost shrugged as she told them, "Francis asked about German too. So... ."
Jane was serious now, asking Francis, "Francis, have you taken language classes in school before you came here? You seem to have an aptitude for them."
"I was taking a Spanish class, but didn't get much out of the class. I guess I wasn't that interested in the class," she replied, almost shrugging her shoulders.
Both Charlotte and Marie knew what was coming as Jane said, "¿Estabas aburrido en la clase o simplemente no estabas interesado en aprender español (Were you bored in class or just not interested in learning Spanish?)?"
Without missing a beat, Francis answered with, "Creo que simplemente estaba aburrido. Lo único que hicimos fue repetir algunas frases del libro. Nunca aprendimos cómo mantener una conversación real (I think I was just bored. The only thing we did was repeat some phrases from the book. We never learned how to have a real conversation.)."
And Marie summed it up nicely by saying out loud, "Oh, mia parola (Oh, my word!)!"
Nodding her head, Jane said, "You are going to be learning French, German, and we'll see how much Spanish you know. You do indeed have an aptitude for languages. And I'm not going to let you waste that talent. Understand?"
With the biggest smile on her face, Francis replies, "You bet I understand, Aunt Jane. Thank you very much." When Francis saw the expression on Jane's face, she calmed down and re-replied with, "Yes, Aunt Jane. I understand. And I love you too."
"Get the table and kitchen done," Jane growled, trying to mask the pride she had in Francis at that moment. And to hide the tears that threatened to again escape her eyes. Her eyes met Charlotte's eyes and she mouthed 'thank you' to Charlotte. Charlotte dipped her head once, before continuing to help clear the table.
After the table was cleared and the dishes and kitchen were clean, Jane gave the girls the night to themselves. Jane and Marie had gone into the living room. As they sat there, it wasn't hard to hear the girls talking as they sat on the bench. Charlotte was explaining French to Francis. Charlotte would say a word in English then say it in French, then have Francis say it, explaining how to say the word properly when Francis said it with an English accent. Neither girl got upset with the other, Francis was eager to learn and Charlotte was more than happy to help her learn. The two women looked up from the books they were reading and saw the girls go up the stairs. A clock chimed nine times and as the last chime faded, the girls were coming down the stairs dressed in their nightgowns and wearing their robes. When they reached the first floor, they walked together, hand in hand and came to stand in front of Jane. Jane laid her book aside, stood up and began to inspect both girls. After doing a tour of both girl, she told them, "You both have done an adequate job of removing your makeup. Do better next time. And who dried your hair?
Both girls were doing their best to hold back the smiles wanting to expose itself after what Jane said and asked. They didn't totally succeed as it escaped Francis as she replied to Jane's question with, "I dried Charlotte's, and brushed it and she did the same for me."
Jane bent down and got right into Francis face before asking, "And why are you smiling, Miss Winslow?"
Francis' smile got even bigger before she said, "And I love you too, Aunt Jane." Then she shocked Jane as she kiss Jane on the cheek.
Jane grumped and said, "Such a petulant child. Both of you, off to bed. NOW!"
Jane received a kiss from Charlotte, another one from Francis, and Marie received one from each girl, before, hand in hand, the girls walked to the stairs, climbed them and entered their respective bedrooms. Still watching after the girls went upstairs, Jane said to the air, "Should all our girls be as those two are right now."
Marie was nodding her head at Jane's statement. "We can only hope chère, we can only hope," was Marie's reply before both women joined the girls in a good nights rest.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
As Marie always does every morning when a girl is in the house, after leaving her bedroom, she would go into each girls' bedroom, wake them, and hurried them along before going into the next girls' bedroom. This morning was going to be a bit different, as she discovered when she opened the door to Charlotte's bedroom to wake the girl. Only... no one was in bed. Charlotte's bed was made. Checking under the pillow, Marie found Charlotte's nightgown neatly folded as it should be. Hearing no water running in the en suite, Marie opened the en suite door, look around, but found no one. Puzzled, Marie left Charlotte's bedroom, closing the door behind her, walked the short distance to Francis' bedroom, and discovered the same absence as she had discovered in Charlotte's bedroom. Marie slowly walked out of Francis' bedroom, closing the door behind her and puzzled where the girls could be. After how they'd showed great concern for Jane, running away didn't seem possible, especially after what they did for Jane yesterday. Maybe they went on an early ride. But no, Jane explicitly told Charlotte not to leave the house without telling someone, and she wouldn't disobey Jane, she thought to herself.
It was as she slowly walked towards the stairs that a realization hit her. She smelled food cooking! And it smelled delicious! Wasting no more time puzzling about the girls whereabouts, she quickly descended the stairs and headed straight to the kitchen. Practically blasting through the kitchen door, Marie came upon a scene she'd never once encountered in all her time with Jane at Seasons House. Charlotte and Francis were in the kitchen preparing breakfast. She was even more shocked when Francis, of all people, told her, "Tante Marie, you just scoot back out of the kitchen, Charlotte and I are busy getting breakfast ready. You sit yourself down at the dining room table and I'll bring your tea and juice out in a moment." When Marie stood there dumbfounded, Francis walked over to her, physically turned her around and pushed her out of her own kitchen, guiding her to her usual place at the dinner table. Francis pulled out the chair, guided a stunned Marie around in front of the chair, and gently sat the woman down in the chair. "Now you just relax and I'll be back in a moment, tante Marie."
It was but a few minutes as Jane came walking down the short hallway that led to her bedroom. As she walked into the dining room, she saw Marie sitting at the dining room table with a stunned look on her face. As Jane watched, Marie planted both of her elbows on the table, then put her chin in the palms of her hands. As Jane watched, Marie's stunned expression changed to one of being flabbergasted, as she started saying, over and over again, "Je n'y crois pas. C'est incroyable. Je n'y crois tout simplement pas (I do not believe it. It's incredible. I just don't believe it)." Jane's attitude went from one of concern for her dear friend to one of anger, thinking the girls had finally done 'it' this time. Jane had walked over to stand by Marie, but her attitude changed as a noise came from the kitchen, she turned and took one step before Marie's left hand shot out and grabbed Jane's left wrist. "No, chère, it isn't bad, just unbelievable. You better sit down. Even you won't believe it." Slowly, Jane stepped back, pulled out her chair and sat down, all the time keeping her eyes on Marie. Marie finally sat up straight, turned her head to look at Jane and regaled her with something totally unbelievable. "You know I wake the girls every morning on my way down to the kitchen." After Jane slowly nodded her head, Marie continued with, "Well, I went into Charlotte's bedroom first, but no Charlotte. Her bed was neatly made, her nightgown where it should be, neatly folded, and the room and en suite neat and tidy. I then went to Francis' bedroom and found the same. When I reached the stairs, I smelled food cooking and rushed down and into the kitchen. Only to have Francis throw me out of my own kitchen. She said she and Charlotte were making breakfast for us, you and I. She threw me out of my own kitchen, can you imagine that. Our two girls threw me out of my own kitchen, and they're preparing breakfast for you and I."
Now it was Jane's turn to have a stunned expression on her face, as the kitchen door swung open and Francis and Charlotte came into the dining room. Francis was carrying two glass of orange juice, while Charlotte was carrying two cups of tea. "Good morning, Aunt Jane," Charlotte said, as she sat the cup and saucer down in front of Jane, kissing her on the cheek. She then walked around to Marie's right, sat the other cup and saucer down in front of Marie, kissed her on the cheek and told her, "Don't worry, tante Marie. Your kitchen will not be harmed by the two of us. Remember, my Uncle taught me how to cook." Charlotte kissed Marie again on the cheek before she disappeared back into the kitchen. Francis, meanwhile, had followed Charlotte, setting first on glass of orange juice in front of Jane, wishing her a good morning, giving her a kiss on the cheek before doing the same for Marie.
"Now, you two relax, enjoy your tea and juice, and breakfast will be ready shortly." Two overly stunned women turned to watch Francis walk back into the kitchen, both not realizing they had their mouths open.
A still stunned Jane turned back to the table, put her left arm across her chest, brought her right arm up and rested her elbow on her left arm, with her hand at her mouth, asking Marie, "Were we just given orders by our girls, Marie?"
A still stunned Marie answered with, "We were, and I was kicked out of my own kitchen."
The kitchen door opening caught the attention of the two women. Francis came out first, carrying two glasses of orange juice. Charlotte followed her with two cups on saucers of their tea, setting one of each at their own places at the table. Neither girl said a word, as she disappeared again into the kitchen only to return with each girl carrying two plates of food apiece. Charlotte sat one plate down in front of Jane, then the other in front of Marie. As the two women look at what had been sat before them, Charlotte said, "It's the best I can do making Huevos Rancheros without all the right ingredients. I think you'll really like it though." Francis set her plates before her's and Charlotte's places at the table, before both girls sat down.
The two women looked at their plates, then at each other, before looking at both girls, who had sat down at their place but had yet to start eating. It was Jane who, in a fake dragon voice, asked, "And just what made you think you had permission to work in MY kitchen alone?"
Charlotte pushed her chair back, stood up and walked around to stand between Jane and Marie. She put her arms around both women and told them, "You two needed this. You both have been so worried, and angry, about everything connected with me and now Toby. You two deserved to have Francis and I do something without having to be told or threatened in to doing it. And we love both of you." She then kissed first Jane then Marie on their cheeks before walking back to her chair and sitting down. Charlotte never gave Jane the answer she was expecting, and after what the girls had done, and Charlotte said, she didn't care anymore.
"So," Marie, began, looking down at the food on the plate before. "What poison have you conjured up for us, Charlotte?" Both Marie and Jane knew what Charlotte had attempted, and both knew the kitchen didn't have all of the right ingredients to make it properly.
"Tante Marie. First off, it isn't poison, it's quite edible. And second off, it looks as though you recognize what I attempted to make with what ingredients that were on hand. It is the best version of Huevos Rancheros I could make with the ingredients kept in the kitchen. I substituted toast for corn tortillas, parsley for cilantro, but added a bit of something to make the parsley seem to be cilantro, green peppers for jalapeños and lemon juice for the lime juice for the pico de gallo. When my Uncle taught me to cook, he even made sure to teach me how to improvise when the right ingredients weren't available. I couldn't improvise anything in place of the refried beans, so they were left off the dish."
Neither Jane or Marie could see that Francis and Charlotte were holding hands, not quite sure what they'd done that morning wasn't going to have consequences they weren't going to enjoy; they both also had the fingers of their free hands crossed. The girls watched as Jane and Marie took their first tentative bites. Marie was the first to react, as she sat back in her chair, with her eyes closed, chewed and swallowed her first bite before saying, "Oh mon Dieu, mon enfant. Toi et moi allons ouvrir un restaurant ensemble." She didn't say another word as she continued eating, eliciting a few moans after several of the bites she took.
Jane, on the other hand, trying to maintain an air of authority, but failing, told Charlotte, "This is quite good, Charlotte. But I think you could do better when you have the right ingredients. Don't you agree, Marie?" So out of character for Marie, who just kept on eating despite Jane's question, she gave Jane a thumbs up and kept savoring her meal. Jane was about to take another bite when she saw the girls weren't eating, but sitting in their seats with a look of relief and smiles on their faces. Jane started with, "And why ar...," but she let those words drop and said instead, "Yesterday you two made me go ride. Today you fix breakfast for Marie and myself. You two are the most remarkable girls I've ever had. And like yesterday, I shall never forget what you two have done today. Now eat, before it gets cold. And Marie will get everything you need to make a proper Huevos Rancheros, Charlotte. That I can't wait to taste."
So taken with what she was tasting, all Marie could say between bites, in agreement to Jane's statement, was, "Ja."
Squeezing each others hands, the girls joined in and had their breakfast, happy they could make Jane and Marie happy. Happy they took some of the concern off the shoulders of the two women. Extremely happy there'd been no consequences mentioned, yet. Or maybe weren't coming. They still had their fingers crossed.
When each had finished their breakfast, and the girls had asked to be excused to attend to their morning ritual of clearing the table and taking care of the kitchen, they told Marie that since they were the cooks that morning, they would attend to everything in the kitchen. That she could do something else and wait until they'd finished in the kitchen before coming to see if her kitchen was still in one piece. Jane had to cover her mouth in order to hide a smile and stifle a laugh. Again, Marie was flabbergasted. Putting on her best Marie 'I'm serious' look, along with her voice, she told the girls, "If anything is out of place, anything, if the kitchen isn't spotless, if you have broken anything, you two are going to scrub that kitchen from the ceiling to the floor. Before you repaint the walls and refinish the cabinets." Then she leaned close to the girls faces before saying, "DO. YOU. TWO. UNDERSTAND. ME?"
The two girls simply smiled at Marie, kissed her on her cheeks, then told her together, "We love you too, tante Marie," before they started clearing the dining room table.
Jane was trying so hard not to laugh that she was shaking. Marie turned to face her, threw her hands up in the air, rolled her eyes as she looked to the ceiling and said out loud, "Ils m'ont encore expulsé de ma propre cuisine. Ils sont incorrigibles."
When the girls came out of the kitchen to take more off the dining room table, Jane stopped them with, "Girls, I'm being very serious now, so please listen. As I said yesterday, I'm going back to the hospital to be with Toby. Marie will be in charge," to which the girls watched and Marie crossed her arms over her chest. It was clear to Jane and Marie that both girls were doing the best to stifle laughs because of Marie's actions. "You'll do what she tells you without question, just as you would for me. You both have lessons, so I expect you to start on those once you've finished in the kitchen, brushed your teeth and freshened your faces. Is that clear, girls?"
As usual, the girls gave Jane the only answer she'd accept of, "Yes, Aunt Jane."
Jane knew Charlotte knew several languages, and hoped she didn't know Portuguese, as she told Marie, "Leve as meninas para comprar os ingredientes que Charlotte precisa para fazer Huevos Rancheros adequados. Espere até o meio da manhã para se mudar."
To not give away anything, Marie only replied, "Oui."
Jane was looking at Charlotte as she spoke to Marie, trying to discern any recognition from Charlotte of what she had told Marie. What Jane didn't know, was that Charlotte understood everything Jane had said to Marie, and that she knew Jane was trying to see if she knew the Portuguese language. When Charlotte realized what Jane was doing, she entered her 'ready' mode that caused her to tightly school any facial expressions. In essence, she pulled one over on Jane. A victory she best not let Jane know about or the consequences might be much different than being a clothing or makeup model.
When Jane arrived at the hospital, everyone ignored her as she entered the elevator, press the button for the third floor, exited the elevator, walked past the nurse's station and went straight to room 325. When she enter Toby's hospital room, Jane saw Jill sitting in a chair she'd pulled over near the bed, sound asleep. Jane quietly walked into the room, gently touched Jill on the shoulder, and stepped back as Jill roused herself then looked up at Jane. "Were you here all night?" Jane quietly asked as she picked up another chair, walked around to the other side of the bed carrying the chair, before setting it down near Toby's head.
Stretching, Jill said, "Yeah. I wanted to be here in case he needed anything. And to keep from having nurses coming in and out throughout the night. Ya know, the fewer eyes the better? Anyway, he had a good night, stirred a few times, maybe nightmares or something, his condition is stable and the anti-biotics are doing a fine job of fighting the infection. He's hydrated better now, so I've slowed the 'IV' drip. I've also lowered the sedative, so he'll start coming around sometime today or maybe even tonight. Since you're here, Jane, I think I'll go freshen up and get a change of clothes. And I think I'm hungry."
Jane simply told Jill, "Go. I'll be here the rest of the morning." Just before Jill opened the door, Jane added, "And if you would, only have your most trusted nurses coming in to look on him. You know, the fewer eyes the better." Jill nodded her head, opened the door and left the room.
Jane looked down on the boy lying in the bed, breathing deeply and steadily. She reached up and moved some of his hair off his forehead, before she softly told him, "It's going to be okay, Toby. I'm going to see you receive the best care possible. And you don't have to worry, no one is going to hurt you while you're under my care. If only you could tell me who did this to you so I could let some friends know."
Jane sat back in the chair, laid her head back against the chair back, and reflected about everything up to this point. Jane was fighting with her monster, the one who wanted to scorch earth the ones who was responsible for everything, when she felt a hand on her right arm. Looking down, she saw Toby's right hand was lightly gripping her right arm. Just above a whisper, in a halting voice, Toby said, "My... brother... did... this... to... me. I... tried... hiding... from... him... but... he... always... found... me. It... started... when... mom... left... him... beating... me. Water... please... Aunt... Jane." Jane got out of the chair and walked around to the other side of the bed. Picked up the pitcher sitting on the patient cart, poured water in a cup sitting nearby, put a stray in the cup, and walked back around the bed and sat in the chair. She held the cup close enough so Toby could drink through the straw, and when he'd had enough, pulled back and told her, "Thank you, that makes my throat feel better."
Jane sat the glass on the table behind her, then asked Toby, "How long has this been going on, Toby? And why, Toby"
"May I have more water please, Aunt Jane?" Toby asked, then took another forth of the glass of water when Jane held the straw up to his lips. "Thank you, Aunt Jane." Jane watched the boy laying in front of her, on his left side, organize his thoughts before he started his story. "I was thirteen when he started beating me. At first, it was just with his hands, slapping me around and punching me. After a few weeks, he started using a belt, a cord, anything flexible. He also started burning me. Said he wanted to remind me who was in charge. Dad never found out because I was told it'd be worse if I ever told dad. He was always careful to hit me where it wouldn't show. He told me I was going to help him make some money, but didn't say how until he took me to meet a man and a lot of other kids. Those kids didn't look any better than I did. Anyway, we all found out we were going to shoplift items from the department stories in the area, and the man was going to teach us how to do it. One kid, a boy, I remember it being, told the man he wasn't going to do it, and the man walked up to the boy and punched the boy in the face. After the boy fell to the ground, the man picked him up by the neck of his tee-shirt and punched him two more times. Then the man stood up and asked who else didn't want to help. None of us said anything. Aunt Jane, I think he might have killed the boy. May I have more water please, Aunt Jane?"
After Toby drank what water was left in the glass, Jane got up, walked around the bed and refilled the glass, before returning to the chair. "Thank you, Aunt Jane." As Jane watched, Toby slowly reached down and pressed the bedside call button, telling the nurse who answered that he had to pee. In a few moments, the same nurse who'd shown Jane to Toby's hospital room, entered the room.
"How's he doing?" She asked Jane, as she lowered the bed railing on the left side of the bed. Jane nodded her head several times before the nurse said to Toby, "Toby, I'm going to roll you to your right side, so I can help you get out of bed, okay?"
Toby replies with, "Okay," as the nurse gently rolled Toby onto his left side. Toby let out a loud hiss as his back came into contact with the mattress, but the pain was brief as the nurse didn't let his back touch the mattress but for a moment. Then the nurse helped him to sit up, eliciting another hiss until she helped him stand. She let Toby lean on her, as she pulled the stand with the monitor and 'IV' bag along with them. When they were in the restroom, she told Toby she was going to stand behind him and help support him while he peed. Toby smiled, then told her, "And so you don't embarrass me by seeing my penis."
The nurse laughed before telling Toby, "Yes, so I don't embarrass you by seeing your penis. But you do understand I've seen those organs before, being a nurse?"
Toby laughed and replied with, "Yes, I realize that," and let out a sigh as he emptied his bladder into the toilet. "Oh, that feels so much better. Thank you for helping me." After flushing the toilet, he turned to his left, since the stand with everything on it was to his right, and took two steps to the sink where he washed and dried his hands before being helped back to his bed. A few hisses and Toby was in bed but lying on his right side this time, causing Jane to move the chair around to the other side of the bed. Continuing with his story, he told Jane, "And so the man started showing us how to shoplift and not get caught. We'd get yelled at for a while, but then he'd start slapping us or punching us when we messed up doing dummy shoplifting. Then we were divided up into teams of three and told go to work. He also told us if we came back with less than $500 worth of merchandise, we'd regret it." Jane had moved the glass of water around with her, and this time Toby reached up with his left had, took the glass and drank almost half the water in the glass.
Jane watched as Toby shuddered, then heard, "Aunt Jane, I watched that man tie some of the kids between two poles and beat them until they passed out. Girls too. I wanted to run away, but with my brother and his beatings, I was scared. They gave us time off, as they called it, and when that happened, I'd go to my Aunt Terri's place. She was really angry over what my brother was doing to me, and about the shoplifting I was being forced to do. But as she said, it'd just be my word, our word, against two adults. And since we were just 'kids', no one would take us seriously. She helped me be myself, and lied to my brother more than once when he called looking for me. When dad was around, my brother had other things to do, work was what he told dad. Aunt Jane, if dad had found out what my brother was do to me and the shoplifting, my brother would have gladly confessed everything to the police after dad was through with him. It was dad and Terri who taught me to think of others before my self. To treat others like I wanted to be treated. And I couldn't do anything to stop my brother or that man because no one would have listened to me."
"Then I got arrested, along with the two boys I was with. I was granted bail, and bailed out by my brother, who took me directly to that man. I got slapped around by that man and punched hard in the stomach, before I was dragged and secured between those two pole. The man told my brother, since I was his brother, he'd get the honor of punishing me. I don't know how many time I was hit with the belt thing my brother used, or on my legs with that cord, or how many time he used a paddle on my butt, because I passed out after the first three hits. And you've seen the results of my brother's work." Toby had just been talking, not looking at anything in particular. Now he looked directly into Jane's eyes and told her, "Thank you for getting me medical attention. If I had gone on my own, or with Terri, there would have been all sorts of questions. Questions that might have resulted in more beatings like the last one I received. Or maybe worse, like that one boy."
"And Charles," Jane asked. "Why'd you involve him?" Toby gave Jane a questioning look until Jane told him, "The boy you saw at Taylor's the day you were caught shoplifting. The boy you lied about being involved in the shoplifting."
Jane watched as Toby searched his memory, then said, "Oh, him. His name is Charles?" He watched as Jane silently nodded her head. "I was angry then, Aunt Jane. Angry I couldn't stop my brother from beating me. Angry I couldn't do anything when that man beat one of the other kids, or go to the police or my dad. When I saw him standing there at the jewelry counter, I became jealous, knowing he could do anything he wanted and go anywhere he wanted. I lied about him and I was wrong. I let my hate control me and took it out one someone else, contrary to what I was taught."
"Do you know that man's name, Toby?"
"No, ma'am, my brother only called him Mister. That's all he'd let us call him."
"Can you describe him, Toby? How tall he is, the color of his hair? Was he a big man, medium tall, short? Was he skinny, medium build of burly?"
"Well," Toby said, thinking back to the man. "He had gray or white hair, down to his ears, and full. He didn't have a gut, but he wasn't overly muscled. I'd say he was maybe five ten to six feet tall. He was maybe in his late 50's or early to mid 60's. And his voiced dripped syrup, until you made him mad, then it took on a really cold tone. He always wore a suit and tie, with some type of pin on the right lapel. I didn't want to see too much of him after what he'd done to some of the other kids."
There was a light knocked on the room door, before Jill entered, looking much better and a lot more relaxed. "Ah, I see my patient is awake. How are you feeling Toby? How's the pain?"
Toby looked at Jill then at Jane, who nodded her head. Somehow, even without the interaction the two were scheduled to have, Jane saw that Toby trusted her. "I'm feeling much better...,"
"Oh, sorry. I'm doctor Jill Peters, I'm your doctor."
"The pain isn't as bad, unless I'm on my back. The nurse helped me to the restroom, and getting out of bed was a bit rough. How long have I been here in the hospital?"
"We brought you in yesterday afternoon, after Aunt Jane called me and I saw the condition of your wounds." Jane saw Jill so wanted to know what happened to him and who beat him like this, but caught Jane looking at her and slowly shaking her head no. So instead, she told him, "We'll see how you're doing tomorrow and decide then if you can go with Aunt Jane. But for now, try and get all the rest you can. Someone will be with you through the night, in case you need anything. Okay?"
When Jill stopped talking, Toby thanked her just as a nurse came into the room with Toby's lunch. "Well, I best get home to check on the girls. Jill, you'll call me if need be. And Toby, you call me if you need me to bring anything." Both told Jane they would, as Jane waited for the nurse to clear the door before leaving the room. Once in the hallway, she reached into her purse and turned off the small recorder she'd brought with her. Now she had to figure out how to get it to Jeb and Ruth without it being intercepted by the wrong people. What Toby told Jane was a box car full of dynamite. And her monster begged her to let it have a few minutes with the brother. Jane tamped it down again. She'd let the right people dish out the punishment.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
As Jane drove back home, she played one thought after another, trying to decide the safest way to send the recording to Ruth and Jeb. As she thought through what the police had likely been told by those kids, the only thing those higher up in this whole mess would be worried about was saving their own hides. Toby's brother would believe Toby wouldn't say anything because of how savagely he'd been beaten. And 'the man' would do even more to keep from being caught -- maybe he's the one killing the kids, was Jane's last thought as the answer to her 'how' question answered itself. She'd just send it to Ruth attached to an email. They'd have no reason to monitor anything going into the Courthouse, and they didn't know where Jane lived, so wouldn't have anyway to monitor what came and went from her home. Plus, she could rename the file to something about a receipt.
When Jane parked her car at her home, she realized she didn't remember the drive home, her mind was so distracted with the 'how' problem. She laid her head on the steering wheel and started shaking, realizing it could all have come to an end that day.
After collecting herself, vowing to never again drive home by habit, she left her car, locked it and slowly walked up to her house. The door opened, and there stood Francis, Charlotte, and Marie, all having worried looks on their faces. "Well... ," Marie asked, "how is he?"
Walking past the three, Jane told her, "I'll tell you in a moment," just before entering the study and walking straight to her desk. She unlocked the computer, opened a drawer and took out a cord and a thumb drive, opened her purse and removed the recorder. She plugged one end of the cord to the recorder and the other end into one of the USB ports on the computer. She brought up a program, ran it and followed the directions on the screen. She hit record in the program and play on the recorder and watched as Toby's recorded words were gathered by the program in a waveform audio file. When the recorder reached the end of Toby's recorded conversation, the recorder stopped as did the recording of the program. Jane pulled the cord out of the USB slot and replaced it with the thumb drive and put a copy of the recording onto the drive. She then had the program save the initial waveform file to an encrypted file after opening the file with a password. Closing the computer program and removing the other end of the cord from the recorder, Jane put the cord back in the drawer where it was kept, and unlocking the secure drawer, she opened it and placed the recorder in the drawer before closing the drawer and locking it.
Getting up from the chair, Jane walked over to the rolling ladder that was stored near the front wall of the study. Rolling it over to a position that allowed her to access books on the eighth shelf, she climbed the ladder and removed what looked like a book titled, 'The World According to Hermies'. If someone was standing on the floor and looking at all the books housed in those ten shelves, 'The World According to Hermies' would look like any other book. However, when Jane removed that supposed book, two more supposed books on either side came away with the 'Hermies' book, revealing a safe behind the fake books. Turning the dial, Jane entered the combination before she then held her left thumb and right little finger up to a finger print reader. Hearing a click coming from the safe, Jane pulled the lever on the safe up, opened the door, and placed the thumb drive inside the safe before closing the door and spinning the dial. She replaced the fake books, climbed down the ladder, returned it to its stored location, walked back over to the desk, sat down and opened an email program on the computer.
Ruth,
I'm sorry for being so late getting you the recipe you wanted for the dish I fixed several weeks ago. It's been hectic here of late and this is the first chance I've had to sit down and get it to you. I think you'll really enjoy it again if you just follow the directions.
Jane
Jane then went into the encrypted file, made a copy of the waveform file, now renamed as the name of a recipe, went back into the email program, attached it to the email to Ruth and hit send. She then deleted the copy and closed the encrypted file. She then opened a new email to Jeb, and hoped he'd understand her message to him.
Jeb,
I'm sorry for the delay in getting back to you about that recipe for the dish I fixed some weeks ago. I had decided to send you a copy of the recipe, but had promised Ruth a copy some weeks before you asked for one. Since you both enjoyed the dish so much, and I did promise Ruth a copy first, I thought you could contact her and get a copy of the recipe from her. I'm glad you liked the one I made, and I'm sure it will taste much better being made by your own hands.
Jane
Jane reread the email to Jeb, making sure it didn't belie any of the real topic it was about. Satisfied, she hit send and closed the program. She leaned her elbows on the desk, putting her head in her hands she wondered if that recording was going to put an end to this whole verdammtes Durcheinander. Sitting up, she locked the computer, picked up her purse and walked out of the study and into the arms of Marie, Francis, and Charlotte. It was a group hug, and she laid her head on Marie's shoulder and cried. All of the pent up tension, anger, all of the stress she'd felt since Charles arrived, washed out of her at that moment. Marie motioned to the girls to release Jane and Marie walked Jane down the short hall to her bedroom. The girls returned to the library and their lessons, even though their minds weren't really on their lessons, they worked on them anyway.
Two nondescript men walked into the Kingston hospital. There was nothing outstanding about them. Both wore well used running shoes, casual button up shirts, jeans, and sport coats, something a lot of men wore. Their hair styles were, well, ordinary. Cut so their hair fell just above their ears, but full. Supplies fell off a cart a nurse was pushing, and both men rushed to help her pick them up and put them back on the cart, laughing as they exchanged shorts quips about something always causing delays. The nurse thanked the men, both men told her, "You're welcome," before walking on to the reception desk.
Reaching the reception desk, the woman behind the desk asked, "May I help you gentlemen?"
The man on the left smiled, then said, "Um, hi. My name is Mat Camber and this is my brother Tony. Our nephew ran away from home and we've been checking with the police, sheriff, and hospitals to see if he was arrested or hurt and needed medical attention. Do you have a Toby Camber as a patient here at your hospital? His parents are worried sick."
The fact that people were looking for Toby had been discovered days before, and the hospital administrator had a meeting with all of the hospital staff and explained what she'd been told and then activated their security measure which was a simple page for a doctor who didn't work at the hospital. She explained if/when that doctor was paged, the staff was to continue with their tasks, not reacting to the page in any way. It took a few drills before everyone finally got over reacting when doctor Blackmore was paged. The drills were also coordinated with the police department, monitoring their arrival time at the hospital. And when Mat asked about Toby Camber, their drills suddenly became very real.
"Okay, you said Toby Camber, that's C-a-m-b-e-r, right?" When Mat nodded, she then said, "Just a moment, let me look in my system." As she appeared to be looking in the system, she suddenly said, "OH, SHIT!!" Turning to the woman on her left she asked her, "Joyce, I forgot, would you please page doctor Blackmore and say he's urgently needed in from 485. I'm so gonna be in trouble for forgetting to do that." She then turned back to Mat and told him, "I'm terribly sorry, sir, for the interruption. Let's see, ah, no, I don't show a Toby Camber in my system. However, sometimes it takes a while for my system to be updated. If you can wait a few moments, I'll call our Records Department and have them check."
***"Doctor Blackmore, you are urgently needed in room 485. Doctor Blackmore, you are urgently needed in room 485***
When the page for doctor Blackmore went out over the hospital PA system, Mark and Steve, the hospital's armed security guards, were finishing up their lunch in the cafeteria. Hearing the page, both calmly stood up, bussed their trays, then took the back elevator to the third floor. Reaching the floor, both took a back way to room 325 and walked right into the room without knocking. When the door opened, Jill and Toby's attention was instantly drawn to the movement of the door. Jill knew of the security word, but hadn't heard anything while in the room. She asked one question, "They've called doctor Blackmore, haven't they."
Mark and Steve had seen a lot in their 20 years with the military. They'd even emptied a lot of sand from their boots a time or two during that time. They were calm but all business and Steve told Jill, "Yes, ma'am, they've called doctor Blackmore. And Mark and I are here to make sure whoever it is doesn't succeed."
Toby looked at Steve as he spoke. "Succeed in doing what," he asked, the sudden realization striking him. "They're here to kill me, aren't they?"
Mark walked over to the bed, ruffled Toby's hair, then gently put a hand around the back of Toby's neck, bending down so he could look Toby in the eyes, before telling him, "They think they're going to kill you, kid. But they got that thinking all wrong. Steve is going to be right inside the bathroom and I'm going to be behind the door, back far enough so they can't see me through the crack between the door and the jamb. See, the location of your bed means they'd have to come into the room to get a clear shot at you, making sure they didn't miss. Well, when they do that, I... shoot... them. Got it?" Toby nodded his head, he was too scared to speak.
Connie had picked up the phone and dialed a number, when the call connected she told the person at the other end, "Hi, this is Connie at reception. There are two men here searching for their run away nephew. Do you have a record for a Toby Camber. That's right, C-a-m-b-e-r, Camber. Okay I'll hold." She then looked up at the two men and told them, "The records department said they'd check, but it could take several minutes. If you gentleman would want to get something from the cafeteria I'll let you know if they find anything." What the two men didn't know was going to bite them in a matter of minutes. Connie was on the line with the police department, as they'd rehearsed. And the police department was already in motion.
Mat smiled at Connie and told her, "Aw, thank you ma'am, but we're really worried about Toby, so we'll wait for as long as it takes your people to check for us."
Connie held up a finger, as though she was listening to someone on the other end of the line. "Okay, I'll tell them. Yes, I'll hold." She looked up at both men and told them that the Records Department didn't have a file for their nephew, so they were following hospital protocol and calling the nursing stations and have them do a room by room search.
It was Tony who spoke this time, saying, "Ma'am, we just gotta find Toby. So we'll wait as long as it takes ya'll to look for us."
485 was the hospital's code word for the reception area. As Connie appeared to be waiting for word from the Records Department, and the men patiently stood in front of her, a smartly dressed couple walked into the hospital, the woman carrying a bouquet of flowers. After them, two men walked into the hospital, the type, by their looks, most would frown upon. Both had scraggly hair, their jeans were torn at the knees, and their tee-shirts had seen better days. The man and woman reached the reception desk first, the man acting as though he was about to say something. Connie held up a finger in his direction, the told him, "I'll be with you in a moment, sir."
The raggedy looking men came up on the other side of Mat and Tony, and the one closest to the two men, slapped the counter, leaned in and said, "Hey, there, dudette," but never finished what he was about to say.
Connie held up a finger in his direction and said, "Sir, I'll be with you in a moment."
The other raggedy looking man said in a slurred voice, "Aw, dudette, you're killing us here."
Mat turned to the two and said in a pleasant voice, "Patience, gentlemen, have patience. It will be your turn soon."
The raggedy man who'd spoken first replied, "Sorry, man. Our friend was in motorcycle accident and we're worried about him. We didn't mean to come on so strong."
Tony smiled and put in, "Oh, man, that's rough. We understand, though. Our nephew ran away from home and everybody's sick with worry. We've been checking with the police, sheriff and hospitals, but nothing so far."
The man with the woman on the men's right chimed in with, "Oh, that's a shame. I hope you find your nephew and that he's alright."
Mat leaned past Tony and looking at the man, told him, "Thank you. We hope he's okay too."
Just then a uniformed police officer came into the hospital, helping a man who looked like he'd gone one round with a chainsaw. The man had blood on his shirt and splatters on his face, and a wrapping the length of his right arm, saturated with blood. The two walked slowly, the officer appearing to hold the man up and the man moaning as they walked. When Connie saw everyone was at the party, she said, "Sir," and that got Mat and Tony's attention long enough for the barrels of two 9mm handguns to be pressed up again the temples of Mat and Tony. The other four 9mm's were pointed directly at each men's torso.
The man with the apparent bloody arm said in a sweet voice, "Boys, if you don't want to find out the truth about the hereafter, you'll put your hands on the top your heads, with your fingers laced together and your palms facing up. And gentlemen, remember, any funny moves and you'll be dead before you hit the floor."
Two of the 9mm handguns were kept pressed against Mat and Tony's temples, as the other officers searched the two men. Tony's coat was moved out of the way when something was felt behind his back. It was a Glock 9mm. As they worked down his legs, they lifted his right pants leg and found a 32 caliber revolver in an ankle holster. When Mat was patted down, an officer reached inside Mat's sports coat to the left inside breast pocket and pulled out a silencer. His ankle holster carried a 22 caliber revolver. The man with the fake hurt arm, the Chief of Police, held up the Glock 9mm in one hand and the silencer in the other. He looked back and forth at each one, then at Mat and Tony and ask them, "Just WHAT did you boys have planned? You boys look like you're ready to kill someone. Is that so?" When Mat and Tony remained silent, the Chief told the other officers, "Chain these two up good and tight. Empty their pockets and run the seams of their clothes for anything that doesn't belong. Then get them out of here."
It was twenty minutes after both men had gotten into position that Mark's pager went off. Looking down he saw the code for the 'all clear' from the administration. "It's over, the police caught the guys. You're safe now, kid. Rest up, huh? Come on, Steve, let's let these two get some rest," Mark said just before he and Steve left Toby's hospital room.
***Thank you, Doctor Blackmore***
Thanking Doctor Blackmore over the PA was the 'all clear' signal given to everyone in the hospital. When that message went out over the PA, it was as though there was a collective sigh throughout the hospital; there were a lot of hospital staff buying coffee shortly after the announcement. And a lot of patients who didn't know anything had even happened.
But now they had a problem. If because of their arrests, Mat and Tony believed Toby was at the Kingston hospital, when they demanded their phone call, if they demanded their phone call, it would likely be to whoever was running the entire operation. And that person would likely send two more men to Kingston and those two might not be so personable. But if Mat and Tony were waiting to be processed and retrieved by several US Marshalls, and driven back to face the music, then they couldn't call anyone. And if the long-distance phone lines just happened to be down somewhere beyond Kingston?
Hearing that someone wanted to kill him really shook up Toby. After Mark and Steve left Toby's hospital room, Toby all but came apart, causing Jill to hold him until he'd calmed down. Through tear filled eyes Toby asked, "Why me? Why do they want to kill me? I don't know anything, any names, other than my brother's."
Jill shushed Toby, trying her best to calm him down. Wondering if he needed to know the truth, and deciding since he'd just been in danger, threw caution to the wind and said, "Toby, someone is killing those kids who were involved in the shoplifting ring. It's believed that by killing the kids, there'd be no one who could testify against them. Or provide the police with information. They're trying to save their own skins, Toby. They don't care about anyone else, you kids included. And believe it or not, you just might know more than you think. We have to get you out of here." Saying that, Jill added, "How are you feeling, can you walk?"
Jill saw Toby think for a moment, before he replied with, "I'm feeling a lot better, as do my legs. Yes, I think I can walk okay."
Jill pulled out her cell phone, dialed a number and then said, "Just listen. We're coming home. Get his room ready and I'll treat him there. I have to move him quickly," and cut the connection. She then picked up the handset from the room phone, dialed two numbers and said," Would you help me please?" A few moments later, the same nurse who'd helped the day before entered the room. Jill explained her plan and asked her to get Toby dressed while she pulled her car around to the ambulance bay. They'd take Toby down every back way in the hospital to the ambulance bay, where he'd get into Jill's car and she'd take him back to Jane's home. She also told the nurse, "Once we're gone, sterilize this room. Wipe everything down, clean it better than you would normally do after a patient leaves. There can't be a trace of anyone having stayed in this room."
The nurse looked over at Toby, and while he had calmed down, there was still a frightened look on his face. The nurse smiled, then told Jill, "This room will be so clean you could eat off the floor." Jill smiled, patter the nurse's shoulder, then left the room to move her car around to the ambulance bay, while the nurse started to remove the 'IV' and monitor leads from Toby. As she was helping him out of bed so she could help him get dressed, she told him, "You trust that woman, and the other woman too. That other woman will go through hell to keep you safe. And I pity anyone looking for you getting on her bad side. They might not see the next sunrise. Come on, let's get you dressed and outta here."
Jill was back just as Toby finished dressing, his wounds, though healing well, were still painful as he moved. Standing on Toby's left side, Jill gently gripped Toby's upper left arm while she let him support himself using her left forearm. As they slowly made their way to the door, the nurse was on the room phone, telling someone, "We have a room to sterilize. Get everything we need." After hanging up the phone, she stripped the bed down to the padding, took down the 'IV' bag and placed it into a Biohazard bag, and threw any paper leftovers into the trash can in the bathroom. Just after Jill and Toby left the room, two more nurses arrived, pushing a cart laden with all of the cleaning supplies they'd need to sterilize a room. They left the cart in the hallway, walked into the room, and heard, "This room has to be beyond spotless. We have to clean this room so it appears no one has ever stayed in here. Wipe down everything from top to bottom. Let's move." And with that, the three nurses went to work, finishing an hour later with a room that was cleaner than clean. A room that had the appearance of no one having stayed in the room.
Toby had been lying down for two days, so it took a bit of time for his legs to loosen up as he and Jill walked down a back corridor. As his legs loosened, he was able to walk better and faster, which helped shorten the time it took them to reach Jill's car at the ambulance bay. Whether it was fate, on purpose, or just happenstance, one of the ambulances had just returned from being serviced at an auto shop and the driver had stopped right behind the bay Jill had pulled into. So as Jill brought Toby down in the elevator and to her car, no one outside could see Toby get into the backseat of Jill's car. She had him lay down on his side on the backseat, and positioned a thick blanket between the seatback and Toby's back, so he could lean back without having to much pain. Whether it was fate, on purpose, or just happenstance, just as Jill got into the driver's seat, the ambulance parked behind her moved, allowing her to back out of the bay. Now, if anyone saw her, all they'd see was Jill Peters driving her car away from the hospital. Alone.
Jill was rather curt when she called Seasons House and talked to Jane. Telling Jane Toby had to be moved quickly, told Jane all she needed to know. Someone was after Toby. It became a mad house at Seasons House after Jill cut the connection. "MARIE, GIRLS. IN HERE NOW!" Jane yelled and all three actually came running into the living room. "Apparently someone was at the hospital looking for Toby." When the three started to speak at once, Jane held up her hand and told them, "No, they didn't get to Toby. But he has to be removed from the hospital and Jill is bringing him here. So, get his room ready. Put clean linen on his bed, make sure his room and en suite are clean, and make sure there are plenty of clean linen in the en suite. Jill will treat him here, so get her anything she needs or wants." Jane no sooner finished what she was saying than they all heard a knock at the front door.
Jane said she'd answer the door, before she walked over to the small bookcase near the front wall of the living room. There she took out a thick book, opened it and took out a 9mm handgun. Checking to make sure a round was chambered, and the safety was off, she held it down on her right side as she walked to the front door. Holding the 9mm behind her back, she looked through the peephole before quickly opening the door and letting Jill and Toby into the house. After closing the front door, and double bolting it, she called out, "Girls, please come and assist Toby." The girls showed up at once, each one on either side of Toby and helping him into the living room and over to the couch, helping him sit down. Without showing Jill the 9mm she still had behind her back, Jane used one finger to safety the 9mm, as the two women slowly walked to the living room. "How is he doing?" Jane asked Jill as she walked over to the bookcase, then revealing the 9mm as she placed it back inside the thick book.
"Much better," Jill said, as she turned to look at Toby. "Aren't you, Toby?"
Toby smiled at her and nodded his head, saying, "Yes, ma'am, much better thanks to you, Aunt Jane, Marie, and Charlotte and Francis. Yes, ma'am, much better. And thank all of you for helping me. If Judge Ruth hadn't sent me here, or if I hadn't had medical care, or if not for the hospital and police, I might be dead right now. Saying thank you doesn't seem to be enough for what everyone has done for me."
It was Jane who responded to what Toby said. "You're right, Toby, just saying thank you doesn't seem enough payment. If you want to repay all those who've helped you then make something of yourself. Don't accept what you were forced to do, take a different path. Go into a field that allows you to help others like you've been helped. Always remember. It's you who determines how you'll respond to any given situation. It's you who decided what path to take, what choices to make. It's you who can feel sorry for yourself or let this experience strengthen you and make you that much stronger as a person." Jane was kneeling before Toby now as she told him, "Don't let what was done to you jade you into thinking everyone is like your brother or those other people. Be better than that, Toby." Toby reached up and wiped a tear off Jane's cheek.
Toby smiled at Jane and softly said, "Aunt Jane, I had already planned to do all of that. But I'll need help getting into the right University. You don't by any chance know someone who'd help me, do you?" Toby asked, with a cheeky grin on his face.
Jane's face took on a serious look as she said, "Was für ein gereiztes Kind. Natürlich kenne ich jemanden, mehrere, der Ihnen helfen würde (What a petulant child. Of course I know someone, several, who would help you)."
The room was filled with laughter as Charlotte lost it, Marie lost it, Jill lost it, and Francis was a close fourth, when Toby asked, "Du gehörst doch nicht zufällig zu denen, die mir helfen würden, oder (You don't happen to be one of those people who would help me, do you?)?"
A stunned Jane just stared at Toby. "Why you cheeky little... what other languages do you speak?"
"Aunt Jane, Ich kann fließend Deutsch sprechen (I can speak German fluently). También hablo español con fluidez (I also speak Spanish fluently). Parlo italiano ma non fluentemente (I speak Italian but not fluently). E uma senhora na rua estava me ensinando português (And a lady on the street was teaching me Portuguese). Beszélek egy kicsit magyarul is (I also speak a little Hungarian). Je parle un français passable, mais ma prononciation pue (I speak passable French, but my pronunciation stinks)."
To say Jane wasn't shocked, would be like saying there wasn't any water in the ocean. Both would be wrong. Still kneeling in front of Toby, Jane turned her head to look at Marie, and did a shortened Galic shrug by lifing both hands into the air. "And none of this was on his school record! What else did they leave off?" Jane turned back to Toby, a serious look blanketing her face as she told him, "You, young man, are going to take some of my tests. We'll see just how stupid that school you've been attending has been."
Toby smiled at Jane before saying, "I love you too, Aunt Jane. But if you don't mind, this couch is comfortable and doesn't hurt me as much when I sit down. May I do the tests here?"
Jane's throat suddenly became restricted after what Toby said to her. Nodding her head, least she lose it if she spoke, she stood up, turned, looked at the four watching her and made a shooing motion to three standing there. Marie, Francis, and Charlotte had been so entranced by what Toby had said, they'd simply frozen in place. With Jane's gesture, though, the three were off like a missile. Without saying a word, Jane walked to the study, opening and closing the door behind her, and returned a moment later with a stack of papers, several pencils, and a bed tray. She had regained her composure and upon reaching Toby and told him, "Here are the tests. When you finish one, place it off to your left, face down, and continue with the next one. Inform me when you are completely finished. Do you have any questions, young man?"
"Yes, ma'am, just one."
"What is your question, young man?"
With a deadpan expression on his face, Toby asked, "Where is your bathroom?"
Jill started laughing, at Toby's expression, the question that hadn't occurred to Jane, and Jane herself. Jane looked at Toby with a stunned expression on her face, she'd been expecting a question about the tests. Not the location of the bathroom. She blinked a few times, looked up as she started slowly shaking her head, turned and walked off. As she passed Jill, she told her, "You'll pay for this," and continued until she was in the study.
Jill laughed even harder with what Jane told her, but calmed down enough to tell Toby, "Come on, Toby. I'll help you to the bathroom," still chuckling as she helped Toby off the couch and to the downstairs bathroom. She asked him if she needed to help him so he didn't fall, but he declined her help, telling her he believed he'd be okay. Jill stayed by the bathroom door, just in case.
Toby came out of the bathroom and with Jill's help, made his way back to the couch. Jill helped him sit down, then watched as he positioned the bed tray, set the tests off to his right, and began on the top test. It wasn't long before Marie and the girls returned downstairs, having gotten Toby's bedroom ready for him. Marie sent the girls to set the table and get things ready for lunch. Jill was still chuckling to herself, as a curious Marie ask why she was chuckling. Jill waved Marie into the dining room, so as not to disturb Toby, then told her. "After Toby's language demonstration, Jane told Toby he was going to take Jane's tests. Then she asked him if he had any questions when she brought the test to him and explained what to do with the test as he finished one. She expected him to ask about the tests, but instead, he asked her the location of the bathroom. And then, stunned, she walked off shaking her head." Finishing the story, Jill started chuckling again. Then told Marie, "Then as she walked by me, while I was still laughing, she told me I'd pay later for laughing."
Marie was chuckling herself, seeing the humor in what had occurred. Then asked Jill, "Where is Jane now?"
Jill simply said, "In the study."
Marie nodded her head, turned and walked to the study door. She opened it, stepped inside, and closed the door behind her. After turning around, she spied Jane once again pacing the study from one end to the other. It wasn't hard for Marie to see that Jane was angry, but she had a feeling it wasn't at anyone in the house. She thought she knew why and proceeded with, "You're angry with the administration at the school Toby attends, aren't you? You're angry because of the stupidity of not seeing what a fine mind that boy has, aren't you? And you want to go to that and administer your version of a wakeup call, right?"
Jane had covered her pacing from one end of the study to the other in about three seconds. When Marie started asking her questions, Jane's time increased to about ten seconds. And when Marie asked her last question, Jane stopped dead in her tracks in front of Marie. "Marie, I would like to visit both schools. I would then like to take those in charge of the school and the curriculum and explain how to run not only the school, but the curriculum as well. I would like to pull every bored student out of both schools and find out if they're just bored or bored because the curriculum doesn't challenge them. If it's the latter, I'd pull them out of those two schools and give them a curriculum that would challenge the hell out of them. We would teach them as we teach our girls, refusing to accept anything but their best work. And if every boy had to become one of our girls to make him try his best, then by damn that's what we'd do."
Marie watched as Jane ran down, which, to Marie, was a good thing. Jane had a habit of holding things within her until she reached the exploding point. Now, she was exploding, getting it out of her system. When Jane had gone quiet, Marie told her, "Chère, you and I can't take care of the whole world. We can only take care of our corner of it. We do what we do with those sent to us. That's all we can do, unless you want to open our own school, and make it mandatory the boys attend presenting as girls? You and I both know what ruckus that would cause with those who find it wrong, those who don't ever try to understand why it's done and what results we've achieved. So we do as we are doing, one boy at a time. Yes, some boys just go through the motions and leave us not exactly as we'd wish, but nonetheless, better than they think. Chère, look at those with us right now. Look at the changes of one and the help the other has given not only to the one but others as well. And think back at the questions he posed to you, questions he'd never have contemplated had he never been with us. And you have to admit, it has been good for him because it's caused him to look at himself. Questioning if he himself has done those things he's experienced recently." Marie walked over to Jane and pulled her into a hug. "Chère, I know it hurts you to see those schools waste brilliant minds because of socialization. And it's absolutely ridiculous. But don't make more worry for yourself beyond the worry you already carry. I don't want to lose a dear friend so early."
The two women held each other for some time, reenergizing the other. It was Jane who broke their hug first, saying, "Merci, ma chère et douce amie. Je peux toujours compter sur toi pour me redresser."
There was a knock on the study door before it opened, and the women heard, "Hey, do you two plan on starving use out here?" Jane and Marie turned to see the smiling face of Jill's head peering around the study door. The two looked at each other, smiled, turned back to the waiting Jill, and stuck out their tongues at her. That set Jill laughing again, as she removed her head and closed the door.
"The natives are restless, I better go and get lunch ready," Marie told Jane, before kissing her on the forehead, turning and walking out of the study.
Memories sped through Jane's mind, too fast to examine a single one. They were from her being a headmistress at an all girls school, to the boys she'd helped and the ones she couldn't, until right now. Marie was right. She could only do what she could do now, where she was at the moment. And by God she was going to do the best she could. Leaving the study, Jane checked on Toby. She could see that he was almost halfway through the test she'd given him, just by looking at the pile of tests he'd completed and the ones left to do. Jane got his attention with, "Toby, do you feel well enough to join us at the dining room table for lunch?"
Toby looked up from the math test he was working, looking at Jane and seeming to access his condition. "I think so Aunt Jane. Would you have anything soft I can sit on, my butt is still a bit sore?"
Still looking at Jane, Jane replies with, "Yes I do, Toby." Then she shocked Toby with, JILL! YOUR PATIENT NEEDS YOU! Not only did Jill come flying out of the kitchen but so did Marie, Francis and Charlotte. Jane always punished anyone who shouted in her house, and here she'd done it herself.
"Tante Marie," Francis began. "Isn't there punishment for anyone shouting in the house?" Jane looked smug after hearing what Francis asked.
"Oui, chère, there is. But you have to remember, this is Jane's house and she makes the rules." Then giving Jane a stink eye added, "And she can break those same rules, whether it sets a good example or not." It was then Charlotte and Francis' turn to roll their eyes, look up to the ceiling, throw up their hands, before turning and going back into the kitchen. That caused the three women to chuckle.
Author's Note:Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Toby had set the bed tray aside, as Jill walked over to him, helping him to get off the couch as Jane had gone to get a soft pillow for him to sit on at the dining room table. Jane was rather surprised when Marie sat down at the table instead of helping bring out their meal. She gave Marie a look, only to have Marie hold up a finger, indicating she'd have to wait for her answer. Jane had been so involved with everything around the events of the day that she only now realized the wonderful aroma permeating the house. Her wait to learn the cause of that aroma wasn't long in coming, as first Francis then Charlotte came out of the kitchen, each carrying two plates of food. Francis placed her plates in front of Jane and Marie, while Charlotte placed her plates in front of Jill and Toby. Francis had gone back into the kitchen after serving Jane and Marie and returned with the remaining two plates of food.
After Charlotte and Francis had sat down, they again watched as Toby momentarily bowed his head. Jane waited, then asked, "Is this what I think it is, Miss Thorton? Huevos Rancheros, made with the correct ingredients? With just a touch of 'heat'?
Jane saw ideas play across Charlotte's face, frowning when the one Charlotte thought to use, but the thought died when Charlotte saw the expression on Jane's face. Charlotte chuckled, then said, "Yes, Aunt Jane. This is indeed Huevos Rancheros, made with all of the correct ingredients. And yes, with a touch of 'heat'. And yes, I removed the seeds from the jalapeños, no proper chef would add them to a dish like this." Charlotte actually smirked, earning her a stink eye from Jane. Jane's stink eye had the desired affect, and a proper young lady reemerged. Charlotte mouthed, 'sorry' and earned a head nod from Jane. Charlotte had a feeling she'd pushed things a bit to far, and might regret it.
Everyone waited for Jane to take the first bite. They watched as Jane's expression went through several emulations before she told Charlotte, "Ahhh, finally, the real thing. The tortillas are still hot but supple. The egg is at the right consistency. The refried beans not dry but not to watery. And the pico de gallo, wonderful, with just the right balance of heat and the flavor from the lime juice. My compliments to the chef, Miss Thorton, and you must teach THIS recipe to Marie. For I expect to see THIS recipe again at this table.
Marie shook her head, looked at Charlotte and said, "So eine Drama-Queen, unsere Jane. Man könnte sagen, sie gehört auf eine Bühne. " Turning to look at Jane, Marie asked, "Dürfen wir jetzt unsere Mahlzeiten einnehmen, Eure Majestät?"
Jane gave Marie her best stink eye, which did no good, since Marie was immune to them. Instead, Jane told her, "Sie stehen kurz vor der Änderung Ihres Wohnsitzes. Wenn Sie an dieser Leichtfertigkeit festhalten, wird sie zur Realität."
Hearing what Jane said, Charlotte looked between the two women, seeing a serious look on Jane's face and a blank stare on Marie's. Toby caught what he thought was tension between the two women, and Francis was trying to decipher what Aunt Jane just said. Jill, on the other hand, was doing her very best not to start laughing because of the looks on the two girls' faces and Toby's reaction. She had seen this act so many time before that it never got old, especially because of the reaction of those who didn't know the two women.
"Ja Ja Ja. Du sagst das immer wieder, aber hier bin ich, immer noch deine Allround-Haushälterin (Yes Yes Yes. You keep saying this, but here I am, still your all-around housekeeper)," Marie shot back, before a smirk appeared on the face of both woman. That's when Jill's willpower failed and she started laughing out loud.
Charlotte looked at the laughing Jill, then at Aunt Jane, then Marie. It was only then the smirks on the two women's faces, along with Jill laughing, registered with Charlotte. She let out a groan, closed her eyes as she slowly shook her head, before whispering in a sardonic voice, "Oh, gads."
Even though it had been a whisper, what Charlotte said wasn't lost on Jane, especially since she saw the gestures that accompanied it. "Yes, Miss Thorton? You have something to say to the rest of us?"
Charles always knew when he'd stepped into it in a big way, and this time it was no different. He looked at Jane, then Marie, then Jill, seeing the 'you stepped into it big time' look on their faces. If she told Aunt Jane, 'nothing,' Jane would persist that she heard Charlotte say something. If she told Aunt Jane what she realized and what she thought of it, Aunt Jane would surely assign her a writing assignment. She was in a no win situation. A damned if she does and damned if she didn't. Charlotte rolled the dice and they came up snake-eyes. "Um... I, a, realized that you and Marie were just bantering with each other, Aunt Jane."
"But that wasn't what you'd planned to say about our banter, was it, Miss Thorton?"
Marie and Jill had clamped there hands over their mouths, each enjoying watching Charlotte squirm under Jane's gaze. They watched, keeping their laughs under control for the moment. "Um... no Aunt Jane, it wasn't." Charlotte thought to herself, 'in for a penny, in for a pound,' before saying, "J'allais dire, tu aurais dû être sur scène.."
Jane kept her steady gaze on Charlotte, who realized the pile she'd stepped in was clear over her head. Jill and Marie were on the verge of laughing out loud from watching Charlotte squirm. "I see, Miss Thorton. So you believe I'd have made an excellent actress, Miss Thorton?"
Jane saw the decision on Charlotte's face, the one that said she had pulled her courage together, as she told Jane, "No Aunt Jane. You wouldn't have been an excellent actress. You'd have been a great actress."
Jane knew Charles would sometimes shy away from making a decision to do something for fear of the consequences. She used this play with Marie as a way to force Charles to make a decision and engage, even though there might be consequences. "Well, thank you for that confidence, Miss Thorton. But isn't your food getting cold?" Jane just smiled as she saw Charlotte realize she'd been played again. And watched as Charlotte shake her head, before picking up her fork and begin eating. Marie and Jill couldn't hold back any longer and started laughing, watching as Charlotte turned a lovely shade of red.
Everyone complimented Charlotte as they ate. Jill so loved what she was eating that she asked Charlotte to give her the recipe. When their main meal was finished, Francis and Charlotte collected everyone's plate, surprising Jane and Marie when Francis told them, "Dessert will be out in a minute." When the girls came out of the kitchen, each was carrying a try with three bowls. Francis sat a bowl down in front of Jane, Marie, and Jill. While Charlotte sat her bowls down in front of Toby and where she and Francis sat. When Francis returned the trays to the kitchen, and returned, she stood behind her seat, and told the assembled group, "This is Arroz Con Leche, Mexican rice pudding. We hope you enjoy it." She and Charlotte then sat down and began eating their dessert. Jill once again asked for a recipe.
When their meal was finally over, the girls asked to be excused, as did Toby. Jane excused Toby but told the girls, "This was a passable meal, ladies. I expect your next meal to be even better." Jill and Marie bit their tongues as the watched the expressions on the two girls' faces go from pride because of what they'd done for Jane and Marie, to shock at hearing they'd have to fix another meal. Jane then excused the girls, as Jill helped Toby leave the table and walked with him back to the couch. Despite the girls being the chefs, Marie left the table and went into the kitchen. Jane left the table and went into the study, wanting to check for any faxes or emails she needed to see.
Jane sat down at her desk in the study, unlocked the computer just as the fax machine chimed, indicating a fax was ready to be printed. Jane stood up, walked to the fax machine, entered a code, and waited while the fax machine printed out the fax. Taking the printed fax off the machine, she sat back down and began reading.
From: Jeb Thorton, et al.
To: Jane Thompson
Re: More Arrests Made and a shooting victim
Jane,
More arrests have been made, only this time those arrested have been adults. You may remember Don Obler and James Conner, Obler being the ex-manager at the Taylor's where this all started for Charles? And James Conner, the security man at Taylor's who Charles put into the hospital with several broken bones? Both were arrested, after it was discovered they were living well above their means. One of the things tipping off the police, once they started into the kids statements, was the car Obler was driving, the cost of which was well above what his yearly salary could buy. And Conner, car, home and vacation home, items his yearly salary couldn't possibly pay for. But they aren't the only chief store employees to be arrested. Several managers, assistant managers, and bookkeepers were arrested from those department stories where the shopliftings took place. Every one of these people were living well above what they earned in a year. And the police are really putting pressure on these people, threatening to put everything on these people if they didn't tell everything they knew. So far, they're all sitting in holding cells, sweating it out.
Sadly, there's been another shooting. This time the victim was an adult, possibly shot for the same reason the kids were killed. Two police officers were patrolling the warehouse district and found him lying outside a warehouse door, apparently trying to get help for himself. One of the officers called for an ambulance as the other officer searched the man, trying to find any identification he might be carrying. Jane, it was Tylor Camber, Toby's brother. He was shot three times, his pulse was weak, and we were told he'd lost a lot of blood. But he was still alive and they rushed him to the hospital and directly into emergency surgery. Right now, he's in recovery, in serious but guarded condition. None of the bullets hit any vital organs, but because of the blood loss, they're keeping an alertful eye on him. He's being kept sedated, to give his body a chance to recover and to keep him for thrashing about until his body has recovered. When he is taken off the sedatives, he isn't going anywhere, as the police have arrested him and cuffed him to the bed rail.
While reading this fax, you may wonder why he was being sought, since he was smarter and didn't live above his means. Several statements from the kids caused the police investigators to start checking bank accounts. His account was one of several that had been flagged by the bank as suspicious. While he wasn't living above his means, he was saving above his means. A guy working for $20 an hour has a hard time explaining how he's able to deposit $5000 into his bank account each week. If he makes it through the next several days, the police will ask him that question, and like the department store staff arrested, they'll threatened to lay everything on his shoulders if he doesn't talk to them. He is going to prison, how long is up to him.
I'll keep you informed when we hear anything more. Give our love to Charles.
Regards,
Jeb
Jane reread the fax twice more, looking for anything Jeb might be eluding too but didn't say. Unlocking the secure drawer, and opening it, she put that fax into the drawer, closed it and relocked it. She sat there with her head back, resting on the chair back, wondering how Toby was going to take hearing that his brother had been shot, had undergone surgery, and was in serious but guarded condition. She also wondered why the good ones had to walk through hell during their lives. Setting her resolve, Jane pushed the chair back, stood up, and walked out of the study with a purpose.
The girls had been directed by Marie to return to their lessons in the library. Jill had to leave for an appointment with one of her patients. Marie was sitting in one of the two easy chairs in the living room, reading a book and keeping an eye on Toby. As Jane walked into the living room, she saw that Toby had fallen asleep, with a piled of completed tests lying to his left. The bed tray had been moved to the floor and a blanket had been placed over him, likely by Marie. Marie looked up from the book she was reading, saw Jane's face, stood up and motioned towards the kitchen; they could monitor Toby from the kitchen monitor. Once the two women were in the kitchen, and the kitchen monitor was active and the living room on the screen, Marie made Jane sit down at the kitchen table and made each of them a mug of tea. After setting a mug before Jane, she sat opposite Jane in order to keep an eye on Toby by way of the monitor.
Marie had been with Jane since the beginning, and knew how to read her. Asking, "What is it, chère? What news have you received?"
Jane took a sip of her tea, sat it back down on the kitchen table, played with it, rotating it where it sat, picked it up, took another sip, sighed deeply, and told Marie everything. "They've made more arrests, adults this time. That Obler moron and the security guard, Conner, from the Taylor's where Charles encountered his troubles. Managers and assistant managers from other department stores were also arrested. Even some of the staff were involved, and were arrested. The fools were living above their means. Obler had a car his yearly salary couldn't begin to afford. And Conner, car, house, vacation home, what a fool. Some of the statements given by the kids led to these arrests, and resulted in forensic accountants looking into banking accounts. One in particular."
Jane once again looked down at her mug, played with it again. Picking it up and taking another sip, she continued with, "A patrol car was checking warehouses in the warehouse district and found a man lying outside one of the warehouses. He'd been shot three times, still alive, but in a serious condition because of blood loss. One of the officers called for an ambulance while her partner searched the man, looking for identification." Once again, Jane looked down at the mug in front of her, rotating it back and forth.
Marie waited a moment, then asked, "Who was he chère? Is he related to someone we have here with us?"
Jane nodded her head, then in a small voice said, "He's Toby's brother, Tylor. He was taken to the hospital and into emergency surgery. He's in serious but guarded condition at the moment. Doctors say if he makes it through the next few days, then his chances of a full recovery are excellent. His main problem is the blood loss he suffered, none of the three bullets hit any vital organs. They were looking for him because they couldn't understand how a man making $20 an hour could deposit $5000 a week into his bank account. The most he could have made a week, without overtime, and before taxes were taken out, was $800 a week. Take out taxes, and well, you see why they wanted to find him."
"And you're worried how Toby will take the news, given his own condition. How would you feel, chère, if someone did to you what was done to Toby? He isn't Charles, at least we don't know if he is. He may forgive his brother, or he may curse him. No matter his reaction, he has the right to know. And no matter how he reacts, you're going to hate yourself for needing to tell him, aren't you?"
Jane nodded her head, replying, "Yes... yes I am. But he does deserve to know, that is beyond doubt."
Marie reached across the table and took Jane's hands in her own. "Chère, nothing about this whole situation is normal. One boy was falsely accused, another savagely beaten into submission and being hunted. This is not our normal way of dealing with our girls. We've not had boys at the level of Charles or Toby, or even Francis as they are at the moment. Why, Frank would still be the lackadaisical boy he was before Charlotte came. But look at him now. Look how far he's come. That's what we've worked for in the past, and hoped for. Not a falsely accused boy and one in Toby's condition and situation. Remember the past successes, and failures, and don't dwell on a situation that's out of our hands. As I have told you many times before, "Nous ne pouvons faire que ce que nous pouvons faire. Ne vous attardez pas sur ces choses que nous ne pouvons pas contrôler."
Jane squeezed Marie's hands and smiled at her, before hearing, "Now, go check on the girls. I'll go back into the living room and keep an eye on Toby. Jill said she'd return after taking care of her patient appointments. Go... shoo!"
Jane squeezed Marie's hands one more time, before releasing them, picking up her mug and finishing her tea. She stood up from the kitchen table and walked out of the kitchen, heading to the library to check on the girls. Marie watched her go, very tempted to pick up the phone and call an old friend. A friend who could find the head of this whole monster. Whether the monster would be delivered alive would depend on that person. But her friend would deliver them to those searching for them. Marie finished her own tea, picked up both mugs, rinsed them out and set them on the counter next to the sink. She turned off the monitor, closed and locked the cabinet, before leaving the kitchen and picking up where she left off with the book she was reading. She had to get the thoughts out of her head of what she desperately wanted to do to several of those involved in all of this.
Jane knocked on the library door before entering, closing the door behind her. Some of Charlotte must have rubbed off onto Francis, because after seeing Jane's face, she asked, "What, Aunt Jane? It's bad, isn't it Has something happened to Toby?" Jane was two steps away from the table the girls sat at, doing their lessons, when Francis asked her question. Jane gave Francis a 'how did you know' look and was told by Francis, "The expression on your face said it all, Aunt Jane. Is it something about Toby?"
Jane smirked, stepped up to the table, pulled out a chair and sat down. "That's very observant of you, Francis. Your teacher has done well." Saying that she looked over at Charlotte, who had a mixed expression on her face that said she hoped Jane approved and worried Jane didn't approve. Chuckling, Jane told Charlotte, "Relax, Charlotte. You did a splendid job teaching Francis to read expression, it can become quite useful in certain situations." Taking a deep sigh, looking first at Francis, then Charlotte, deciding they needed to know, she told them, "Yes, part of the news I received is bad. But there is good news as well. More arrests have been made, adults this time. Charlotte, you remember Dan Obler and James Conner? They were just two of all the adults arrested. Managers, assistant managers, and staff at other departments stories have been arrested. The arrests were due to statements many of the kids give. Those arrested were living well above their means, owning more than their salaries would allow." Jane paused, looked down, then went on with, "A patrol car was patrolling the warehouse district and found a man lying on the ground near one of the warehouses. He'd been shot three times, he was still alive, but in serious condition because of blood loss. They called an ambulance and searched him in an attempt to identify him." Jane looked up then finished with, "It was Toby's brother, Tylor. They were looking for him because of his weekly deposits, which were substantially more than a man making $20 an hour should be able to deposit. He was taken to the hospital and rushed into emergency surgery. He's in serious but guarded condition, but he's alive. Doctors believe if he survives the next few days that he'll make a full recovery." She paused and made another decision, as she said to the girls, "And I have to tell Toby about this."
Francis looked at Charlotte, and Charlotte looked at Francis, before both girls stood up from their chairs, Charlotte walking around the table with Francis the first to hug Jane. After both girls had put their arms around Jane, she reached up, held onto their arms, and with tears sliding down her face, gave the girls, "Thank you for this, girls. I needed it." Both girls laid their heads on Jane's shoulders, where they were found when Marie came into the library to tell Jane that Toby was awake. Jane thanked Marie, and patting the girls' arms, told them, "I have to go girls. Please come with me, Toby might need you in a moment."
When the three came out of the library, Francis closing the door behind her, Marie was helping Toby to the downstairs bathroom. All three went into the living room to wait. Toby turned out to be as sharp as Charles was at reading expression. When Marie helped him back to the living room, and to sit on the couch, he had no problem determining something bad had occurred. "Aunt Jane, give it to me straight. No embellishment, no varnishing the truth. Just be honest with me. By the way you three are acting right now, I'd guess it's about my brother, yes? You're worried how I'll react if you say what has to be said about him, right? He isn't dead, because people act differently around those who've lost a loved one or family member. So he's alive, just not in very good shape, right?"
Jane had an astonished look on her face after what Toby said. He then chuckled when he saw the look of 'how did you know' expression on Jane's face, telling her, "I learned real fast how to read someone's facial expression, Aunt Jane. It was after mom walked out on us, and dad had to start working two jobs to keep the dogs at bay, when my brother started slapping me around, then changed to beating me, that I learned how to read his moods when I was around him. I could tell, after walking into our apartment, whether I was going to be slapped silly or beat until I lost consciousness. Learning to 'read' my brother's moods also helped when it came to that man. I could tell from his expression, the minute he entered the building, what kind of a mood he was in. I could tell whether one of us could say something and not set him off or whether it was better to just keep quiet. I could also tell when someone was going to pay for something that happened. So, Aunt Jane, how bad had my brother been hurt?"
Jane pulled herself up straight and looked directly at Toby. "More arrests have been made, Toby. This time, because of statements given by the kids that were arrested, it was managers and assistant managers, along with staff, from not only Taylor's but other department stores in the area. Even the ex-manager and security guard at the Taylor's where you were caught were arrested. In some of the kids' statements, they talked about those people having fancy homes, cars, and in one case, a boat that could almost be called a ship. They all were living well above their means, Toby. When they started looking into bank records of these people, and discovered deposits that were much greater than they should have been able to deposit, that's when Tylor popped up on their radar. Your brother was working for $20 an hour, but putting $5000 a week into his bank account. A man working for $20 an hour, working 40 hours a week, only makes $800 before taxes are taken out. And yet, he was putting $5000 into his account each week."
No one saw Marie slip out of the living room and into the kitchen. It wasn't long before she was back, holding a tray in front of each person, urging them to take one of the glasses of water she'd returned with. After Jane all but drained her glass of water, she continued giving Toby the worst part of the information she'd received. "A patrol car was patrolling the warehouse district, Toby, and found a man lying on the ground next to one of the warehouses. He'd been shot, three times, but was still alive and in serious condition. While one officer called for an ambulance, the other searched the man's pockets, trying to find some kind of identification that would tell them the name of the man. The officer found the man's wallet and driver license, and learned it was your brother, Tylor. He was rushed to the hospital and into emergency surgery. On the plus side, none of the three bullets hit any vital organs, but he'd lost a lot of blood. He's still alive, in serious but guarded condition. I was told that if he makes it through the next few days, he'll likely make a full recovery. But he won't be leaving the hospital on his own. He's been arrested and handcuffed to the bed railing. When the police have the doctor's permission, they'll start questioning him." Jane drank the rest of the water in her glass, then sat back in the chair, watching Toby.
Seasons House was unscrupulous for making people examine their own feelings, thoughts, and beliefs. Jane could see how Toby was doing that at the moment, wondering what he would discover. She thought he was about to say something due to his head shake, but he remained silent, mulling over his thoughts. Finally, with more head shaking, he said, "My brother chose his own path, so he must accept the consequences of walking that path. You're probably wondering if I hate my brother, Aunt Jane. Do I hate him, Aunt Jane? No, but I do hate what he did to me. Do I love him, Aunt Jane. No, Aunt Jane, I don't. He made it clear early on that he was only concerned about himself, not me or our dad. Even before our mother walked out, he only cared about himself. I do, though, feel sorry for him. He could have gone any other way than he did, and would have been successful, he was that kind of a person. But the lure which caught him was green, money green. It pulled him in so deep that he's now fighting for his life and will spend years behind bars. I hope he recovers, Aunt Jane, but I have no desire to ever see him again. This feeling could change, in time, but I doubt it, not after everything he did to me.
Jane nodded sagely after Toby's statements. Then said in general, "Excuse me, there's something I must do." She stood up from the chair then walked to and into the study, closing the door behind her. She sat down at her desk, picked up the handset and dialed a number. After speaking with the person at the other end, she hung up the handset and waited until the fax machine chimed. Entering the security code, Jane waited until the machine printed out the fax it had received. She got up from her chair, went to the study door, opened it and called, "Charlotte, please come here." When Charlotte reached the study door, Jane fully opened it so Charlotte could enter the study and closed it behind her. "Charlotte, who is this man?" Jane asked, then handed Charlotte the piece of paper she'd been holding."
Watching Charlotte carefully, Jane got her first answer because of Charlotte's unflattering facial expression and then by, "That's Mr. Strom. He's the CEO of Taylor's department stores. He's the one who threatened to take me to Federal Court if Judge Ruth didn't find me guilty." Then risking consequences, Charlotte asked, "Why do you want to know who he is, Aunt Jane?"
With a smirk on her face, Jane told Charlotte, "You'll see, come with me. But say nothing and don't react. Understand?" Charlotte nodded her head, and followed Jane out of the study.
Jane began speaking just as she stepped into the living room. "Toby, describe the man to me again."
Charlotte was standing next Jane just into the living room, and like the others, was watching Toby. "He was maybe 5' 10" to 6', Aunt Jane. He wasn't thin but didn't have a gut. He had gray to white hair and he always wore a suit and tie. And he always had a pin attached to his right lapel."
Slowly walking over to the couch, Jane handed the paper to Toby. "Is this the man you saw, Toby. His name is George Strom, he's the CEO of Taylor's department stores."
Toby took the offered paper from Jane. Everyone in the room could see that man was familiar to Toby, as he immediately crumpled the paper and threw it on the floor. His face took on a horrible expression as he said quite forceful, "YEAH, that's the man. He's the one that punched the kid who didn't want to shoplift. He's the one who had some of the kids tied between the two pipes before whipping them. He also took some of the girls into another room there in the warehouse, they came out really shook up. Him I could do things to without remorse." At that moment, Charlotte took off down the hallway to the backdoor and out the door, leaving it swinging on its hinges. The consequences of leaving a door open wasn't on her mind at the moment.
Everyone had been so focused on Toby and what he was saying, they hadn't noticed Charlotte had bolted until they hear running feet on the hard wood flooring. Turning, Jane saw Charlotte disappear down the hallway to the backdoor, hearing the door open but not close. Marie started to get up, but Jane held up her hand and went after Charlotte herself. She had a feeling where Charlotte was headed.
Jane walked down the hallway and out the backdoor, closing the door behind her as she stood on the small porch. She went down the steps, looked around for Charlotte, and only knew she was right when her mere whinnied. Charlotte was with Pinto. When Jane reached the stable, she didn't go in, instead watched as Charlotte curried Pinto. Every so often, she'd lean her forehead against the horse and cry, only to wipe her eyes moments later and continue curring Pinto. Several times after crying, she'd walk around and hug Pinto, with Pinto gently laying its head on her shoulder. Charlotte was so lost in her thoughts that she didn't see or hear Jane as she quietly walked into the stable and sat on a hay bail. At least that's what Jane thought. "I so want to kick that fucken bastard's ass, Aunt Jane. I want to do to him what he's done to those kids, only with a cat-o-nine tails. I want to fillet him alive, Aunt Jane. For everything his done and everyone he's hurt, Aunt Jane. And I can't do a damn thing about any of it! Because that's not who I am, Aunt Jane," Charlotte finished with a soft voice. "And because it isn't the right thing for me to do. Damnitall, why do I have to be that way? Why can't I go out there and kick a bastards butt and not care if he lives or dies?" Charlotte was standing on Pinto's left side as she spoke, not looking at Jane. She now turned to face Jane and with tears rolling down her cheeks, asked, "Why, Aunt Jane?" She then dropped to the ground and started bawling.
Two things occurred almost simultaneously. Jane rush to Charlotte, kneeled down, and pulled her into a hug and held her. Pinto had turned herself around and now put its head gently on Charlotte's shoulder, whinnying softly to help comfort the girl. Jane gently rocked Charlotte, and for the moment, let Charlotte cry herself out. When Charlotte had cried herself out, she reached up and rubbed Pinto's muzzle, thanking her for caring. Jane chuckled, as she watched Pinto walk back into her stall, turn around and using the underside of her mouth, pull the stall door shut. Giving Jane what could only be called a smile. "She just went back into her stall, didn't she, Aunt Jane? And closed the stall door behind her, right? She's quite the horse, isn't she Aunt Jane?"
Jane helped Charlotte to stand, answering her question with, "Yes, she quite a horse." She led Charlotte to the hay bails, had Charlotte sit down before going into the tack room and returning with two bottles of water. Handing one to Charlotte, Jane sat down next to the girl and they both sat quietly drinking their water. When Jane sensed Charlotte had calmed down enough, she began telling Charlotte her thoughts concerning Charlotte's question. "You asked why you didn't have it in you to go out and beat the hell out of people like George Strom, not caring whether they lived or died? First, because that isn't you, Charlotte. Secondly, the world is full of people like George Strom. People who steal, cheat, kill, rob, generally don't care about anyone but themselves and what they can get for themselves. What the world doesn't have enough of is people like you. People who are kind, intelligent, willing to help others, willing to stand up for others with disregard for the consequences. There are people like you out there, Charles, but not enough to counter all of the George Stroms in the world. And when you take care of one George Strom, another one appears. And after a while, Charles, those like you can no longer deal with not seeing the George Stroms of the world get what they deserve, and walk away to find their own private solitude. If you went after every George Strom out there, Charlotte, the world would lose you. Because you'd finally find it impossible to deal with it all and walk away to find your own solace."
Charlotte asked Jane a question Jane hadn't expected from the girl. "Is that what you did, Aunt Jane? Walked away to find your own solitude? Did you walk away from all the stupidity, bureaucracy and foolishness? Is that why you and Marie started your own school?"
Jane marveled at the girl, chuckled and said, "Charles Thorton. You do ask the damndest questions sometimes."
Chuckling, Charles answered with, "You aren't the first person to tell me that, Aunt Jane. But did you, walk away to find your own solitude?"
"Yes, Charles. Marie and I walked away to find our own solitude. I could no longer tolerate the egos that knew nothing but acted as though they knew everything. I was tired of arguing with those who refused to do what had to be done but were too worried about reputations. I was fed up with blind parents who claimed their 'darlings' would never do anything they were caught doing. Yes Charles, I walked away from it all and together, Marie and I started our school for boys like Frank. Boys we knew we could help but not in a traditional way. As you're well aware. Marie and I have found our solitude and still help those needing the help they don't realize they need." Jane changed the subject by asking, "Are you feeling better now?"
Nodding her head, Charlotte answered, "Yes, Aunt Jane. But I'd feel even better if I could have a few minutes alone with Mr. Strom."
Jane chuckled for a few moments, before telling Charlotte, "Between you and me Charlotte, so would I. Come on, let's get you back into the house."
Charlotte nodded her head, stood, then took an apple from the nearby basket. She walked over to Pinto's stall, held out the apple and watched as Pinto gently took it from her hand. As Charlotte gently rubbed Pinto's muzzle, she said, "Thank you for caring about me. I really appreciate it." Still masticating the apple, Pinto whinnied and threw its head up and down. Then to Charlotte's surprise, Pinto used its head to push Charlotte towards the entrance to the stable. A sure signal from Pinto that Charlotte needed to go back to the house. Hugging Pinto's neck one last time, Charlotte and Jane walked back to the house. Each lost in their own thought, seeing everything they'd like to do to one George Strom. But each bridled by the one rein at the top of their list for George Strom. It wasn't the right thing to do.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
It was a strange time at the Winsome Girls' School for Wayward Boys, strange in that one boy was there to keep him out of Federal Court, who also volunteered to be one of Jane's girls. Another boy, who by all accounts, was an angry, mean, terrible boy, involved with false accusations and shoplifting. Who, upon arriving at the Winsome Girls' School for Wayward Boys, was found to be everything but angry, mean, and a terrible boy, who they discovered needed immediate medical attention because he'd had been severely beaten. And who had to be removed from the Kingston hospital because of a threat on his life, is now being treated and recovering at the Winsome Girls' School for Wayward Boy, aka Seasons House. Indeed, it is a strange time, this time.
Charlotte opened the backdoor to the house and let Jane enter her home first. She followed behind Jane, this time closing the door behind her. Because they'd been in the stable, both women took off their shoes and went their separate ways to replace them. Both did replace their shoes, along with a shower, clean clothes and reapplied makeup. As usual, Jane reappeared first, clean and wearing clean clothes, but still trying to ignore her monster's pleadings. Charlotte was a few minutes behind Jane in returning to the living room, also cleaned and wearing fresh clothing and makeup, but battling with herself not to do what she so desired to do. Two monsters were fighting to be freed, to do what they felt should be done to all who were involved with the crimes that had been committed. But chains and locks seemed to restrained them, as they were told once more, it wasn't the right thing to do.
When Toby saw Jane, he asked, "Is Charlotte alright, Aunt Jane? She left rather quickly after you showed me that picture of the man. Is there anything I can do to help?"
Charlotte had walked into the living room just as Toby asked his questions. Jane nodded her head in Charlotte's direction, then watched as the two stared at each other. Charlotte then looked at Jane, who knew the question Charlotte was asking by her look. Jane's hands were hanging in front of her, the back of one palm over the other. In answer to Charlotte's unasked question, Jane's hands never went higher than they were, but she rotated both hands outward, basically telling Charlotte, 'It's up to you, whether or not you reveal yourself.' Charlotte then looked at Marie, who with facial expressions and a head shake, was telling Charlotte, 'keep me out of this, it's not my call.' Then Marie flicked her head in Jane's direction. Charlotte again looked to Jane, who, this time, remained motionless.
Marie had sent Francis back to her lessons in the library. When she heard muffled voices, she left the library and walked to the living room, ending up standing next to Jane. Jane could tell Francis was about to ask a question, but softly told Francis to keep quiet. As Francis watched, Charlotte looked to Marie, who ran through several facial expressions while shaking her head. Then, she flicked her head in Jane's direction. Jane felt it more than saw it, and reached out to grasp Francis' wrist, keeping her motionless and by her side.
All four could see anger rising on Charlotte's face. She was starting to get angry because in this instance, she didn't know what to do. Then, when her anger reached it's peak, she said in an angry voice, I'm damned if I do and damned if I don't!
She then looked at Jane and told her, I don't know what to do, Aunt Jane! What do I do? Tell me!
Jane remained stoic, unmoved, on the outside. What she had to let play out was killing her on the inside, knowing it had to be done. "Charlotte, you are well trained to handle physical situations, and situations you are familiar with. But when it comes to situations like this one, you try to defer to others. Our lives will always encounter situations that are out of our comfort zones, those zones we know well and have handled well. We must also learn how to handle, deal with if you will, those situations we've never encountered, knowing there could be consequences one way or the other. You are now faced with one of those situations, and you must decide how to deal with. Neither Marie or I will advise you of which path you should take. Neither will I tell you if consequences will be attached to either decision you make."
Tears were slowly sliding down Francis' cheeks. Francis had come to care deeply for Charlotte, Charles, deeply as one brother could care for their brother. It pained her to see Charlotte in such anguish, but knew she couldn't say or do anything. Even as painful as it was to watch, Francis knew Charlotte's only option was to make her own decision in this matter.
Toby sat on the couch watching the interaction between Jane, Charlotte, and Marie. He even saw how upset Francis was, as tears were sliding down her face. "Aunt Jane, what's going on? Was it something I said? If it is, I'm sorry for upsetting everyone."
As the headmistress now, Jane told Toby, "Yes, Toby, it has to do with what you've said. But it's more than that. It also deals with everything connected to you and the things you've done. And because of what you said in the latter, Charlotte has a decision she has to make on her own, and that is causing her consternation.
Her anger still smoldering, Charlotte faced Toby, her voice tightly controlled as she said, "You asked if you could help! You sit there safe in this house and asked if you could help!" With those few words, the dam broke and Charlotte held nothing back. "YOU RUINED MY LIFE! YOU TOOK ME AWAY FROM MY PARENTS, SCHOOL, AND MY FRIENDS WITH YOUR LIE! I SO WANT TO BREAK YOU INTO LITTLE PIECES BECAUSE OF WHAT YOUR LIE HAS DONE TO MY LIFE. AND DON'T THINK FOR ONE MINUTE I CAN'T DO IT! I CAN PUT YOU BACK INTO THAT HOSPITAL WITH LITTLE EFFORT!"
Both Jane and Marie saw Charlotte in her readying position, both readying themselves to intervene if necessary. But they also saw both of Charlotte's hands were balled into fists, something she'd never do when in her ready position. The two women relaxed slightly, but remained alert.
After what Charlotte said, then yelled, Toby was confused. How had his lie ruined Charlotte's life? He looked at Marie, who was looking at him. He then looked at Aunt Jane, who was also looking at him. Then he looked at Francis, who while still upset but also looking at him. He then looked at Charlotte, who was physically shaking with anger and tears dripping off her cheeks. Then he again looked at Francis, then Charlotte, then Marie, then Jane. Then again at only Francis then Charlotte. Then he sat there thinking. It wasn't long before all four women could see the light come on in Toby's eyes. He looked at Jane and quietly said, "Petticoat punishment. You use petticoat punishment." Jane sagely nodded her head, before he turned his head to look at Charlotte, saying, "You're Charles, aren't you? You're the boy that was at Taylor's that day I was arrested. I wouldn't blame you if you did break me into little pieces, after everything I've done, I probably deserve it." Tears slowly slid out of Toby's eyes as he looked down at his lap.
More under control, this time, Charlotte got out, "You don't understand, do you?" Toby's raised his head and looked at Charlotte. "You don't understand, do you?" She repeated. She raised her voice slightly as she continued with, "I can't do what I'd like to do to you and everyone involved in this whole mess. I can't because it isn't the right thing for me to do. If I did what I wanted, it'd make me no better that those who started this whole shoplifting spree. Yes, I'm Charles Thorton. And yes, Aunt Jane uses petticoat punishment to help boys like you and Francis see there's a better way to live and behave. You likely won't experience it because of your injuries, and because you're likely to be a witness for the prosecution against Strom and any others you saw. I will also tell you that I volunteered to be one of Aunt Jane's girls, and I've actually learned something about myself along the way. That's one of the things she wants to happen, that we learn about ourselves. Even though you may never experience presenting as a girl, you too have learned something in the short time you've here. And we've learned something about you as well. You aren't who you pretended to be at Taylor's or in the holding cell. You, and me, are actually where Aunt Jane wants all of the boys who come her to be before leaving. And... I'm sorry I got upset with you, yelled at you." She looked at Jane before continuing with, "I guess this whole mess is bothering me more than I realized." With that, Charlotte turned and went up to her bedroom to shower, change clothes, and freshen her face.
Nothing was said for some time, as Toby sat looking at the floor. Then, just as Jane and Marie heard footsteps starting down the stairs, Toby said in a wistful voice, "God, I've really messed up. But what choice did I have? Do as I was told or get the hell beat out of me? I guess I do deserve to get my butt kicked."
It was Francis who answered with, "You could have gone to the police." Jane and Marie looked at Francis, and then at each other, thinking it might be time for Frank to leave Seasons House.
Toby was shaking his head and still looking at the floor as he answered, "I tried that, Francis. When I first found out what my brother was going to force me to do. Those old scars I have on my back are the result of him catching me before I got to the front door of the police department." He then looked at Francis and told her, "No Francis, nothing I tried did any good. Even trying to run away did no good. I don't know how he did it, but my brother always found me. Some of the pink scars were his doing for me trying to run away."
Then a new voice joined the conversation. "You could have killed him. With all the scars you had, it would have been considered self-defense. No jury would have convicted you after seeing the scars you bare." All eyes turned to the voice, and saw Charlotte walking towards the living room. "Or, you could have shown your dad what he was doing to you."
Wincing as he got off the couch, and as he took off his shirt, turned so Charlotte saw his back, and asked her, "And keep getting this done to you. Take a good look Charlotte, then ask yourself what you'd have done to keep this from happening to you over and over again. And the new ones you see, the raw ones, are because I got caught at Taylor's. Done by my brother, at the warehouse, as directed by that bastard Strom." Wincing again as he put his shirt back on, and turning to face Charlotte, he continued with, "I thought about killing my brother after the first time he slapped me silly. Then again when he started using anything he could get his hands on. Then again when he beat me because I was going to the police. Then when he and Strom tied me between those poles and he beat me to unconsciousness. Yeah, Charlotte, I thought about killing him. But as you told me, it wouldn't have been the right thing for me to do. I'd have been no better than he and Strom. And, that isn't me. All I can say to you is that I'm terribly sorry for dragging you into this whole mess. It's happened, it can't be changed, I can't go back using a time machine and do something different to ensure the outcome would be different." Toby stood looking at Charlotte, who had slowly walked into the living room and until she was standing an arms distance from Toby. Toby stood his ground, he didn't move a muscle, as Charlotte stepped right up to him, put her arms around his neck and pulled him into a hug. As Marie, Jane, and Francis watched, Toby put his arms around Charlotte's neck and they both stood and cried on each other's shoulder.
Pushing back from each other after several minutes, tears still fresh on their faces, it was Toby who, looking at Charlotte, started laughing as he said, "Maintenant tu ressembles à un raton laveur (Now you look like a raccoon)."
With a deadpan look on her face, she stared at Toby, then turned her head to a chuckling Francis. "Vous réalisez tous les deux que je peux créer des énigmes avec vous deux, n'est-ce pas (You both realize that I can create puzzles with you two, don't you)?" Charlotte told Francis, as she turned back to look at Toby. She turned to look back at Francis again and told her, "Et tu n'as pas l'air beaucoup mieux." Letting go of Toby, Charlotte turned to face Francis and in a 'we have to do this again' voice, said, "Well, come on girl. Let's not wait to be told to do this, again." She rolled her eyes, shook her head, and chuckling, Francis walked over to Charlotte, took her hand and together they walked to the staris and to their bedrooms, where they'll clean their faces and reapply their makeup. Again.
It was plain to Jane and Marie that Toby was still in pain, as he turned towards Jane and wincing, started walking in her direction. Marie came up beside him to help support him, before telling him, "Lean on me, cher. Salle de bain, oui?" When Toby nodded, she then said, "Good, you can deal with you face while there."
While Toby was in the bathroom, Marie looked at Jane's expression, saying, "You're going to ask me if we made the right decision letting Charlotte tell Toby everything, aren't you? He realized it on his own, after Charlotte's outburst. And so far... " and Marie kept her hands waist high and rolled them outwards, palms up, shrugging her shoulders at the same time. "We can never really know the outcome of our decisions until the fruit has ripened." Just after saying that, Toby slowly made his way out of the downstairs bathroom.
Marie gently took Toby's arm, hearing, "Just a minute, tante Marie," from Toby. Looking at Jane he asked, "You're concerned what I'll do with the information I discovered concerning your activities here, aren't you Aunt Jane?" When Jane gave Toby a questioning look, he told her, "I heard what tante Marie asked you as I was opening the door. A dog may be extremely scared because of how it was treated by its previous caregiver. But if the next person taking care of that dog, takes time, has patience, is gentle, provides food, water, and a warm place to stay, will eventually win that dog's trust. After everything you've done for me Aunt Jane, tante Marie, I could never violate your trust. Your story, as they say, is not mine to tell. It would no more be my story to tell even had I become one of your girls, Aunt Jane. I will never forget how you saved my life, even if it wasn't done your usual way." Toby then took a step forward toward the couch.
Marie looked at Jane after Toby had spoken. The two women had been together so long, and through a lot together, that each could read the other's facial expression and know what was being asked or said. Now, as Marie looked at Jane, Jane's facial expression told Marie, 'well, that answers that question.'
Francis and Charlotte returned just as Marie was helping Toby sit back down on the couch. They stood in the middle of the living room and waited for Jane's inspection. Seeing how the girls were standing, Marie looked at Jane and raised her eyebrows, silently asking, 'what's going on?' Jane looked at the girls, thought for a minute, then squeezed her eyes shut, opened them, then slowly shook her head. She looked at Marie and silently told her with an eyeroll, looking to the ceiling and a slow head shake, 'they're trying to help me center myself.' Jane put on her headmistress face and slowly walked over to the girls. In her best headmistress voice, Jane went at the girls standing in front of her. "So, you two think you've reapplied your makeup properly. Did you remember to change your dresses, shoes, lingerie at the same time?" Jane stepped up and closely inspected each girls makeup. "Well, I see your makeup application is getting better. It still needs work, though. I see you finally learned how to brush your hair, Francis. It's about time." Now she stepped back and began looking at their clothing, hosiery, and shoes. She adjusted Charlotte's dress at the shoulders, straighten Francis' dress in the back. Jane stepped back and still in headmistress mode, complained, "When will you two ever learn how to put on a dress properly? Charlotte, your dress was too high at your shoulders, And you, Francis, still can't get your dress straight in the back. Both of you, back upstairs and change dresses. And this time get it right. Or you'll be changing dresses until you get it right. NOW GO!"
All through the grilling, neither girl reacted. It had been their plan, and Francis' chance to practice letting what someone said roll off her back. Their plan was to also help Jane remember who she is and why they were with her, helping to center herself after all that had occurred. And it worked.
To Toby, sitting there watching the action before him, it seemed Jane was really being hard on both girls. Then he saw the gleam in the eyes of both girls, and knew they'd planned this from the beginning. Once that realization occurred, he clamped his hand over his mouth to quell the laughter that seemed interested in being heard. He pressed his hand tighter over his mouth as Jane turned to Marie after the girls had gone up stairs and said, "Nothing. No reaction at all. Both of them should have at least cringed, or looked like they didn't want to get changed again. But... nothing. Marie, I'm losing my touch."
It was only when Jane turned to look at Marie did she see Marie's hand covering her mouth, and her eyes were dancing. And it was only when Jane gave Marie the stink eye that Marie started laughing. Calming down, Marie spoke. "Chère, what has kept your attention this entire time? Like this one over here," and she nodded her head towards Toby, "I saw what those two were doing the minute they stood in the middle of this room. And like this one," and she again motioned with her head towards Toby, "I was having a terrible time not laughing once I understood what those two filles pétulantes were doing but couldn't spoil their moment with laughter. Jane, they helped you center yourself by making you inspect them, criticize them, and making them go change their dresses. And where you would have had Francis shaking with fear, she let your words fade past her. That she could have only learned from Charlotte. Ah... they return."
Bedroom doors could be heard opening and closing, before steps were heard walking toward the stairs. Marie had walked over to the couch and sat down to Toby's right. She didn't want to miss a minute of the show that was about to start. The girls came down the stairs as they'd learned to do. As they walked towards the living room, they saw Jane slowly pacing the floor with her hands behind her back. Francis looked at Charlotte, Charlotte looked at Francis, and the silent message they exchanged was, 'oh crap.' Both wondered if they'd gone to far in helping Aunt Jane regain her center. She was, after all, their headmistress. They walked into the living room and stopped in the middle of the room facing a pacing Jane. Still pacing, Jane was laughing on the inside as she started with, "Just how long does it take you two to change one, single, solitary dress?" Jane stopped pacing, turned to face the girls and continued her fun. "Why, in the time it took you two to change one, single, solitary dress, I could have stripped bare naked, showered, dressed, reapplied my makeup, and returned in a shorter amount of time than it took you two to change one, single, solitary dress. What were you girls doing up there all this time? Huh? Maybe getting 'friendly' perhaps? Well, girls, since you seem to have so much time on your hands, you get to deal with our evening meal. You'll set the dining room table. You'll fix the meal and clean up after our meal is over. And after you've cleaned the dishes and kitchen, if I find one speck of dust anywhere in that kitchen, you two will spend whatever time it takes scrubbing the kitchen walls from ceiling to floor. Do you two understand what I've just told you? If you do, then why are you two imitating a Greek statue? MOVE. NOW!"
While Jane had her fun letting the girls have it about changing their dresses, she'd bent over so she was eye to eye with the girls. Because Jane herself had told them to go, neither girl had to ask to be excused. So, when Jane told the girls to move, and now, she was still bent over at their eye level. Francis looked at Charlotte, Charlotte looked at Francis, and together, the girls stepped forward and each kissed Jane on each of her cheeks. Telling her, as they started for the kitchen, "We love you too, Aunt Jane."
Marie and Toby are sitting on the couch, watching the entire scene play out. Now, after what the girls just did, they're watching as a woman with an indomitable will, was frozen in place. Still bent over, but with a stunned expression on her face. It started with Marie as a snort. From a snort it went to a chuckle. And from a chuckle it went to full blown laughter. Marie's laughter was infectious, and despite himself, Toby joined her. They laughed even harder as Jane turned to face them, still bent over, and said, "Je m'occuperai de toi plus tard, vieille femme. Et toi, mon garçon, tu peux encore devenir une de mes filles. Blessures ou pas. Il y a beaucoup de robes qui cachent les cicatrices (I'll deal with you later, old woman. And you, my boy, can still become one of my girls. Injuries or not. There are many dresses that hide the scars)."
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
While Marie sat speaking with Toby, about the school he attended, his opinion on the school, whether he was learning anything, and what he'd like to do after high school, Jane went into the study. She didn't worry about Charlotte and Francis being in the kitchen alone, getting the evening meal prepared, not with Charlotte's training by her Uncle. She walked over to her desk, sat down in the high backed chair, and leaned back, mulling over all that had recently taken place this afternoon. She thought back to Charlotte's outbursts, both just moments ago and her bolting from the house to find comfort from Pinto. Why hadn't she seen the turmoil building up in Charlotte? Hadn't there been signs? Had she missed the signs that pointed to the volcanic eruption Charlotte displayed? Had she missed them because Charles had been trained so well to hide his intentions from his attackers, that he was able to hide how upset he actually was about everything that's happened? Was he telling the truth when he said he didn't hate Toby, when only minutes ago he told Toby he'd like to break him into tiny pieces?
And what about Frank? Since Charles has been here, Frank has made famous progress in coming out of his shell and has actually started to care about someone other than himself. His school work has shown the change in him, as his grades have rapidly improved. But when he leaves? Where will he live? He can't return to his Aunt Agnus, she's the reason he started acting out in the beginning. He wants to return living with the Willows, and after Penny's successful treatment, they would be glad to have him, except CPS isn't letting that happen. Could Agnus and the CPS be working together? After all, Agnus reluctantly took Frank in after Penny Willows was diagnosed with stage 2 cancer. And the CPS has repeatedly denied Frank's return to the Willows.
Putting a stop sign at that last thought, Jane picked up the phone and made a call. "Hi, it's Jane. Marie and I think Frank Winslow is ready to leave Seasons House. But the question is his place of residence. He can't go back to his Aunt Agnus since that's when he started acting out...Yes, I know CPS has said that's where he has to live, but do we really want to send him back where it all began...Yes, but CPS has repeatedly denied his return to the Willows, despite Penny's successful cancer treatment and the fact that the Willows would be glad to have him living with them...Actually, I'm wondering if Aunt Agnus and the CPS are working together to keep Frank with Agnus. As long as he lives with her, she gets support payments, which could be going back to the CPS agent handling Frank's case. Maybe someone should look into that possibility?...There is another possibility I've been mulling over, based on how close to brothers Frank and Charles have become. Perhaps the Thorton's should be approached and asked if they'd foster Frank? In the long run, that family would be the best for him. Charles would be with him to continue teaching him, and Frank would have a wonderful roll model in Charles and his parents...Well, there's a rush and no rush, since nothing can happen until the entire shoplifting case has been closed...Well, let me know what's decided and if anything is found...Yeah, me too...Bye.
Hanging up the phone, Jane went back over her conversation with Ruth. Ruth did have a point, Agnus and Penny were family, and maybe Frank should be with his family. But, in Jane's mind, and with Charlotte's counsel, just not with Agnus because that's where Frank's troubles began. And there was no reason to believe Agnus had changed since Frank had been sent to Seasons House. Or that Agnus' attitude had changed with respect to Frank. So that begs the question, why was CPS so insistent that Frank stay with a woman who didn't want to take Frank in to begin with? Were they reasoning that Penny's cancer might return and Frank would have to be relocated? If that was the reasoning they were using, then the Thorton's were the best choice for Frank. Charles has proven he's from a loving family. Frank and Charles have basically, for all intents and purposes, become brothers. If Frank lives with Charles and his parents, Charles will be there to help support and guide Frank. And, the Thorton's may have the financial resources to ensure Frank get's the best education possible. Would Agnus ensure that happens for Frank? These were questions that would have to be answered, afterwards.
Jane swiveled the chair around, unlocked the cabinet behind her, turned on the monitor, and selected the camera in the kitchen. She adjusted the volume so she could hear Francis and Charlotte as they talked to each other. As she watched the two work, she was amazed at the lack of banter between the two, Charlotte was all business as she directed Francis, made sure Francis wasn't going to cut herself as she did prep work, before going back to work on preparations of her own. Francis was asking Charlotte culinary questions she'd never have know to ask weeks ago, proof of Charlotte's teachings. As she looked closer to what the camera was picking up, Jane recognized the ingredients Charlotte was using. The girl was making lasagna for their evening meal. Jane knew what recipe Marie used when she made lasagna, and all of the ingredients in that recipe. But as she watched what Charlotte was doing, she saw Charlotte add additional ingredients to her lasagna. As Jane sat mesmerized watching Charlotte and Francis work, the fax machine chimed, signaling a fax was ready to print. Shutting off the monitor, closing and locking the cabinet doors, Jane got up from her chair and walked over to the fax machine. After inputting a code, Jane watched as the awaiting fax printed out. Taking it off the machine, she returned to her chair and began reading.
From: Jeb, et al.
To: Jane Thompson
Re: The birds are singing
Jane,
The majority of the managers, assistant managers, and staff arrested, are working as hard as they can to save their own hides. They're pointing fingers left, right, and center. But it seems after wading through all of their finger pointing, it all goes back to George Strom, or at least in his direction. Because it appears all of the strings are going back to Strom, the investigators and forensic accountants have gone back and used a finer comb to sift through his finances. Because of the quantity they have to sift through, it's going to take time, perhaps several weeks before they will know if he is indeed the ring master of this circus.
As always, I'll keep you informed of any more news I receive. Give our love to Charles.
Regards,
Jeb
Reading through the fax again, Jane saw no reason to tell the girls any of this. She didn't want their hopes to rise, only to be dashed if things didn't progress as everyone hoped. She thought it best to wait until their was real positive news before bringing the girls in any further.
Putting the fax in the security drawer, Jane stood up, walked to the study doors and left the study, thinking to make a surprise visit to the kitchen. She was surprised, all right, as she found Marie standing in front of the kitchen door with another shocked look on her face. Jane smirked at seeing a shocked Marie standing outside of her kitchen. "Let me guess. Ils t'ont viré de la cuisine. Encore (They kicked you out of the kitchen. Again)?"
"Yes, they kicked me out of the kitchen again. I just wanted to make sure the fire department wasn't needed. The kitchen door hadn't even swung back in before Charlotte pushed me out of the kitchen. Telling me everything was under control."
Jane chuckled before saying, "I did tell them they were in charge of our evening meal. Maybe I should have added several provisions. Maybe I should have added instructions that allowed you to walk into the kitchen to ensure all of our safety. I smell a pleasant aroma, there's no smell of anything burning, so perhaps the fire department won't be needed, even without your inspection.
Getting serious now, Marie nodded towards the library. With a curious expression on her face, Jane followed Marie into the library. Closing the door after Jane was into the library, Marie led the way to the table near the front window in the library. She pulled out a chair, sat down, and indicated Jane sit opposite her on the other side of the table. "I had a long talk with Toby while you were in the study. He's like Charles at school. He's bored. He isn't learning anything because he's already read all of his textbooks. He's tried asking to be put into advanced courses, but like Charles, it was felt it was better for him to stay in the classes he was assigned. His councilor's assessment was correct, but not even she could convenience the decision makers it's better for him to be in advanced classes. And as we discovered, he was indeed hiding something. I graded his tests, chère. He received perfect scores on each test. Chère, he's like Charles, beyond anything our school lessons can teach him. He needs to sit with Charles when the tutor arrives. And, it might be wise to include Francis when foreign languages are studied. She seems to have quite the aptitude for them, just never having the chance to study them closely."
Jane saw the wisdom of Marie's words, responding with, "Because Toby is like Charles, he will be included when our tutor arrives. I hadn't considered adding Francis to that class when they study foreign languages. But given his demonstration of Spanish, perhaps she should be there at that time."
Just then, there was a knock on the library door before it opened and just a head peered around the door. "Hey, dudettes. Is this a private party or can anyone join?" Marie looked at Jane, and Jane looked at Marie, before both shook their heads and Marie waved Jill into the library. Jill knew if these two women were alone, leaving three students by themselves, that it was a serious talk and a death threat had been given if any of the three misbehaved. "I just checked Toby's wounds," Jill told the two, as she closed the library door behind her before walking over to the table and sitting down next to Marie. "They are healing nicely, though the deeper one will take longer to heal, so I've left more antibiotics. He's to take two a day, one in the morning and one at night. I noticed he's still in some pain, so I added more pain killers The pain killers he takes when he feels he needs them. And from the two left in the bottle, he seems to be needing them yet. Also, have you thought about having Toby talk with a psychologist? After going through what's happened to him, sooner or later, he's going to react to the memories, and maybe in a violent way." After asking about their thoughts concerning Toby's mental state, Jill changed the subject with, "So, anything interesting happen while I was gone," Jill asked, with a shit eating grin on her face. After associating with Seasons House for several years, Jill knew there was always something happening. And sometimes it wasn't pleasant.
"Thank you, Jill. That's one worry off my mind," Jane said, sighing afterwards. "No, we hadn't considered his mental health. He seemed so resilient after what he's been through that it never crossed our minds. Perhaps we better call someone I know and see when they can talk to him. And maybe it would do Charlotte some good to speak with the person I'm thinking of. After her meltdown this afternoon, she has a lot of pent up anger she's hiding."
Jill had studied psychology as her minor while getting her BS. She still had an interest in the field but couldn't find the time as she was attending medical, to study for her license. "How did she have a meltdown, Jane?" Doctor Jill was the one now asking Jane questions. "Was it directed at Toby?"
Jill could see Jane gathering her thoughts, so she remained silent. "It started when I wondered if George Strom was the man Toby described. He was the one that threatened to take Charles to Federal Court if Ruth didn't punish him. Ruth sent him to me to keep him out of Federal Court. Jill, he has no business being here, none at all. And if it wasn't for a lie Toby told, he wouldn't be. The description Toby gave me sounded a lot like the one Charles gave when Strom was in court. So, I had Charles' dad fax me a picture of him. When I showed the picture to Toby, he confirmed Strom was the person known to the kids as 'the man' and only as 'the man'. Toby didn't react well, and what he said about Strom caused Charlotte to run out of the house."
Jane chuckled before saying, "And she found comfort being with Pinto, the horse we've tried for months to put at ease. And Charlotte did it in a few moments. If Pinto had been human, I'd say the two were joined at the hip. But as it is, they're joined in a much deeper bond. It's as though they both understand the other. I found her currying Pinto, stopping every few minutes and crying as she leaned against Pinto's side. I entered the stable as quietly as I could, but she somehow knew I was there. She told me what she wanted to do to Strom, but couldn't do anything because that wasn't her and it would put her on his level. She then had a major breakdown there in the stable. She fell to the ground, bawling. I rushed over and held her, and Pinto laid its head on her shoulder. And you may not believe this, Jil, but when Pinto was sure Charlotte was okay, she went into its stall and closed the stall down on its own. And Charlotte knew Pinto had done that."
"Anyway, we returned to the house to clean up. After cleaning up, I returned to the living room before Charlotte, that's when Toby asked after Charlotte. He even asked if he could help. When he asked that question, Charlotte had walked into the living room. I indicated he should talke to Charlotte, basically putting Charlotte in an unfamiliar position. I actually put her in that situation because she'll defer to someone else when she's in unfamiliar situations. Now she had to make her own decision how to react. She turned to me to make the decision for her, but I told her she'd have to decide the path to walk. She became angry because she didn't know what to do and no one was going to help her, and became so angry that she finally lashed out at Toby. Jill, she unleashed more anger than she did when I erroneously put Francis into an unattainable position. And no, I won't tell you about that, so don't ask. She told him how he ruined her life, took her away from her family, school, her friends, she gave him both barrels. After she said all she had to say, she stood there shaking with anger, tears dripping off her cheeks. Marie and I saw her get into her ready position, the one she uses when she believes someone is about to attack her. Except, she balled up her hands into fists, something she never does when in her ready position. Marie and I were still alert just in case she did make a try for Toby"
"Francis had come out of the library and was standing by me. She was upset seeing how upset Charlotte was at the moment. I had to silence her so she wouldn't interfere in what had to play out, no matter how much it killed me to let it happen. After a few moments, Toby broke the silence by saying what he'd figured out on his own. He realized about our use of petticoat punishment and that Charlotte was actually Charles, the boy he'd lied about. He almost set off Charlotte again, when he told her he wouldn't blame her if she did break him into little pieces. But she came back with a more calm reply, she told him she couldn't do such a thing because that wasn't her. That it wasn't the right thing to do. If she did that, she'd be no better than Strom. She explained what our objectives are here at Seasons House before leaving, then she went back to her bedroom to fix her face after all her crying. Toby was quiet for several minutes, before wistfully saying how he'd really messed up. Asking himself what choice he had. Do what he was told or get the hell beat out of him. Francis offered several options, but Toby said he'd tried those things and his brother always found him."
"We didn't notice it at the time, but Charlotte had returned and told Toby he could have killed his brother. She told him no jury would find him guilty given the scars covering his body, they would consider it self-defence. She even suggested he could have told his dad. It hurt him, but he got up off the couch, took off his shirt and turned so Charlotte could see his back. He then told her he'd get what she saw all over again if he said anything. He then told Charlotte the same thing she'd told him, that he couldn't kill his brother because that wasn't who he was. That it wasn't the right thing to do and would make him no better than Strom. By that time, Charlotte had walked to within a step of Toby. But as we watched, she stepped up to him, put her arms around his neck, pulled him into a hug, and while they both held each other, they cried on each other's shoulder. And Marie and I couldn't interfere, it had to play out."
It was silent in the library after Jane told Jill everything that occurred that afternoon. Jill broke the silence with, "Not only do those three kids need to talk with your friend, but you two need a word with that person too. This entire situation is nothing like what you two normally deal with. Yes, you get boys from nasty homes, or who've been bullied, or what have you. But this type of situation, where one boy was sent here to keep him our of a Federal Court, and another who was savagely beaten. And one who has become as a brother to the one. And to top it off, someone sent two men to kill Toby. Jane, Marie, it wouldn't hurt you two to speak with your friend. Because you are developing PTSD, if you don't have it already. It's also something, going by your description of Charlotte, something she already has developed. And I wouldn't put money against Toby already having it. Even Francis may be on the verge of developing it, as she watched the anguish Charlotte goes through. All five of you need to speak with your friend, Jane. Or I swear, Jane Thompson, I swear," And Jill suddenly got up and hurried towards the library door. Turning before she opened the door, she said with tears in her eyes, "Or I swear, Jane Thompson, I'll be pissed at you until hell freezes over." And with that she opened the library door, slammed it closed behind her and hurried out of Seasons House.
Only Marie was in a position to see out of the window and what happened next. She watched as Jill ran to her car, got in, closed the driver's door, laid her head on the steering wheel and cried. Marie turned to Jane and softly told her, "Our friend needs to speak with Jill too, I think."
Jane stood up from her chair, walked over to the desk in the library, picked up the phone and dialed a number. "Sherry, it's Jane. There are five of us who need to talk with you...Day after tomorrow? That's fine. We'll see you then. And thank you." Jane hung up the phone, then, putting both hands on the desk, leaned on her hands, then hanging her head as she did so. She raised her head, looked at Marie and asked, "Is all of this happening as it's happening for our benefit too, Marie? Are we being forced to examine ourselves by the events that have occurred, just as we put our girls into situations to force them to examine themselves? Have you and I veered off our plotted course, become too ridged in dealing with the boys sent to us? Are we being to stoic with our girls, too distanced from them? We've hid our emotions from our past girls, but now, now they are flowing freely. Although, I will admit mine have been flowing freer than yours. Are we being shown how we can reveal our emotions and not let them detract us from what we are doing? How they'll show our girls we aren't the monsters they may believe we are when we make demands of them and give them little to no choice in doing what we want? Are we being shown how we can still be human in every way and still keep the course we've plotted?"
Jane sighed before pushing herself away from the desk. She walked back to the table, walked past where Marie sat listening to her questions and stood before the window, looking out at the scenery. Marie pushed her chair back, stood up, and walked to stand behind Jane. She put her arms around Jane's waist, laid her chin on Jane's shoulder, and told her, "My dear friend, you have always been the one between us who takes things very personally. You have always questioned your motives and the decisions we make. I'm unable to answer your question concerning our current situation and the recent events, but they have done what you asked. They have put us into a situation that is outside our usual situation, our comfort zone, if you will. Maybe we have become to stoic, to removed from our girls. Maybe we should let them see just how human we are and not the monsters they may see us as when they are forced to do our bidding. Look how things have unfolded since this situation began. How many times have we heard 'we love you too, Aunt Jane' since it's started? How many times did we hear that in the past? While I do a better job of hiding my emotions than you, much as our Charlotte does, you have shown the girls just how much you care for them and how you want only the best for them. When was the last time our girls forced you to go riding? Or made a meal without being told to do so? Our girls still respect your authority, Jane, despite the emotions you have let them see. Yes, we have been forced to examine ourselves and what we do at Seasons House because of this unusual situation. But it hasn't diminished our purpose, it may have even helped our purpose, this time. Can it be used with our next girls, that's a question we can't answer until next time. Continue what you do, chère. Continue caring for our girls, chère, showing them it's possible to live a better life and have a better attitude toward life and others."
Jane had leaned back into Marie as she spoke. The two women stood there looking out the window for several minutes until Jane said, "Marie?"
"Yes, chère."
"You have a boney chin and it's digging into my shoulder"
Marie lifted her chin off Jane's shoulder, kissed her on the cheek and told her, "I love you too, Aunt Jane. Come, chère. Let's go see if our kitchen is still in one piece." And as Marie stood up and backed away from Jane, she took her left hand and planted a good swat on Jane's right butt cheek. "A boney chin you say, HA. That'll teach you to criticize a person's chin."
When Marie administered the swat, Jane had let out a screech, and turned to face Marie, who had a malicious smile on her face. Even though Marie was immune to them, Jane gave her a stink eye nonetheless. Marie chuckled, turned around and started walking to the library door. Seeing her chance, Jane walked quickly up behind Marie, and decided turn about was fair play. This time it was Marie who let out a screech, as Jane administered to her what she'd administered to Jane. The two women left the library, arm in arm, heading to the kitchen to see if it still existed.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
When Jane and Marie left the library, they found Francis standing just outside the library door. "Por favor señoras, si me siguen (Please ladies, if you follow me.)." After saying that, Francis turned and began walking towards the dining room. She first went to Jane's chair and said, "Aunt Jane," as she pulled out Jane's chair, helping Jane push her chair in after Jane sat down. Then, moving to Marie's chair, pulling it out, and saying, "Tante Marie," she waited until Marie sat down and helped her push her chair in. Francis then walked over to the couch and said to him, "If you're hungry, Mr. Camber, dinner is ready." Smiling at Francis, he extended his arms, which she took, and helped him to stand up from the couch; they did have to take a slight detour before going to the dining room table.
After Toby finished in the bathroom, Francis helped him to his seat at the dining room table. Once he was seated, Francis disappeared into the kitchen. It was but a moment later Charlotte entered the dining room from the kitchen, carrying a rectangular serving dish, which she placed on two ceramic squares sitting in the center of the dining room table. Right on Charlotte's heels came Francis, carrying a plate of garlic bread. Charlotte had returned to the kitchen after placing the serving dish on the table, returning with a bowl of mixed salad covered with Italian dressing.
"Well, girls, I see you've improved in setting the table. I commend you for the slight improvement." Jane was dying to try Charlotte's lasagna but had to be 'that' Jane first. "Since the house is still standing, I suppose the kitchen is still in one piece. I'll see for myself after you two have finished in the kitchen. Now, what poison have you given us tonight? It looks passable, hopefully it tastes better than it looks." And with that, Jane took the spatula and removed a large pre-cut square of lasagna, passing the spatula to Marie. The spatula finally reached Toby, as the salad bowl had reached Charlotte. When the salad bowl reached Toby, Charlotte had taken a piece of garlic bread and was passing the plate to Francis. Once Toby had taken a piece of garlic bread, and bowed his head for a moment, they all began eating.
Charlotte was eating very slowly, while she watched Marie and Jane as they ate. Jane knew Charlotte was watching her and Marie, and decided it was time to find out why. Bring up another fork of lasagna, she stopped, looked at Charlotte, and asked, "Miss Thorton. Is there something wrong with your food? You don't like your own cooking, is it? Why are you eating so slowly?"
Marie, too, had been aware of Charlotte watching her and Jane. And sucked on her lips to hold in a chuckle as she watched Charlotte squirm because Jane had once again aimed the spotlight directly at herself because of her actions. "I, a, um, was just wondering how you and Marie liked the lasagna, Aunt Jane. I hope it meets with your satisfaction." Marie chuckled inwardly, watching as Charlotte climbed out of the hole she fell into.
"Well, Miss Thorton. I'll admit it's different from what we usually have, with an interesting flavor we usually don't experience. It's passable, I believe, and something Marie might be interested in making again. You do have the recipe, don't you, Miss Thorton?"
Jane and Marie had watched as a small band of sweat had broken out across Charlotte's forehead as Jane spoke. They both saw the sigh of relief that washed over Charlotte's face because of what Jane had said. Then Jane received the only reply she would tolerate to that type of question. "Yes, Aunt Jane. I have the recipe and would be happy to give it to tante Marie." Marie quickly put a fork of lasagna in her mouth to stifle the laugh that was close to occurring.
"Excellent, Miss Thorton. Then we can look forward to this dish again. Now, there will be a change in your continued making of our meals. You two," and Jane pointed to Francis and Charlotte, "will no longer exclude Marie from the kitchen during your preparations. If she is to learn these recipes, she must be present to observe, oui? And, Miss Thorton, despite your Uncle's teachings, it's likely he forgot to mention one or two things when something doesn't turn out as you expected. So, again, Marie will be in the kitchen with you two from now on. I believe the two of you understand these changes, don't you?"
Telling the girls Marie WOULD be in the kitchen from now on, put a damper on the way both girls had been working in the kitchen. And it showed on their faces. Still, they both knew there'd be no changing Jane's mind, as they replied in unison, "Yes, Aunt Jane." After saying that, it wasn't difficult for both girls to see how pleased Jane was with their decision, as she smiled and nodded her head at their response.
Charlotte had made the lasagna using a 9 ½ x 15 ¼ casserole baking dish, which now sat empty on the dining room table. Apparently, since according to Jane, the meal was just passable, everyone, including Jane, decided to have a second helping of lasagna. The garlic bread had disappeared, as had the tossed salad. So, for a passable meal according to Jane, it turned out to be anything but passable, if the empty dishes and plates were a testimony.
"Now," Jane started, in her no-nonsense tone, "Charlotte and Toby, your tutor, Susan Toliver, arrives tomorrow. She will begin your advanced lessons, the lessons you both asked for at your respective high schools but were denied. And Francis, when she conducts the foreign language lesson, you will attend. I expect the three of you to put forth your best efforts and to afford Susan the same respect you show me and Marie. And you do know the possible consequences if you don't put forth your best efforts and utmost respect. As I see there are no questions, a table needs cleared, dishes need washed, and a kitchen needs cleaned. Upon Marie's approval of HER kitchen, the three of you have the evening to yourselves. Understand, ladies. If Marie isn't satisfied with your efforts, you will redo what she finds deficient."
While the girls knew, and Toby was learning, Jane's last statement was her way of telling the three she wouldn't accept any questions concerning what they'd just been told. It was also her way of dismissing the three. After asking to be excused, and it being granted, Francis and Charlotte pushed their chairs back, stood up, and began clearing the table. What surprised everyone, was watching Toby assist the girls. When Francis and Charlotte looked at Jane, she shook her head slightly, telling the girls not to say anything. Even though he was working slowly, Toby didn't stop until the last piece had been cleared from the table. Then, with pain showing on his face, he slowly made his way to the couch and slowly sat down, letting out a sigh as he did so. In the back of Jane's mind, her monster was listing all of the things they could do to Tylor. Jane told it to shut up.
Marie didn't have to be told by Jane what she was going to do, as it was silently conveyed between the two women. Before the girls had finished in the kitchen, Jane had gone into her bedroom, redressed, and left the house for the stable, where she groomed her mare, saddled her, and let her lead Jane out onto her property. Specifically the pond. Marie had gone into the kitchen and helped the girls clean the dishes and the kitchen, before going into the living room, not only to keep an eye on Toby but to continue where she'd left off reading in the book she'd started. The girls, once finished with the kitchen, had gone up to their rooms, freshening their faces without needing to be told. After they came back down, they went into the living room, sat on either side of Toby and the three talked until being told it was time to get ready for bed. After helping Toby off the couch, they helped him up the stairs and saw him to his bedroom, asking if he needed any help bathing himself because of the wounds he still had. Because he could only take a bath at the moment, he considered the question and decided having someone wash his back wouldn't hurt. Toby asked Charlotte to stay and wash his back for him after he was in the bathtub.
If Francis was upset because Toby chose Charlotte, she hid it well, as she left Toby's bedroom and walked down the hall to her's. Marie had gone into the study, unlocked the cabinet door, turned on the monitor, and split-screened Toby's and the girl's bedrooms on the monitor. She saw Charlotte in Toby's bedroom, and caught the end of the conversation between her and Toby, with Toby telling her he'd call her when she could wash his back. She then focused on Francis' bedroom, watching as Francis undressed, took clean lingerie out of the chest of drawers, took her robe out of the closet, and went into the en suite to shower. Her attention was drawn back to Toby's bedroom as she heard Toby call Charlotte. Marie switched to the camera in Toby's en suite, watching as Charlotte walked into the bathroom, picked up a washcloth, soap it, and gently began washing Toby's back. The two chatted while Charlotte washed Toby's back, and once or twice, Marie thought she saw a tear or two slide down Charlotte's cheek and she gently washed his back, careful of the wounds that were healing. Once she was finished, Toby thanked her and Charlotte left the bathroom and the bedroom, walking slowly to her own bedroom.
Marie watched as Charlotte entered her own bedroom, but went directly to her bed and sat down. "It isn't right, Marie," Charlotte said, then looked up at the camera. "After getting an up-close look at those wounds and scars on Toby's back, if his brother survives, he should be thrown in prison and left to rot. Instead, he'll only get a few years and then be out and likely looking for Toby when he does. And the entire time he's in prison, he'll be blaming Toby for his getting shot and sent to prison, when getting shot was not Toby's doing and when it was the statements from the kids that caused him to be sent to prison. But what if he turns State's evidence against those running everything? What if he only gets probation, it's possible if they think he has the most damning information they could use against Strom? He could deal for no jail time in exchange for testifying against Strom and the others. Then he'd come after Toby without having to wait years to do so. Toby needs protected, Marie. He needs to disappear so Tylor can't find him. I feel so helpless, tante Marie."
Marie, always the stoic one no matter the situation in the house, reached up and knuckled tears out of her eyes, as she watched the anguish on Charlotte's face. She watched as Charlotte stood up from her bed and began to undress, tears sliding down her cheeks as she did. In days gone by, Charlotte would often hum to herself as she undressed and showered. Not this night. This night, there was a dark cloud hanging over Charlotte. It was a dark cloud of despair because she couldn't do anything to help protect Toby when everything with his brother had concluded. "Well, chère, you may not be able to do anything, but Jane and I can." She then took out her keys and unlocked the security drawer. Reaching inside, she pulled out their book with phone numbers of everyone they dealt with. Finding Ruth's home phone number, she picked up the phone and made the call. "Hello, Ruth, it's Marie...Yes and no. We're all doing our best under the circumstances, but there's helplessness running rampant...It's about protecting Toby once he leaves us and, if his brother survives, from his brother...Yes, his going to prison is likely, but if he makes a deal with the prosecutor? Exchanges information for no prison time? He may then come after Toby...Ruth, you really think Tylor would obey a restraining order? After everything he's done?...Our Charlotte is going off the rails with worry, Ruth...Why is she worrying? Because she can't see any way to protect Toby after he leaves us or if anyone will protect him after he goes back home, which shouldn't happen, by the way, Ruth...That's true Ruth, his dad is there but so far isn't aware of what's been done to Toby. Has anyone sent you pictures of the severe beating he was given?...They have, good. Maybe it's time his father sees those pictures and knows about everything Toby's been suffering. And maybe it's time his father relocates somewhere the boy would like to live and with others around who could protect them both...Why Ruth, I believe you're psychic. Kingston is where Toby said he could live, he said it's pretty country...It's important Ruth...I know you'll do the best you can. But our Charlotte needs to hear something positive before she has a complete meltdown...You're preaching to the choir, Ruth. There's three of us who would like to do the same...Alright. Get back to us as soon as you can...You have a good night too." Marie hung up the phone, putting the phone book back into the secure drawer before closing and locking it. She checked the monitor one last time, seeing the girls and Toby about to come back downstairs.
The door to the study opened, and a fresh-looking Jane walked in, closing the door behind her. "Well, what'd Ruth say?"
Marie chuckled, shook her head, and replied with, "Basically… she'll do what she can. She'll show Toby's father the pictures taken of all he's been through. But whether the father decides to act, eh. I told her our Charlotte is on the verge of a meltdown with worry about Toby's safety, and how Toby would like to live out here if he could. I also told her how three of us were in agreement with her, and had thought of several things we'd like to do to those running this mess. But right now, I'm more concerned about Charlotte. She washed Toby's back for him while he was in the tub. Then, after going back to her bedroom, sat on her bed and talked to me through the camera, Jane. She was looking directly at the camera as she spoke. I'm worried she's on the verge of a complete meltdown if we don't hear some positive news. She needs to hear how Toby will be protected once he leaves us."
"Marie, it's a mystery to me as well, how she knows when we're watching her. But we've both done all we can by informing those dealing with the case of Toby's needs and our concerns for his safety. Maybe Sherry can help Charlotte realize that fact. That you can do only what you can do and trust others to do what needs to be done. I'll talk with Charlotte first thing in the morning. But now, I hear bedroom doors closing, so we better get out there. By the way. When was the last time you went for a ride?"
There was no pretense of Jane and Marie having been doing something else while the three had been getting ready for bed. Both Marie and Jane stood in the living room, facing the stairs and waiting for the three to arrive. Three slow steps could be heard walking towards the stairs, and slower steps as they descended the stairs. As Jane and Marie watched the three slowly descend the stairs, Francis was in front of Toby and Charlotte behind him. They were in that formation in case Toby faltered on the stairs and started to fall. Toby was taking one cautious step at a time, and the girls were matching him step for step. Both women knew Charlotte would have helped Toby simply because he needed the help. The old Francis would have come down the stairs without a care for Toby's needs. Now, she kept asking if he was doing okay, and if he needed to stop for a few moments. Because of Charlotte, Francis truly cared for someone besides herself. Watching as the three reached the ground floor, Toby let out a big sigh and slowly walked into the living room, past Jane and Marie, and to the end table at the right side of the couch. There he took out a pill from each of the two bottles, throwing both into his mouth before washing them down with water from a glass of water near both bottles. Then, he slowly walked back over to Jane and Marie, standing between Francis and Charlotte, and silently waited.
Because Marie hadn't taken the clothing Toby brought with him, he was wearing a loose tee shirt and pajama bottoms. The girls by contrast were wearing their nightgowns underneath their robes. It wasn't hard for Jane and Marie to see how fatigued Toby was at this moment, so Jane shortened what she usually did before the girls went to bed. She quickly checked the girl's faces, making sure they'd cleaned all of their makeup off and applied moisturizer. Jane also saw they'd brushed their hair. "Well, girls. I see you're finally doing much better cleaning off your makeup and remembering to brush your hair. It's taken you both long enough to remember. Toby. How are you feeling right now?"
Toby squeezed his eyes shut and opened them again, willing himself to stay awake. "Truthfully, Aunt Jane, I need to sleep. I'm still in pain but it's manageable, to a point. My back still hurts if I lean against anything hard, otherwise, I can manage. It's my legs and butt that hurt the worst. I feel everything pull each time I take a step, which is why I'm slow on my feet. I'm trying to find a gate that doesn't cause everything to pull. And I discovered if I walk stiff-legged, my butt hurts. Overall, Aunt Jane, I'm doing much better being here. Thank you for allowing me to stay here with everyone. All of you have really made a difference in me."
Jane had to show her authority, so didn't react as she'd like to react by hugging Toby right that minute. "Very good, Toby. If you need any help during the night, call out. Marie is just down the hall from your room. Girls, thank you for helping Toby today. I expect you two to continue helping him when it's needed. Now, please help him up to his bedroom and make sure he has no needs before going to your own rooms. Goodnight to each of you."
Recognizing their dismissal, the three turned and slowly made their way to the stairs. As they came down, they ascended the same way, one step at a time, with Charlotte leading and Francis following, keeping a watchful eye on Toby as they climbed. When the three had disappeared up the stairs, Marie said, as she continued looking where the three had last been, "I'm going to miss those three when they have to leave us, Jane. It will be strange to get back to our regular selves when our next girl arrives."
Marie didn't have to look at Jane to know she was nodding her head in agreement. "So am I, Marie. All three will be sorely missed." Both women bid each other a good night before Jane headed first to the study to check all three using the monitor. After seeing the three climb into their beds, she turned on the motion detectors in each room, closed and locked the cabinet then headed to her bedroom. Marie checked the front and back doors to make sure they were locked. She then checked the kitchen and the downstairs bathroom, making sure all lights were off and nothing was amiss, before turning off the living room lights and making her way up the stairs and to her own bed. It had been another long day.
6 a.m. comes early to Seasons House, as Marie left her bedroom and made her first stop at Toby's bedroom. When she entered his bedroom, the first thing she noticed was Toby's absence in his bed, a neatly made bed she observed. As she looked around the room, she noticed the absence of any clothes thrown on the floor or anywhere else. The room was as tidy as it had been when they readied it for his return from the hospital. Hearing water splashing, she went to the en suite, opened the door, and looked in. "Good morning, tante Marie," a chipper Toby greeted Marie, as he turned his head to see who'd opened the bathroom door. "Um, do you think you could wash my back for me?"
Chuckling lightly, Marie asked, "Won't being seen by a woman embarrass you, young man?"
Toby laughed, then said, "I'll answer your question while you please wash my back, it itches."
Toby saw a stern look develop on Marie's face, as she replied, "Coercion has no place in this house, at least by our guests. It would be wise of you not to practice it on Jane, if you wish to continue being our patient. Otherwise, you might find yourself being one of our girls. I will try to be gentle on your back, young one." Marie took a washcloth from the towel rack, Toby handed her the soap he was using, and after lathering up the washcloth, she gently began washing Toby's back. Toby would wince or hiss as Marie washed the deeper wounds as they were still quite sensitive. "Now, young man, your answer," she told Toby as she continued to gently clean Toby's back.
"During my talks with Francis and Charlotte, I learned it was you who came into my bedroom to remove my clothes, so I'd have none of my 'boy' clothing to wear; that is your standard petticoat punishment practice. So, tante Marie, because you came into my bedroom to remove all of my own clothing, it stood to reason that you would have taken off any clothing I still had on while sleeping. So, you've already seen me naked, what's one more time? Plus, it's not like I have anything different about me… " Toby's voice trailed off after realizing how he meant to finish the sentence would have been false. Because, even though Marie had seen naked boys before, none bore the marks of being severely beaten as Toby had.
Quietly, Marie said, "It's okay, cher (dear.). I know what you meant. Your plumbing isn't any different than any other boy I’ve seen naked. And yes, I saw you when I came to remove all of your clothing. I will also tell you, after seeing what someone did to you, I had a lot of dark thoughts about what I'd like to administer to them. A woman will be here tomorrow, her name is Sherry Daniels, and all of us are going to sit down and speak with her. You, Francis, and Charlotte especially. Specifically you most of all, because of the likelihood you've developed PTSD after enduring your ordeal. Cher (Dear,), it's even been rough on Jane and me, seeing someone with your demeanor and aptitude being treated as you were treated. There, your back is now clean. Hurry as quickly as you're able, I now have to look in on our girls."
Marie rinsed out the washcloth, dried her hands, then looking at Toby again, left the en suite with more dark thoughts wanting to be released. After leaving Toby's bedroom, she schooled herself, walked the short distance to Charlotte's bedroom, and entered the room. Once again, she found no Charlotte. She muttered to herself as she walked to the well-made bed, lifted the pillow, and found Charlotte's neatly folded nightgown where it should be. Still muttering to herself, something about she hoped that girl hadn't been foolish and gone to the kitchen alone, she went to the en suite door, opened it, and heard the shower running. "Morning, tante Marie. Did you sleep well?"
"How… " was all Marie was able to say before getting her answer.
Laughing, Charlotte told her, "Air currents, tante Marie. Plus, it's too early for Aunt Jane to come check on us. Is Toby okay this morning? He was in a lot of pain last night, only he didn't want you and Jane to worry so he didn't tell either of you. He asked you nicely to wash his back, didn't he? We told him to ask you nicely and you might do it for him. And no, I haven't forgotten about not going into the kitchen alone, if you were going to ask."
Marie stood at the bathroom door dumbfounded, she was listening to another Jane. Charlotte said or asked everything she was going to tell her or ask her. It was as though this boy-bodied girl had second sight, or something. "To answer your questions about Toby, yes he seems better today. Yes, he asked nicely for me to wash his back. He is still in pain but hides it well. You and Francis continue helping when he needs it or if you see he needs it but won't ask. Now, stop perdre du temps (wasting time), you must hurry. Jane will not be happy if you aren't downstairs before she appears. Déplace-le (Move it!)!" Marie was pleased to see Charlotte's bra and panties neatly folded and lying on the sink countertop. Looking behind the bathroom door, she was again pleased to see the robe hanging from the hook attached to the back of the door. This is what they've always found when coming into Charlotte's bedroom in the morning.
Leaving Charlotte's bedroom, Marie went into Francis' bedroom, not really surprised by what she saw. Her bed was neatly made, and looking under the pillow, she found Francis' nightgown neatly folded. Going to the en suite, she quietly opened the door, heard the shower running, and saw Francis' silhouette behind the shower curtain. Her bra and panties were where they've been the past several days, and neatly folded. Checking behind the bathroom door, she saw the robe hung where it should be hung. Backing out of the bathroom, and silently closing the door, she took one more look at Francis' bedroom before leaving to make her way to the kitchen. Charlotte had been a godsend, were her thoughts after seeing Francis' bedroom.
Jane came out to the living room just as she saw the girls and Toby partway down the stairs. Charlotte was ahead of Toby and Francis behind, each stepping as slowly as the steps Toby was taking. After the three reached the bottom of the stairs, the girls flanked Toby as the three slowly walked into the living room. This time, instead of walking past Jane to take his pills, Toby stopped where the girls stopped and waited with them. "Toby, how are you this morning?" Jane asked, her voice laced with iron, desiring to enforce her authority over the three.
"Somewhat better, Aunt Jane. My back is starting to itch, which while annoying, is a good sign. My legs are feeling better, and itching as well. There is still some pain and I'm still being careful walking because of my butt. If I walk too fast, what's still healing pulls, causing my pain to spike. I'll take my pills when allowed, Aunt Jane."
Jane threw her head in the direction of the end table before telling Toby, "Go. Take what you need." She let Toby walk by before starting in on both girls. "You're becoming even more presentable each day, ladies. You are almost on par with the salon makeup artists, also, ladies. Perhaps, one day, with more practice, you'll get there. Right now though, a table needs to be properly set and Marie needs your assistance in the kitchen. So ladies, get to work." Both girls knew a dismissal when they heard it from Jane. Both girls would have rushed to the kitchen to retrieve everything needed to properly set the table, but the consequences would have been unpleasant, and tiring. So, together, they calmly walked to the kitchen and began a well-practiced dance. Watching until the girls entered the kitchen, Jane turned her attention to Toby, turning to just catch as he schooled the pain off his face. "Why do you hide it, Toby? The pain you're experiencing? There is no shame in showing pain after what you've endured. If you hide your pain from Jill, you might be hiding something serious. We are here to help you, not condemn you or humiliate you, or to harm you. You must be honest with us if we are going to help you to the best of our abilities. Do you understand?"
Nodding his head as he spoke, he told Jane, "Yes, Aunt Jane. I understand, I just don't want to be more of a bother than I've been. Or cause anyone more strife. My past actions have already done that for several people. If I had shown the actual pain I was feeling, I felt I'd become a bother to all of you. And after how this whole mess has affected everyone here, it didn't feel right to show my actual pain and add to the anguish I've witnessed. Over the years, I've learned to tolerate a lot of pain, it was that or get more of the same. I chose to learn tolerance, it hurt much less."
Looking at Toby with empathy in her eyes and a heavy heart, her reply was, "I can't imagine the need to endure such pain to avoid more pain. However, when Jill is next here, you will be completely honest with her. You will tell her where you experience the most pain and when it occurs. You will no longer hide your pain from us. If you must go lie down to ease the pain you're feeling, then say that is what you must do. We will help you the best we can, but not if you continue to hide it from us. Do I make myself clear, Mr. Camber? Or should I make it Miss Camber?"
Toby hung his head, gently shaking it left the right, before raising his head and telling Jane, "I'm sorry, Aunt Jane. In thinking I'd cause you less worry by not telling you about my pain, I was actually causing you to worry. I won't hide how I'm feeling from you, Marie, or the girls anymore. I do understand what you've told me. As to Mr. or Miss., Aunt Jane. It may sound strange, but if I wasn't covered with all of these wounds or scars, it might be interesting to become one of your girls. Gaining a different perspective on life would be an eye-opener. Um, Aunt Jane. Would you please help me to the bathroom?"
No one would walk the study this morning when notifying Jane of breakfast being ready. It was given to Jane and Toby, both back in the living room, when the girls brought out a platter each of assorted peeled fruit slices and Marie with the egg casserole, consisting of eggs, hash brown potatoes, ham, chopped green peppers, chopped onions, and a cheese topping. After setting down their platters, both girls went over to the couch and helped Toby off the couch, staying with him as he slowly walked to his chair at the dining room table. As was his usual habit at their meals, Toby bowed his head momentarily, before the egg casserole was dished out and the platters passed around. After raising her eyebrow at Marie, who jerked her head towards Charlotte, the girls heard Jane say, "This isn't too bad, Marie. You've been holding out on us."
When Jane spoke, six pairs of eyes were on her, only one pair catching the look between Jane and Marie. That pair of eyes looked back down and continued eating, knowing, without looking at Jane, what was about to happen. Marie corrected Jane by telling her, "Oh, cher, this casserole isn't my recipe, but our Miss Thorton's."
Now Charlotte's head was really down, almost touching her plate, as she actually shoveled the casserole into her mouth, feeling more than knowing all eyes were now on her. "Miss Thorton, is there something wrong with your back? If not, why are you doing a Quasimodo impression? Sit up, young lady. Young ladies at this table do not hunch over while eating. I think we all would like to hear why you felt the need to almost put your face into your plate. Don't you agree, Miss Thorton?"
Once again Jane had put Charlotte into an uncomfortable situation, the need to say why she had been eating hunched over. Both Jane and Marie saw Charlotte going through thought after thought, until she finally made a decision. "No, Aunt Jane, I don't agree. I knew what Marie was going to say to you before she said it. I also knew what you were going to say about the casserole before you said it. I knew the way I was sitting was going to draw your attention, knowing you'd say something about the way I was sitting. I'm tired of the humiliation laid on me when I try doing something nice for everyone by fixing nice meals. I'm tired of the iron mistress voice trying to make me feel bad because I might not met your standards. All because I've tried to do something nice for everyone. Not anymore, Aunt Jane. Not, anymore." And with that, Charlotte pushed her chair back, got up from her chair, ran out of the dining room, up the stairs, and to her bedroom.
Francis was about to take another fork full of the casserole before Charlotte started speaking. The fork was halfway to her mouth but froze as Charlotte started speaking. That's where it stayed the entire time Charlotte spoke, even as she watched Charlotte bolt from the table and head to her bedroom. It was still in place as she looked between Jane and Marie, seeing the message being passed. She watched as Marie patted Jane's hand, then started to get up from the table. "Tante Marie, let me go to her?" It was Toby who'd asked Marie. Then looking at Jane he told her, "Aunt Jane, you forget Charles isn't one of you regular girls, who need the humiliation and iron voice to help them change their behavior and attitude. Charles is already there, he needs no behavioral change or his attitude adjusted. Charlotte may not have been severely beaten physically as I was, but you've severely beaten her mentally. It isn't something she is accustomed to having done to her. Please, I know how she's feeling. Please let me go to her."
The reminder that Charlotte wasn't one of Jane's regular girls, hit Jane hard. She'd been treating her as one of her girls who needed a change of behavior and attitude, and hadn't taken into account how her constant needling was going to affect someone not needing to change. Jane was looking at her lap, lost in thought over what had just occurred. "Go, cher. Go help our Charlotte," Marie told Toby in a soft voice. "Go with him, Francis. Help him up the stairs then come back, oui?"
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Francis and Toby asked to be excused, which was granted by Marie, Jane was still lost in her thoughts. Francis helped Toby move his chair back, stand, and together, they slowly walked to the stairs. Marie had been watching the two as they slowly walked towards the stairs, and, as they had now disappeared from her sight but within her hearing, she heard them as they started ascending the stairs. She then turned her attention to Jane, still sitting in her chair, head down, lost in her mind. She reached out with her left hand and took Jane's right hand, which was lying in Jane's lap. "Mon cher et doux ami (My dear and sweet friend,), look at me."
Marie shook Jane's arms, finally getting Jane to look up and at Marie. "Chère, we are not in our normal situation, where the threat of being exposed as a boy dressed as a girl or the threat of being sent home dressed as they are, is enough to get our girls to do what we want. With Francis, that works, but it won't work with Charlotte or, now Toby. Toby will do as we ask because he's grateful to be staying here, and away from his tormentors. Plus, I believe his Aunt Terri instilled in him those traits we now see. Charlotte is an altogether different case. You gave her the choice of staying as Charles or becoming one of our girls, she chose the latter, for the experience. She has developed such an affection for you she would do almost anything you ask of her, but we can't use our usual methods because, unlike Toby, she's more worried about disappointing you. I truly believe we could threaten to send her home dressed as she is, or naked, and it wouldn't phase her. She knows who she is and cares nothing what others but her parents and you, think of her. Oh, she cares what I think of her, but not as deeply as she does you. Go, take your plate with you, and see how Toby is doing with our Charlotte. I'll have Francis finish her breakfast and we'll take care of everything."
Marie chuckled as she watched Jane take more of the egg casserole, before pushing back her chair, standing, picking up her plate, and walking to the study. After entering the study, Jane walked to her desk, sat the plate down, then unlocked the cabinet, turned on the monitor, and selected the camera in Charlotte's bedroom. What she saw on the monitor almost disappointed her, as Charlotte sat at the vanity with a jar of cold cream sitting open on the vanity counter and a tissue in her hand. But not Toby. Splitting the screen, she activated the camera in the hallway to the bedrooms, observing Toby standing outside Charlotte's bedroom. "Charlotte, please, let me in. I just want to help." Through the microphone in Charlotte’s bedroom, Jane could tell Charlotte could hear what Toby was saying, but seemed to ignore his pleas. As Jane watched, and finished eating her breakfast, Charlotte reached up with the tissue but paused her hand over the mouth of the jar. And held it there. From Charlotte's reflection in the mirror on the vanity, Jane could see the fierce battle going on inside of the girl’s mind. One minute it seemed her mind was made up, and her hand would start to dip the tissue into the cold cream, the next, she'd pull her hand back up and sit there. Back and forth it went on, until finally, her face contorting in anger, Charlotte jammed the tissue into the jar, picked up the jar, and slammed it back on the vanity countertop before storming to the bedroom door, kicking the chair out from under the doorknob and going over to her bed, and throwing herself across it.
Watching the monitor, Jane saw Toby react when he heard the noise from the bedroom. Trying the doorknob again, Toby walked into Charlotte's bedroom when he found the door would open. After entering the room, and closing the door behind him, Jane watched as Toby stood and looked around Charlotte's bedroom. She saw him stare at the open jar of cold cream sitting on the vanity countertop and the tissue sticking out of it, asking, "So, why didn't you?"
The silence in the room was deafening, until Charlotte, still lying on her stomach, turned her head so she could see Toby and asked him in a hostile voice, "Why didn't I WHAT?"
Calmly, Toby pointed to the open jar of cold cream with the tissue sticking out of it and again asked, "So, why didn't you?"
Moving her head to follow where Toby was pointing, Charlotte turned her head back with her chin resting on the bed and answered, "Trust me, I wanted to. I almost did several times before you came. But I couldn't, even though I really wanted to."
"Why couldn't you?" Toby asked, as she slowly walked over and with a grimace, righted the chair and sat down, sighing after sitting. "Why couldn't you remove the makeup on your face and become Charles again? That's what you were fighting with yourself about, isn't it?"
It was Charlotte's turn to let out a sigh before replying, "Yeah, it's what I was fighting with myself to do. But I couldn't. Because I gave Aunt Jane my word of honor, and I can't go back on my word. GOD… I hate all of this!"
Toby started laughing, it pained him but he laughed anyway. "You hate all of THIS?" And he waved his hand around the room. "Girl, all of this is great, compared to where I came from. Compared to what I endured, you've got it easy. How many times has Aunt Jane taken a belt, a wire, or anything she could get her hands on, and beat the hell out of you? I'll bet none. I'll bet she's never raised her hand to you, has she? That's because she doesn't have to, does she? She's the best psychologist I've ever seen, and I've seen a few, thanks to Aunt Terri. How do you sleep at night, Charlotte? Do you worry Aunt Jane will come into your room and decide you shouldn't be sleeping because she can't and beat you awake? Or yell at you to get up and make her something to eat at 2:00 in the morning? I'll bet you sleep soundly, barring any nightmares or other bad dreams, right? Let me get undressed and let you take a good look at something you could honestly hate. Shall I do that for you, Charlotte? Shall I get naked so you can see what's really to hate? For almost two years, Charlotte, two damn yearsAND YOU HATE ALL OF THIS? What a self-absorbed whiny bitch. And here I thought you were Miss Strong-willed Charlotte. Boy, was I wrong!"
Toby had been looking at the floor as he spoke. His view of the floor was blocked by two feet wearing low heels, causing him to look up into the face of an angry girl. "Well looky here, she can stand by herself. So, what now? Do I become the little pieces you spoke of, which I agree with you, by the way? Or what?"
"What the hell were you going to do after graduating high school? I'd really like to know."
Looking down at Charlotte's feet, he told her in a melancholy voice, "I'd like to go to college and get my B.S., then a Masters, then a Ph.D., all in psychology. I'm pretty good at motivating people and sidestepping all of the BS to get down to their real problems. Take you for instance," and he looked up at Charlotte. "I screwed up your life with the lie I told about you, and even though you hide the anger well, it's still there. And when you heard me identify Strom, and when we heard what's happening to the kids who didn't get arrested, and you felt helpless to do anything, your anger surfaced and you reacted. You hold things inside of you. You could have talked with Aunt Jane or tante Marie, or me, but not you. You play the Lone Ranger until it gets too much then blow up. Did you ever once think how Jane and Marie are feeling about all of this? You didn't see Jane when you ran away from the dining room table just now. You really hurt her with your outburst. People try and help you and that's how you repay them? Jane has seen how indecisive you can be and has been putting you into situations that force you to make your own decisions. But not you. You have to bite the hand that's offering you help. How am I doing so far? From the look on your face, I'd say I've been hitting every nail on the head every time. What do you think?"
Inwardly, Toby cringed when Charlotte raised her arms before she turned, stomped to the vanity, pulled the tissue out of the jar of cold cream, threw it into the waste basket, before putting the lid on the jar, and putting it back where it had been sitting on the vanity countertop. She then turned and stomped back to where Toby was sitting before telling him, "I hate it when people get some things right about me. Come on, we'd better get back downstairs. I'm probably in a bunch of trouble for what I did." Reaching down to Toby, she took his outstretched hands and helped him out of the chair. With his arm around Charlotte's shoulder, and her arm gently around his waist, they slowly walked to the bedroom door. After Charlotte opened the door, they slowly left the bedroom, stopping so Charlotte could close the door behind them. Then their slow walk began to the stairs, and with Charlotte leading, they made their way slowly down the stairs. Reaching the bottom of the stairs, Charlotte helped Toby to the couch and helped him sit down. Turning towards the dining room, she saw the table had been cleared so walked directly into the kitchen. After walking past the kitchen door, it was an upset Francis she saw first. Tears were hanging in her eyes, as was the worried expression she was wearing. She turned to Marie when she heard, "You need to go to the study, oui? She needs you and you need her. Aller (Go.)."
When Jane saw the two were going to be coming downstairs, she shut off the monitor, closed and locked the cabinet before getting out of her chair and walking over to the front window. As she stood there, looking out over the scenery, there was a knock on the study door, which she ignored. She was still upset. Then, "Aunt Jane," Charlotte said, as she had opened the study door and stuck her head inside. Seeing Jane just standing at the window, ignoring her, she opened the door, came into the study, and softly closed the door behind her. Slowly, she walked over to the window and silently stood beside Aunt Jane. Their view of the scenery outside wasn't marred by any structures, giving them an excellent view of tall grass, patches of old-growth trees, and a flock of sheep grazing off in the distance. Charlotte broke the silence with, "I'm sorry, Aunt Jane. What I said was wrong, as was leaving the table as I did. I didn't mean to hurt you, I wasn't thinking about how it was going to affect you."
There was a long silence after what Charlotte said to Jane. It started to break when Jane reached out with her left arm and placed it around Charlotte's shoulders, pulling the girl closer to her side. Charlotte's right arm went around Jane's waist, and that's how they stayed for some time. "Yes, Charlotte, you were wrong, in what you said and did. But the greater fault is mine because I've been treating you as I do Francis or how I would have treated any of my past girls. I had wanted you to experience the many things girls your age might experience, but I went about it the wrong way. I wanted you to experience being a runway model for an afternoon, and a makeup model, but felt if I asked you to do those things, you'd have balk and refuse to do them. I threw you into those situations, giving you little choice but to comply. From this minute forward, I will take you aside and tell you what I'd like you to do. I will explain everything to you, and hope you choose to engage in the activity. Once we're in front of Francis, I will act as though you have no choice in the matter, keeping with how Francis is treated. Do you find those changes acceptable?"
The study was quiet once again, as Charlotte pondered what Jane just told her. After several quiet moments, Charlotte asked, "And if I decide not to participate in the activity?"
Once more the energy of the air in the study remained sedate, as Jane thought through different ways to plead with Charlotte without seeming to be pleading. Finally, "Charlotte. Since you've been here, you've done nothing but help Francis. You saw she needed help and you stepped in to help without being told or prodded. That is who you are, someone who willingly helps when you see the need. I'm asking you again to help Francis by willingly participating in the activities I have planned or will plan. Francis knows what activities you're likely to engage in because she herself did those very ones. She knew I was going to have you participate as a runway model when I took you to The Style Shoppe. She also knew you'd be a makeup model at the salon because she experienced the same thing. For her sake, please go along with me on this. I'll reiterate what I told you when you arrived. These experiences may never have happened to you as Charles. As Charles, the only way you'd have been a runway model, a teenage girl runway model, would be if you volunteered to do it for a charity event. As to being a makeup model, I doubt a charity event would ever do such a thing. Here, with Marie and myself, you have a great chance to experience the other side of the 'fence.' You get to see what it's like being a girl, participating in activities girls do engage in and make a career out of. You also experience the downside of being female, as you've already seen at the mall. On the other hand, you also saw how animalistic males can be when seeing a beautiful young woman strut as you did in that black outfit. All of this teaches you, Charles, it opens your mind in ways you ordinarily wouldn't have happened. Charles, book smarts give you the groundwork to experience life, with life being the best teacher of all. So please, Charles. Accept my proposal and continue helping Francis and learn from these events."
After several minutes, Charlotte pulled away from Jane, walked to the bookshelves, took down 'the book,' and began the five circumferences of the study. Jane didn't have to see Charlotte's face to know she was thinking about all Jane had said. She also didn't have to witness the five circuits of the study, as she knew Charlotte would do the five honorably. She heard 'the book' slide back on the bookshelf, felt an arm go around her waist, then heard, "Everything you said is true, Aunt Jane. Nowhere else could I learn what's on the other side of the 'fence.' Charles did see the animals grazing aimlessly through malls and stores, salivating every time they saw a pretty young lady. I witnessed a zoo one of those times at the Mall when a group of terribly attractive girls, about my age, passed three boys going in the opposite direction. But I never would have known how the girls felt, when it happened, if I hadn't experienced it for myself. I had my hair cut at a salon when mom and I were shopping. It was convenient since I was already at a place that cut hair, and easier than leaving the salon and going to the barbershop. But this time," and Charlotte paused, lost in thought, "this time was much different. This time, apart from Sandy, I was treated more intimately. And not just to make me appear more like a girl. Women have a greater bond among themselves than men. Sharing this or that, or discussing this or that seems to come naturally. And they open up to each other easier than men do."
"During the makeup class, there was one girl, Barbara Well, who had a severe case of acne. She was really upset by how others treated her because of her acne, even the girls in the class ignored her. I went up to her and started talking with her, then took her to Carolyn and asked if she had anything that could help her. Carolyn had a solution that was new to the market, made specifically to fight acne. When Barbara asked Carolyn if it worked, she called a girl named Mel, who showed us her before pictures. Her acne was ten times worse than what Barbara had, but that solution cleared up her skin. Mel called on another girl, Patty, who also showed up before pictures, and she had been worse than Mel. Both girls then asked Barbara to sit with them so they could show her some tricks they used to cover their acne until their skin cleared."
"But I also learned how cold young girls can be towards each other. The last time at the mall, a group of girls, led by a girl full of herself, thought I was prissy and was going to teach me manners. When I told her she couldn't teach manners to a goat, she tried to slap me. I caught her arm at the wrist and applied quite a bit of pressure. When I asked her if she wanted it to get really ugly, they all somehow decided to move out of my way as I walked toward them to leave. Then, as I was walking away from them, I learned I was a female dog from the girl who tried to slap me. Of course, after she said that, I turned to look at her, and had that darn itch on my nose again."
"I volunteered to be one of your girls, Aunt Jane. I gave you my word of honor I'd do what you asked, and I can't go back on my word. It would be dishonorable. As long as you ask me and explain what I will be doing, then I will do as you ask. I won't balk at the thought of doing it, though I may be apprehensive beforehand. For Francis' sake, I will appear to be unhappy with what you tell me to do in front of her. Is my decision satisfactory with you, Aunt Jane?"
Silence reigned supreme in the study again, broken after several minutes by Jane saying, "Yes, Charlotte. I can accept your decision. And I thank you for that decision. There's Susan Toliver now, just pulling into the driveway. Come, let's go welcome her to my home." And together, Charlotte's arm still around Jane's waist, and Jane's arm around Charlotte's shoulder, the two walked to the study door, where Charlotte opened the door for Jane and followed her out of the study, closing the door behind her. The study was quiet again, except for the used plate, empty of the bit of casserole Jane simply loved.
Francis had come straight back downstairs as Marie had instructed. Marie told her to finish her breakfast before the two cleared the table, with Toby's slow help, and finished everything needed in the kitchen. Marie told Francis to sit with Toby on the couch and wait for Susan to arrive, and that is where Francis and Toby were when Susan arrived and knocked on the front door. Jane had sent Charlotte into the living room after they came out of the study, and she and Francis helped Toby to stand as the three waited to be introduced to Susan. Very few who came to Seasons House didn't know what Jane and Marie did at Seasons House. And those who didn't know, Jane often made sure the girls were elsewhere. Susan happened to be one of those in the know, so wasn't shocked when Jane introduced the three to Susan.
"Girls, and Toby, this is Susan Toliver, the tutor I told you three about." As the girls had often done when helping Toby get around, Francis was on Toby's right and Charlotte was on his left. "Susan, the young lady on the left is Francis Winslow." Francis did a slight curtsy when Jane said her name. "The young man in the middle is Toby Camber." Toby nodded his head towards Susan, bending over to bow to Susan would have been too painful. "And the young lady on the right is Charlotte Thorton." As Francis did, Charlotte did a slight curtsy when Jane said her name.
"It's a pleasure to meet the three of you. I hope I can teach you as much as you want to learn. Charlotte, is your father Jeb Thorton? I ask because his firm has done work for me in the past."
"Yes, ma'am, Jeb Thorton is my father," Charlotte replied, having looked to Jane for permission to answer truthfully; Jane had nodded her head slightly.
"He's a wonderful man, Charlotte. He speaks very highly of you. So, what I want to do first is evaluate each of you with a few tests.” When Susan said tests, all three appeared to have just sucked on a lemon. “Oh, please, no sour faces. The tests I'll give you won't be graded, they're just to give me a starting point. From what Jane has told me, you, Toby, and you, Charlotte, had asked to be put into advanced classes at your respective high schools. And the anal heads denied your requests?" Toby and Charlotte nodded their heads at Susan's question. "Yeah, that doesn't surprise me a bit. They didn't want you two to mess up their program by taking classes others weren't interested in taking. They're more interested in social engineering than enriching minds. And Francis, I understand you have been doing much better in your lessons of late." Susan looked at Jane and continued with, "And I believe Jane now wants you to sit lessons with me?" Jane nodded her head in answer to Susan's question to her, even though it was directed at Francis. "Okay, let's get this show on the road, shall we? Ah, where do you want us, Jane?"
"Our study room is the library. The girls can show you where it is. I believe everything you asked for is there, and should you need anything else, please let me know."
It was Charlotte who asked, "Um, how do you want us to address you, Miss Toliver?"
Susan laughed before she answered. "Well, for starters, drop the Miss, I'm a Mrs.. And because the only principal here is Jane, you may call me by my given name, Susan. Of course, I know there may be other names you'll use as we progress through your lessons, but that's okay too." The smile Susan had on her face put all three at ease, though Charlotte and Toby had a feeling they shouldn't underestimate her one bit.
"Okay, Susan, if you'll follow us, we'll take you to the library," Charlotte told Susan and she put an arm around Toby's shoulders and helped him walk to the library. Francis was still standing where she had been standing, looking at Jane. After Susan passed her, she walked up to Jane and asked, "Why are you having me be with Susan? You told me I would be with her only for foreign languages?"
Jane gave Francis a small smile, then said to her, "I changed my mind because the work you've been doing has vastly improved. And I think you deserve to be given a chance to really see what you can do now that you have a chance. You do the best you can and pay attention, understand?"
Jane saw tears threatening to escape Francis' eyes. In almost a whisper, Francis got out, "Thank you for the chance, Aunt Jane. No one before you would have given me this chance. I don't know how I'll ever repay you for this."
Jane bent down so she could look Francis in the eyes before speaking. "You can repay me by doing the best you can. By learning as much as you can. Now, scoot, you'll be late for class." With a big smile on her face, and remembering not to run, Francis walked as fast as she knew was allowed to the library.
When the four had entered the library, and the door closed, Charlotte helped Toby to the couch by the near wall, hearing a sigh as Toby sat down on the soft cushions. "Toby, I know of the reason you are here, but not the why you aren't one of Jane's girls. By now, Jane would have had you as accomplished as Charlotte and Francis. Might I know the reason you haven't become one of Jane's girls?"
Charlotte had sat down on Toby's right, Francis on his left. He looked at Charlotte who shrugged her shoulders, then to Francis who did the same. Both silently telling Toby, 'why not?' With a nod of his head, both girls stood up, each taking one of Toby’s outstretched hands, helped him up from the couch, then stood with him as he spoke. "How much do you know of why I was sent here? Did you know I was involved with a shoplifting ring? Not by choice, mind you. Hasn't Jane told you how I was treated by my brother and Strom after my brother bailed me out of jail?"
Susan was nodding her head when Toby told her about being involved in the shoplifting ring and shook her head when he asked if Jane had told her how he was treated after being bailed out of jail. "Toby, I only know about your involvement in the shoplifting, not how you were treated after getting out of jail. Was it that bad?"
With a stern look on his face, and a bit of a growl in his voice, he told Susan, "I'll let you be the judge of that," as he turned around so his back was to Susan. Then, with growls and hissing, he lifted his shirt and pulled it over his head so it would stay in place. Painfully, he then bent down slightly so he could pull his pants and briefs down so Susan could see him from the base of his neck to the bottom of his butt cheeks. With a choked-up voice, he asked Susan, "Is this bad enough for you, or would you like to see everything? I can show you, simply by taking my pants completely off."
Both girls could hear how upset Toby was as he spoke, and as Francis pulled up Toby's briefs and pants, Charlotte pulled down his shirt, before they helped Toby back to the couch.
When Susan saw all of the scars, the wounds that were now pink, and the fresh wounds, she'd put her hands to her mouth. "Dear God, child. How could you endure such treatment? Why didn't you tell someone? Your father or the police or someone at your school? No one has the right to do that to anyone?"
Sitting on the couch, Toby snorted through the tears streaming out of his eyes. "Tell someone? Who? Those pink scars you saw, those I got from my brother as he caught me before I reached the police station. And the older scars? They were to remind me not to tell our dad or anyone else. The fresh wounds on my back and butt? Those my brother gave me for getting caught and being arrested. He and Strom fought with me, dragging me to a pair of pipes in the warehouse Strom used. They tied me spread eagle to those pipes and my brother went to town on me with a shaving strop. I don't know how long the beating lasted because I'd passed out by the third hit. It was either do as I was told or get more of the same or worse. What would you do, Susan? As to your question about me becoming one of Aunt Jane's girls? How? Backless fashions would be out. Short skirts would show what was done to my legs. I can't walk properly because of what was done to my butt, which pulls with each step I take. And my arms are still covered with bruises, though the bruises aren't as pronounced as they were initially. I also don't think it would be safe for others if I became one of Aunt Jane's girls. I'm still holding in a lot of anger over what was done to me. All it would take is the wrong person saying the right thing and, despite the pain I'm still feeling, I would pound that person into pulp. I would unleash all of my anger on that person, likely killing them before anyone could stop me. Because I wouldn't be able to stop myself."
Seeing the tissue box on the end of the study table, Susan took one out of the box before walking over and kneeling in front of Toby. Reaching up, she gently wiped the tears off Toby's cheeks and gently dabbed his eyes. Then, taking his hands in hers she said, "I know a person you can talk with, who can help you deal with everything that's happened to you. Help you try and calm the anger you rightfully harbor."
It was Francis who asked, "Is it Sherry?"
"Yes, Francis, it's Sherry," Susan replied. "She's a wonderful lady."
Charlotte chuckled then supplied, "She's coming here tomorrow. We're all going to speak with her. Even Aunt Jane and tante Marie. I guess I need to speak with her as much as Toby does. I've blown up several times over this whole freaking mess. And I have a lot of thoughts of what should be done to Toby's brother and Strom, which I can't do because it would put me at their lever and it wouldn't be the right thing for me to do."
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Susan looked at Charlotte and told her, "Charlotte, there are times you should do something and it won't put you on the same level as those you're fighting against. Law enforcement does it every day, in one way or another. And yet, the vast majority of them still hold on to their integrity. All of you in this house have likely given a lot of thought to what you'd like to do to Toby's brother and this Strom person. The five of you won't go after them because it isn't who you are or the right thing to do or because you feel it would put you on their level. You five won't go after those two because, deep down, you know it isn't your job. The thoughts you five have or have had, are typical with this type of situation. You want to do to them what they've done to you. If you went after those two because of that reason, then you would be at their level. And after you did what you'd like to do, you'd hate yourself for the rest of your lives. Do to those two what you'd like to do only in your minds. It may not be as satisfactory as actually watching what happens to them in real life, but you won't be the ones who'll be arrested because you gave in to your hate."
"Now," Susan said, standing up and walking back to the table where she laid her briefcase, operating the catches and watching as the latches flew up. Opening the lid and taking out a thick stack of papers, she went on with, "I need the three of you to work through these papers to the best of your abilities. This is NOT a test. These papers will NOT be graded. They are so I can see where you stand with your knowledge of the subjects you've taken or are taking now. There is NO time limit. If you can't answer a question or problem, don't worry about that question or problem, this ISN'T a test and you WON'T be graded. Girls, you may sit at the table to work through these papers. Toby, because you seem more at ease where you are, I have something you can use so you have a hard surface under the papers." With that said Susan began to divide up the papers into sets, setting two sets on the table and handing one set to Toby. She then walked over to the things Jane had provided, and rummaged through them until she found the two-foot by two-foot tray she'd asked Jane to get for her. Susan walked back to Toby, handed him the tray, along with a pencil and eraser before giving the same to Francis and Charlotte. "When you finish as much of one as you can, just turn it over next to you and continue with the next paper. As I said, there isn't a time limit, so take your time and answer what you can answer. I'll look in on you three from time to time, but will be speaking with Jane in case you need me. Go ahead, you can start. And please remember, this is not a test."
Once all three had started on their papers, Susan left the library, leaning against the outside of the library door as she tried to take in what Toby had shown her. She had her head in her hands, when a voice said, "Come into the kitchen. I'll make us some tea." Dropping her hands, she turned towards the voice and saw Marie standing a few feet away from her. "You look like you need to talk to someone. He showed you, didn't he? Everything or just his back? His legs aren't in any better condition. Come, you need to hear it all."
Marie led Susan into the kitchen and pointed to one of the kitchen table chairs opposite to where Jane was sitting. As Marie took three mugs out of an upper cabinet, then three tea bags out of a lazy susan on the counter, she had been speaking the entire time. "You already know about Toby being involved with the shoplifting, but did you know he lied about Charlotte, aka Charles, also being involved? There wasn't any real evidence to prove he was involved, but the CEO of Taylor's department store threatened to take it to Federal Court if Judge Ruth didn't find him guilty. So, to keep Charlotte, aka Charles, out of Federal Court, she sent him to us. Jane gave him a choice to continue being himself while here or become one of our girls. Our Jane pointed out he'd never again have such an opportunity to have such an experience. And as you see, Charlotte is now with us, and doing quite well. At least on the outside. On her inside, eh, not so much. This whole bordel sanglant (bloody mess) has her tied up in knots. Do you take cream or sugar with your tea?"
Susan shook her head at Marie's tea question, asking, "So, how bad is the whole mess? What possessed someone to beat that boy that severely? Surely CPS or some other agency could have intervened?"
Jane had remained silent as Marie spoke, taking a sip of her tea before answering Susan's questions. "Susan, did Toby tell you he wanted to go to the police, wanted to tell his father, but was reminded it wasn't in his best interests? Did he explain the faded, healed, old scars, or the pink ones, or about the fresh ones that are healing? Did you see what was done to his posterior, butt as he puts it? Pass me the sugar please."
Jane was contemplative as she stirred a spoon of sugar into her tea. How much should she tell Susan about everything? Would she tell her husband or anyone else? And if she told her husband or anyone else, would they tell others and it would get back to those, or the one, who wants Toby dead? With a sigh, Jane made her decision and told Susan, "Susan. You can't say anything to anyone about Toby. His life is in danger. Shortly after he arrived, we discovered the severe beating he'd been given and put him in the hospital because many of the wounds were infected. Two men came to the hospital looking for Toby in order to kill him. If the police hadn't been forewarned, they might have succeeded. He was brought back here because we believed no one would know of my house or that he'd been brought here. If anyone asked after Toby again at the hospital, they'd learn nothing, only that he was taken out of the hospital and not the location. It's set up so anyone asking would be told he was taken by the police." Jane's explanation was interrupted because her mug was at her lips, and another swallow of tea soothed her throat.
When Jane asked Susan if Toby told her about the last beating he'd been given, she nodded her head, so Jane backed up even further and told of how it started for Charles. "I again caution you against telling anyone about what you've learned and what I'm about to tell you. So far, only Strom and some woman have been discovered to be involved with the entire shoplifting affair, but it isn't certain there isn't someone even higher up on the food chain. Charlotte, aka Charles, was at Taylor's department store the day Toby and two other boys shoplifted quite a bit of gaming equipment and were caught. When Toby saw Charles at the jewelry counter he became jealous of Charles' freedom, his being able to come and go as he pleased. And his not appearing to have been mistreated. So, when he was questioned, she implicated Charles with a lie. Janes Conner, the security guard for that particular Taylor's department store, who was also involved in the shoplifting affair, had his head handed to him twice by Charles. The first time he only ended up face down on the floor with his arm twisted up behind his back and Charles' knee on his neck. The second time, when he tried intimidating Charles in the holding room, he made the mistake of bringing a collapsible police baton into the room. Those witnessing the event said it appeared Conner was actually going to use that baton on Charles in order to get him to confess. His third mistake was lying it on the table next to him, and then starting to reach for it to presumably use it on Charles. But Charles was quicker, sensing what Conner was going to do, he grabbed it before Conner did, snapped it open, and warned Conner he would defend himself if Conner came at him. Conner, a stupid man, who's ego ruled his life, tried to cross the table to get Charles but ended up with a broken left clavicle. Because his left arm would no longer support his weight on his left arm, because of the broken clavicle, he fell to the floor. Would you care for more tea?"
When Susan nodded her head yes, too enthralled with Jane's story to speak, Marie got up from her chair to boil more water. While the water was heating, Jane continued with her story. "Conner's fourth mistake was trying to stop Charles from leaving the holding room. Charles had tried to walk around Conner, who was in immense pain at the moment, but Conner reached out with his right arm and grabbed Charles' ankle. For that action, he ended up with a broken ulna and radius, as Charles used the baton to hit Conner's right forearm with enough force to break both bones. Charles was detained because of the lie Toby told, and because of what had just occurred with Conner, and they both ended up in the same police holding cell, along with the two boys with Toby. While in that cell, Toby acted all brave and tough, even trying to scare Charles with his actions. Because Charlotte was designated as the ring leader, bail was denied and she went before Just Ruth first; bail was granted for Toby and the other two boys. We never heard what became of the other two boys. That tea will grow cold if you don't drink it while it's hot." Jane chuckled because of Susan's gaze on her.
"The girls and I went to the train station to pick up Toby on Monday," Jane continued. "But the boy who got off the train was not the same boy Charlotte saw in the holding cell. As was observed, he seemed happy, not the angry, arrogant boy in that holding cell. Francis questioned something else about him, he was wearing a long-sleeved shirt in the warm weather at that time. Toby was respectful, polite, and thoughtful, opening the car doors for me and the girls. But I and Charlotte noticed something was off as we drove back to my home. Toby never sat back in the seat as would normally be done. Plus, he was trying to find a comfortable spot to sit, wiggling around the entire drive. And so far, he is still respectful, polite, and has found sitting more comfortable. It wasn't until Marie went to retrieve all of his clothing that the reason behind the long-sleeved shirt and the other things became apparent. You saw everything except his legs, correct?"
Jane asked Susan, receiving a nod in return. "He was much worse that Monday. Those recent wounds were oozing and some were infected. And his posterior was just as bad. I had Dr. Peters come to look at him and she immediately had him taken to the hospital. They kept him sedated while they cleaned out the recent wounds, and kept him sedated to help ease the pain he was experiencing. They lowered the sedative and he came around the second day he was there, that's when we learned who and how he had been so savagely beaten. Because he and the two boys had been caught shoplifting and arrested, Toby's brother, Tylor, and Strom fought with him but finally dragged him over to two poles in the warehouse Strom used, tied him spread eagle to those poles, and Toby's brother, using a shaving strop, savagely beat his own brother. Toby said he passed out after the third hit because of the pain, so he doesn't know how long the beating lasted." Jane stopped talking for a few moments while she moistened her throat with more of her tea.
"The police had been arresting the groups of three kids involved in the shoplifting. We received shocking news that the kids not having been arrested, were being killed. Possibly to shut them up so they couldn’t become witnesses. On the third day Toby was in the hospital, two men showed up at the hospital and started asking for Toby, claiming to be his two Uncles. The police had been warned about the possibility and had prepared to deal with it if and when it happened. A code went out to all staff members, and the receptionist had surreptitiously called the police and used a code word to let them know about the two men. After the police arrived at the hospital in disguise, the police made their move when the two were distracted by the receptionist, with each man having a handgun pressed against his temple. One man was carrying a silencer, the other, a 9mm handgun."
Dr. Peters was with Toby at the time the warning code was announced, and only learned of the problem when the hospital's two ex-military security guards came into Toby's hospital room to protect him. After the all-clear was given, another code word, the guards left Toby’s hospital room and Jill made a snap decision to bring Toby back here. And here is where he's been since that time. He'll need to see a psychologist, as will Charlotte, and perhaps Francis, when this beschissenes Durcheinander (fucking mess) is over and those responsible are answering for all of their crimes."
Marie reached across the table and laid a hand on one of Jane's hands holding the mug containing her tea. "Easy, chère. Calm yourself down. You know it's being taken care of and all we can do is take care of the three with us." With one hand still on Jane's hand, she looked at Susan and told her, "We are all upset by these events. We've all, well, maybe just Jane, me, and Charlotte, have had thoughts about what we'd like to do with Toby's brother and Strom. And a woman Strom has been seen with. But, that isn't our purpose. Our purpose is here, helping young men learn to become better young men by altering their behavior and thinking." Then she got a cold expression on her face as she said, "Believe me when I say this, Susan. If we did what we wanted to do, we wouldn't shed any tears afterward. We'd likely be in jail, but satisfied we'd rid this world of people who don't deserve to draw a breath."
Susan looked at Marie's hand still holding Jane's hand, then at Jane, then at Marie, and back to Jane. "You are two extraordinary women. Being able to help young men and hold yourselves together during something like this. I greatly admire the two of you. I guess I better go check on my pupils."
Marie smiled while looking at Susan and shook her head, before letting go of Jane's hand, getting up from the kitchen table, and walking over to a cabinet, where she took out her keys, unlocked the cabinet, and opened the doors to reveal a monitor. After turning the monitor on, she selected the library, and the three watched as the girls and Toby still had several papers to work through. And there was nothing unexpected going on. Marie looked at Susan before telling her, "See, our young ones are doing fine." She looked back to the monitor, then turned back to Susan. "They also seem to be part way through your papers. Maybe if you just looked in on them, asking if everything is alright, will let them know you haven't forgotten them. Oui?"
Nodding her head, Susan answered with, "Oui. Tu as raison. Ils ont peut-être des questions auxquelles il faut répondre (Yes. You're right. They may have questions that need to be answered.). I will be back shortly." With that said Susan got up from the kitchen table and walked to the library, knocking quietly before opening the library door and walking into the library. "So, how is everyone doing? Do you have any questions for me? I see all of you are about halfway through the piles I gave each of you. Remember, this isn't a test. There isn't a time limit. I'm just going to use your papers to determine your level of knowledge and where I can start with each of you."
Jane and Marie had been watching everything from the kitchen monitor. The girls and Toby had looked towards the library door when they heard the quiet knock. Then watched the door open and Susan entered the library, and closed the door behind her. After Susan asked her questions, and said this wasn't a test or had a time limit, all three just shook their heads and resumed what they'd been doing. They didn't see Susan nodding her head in satisfaction, before turning, walking to the library door, opening it, walking out, and quietly closing it behind her. She was impressed with those three. Others she'd given those same evaluations to had first looked through them, picked out the ones they were able to work, and refused to do any of the other sheets. But these three, actually took what they were doing seriously, working through each sheet one at a time.
By the time Susan had returned to the kitchen, Marie had shut off the monitor, closed and locked the cabinet doors, and was in the process of boiling more water for tea, which they'd drink with a slice of cake for each of them.
The first thing Susan asked the minute she reentered the kitchen, and before sitting down in front of a slice of chocolate cake, was, "Have their IQs been tested? When I've given those same evaluations to other youngsters, some only work a few of the sheets, others didn't do anything but sit there, and some have moaned and groaned when I'd check to see how they were doing. But those three, they are halfway through the piles I gave each of them, and had no questions or gripes because they were doing them. Those three, as I'm sure you saw, shook their heads at my questions, listened to my 'it's not a test or has a time limit,' then went straight back to their work. What kind of les fesses des vaches (cow's buttocks) do they have running the schools those three attend? You talked about wanting to take care of Toby's brother and Strom, and that woman. I can't tell the number of times I've thought of doing the same to many school administrators. Oh, and school Counselors. I swear, some of them are using their butts for brains."
Marie chuckled, took the boiling water off the stove and to the table, where she refilled three empty mugs. She dropped a tea bag into each mug, then told Susan, "Before you explode, chère, sit and enjoy your cake. Charlotte and Francis made it."
All three women knew they were thinking much the same about their individual concerns. They also knew many who shouldn't be in the positions they were in because they did more harm than good. And they knew, those people were a waste of air and needed to see how long they could fly after losing the edge of a cliff along a deep canyon. But they also knew it wasn't the right thing for them to do, as they could only do what they were currently doing for others.
An hour and a half marked the clock, and Susan once again checked on her students, noting they were three-fourths done with their piles. When she returned to the kitchen, Jane then went on with, "Charlotte had a nightmare recently, one where she was gang raped by a group of men. It may be because of her recent experiences at the Mall, where one boy hadn't been taught what 'no' meant, and Charlotte put him face first against a store window. She then pointed out to the Mall security guards the boy doing to another girl what he tried with her. That caused the young man to get booted from the Mall. Then there was a group of boys blocking her way when she stepped into a recessed entry to one of the stores, to look at the fashions in the window. One of those boys tried to touch her but ended up on his knees, after Charlotte grabbed his hand and put her other hand behind the boy's elbow and bent his hand backward. Two security guards, standing not far away came over and asked why the boy was on his knees. Charlotte simply told the guard who asked, that she was just explaining to the boy not to touch a girl unless she had given him permission. Unfortunately, that boy didn't learn his lesson and after being released by Charlotte, tried to punch her. He missed, but our Charlotte didn't, and delivered a palm strike that put the boy to sleep. When that boy was finally roused, he threatened to get Charlotte at school. And some of his friends were going to have fun with her. The height of stupidity, not knowing Charlotte didn't even attend that boy's school."
"When we left the Mall, the boy Charlotte slammed up against the store window was waiting for her outside the Mall. That boy is undoubtedly a slow learner, as he came at Charlotte again, and got another lesson. By then the security guards and police arrived, and neither group was surprised the boy was in trouble again. The police called the boy’s parents, who arrived and proceeded to ask what part of what they told him last time he hadn't understood. Suffice it to say, he's now attending an all-girls school as one of the students. A girl student. It was rather comical, in that even though he made it abundantly clear he wouldn't attend the school, between his parents and the police, one standing there twirling a pair of handcuffs around one finger, they gave him the chance to make the best choice for himself, guess he didn't fancy a time behind bars."
"Marie, please let us see how those three are doing… if you would please." Conversation stopped while Marie unlocked the cabinet, opened the doors, turned on the monitor and the three saw the three teens still busy on the evaluation sheets. When Susan nodded, Marie turned off the monitor, closed and locked the cabinet door before retaking her seat at the kitchen table. "While the boy's parents were giving their son a chance to make up his mind, the three boys he'd been associating with arrived. They are a vulgar trio. The one who appeared to be the leader of the three talked about going into the Mall and laying hands on the girls walking around the Mall. Asking if the boy was coming, the boy's father told that pig his son wouldn't be coming now or ever again. That his son was going to be far away from filth like him." Jane saw Susan smiling as she understood what was about to happen, and went on with, "I see you realize what was to happen next. And you're right. I redirected that boy's attention to me, and in his attempt to slap me, our Charlotte stepped in and put the toe of her heeled shoe into the boy's stomach. After that, it seemed the boy was having trouble breathing. The second boy decided to do something of his own and I dealt with him. The third boy got quite the surprise when his father came up behind him and grabbed him around the neck with his large hands; he was more than extremely angry with his son. I knew the parents of the first boy, the police, and the father then holding his son by the neck. When the boy’s parents explained where their son would be attending school, the father was more than happy to do the same for his son. The two boys on the ground were arrested, and the two other boys would become girls at an all-girls school. And in a sense, because of what Charlotte did to the first boy, and what we both did to two of the three boys, we saved a lot of girls in the Mall from the heartache of having those pigs defile them with their hands. Marie and I are of the opinion that the events Charlotte experienced were the cause of her nightmare. Add those events to being falsely accused of a crime, and our Charlotte is carrying a heavy load. A friend of mine is arriving tomorrow to speak with all of us." When she saw the questioning look on Susan's face, she answered it with, "Yes, even Marie and I. This time we have an unusual situation, where one boy volunteered to experience being a girl and the other boy sussed what Marie and I do here. We can't let Toby become one of our girls mainly because of all the scars his body holds and the wounds still healing. Plus, he knows how petticoat punishment works, and he needs no behavior modification." Looking at Susan, Jane told her, "You best get back to your pupils. I need to go to the study to do a bit of work."
Susan nodded her head at Jane's final words, standing up and telling her, "Thank you for the backstory. I believe it will be necessary to figure it into my plans." Susan picked up her mug, but Marie took it from her. The two watched as Susan left the kitchen, then looked at each other, before Marie said, "Was it wise to tell her the story? Can she be trusted to remain silent?" Marie stood, picked up her mug then Jane's, and took them to the sink to rinse out.
Jane had nodded her head at Marie's questions. "Yes, Marie. She can be trusted to remain silent. She has, after all, been hired to tutor some very important people. People who required her not to see anything she saw or anything she heard. Yes, she can be trusted."
After walking to the library door, Susan knocked lightly before opening the door and stepping into the library, closing the door behind her. At the sound of a knock on the library door, the three had turned or looked up from their work and watched as the door opened and Susan entered the library. Charlotte, Susan noticed, was standing at the large front window, looking at her, she presumably had been looking out the window, while Francis was still at the table, with a few sheets left to finish. Toby, looking at her, was still on the couch and had maybe one or two sheets left. "So, how are you all doing," Susan questioned, as she walked over to the table.
"I finished the pile you gave me, Susan," Charlotte said, then turned back to the window. The look on Charlotte's face wasn't missed by Susan, nor the tone of her voice.
It was Francis who answered next with, "I'm almost through, I may have three or four left to work. It's funny, I'm finding out I know more than I realized. Guess something rubbed off on me in school."
With Charlotte and Francis having listed their progress, Toby was last to say, "I've two to work through. You are one tough lady, Susan. Particle physics? Whoa!" At Toby's words, Susan just smiled.
"Francis, Toby, take your time, do the best you can. I don't expect you to know everything on those papers, just answer the ones you can answer." Having said that, she walked around the table and went over to stand next to Charlotte. The room became silent again, with just the slight sound of pencils on paper. As Susan stood beside Charlotte, she could sense Charlotte's mood and decided to see if the girl would tell her what was bothering her. "Pretty country, isn't it," Susan said in a soft voice. "It's why my husband and I moved here. There isn't the constant sound of traffic in the background, the atmosphere is enjoyable, your being able to see as far as you can when you look past the stands of trees, and it smells divine after a rain. Flowers of every color, and wildlife, what a selection. Of course, it can get cold in the winter, but it's pretty even then. Do you wish you could live up here, Charlotte?" Only the slight sound of pencils on paper could be heard again, Charlotte remained silent. Susan turned to look at Charlotte and quietly asked, "What's wrong, Charlotte? You seem to have something on your mind. I'm a good listener, or that's what my husband tells me."
Silence again. As Susan watched Charlotte, Charlotte dropped her head, before saying, "Yes, it is pretty country around here. Have you been to the pond on Aunt Jane's property? There's a beaver dam there and if you're quiet, you can watch them work. We sat on the bench that's there one time, when Francis and I took Jane there after she received some disturbing news. Can you imagine, Francis and I took Jane there, and not the other way around? She was really upset. More frogs than I'd ever seen hopped out of the water and lined the shoreline. Then, more ducks came and joined the frogs. A small herd of deer came out of the forest and sat down not too far from us on our right, the fawn coming over and licking Jane's hands in her lap. And if you can believe it, a mated pair of skunks came out of the forest and sat off to our left, showing no fear of us. And the topper, two porcupines came last, sitting right in front of us. None of them made a sound, they didn't move towards us, but there was a, oh, I don't know, a feeling that passed from them to us, to Jane. Then, they all left, back the way they'd come. And nature resumed her dance. Yeah, Susan, it is pretty country. But I just want to be with my parents and friends. I want to get back to that crappy school, with a-holes who refuse to let me take advanced classes. But most of all, I want my name cleared so I can do all of that."
"You women, you females, don't have it easy. Once upon a time, you were nothing but baby makers and food fetchers. Down the ages, you started fighting for your rights, wanting the same rights men were afforded. Begrudgingly, you started receiving them but still had to put up with us males who still believed you belonged in the kitchen and pregnant. And in today's age, until ages ago when a man could practically do what he wanted with a woman, men are prosecuted if they do what they want with a woman. But that same 'I'll do to a girl what I want' still prevails, as I experienced."
"Do the old have to die out so the young can learn a new way of behaving? Some of us males don't understand how to treat, much less act around, young girls. That boy I smashed up against the store window, didn't understand what 'no' or 'leave me alone' meant. He got a bloody nose for his efforts. Then after leaving me, he went down the Mall a ways and started in on another girl. Accosting that girl was the last straw for Mall security. They banned him from the Mall. He was so mad he waited for me to leave the Mall and had a go at me, again. The Mall security showed up, as did the police. And the real surprise? So did his parents. He's now a student at an all-girls school, as one of the girls. That kid's so-called friends showed up, they were going to go into the Mall and accost as many young girls as they could. For fun. I guess they didn't like how Jane and I spoke to them because their leader tried to slap me only to receive the point of my heels in his stomach. He had a difficult time breathing after that, while on his knees. The second boy came at us and Jane took care of him, surprising that butt hole. But the really good part was when the father of the third boy arrived unannounced and grabbed that boy by the back of his neck; that man had huge hands, his hand completely encircling the boy’s throat. That kid got such a tongue-lashing, then found out he and boy number one were going to be classmates. Hearing that, that kid fainted. Then there were the three guys who blocked me when I stepped into a store entrance recess, to look at the clothes in the window. One of the boys tried to touch me and received a nice lesson for his efforts. Two Mall security guards arrived, one approved of my lesson skills, before asking me to let the boy go. That boy was a slow learner because after I let him go and as the guards were dealing with the other two boys, that kid got up and tried to punch me. I put him to sleep before he hit the ground."
"Where does all this garbage come from Susan? Is it inbred into us? Is it genetics?" Going quiet for a few moments, Charlotte sighed, then turning to look at Susan, said, "I just want all this to be over. I'm tired, not sleep tired, just tired of it all." Charlotte turned back to the window and continued to look out at all that could be seen past Jane's property.
When Charlotte turned back to the window, so did Susan. As they watched, the blowing wind caused the tall grass to act as ocean waves, undulating with the pulsing wind. "Are you sorry for experiencing being a girl, Charlotte? You had the choice, after all. From what Jane has told me, you've learned some things about yourself, even questioning if you act as you've seen other boys act around young girls. Even questioning yourself after modeling clothing. And with that in mind, I agree with Jane, you are more mature than a lot of boys your age, and know how to treat not only girls but others as well. You said the leader of those three boys talked about going into the Mall and having fun with the girls there. Have you ever done that Charlotte? Just meeting you today, I doubt the thought had ever entered your mind. You've also helped Francis, according to Jane. Would you have done that if you weren't Charlotte? Would Charles have done that?"
"To answer your questions, Charlotte, put the garbage down to bad parenting. Parents who may have had a strict upbringing and decided they weren't going to do the same to their children. So they let their children basically run wild, never questioning what they're doing or where they're going or who they have for friends; never applying the board of education to the seat of understanding. They decided to befriend their children instead of parenting them. If parents are hard on their children, lovingly hard, it often isn't seen as loving until years later, and for the reason it was applied. Don't mistake those who are lovingly punished for those who are abused. There's a vast difference between the two. The first comes from parents who give unconditional love, they'll love you even if you’ve done something they consider wrong. Those who are abused, aren't actually punished as such. They have become the focus of an angry person, a person who sees them often as a nuisance, someone extremely frustrated and takes it all out on their children. Oftentimes, when the child has had enough, sees no way out, or finds no help, they run. And sometimes, it's much worse, a better solution in their eyes. They feel unloved by anyone and see no reason to continue living. And the saddest of all of this? When a parent learns of the death of their child, they can't understand why it happened. They claim to have been a good parent, even though they took all of their anger, frustrations, and disappointments out on their child. When a child is lost in this way, Charlotte, it's often because the people they reached out to for help either turned a blind eye or turned the child back over to their parents. You probably can guess what happened when their child was back with them. That's often when the child sees no reason for living."
"And then there are those like Toby, who've been physically beaten over the years, even severely. But retain their moral grounding despite the hardship they endure. They have hope of one day getting away from such abuse, and they never lose that hope despite what they endure. They are fighters, Charlotte. People with so much heart that they will endure almost anything to survive. If it means being beaten, even severely, then they'll endure it. Because having hope, they know within their bones, how one day those inflecting the abuse will be gone, and they will be free."
"You haven't answered my questions, Charlotte. Do you regret agreeing to become one of Jane's girls? If Charles was here right from the beginning, would he have helped Francis as Charlotte's done?"
Toby had finished his pile of papers but sat quietly listening to Susan and Charlotte talk. "I didn't tell you about my time being a makeup model for Carolyn at the Marisha Chalet salon," Charlotte began. "She had just finished applying the prosthesis I'm wearing when she said I was going to be her makeup model for teenage girls attending her Saturday class." Charlotte chuckled, then continued. "I didn't realize it at the time, but if Carolyn hadn't put a chair under me, I'd have fallen to the ground, on my butt, right after what she told me. I was scared, scared the girls would see I was a boy under this facade," and she waved a hand in front of her from head to toe. "She held my hands as she asked about my experience at the Mall, whether I'd been seen as a boy dressed as a girl or just a very pretty girl. Of course… she was right. I was only seen as a pretty girl shopping at the Mall or I wouldn't have attracted the attention of those boys and that one girl the next time I was there. I'm getting off track, though. None of those girls ever discovered I was anything but what I appeared to be, a teenage girl helping Carolyn."
"But something happened only Charlotte could help with at the time. One of the girls was visibly upset, tears rolling down her cheeks when Carolyn had the girls remove their makeup so they would have a clean face to work with. Charlotte went back and sat with her, discovering she had a bad case of acne and she was treated badly because of it. Even the girls there ignored her. She cried on Charlotte's shoulder. She agreed to go with me to speak with Carolyn to see if she had something that could help the girl. Carolyn did have something new to the market, but the girl was skeptical at first, skeptical because she'd tried just about everything and nothing worked. Carolyn called up another girl and that girl showed a picture of herself before using the product Carolyn had. When the girl couldn't believe her eyes, that girl called up another girl who showed a before picture that was even worse than the first girl. It was easy to see both had bad memories from those times. The girl wanted to buy that product right then and there, getting instructions on how to use the product from the two girls. Both took her back with them so they could show her some tricks they'd learned to hide their acne. Charles could never have done that for the girl because he wouldn't have been there."
"How can I regret being Charlotte, when Charlotte has helped others in one way or another? She helped the girl at the makeup lessons, helped girls at the Mall by what happened to all of those boys, and helped with Francis, Charlotte even helped Aunt Jane. Aunt Jane is right, I have learned something about myself throughout all of this. Even seeing things from the other side of the 'fence.' Did Jane tell you I asked if I was here for a reason? After all of the events I've been involved in or with, I have to believe Charlotte was meant to be here. She was meant to do what has taken place. As to helping Francis if Charles were here," Charlotte turned to look at Francis, who had looked up at the mention of her name. "Yes, even if Charles were here, he would have helped her just as much." Hearing Charlotte say that, Francis smiled and wiped tears off her cheeks. Charlotte then looked at Susan, and said, "But we are here, aren't we?"
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Susan was still marveling at Charlotte's last question, realizing she was both Charles and Charlotte. 'Just how intelligent is this child?' Susan thought to herself. She knew from experience that very few people would admit to being feminine and masculine at the same time. Most believed you're either feminine or masculine, not both. Men can't see the acts of love, caring, kindness, and mercy as being considered feminine. And yet, men demonstrate these traits daily in some way. How could Charles come to such a conclusion unless being Charlotte has shown him that fact?
Charlotte turned back to look out of the window, tears silently making their way down her cheeks. "Who will I be when this is all over, Susan? How can I be who I was before all of this happened? How do I use these experiences to reclaim my life? Jane, Marie, you, and Carolyn, have told me I know how to treat other people and girls, so what use are all these experiences if I already possess that ability? Am I being selfish, self-centered, only thinking of myself? I haven't really thought about what my parents must be going through, or my friends since I've been here. Is that wrong of me? Why haven't I thought of those people?" With a sudden movement, Charlotte turned and engulfed Susan in a hug, laying her head on Susan's shoulder and crying. Taken aback, somewhat, Susan held the girl, wondering how she was going to answer Charlotte's questions.
Still holding Charlotte, Susan guided them to the couch, where she encouraged Charlotte to sit down next to Toby. She then sat next to Charlotte, putting her arm around Charlotte's shoulder and pulling her to her. She didn't start right off answering Charlotte's questions, but started with Francis. "Francis, what have you learned by being here? You were sent here because you ran away from your Aunt Agnus too many times, and Judge Ruth believed here was better suited for you than juvenile detention. What have you learned?"
Having looked up at hearing her ‘girl’ name, Francis listened to Susan's comment and her question. A smile played over her face as she said, "That Sandy's a bitch, and is really hurting. She's been hurt in the past but refuses to deal with it. So, she takes it out on the boys who come to Jane's home. In a way, she abuses us much like she was abused. Oh, I know she does some of it to keep us in line, makes us think she'll out us. But deep down, she's a mess and needs some help."
Charlotte took her head off Susan's shoulder, looked at Toby, who was looking at her, then the two looked at Francis, as was Susan, after what Francis said. "Where in the world did all that come from, Francis?" Toby asked, still looking at her.
Blank-faced, more of a 'duh' look on her face, Francis looked at the three in turn, shrugging her shoulders, replying, "It's easy to see if you know the signs. My Aunt Agnus is like her, I think that's why she didn't want me with her."
"That time she tried to grab me, and I pushed her wrist backward, then discovered she had a bone out of place, she did say she'd had a bad experience with a former boyfriend. Maybe that's why she loves to give it to the boys from Jane's school," Charlotte supplied.
Toby joined in with, "It would make sense. If she has undiagnosed trauma she isn't dealing with, it would be outwardly visible as aggression towards the gender that caused the trauma."
Susan's and Charlotte's gazes now turned toward Toby. "How did you come up with that reasoning, Toby?" Susan asked, watching Toby's face move into the blank look, the 'duh' range, before he answered.
Toby chuckled, then told Susan, "I've been studying psychology when I wasn't getting the hell beat out of me. I want to become a psychologist if it's possible after what I've done. Anyway… I hope I can." He slowly dropped his head, only to have Charlotte reach over and put an arm around his shoulders. He leaned into her and let the tears fall freely, not caring who saw him cry.
As Susan watched, Francis got out of her seat at the table and walked over to the couch, sitting down on the other side of Toby. She then put an arm around his shoulders and leaned into him, telling him, "Keep that hope of becoming what you want. Right now it's just a struggle for you, but as with your beatings, it has to end sometime. A character on a TV program told a colleague, 'If you’re in hell, keep walking.' Those wounds will heal, plastic surgeons might be able to help with all of the physical scars, and those who forced you to work for them by beating you won't be around forever to do it again. I also have a feeling once your dad finds out about all of this, things will drastically change. And if what you said about your dad is true, maybe your brother would like to live on another planet, or get life in prison. Just don't lose the hope you have. It's the one thing you can keep for yourself."
Three heads turned to look at Francis. Toby knuckled his eyes before asking, "Are you sure you aren't going to be a psychologist? You sound like some of those my Aunt Terri had me talk with. You really should consider it."
Francis again shrugged her shoulders, something that would have brought the wrath of Jane down on her. "I don't really know what I want to do after high school, providing I make it through high school without falling asleep too often. There are a lot of AP classes I'd like to take, but they tell me my grades are too low. My grades are too low because most of the classes I have are boring, or I'm just bored sitting through them. I don't know which one it is."
As the three watched, Francis left the couch and returned to her seat at the table, picking up the pencil she was using and continuing with the evaluation sheets. Susan was dumbfounded by everything Francis had said. Another student of public education, bored with their classes, and not challenged by them. Susan's school monster wanted to say something to her, but as Jane did to her monster, Susan told it to shut the hell up.
The three stayed seated on the couch, Susan's arm around Charlotte, Charlotte's arm around Toby, and Toby leaning into Charlotte. They watched as an unconcerned Francis worked on her current paper, before turning it over to her left, setting the pencil down, and declaring, "Finished. Now what?"
Jane did go to the study, and did have paperwork to do, but had been watching the library ever since Susan returned to check on her pupils. She shut off the monitor, closed and locked the cabinet door, then sat back in her chair to ponder everything the three kids said and asked. Charlotte's question about Charlotte and Charles being there together amazed her the most. Her thoughts were now in full gear, asking 'How long has Charlotte realized she's both feminine and masculine? Does she realize many would chastise her for such a belief? Does she understand many only see themselves as feminine or masculine, not both? Could it be the time she's spent being Charlotte the reason she sees herself as both feminine and masculine? Or her experiences at the Mall?' She realized Charlotte's other questions may carry more validity than many of her previous questions, as marvelous as they were. 'Why does that girl think she's being self-centered, selfish, only thinking of herself after everyone she's helped? No one who helped as she's helped others would ever be thought of as being self-centered, selfish, or only thinking of themselves. She's even helping the boy who actually put her here with me.' Jane shifted through the other questions Charlotte asked, namely getting back to her old life. 'Won't she be more sensitive to the needs of girls? Won't she step up more often to stop the vary things she experienced at the Mall? What will she say when asked where she's been and what it was like? Even though Sherry will cover these questions and more, Charles will need additional counseling after leaving here.' Never before had she felt so tired and frustrated at the same time. Never before had her monster threatened to escape her because of everything that had been done to two of her wards. Never before had she needed every bit of her self-will to keep it from escaping, possibly ending everything she and Marie did here if it did.
Jane had leaned forward in her chair, putting her elbows on her desk then her head in her hands. She was trying to clear her mind, not forgetting what she'd seen and heard from the library feed, but putting it into perspective and store in her mind. She was deep in concentration and didn't hear the study door softly open or close in the same manner. She never heard the soft footsteps that came to and around the desk. It took several moments until she felt the arm that was around her shoulders, holding her. She slowly looked up to see Marie standing next to her, a worried look on her face. "This time you put too much on your shoulders, chère," Marie softly told her. "I know how you are feeling, the worries you carry, wondering if we've done all we can or should be doing. Mon amour (My love,), you can't let your abundant concern for these kid's lives cause you to forget we can only do what we can do here, at Seasons House. If we do any more than that, outside of what we do best, we jeopardize our work here. Give Sherry a chance with Charlotte's questions. Don't try to deal with them yourself. Let those dealing with the cause of this mess do what they do best. Just as I believe Charlotte's question about being here is true, so do I believe in those who'll eventually find the truth and put those responsible where they belong. Why don't you see how things are progressing in the library? It's almost time for our supper, ask Susan if she can stay." Marie bent down and kissed the top of Jane's head, before leaving the study. Jane sat there a few more minutes, thinking about all Marie had said. Seeing the truth in Marie's words, she nodded to herself before pushing the chair back, standing and leaving the study.
Jane's usual walk when needing to check on the girls, was one of a person on a mission, brisk, but short of running. This time, her walk from the study to the library was contemplative, due to her still mulling over the questions Charlotte had asked. Reaching the library door, she knocked, then entered, closing the door behind her after entering the library. As happened before, when someone knocked on the library door, every eye in the room would focus on the library door, waiting to see who'd enter the library. Jane's back was to the door, as she surveyed everyone there. "Girls, Toby, it's close to our evening meal. Girls, you know what needs to be done in preparing for the meal. Toby, if you're feeling better, I'd like you to help where you can. But don't over-tax yourself, we don't need to return you to the hospital for more treatment."
Toby had only been with Jane a few days, but knew, as the girls knew, when Jane stopped talking after giving orders, it was time to leave. He also knew the proper protocol for leaving her presence, and after the girls helped him off the couch, he, like the girls, asked to be excused. Being granted permission to leave, Jane waited until Francis closed the library door behind her before asking Susan, "What do you think of our kids? Francis is becoming something of a surprise with her observations and her thoughts. Charlotte and Toby are being held back, they need a free rein to learn." She walked over to the couch and sat down with a heavy sigh. Looking up to the ceiling she said with a sigh, "It pains me so to see kids like those treated as they've been treated. I would so like to…" but she let the rest of her words trail off.
Susan reached over and patted Jane's left thigh, saying, "You need to stop trying to carry all of this on your own shoulders. Stop worrying about what you can't do anything about. Those dealing with this mess are going to get it cleaned up in time. Killing kids, in mass, is not something that will cause them to drag their feet. With kids of their own, you may not be the only one who wants to do something drastic. Now, you asked what I thought of your kids. I think there are three sharp minds being put through remedial learning; they are thirsty to learn. Charlotte and Toby have studied on their own and are lightyears ahead of anyone in their respective classes. Francis hides her intelligence, probably because of her Aunt Agnus. She likely belittled her when that intelligence emerged, causing Francis to shrink back. It's also possible she was harassed at school when she showed her intelligence, making her feel as though she was having to deal with her Aunt. All three need to be taken out of public education and put into a private school, but not just any private school. They need to attend a private school that employs staff who can recognize intelligence and treat it as it should be treated. Let me gather their papers and we can look at them together."
Getting up from the couch, Susan went to the table and picked up both Francis' and Charlotte's papers, before returning to the couch and sitting down. She asked Jane to hand her Toby's papers and together they looked at each set of papers; Francis' papers were examined first. Susan knew the expected answers to each question, so simply circled the number of the question with a regular pencil if the answer was incorrect. She put a 'star' next to the question without an answer, showing her the areas where knowledge was lacking. When the last of Francis' papers had been examined, and Jane saw the results, Jane told Susan, "Those bloody fools. No wonder Francis is bored with school. She already knows the material and isn't being challenged. I see my decision was correct having her attend your classes, she's more than ready." Then in a softer voice, she said, "Had I known she was hiding this much intelligence, I would have called you sooner."
"Jane Thompson, will you STOP with the self recriminations. Given Francis' history, you couldn't know what she was hiding. Hell, to her, you were her Aunt Agnus again. Plus, how you have to maintain control of those boys, she was scared spitless to show you anything that might get her punished or outed. Maybe with the next boy sent to you, I should come and give them this evaluation so you know where they stand acedemically. That way, I can help you plan a course of study that fits their needs."
"Turning back to those three, I'll give you my educated experienced opinion of them. Based on what I've seen just today, those three would make excellent psychologists or psychiatrists. All three have an insightful ability to see and interpret what they see, and are accurate in their interpretations. I believe Toby wants that direction, but is worried because of the things he's done. Well, actually, forced to do; being beaten can make a person do what they don't want to do, after all. That alone, or along with all of the scars he bears, may be enough to have all charges dropped. Maybe you can consult someone who can give you a definitive answer. Let's look at his and Charlotte's papers."
As Jane watched, Susan went over Toby's papers, 'hmm' and 'uh huh'ing' as she turned paper after paper. "He's as I expected, grounded in the basics, actually doing Senior year work. I had to laugh when he called me a hard woman because of the question on particle physics. He's not far from that level of knowledge. It really galls me to see this kind of work and know there are Arschlöcher (assholes) who keep these kids back. All to keep from interrupting their precious social programs. Those pea brains have no concept of education, or how to administer it. What I'd like to do to some of them."
It was Jane's turn to place a hand on Susan's knee and remind her, "Seems all of us have something we'd like to do to someone, but can't. As I've been reminded a few times, only do what you can do at the time. It's saner that way."
Jane saying that, caused Susan to chuckle, and reply, "Yeah… I know. But I get so infuriated seeing minds like those three going to waste because of Arschlöcher (assholes) who only care about social structures. The kids in those schools don't need the administration to take care of the social structure of the school, the kids manage it quite nicely on their own. Sometimes it works well, other times not so much. School administration should only be concentrating on making sure every kid in the school has a quality education that is appropriate for each student. If you have kids who need AP courses, then by God get them into AP courses." Susan was quiet for a moment, then chuckled, saying, "Oh, dear. I've done it again, haven't I?" She looked at Jane, who'd been watching her, and saw her nodding her head. "How do you do it, Jane? How do you keep it together when you learn how the boys who are sent to you have been treated? Or in my case, seeing minds like these," and she slapped the papers she was holding, "being held back when they should be freed to learn."
Jane smiled at Susan and answered her question by saying, "I have Marie. When I start to stray, when I want to charge off and give some parent or guardian a taste of their own medicine, or have someone take care of something, she reminds me we can only do what we do best right here at Seasons House. Dare I say you and I aren't alone in your feelings of how kids are treated by their parents or guardians, or the schools they attend? Yes, there are agencies whose job it is to make sure kids are not mistreated. But how overworked can you overwork people before they've had enough and leave the profession? Or parents who care, fighting tooth and nail with school boards who don't care what parents say? Or administrators who are threatened with their jobs if they don't do what this or that person above them tells them to do. Those who stand up to the uncaring, often find themselves out of a job. And too many don't care enough to throw the rotten apples out of office when election time arrives. Again, as I've been reminded time and again, we can only do what we can do where we are at the time. You are an excellent teacher, Susan, I've seen the results you achieve. Continue being that excellent teacher in the realm you're in. Fight when you can, but don't lose sight of your main goal, enriching the minds of the young. Marie and I will straighten out that crooked path they're on and you fill their minds with knowledge so they continue walking the straight path."
After finishing with Toby's papers, Susan looked over Charlotte's papers, finding much the same with her answers to the questions. Both teens had sharp minds that were being held back by bureaucracy's useless programs. Keeping both from reaching their full, wanted, potential. Inhibiting both teens from learning at a speed they both could learn and advance. This time, instead of Susan voicing her frustration, she simply shook her head in disgust at the schools Toby, Charlotte, and Francis attended. Those schools had diamonds in their mists and were too blind to realize it.
Jane watched as Susan started crumpling the edges of the one paper of Charlotte's she was holding. She laid a hand on Susan's arm and said in a soft voice, "Perhaps it's time for you to take a break so you can calm down. You're about to reformat that paper you're holding."
Susan looked down at the paper she was holding and saw it was about to become a paper hand fan, with not too neatly folded creases. She laughed before saying, "I think you're right, Jane. I need a break and to calm down. But sometimes… " and she raised her left hand in a fist and shook it.
Jane nodded her head in understanding, before saying, "Come on, let's go eat our supper." Saying that Jane uncrossed her legs and stood up, standing back a bit to allow Susan to stand. After setting Charlotte's papers aside, Susan uncrossed her legs, stood up and the two women walked to the library door. Susan opened the door and followed Jane out of the library, closing the door behind her. As she sniffed the air, something smelled wonderful. Walking beside Susan, Jane took in a deep charge of the wonderful aroma before saying, "I do believe our Charlotte has once again made lasagna, possibly because you're here. She was taught to cook by an Uncle, who is a chef. I haven't learned what he taught her to add to the lasagna, but it is the best I've ever tasted."
The two women found Toby standing at the dinner table. He slowly walked around to the chair Jane used, pulled it out, and waited until she seated herself before helping her to push the chair in. When Jane indicated the chair Susan would use, he again slowly made his way there, pulled out the chair, and helped Susan push her chair in towards the table; both women thanked him. Then the parade of gastronomic delights started. Charlotte was in the lead with a large bowl of mixed salad. Francis followed with a large plate of garlic bread. And bringing up the end of the parade, was Marie, carrying an even larger casserole dish than before, brimming with lasagna. After everything was placed on the table, the girls went and stood behind their chairs. Toby, who'd been standing behind Marie's chair, helped seat her before slowly making his way to his chair. Once all three teens were at their places, they all sat in unison. Not unusual to Jane, Marie, and the girls, but new to Susan, she watched as Toby bowed his head for a moment before looking back up. Susan knew right away Toby had bowed his head to give thanks for the food he was about to eat. That one act increased her admiration for the boy. A boy who was abused beyond belief, but who hadn't lost the dignity and the humanity he'd been taught by someone.
The lasagna had already been cut into nice big squares, with plenty left in the dish after six squares had been placed on six different plates. As it turned out, the only thing that would take place in the kitchen that night, was to wash dishes and clean the kitchen. There were no leftovers to deal with this time.
Jane started her usual educational round robin, as they ate, by reminding Charlotte and Francis they both had research papers due and were to work on them after the kitchen had been cleaned. Then she questioned the teens about the evaluation papers they had worked on. It became a can of worms she hadn't expected to open. "Tell me, girls, and Toby. What opinions do you have of the evaluation papers you worked through? Were you surprised by anything, or learn anything about yourselves?"
Toby and Charlotte had each just put a fork of lasagna into their mouths, so couldn't answer Jane's questions right away. But Francis was just about to fork another piece of her lasagna and sat her fork on her plate before the three women saw a thoughtful look appear on her face. "Well, Aunt Jane," and she almost shrugged her shoulders. "I don't have anything to compare them to, so I guess they were okay. There were more questions I could answer than I couldn't answer, and that kind of surprised me. I think I couldn't answer some of the questions because, well, I've never had that material before. It isn't that I didn't want to learn the material, I wasn't allowed to learn it. They told me I had to stay in the classes I was in. I guess maybe that's why school became boring or I became bored with school. I wish they'd have let me take those other classes." There was sadness in her voice, and for several moments, she just looked down at her plate; tiny drops of water dropped onto her plate.
Jane saw Susan's reaction to Francis' words, and knew what Susan was about to do. So she placed a gentle hand on hers, getting Susan's attention and subtly shaking her head, 'No.' Susan understood the unsaid meaning. Susan wanted to go to the school Francis attended and explain what education is all about. After she kicked a few butts.
As the three women watched, Toby and Charlotte stopped eating and each put an arm around Francis' shoulder. "Hey," Toby began. "You'll now get that chance to learn that material because Susan is here. She'll fill your head so full of knowledge that we'll have to clean up the library after your head explodes. Boy, that'll be aaa mess."
Susan quickly covered her mouth, as did Marie. Jane, using all of her willpower, quickly schooled herself to keep from laughing, both at what Toby said and the look now on Francis' face. Jane also recognized what Toby had done, and she knew he knew it too.
Francis slowly looked up, tear tracks evident on her cheeks, frowned, then slowly turned her head towards Toby and said to him, "Then you should hurry up and heal. Because I'll be incapacitated and it will be you and Charlotte who'll have to clean up the library."
Then Toby said something that caused everyone's eyes to water, and Francis to throw her arms around his neck and hug him. "For you, Francis. I'll do that any day."
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
After hugging Toby, Francis turned back to her plate, picking up her fork with the bite of lasagna still on it. She lifted the fork towards her mouth but stopped midway and slowly turned to look at Toby, who was looking at her with a big smile plastered on his face. In the brief time between picking up her fork and raising it towards her mouth, she'd realized what Toby had done by what he told her. She snorted, shook her head slightly, then softly said, "You're a snot, but thank you."
Toby leaned over and gave Francis a peck on the cheek, before telling her, "Any time, my little sister."
Francis' eyes were moist and her throat tight after Toby spoke. She felt the safest course right now was to continue eating. Or she was going to have a good cry right there at the dinner table.
The three women could see the effect Toby's words had on Francis, and could see how she fought to hold it together. "So, Toby. Let's hear your opinion of the evaluation questions," Jane said to Toby, more as a way to give Francis more time to calm down.
"I have to agree with Francis. Many of the questions I couldn't answer because of not having gone through the relevant courses. I'm also like Francis and wasn't allowed to take AP courses, even though I asked to take them. They said my grades didn't show I could deal with AP courses. I asked them to test me and I'd prove I belonged in those courses." Here he snorted, before going on, remembering the condescending attitude of his counselor: 'That isn't how it's done, Toby. The grades you earn in your classes determine if you're suitable for AP classes. And obviously, you're not.' At the time, after his counselor said that, Toby wanted to punch that arrogant asshole in the mouth. "But my so-called counselor said I didn't have the grades to prove I could handle AP courses. I so wanted to punch that arrogant bastard in the face after he said that. Especially as he sat there with a smug grin on his face after telling me I couldn't take AP courses. After that, I didn't really care anymore, so I did the bare minimum to get by in my classes. I'd sit in the library during my free period and read what they said I couldn't learn." Then he looked at Susan and told her, "I was even reading an advanced physics textbook that included a section on particle physics. I was a few chapters away from that section when I was arrested. Maybe if I'd made it through that section I could have answered that question on particle physics. Now though… " and he just shook his head in resignation, believing he'd never have a chance now to fulfill his dream of becoming a psychologist. He just sat there at the table, his head down and using his fork to move pieces of lasagna around on his plate.
Marie reached over and laid her left hand on Jane's right hand. Jane reached over and placed her right hand on Susan's left hand. After hearing what Francis and Toby had to say, there were three women at that table who were doing their very best to rein in the anger that threatened to become actions.
Even after hearing Charlotte's questions and seeing the results of her evaluation papers, Jane still had to ask the question. "Charlotte. We haven't heard from you yet. Tell us what you thought of the evaluation."
Despite sitting at the dinner table, Charlotte's mind was still standing at the library window looking out. Charlotte was looking at her plate when she spoke. "It was okay, Aunt Jane. Nothing special." And that's all she said, or as Jane believed, all she was going to say. Jane was usually demanding when it came to the girls speaking to her. They looked at her when they spoke or incurred her wrath for not doing so. However, this time she knew if she pushed Charlotte into looking at her when she spoke, Charlotte could go ballistic again.
Hoping what she was about to say would bolster the three teens, she told them, "From what Susan has shown me, the three of you did quite well. Even without having the advanced courses. That in itself is a testament to the work you three have done on your own. Not many would have done what you three have done on your own, that's something to be proud of doing." Jane had crossed her mental fingers before she spoke, and it seemed to have paid off. There was no shouting, crying, or anyone bolting from the table. Instead, they had looked at her as she spoke, each in turn getting a thoughtful look on their face while she spoke.
Francis broke the silence with, "That may be true, Aunt Jane. But it'd be even better if we could take AP courses. I know I wouldn't be bored sitting in those classes. But it'll never happen to me. I'll be stuck in those boring classes after leaving here."
Once again, the casserole dish of lasagna was cleaned out, as was the salad and garlic bread. Once everyone's fork had been laid to rest on the plates, Marie and the girls went into the kitchen are returned with the dessert. During dessert, Jane again reminded the girls of the research papers they had due and suggested after the kitchen was clean, they should spend time working on their papers before needing to get ready for bed. Toby felt left out until he saw the sweet smile on Susan's face. She and Jane had finished their desserts, and Susan now sat with her elbows on the table, her hands flat under her chin, and a sweet, innocent smile, garnishing her face. "And Toby. After helping the best you can with clearing the table, and in the kitchen, you are to go to the library and follow Susan's directions. I believe what she has planned for you will enhance the rudimentary learning you received in a subject at your high school. All of you need to work as efficiently as possible and not waste the short time you have before your bedtime. Since all three of you have finished your desserts, you may be excused to begin your chores."
After helping Toby out of his chair, the three had the dining table cleared in a matter of minutes. When Marie went into the kitchen, she was almost run over by the girl's quick proficient work, directing Toby when necessary. When Toby had done all he could do at the moment, he slowly walked out of the kitchen and to the library, where he walked through the open door. After entering the library, he saw Susan rifling through several boxes until he heard her exclaim, "FOUND IT!" After standing up, she looked at Toby and had the same innocent smile on her face. Pointing to the couch, she and Toby met there at the same moment before she told him, "You asked me a question during the evaluation you were taking. This book," and she held it up for Toby to see, "can answer that question and many more you may have. There will be no labs, just reading, and after completing a section, there will be a graded test. So," and she handed Toby the AP Physics book she'd been holding, "start reading."
Susan had to suppress the chuckle threatening to escape because of the surprised look on Toby's face. "Well, I'll be dang. I'm finally going to be allowed to take an AP course." He'd been looking down at the AP Physics book he was holding, so Susan didn't have a clear view of his face. But when he looked up, she saw his eyes were wet. With a catch in his voice, he told her, "Thank you for this. I've been wanting this for a long time."
Susan didn't have to say anything more, as she watched him sit down on the couch and become lost in his reading. He didn't even hear Francis and Charlotte enter the library, or the door close behind them. Even when Francis or Charlotte asked what he was reading, he didn't hear them, he was so focused on his reading. Susan had sat at the opposite end of the couch, watching Toby as he read. She was rather shocked by how swiftly Toby was reading the material in the book, flipping page after page in rapid succession. She had known people who could speed read, and retain what they read, but there was nothing in Toby's file about his ability to do the same. The section test she would give him would prove if he was capable of speed reading, and retaining what he read.
Two hours had passed when a knock was heard on the library door. For the girls, it would be trained reflex causing them to look up from their work to see who was about to come into the library. But not for Toby, who was still lost in his reading. The library door opened and the girls watched as Aunt Jane entered the library. After closing the library door behind her, she walked over to the table and enquired how the girls were doing on their papers. When their answers met her expectations, she then turned her attention to Toby, still sitting on the couch and still flipping page after page. Jane gave Susan a questioning look, nodding her head towards Toby. "He's been like that ever since I gave him that book. I don't think he's heard anything since he started reading." Jane and Susan watched for several minutes as Toby flipped page after page before Susan softly called Toby's name. He kept on reading. She raised her voice, but he kept on reading. Finally, she reached over, grabbed his arm, and shook him. Then, and only then, did she get his attention.
Toby looked up from his reading and noticed everyone looking at him, including Aunt Jane. "Oh, hi Aunt Jane. I didn't hear you come into the library. I was lost in this book," and he held it up for Jane to see. "Why is everyone looking at me? Did I faux pas again? If I did, I'm sorry."
Perplexed as Susan was by Toby's reading, Jane asked, "Toby, are you retaining what you're reading, given how fast you seem to be reading?"
Toby smiled, then handed the book to Susan and told her, "I've read the first two hundred pages. Pick any page within that range, then tell me the page number and the paragraph number of your choice." Susan found page two hundred and isolated those pages from the rest of the book. She then opened those pages at random, telling Toby the page number. She stabbed the page, letting her finger land on a random paragraph. When she told him the paragraph number, all four watched as Toby closed his eyes, and recited that paragraph verbatim. He asked her to pick another page and paragraph, and again recited that paragraph verbatim.
After opening his eyes, he looked around and saw everyone had their mouths open, even Jane. "Um… why is everyone's mouth hanging open?"
Jane was the first to recover as she told him, "Don't you realize what you've just done, Toby? You've read two hundred pages in that Physics book in two hours. You then recited not one, but two randomly selected paragraphs and recited both verbatim." The shocked look on Jane's face remained because of what Toby told her next.
"Okaayy… so?"
Susan was shaking her head, realizing Toby didn't understand the significance of what he'd just done. "Toby, very few people can do what you've just done. And it seems you are another one of those who can. How'd you learn to read so fast and retain what you've read?"
If what they just witnessed wasn't so serious, they all might be laughing right now. Toby's face became animated with frowns of various forms. Head tilts and turns as though he was listening to something. Questions crossed his face and he finally said, "You mean everyone doesn't read like I do? I thought everyone read that fast."
"How long have you been reading this way, Toby?" Jane asked, sitting down on the couch next to Susan. "Who taught you to read so fast," Jane added before falling silent, waiting for Toby to answer her questions.
Toby looked thoughtful for a moment before answering Jane's questions. "Well, Aunt Jane. I guess I've always been a fast reader. It seemed to start the day I learned to read. So, in a way, I guess the elementary teacher who helped me learn to read taught me. As to remembering what I read? I don't know, I just do. I don't seem to forget anything I read, though I may have to think a bit to find anything I've read in the past. It all just seems to stick with me."
Jane just nodded her head at Toby's answers, before telling the three they needed to get ready for bed. Toby closed the Physics book, set it aside, and with some effort got up off the couch. The girls gathered up their work and returned it all to their individual folders, before putting them away in a filing cabinet. Asking for permission to leave, and receiving permission, Jane waited until the three were out of the library before speaking with Susan. Only Susan went first. "Oy vey… that discovery just shot holes in my plans for him. He's almost a fourth of the way through the book, in two hours. He'd finish reading the entire book if he was allowed to read all day. Jane, he's at such an accelerated pace I don't think I can keep up with him. He'll be through lessons faster than what I have in mind for him. My God, Jane. Those fools are holding back a boy who could graduate high school within at least two years." After saying that, she sat there shaking her head at the stupidity of those running Toby's high school.
Jane could see the frustration written on Susan's face. Patting Susan's thigh, she told her, "Go. Go home to your husband. Let him calm your soul as only he can do. Just don't wake up your neighbors." The last was said with a cheeky smile, as Jane waited for Susan's reaction to the hint she gave her.
Jane watched Susan's face go from questioning to total surprise. "Why Jane Thompson, you cheeky woman." Susan reached over and took Jane's upper right arm, leaned into her, and in a sultry voice said, "I'll do my best to let them sleep." The two women laughed before standing up and accompanying each other to the library door, where Jane opened the door, allowing Susan to exit the library first, before following her out of the library and closing the door behind her.
Walking to the couch in the living room, Susan picked up her purse and other belongings before bidding Jane a good night; Jane walked to the living room window to make sure Susan left safely. Once Susan's car was out of sight, Jane turned and walked towards the stairs, stopping just inside the living room. It wasn't long before the three were descending the stairs, Charlotte in front, Toby in the middle, and Francis coming down last. They waited for each other before walking into the living room and stopping before Jane. Jane inspected the girl's faces, to make sure they'd properly removed their makeup, then looked at their robes to make sure they hadn't been mistreated. She then turned her attention to Toby, asking, "How have you been feeling today, Toby? You seem to be moving better than you have been. Jill will be here tomorrow to look at your wounds."
Waiting until Jane had finished speaking, Toby replied, "I think I'm doing better, Aunt Jane. My back isn't hurting as much, but my rear end is still causing me problems walking. I tried taking regular steps a few minutes ago and found out that was the wrong thing to do. So until my butt gets better, I'll be walking slower than usual."
As Toby spoke, Jane was nodding her head, indicating she understood what she was being told. "Your body has suffered a traumatic experience, don't do anything to cause a setback," was Jane's reply to what Toby told her. Before dismissing the three, she told them, "Remember, Sherry Daniels will be here tomorrow to speak with all of us. We've all displayed the need to speak with someone in her field, so be open with her. Tell her how you're feeling, what thoughts you're having, and anything else you need to tell her. Also remember, anything you tell her will not be shared with anyone else here. Including me, unless it deals with your life. Understand?" Receiving the only answer she would accept, "Yes Aunt Jane," she dismissed the three and bid them a good night, receiving the same from each of the three.
She watched as they chained their way back up the stairs, always putting Toby in between the girls. As she stood watching the girls and Toby climb the stairs, a realization struck her. Something she'd seen but hadn't seen the entire time Toby had been with them. Other than the times she told the girls to help Toby, they had helped him of their own volition. And it seemed to have started after Charlotte's blow-up at Toby, and his acceptance of her words. The three had formed a bond between themselves. The girls saw a need and filled it, knowing when to help Toby and helping him when he asked. Even Francis has been doing something without being cajoled or threatened by Jane or Marie. That in itself was an excellent sign in Frank's case.
Jane's thoughts had her consumed, so she didn't see Marie until she felt an arm go around her waist. "Come, chère, I've just made some tea. Come and give me your thoughts about Toby. He's turning out to be a remarkable young man, despite what he's done. It would seem there are now two young men whose names need to be cleared. Maybe Ruth and Charles' father should hear of this? Oui?"
Jane was still amazed at Marie's ability to know what was going on without being there to see it actually occur. After sitting down at the kitchen table, Jane recounted what she'd witnessed Toby do after she questioned him about his ability to retain what he read while reading so fast. "Two random pages, Marie, and two random paragraphs recited perfectly. Two random pages and paragraphs within the two hundred pages he read in two hours. After witnessing his performance, it is understandable why Susan becomes so angry when she sees someone like Toby and the abilities he has being wasted at his school."
Marie chuckled after what Jane said. "Chère, it isn't only Susan who gets angry when such a waste is witnessed. You are upset right now speaking about it. It is a tragedy when people such as Charles and Toby are put into a system unfit for their needs, but it isn't something we can remedy. We can only do what we do, where we are at the moment. Others who are involved in those fields will have to come forth and work to change the system. We have our skills and they have theirs, and we each must do the best we can with our given abilities. Now, go to bed, it's late. You can tell Sherry all of these things tomorrow."
Marie watched as Jane nodded her head in agreement. She reached over and patted Marie's hand, before pushing the kitchen chair back, standing and leaving the kitchen. Marie sat alone in the kitchen, the only noise coming from the work the freezer and refrigerator were doing to keep their food cold. Her thoughts, at the moment, were no better than Jane's. She too wanted to take those running their kid's schools and bang their heads against the walls until they realized what fools they've been to hold the three kids back. It wasn't long before she too saw how much she needed to speak with Sherry. She stood up, picked up her and Jane's mugs, took them to the sink, rinsed them out, sat them on the counter, took one more look around the kitchen, then walking over to the kitchen door, flicked the light switch down to shut off the kitchen lights. She checked to make sure the downstair doors were locked before climbing the stairs and making her way to her own bedroom, looking in on the three before finally closing her bedroom door behind her. She had a lot to tell Sherry in the morning.
When Jane came out of her bedroom the next morning and walked down the short hall to the dining room, she heard voices coming from the kitchen. The dining room table had been set, so she took the opportunity to go upstairs and inspect her ward's bedrooms. She didn't expect to find anything amiss in Charlotte's bedroom, because she was an orderly person. She also didn't expect to find Francis' bedroom out of order, ever since Charlotte had a talk with her and what Jane had seen of her bedroom the past few days. After inspecting each bedroom, her thoughts had become reality, both bedrooms were clean and tidy. Toby's bedroom was the real question, though. Yes, it had been neat and tidy the time she looked in on him, but would that continue? As she stepped into Toby's bedroom and closed the door behind her, she put her back to the bedroom door and slowly scanned the room. Just as she found in Charlotte's and Francis' bedrooms, nothing was out of place. Wondering, since she didn't see his pajamas, she walked over to the neatly made bed, lifted the pillow, and found his pajamas neatly folded under the pillow. Was this because of Francis or Charlotte? Her next stop was the en suite. Again, after entering the en suite, she put her back to the closed door and scanned the room. With a practiced eye, she saw towels were hung on the towel bars. The toilet lid was down, and the faucets shut off completely. Taking a closer look at the bathtub, she marveled at how clean it was, given what pain Toby was still feeling. She wondered how he had reached across the tub to clean off any residue left after bathing. Francis? Charlotte? Had they helped him in this? Should she question them on this? Would questioning them serve any purpose? Wasn't one of her purposes to have them learn to keep their living place clean without being told to do so? Hadn't Toby done that? After deliberations, she decided to watch and see if it continued to be done to her satisfaction, as it had been done this time.
Jane had come down the stairs just as Charlotte had placed buttered toast on the table. Charlotte looked up to see Jane walking into the dining room and noticed a puzzled look on her face. "Yes, Aunt Jane," was all she said to Jane, eliciting another look on Jane's face Charlotte knew all too well.
"Yes what, Charlotte?" Jane asked, believing she already knew the answer Charlotte would give her.
"You're wondering how Toby's bedroom was clean and tidy. And why his pajamas were under the pillow." Charlotte knew it wouldn't be wise to chuckle at the expression now on Jane's face, she didn't want to discover what she'd be doing next if that chuckle became public.
Jane's face now had a questioning look about it, as she asked, "How did you know what I was wondering, Miss Thorton?" Jane was now staring at Charlotte, embers in her eyes, even though she knew Charlotte wouldn't wilt under such a gaze.
"I read the expression on your face, Aunt Jane," she said to Jane, wisely hiding the smile she had wanted to display. "You had a puzzled expression on your face, Aunt Jane. It couldn't have been about Francis' bedroom or my bedroom, or you would have laid into us. So it had to be about Toby's bedroom. And yes, we've been helping him keep his bedroom and the en suite clean. He tried cleaning the tub himself but opened one of the wounds on his back. It wasn't bad, but it really hurt. And his rear end keeps him from bending over to reach the other side of the tub. So, Francis and I have been helping him after we finish our rooms."
If Charlotte expected Jane to say more about her and Francis helping Toby, she was disappointed. All Jane said to her was, "I see. Run along, you have more to do in the kitchen." After her exchange with Charlotte, Jane walked over to the big window in the living room. Charlotte's hand was just about to push the kitchen door open when she heard, "And Charlotte, you need to set three more places at the dining room table. Our guests have arrived."
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Looking out the big window in the living room, Jane watched as three cars came up the drive, parked and a woman exited each car. One of the women saw Jane standing at the living room window and gave her a big wave; the woman also had a big smile on her face. Jane just shook her head, before turning and walking to the front door. Opening the door, Jane stood there and watched as the three women greeted each other with hugs and cheek kisses, before walking side by side and approaching the front door where Jane waited. "I don't remember sending you three a breakfast invitation for today. And I suppose someone made two phone calls and invited the other two?"
Jane's look would have curled the toes of any girl she had in the house, but not these three women. These three kept the smiles they had on their faces, with one even saying, "Oh, Janie. You know anytime I come to your house I have an open invitation to sit for a meal. You told me that your very own self some ancient time ago, Janie." The other two women did their best not to laugh at the banter between her and 'Janie.' "And look at you, Janie, all prim and proper, you need to let your hair down now and then. Ya know? Now, if what I smell tastes as good as it smells, then our early arrival won't be in vain, will it?"
When Sherry Daniels reached Jane, Jane urgently pulled her into a hug, like two long-lost lovers. What Jane said next surprised even the other two women, Susan and Jill. "Damn girl, it's good to see you again. We do need your help."
Sherry was hugging Jane as fiercely as Jane was hugging her. "It's good to be here again, chère, I've missed you. You should have called me sooner about all this Scheisse (crap.). I'd have dropped everything and been here yesterday, last week, two years ago. You know that, chère. For you, anything. How's the boy holding up so far? I've seen the pictures you sent me and read the accompanying file. From the looks of you, you're about to send some friends to deal with the whole thing, right? But you can't get involved without endangering the boy, right?"
Jane pushed Sherry back and looked at her with a surprised look on her face. "Ho... " but she never finished her question, as Sherry beat her to it.
"How'd I know how you're feeling and how you wanted to contact your friends and have them deal with this whole mess? Thompson, I've been able to read you like a book ever since we met all those centuries ago." Sherry then took a hand and rubbed Janie's cheek, saying, "And I'm really glad you didn't go critical in getting involved. You wouldn't look good in orange or looking like a zebra. Besides, I can't bake a cake worth a damn, as you well know from experience."
Jane had leaned into Sherry's hand, then looking at Susan and Jill, she said for them to go on through; to Jill, she said Toby was in the kitchen. After the three women had entered the house, and Jane had closed and locked the front door, she and Sherry, arm in arm, went to the study. Jane opened the study door and let Sherry enter first, before following her and closing the door behind her. "Mess is not a strong enough word to describe what's taking place, Sherry," Jane said, as she walked over to the window at the front of the study. "Marie and I are charting new territory," Jane supplied as she looked out the window. Turning to face Sherry, she said in a voice of exasperation, "We only have one real girl with us, the other two shouldn't even be here. Charlotte, Charles Thorton, is only here to keep him out of Federal Court, where Strom threatened to take him there if Ruth didn't find him guilty. And Toby. He's been so severely beaten it's a wonder he is still sane. Both of those boys are where Marie and I want our girls to be before they leave here. To top it all off, Sherry, two men arrived at the hospital looking for Toby. They wanted to kill him, Sherry. Someone has been killing those kids who were involved in the shoplifting ring and still on the streets. I so wanted Fred and Bill to take care of this whole mess. And I can assure you, they would have found those at the top responsible for everything, and the world wouldn't have known where those people could be found when those two were done. If Marie hadn't been here, they would have been on their way right now."
Sherry had stood stock still in the middle of the study while Jane came very close to shouting while she laid her soul bare to Sherry. "Jane, stop. Take a breath. You are all over the place right now. This isn't you. Get your thoughts together and we'll talk more after breakfast." Sherry walked over to Jane, turned her around, put her arms around her, and held her as she cried on Sherry's shoulder. "You are a slow learner, Janie. You try to carry the world on your shoulders, it's something you've always done. If you don't learn to do what you do best and leave the other stuff to those who do that best, you're going to burn yourself out completely. And boys who need you will be out of luck." Sherry continued holding Jane, feeling the woman's body slowly relax. Pushing Jane back, she told her, "Come on, let's go eat breakfast, then we can talk more. Okay?"
With her arm still around Jane, Sherry steered them to the study door. Using her free hand, Sherry opened the door, pushed Jane through before walking through herself and closing the door behind her. Sherry then steered Jane towards her bedroom, hinting Jane needed to fix her face. After Sherry watched Jane enter her bedroom, she walked over to the big window at the front of the living room. She'd known Jane Thompson for more years than she could remember, and knew she was a 'tough-as-nails' woman. So for something to cause her this much distress, it must be extremely bad. As Sherry looked out the window, she sensed someone standing beside her. Turning to her left, she saw a very pretty girl standing there. "Aunt Jane has really been hurting since this whole thing started. It's gotten worse when she found out they were killing the kids who were involved with the shoplifting. Oh, I'm Charlotte, by the way, Charles Thorton in my normal clothes. Francis and I have done all we can to help Aunt Jane, even forcing her to go riding with us. It helped at that time, but only during that time. Why do some people take on the sins of the world, but can't do anything about what's causing them such distress?"
Sherry gave Charlotte a blank look before chuckling. "Janie said you were an interesting young man, Charles Thorton. And now I can see why. You asked one heck of a question. My short answer? They have an abundance of love and care for others. When they see things such as all I've learned occur, they want to do something, see someone deal with the situation. They know, deep down, they lack the skills to get involved, so they develop a sense of being powerless. They also know, deep down, if they did get involved, they might be in trouble or lose everything they've worked for. Again, feeling powerless. But she isn't powerless when it comes to changing behaviors and attitudes, something she forgets sometimes during something like this. I'm here to help her remember all the good she's done, all the boys she's put on a better path. You and Francis should be commended for the help you've given Jane, it's rare for two of her girls to do something like that."
Charlotte laughed, then said, "That was your short answer? If that's your short answer, I'd hate to hear your dissertation."
Laughing, Sherry told Charlotte, "I can get wound up, Charlotte." Then leaning towards Charlotte, and speaking in a conspiratorial voice, asked, "Is breakfast ready yet?
Answering in the same quality of voice, Charlotte replied, "We're just waiting for Aunt Jane. And why are we whispering?"
A booming voice caused Charlotte to jump and Sherry to turn her head towards the voice. "BECAUSE, CHARLOTTE. IT'S A CHARACTER FLAW SHE'S HAD FOR YEARS. AND, ASK HER A QUESTION AND YOU GET HER DISSERTATION. Now come on you two or our breakfast will get cold." Jane chuckled as her dear friend stuck her tongue out at her. She also chuckled after causing Charlotte to jump, likely for the first time since she'd been at Seasons House. She still had the touch!
Just as Charlotte and Sherry turned to walk through the living room and into the dining room, Jill and Toby slowly came down the stairs; Jill had taken Toby up to his bedroom to examine his wounds, and treat any needing to be treated. Jill was behind Toby but had her left hand on his left shoulder, helping to support him as he slowly took one step at a time down the stairs. Toby was concentrating on the steps, so didn't see Jane and Jill make eye contact or Jill nod her head to Jane; Toby's wounds were healing nicely.
Despite his slow movements, Toby again assisted in seating Jane, Jill, Susan, Sherry, and Marie when she finally came out of the kitchen. Not one of the ladies said a word about his slow movements in assisting them, they just thanked him for his help. A silent question passed between Sherry and Jane concerning his helping the ladies to sit at the table. With raised eyebrows, Sherry was asking Jane, 'Has he done this since he's been here?' Sherry received an unspoken answer from Jane as she nodded her head. Sherry returned the gesture, indicating she was impressed with Toby and what he was doing, given his condition. Sherry watched as Toby stood until Francis and Charlotte were seated, then sat down himself. She threw another silent question towards Jane when Toby bowed his head after sitting down. Jane put her palms together, her fingers pointing straight up and she bowed her head at the same time, telling Sherry Toby was saying a prayer of thanks before eating. This time Sherry mouthed 'WOW' in response to Jane's silent explanation.
Sherry had read the file Jane had sent her on Toby, the official report and Jane's report. The official report stated Toby was an angry, arrogant, and disrespectful young man. It also told of the injuries discovered on his body when he was required to change his clothes while in jail. And the lack of parental consent so his injuries couldn't be treated. While Jane's report started with the same initial belief, and her thoughts on how she'd deal with Toby, she amended those thoughts after observing Toby when he arrived at the train station. The amendment also included her observations of Toby since his arrival at Seasons House, which dramatically contradicted the official report. She had a feeling he'd be an interesting boy to speak with. Her thoughts were interrupted when she heard someone call her name.
"Earth to Ms. Daniels. Would you please bring your spacecraft back to Earth, Ms. Daniels?" Not only was Jane looking at Sherry, knowing she was lost in thought, but so were the others; the girls were trying not to laugh because of what Jane said to Sherry.
As everyone watched, Sherry shook herself, then said, "Sorry, I was lost in thought." Then while looking at Jane she said, "MS Daniels? Come on, Janie. You know I hate it when people address me as MS anything. I'm not that type of girl." After saying that, she gave Jane a smug look, causing the girls and Toby to once again stifle the laughs bubbling in their throats.
Returning Sherry's smug look with one of her own, Jane told her, "But it got your attention, didn't it? I find it's the only way to bring you back down to earth when that pea-sized brain of yours takes you into the void."
"Pea brain? Now you're calling me a pea brain? Was it my pea-sized brain that pulled your fat out of the fire in that restaurant that one time? Let me think, aw yes… " but Jane jumped in before Sherry could go on.
"You wouldn't?" Jane exclaimed. "That's blackmail!"
"Oh, yes I would! And yes it is!" Sherry replied, her face laced with a big smile. As everyone watched, Jane picked up her serviette and waved it in the air, eliciting a, "That's better, Janie," from Sherry.
Marie knew of the deep friendship Jane and Sherry shared over the years and was always amused when they had the time to meet and rekindle that friendship with their bantering. Susan, on the other hand, at first thought the two were at each other's throats over something, but soon realized they were just bantering with each other. She knew it was something only real friends did with each other.
After the two had finished bantering with each other, Jane saw a questioning look on Francis' face. "Francis. You seem to be troubled. Why is that?"
Everyone had helped themselves to the scrambled eggs, bacon, hash browns, and biscuits that had been passed from person to person, and Francis had taken a fork full of scrambled eggs when Jane asked her question. Swallowing the bite, then clearing her throat, Francis answered with, "I was just thinking about my paper on the Dust Bowl. Why would people ever live in those areas? When they were first settled, they'd have to travel a long distance to reach any town. The only thing there when they settled those areas was prairie grasses. I just don't understand why such areas attract people."
Susan chimed in with, "What do you see when looking out through the front windows, Francis? Tall grasses? Trees? And very little else, right? Imagine being given land and allowed to keep it if you made improvements on it in five years. Imagine you had a dream to own your own home and land. You have to remember how those people were living at the time, Francis. Many had arrived in America and were living in major cities at the time. They were paying someone else to live in the owner's apartment buildings, often in terrible conditions; working conditions weren't any better. You also have to remember a lot this started taking place after the Civil War, when the Country was trying to put itself back together. Your living conditions stink, as does the job you have, so what would you do if you were offered a chance to have your own land and build and live in your own house? And all you had to do was make improvements on the land. People saw a chance to get out from under poor and oftentimes terrible living conditions, if not dangerous working conditions. So they took the offer of free land and the chance to start a new life. But as you have undoubtedly learned, they were ignorant of land management. They went too far with the plow and plowed everything in sight, removing the one thing helping to stabilize the land. Those who had herds of cattle overgrazed the land, with the result the same as with overplowing the land. After a while, many had to leave, or left in hopes of finding something better. But many stayed because they liked the freedom the land and the area gave them. They weren't living shoulder to shoulder with the person next to them. The conditions were rough, even hard, but it was theirs to do as they wanted. Do you enjoy the view when you look out of the front window, Francis?" Francis nodded her head in answer to Susan's question
"Those who settled in those areas also liked the view, a view not hampered by tall buildings or streets packed with all manner of people, horses and carts. They could see for miles, and the odd building and the herds of cattle they'd see grazing in pastures belonged to the neighbors who lived several miles away. The air was clean, the sky blue instead of brown and hazy. And what a view of the heavens at night. The sky was lit with so many stars, unseen in the big cities because of the constant lighting and haze. Have been outside at night, Francis, and taken in the sky and its dance of lights? It is a beauty all of its own. Mankind could do nothing to improve on such beauty. Did my diatribe answer your question, Francis? This and other topics will be covered in the American history course I have planned for the three of you. You will also study World history." When Susan mentioned World history, the three teens cringed at the thought of World history. "Oh, come on now, no ugly faces. I'm not going to have you learn who did what when. If you want to know that, you can look it up. No, I want you three to see and understand cause and effect. How decisions of any kind do have consequences, and sometimes lasting consequences like the Dust Bowl."
Susan changed topics with, "Toby. I think with another hour of reading, you'll be ready for the test on the first section of that Physics book. Unless Jane has something for you to do after helping in the kitchen, then I'd like you to continue reading where you stopped. Once you reach the end of the first section, let me know and I'll gladly give you the first test you'll be taking. My gawd, will you stop looking like you just sucked a lemon. I'm not going to stand up in front of you and produce some boring litany of who did what when and why. You are going to teach yourselves. I'm here to let that happen. I'm here to answer any questions you have and to point out ideas or concepts you might have missed or didn't see. I'm here to try and get you to think about what you're reading or working through. You three will not be a captive audience. If you run across something in your reading, all of us will discuss it, not just you and me individually."
The only person who hadn't been eating as Susan spoke was herself. It was Jane who interjected by saying, "I think it's time to let Susan have her breakfast, don't you three agree?" She was looking directly at the three teens who sat opposite her at the table. Jane, Marie, and Jill had seen how intently the three had been listening to Susan as they ate their breakfasts. Now, with something in their mouths at the moment, all they could do was nod their heads to Jane's oral question and her unspoken one. "Toby. I do not have anything else for you after you've done what you are able in the kitchen. So you are to return to the library and continue with your reading." When Jane gave reading assignments to past girls, none had the gleam she now saw in Toby's eyes. He wanted to read, needed to read, had hoped he'd get the chance one day. That day had arrived and he wanted to do nothing but bury himself in whatever book Susan gave him to read. "Girls, you know your research papers are coming due, so you need to work those in between what Susan gives you."
When the last fork had been placed on an empty plate, the three teens asked to be excused from the table, so they could begin clearing the table and finish in the kitchen. As the four women watched, despite Toby's limited mobility, he was moving much faster than he'd done in the past few days. When the three teens were in the kitchen it was Susan who made an observation with, "I think someone is in a hurry to resume his reading. I can't recall any of my past students needing to read as urgently as that boy. I wonder if he thinks it will be taken away from him, so is reading as much as possible?"
It was Marie who added, "Or, he's making up for lost time. Remember, he tried to get put into AP courses, only to be denied. A person that hungry to learn, often overcompensates when they are finally given the chance to do what they've dreamt of doing. According to what I've heard, his speed reading isn't being questioned, it's his ability to retain what he reads that's being questioned. And if my figures are correct, you should be giving him the section test in about 30-45 minutes after he begins where he left off reading yesterday. I suspect he'll read even faster today, so he can continue reading more of that Physics book. I also suspect he'll do the same for any book you give him, Susan."
After the table had been cleared, it wasn't long before Toby came out of the kitchen, walking much faster than when he helped clear the table. As the four women watched, he made a beeline to the library, continuing the same fast-paced walk. Susan and Sherry may have missed it, but Jill, Jane, and Marie saw the grimace on his face with each quick step he took toward the library. "I sure hope he didn't tear anything open walking like that," Jill put in. "Everything is healing nicely, but it only takes one wrong move and he'll tear something open. That kid has more heart than most kids his age. Hell, he has more heart than many adults." Then, speaking more to herself than anyone still at the table, she said, "He can't go back to public education. That place is killing him and his mind." Jill looked up to see all eyes now on her. "Let me guess," she asked, looking at each woman at the table. "You all feel the same? You already discussed some way to keep him out of the public education system? Or at least the school he was attending?"
"We have, Jill," Jane answered. "However, the question can't be answered or another program sought until this entire mess is resolved. Officially, he's to stay here with me, just as any other boy sent to me by the Courts. Unofficially, we are trying to find an institution of learning that fits his needs. But with so many unanswered questions connected to this whole mess, nothing definite can be planned. Plus, when he's released by the Courts, his future is out of our hands."
Marie spoke next by saying, "I'd best get into the kitchen to make sure those two anmaßende Kinder (presumptuous children) are doing what they're supposed to be doing. And my kitchen is still in one piece." Having said that, Marie pushed her chair back, stood up, pushed the chair back under the table, then walked the four steps into the kitchen.
It was Jill who spoke next, saying, "Well, my work here is done. I wanted to make sure there was no more infection and the wounds were healing nicely. I sure hope a plastic surgeon can do something with all those scars, or he'll be answering a lot of questions down the road. The last thing he needs to a constant reminder of what he's been through. Oh, and thank you for the breakfast, Jane. It was as tasty as it always is when I'm here." She then pushed her chair back, stood up, stepped away from the chair, pushed it under the table, before saying her goodbyes to the three women at the table.
It wasn't long before Francis and Charlotte came out of the kitchen, moving almost as fast as Toby had when he came out of the kitchen. "GIRLS! Is there a fire I know nothing about?" Jane's initial word stopped both girls cold in their tracks. "You both know how you are to walk while in this house, unless given special permission, which I don't remember giving you two. So… where's the fire?"
In the past, Francis would have shied away from Jane's questions. It had been a self-imposed habit with her because of past experiences at school. Now, after being with Charlotte and being encouraged by her, and knowing Jane wasn't going to chastise her for speaking, she said, "We're almost finished with our research papers, and wanted to complete them before Susan assigns the work she has for us."
Jane was staring at Francis, a stare which once would have had her hanging her head, thinking she was being humiliated for speaking. But now a different Francis looked back at her, a more confident Francis stood there before her. "It's wise to complete one project before starting another one, but it isn't a reason to act as though you're running a race. By hurrying as you two were doing, you're completely focused on quickly arriving at the library, and wouldn't be able to see something unexpected happening and react to it in time. It's admirable you both wish to finish your projects before starting on the lessons Susan has for you two. But in this house, you WILL take your time walking from room to room unless told otherwise. Is that clear, or do we have to practice by walking the entire house?"
Francis answered for Charlotte by telling Jane, "We both understand, Aunt Jane. We're sorry, Aunt Jane." When Jane flicked her head in the direction of the library, both girls calmly walked the rest of the way to the library.
"I better get in there and get my material ready for those three." She then looked at her watch and said, "If Marie is right, in about fifteen minutes, Toby will be ready for the first section test." This Susan said before pushing her chair back, standing, then pushing the chair under the table.
Before Susan could turn and start for the library, Sherry said, "Susan. After Toby takes his section test, have him come see me. I suspect he's so wound up inside he's about to explode. I'm surprised he hasn't already, because of everything he's endured. He may be with me longer than the rest of you, including you Susan. So you might hold off giving him anything before he comes to see me. Also, tell him if the study door is closed, wait in the living room and I'll come find him. If it's open, he's to walk on in."
Susan nodded her head, turned, and walked to the library, where she lightly knocked on the library door before opening the door and walking into the library. When she closed the door behind her, Sherry turned to Jane and asked, "Well, shall we return to our previous discussion in the study, you're still wound much too tightly. And like Toby, if you haven't already done so, you're a boom waiting to happen."
Jane nodded her head as she said, "Yes, we better return to the study. And yes, I have gone boom already, I'll tell you about it." Both women pushed back the chairs at the same time. Stood, moved away from their chairs, then pushed them under the table. Sherry stepped over to Jane and put her arm around the woman's waist as they started walking to the study. Jane let Sherry take control as it was Sherry who opened the study door and guided Jane into the room first. Stepping into the room after Jane, she closed the door before telling Jane, "Let's sit at the table by the window. It's a lovely view out there today." As the two walked towards the table near the window, there was a knock on the study door. Both turned towards the door and watched as Marie entered carrying a tray laden with a tea teapot covered with a tea cozy and two cups on two saucers. As she walked over to the table, they also saw a plate on the tray with an assortment of cookies on it. Marie was silent the entire time she was in the study, but hugged Jane and kissed her on the cheek before leaving the study. Jane was now looking out of the window and missed what Sherry saw as Marie walked to the study door. Even with her back towards Sherry and Jane, Sherry saw Marie first use her right hand to wipe her right eye, then her left hand to wipe her left eye. 'I will talk to that lovely woman after Toby,' Sherry told herself. 'She hides it well, but she too is hurting because of this mess,' she added to herself. Shaking her head, she walked over to the table and all but commanded Jane to sit down.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Sherry had sat down in one of the three seats at the table near the front window of the study. Jane was still standing, looking out of that same window. "Jane, please sit down and talk to me. We've known each other for quite a while and have never kept anything from each other. Jane, P-L-E-A-S-E SIT down and talk to me. You're letting this mess eat you alive. I don't want to see a dear friend burn out before they know it's time to retire. So, Janie, SIT YOUR ASS DOWN IN THAT CHAIR. Sherry was now pointing to the chair across the table from her. She had learned during her years of practice, that it was sometimes necessary to fight fire with fire. Jane was a domineering woman, she had to be in order to get her girls to do what they were told. So, Sherry had reasoned, it was time to be a more domineering woman than Jane.
Jane laughed outright before turning to face Sherry. "The mouse that roared, I believe would be an apt description. Where did you learn to be so vocal?"
"Well, let's see… I remember that guy who kept pestering you and had a terrible time understanding when you told him to go away. Then, in a rather forceful voice, you told him to find a quiet corner and masticate his own excrement. We walked away from him then, but when he finally figured out what you told him to do, he tried to get physical with you. That's when he ended up on his knees clutching his jewels and you yelling at him, 'WHICH PART OF LEAVE ME THE FUCK ALONE DON'T YOU UNDERSTAND?' Of course, you had grabbed his hair and pulled his head back before you yelled that, but it was effective. He never bothered us again that night. I think it had more to do with getting his butt thrown out of the bar than what you told him."
Jane bent over, put her hands on the table, leaned as far as she could in Sherry's direction, and told her, "You breathe a word of that Daniels, and they won't ever find your body."
"Pfffttt… what? You're going to sick Fred and Bill on me? Little 'o me? Those two know which side of the street to walk on when I'm around, I kicked their butts enough times when we were growing up. You know darn well my brothers aren't going to do squat to me. So sit your ass down in that chair," and she pointed to the chair Jane was leaning over, "and quit avoiding talking to me. Or there might be an immediate public meeting to air your dirty laundry. To... E-V-E-R-Y-O-N-E."
Jane's serious expression slid into a look of resignation, as she pulled out the chair and sat down. "You're one cruel bitch, Sherry Daniels, using blackmail to get your way. I hope your allergies act up and you start sneezing just as you have a bad case of diarrhea."
It took Sherry a few minutes to compose herself, as she started laughing over Jane's attempt at getting back at her for making Jane sit down. When she finally stopped laughing, she told Jane, "Flattery will get you nowhere, Thompson. You should know that quite well by this time. It didn't work before and it sure isn't going to work now." The atmosphere took on an authoritative tone when Sherry asked, "Why are you so bent to hell trying not to talk with me? We've always confided in each other when something was eating at us. Why start shutting me out now?"
Sherry watched as Jane's expressions changed with each thought she had. Finally, and seeing Jane's resignation face again, Jane told her, "Because I'm angry with myself. Okay? I've been taking my anger out on the girls. If Marie hadn't been there the one time I was so mad, I'd have reamed both girls new trous de cul (assholes.). Thing is," and her voice became softer, "they were just concerned about me and my welfare. And I almost made the biggest mistake I could have made by jumping down their throats. I had just learned from Jeb, Charles' father, that someone had started killing the kids who were involved in the shoplifting and still on the streets. I had to get away and chose to go riding. When I came out of my bedroom after changing my clothes, both girls were sitting on the couch with Marie, instead of being in the library working on their assignments. Marie saw my anger and told me not to take my anger out on the girls. They weren't the ones I was really angry at, but they were almost the ones I directed it towards."
Sherry reached across the table and took Jane's hands in hers. "Damit, Thompson! How many times do you have to be told not to try and become Charles Atlas? That statue shows him carrying the weight of the world on his shoulders… as a punishment. Why are you trying to punish yourself by trying to take on the weight of the world? I've no doubt Marie has told you as much. I've no doubt she's told you to concentrate on what you two do here at Seasons House, what you're both good at doing. Jane, my beloved friend, I've seen people go completely insane when they try to do what you're doing. They think they have to do it all, until they lose themselves and their minds. And no amount of talking will convince them otherwise. They simply refuse to believe they don't have to take the weight of the world on their shoulders. Jane, look at me." Sherry squeezed Jane's hands, then told her again, "Look at me, Jane." When Jane raised her head to look at Sherry, Sherry went on with, "I know you've walked a mental tightrope most of your adult life. I know it stems from the care and concern you have for young lives. Because of that care and concern, and I suspect love, you are damn good at guiding the boys who come here back on the path each should be walking. But you can't take on something you aren't suited to take on. Yes, I know you could get Fred and Bill to find and take care of those at the top of this mess, but what would that make you then? Both are eternally grateful for what you did for them when they were here in their early teens. They wouldn't listen to me when I told them where they were headed because of the things they were doing. But you and Marie turned them around. You two forced them to examine their lives by the way you made them live while they were here. Now, if you put them in women's clothing, they both would be butt ugly. I saw the pictures of them while they were here, and they both were really cute. You did that Jane Thompson. You and Marie. Let those trained in sniffing out the crap do their jobs, and you do yours. And Jane, thank you for giving me my brothers back."
Jane had tears running down her cheeks. She remembered the two men and their times with her. She wanted to slap the shirt out of Fred the first day he was with her; Bill was almost as bad but not slapping bad. But deep down, both boys were honorable, and even though they whined and complained, they did what she told them to do and eventually saw what she was trying to instill in them. "But they're killing kids, Sherry. How can anyone not want to stop it any way they can? That hurts worse than having Charles or Toby here, or those trous de cul (assholes) at their schools holding them back."
"Sweetheart, I'm not saying don't care about what you know is taking place. Only a callus person wouldn't care. I once had a client whose partner was beating the hell out of her; she eventually left him. I saw the pictures the hospital took of her injuries. I wanted to find that bastard and give to him what he gave to his girlfriend, but knew if I did, I'd be in the wrong and likely to be arrested. I had to concentrate on what was right and what was wrong, and for me to go after that guy would have been wrong. The judge gave him six months the first time, for my client. But he got life when he beat his next girlfriend to death. And why did he beat her? She spilled his beer when she was bringing it to him and he had to teach her a lesson. He went too far and will now spend the rest of his life behind bars. I knew a few guys inside and thought to put out the word to them. But again, it wasn't the right thing for me to do. I'd make me no better than that piece of crap. Can you see what I'm telling you, Jane? Be concerned when something bad happens, that's how a caring person should feel. But recognize your skills aren't up to the task of personally taking care of the problem. Recognize there are those who've dedicated their lives to that type of work, just as you've dedicated your life to helping young boys."
"But it hurts so bad knowing it's happening, Sherry."
"I know, sweetheart. I've been there many times over the years while helping others. The hurt shows how much we honestly care about it, Jane. That we aren't uncaring monsters. And Jane, we aren't alone in this. You talk to anyone working on this case and you'll find they are hurting too. You'll also find they have their own ideas about what should happen to those killing those kids. I've got a feeling it has to do with a flashlight, a map, and a shovel. With plenty of open country, the bodies of those people might never be found. What's funny, or sad, depending on how you look at it, there are a lot of people who'd agree with what they'd want to do. But they won't because it isn't the right thing for them to do, just like you and me."
There was silence in the study for some time before Jane said, "Thank you for all of that, Sherry. I guess I needed to just sit and listen to someone else for a change. You're right in that Marie has told me almost everything you've said. I guess I needed someone outside of this house telling me the same thing. I better go and make sure the house hasn't fallen apart."
Jane tried to pull her hands back, but Sherry held them firmly. "Jane. After you make sure the house hasn't fallen apart, go ride. Take your mare out and listen to what this world has to tell you. I understand you were taken out for a ride once before; very commendable of those two girls. Go again. And listen, really listen to all the sounds you hear. See what your eyes are showing you. Realize even out in the world, those things in the world only take care of what they're equipped to deal with. Go on… go ride, my dear sweet sister." While they still held hands, as awkward as it was, they both stood up, walked to the end of the table, and embraced.
"I love you, Sherry."
"I love you too, Janie. Now go."
Jane left the study door open as she left the study. As she walked through the living room towards the library, she saw Toby sitting on the couch. "Did you take your section test, Toby?"
Jane waited a moment as she watched Toby slowly stand up; he winched a few times during the movement. "Yes, Aunt Jane. I finished it about ten minutes ago."
"And?" Jane prompted.
Jane could see Toby was trying to answer her question without trying to brag about his score. "Susan said I scored a 100, Aunt Jane. I'm not trying to sound pompous about the score, but I am proud of the results. My first AP test and I scored a 100 on it."
Jane watched as Toby's whole face lit up as he talked about his first AP test. "You should be proud of your accomplishment, Toby. Just remember there's a huge difference between being proud and prideful. The latter makes you arrogant. I think Sherry is ready for you now, you best go in."
"Yes, Aunt Jane. And thank you very much for the opportunity."
Jane stood aside so Toby could walk directly to the study without making any detours around her. While he kept a brave facade, she could tell he was still experiencing pain as he walked. After Toby closed the study door, Jane continued to the library, where she knocked on the door before entering. After closing the door behind her, Jane turned and was pleasantly surprised when she heard, "Bonjour, tante Jane. C'est agréable de te revoir (Hello, Aunt Jane. It's nice to see you again,)," from Francis.
She squinted her eyes as she looked at Susan and Charlotte, both had their hands conspicuously over their mouths. Then looking at Charlotte, she said, "Alors, comment se passent tes cours, Francis (So, how are your classes going, Francis?)?"
Without missing a beat, Francis replied with, "J'ai terminé mon document de recherche, il est sur la table de la salle à manger. En ce moment, nous étudions le français. Comment vais-je, tante Jane (I finished my research paper, it's on the dining room table. At the moment we are studying French. How am I doing, Aunt Jane?)?"
Jane's questioning look to Susan was asking, 'What the heck.'
The look Susan returned was saying, 'Impressive, isn't she.'
"You are doing remarkably well, Francis. Take care with your pronunciation, though. You sometimes don't quite accentuate a word correctly, but that will come with more practice. Vous êtes un jeune homme remarquable ( Vous êtes un jeune homme remarquable,), Frank."
"Merci, tante Jane. Cela signifie beaucoup pour moi (Thank you, Aunt Jane. It means a lot to me.)."
"Girls, Susan, I need to go riding. Marie will look after things while I'm out. Girls, you both know there will be consequences if you fail to do as she tells you."
Both girls answered in the affirmative with, "Yes, Aunt Jane," before Jane turned and walked back to the library door, opened it, and left the library. Closing the door behind her. She turned left and walked the short distance to her bedroom, where a few minutes later she came back out dressed in her riding clothing. She didn't see Marie in the living room when she reached it, so walked to and entered the kitchen. Again, she didn't find Marie. Deciding Marie must be up in her bedroom, Jane left the kitchen and walked down the hallway leading to the backdoor of the house. She thought it strange Marie wouldn't be available as she opened the backdoor, stepped onto the small porch, closed the door, and started the short walk to the stable. As she rounded the corner of the opening to the stable, Jane was taken aback as she saw Marie standing there holding the reins of Jane's mare. The mare was saddled and ready for Jane to ride. "How did you know?" She asked Marie as she slowly walked through the stable and out the other end.
Marie shrugged her shoulders before saying, "A little bird told me. Now come on. This one," and she nodded towards the mare, "is more than willing to be ridden. And you're not to come back until you've solved yourself. Oui?"
Her throat tight, Jane walked up to her dear friend, hugged her tightly, then releasing her, mounted the mare, and gave her horse its head. Marie stood and watched as the mare took Jane out towards the pond. "God please help that beautiful woman," she whispered. "She needs all the help she can get right now."
As the mare walked on, Jane's thoughts went back to her time at the girl's school. Her time as the headmistress and the disagreements that caused her to leave and start Seasons House. She thought about each boy who'd been sent to Seasons House and what it took her and Marie to finally reach this or that boy. She also remembered the ones who just went through the motions but have helped Seasons House over the years when help was needed. She thought back to the loss of a friend who wanted a daughter instead of a son, who had forged Court papers to have him sent to Seasons House. Those thoughts ran quickly by until they reached the present, and the boys now with her. Anger flared when she thought of the vow she made after it was discovered what Kenneth's mother had done to have him sent to Seasons House. And here she was with two boys who had no business being at Seasons House. Two boys who had been stifled at their respective high schools because of the incompetents who ran them. Two boys, like Kenneth, who had no business being at Seasons House. Unlike Kenneth, though, both boys were being protected while at Seasons House. Charles was here to keep him out of possibly being tried in Federal Court. Toby, who caused Charles to be tangled in the whole mess, was involved in this mess but not of his own volition. The scars on his body showed the vicious efforts used to force him into becoming involved. He chose shoplifting as a means of self-preservation in an attempt to stay the beatings he had endured. But the animals had done worse to him after he'd been arrested at Taylor's department store for shoplifting. And now… and now they'd quadrupled their efforts by killing those kids still on the streets who'd been part of a threesome shoplifting teams. All in an attempt to save their own skins.
Sherry had told Jane to go riding. To listen to the world and all that was in it, and not come back until she had sorted herself out. But from the minute Jane gave the mare its head at the stable, she'd become so lost in her thoughts she'd neither seen nor heard anything during the ride. It wasn't until she felt a sharp pain in her left leg did she emerge from the thought-inducing trance she'd been in. In fact, Jane didn't even realize the mare had stopped walking and was now looking at her with its left eye. "What the hell?" Were Jane's first words as she reached down to rub a spot on her lower left leg. She looked into the mare's left eye, an eye looking directly at her, and asked, "Did you just hit me?" Her voice was sharp, laced with anger, as was the expression on her face. "Why the hell did you hit me?"
Felines growl. Canines growl. Even Homo Sapiens growl, at times, but horses aren't known for growling. Until now. Jane thought she'd heard every sound a horse could make during her time having horses at Seasons House. Jane could only interpret the sound the mare was now making as a growl, and leaned forward until she was almost touching the mere's left eye before asking, "Are you trying to growl at me?" The mare turned its head forward and snorted as it threw its head up and down before turning its head back to look at Jane. "Why the hell are you growl… " but she never finished what she was going to say. She was suddenly struck by a familiar feeling--they weren't moving. The mare had stopped walking. Jane looked down at the ground, then abruptly sat up, looking all around her before she realized where they were. They were at the pond and they weren't alone. She closed her eyes, dropped her head, and said out loud, "Oh, God. I've done it again." She lifted her head and looked into the mare's left eye, saying, "I took my anger out on you. You were only concerned for me." The snort wasn't as pronounced as it had been at first, and neither was the head nodding. Jane dismounted the mare, walked around in front of her, wrapped her arms around the mere's neck, and told her, "I'm so sorry. I'm so so sorry." The mare laid its head on Jane's shoulder, its way of telling Jane it was okay, things would be okay. She whinnied softly, causing Jane to let go of her neck and look at her. The mare threw its head to the right, towards the bench not more than five feet from them. It wasn't until Jane looked towards the bench that she caught sight of not only the ducks, frogs, and deer sitting near the bench, but the mated skunks, the raccoon, and the two porcupines. All were waiting patiently for her to sit down on the bench. Jane rubbed the big mare's muzzle before walking slowly over to the bench and sitting down. She looked around at all the animals around her, asking, "So… are all of you going to tell me the same as others have told me? How I'm trying to take on the weight of the world on my shoulders, instead of letting go and allowing others to do what they do best?" All remained silent; the mare had wandered off to graze. Jane looked at the small herd of deer to her right. Then down at the mated pair of skunks sitting within a hand’s reach to her left. Then at the frogs and ducks sitting at the pond side of the path into the forest. And the two porcupines sitting almost on top of her feet. As if on queue, the wind started blowing, bringing with it the scents of the world.
It suddenly dawned on Jane how close the creatures were to her now. When she and the girls were last here, when the girls forced her to ride, the frogs had sat at the edge of the pond, the ducks just in front of the frogs, the mated skunks further to their left, and the small herd of the deer further to their left. Even the porcupines stood further away from them. Now, it's as though they wanted to be as close to her as they could be without actually touching her. Then it hit her, as though she'd been slapped in the face. They were hugging her in their own ways. They were trying to comfort her as the others were comforting her. The subtle scent of Lilacs, mixed with the scent of grasses, was now being brought to her by the wind. She inhaled the mixed scents deeply, remembering calmer times, times when the weight of the world was shared by many others. That thought stayed with her, sharing the weight of the world.
A massive ripple broke the calm surface of the pond, causing Jane to look in that direction. It continued to expand until it covered the majority of the pond's surface before dissipating. As she continued watching the pond, those who caused the ripple risked beaching themselves as they came as close to the pond's edge as possible, while bobbing up and down in the water. Jane analyzed what she'd just witnessed, looking at the fish still bobbing up and down in the water, each causing a small ripple around themselves. She put her right arm across her chest as she brought her left elbow down on her right forearm. The fingers of her left hand then covered her mouth, moved around her mouth, pressing down on her upper lip as she continued analyzing the animal's positions and now what the fish had just done.
There was a sudden weight on her shoulder, a snort causing her left ear to ring. She turned and tilted her head to look up at the mare. "So, you think I understand what all of you are trying to tell me? Or are you ready to go home?" Her questions resulted in a soft snort and a head shake, meaning yes to the first question and no to her last question. As Jane gently rubbed the mare's muzzle, she told the mare, "I will tell you, my friend, I finally do understand what all of you are telling me." She looked at each group before her, saying to them, "What all of you are telling me. Let those around me be near me, be open to them. Keep my central calmness and let the ripples wash over me. Don't become the ripples. Thank you, my friends, all of you seem to know what I need and when I need it." She'd been rubbing the mare's muzzle as she spoke, now asking her, "Shall we go home now?" The mare lifted its head off Jane's shoulder, took several steps backward before whinning and throwing its head up and down. Jane watched as the fish vanished. Followed by the ducks and frogs. The small herd of deer had already stood, turned, and were slowly walking towards the forest with the porcupines and the mated skunks on their heels. Even the wind calmed into a light breeze, though the fragrances remained. Jane rose from the bench, walked over to the mare, hugged her before mounting her back and turning her towards home. This time, as the mare had been given its head, Jane was aware of her surroundings. She watched as Red Wing Blackbirds danced lightly on tall blades of grass. She saw a covey of Quail sprint across their path, each in a hurry to bury itself in another mass of tall grass. She felt alive again, not burdened by that which she could not do anything about. She knew her mission in this world, and she was damn good at it. She would continue her work, showing wayward boys another way to behave and live. And she would let those with the necessary skills do what they did best.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Toby turned and saw Sherry sitting at the table in front of the window at the front of the study; he laughed when he saw Sherry hold up a thick pillow. Sherry patiently waited as Toby made his way slowly towards the table, taking the offered pillow before pulling out the chair opposite Sherry, placing the pillow on the seat, and sitting down. He scooted the chair in, then sat up straight, least he leaned back against the seatback, placed his hands in his lap, and looked straight at Sherry.
"So, how do you want to do this? Do I just start talking, telling you about everything bothering me? Each of those I previously spoke with had their own methods, which could be confusing when talking with each of them. Or do you want to wing it, let things play out as they play out?"
Sherry had been watching Toby ever since he walked into the study. It wasn't lost on her of the pain Toby still felt as he walked. She also noticed he wasn't leaning back in the chair, leading her to conclude his back still pained him if he leaned back into anything hard. "Would you like me to get something soft to put behind you, Toby? So you don't have to look like some cadet at an academy sitting in that chair?" Sherry approached Toby in this fashion to help put him at ease and in the hopes he'd be completely trusting of her.
"I think I'd like that, Dr. Daniels," he told Sherry, as he kept sitting up but so wanted to lean back in the chair.
Sherry held up a finger, then told him, "I'll be right back." She pushed her chair back, stood up, and walked across to the study to the door. She opened it, stepped through, and closed the door behind her. No sooner had she left, then she was back, carrying a thick quilt. After closing the door, she walked over to stand behind Toby. Unfolding the quilt until it was doubled up, she then placed it over the chair back, telling Toby, "See how that feels."
She stepped to the end of the table so she could observe Toby's face; she saw the strain on it as he tried to keep sitting up straight. He might not have realized it, but his face showed he felt much better now he could lean back without experiencing pain from his back being against a hard surface. To accompany his face, he sighed and told Sherry, "Oh, that's much better. Thank you, Dr. Daniels."
Sherry was still standing watching him as he spoke. As she took the two steps to reach her chair, she told Toby, "Enough of the Dr. Daniels, Toby. While we're in here, or in private elsewhere, it's Sherry. Got it?"
Sherry watched as Toby nodded his head before saying, "Yes, ma'am. I got it."
Chuckling, Sherry slowly shook her head while telling Toby, "After everything you've endured, you still retain a gentleman's politeness. That is exceedingly commendable, Toby. Externally, you exhibit proper manners, you've taken responsibility for your actions, something few would do. But I'm more worried about your internal condition, Toby. You've been through hell and came out the other side with your integrity intact. That takes a lot of heart Toby... a lot of heart. You asked how we'll be doing this. Would you believe I always wing it, Toby? I never have a concrete idea of how I'm going to proceed with those speaking with me. I find it works better that way. So, we're going to talk, just talk. You won't see me writing anything down, I don't have to. I remember everything I hear. Does winging it work for you or will another way work better for you?"
While it was true Sherry didn't have a step-by-step process written down on paper, she did have one in her mind. And she just started using it with Toby. "I think winging it will be the best, it became rather boring talking to the others and their seemly ‘by the book’ procedures."
"Okay, then. Winging it is what we'll do. How are you really feeling right now? How much pain are you in?"
Sherry watched him wince as he tried to get more comfortable sitting in the chair. "Jill told me everything is healing nicely, but it's all still rather tender. I never knew how much my butt played in walking until this happened. I still find it uncomfortable to lean back against anything with a hard surface or try to reach for something too far away. I think I'm going to be flat on both sides as much as I've been sleeping on my sides. Wonder if it will make me taller?"
Sherry laughed at Toby's attempt to lighten the mode in the room. She also knew it was a defense mechanism in an attempt to deflect her questions. "Ah, no. I don't think you'll become flatter on both sides or taller. Let's start by you telling how things were before all of this started, before your mom left home. Tell me how everyone was acting towards you."
Toby got a frown on his face, which Sherry took to mean he was thinking back to that time. "Hmm… well, everything seemed to be okay. Mom was working for some business as a secretary or assistant or something like that. Dad was one of several plant foremen at this company. Except Tylor wasn't beating on me, I don't remember him being around too often. I seem to remember him often asking my parents for money, and then explaining to him they could only give him a few dollars. I remember one time him asking for money and getting really upset when my parents told him there were bills they had to pay, so weren't able to give him money at that time; he stormed out of the apartment. I'd be in my bedroom doing school work and hear my parents argue, I don't know about what. But when I came out to see what was going on, mom wouldn't say a word to me as she stormed right by me going to their bedroom. Dad, on the other hand, would tell me I shouldn't be worried by what I heard, when I asked him why he and mom were shouting at each other. He said everything was going to be okay."
When I got out of school, I stayed with Aunt Terri until my dad came to pick me up to take me home; Aunt Terri's apartment was close to dad's work. One day after dad picked me up and we got home, mom was standing in the living room with two suitcases sitting beside her. The minute dad and I walked through the door, she started in on dad, telling him she couldn't live like this anymore. How she was tired of watching those at work driving into the underground parking in BMWs, Audis, Mercedes, Volvos, Lexus, and several others, and wanted to be able to own one of those cars. She also said she wanted a luxury home and not a flea trap of an apartment. Because dad and I were still standing near the front door, we heard a car horn honk. Dad opened the front door and we saw a Mercedes parked at the curb in front of our apartment; the guy driving had got out and lifted the trunk open. He called mom's name while standing at the trunk, causing mom to lift her suitcases and walk out of the apartment without another word. She wanted a better life, a brighter life. She might have found it, I don't know. But dad heard about a year after, she had become a junkie, living on the streets turning tricks to get enough money for her next fix. Dad never told me how she got hooked, but I thought it was strange how dad was really late picking me up from Aunt Terri's one day. And when he showed up, his hands were kind of bloody, cut up. When Aunt Terri asked him about it, he told her there was a problem at the plant he had to help fix. From the look on Aunt Terri's face, I don't think she believed him. Having seen those types of cuts since, I think dad had been in a fight. Actually, I think dad went after the man who picked up mom that day. I think dad believes he's the one who got mom hooked on drugs. Whatever dad did, nothing happened afterward, no police or anyone else came looking for dad."
"Dad was making good money, or to my nine-year-old self, it seemed he was. We had food, he paid the bills, or so dad told me he was; Tylor was hardly around anymore so dad couldn't tell both of us. But I guess we were really scraping by and dad was keeping it from me. When dad picked me up from Aunt Terri's one day, he told me he was taking another job for a little while, just until we caught up. He never explained caught up to what, but I saw that in later years, he was trying to catch up with the bills he could only pay the minimum on at the time. That's also about the time Tylor started in on me. He got really mean when he asked dad for money and dad would tell him there was none to spare, and that he should look for a job to earn money. After dad left for the security guard job he took, Tylor would get really loud about needing money. I made the mistake the first time and asked him what for. He backhanded me so hard my feet came off the floor. All I remember is landing on my back, my head hitting the floor. And that's when I woke up, lying on the floor. I was dizzy when I sat up and sat there for several minutes until the dizziness went away. When my eyes cleared, I could see how Tylor had gone crazy. Stuff was thrown around in the kitchen and living room. My bedroom was torn up, even dad's bedroom was a mess. Looking back, I think Tylor was looking for money."
After I cleaned myself up, I cleaned up the apartment the best I could. I don't think I got everything back where it belonged because dad woke me when he got home and asked me what happened to the apartment. I told him I didn't really know because Tylor backhanded me so hard when I asked why he needed money that he knocked me out. I told dad I tried putting everything back like it was, but couldn't remember where some of it went. He told me not to worry about it, he'd take care of it. Ya, know, Sherry, when I think back to that time, Tylor was never around when dad was home, and came home when dad was gone. It was after Tylor had torn the apartment apart that he started in on me. I think it made him mad when I didn't cry the next time he slapped me. Or when he continued slapping me in an effort to make me cry. I believe it was then he decided to start using the razor strop on me, and whatever else he could find. All in an attempt to make me cry. But I never did. I'd cry out, but never once did I give him the satisfaction of crying."
Sherry watched as Toby hung his head, before reaching up and wiping his eyes. He abruptly looked up and in a fierce voice told Sherry, "BY DAMN, SHERRY, THAT BASTARD WASN'T GOING TO MAKE ME CRY. I WAS A BETTER PERSON THAN HIM AND I PROVED IT."
Without it showing on her face, Sherry was happy to see Toby get angry. He needed to get the anger out, express it before it ended up consuming him. And what she was about to do would either cause him to fold in on himself or get even angrier. "Were you really better than him, Toby? You did, after all, begin shoplifting. You were even caught and arrested for shoplifting."
As Sherry watched, Toby's face took on a grotesque appearance, before he stood up so fast he knocked his chair over backwards. Then, he literally ripped his shirt off, pulled his pants and underwear down, turned his back to Sherry, and shouted at her, "AND JUST WHAT THE HELL WOULD YOU BE WILLING TO DO TO KEEP THIS FROM HAPPENING? COME ON, GIRL SCOUT, TELL ME WHAT YOU'D DO TO KEEP FROM BEING BEATEN LIKE THIS EVERY NIGHT?"
The floodgates opened and Toby collapsed to the floor, bawling with such an intensity unlike anything Sherry had ever heard. It was anguish and hurt and anger all in one. It was as though a soul was being ripped apart. She got up quickly, knocking her chair over in the process, rushed around the end of the table, pulled the quilt out from under Toby's overturned chair, and wrapped it around him while she held him as he bawled. The position she was sitting as she held Toby gave her a clear view of the entire study. It was during this time the study door opened and Jane stepped into the study. The two women exchanged looks, Sherry's telling Jane she wanted to strangle someone and Toby was okay. And Jane's telling Sherry she understood how Sherry felt. Jane's last unasked question asking if Sherry was okay, was met with a continuous nod. Jane nodded once, then silently opened the study door and left. All Jane needed was a flashlight, a map, and a shovel.
"That's okay, baby. You let it out, let it all out, baby. You've held this in far too long, let it out, sweetheart. I've got you." Sherry spoke softly to Toby as he continued wailing, holding him all the while. "You're an extremely brave individual, Toby Camber, enduring more than a person has the right to endure. Let it out, sweetheart, let it all out."
When Jane had left the study, she'd stopped at the entrance to the living room and stood listening to Toby's bawling. She'd had boys cry before, but none as Toby was doing now. To her, his cry was of a soul that had reached its limit of endurance, one on the edge of becoming nothing. Her tears were visible, her crying was silent, reaching all the way down to her very soul.
The sound coming from the study was from a tortured soul, overflowing with sorrow and anguish. It was so loud and sorrowful enough that it even caused Marie to come out of the kitchen to see what was happening. Even the girls and Susan in the library, heard it, causing them to almost come running out of the library. The four ended up standing next to Jane, each putting their arm around the waist of the other. The four stared at the study door, tears not absent from them all. "Is there anything we can do, Aunt Jane?" It was Francis posing the question, her voice shaking as she spoke.
"Right now, Francis, no. Nothing. What must be must be, he's kept the hurt captured far too long, and now it must be released. What we can do, when we can do something, is be there for him. Let him know we're there for him when he needs us."
Charlotte spoke next by saying, "The last time I heard such a mournful cry was after a dog had been hit by a car. I hoped to never hear that sound again. I never knew it was possible for a person to make the same sound. I don't want to hear that ever again."
"Chère, the only way you'll never hear a sound like that again is to become deaf. It is excruciating to hear, but a sound those with soulful wounds can and will produce. It is the most mournful cry you will ever hear, chère. Don't shy away from the sound, understand the reason it's heard. Understand you hear it because a person's soul has been torn, and they have no other way to express the hurt they feel." Marie went quiet after saying this, reaching up with her free hand to wipe tears off her cheeks.
No one kept track of how long they stood there listening to Toby pour out the pain he felt in his wounded soul. No one cared how long they were there. They only cared about Toby's welfare and the hurt each felt knowing they could do nothing for him at the moment. Eventually, the soul-wrenching sound they'd been hearing subsided into normal crying, the winding down of the pain Toby had kept captured all of these years. Then it happened, the study went quiet. The four women stood for several more moments before Jane instructed the girls to return to their lessons with Susan. Marie wiped her eyes one last time before turning and walking back to the kitchen. Everyone but Jane went back to their previous tasks. Jane resolved to stay until Toby came out of the study, no matter how long it took.
An arm went around Jane's waist, causing her to look to her left. "Mon amour. Vous ne pouvez pas attendre qu'il quitte le bureau. Allez, calmez-vous comme vous savez le faire. Laissez-la vous emmener là-bas." Marie kissed Jane's cheek, then using the arm around Jane's waist, steered her to her bedroom so she could change to go riding.
After Marie watched Jane leave the house by the backdoor, she went into the kitchen and filled a pitcher with water and ice. She took two glasses from the cabinet, put everything on a tray, and took it to the study. She quietly entered the study, walked to the table near the window, set the tray down on the table, turned, and walked as quietly out of the study. She then went up to her bedroom, where she cried in private.
Marie had set the tray down near the edge of the table, close enough for Sherry to reach. Reaching up with her right hand, Sherry poured one glass half full, before setting the pitcher back on the tray and taking the glass of water. Toby's crying had turned into moans, moans just as tormenting to hear. When his moans stopped Sherry said, "Here, sweetheart, drink some water." Toby never let go of Sherry, though he did lift his head off her chest and drink some of the water; Sherry held onto the glass of water. When she gauged the time was right, she urged him to drink more of the water, which he did. When he'd drank the glass empty, she placed it back on the tray and wrapped her right arm back around Toby.
She knew it was a good sign when she heard Toby ask, "May I have more water please?"
"Yes you may, sweetheart, all the water you want." Sherry repeated her first action to pour half a glass of water into the glass Toby had been offered. As before, he never let go of Sherry but lifted his head and this time, drank the entire half a glass of water. "More?" Sherry asked, getting a head nod from Toby. She repeated this action five more times before Toby shook his head no.
"I'm sorry about this," Toby said into Sherry's chest. "It all hit me at once and there was nothing else I could do."
Before Sherry replied, she had to tamp down the anger she felt for a boy thinking he had to apologize for releasing the anguish he'd kept bottled up all of these years. "You owe no one an apology for what just occurred, Toby. I'm amazed you went this long before breaking down as you just did. You needed this. You needed to get it out of your system. You needed to let it all out in order for your soul to begin healing. Don't you ever apologize when you find it necessary to cry for any reason. It's the way we humans express ourselves beyond what words can convey."
She knew what she was going to do next might be too early to do, but Toby's mind was open and the memories might be clearer for him to recall. "What are your dreams like since this all started? How soundly have you slept?"
Sherry felt Toby tense and then relax before he started speaking. "Well… at first, I'd wake up screaming, at home and at Aunt Terri's. The first time it happened at home, my brother came into my bedroom, told me to shut up, and proceeded to slap the hell out of me; I think he actually knocked me out that first time, I don't really remember. After that, at home, after my brother slapped the hell out of me the first time, I think my subconscious mind kept me from waking up screaming, though I jerked awake several times after that. According to my Aunt Terri, I woke up screaming several times while I was at her home. Guess my subconscious knew she wasn't going to physically abuse me. What I can remember of my dreams, are those times I'd be getting beaten by whatever my brother could find and fighting with my brother and the man as they dragged me to the two pipes and tied me to them. I would just start getting beaten and jerk up in bed, wide awake. Or at Aunt Terri's, find myself being held by her as I had been screaming, or so she told me. It seemed after those dreams, at home and at Aunt Terri's, I'd have no trouble sleeping soundly the rest of the night or what was left of the night. The only dreams I remembered when I woke the next morning were those dreams of being beaten, as I still remember them now."
Like Jane, Sherry had to fight her own monster to keep it from taking her out and finding Toby's brother and the man, and give them a taste of their own medicine. "And now that you're here at Seasons House? How well are you sleeping?"
Toby was quiet for several minutes before he said, "While I've been here, I can't remember having any of the dreams about being beaten, Sherry. In fact, I can't remember a single dream I've had. That's a good sign, isn't it?"
Nodding her head, Sherry answered with, "Yes, it's a good sign. It means your subconscious knows you won't be physically abused while you're here at Seasons House. But you won't always be here, you'll eventually leave and return home or wherever it's decided you'll live and with whom. That's when you may start experiencing those bad dreams again, either jerking awake or waking up screaming. Toby, you have been through an extremely traumatic experience, something similar to a woman being beaten by her husband or boyfriend. It is going to take time for you not to let what happened to you be the central part of your life and dreams. Even when you're able to put it all aside, you may find something triggers those memories and causes you to have those dreams again.
Toby was nodding his head as Sherry spoke. When she became quiet, he said to her, "Yeah, I know I won't always be here, but I can't go home either. Not back to where it all started, there are too many bad memories in that place. Too many memories that might actually cause me to kill my brother this time. I've already vowed to never let him beat me again, by whatever means necessary. And if that means killing him to stop him, well… " Toby had gone silent. A short time later he said, "If I go back there, Sherry, and have to stop my brother from beating me using whatever means necessary," and he looked up at her, "I'll become no better than he is Sherry. I don't want to become like he is Sherry, I'm better than that. But I'll be forced to do just that if he tries to beat me again."
Even though Toby's last statement was softly said, she knew the truth of what he said. He would kill his brother if he attempted to beat Toby again. Using her right hand to run her fingers through Toby's hair, she told him, "I don't think you'll have to worry about your brother beating you any time soon. I believe he has his own problems to deal with at the moment. He may even be awarded a new address at one of our finest prisons for several years. And if he was involved in killing those kids, that new address could become his permanent address. What say we get you upstairs to your bedroom so you can shower and put on clean clothes? I don't think Jane would take kindly to you walking around wearing that quilt."
Toby chuckled at what Sherry said. "I think that's a good idea, Sherry. I feel kind of sticky. And Sherry?"
"Yes, sweetheart?"
"Thank you for being here with me. I can't express in words how much it means to me," Toby told her.
Sherry had to wait a minute before she spoke, her throat had tightened up on her because of what she just heard Toby say. "Sweetheart, I'll be here any time you need me. In fact, I'd like to continue seeing you on a regular basis. I want to help you come to terms with everything you've been through. Come on, let's get you upstairs."
Toby sat up after Sherry let go of him. Standing first, Sherry then helped Toby stand, wrapping the quilt around him and helping him to the study door. After opening the door, she let Toby walk through first and after following him through the door, left the door standing wide open. Their progress was slow, but they eventually made it to Toby's bedroom door, where he turned and hugged Sherry for the longest time before turning and entering his bedroom. Sherry stood looking at the closed bedroom door, wiping tears off her cheeks. Soft arms went around her from behind, causing her to turn and cry into Marie's shoulder. "I think I should be next, oui? I can bring the cookies."
That caused Sherry to laugh through her tears. "Well, with an offer like that, you'll have to be next on my visit list." Leaning into each other, the two women slowly made their way back downstairs, Sherri going back into the study and Marie going to the kitchen to get the cookies she promised. She also took a box of tissues with her. They were going to be needed.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Sherry had stepped into the study, then stopped, thinking of something all of a sudden. She turned around and walked to the library, knocking softly on the door before opening it and entering the library. She stood in the doorway and observed three sets of eyes looking at her, and said, "I helped Toby up to his bedroom to clear up and put on clean clothes. It might be good for one of you to be there when he comes out of his bedroom so you can help him down the stairs. I'll be in the study with Marie." She didn't wait for a response, but stepped out of the library and closed the door behind her. She started for the study just as Marie came out of the kitchen carrying a plate of chocolate chip cookies. She quickly caught up with Marie, took a cookie off the plate, and asked Marie, "How'd you know these are my favorites?"
After chuckling, Marie said, "I've known many who find these a favorite. Why should you be any different? Besides, the girls made them. And they taste unlike any chocolate chip you've ever tasted."
Sherry bit into the one she'd taken. Marie watched as Sherry's eyes lit up as she chewed the bite she'd taken. "Ohf, mif. gawdf. Whaf dhey pud intof dhese tings?"
Laughing, Marie told her, "I'll tell you later. Right now though, we need to talk."
Marie walked into the study first, Sherry following her and closing the door behind her. "Why don't you go ahead and have a seat, um, maybe after standing up the chair on the left. I want to make a phone call before we get started."
Waiting until Marie had uprighted Toby's chair, Sherry dialed a number and waited while it rang. "Hi Ruth, it's Sherry. Do you have a minute?...You do, good. Has anyone discussed where Toby Camber will be living after he leaves Seasons House?...It's been discussed? Good, because he can't go back to that apartment...Two reasons: He'll kill his brother if he tries to beat Toby again. If he goes back to that apartment, he's going to relapse. He had a rough first session with me a few minutes ago. It was rough, but necessary for his well-being...No, it was a start, but I plan on seeing him for the foreseeable future...Okay, let me know when it's set in stone...Thanks, Ruth...Bye." After hanging up the phone, Sherry sighed, shook herself, turned to face Marie, and asked her, "Did you have a good cry up in your bedroom?"
Marie cocked her head, giving Sherry a 'how did you know' look, before Sherry laughed as she walked over to the table, righted her own chair, sat down and told Marie, "How did I know? Well… you didn't come up the stairs behind me and Toby, so you had to be already upstairs. Plus," and looked at Marie with a soft loving look, "your eyes are still red. So… why the crying jig? Are you like Toby and bottle everything up until it gets too much for you to handle?"
It was Marie's turn to laugh, saying afterward, "Vous feriez une excellente détective (You would make an excellent detective,), Sherry Daniels."
Sherry shot back with, "Je suis déjà un excellent détective, mademoiselle Marie (I am already an excellent detective, Miss Marie.). You're as bad as Janie. Now stop evading my question. Why the crying jig?"
Marie became very somber, and quiet for several minutes. She stood up, turned, and took two steps until she was standing in front of the study window. Watching Marie, Sherry calmly waited. "Why did I have to go to my bedroom and have a good cry? I'd only heard such a soul-wrenching sound once before, at my father's funeral. It came from my mother, God rest her soul. I've seen loving couples over the years, but none as devoted as were my parents. They would finish each other's sentences. They knew what the other was thinking before either voiced their thoughts. And they never wavered when it came to discipline or punishment, they were together on both." Marie laughed at a memory and told Sherry, "Once, I tried going to my mother because my father was punishing me for something I did. I thought my mother would be more reasonable. That was the first time and the last time I tried that trick. She ended up giving me more of what my father had given me. But, I deserved everything I earned."
"My father was at work one day, I guess I was fifteen or sixteen, it was a long time ago. He was meeting with several clients and in the middle of his presentation, he suffered a major heart attack. They tried to revive him, were doing CPR on him until Paramedics arrived. They tried shocking his heart, several times but got no response. They continued working on him as they took him out of the building and on their way to the hospital. But he never revived. Dad's work called mom, who came and got me at school, and we rushed to the hospital." Marie chuckled yet again, then said, "We had a police escort to the hospital when the policeman who stopped mom for speeding found out why she was speeding. The policeman had to slow mom down, she was talking so fast. But once he learned what was going on, we were doing 60 the entire way to the hospital. Mom called dad's brother, and he and his wife arrived shortly after. We must have been there for an hour before the doctor came out and told mom there was just too much damage to dad's heart, and he never regained consciousness. Of course, you can imagine mom was devastated, and collapsed to the floor. Me and dad’s brother lifted her off the floor and sat her on the couch in the waiting room; a nurse brought her some water. I held her and so did dad's brother as she cried, as a person would after suffering a loss."
"Toby's wailing brought all this back to me, especially the time at the cemetery. Up until that point, mom had just been sad, unhappy at the loss of her husband. Her beloved partner was gone and now she was alone. Oh, she still had me living with her, but it wasn't the same thing. She'd spend time crying, and I'd hold her, but it was different the day of the funeral. I think she'd cried herself out by then, or so it seemed. She was stoic at the church, and on the drive to the cemetery, but when dad's casket was being lowered into the ground… Toby's wailing brought it all back. He sounded just like mom did as dad was laid to rest. Dad's brother and I had to hold her back because she tried to get on top of dad's casket as they lowered it into the ground. But that gawd awful sound she made, I never wanted to hear another human make such a sound again as long as I lived."
Sherry could hear the anguish in Marie's voice as she recounted her father's story. She felt in her gut what Marie was about to do, so had pushed her chair back, stood up, walked around the table, and put her arms around Marie, who turned and began crying on Sherry's shoulder. While holding the crying woman, Sherry told her, "It's okay, Marie. Even big girls have to cry sometimes, especially when they really care about something and know they can't do anything to help."
Slowly, Marie's crying subsided, allowing her to tell Sherry, "You must be a mind reader, Sherry Daniels. That is exactly how I feel at the moment." Marie straightened up, took a tissue out of the box she'd brought with her, wiped her eyes, then said, "Ich muss schrecklich aussehen (I must look terrible)."
Reaching up, Sherry wiped more tears off Marie's cheeks, telling her, "Es ist nichts, was man nicht reparieren kann (It's nothing that can't be fixed)." The shocked look on Marie's face caused Sherry to laugh. "Why the shocked look, Marie? You act as though you've never heard German spoken before."
"Ja, I've heard German spoken before, but not from YOU," and she poked Sherry in the chest with her finger. "How long have you been fluent in German? And where did you learn the language? It wasn't in this Country, was it?"
Guiding Marie back to her chair, Sherry poured water into an unused glass and offered it to Marie. She debated with herself how much to tell Marie about learning to speak German. Deciding she didn't need to know everything, she said, "I was fortunate enough to do my graduate work in Germany. After that, I spent several years there, almost staying there to practice. I worked on my PhD while I was there, finishing it when I came back to the States. It's such a beautiful country, that in itself was enticing. Because I was studying and living there at the time, I had to learn the lingo if I was going to get around, have some fun, and help those in need. I don't know why, but German seemed easy for me to learn. I got so good speaking it, that I'd fool tourists who thought I was a native German and ask directions to something they wanted to see."
Sherry saw the twinkle in Marie's eyes, then heard, "Donc, vous parlez allemand. Et français? Parlez-vous français aussi couramment que l'allemand ? Et l'italien ou l'espagnol (So, you speak German. And French? Do you speak French as fluently as German? And Italian or Spanish)?"
Marie had a big smile on her face, she was enjoying herself. Sherry dropped her head, shook it, then decided if this was war, then it was going to be war. She lifted her head, sighed, then told Marie, in Italian, "Parlo fluentemente tedesco, francese, italiano e spagnolo. Me la cavo parlando russo e polacco, anche se ricevo sguardi strani quando parlo quelle lingue (I speak fluent German, French, Italian, and Spanish. I get by speaking Russian and Polish, although I get strange looks when I speak those languages). An' 'o 'op i' all off, I even do a grea' cockney, love. And summit else ter tickle your fancy is cockney rhyme Matheson Lang. How did we get off on me? We're supposed to be concentrating on you," and she pointed to Marie.
Marie almost fell out of her chair with laughter, after Sherry's antics. When she finally wound down, she asked, "Where did you learn cockney? I've not heard that spoken in years."
With an impish smile on her face, Sherry said, "Well… I did say I had some fun while I lived in Germany. I spent a couple of weeks in the UK, having some, um, fun. And boy was he fun!"
The laughter from the two women filled the study, until the study door opened and Jane stepped into the study, still in her riding clothes. "Are we alright in here?" The expression on Jane's face said she wasn't sure what was occurring, but it didn't sound clinical.
Marie laughed before saying, "We're as wite as Pleasure and Pain me sweet. Sherry just reminded me of something I haven't heard in years."
In a dull voice, and before Marie could go on, Jane said, "Yes, I heard. Cockney rhyme. Eh gads, my house has been invaded." Jane shook her head, turned, and walked out of the study, causing Sherry and Marie to break up with laughter again.
Marie reached across the table and taking Sherry's hands, told her, "You might not realize how much you've just helped me with your foolishness. And listening to my story. Listening to him wail like that made me feel so helpless, and made me remember. Something I thought I'd buried. Seems we all have something to face and deal with this time around."
Sherry squeezed Marie's hands, telling her, "You aren't helpless. You are there when he and those other boys need you and Jane. Where would they all be today if not for the work you and that woman do here at Seasons House? Toby might be dead right now. Francis might be living on the streets, or worse. And what about all the other boys you and Jane straightened out? None of us can be helpful one hundred percent of the time. We each can only be helpful in our corner of the world. Never lose sight of that, Marie. We both know how he affected both of us, and what we'd like to do about it, but can't for various reasons. It's going to hurt, sometimes, it's part of being human. At least a caring human. If you don't want to feel the hurt anymore, go buy yourself an island and live there by yourself. It won't be much of an existence, but at least no one will hurt you again. Except maybe yourself."
A puzzled look came over Marie's face, causing her to ask, "How could I hurt myself living on a deserted island? Aside from the physical possibility. But emotional? How?"
"Marie, humans need others around them, even for short periods of time. Some people have to have others around them constantly, they never learned how to be alone with themselves. And if they have no one around, their soul starts to crumble. If that continues too long… " Sherry shrugged her shoulders, watching as Marie nodded her head, showing she understood what Sherry left unsaid. "Hurting because we care helps us realize we're alive. Helps us realize we are breathing, thinking, and feeling. Never shy away from your feelings, Marie. Embrace them, deal with them, don't let them control you." She released one of Marie's hands, reached up, and wiped a tear sliding down Marie's cheek. "You and those like you, dedicating your lives to helping the young of our population, specifically boys, are unique, Marie. You aren't unique because you're helping these boys, but because unlike some, you truly care about their welfare. You care about the life they live and what the best for each one. Like me, you know the hurt and disappointment possible in the work you do, but you continue anyway. Because you CARE."
In a voice not far above a whisper, Marie said, "Thank you for that, Sherry. Sometimes it's good to hear others praise the work you do. Sometimes it's possible to become lost in the process and lose sight of the person." Marie looked up at the clock, saying, "I'd better get to the kitchen, the animals will be getting hungry about now."
Both women stood after pushing their chairs back. They held one hand as they did so, that hand then going around the other's waist as they moved away from the table. Marie turned towards Sherry, hugged her before opening the door of the study and heading towards the kitchen. Sherry watched her as she walked to the kitchen, thinking back to everything Marie said, before she disappeared when the kitchen door swung closed behind Marie. 'That is one strong woman,' Sherry thought to herself. 'Another woman would have folded in on herself years ago,' she added to herself. Leaving the door open, she walked over to the window and peered out, thinking through what she'd experienced so far. Hoping her advice would produce the positive results needed.
As she looked out the window, she heard a knock on the open study door. Turning, she sees Toby standing there, much cleaner looking than a few minutes ago. She starts walking across the study towards Toby, asking as she's walking, "Toby, is everything alright?" Sherry sees Toby trying to organize his thoughts and stops two steps in front of him and waits.
Toby became frustrated the minute he stepped into the study, after planning out everything he was going to say while taking a shower. "I… I… aw hell. I had it all planned out what I was going to say to you, and now that I'm here, I can't even remember what I was going to say."
Sherry smiled at the frustrated boy before telling him, "Just say what you feel. It doesn't have to be a research paper or elaborate. Just speak from the heart."
After hearing what Sherry said, Toby had a 'deer in the headlights' look on his face. He then laughed, shook his head, and said aloud, "I keep forgetting how simple 'simple' works the best." His face then took on an appreciative look before he said, "I, um, just wanted to thank you for being there for me earlier. I was really a mess right then. I'm not sure I'd have made it through that time if you hadn't been there. I'll always remember that of you." Toby shrugged his shoulders, then added, "That's all I wanted to say."
Sherry placed her hands gently on Toby's shoulders, telling him, "Young man, it was my pleasure to be there for you. You had dammed up your soul far too long with that poison and it needed to be released. I was not going to leave you to handle it yourself and maybe drive yourself insane. I still want to meet with you, once everything is settled, and I'll come to you wherever you end up living if you can't come to me. Today was just the beginning of your healing, there's still a lot of work to do before you remember it all as a distant memory. You need to learn how not to let those events rule your life, as they will for a while. Now, maybe you better head to the library and see what Susan has for you, right?"
Toby nodded his head at Sherry's suggestion of going to the library. Before he left the study, he stepped into Sherry, put his arms around her, and quietly said, "Thank you very much. I won't ever forget this." He broke his hold on Sherry, causing her to release him, turned, and slowly made his way through the living room and to the library.
Sherry was about to turn around and return to her solace at the window when Jane suddenly appeared before her. "Are you alright, Sherry? Things have been rather intense so far."
"Janie, why are you three so stubborn? Toby had a good reason to hold everything in, his back is a testament to his reason. But you and Marie? Why couldn't you have picked up the phone and called me, Janie? You know I would have dropped everything and come running." Jane put on her best headmistress look, only to have Sherry tell her, "Oh, gads, Janie. That headmistress look has never worked on me and you know it. It's your damn way of avoiding an issue. You aren't Supergirl, ya know. In fact, despite what you think, you're probably the most sensitive one in this whole house. You wear your heart on your sleeve, hidden behind that headmistress look." Sherry stepped forward, and gently took Jane's hands in hers before telling her in a soft voice, "I don't want to see my most dear friend end up in some hospital because she tried to take on the whole world all by herself, as you often do. I'd really be pissed at you if that happened. Call me, come to me, let me in so I can help when you get tied up in knots." It was Sherry who stepped into Jane and held the woman. "I love you too much to stand by and watch you destroy yourself because you refuse to get the help you need," Sherry whispered in Jane's ear. She felt her right shoulder getting wet. When the two women separated, Sherry said, "I'd like to speak with Charlotte next. Would you send her to me, please?"
Wiping her eyes, Jane nodded her head, before turning and walking towards the library. Watching Jane walk away, Sherry said under her breath, "Damn that woman."
Sherry was again standing at the window when there was a knock on the open study door. Turning, Sherry saw Charlotte standing at the door. "You wanted me in the lion’s dens next, Dr. Daniels?" Charlotte asked, a smile playing on her face.
"Come in, Charlotte. Close the door and come take a seat." She watched Charlotte close the door, then pause at the bookcase, starting to reach for 'the book' on the second shelf. "Hard to break a habit, isn't it? Forget 'the book' and come and sit down. I want to hear your story."
As Charlotte was walking over to the table, Marie came into the study with a tray of clean glasses. After setting the tray down on the table, Marie shocked Sherry by putting her arms around her, kissed her on the cheek before she turned and left the study. It was Sherry's turn to have the 'deer caught in the headlights' look on her face.
"Marie must think a lot of you, Dr. Daniels. That isn't something she normally does to anyone other than Aunt Jane. That's high praise from her." Charlotte pulled out the chair Sherry pointed to, sat down, and watched as Sherry walked around the table and sat down opposite her. "Will Toby be alright, Dr. Daniels? It sure hurt listening to him."
The first question out of Charlotte really impressed Sherry. She didn't ask Sherry how they would be proceeding or what questions Sherry had for her. No, she was worried about Toby. Thinking to herself, 'Is this the real Charles Thorton? Does he always think of others before himself? "Before we proceed, Charles, it's Sherry when we're alone like this. And why are you asking after Toby instead of yourself? He isn't your responsibility, is he?" She was taking a chance pushing Charles' buttons, but she had to know the real boy. But she wasn't expecting what happened next.
Charlotte was silent for a heartbeat, before s/he started laughing. The laughter continued long enough to cause tears to start flowing from Charlotte's eyes. There were times when Charlotte was laughing but no sound could be heard. Charlotte's laughter had started to abate until she saw the puzzled look on Sherry's face. It was several more minutes before her laughter finally ended. Sherry was not pleased, to put it mildly. With an edge to her voice, Sherry leaned towards Charlotte across the table and asked, "You think these talks are funny, Charles? You're as messed up as Toby, Jane, and Marie. Are you trying to insult what I'm trying to do here in helping all of you? Your actions so far are totally disrespectful."
Sherry could see how her words had stung Charles, causing him to sober quickly. "Ah, no, Sherry. I wasn't being disrespectful to you or what you're trying to do for us. I, ah, was laughing because I recognized you were trying to push my buttons to get me to react. I'm… sorry for making you think I was being disrespectful."
Before Sherry could respond, Charlotte pushed the chair back and stood up. "I'm sorry I upset you, Dr. Daniels," Charlotte said before she turned and started walking across the study and to the door.
"Just where do you think you're going, Mr. Thorton? I haven't given you permission to leave, so get your ass back here and sit down." Sherry's words froze Charlotte in her tracks. "Do you always run away from things you don't want to face?" Sherry asked, as she pushed her chair back, stood up, and began walking towards the frozen Charlotte. "You do, don't you? You'd rather run away than face something you find unpleasant, right?" She reached Charlotte, put her arms on her shoulders, and gently turned her until she was facing Sherry. "Why, Charles? Why do you shy away from things instead of facing them?" She then put an arm around Charlotte's shoulder and started walking her back to the table. As they walked, Sherry said, "Talk to me, Charles. I want to help you, not bite your head off."
She guided Charles to the chair everyone else had used, before walking around the table and sitting down in the chair she'd been using. She watched as Charles put his hands on the table, fingers laced together, and stared at his hands. "Why won't you talk to me, Charles? I can't help you if you're unwilling to speak with me. As I said, when it's a physical confrontation, you stand up and deal with it. But not emotional situations. Why?"
Sherry remained silent, watching Charles stare at his hands, his fingers doing an intricate dance as they lay on the table. After several silent minutes, Sherry said in an almost exasperated voice, "Okay, let's do it this way. You were at Taylor's department store to buy your mother a necklace for her 35th birthday. That Conner guy put his hands on you and you put him on the floor with your knee in the back of his neck and his arm twisted up behind his back. Then you were taken to the store's holding room where Conner again inserted himself into the situation by locking you and him in the holding room. He tried intimidating you with a collapsable police baton, but you got ahold of it first. He tried lunging across the table to grab you only to have you break his left clavicle with that baton. Because he had all of his weight on his left shoulder, he collapsed onto the floor, where you then tried leaving the room, only to have him grab your leg. You then took that baton and broke both the ulna and radius in his right arm. How'm I doing so far?" Charles never reacted to Sherry's question.
"Then, when Judge Ruth and the Prosecutor determined there was no evidence to prove you were involved in the shoplifting, Ruth was going to dismiss the charges until Strom threatened to take you to Federal Court and add additional charges. Right so far?" Charles didn't answer Sherry's question. He just stared at his hands, still dancing their intricate choreography. "So you were sent here in order to keep you out of Federal Court, where you volunteered to become one of Jane's girls. Am I right so far, Charles?" This time Charles simply shrugged his shoulders. To Sherry, that was something at least.
"As Jane does with all of her girls, she took you to the Mall so you could experience what other girls experience. And you did, thanks to a jerk who didn't understand what 'go away' meant. So, when he took exception to how you spoke to him, and tried to hit you, you smashed his nose against the store window where you were standing. Bet that surprised his butt." This time Charles snorted, remembering the look on the guy's face when his nose hit the glass. Sherry saw the small smile on Charles' lips, wondering if he wasn't reliving the experience. "When the security guards asked if you were okay, and after confirming you were, you pointed out how that boy was a slow learner and was after another girl. Your help got that boy banned from that Mall and he is now attending an all-girls school as one of the girls. You actually saved any number of other girls from that piece of crap, didn't you?" Again, a shrug of his shoulders.
"Then, while you were looking at the display in another store window, four boys blocked you in the store entrance. After telling them to let you leave, one moron tried to stroke your cheek, only to find himself down on his knees with his wrist bent backward. Of course, he didn't take kindly to what you did, and when the security was dealing with the other three boys, that boy attempted to hit you. His attempt failed, and for his troubles, you struck him and knocked him out cold. Oh, and that first boy was waiting for you outside of the Mall, and was dealt another blow when he tried to punch you and ended up having Jane speak with him. And once again, he got his head handed to him. Not only by Jane but his parents, who read him the riot act before packing him into their car and taking him to the girls school. And it just so happened as he was getting reamed by his parents, the three creeps he'd been hanging with showed up. Creep one and two took exception to how you and Jane spoke to them and tried to do something about it. You put the toe of your kitten heel shoes into the stomach of creep one and coldcocked creep number two. Do I have the gist of the action right so far?" Once again Charles simply shrugged his shoulders.
"Then after you were 'perttified' at the salon, Jane took you to the Mall again. She told you reactions would be different this time because you looked different. She wasn't wrong, was she?" Another shoulder shrug. "You met the queen bitch and her hangers-on, a real ignorant queen bitch. She thought she was something, didn't she? Wasn't she dumber than a sack of rocks? And when she tried to slap some manners into you, you grabbed her wrist and applied a bit of face-cringing pressure to that wrist. Then, didn't you ask her if she wanted things to get real ugly? Then she called you a female dog, right? And you showed her the itch you had on your nose, correct?" This time, the shrug Charles gave to Sherry's question was substantially less than his previous ones.
Now Sherry waited for Charles to speak, say something to her that she could use to help him. But he remained silent, sitting in the chair staring at his hands. When the silence in the study became a weight on their shoulders, Sherry finally broke the silence with, "You aren't going to talk with me, are you? You're just going to sit there like a lump of clay, and stare at your hands, aren't you?" Sherry then slammed the palm of both hands down on the table, causing Charles to jump and look up at her. "I said, you aren't going to talk with me, are you? That's a question, Charles, in case you don't remember the form of a question."
Then, as Charles continued looking at Sherry he said, "What's to say? You got the gist of each situation. What do you want me to say?"
"I want you to tell me what's in here," and Sherry reached across the table and thumped Charles’ forehead, as you'd flick a fly off of something. "I want to know what you're thinking about everything that's happened to you. I want to know why you run away from emotional situations." Sherry sat back in her chair and continued looking at Charles, who sat there looking at her.
In a voice pitched to almost a growl, Charles told Sherry, "You don't want to do that again."
Sherry immediately sat up, leaning over her arms sitting on the table. "Why not? Or, maybe I should ask, or what? Does Snookums not like getting his head thumped?"
Charles' hands shot out, in an attempt to grab Sherry's arms. She saw it coming before it ever happened, and moved back at the same time Charles' hands flew forward. "You shouldn't telegraph your moves, Charles. That was sloppy." Then, before Charles could react, Sherry had reached out and captured his hands at the wrist. "I have years more training than you do Charles, training from people who can do things some think are impossible. Don't try getting physical with me Charles or I'll deal with you like you dealt with the boy whose nose you smashed against the store window."
Sherry watched Charles' face as he tried to pull his hands back; she held onto them tightly. No matter how hard he pulled, he couldn't break Sherry's grip. He tried twisting his arms, only to be prevented by Sherry's grip. She watched as he started getting frustrated, and how his eyes started getting moist.
"Talk to me."
"Let go of me."
"Then talk to me."
"Let go of me."
Tears were not streaming down his cheeks, "GET YOUR DAMN HANDS OFF OF ME!" Charles now shouted, more frustrated than when Sherry first grabbed his wrists.
In a soft voice, Sherry told Charles, "Then talk to me, Charles."
Now he started crying while saying, "PLEASE, let go of me."
Sherry now understood why Charles wouldn't talk to her, he, like Toby, had experienced something in his past he was hiding. "Talk to me Charles, tell me about it."
Charles was now bawling, close to wailing. He slid off his chair and only Sherry holding his wrists kept him from falling to the floor. "PLEASE... PLEASE... PLEASE... LET ME GO!!
Sherry released his left wrist, but held onto his right wrist, as she quickly stood up and made her way around the table to reach Charles. Once Sherry had released the tension on his arms, Charles had slumped to the floor, now in a complete meltdown. Letting go of his right wrist, Sherry all but threw Charles' chair back before she gathered Charles up in her arms and held him while he bawled. "Oh, babe, I'm sorry. You let it out. Get it out of your system. Get it all out."
While Sherry had been in a position to see the study door while holding Toby, she wasn't while holding Charles, so didn't see the door open and Jane come into the study. Jane ventured no further than just inside the door, watching as Sherry rocked Charles and talked to him as she did. 'What else is Charles hiding?' Jane thought to herself, and she turned a left the study, quietly closing the door behind her.
Charles' breakdown wasn't as intense as Toby's, but it was bad enough. As Toby had done, Charles ended up bear-hugging Sherry, bawling into her chest. "It's okay, Charles. No one is going to hurt you, it's alright, baby."
Since Sherry wasn't watching the clock, she didn't know how long Charles bawled before it turned into crying. Or how long he cried until it turned into whimpering, and finally silence. His hold on Sherry was fierce, but gradually started to relax. When Sherry felt his hold start to relax, she asked, "What is i, sweetheart? What set you off? It's okay, you can confide in me. I'll tell no one unless you give me permission."
Silence lingered in the study for several minutes before Charles started speaking. "I was seven, and in the boy's bathroom at school. Two older boys came into the bathroom and as I was starting to leave, they grabbed me. I asked them to let me go but they just laughed and started slapping me and punching me in the stomach. Then, when I was crying, while still holding me, they forced my head into one of the toilets. One of the boys was holding my arms behind me by my wrists, and they kept dunking my head into the toilet. A teacher came into the bathroom after hearing all the noise, and grabbed both boys by the back of their necks. I had to follow the teacher and the two boys to the principal's office, dripping wet from having my head dunked into the toilet. My parents were called, as were the two boy's parents. When the parents arrived and saw how wet I was and the reason why I was wet, if the principal hadn't stopped the boy's dads, they would have slammed their sons through the wall. From what was said, this wasn't the first time they'd done something like this or had been warned to not do it again. The principal told the boy's parents that both boys were suspended for two weeks. The following year, after I turned eight, it happened to me again, and the boys were expelled because they'd caused problems before.
"Oh dear Lord! And you've kept this buried all of these years? Did you speak to anyone about it? Is that why you started Martial Arts training, to protect yourself?"
"Mom and dad wanted me to talk with someone, but I lied to them and told them I was alright. I just wanted to forget about it all. And, yeah, it's why I started Martial Arts and Self Defence training, so I could protect myself from then on. But when you grabbed my wrists, it all came rushing back to me. The slapping, being punched in my stomach, and having my arms held behind me by my wrists and my head dunked into the toilet. And I couldn't stop it from happening at the time. I feel so foolish breakdown as I did. I should have been able to control myself."
Charles didn't see Sherry look up to the ceiling and close her eyes, mentally kicking herself for causing Charles' breakdown, even though he needed to get it out of his system. Had she known about the attacks he suffered, she would have handled things differently. But how would she have known? He never gave anyone the slightest hint of the help he needed. "Are you feeling better now? How about we get you back into your chair?" Charles nodded his head, and with Sherry's help, stood, Sherry pulled his chair back to the table, and Charles sat down. Sherry poured a half glass of water, handed it to Charles, and watched as he drained the entire contents. He asked for more, 'please,' and stopped asking after three half glasses of water.
Waiting until Charles had his fill of water, Sherry then asked, "Why didn't you want to talk to anyone, Charles? They would have helped you come to terms with what happened to you, so it wouldn't have been waiting to bite you in the butt. Were you embarrassed because of what happened, or afraid to talk to someone about what happened?"
After asking her questions, Sherry could see Charles was thinking about the questions she asked. "Well… I was embarrassed, because the whole school eventually found out what happened. Some felt bad for me, others thought it was funny and they should have done it more. Some even thought it'd be fun for them to do it to me, but they ended up getting suspended for several weeks. Oh, their parents were not happy with them. When they came back to school, they were different boys. I also think I didn't want to talk with anyone because, after a while, I sort of forgot about what happened."
"So why didn't you break down during your training? Surely you had your wrists grabbed then, it was part of your training?"
Again Charles thought about Sherry's questions. She saw the minute he had an answer, as s/he said, "I think because it was training and didn't trigger the right memories. I knew my wrists would be released by the move I was learning or for whatever reason. Sitting across from you, I didn't know if you were going to release my wrists. Because of that unknown, those memories came flooding back to me. I feel so foolish."
"You have no reason to feel foolish for breaking down. Older people than you have had breakdowns because of something they experienced during childhood or because of some recent experience. You needed to get that out of your system, it might be the reason you walk away when things get to the emotional level. I believe that may have changed today. I think you'll stand your ground from now on. Have some more water."
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
For the rest of the time, and to give Charles time to calm down, they swapped training stories, only certain stories, as both had stories they were sworn not to reveal. When Sherry gauged Charles was calm enough, she told him, "I'd like to speak with you again. Next time I want to talk about this mess you were dragged into. Right now though, I think you might need a shower and clean clothes before going back to the library. Ask Francis to come and see me, if you would please. Leave the door open on your way out."
Sherry watched Charles nod his head, push his chair back, stand, finish the water in the glass before he started walking across the study. He was about halfway across the study when he stopped, turned, and walked back to Sherry. He threw his arms around her neck and told her, "Thank you. I can tell I needed that." He turned around and completed his walk across the study, stopping to open the door and walking out of the study.
After Charles left the study, Sherry laid her forehead on the table and lightly banged it against the tabletop. "You stupid girl. You stupid girl," she admonished herself. "You could have totally lost him."
"I don't think you're a stupid girl," a voice to Sherry's left said, causing Sherry to abruptly sit up. Marie put her arm around Sherry's shoulder and repeated herself. "I don't think you're a stupid girl. He never shared any of his school experiences with anyone, so how were you to know? Did you know Toby was going to have his meltdown? Do you feel stupid for not knowing it was going to happen? You didn't act like you felt stupid, so why now when the information wasn't in his file? You helped two boys Jane and I couldn't or wouldn't have been able to help. So stop kicking yourself for something happening because the information wasn't there." Marie squeezed Sherry's shoulder before she removed her arm, turned, and began walking towards the study door.
Before Marie had a chance to leave the study, Sherry called out, "Marie? How'd you know? How'd you know I was angry with myself?"
Marie had turned at hearing her name called. After Sherry asked her question, Marie smiled, then laid a finger on the side of her nose, winking her left eye, before turning and leaving the study. Shaking her head, Sherry softly said to herself, "She's a freaking psychic, she has to be."
Sherry once again was standing at the window, collecting her thoughts when she heard a knock on the open study door. Turning, she saw Francis standing there, looking as though she was about to wet herself. "Please come in, Francis. And close the door behind you." As Sherry walked closer to Francis, she saw Francis was shaking, just as though she'd been in Jane's crosshairs. When she reached Francis, she gently put an arm around Francis' shoulder, and in a soft voice told her, "There's nothing to be afraid of, Francis. I'm not Jane and you haven't done anything wrong. We are just going to talk. There'll be no assignments, no books to read, we're just going to sit and talk. Okay?" Sherry asked, looking down at Francis. Still shaking some, Francis nodded her head and allowed Sherry to guide her to the chair used by the others.
"Francis, calm down," Sherry said softly to the girl. "This is not an inquisition. There won't be any thumbscrews or cat-o-nine tails. It's just you and me talking. And… unless I have your permission, no one learns what's said during our talk. Okay?" It puzzled Sherry why Francis was scared to be with her. 'Is she afraid of divulging something meant to be kept secret?' This thought played through Sherry's mind in an instant, giving her a possible approach in talking with Francis. "Entonces. Entiendo que eres bastante bueno con los idiomas (So. I understand that you are quite good with languages.). ¿Descubriste esto en la escuela o alguien te ayudó a aprender que tenías esta habilidad (Did you discover this in school or did someone help you learn you had this ability?)?"
The questions appeared to calm Francis, as she responded with, "Supongo que fue un poco de ambas cosas. Tuvimos que estudiar un idioma en la escuela y cuando empezó la clase, pareció entenderlo rápidamente. Además, había una vecina que descubrió que podía hablar español y siguió trabajando conmigo (I guess it was a little of both. We had to take a language in school and when the class started, I seemed to catch on quickly. Plus, there was a neighbor lady who found out I could speak Spanish and kept working with me.). Et depuis que Charlotte est là, elle m'apprend le français (And since Charlotte has been here, she's been teaching me French.)."
"Wow, I'm impressed, Francis," Sherry told her. "Your pronunciation is spot on in both languages. Did your Aunt Angus know you could speak Spanish?"
Francis got a nasty look on her face before saying, "Aunt Agnus, that's a nasty word to say. She got pissed off when I was practicing my Spanish for homework. She said, and I quote, "Don't want to hear no Spic language in my house. Them Spics were dirtier than dirt itself." So to practice my Spanish, I had to tell her I had something to do for school with a classmate, and left HER house. She laid into one of my Mexican friends when she came over to work on a school assignment and spoke to me in Spanish." At this point, Francis laughed. "Oh, that really pissed off my friend. She told my Aunt in as sweet a voice as she could, 'Vete a joder con el palo de una escoba (Go fuck yourself with a broomstick.).' My Aunt then asked me what she said, and I told her she said she didn't mean to upset her. It's now a running joke with me and my friend."
Despite herself, Sherry had to laugh. Francis' Aunt Agnus was the epitome of ignorance, one of those who made rocks look extremely intelligent. "Did your Aunt ever learn what your friend really told her? Or is she still as ignorant as ever?"
Laughing, Francis told Sherry, "Nooo… she's still ignorant. And when my friend comes over, she forgets on purpose and speaks Spanish. When Aunt Agnus gets upset, my friend uses variations of what she told her the first time. Of course, she uses the sweetest voice she can while saying it. One time that neighbor I mentioned was visiting Aunt Agnus and my friend was there and said something in Spanish. The neighbor knew Aunt Agnus hated to hear anyone speak anything but English in the house, and almost wet herself when my friend used another variation. I thought she was going to die right there on the spot when Aunt Agnus asked me what my friend said. I told Aunt Agnus my friend said she forgot not to speak Spanish in her home. That neighbor told Aunt Angus she had to go, and after leaving I could hear her laughing all the way to her home. The next time I visited that neighbor, she baked me a mess of chocolate chip cookies, and gave me a high five."
It took a good five minutes for the two to stop laughing. When they stopped laughing, Sherry said, "You know that's kind of cruel, right? I mean, what if she ever finds out what your friend really said to her?"
"Cruel? What's cruel about putting a bigot in their place? She treats anyone speaking anything but English the same way. I was in a store with her, one time, and two ladies were speaking Hindi while trying to decide on what they needed for the evening meal."
"Wait wait wait… how'd you know what they were saying? Do you also speak Hindi?"
Francis shrugged her shoulders, then told Sherry, "I don't know. I just knew what they were saying. And no, I can't speak Hindi. I used my hands to show them how sorry I was for my Aunt's behavior, and I think they caught on to what I meant. Because the younger lady basically to my Aunt, in Hindi, to do the same thing my friend told her to do. When my Aunt asked what the younger woman said, the older woman told my Aunt she was apologizing for upsetting my Aunt. My Aunt didn’t see me smile big after she said it, but the two women did. I gave them a thumbs-up behind my Aunt's back. After the tongue lashing my Aunt gave them, she thought she'd taught both women a lesson. We passed the two women a few more times as we shopped. Each time we passed them, they'd laugh at my Aunt, knowing she never understood a word they'd said. And each time we'd pass them, I'd give them a thumbs up. When I told my friend that story, she laughed so hard, she did wet herself. Gads, my Aunt is so stupid."
Now that Sherry had Francis relaxed, she dove into the reason Francis was scared when she came into the study. "Frank, I need to ask you why you were scared when you came into the study. You had to have talked to Charlotte, so knew I wasn't a monster."
Another shoulder shrug escaped Francis. As Charlotte had done, s/he was looking at her hands lying on the table. Sherry reached across the table, placed the fingers of her right hand gently under Francis' chin, lifted it, and said, "Francis. You are my client. As such, I can't tell anyone what you say to me. Not even your bigot of an Aunt. No one, understand?"
"Yeah, I understand how it works. I'm just afraid you're going to be like my Aunt. She'd ask me a question, then criticize me for the answer I gave her. And instead of letting it drop, she'd continue criticizing me the rest of the day. It was the same thing if she told me to do something, and I did it as she said. When she checked on what I'd done, she'd go crazy because I did what she said. She'd then jump all over me, telling me I shouldn't have done it that way. When I pointed out she told me to do it that way, she'd grab my ear, pull me to her, and tell me not to lie to her. When I'd tell her I wasn't lying, she'd get right in my face and tell me I was a liar. After each one of these episodes, she'd send me to my room and lock the door. The first time she did that, I thought she'd let me out for supper, but she didn't. I even banged on the door to tell her I had to go to the bathroom. All she said was, 'Too bad.' Fortunately, I had two windows in my bedroom. So when I learned she was going to leave me in my room until morning for school, I'd climb out one of the windows and go to the neighbor's house. When I told her my story, she looked into doing something but found out she'd need proof. And because she didn't witness any ill-treatment on my Aunt's part, she couldn't do anything. She did tell me to come over if my Aunt locked me in my bedroom again. I'm really grateful for that lady."
Sherry was shaking her head after everything Frank told her. "Frank, did you tell your Uncle what your Aunt was doing? Surely he would have helped you?"
Frank shook his head, "I tried telling him one time. He didn't believe me. He said his wife would never do such a thing. And when he was around, she didn't. I found out I shouldn't have told him anything. He asked my Aunt if what I told him was true. Of course, she denied everything. She told him I was just upset I couldn't live with Penny. I don't have any marks on my body like Toby, but when my Uncle left for work the next day, Saturday, my Aunt proceeded to slap me around. She again locked me in my bedroom and left me until morning. I spent the day and night at the neighbor's. She took pictures of all the hand prints on my face and the red places when my Aunt slapped me through my shirt. She called someone and was again told she couldn't do anything because she didn't actually witness it happening. Even when the CPS lady came by, my Aunt was peaches and cream, though I suspected something was going on between my Aunt and the CPS lady. But who'd listen to me, a kid angry because I had to live with my Aunt Agnus?"
Reaching across the table, Sherry took Francis' hands in hers. "Frank, I don't think you'll have to worry about your Aunt Agnus anymore. Things are in the works to place you somewhere else." She let go of one of Frank's hands, held up her hand as Frank was about to speak. "No, I wasn't told any specifics, just that you're not going back to that woman's house." Sherry knew more about Aunt Agnus but was not permitted to say more.
Taking Frank's hand again, she watched as tears of relief streamed down his face. It wasn't long before he started crying with relief. As she'd done to Toby and Charlotte, Sherry let go of Frank's hand, stood up, and hurried around the table. She held Frank as he cried, telling him, "It's over, Frank. They'll be no more Aunt Agnus. She now has her own problems to deal with. Let it out Frank, get it out of your system." She didn't think Frank heard her when she said Agnus had her own problems to deal with but felt it necessary to put Frank's mind at ease.
When he finally calmed down, Sherry had him drink several glasses of water. After having his fill, he told her, "Oh gawd. I'm so glad to hear I won't be going back to that bitch. If I had to go back to her, I would have run away again. And this time, stay gone. Oh gawd oh gawd oh gawd… what a relief."
After making sure Frank was alright, Sherry returned to her chair. Looking at Frank from across the table, Sherry giggled then said, "Tu vas devoir refaire ton maquillage, raton laveur (You'll have to redo your makeup, raccoon.)."
Frank chuckled then said, "Je n'en doute pas. C'est déjà arrivé plusieurs fois auparavant (I don't doubt it. It's happened several times before.)."
Smiling, Sherry again reached across the table and took Frank's hands. "I think we've accomplished a lot for this session. Next time we talk, I want to hear how you feel about the lessons you're now taking. But right now, I think you need to go clean up before going back to the library, raton laveur (raccoon)."
Francis smiled, nodding her head, then squeezed Sherry's hands, telling her, "Thank you for listening to my story. And for the news, I won't be going back to that woman. Vous êtes une dame spéciale (You are a special lady.)."
Squeezing Sherry's hands one last time, Francis pushed the chair back, stood up, and began walking to the study door. She'd put her hand on the doorknob when she heard, "You can leave the door open, Francis." Nodding, Francis opened the door and turned to go up the stairs to her bedroom.
Sherry sat there for a few more minutes, trying to understand why someone would treat Frank as they'd treated him. He didn't deserve it. She pushed her chair back, walked around the table, and over to the window, where Jane found her when she'd quietly walked over to her. Sherry never acknowledged Jane's presence, before saying, "Did you know Franks' whole story, Janie? He needs to bring charges against her for what she's done to him. That woman needs to be drop-kicked right off the edge of a mountain. How can people do things to these kids and get away with it? After hearing Franks' story, I want to go and give that woman better than she gave to Frank." She then turned and put her arms around Jane and cried on her shoulder.
As Jane held Sherry, she was looking out of the window. Saying more to the air than to Sherry, she said, "This time, there are a lot of people who need to be drop-kicked off the edge of a mountain." When Sherry calmed a bit, Jane said, "Come on. Our evening meal is almost ready, so you'll have a few minutes to fix that pretty face of yours."
Sherry, with her head still on Jane's shoulder, told Jane, "Flatterer. You think you can suck up to someone and get what you want. I know your game, Janie. I've known you during some questionable times in your life."
"Is this an attempt at blackmail, Daniels? Because if it is, I have pictures also. Do you remember that time on the beach? And that one boy?"
Sherry stood up straight, looked at Jane, and asked her, "You wouldn't? You couldn't? Besides, I got more pictures than you do, and some real juicy ones."
Smiling, Sherry watched Jane's face turn into stone, before she brought up, "You may have more pictures than I have, but I kept that video of you and what's his name."
"WHAT? You said you were going to burn that video. That's low, Thompson."
As both women kept trying to play one-upmanship, a voice brought them back to Earth. "Hey, dudettes. You want us to throw your share of the grub to the hogs? 'Cause it's on the table, right now."
Jane and Sherry turned around as a unit, after hearing what Jill almost yelled at them. While they both looked at Jill's smiling face, Sherry asked Jane, "Do you always have to put up with that girl like she is right now?"
In a dramatic sigh, Jane replied with, "Unfortunately. I think she was born that way."
"Hey, I resemble that remark. Now come on, foods on the table." And with that, the perky doctor disappeared out of the study.
As the women slowly walked across the study, Jane told Sherry, "I'm glad you and that crazy lady were around in my younger days. You both pulled me out of more than one fire pot."
Sherry knew not to ask Jane for any details between her and Jill. Like the memories she and Jane shared, those memories Jane shared with Jill were not for discussion with anyone unless Jane decided to do so. And right now, Sherry didn't see a need for Jane to share the memories she and Jill shared.
When Jane and Sherry left the study, Jane went to the dining room while Sherry retrieved her purse from the couch and went into the downstairs bathroom. She emerged from the bathroom just in time to watch Toby and the girls set plates of food on the table. She then marveled at Toby, as she watched him seat Jane, Marie, Susan, and Jill, and he was now standing at her seat waiting on her. She hurried to her seat at the table and allowed Toby to seat her, thanking him afterward. After being seated, it was only then she realized Charlotte and Francis were still standing. Puzzled at first, she finally realized the girls were waiting on Toby. Only after he seated Charlotte and Francis, did he take his own seat, bowing his head after sitting. Jane started in just as their food was being passed around.
"So, Francis. How are your lessons progressing?"
Francis had just taken a spoonful of mashed potatoes and was just passing the bowl when Jane asked her question. As she took a slice of roast off the plate she'd been passed, she told Jane, "I don't think fast enough, Aunt Jane. I seem to be absorbing everything given to me. And it all seems rather easy." She was holding the plate of roast when she asked Jane, "Why do those advanced courses seem easy to me, Aunt Jane? Aren't they supposed to be somewhat difficult? But I find them easy, and easy to remember."
Jane was looking at Susan when answering Francis' question. "I can't answer why you're finding the advanced courses easy, Francis. And yes, they are meant to be somewhat more difficult. Maybe Susan can answer your question concerning the ease with which you're working your way through the courses."
Susan raised an eyebrow at Jane's question, but told Francis, "I don't have an answer for you, Francis. Francis, have you ever taken an IQ test at school? Did your counselor or teacher ever suggest taking one?"
Everyone watched as Francis thought about Susan's questions. "Um, no, Susan, I don't remember anyone suggesting I take an IQ test. Why would they, I wasn't thought to be very smart based on my grades. If they weren't going to let me take AP courses, why would they think I needed to take an IQ test?"
Francis watched Susan shake her head as she said, "They're fools, Francis. A student's low grades are a signal there's something wrong, not that the student is stupid or needs remedial classes. Because you are picking up the subjects quickly, I think there's a lot more going on in that mind of yours, and I'd like you to take a certified IQ test. I believe Sherry has the certification needed to administer such a test," and she looked at Sherry while finishing her statement, "so no one else has to be sent for." She again looked at Francis and said, "And I'd like you to take it tomorrow."
Susan and Sherry looked over to Jane, who replied, "I see no reason why you can't administer the test tomorrow, Sherry. It might be best to do so before Francis takes any more AP courses. Perhaps the AP courses she's taken right now are nothing but remedial courses to her… if they seem so easy. Toby, Charlotte, how do you two find the AP courses? Do they seem easy to either of you? Be honest with us, we're trying to determine what level all three of you should be studying."
The five women watched the two teens as the face of each one showed they were thinking about Jane's question. "If I'm completely honest, Aunt Jane," Toby began, "everything Susan has given me I've gone through like a hot knife through butter. All of it has been an easy read and easy to understand. Nothing has caused me to slow my reading or reread anything for comprehension. Sorry Susan, I'm just being honest."
"You don't need to apologize for anything, Toby. Jane asked for your honest opinion and that's what we wanted to hear. We aren't those deaf boobs at the schools you three attend, we listen. Charlotte, how about you? Do you agree with Francis and Toby?"
Jane could see the consternation on Charlotte's face after Susan asked her question. "Why the consternation Charlotte? We are asking the question to ensure you're being challenged by the material you're studying. No one's feelings will be hurt, and you most CERTAINLY won't incur my wrath for the answer you give." Charlotte had dropped her head when Jane spoke directly to her. "Charlotte, look at me. Look at me Charlotte." Charlotte slowly raised her head until she was looking at Jane. "Now, tell me. Why are you hesitant to give us your opinion? Does anyone look angry because of what Toby and Francis told us? Do they Charlotte? If you think they look angry, it's because you three were denied the classes you three should have been taking at your respective high schools. That's where the anger you perceive is being directed, Charlotte. Not at the three of you. Charlotte, cards on the table here and now. Marie and I have never had another boy here at Seasons House with such a thirst for knowledge as you three have. If those AP courses Susan is giving you, right now, are nothing more than regular high school classes to you three, then we need to know that so we can adjust the lessons. And we can't do that unless all three of you are completely honest with us. So, Charlotte, are the courses you're currently taking too easy for you? Are you not being challenged by the material?"
It was silent in the dining room until Toby put his arm around Charlotte's shoulder, telling her, "They aren't going to bite your head off if you tell them the truth. You're working through that material almost as fast as me and Francis. And I'll bet the tests you've taken prove none of it is challenging. If you've done like me, you've aced every test Susan has given you. And if I understand what that means, it means the material is too easy. Either that or you're absorbing the material as fast as Francis and I are absorbing it. Either way, just screw up that courage you keep buried and give them both barrels."
It was almost comical as Charlotte slowly turned her head to look at Toby. "Give them both barrels? Are we at Yorktown or something?"
"Actually no," Toby started off with. "You see, at Yorktown, they would have had muskets, not double-barrels. Double-barrel shotguns weren't developed until 1875 and improved upon during the years. But you already knew that, didn't you?"
Susan, Jill, Sherry, Marie, and even Jane, all had their hands over their mouths, concealing or holding back laughter which resulted from what they all could easily see Toby doing. With a deadpan expression on her face, Charlotte said to Toby, "You're doing it again, aren't you? You're blathering along in order to get me to get out of my comfort zone. You know I can't help but react to all the blathering you do. Because it gets… annoying. You cochon (pig)."
Despite trying their hardest to remain serious about Jane's question, the five ladies could no longer hold back their laughter. Toby gave Charlotte one of his biggest smiles and received a swat on his arm for his efforts. When the laughter died down, Charlotte said, "Alright, alright, le cochon (the pig) won again; how he does it I'll never understand." Looking from Susan to Jane as she talked, Charlotte told them, "Yes, I agree with Toby and Francis. The material seems no more difficult than the regular classes we were taking at our respective high schools. Maybe the sentence structure and words are more advanced, but that's about all. I've scored perfect papers when given tests over what I've read. So either it is that easy or it's actually hard but easy for the three of us." In a parting shot, Charlotte turned to Toby and gave him a 'so there' look.
Not finished yet, Toby told her, "See, I knew you could do it. You just needed to be properly motivated."
And before Susan started to speak, Charlotte finished with a hearty, "Tu es vraiment un cochon (You're such a pig.)." It was now Toby's turn to laugh.
"Okay, that settles it. All three of you are taking the IQ test tomorrow. If the AP material I'm giving you three would bog down a normal high school student, and it's easy for the three of you, then there's more to each of you than the AP courses can deal with. And I need to find out what that is."
It seemed a time for announcements, as Jill said, "Toby, after we finish eating I want to examine you." Because Toby had a bite in his mouth, he nodded his head in understanding.
"And Jill," Sherry said, a smile on her face as she turned to face Jill. "After you've examined Toby, I'd like to meet with you in the study. You're the only one I haven't talked with concerning this mess. And from what I heard, a talk will do you good."
Jane had known Jill long enough to know her impish look meant she was about to say something rather crude. "Jill," Jane addressed Jill with a sweet look.
And with just as sweet of a look and a voice, she replied, "Yes, Jane."
"If you say what you're about to say, you won't be talking to Sherry tonight. You'll be swimming in my pond, and you know I can make it happen." Jane drilled her eyes into Jill's eyes, never once causing the smile on Jill's face to fade.
"Ya know something, Thompson? You can be a right killjoy sometimes."
Seeing the predatory smile on Jane's face, both Sherry and Jill knew it was time to rethink anything they had or were planning. Or in Jill's case, going to say. "Yes, I can be, can't I… Peters?"
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
For the rest of their evening meal, Jane asked for snippets from the courses Susan was having them work through. She found their snippets interesting but above her educational experiences. All too soon, the main meal was over and dessert had been consumed. The three teens asked to be excused, were granted permission and they began clearing the table. Toby lingered longer in the kitchen this time, almost until the kitchen work was complete. But the girls could see the pain he still felt and 'shoved' him out of the kitchen. When he abruptly came out of the kitchen, the eyes of five women turned to face him. With an exasperated look on his face, he told them, "Those two pushed me out of the kitchen. They said I'd done enough and Charlotte literally pushed me out of the kitchen."
Marie broke out laughing, telling Toby, "Cher, I know the feeling. Those two threw me out of my own kitchen as well. They claimed I needed to rest. Me, needing to rest. Can you imagine that?"
"I need to sit down," Toby said, as he shifted his weight from one foot to the other. "The ol' caboose isn't up to one hundred percent yet." Wincing, he made his way to the couch, where he gingerly sat down. He didn't realize it, but he let out a sigh heard by the five women after getting seated. "Aww… that feels better."
Jill got up from the dining room table and walked over to the couch, sitting down next to Toby. "Hey, I hate to do this, but let's get you upstairs so I can see how you're doing. Then you can come back down and get comfortable again."
After giving Jill an 'oh brother' look, he nodded his head and waited until Jill had stood so she could help him stand. With her left hand gently gripping Toby's right forearm, Jill assisted Toby to the stairs. Jane turned to watch the two make their way slowly up the stairs and out of sight, before asking Susan, "So, what can you do because of the ease with which they're going through the AP courses?"
Nodding her head at Jane's question, she replied, "I've been thinking about that Jane. If the IQ tests reveal what I believe they're going to reveal, I may have to move all three to college-level courses. It might even be better to have them continue as they're doing now, using those courses and introductory courses to the college courses. Basically like what occurs in college, where the freshman year is the basic courses of someone's major, then the more advanced courses the sophomore year, and so on. But that isn't what really worries me, Jane. What if the college-level courses are just as easy for them? What then? What could I possibly give them to challenge them? It's all going to hinge on the IQ test results, Jane."
Sherry spoke up saying, "While I realize you want the best for those three kids, just be careful not to expect more than they can give at the moment. Agnus is fresh in Francis' mind. Toby and Charlotte are embroiled in this shoplifting mess, which is so fresh it smells like something you stepped in. All three still have hair triggers that can be tripped unexpectedly."
Marie chuckled, then said, "Well, if you want to give them a challenge, and teach them at the same time, teach them Latin then teach them in Latin. It was once done that way many years ago at the best colleges."
The four women were quiet for several moments, broken by Jane saying, "There is only one problem I can see. Those three teens aren't going to be here long enough to get through any super-advanced course you set up, Susan. Toby may have to go into hiding, if it turns out there's still a price on his head. Charlotte will go back to her family, and that retched high school. And Francis will be leaving soon, if not when Toby and Charlotte leave. Going three possible ways is not conducive to holding a class, Susan. They should be attending a private school whose curriculum is as Marie suggested. And yet… " Jane became thoughtful before saying, "And yet, there's so much to be settled before their educational institution can even be discussed."
Their roundhouse discussion ceased when a bedroom door being closed was heard. Shortly, the slow, rhythmic cadence of footsteps could be heard descending the stairs. Sherry stood up just as Toby and Jill reached the ground floor. She watched Jill help Toby to the couch, helped him sit down, then said, "Oh Jillyyy. You and I have an engagement in the study. Come this way," and she waved her hand towards the study door.
Jane saw the impish look again on Jill's face and said one word, "DON'T"
Seeing the look on Jill's face caused Jane to school herself else she'd laugh at her dear friend. "Aww, Thompson. You're no fun."
Jane just smiled at Jill as the woman followed Sherry to the study. She was extremely mature by sticking her tongue at Jane as she walked by Jane. Susan could see the interplay between the two women and asked, "How long have you two known each other?"
Watching Jill's retreating back, Jane responded with, "Ever since the Earth came into existence. She saved my life several times during my younger days." When Francis and Charlotte came out of the kitchen, and Marie went into the kitchen, to make sure it had been cleaned properly and was still standing, Jane told the girls and Toby, "You three may take the rest of the evening for yourselves. Bedtime is still at the usual time."
Sherry waited until Jill had entered the study before closing the study door behind her. "So," Jill began, "what do you want to talk about?" The impish look lingered on her face, her eyes dancing with mischief.
Following after Jill, who was walking backward toward the table, Sherry asked, "You really love winding Janie up, don't you?"
"And what about you?" Jill shot back. "Calling her Janie all the time. I remember a boy in college who called her Janie once, but only once. I thought he was going to walk funny the rest of the semester. He thought he was the best thing any girl could have, until he called Jane Janie and she gave him such a shot between his legs. Every guy in that cafeteria cringed when they saw her kick him in his jewels. Those guys may have cringed but the girls were all smiling."
Sherry became somber as she told Jill, "Like you, I've earned the right to tug at Supergirl's cape. We both have been there during some of Jane's nastier times, and stayed with her, helping her get through them."
Her impish expression gone, Jill replied, "Yeah… they were times I wouldn't want my worst enemy to go through. So, what'd you want to talk about?"
Indicating for Jill to sit down, Sherry sat down in her customary chair before speaking. "You got rather upset in the library when you told Jane and Marie to talk to me. Why? You even told them if they didn't speak to me you'd be, and I quote, 'you'd be pissed at them,' unquote"
Jill let her head drop back, brought it back up, shook it, then said, "Do you always ask questions you know the answers to? You know why I got so blasted upset."
"I know why I'd get upset, but I want to know why you got upset."
Jill got up and stepped to the window. "How many times did you pull Jane out of the gutter, so to speak? Likely more times than you remember, right? Well, same here. There was one time I didn't think she'd ever pull herself together. DAMN THAT WOMAN!"
Sherry shoved her chair back, walked around the table, and behind Jill, putting her arms around the crying woman. Jill leaned back into Sherry, then reached up and clasped Sherry's arms. Through her sobs, Jill said, "Damn that woman. I told her she was burning the candle at both ends and everywhere along its length. But she wouldn't listen to me. I thought I'd lost her several times."
In a soft voice, Sherry added, "Yeah, I know. I've got the tee shirt to prove it. She latched onto me after you went off to medical school. She went through one particular nasty period, wouldn't let me call you. I didn't know how to help her, so I just stayed with her, did what I thought was best for her. She made it through, but it was a rough time."
"And I owe you both my life," Jane said, her voice coming from the direction of the study door.
Jane's voice caused both Sherry and Jill to suddenly turn around, releasing each other. "Damnit, Janie," Sherry began, "this is a private session. You have no right to be here."
Still standing by the study door, Jane's voice had an acrid sound to it as she replied, "This is my house, I go where I please." But it softened as she added, "And I pleased to be here, now, with the two of you. With the two who never turned away from me, who were there when I was a complete mess. I owe both of you my life, and I can never repay that debt."
Jane had started walking as she spoke her last statement and was now standing in the middle of the study. Her words set Jill off again, as she started walking towards Jane, saying, "Damn you Thompson. I told you you were burning that candle the entire length, but you wouldn't listen." She'd reached Jane as she continued with, "DAMN YOU THOMPSON, I thought I'd lost you." Jill threw her arms around Jane's neck and cried on her shoulder. Jane put one arm around Jill, then motioned with her other arm for Sherry to join them.
Stepping into Jane's free arm, and putting her arms around Jill and Jane, Sherry said, "She's right, Janie. Damn you, I thought I was going to lose you several times."
The three women were crying on each other's shoulders and didn't notice when the study door quietly opened. Holding the door by the doorknob, Marie looked in and smiled at seeing the three holding each other. She nodded her head, stepped back, and silently closed the door behind her. As she walked back into the living room, she said to herself, "Est ut sit. Ita semper debet (It is as it should be. So it should always be.)."
None of the three realized the amount of pent-up emotions they had from that time, a time when Jane could have become no more. A time when Jill and Sherry did all they could to keep her safe. A time when Jill and Sherry had to put their own lives on hold because of Jane's immediate needs. A time when Jane saw the path she's still on today A time that made Jane Thompson the woman she is today, and formed a life bond between the three women.
After several minutes, their crying stopped but they continued holding onto each other. "Looking back," Jane said softly, "I don't know why you two stayed with me. I was such a mess, anyone else would have kicked me to the curb."
It was Sherry who asked the question, "Why does Judge Ruth send boys to you, Jane?"
Jane was silent for a moment, before replying, "Because she sees redeeming qualities in them."
"That's why we didn't let you self-destruct, Jane," Jill supplied. "We saw redeeming qualities within you. We saw what you could become if you only saw it yourself. You finally saw it yourself after Sherry got you away from that jerk and sat up with you all night. That one scared you straight, and when you had time to reflect, you decided what you were going to do with your life. So in a way, that jerk helped you decide the path you were going to take. It took some time, but you made it. Just look at all the good you've done because of your choice."
Jane pushed back from Jill and Sherry, reached up, and stroked both women's cheeks. After what Jill had just said, Jane's throat was too tight to speak. She nodded her head, turned, and left the study, leaving Jill and Sherry in the middle of the study with their arms still around each other. Clearing her throat, Jill said, "Well, that was cathartic. I didn't realize I had so many bottled-up emotions from that time."
Turning Jill around, Sherry guided Jill back to the table, pouring two glasses of water and offering one to Jill. "That's the problem with emotions, you never realize they're all jumbled up until someone or something comes along and pulls the cork holding them back. Then you either explode with anger, cry yourself a river, or explode and cry yourself a river. The explode and cry yourself a river is the one occurring lately around here, you just happen to be its latest target." Sherry then pointed to the seat Jill had used, before sitting down herself.
Jill drank half the water in the glass before saying, "Yesh? And what do you call what you did? Faking it? I seem to remember you blowing up before flooding the carpet in this room. I remember you being just as upset as I was back then. If that time didn't bother you, why all the fireworks and waterworks then?"
With a smirk on her face, Sherry told Jill, "You know, if you don't have a license to become a practicing Psychologist, you can get into a lot of trouble." Then, to punctuate her point, she stuck her tongue out at Jill.
Shaking her head slowly, Jill retorted, "There you go again, avoiding the issue. And that last bit was sooo mature for a practicing psychologist. Seriously, though, Sherry. Why are you avoiding the issue? I remember you being as torn up as I was back then when that damn woman wouldn't listen to either of us about that skuzball."
Sherry sat her glass of water down, then looked down at her hands before speaking. "Because I was ashamed of myself back then. And I still am."
"What do you have to be ashamed of? How many nights did you sit up with her while she went through that hell?"
Sherry sighed before saying, "It wasn't about the number of nights I sat up with her. It's because I wanted to kill that jerking bastard. I wanted to drug him, take him out to some secluded spot, and make a nice flat 'V' between his legs. Then shove everything right down that gawd awful maw he called a mouth. And leave him there to bleed to death." With tears streaming down her face, Sherry choked out, "I wanted to kill him, Jill. I wanted to hurt him as much as he was hurting Janie. I'm ashamed I ever entertained the idea. That's why I avoid the issue… because I'm ashamed of myself."
Jill shocked Sherry by starting to laugh, and she kept laughing until tears were sliding down her cheeks. She laughed so hard she fell out of her chair, and continued laughing while lying on the floor. Angry over what she thought was a terrible slight, Sherry stood up so fast that her chair fell over backward. She all but ran around the end of the table, stood over the still laughing Jill, and demanded, "Alright, Peters! What's so damn amusing about what I just said?"
While still laughing, Jill looked up to see the angry expression on Sherry's face. It was only then she realized what she'd done and started to cry. Seeing Jill now crying, Sherry realized something else was going on with her sister, and as she dropped to her knees, picked Jill up from the floor, and held her, her anger dissipated. Jill stuttered out through her crying, "I…I'm…sorry…She…Sherry. I…di…didn't…mean…t…to…m…make…yo…you…an…angry.” I…was…wasn't…laug…laughing…at…y…you…b…b…but…bec…because…of…wh…wh…what…y…you…wa…wa…wanted…to…to…do…to…th…th…that…pie…piece…of…cra…crap." Her crying lessened after that, replaced with the two women sitting on the floor holding each other. The silence that had lasted several minutes was broken by Jill saying, "When you told me what you wanted to do to that slimeball, it reminded me of the paper I wrote, with steps and diagrams I made when I first arrived at medical school. Oh, it was brilliant, Sherry. It had ten steps I was going to follow, with each step detailing what I'd do to that prick and when. What I'd use on him and where it'd be applied. I was going to make him suffer so much that he'd beg me to shoot him; that was one of the ten steps, Sherry. I was fuming because of what he did to Jane. I wanted to hurt him sooo much, Sherry. I wanted to make him pay ten times more than he'd hurt Jane. If it hadn't been for my roommate, who kept pestering me to attend a support group on campus, Dr. Jill Peters wouldn't be Dr. Jill Peters but another person in prison today. I only made it through medical school because of that support group. And that roommate of mine, both helped straighten out my head back then."
"And why are you two ladies sitting on the floor holding each other?" Jane's voice startled both women so much they jerked around to face her, a 'deer caught in the headlights' expression on both of their faces. Softly, Jane said, "I heard what you both said, and I would have been upset if either of you had gone through with what you'd planned. I would have lost the two closest friends I had back then and still to this day. And, as you put it Peters, I would have been pissed at both of you. He ended up getting what he deserved, though. I heard some time later that he killed his then-girlfriend and will die in prison from old age. Now! Will you two get up off the floor, you're giving Seasons House a bad name." Jane extended her hands to Sherry and Jill. As each woman took one of the offered hands, Jane stepped back and pulled at the same time, helping each woman to stand up. She didn't let go of their hands but held them tight, saying, "Thank you both again for being there for me. If you need anything from me you have only to ask."
Sherry saw it as well as Jane, the impish look on Jill's face. "Well, now that you mention it, Thompson. Got any roast beef? 'Cause I could really go for a roast beef sandwich about now. Got any horseradish mustard, Thompson? Ya know, it goes real well on roast beef. Oh, and some of Marie's tasty homemade bread. Oh, and a tall glass of iced tea. Got any of that, Thompson?
Sherry had the fingertips of her free hand pressed tightly against her mouth to keep from laughing as she looked at Jane. Jane looked back at her with a deadpan expression on her face. Then, they both looked at Jill, who still had an impish expression on her face, along with a big smile. It was Jane who finally said, "And here I thought I only had petulant children in my house. Only I discovered I have an adult one too. If you must stuff your face, Peters, then we better adjourn to a more appropriate location."
Jane having said that the three women dissolved into laughter, holding each other and wiping the occasional tear off each other's cheek before they left the study and walked to the kitchen. Only to find three roast beef sandwiches laden with horseradish mustard on Marie's homemade bread, and three tall glasses of iced tea waiting for them. "I knew it," Jill said, as the three had stopped just inside the kitchen door when they saw the three sandwiches on the table. "I knew that woman had to be a psychic of some kind."
Laughter caught Jill's attention, and looking up from the sandwiches, she saw Marie quietly sitting at the end of the kitchen table. As Jill watched, Marie pointed to the open cabinet and the monitor setting within the cabinet. "It's called modern technology. Or for the slower ones, a psychic's friend."
Jane and Sherry had watched Jill as Marie spoke. When Marie burst Jill's psychic bubble, Jill looked up, rolled her eyes, then told Marie, "That's dirty pool, Marie." Sherry, Jane, and Marie all started laughing, but Jill didn't care as she walked over to the kitchen table, pulled out a chair, sat down, pulled one of the sandwiches to her, and began eating. With a mouth full of food, she asked, "You fwo ust gonna tand dhere?" After swallowing the large bite she'd taken, she turned to Marie and told her, "This is delicious, Marie. A-b-s-o-l-u-t-e-l-y delicious." She looked back at Sherry and Jane, and using her free hand, indicated the two sandwiches remaining on the kitchen table. Still holding each other, Jane and Sherry walked over to the kitchen table, each pulling out a chair before sitting down and starting in on their own roast beef sandwich slathered with horseradish mustard.
Looking at the clock on the kitchen wall, Marie turned off the monitor, closed and locked the cabinet doors before leaving the kitchen to sound the bedtime bell. Marie returned a short time later with Susan in tow. "Oh, look at you three, stuffing your faces while one of us was slaving over your kids, trying to teach them the difference between two plus two and the possibility the answer could be six."
Marie immediately caught on to the reference Susan was making, while the advance of Jill's sandwich had stopped just inside her mouth. Sherry gave Susan a quizzical look at first, but finally caught on to what Susan was saying. Jane calmly kept eating her sandwich, waiting until Jill asked the inevitable question, which arrived after Jill set her sandwich down on the plate. "What do you mean by that statement, teaching them the difference between two plus two and the possibility the answer could be six? How in the hell do you get two plus two being six?"
Jill looked at Susan as she asked the question, seeing only a deadpan expression on her face. She looked at Sherry, then at Jane, then at Marie, each wearing the same deadpan expression. Sherry broke the silence with, "And you call yourself a doctor. Did you skip the day one of your courses met or do you always keep your legs together at home?"
Jill was still confused by Susan's and Sherry's statements. "What do you mean keeping my legs together at home? What's that got to do with what Susan said?"
As Jill watched, Sherry shook her head, then held up the first two fingers of each hand. Then, turning those fingers sideways, she meshed one set between the other set, slowly repeating it for Jill's benefit. The laughter started slowly as they watched the sudden understanding form on Jill's face. She turned to face Susan and told her, "Gawd… you're as disgusting as those two," pointing at Sherry and Jane.
The ruckus laughter was interrupted by a knock on the kitchen door, followed by Francis coming into the kitchen. Having a worried look on her face, Francis said, "Oh, I'm sorry to have interrupted."
She had turned to leave the kitchen when Jane said, "Francis, you're not interrupting. What is it chère?"
Turning back around to face Jane, Francis said, "We're ready for bed, Aunt Jane. I just want to let you know." After Jane thanked Francis for letting her know, Francis left the kitchen, more at ease than when she'd entered the kitchen.
"Ladies, if you'll excuse me for a few moments," Jane told the four women, before setting her sandwich on its plate, pushing her chair back, standing and walking out of the kitchen. As she walked through the dining room, she could already see the three teens standing in the middle of the living room, each dressed in their particular night clothes. "Well, let's have a look at you three." Jane stood close to Charlotte and Francis, checking to make sure they'd removed all of their makeup and had used the moisturizer on their faces. Satisfied with Charlotte's and Francis' efforts, she turned her attention to Toby, noting the slight pain on his face. "Toby, are you alright? You look as though you're in some pain."
Toby had been shifting his weight from one foot to the other before Jane asked her question. Still shifting his weight, he told her, "I'm doing better Aunt Jane, at least my back and legs are. My butt is still causing some pain, I guess it was worse than I suspected."
Jane's monster began whispering in her mind again, only going quiet when Jane again told it to shut the hell up. "I'll have Jill come up and look at you Toby once you're in bed. She may be able to give you something or put something on your rear end to help alleviate the pain you're feeling. You three are excused, sleep well." Jane received 'good night' from each of the three, and stood still until the three had disappeared up the stairs. She went back into the kitchen, sat back down in her chair, picked up her roast beef sandwich, and told Jill, "Toby's still experiencing some pain in his butt. I told him I’d have you look in on him when he got into bed and maybe you could give him something for the pain. He says his back and legs are feeling better, it's just his butt that's bothering him. After seeing what a mess it was, I can understand why it's still bothering him."
Nodding her head, Jill wiped her hands off on the napkin lying next to her plate, and told Jane, "I'll look in on him then head home." After pushing her chair back, standing, then pushing the chair under the table, she walked around to stand next to Jane, bent down, and put her arms around Jane's neck. Putting her right cheek next to Jane's left cheek, she said, "I love you, you damn woman. I'll be back in a couple of days to check on Toby. Call me if he needs me sooner." She then kissed Jane on her left cheek, having Jane then put her arm around Jill's head and pull her even closer.
The two stayed together for several moments until Jane said, "I love you too, you crazy lady. And thank you for my life. Get yourself relaxed tonight."
Jane's last statement caused Jill to straighten immediately. "Thompson, you are a crude woman deep down… but a wise one." Jill bent back down and kissed Jane again on her cheek, before bidding the other women a good night.
Susan was the next to say, "I'd better be going as well. After today, I think getting myself relaxed is excellent therapy. Good night to you all." She was wished ‘good night’ by Marie, Jane, and Sherry, the three watching as Susan left the kitchen.
"Well, Jane. After the results of today, I'll be coming every day for the rest of this week and maybe next week; it will depend on how each of you progresses. I think the worst is now out in the open, it's now a matter of how to deal with it from day to day. I'm not so worried about you and Marie, you both are better at handling this on a daily basis. It's those three upstairs I'm more concerned about. They're going to be thinking of this constantly until it's over, and need to learn how not to let it control them. I think I'll join those other two and get myself relaxed tonight, I can really use it." After saying that, she leaned over and kissed Jane on her left cheek, only to have Jane pull her head in closer for a few moments.
Sherry felt a tear slide between her and Jane's cheek, before Jane said, "I never knew until today how much pain I caused you and Jill. I can't go back and undo my stupidity, I can only offer you my heart-felt apologies, and the knowledge you can ask anything of me and I'll grant it."
"You damn woman, I love you so much," Sherry told Jane before kissing her on the cheek and quickly getting up out of her chair before leaving the kitchen. Never wishing Marie or Jane a ‘good night.’
Jane was looking down at the sandwich she held in her hands. "I hurt those two badly with my actions all those years ago, Marie. And I didn't know how badly until tonight. I was such a fool back then."
Marie walked over to stand behind Jane, putting her arms around Jane's neck. "Chère, that time has passed. Today is today. We all have done something years back we wished we hadn't done. But that isn't a reason to let the actions of yesterday influence the actions of today. Put yesterday where it belongs, learn from it, but only let the lessons learned guide your way today. ‘Good night,’ chère. I'll check the downstairs before checking on the kids." She then bent down and kissed Jane on the cheek.
Jane watched Marie leave the kitchen before finishing her sandwich, thinking back to all the happenings of the day with each bite she took. As she took the last bite of her roast beef sandwich, she reflected on the last words Marie had said. Marie's words were true, but truth doesn't explain how to leave the past in the past or not influence today. She finished her iced tea, rinsed off the plate and the glass out, before looking around the kitchen one last time, walking to the kitchen door and turning off the kitchen lights as she left the kitchen and headed to her bedroom.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
When Marie came out of her bedroom the following morning, she was surprised to find Toby, Charlotte, and Francis standing by their bedroom doors. Giving them a suspicious look, she said, "So you think by being outside of the rooms I won't inspect them as I always do in the morning?"
Francis spoke up saying, "Not at all, tante Marie. We wanted to be ready to go to the kitchen with you to get breakfast ready. Nothing more."
Marie had to hide how proud she felt with Francis, and her having the courage to speak up. But appearances had to be upheld, and she told them, "I will still inspect each of your bedrooms to see for myself, shall I?" She received her second shock as the three opened their bedroom doors and stood off to the side to await Marie's inspection. Ever since the inception of Seasons House, no girl, or boy, had ever invited Jane or Marie into their bedrooms as these three had just done. Giving the three one more puzzled look, Marie entered Toby's bedroom and did her usual inspection. As she had found the previous times inspecting his bedroom, nothing was out of place or untidy. She followed the same routine for Charlotte's and then Francis' bedrooms, again finding nothing out of place or untidy. She slowly walked out of Francis' bedroom, stood where she could see all three, then asked, "What is going on, Mes amours (my lovelies?)? Why are you doing this? Someone please explain it to me, now."
Stepping away from the wall and facing Marie, Charlotte said, "Every morning you come in and wake us, telling us to hurry and you seem frustrated when you do. So, we decided to be up and ready, helping to keep you from becoming frustrated with us this early in the morning. That's all there is to it."
Marie looked at each one before saying, "J'apprécie ce que vous avez fait. Vous êtes vraiment spéciaux tous les trois (I appreciate what you've done. You three are indeed special.). Viens. Nous avons un petit-déjeuner à préparer (Come. We have breakfast to prepare.)."
With smiles on their faces, Charlotte and Francis waited for Toby to reach them before they walked to the stairs and descended them together. Jane had just come out of her bedroom and saw Marie step off the last step and onto the first floor. She heard the three teens descending the stairs and gave Marie a raised eyebrow. Marie told her, "Stabant extra cubicula sua exspectantes me (They were standing outside their rooms waiting for me.)."
Jane asked, "Et conclavia eorum (And their rooms?)?"
Answering Jane, Marie said, "Mundus et luculentam solito (Clean and tidy as usual.)."
By then the three had reached the first floor and continued walking to the kitchen. Toby was the first to return from the kitchen, carrying a stack of plates. He was followed by Francis, who began placing the silverware in its proper place. Marie and Jane watched as the two worked, looking at each other and having the same unasked question. 'Where's Charlotte?' Their unasked question was answered when Charlotte came out of the kitchen wearing an apron and asked, "Tante Marie, what did you plan for breakfast? Oh, good morning Aunt Jane. Uh, no, I haven't done anything but take care of the mugs left by the sink, if you were wondering. Tante Marie, if you didn't have anything specific in mind, how do pancakes and sausage sound? And fruit? I know a really good pancake recipe, if you'd like to use it, that is." Charlotte then looked at Jane then back to Marie, and back to Jane, who had a puzzled look on her face. She slowly started walking towards Jane, stopping when she was two steps in front of her. "Have I done something wrong again, Aunt Jane? Or have we done something wrong?"
Jane became even more puzzled as Francis laid the silverware down on the table and she and Toby walked over to stand next to Charlotte. "What's going on here?" Jane asked, looking from one to the other, then back at Charlotte. "Francis, why have you and Toby come to stand next to Charlotte? One of you needs to explain this to me right now."
Toby cleared his throat before telling Jane, "Well, Aunt Jane, if the three of us have done something wrong, then the three of us will stand together and accept the consequences."
Jane looked at Marie again and received a Galic shrug as an answer. "No, you three need to back up and explain why you were standing outside of your bedrooms and waiting for Marie. And why you are getting ready for breakfast on your volition. Which of you would care to explain?"
"Aunt Jane, we aren't trying to trick you or Marie. We knew what we had to do in the morning and did it. We felt there wasn't any reason to just sit in our bedrooms waiting for Marie, so when we were ready, we stepped out of our bedrooms and waited for Marie so we could get started preparing for breakfast. That's all there is to it, Aunt Jane." Francis had taken one step forward before she spoke, and now took one step back to again stand next to Toby and Charlotte.
This time it was Charlotte who stepped forward one step and said, "Aunt Jane, you and Marie have shown us what you expect in the morning when we first get up and how to set the dining room table for our meals. Marie has shown us what we need to do in the kitchen, though we only do that now when she's in the kitchen with us. You and Marie taught us those things, why should we wait to be told to do them when we already know what needs to be done? This way you and Marie won't be so upset or frustrated by needing to tell us every time something needs to be done, unless it's something new to us."
Jane had schooled herself to appear not quite angry but not quite pleased either, to maintain her dominance over the three. Inwardly, she was so pleased with the three it was hard for her not to show it. In a voice of a neutral tember, Jane said, "Then I think the three of you need to return to your work. Charlotte, you will assist Marie with making pancakes using the recipe you spoke of using. Sausage and fruit are acceptable. Please proceed."
Jane received another shock as Toby bowed and the girls curtsied as they replied, "Yes, Aunt Jane," in unison before turning and resuming their duties.
Jane watched the three walk back to their previous duties, looking at Marie and shaking her head. "Credis hoc, Marie (Do you believe this, Marie?)? Adhuc solliciti sunt de nobis (They are still worried about us.)."
Marie smiled and replied, as she slowly walked toward the kitchen, "Non vis hoc (You don't want this?)? Est bonum sic (It's good like that.)." She disappeared into the kitchen before Jane could say more.
Jane stood mesmerized as she watched Francis and Toby going in and out of the kitchen as though they'd done the work for years, never once complaining as they worked. She shook her head once more then walked to the study to check her emails and see if any faxes had arrived. Before she had walked through the living room, she heard, "Aunt Jane, wait. I brought you a cup of tea," Francis told her, walking up to Jane where she'd stopped and turned to the voice after hearing her name. Francis walked up to her and held out a saucer holding a full cup of tea. "We thought you'd like a cup of tea until breakfast is ready."
Marie caught her attention, standing in the frame of the kitchen door, holding the door open enough so she could look out. Marie smiled and shook her head once before going back into the kitchen. Redirecting her sight onto Francis, Jane reached out and grasped the saucer, telling Francis, "Thank you, Francis. That's very thoughtful of the three of you."
Francis curtsied and said, "You're welcome, Aunt Jane. If you'll excuse me I need to return to the kitchen." When Jane nodded her head, Francis turned and made her way back to the kitchen.
Jane stood in her spot for a moment longer before turning and walking the short distance to the study door. As she put her hand on the doorknob, she said to herself, "Remarkable. Simply remarkable," before opening the study door and entering the study. After closing the door behind her, Jane walked over to her desk, sat down, and turned on the computer. It had just booted up when the fax machine chimed, signaling a fax was ready to be printed. Jane entered her computer password, then stood up and stepped to the fax machine, where she entered a code and waited until the machine printed out the new fax. Taking the printed fax off the machine, she stepped back to her chair, sat down, she began reading the fax.
From: Jeb Thorton, et al.
To: Jane Thompson
RE: Mysterious Woman
Jane,
The police and our investigators have identified the mysterious woman Strom has been seen with, it's his mistress. They are now trying to find out if she is involved and if so, how deeply is she involved. They've started doing a background check on her and so far, it appears this isn't the first time she's been associated with this type of crime. However, when previously investigated by another law enforcement agency in another state, they couldn't definitively prove she was involved or if she was, how deeply involved. Also, before the other law enforcement agency could get too deep into their investigations, that shoplifting gang dissolved without a trace. To let things die down in the other state, it's believed they moved into our area and resumed their operations, since she is now in our area. In the year and a half the shoplifting gang operated in that state, it's estimated they shoplifted very close to fifty million dollars worth of merchandise. The undercover group has her under surveillance 24/7 wherever she goes and whomever she meets with.
Another note for you. The statements taken from those arrested are bearing fruit in two ways. While doing a background check on Strom's mistress, law enforcement in the other state was able to find several who transported the shoplifted merchandise for the shoplifting gang to our area, leading to the discovery of additional warehouses in our area. There was quite a debate on how to handle this new information, with some wanting to go in and determine if what was discovered came from the other state. Cooler heads prevailed, though, pointing out they were trying to find concrete evidence of Strom's and the woman's involvement. So, in the dead of night, concealed security cameras were placed around and in those warehouses, plus the warehouses they already knew about.
You may tell Frank he has nothing to worry about with his Aunt Agnus, she won't be around for several years, due to her scheme with the CPS agent initially charged with Frank's case. Both women will be out of circulation for some time. Because of what Frank's former caseworker had been doing, an investigation has been undertaken of the entire CPS department. And so far, two other caseworkers have been discovered to be taking kickbacks much like Frank's former caseworker.
When her husband was presented with the evidence against his wife, he was in total denial. He couldn't believe his wife could do such a thing, until she turned on him, accusing him of being too stupid to see the pile of 'shit,' her words, he was about to step in. He then remembered what Frank told him and that denial vanished, as will their marriage after he files the divorce papers. On a good note for Frank, a new CPS caseworker has been assigned to Frank's case, and she can't see any reason he can't live with Penny Willows again, now that her cancer is in remission. And if her cancer does return, it will be up to the Willows whether Frank can stay with them, and not the CPS.
It's uncertain how much longer it will take before there's enough evidence against Strom, and possibly his mistress, to arrest both of them and be sure of a rock-steady case assuring a conviction and prison time. If they can't be arrested for the shoplifting spree in our area and the other state, then because of how sloppy the killings were, and Tylor being left alive, and if enough evidence can be found linking them to the murders and the attempted murder, they'll be charged with those crimes and never see the outside world again.
Please give our love to Charles, and tell him we wait for the day he can come home.
Regards,
Jeb
As was her custom, Jane reread the fax, looking for anything hidden within the words other than their obvious meaning. She picked up the phone on her desk, dialed the kitchen, and asked Marie to send Francis to her; she needed to hear the information for her immediately. She hung up the phone before pushing her chair back, standing, and walking to the window. It was a clear morning, the sun still low enough that her house cast a shadow in its light. When she heard the knock on the study door, she yelled out, "Come in" and resumed gazing out the window.
Jane heard the study door open and then close, and Francis asking, "You wanted to see me, Aunt Jane?"
'The book' sliding off the bookshelf caused Jane to say, "Not right now, Francis. Come stand with me." She heard the book being replaced on the bookshelf and then the soft steps of Francis as she walked over and stood by Jane. "Francis I'd like to know where you'd like to live if your Aunt Agnus was out of the picture. If you'd never see her again. Where would you like to live?"
Jane had put her arm around Francis' shoulder as she asked her question. She felt the tension in Francis' shoulder come and go, likely because Francis believed she was about to be punished for something she'd done wrong. "Why would Aunt Agnus be out of the picture, Aunt Jane? How is it possible I'd never see her again?"
"Let's sit down, Francis," Jane told her, before turning Francis and leading her to the chair at the table she wanted Francis to use. Walking around the table, Jane pulled out the chair opposite Francis and sat down. Jane looked Francis in the eye and told her, "Francis, the Willows wanted you to come back and live with them when Penny's cancer went into remission. That didn't happen because your CPS caseworker was getting a kickback from your Aunt Agnus. As long as you stayed with your Aunt Agnus, Aunt Agnus was giving your caseworker half of the support money she was being paid to take care of you. And your Aunt never used that support money for anything to do with you. There were some bugs put into certain people's ears and after investigating the caseworker and your Aunt, their scheme came to light. Your Aunt Agnus will now have another experience, she didn't expect, behind bars. She's going to prison, Francis, and you might be of age before she is released."
Jane watched as Francis thought about what she had just told her, knowing Francis as she did, expecting a question because of the expression now on Francis' face. "Aunt Jane, if Aunt Agnus was only keeping me for the money, why did she treat me so horribly? Wouldn't someone after money in this manner want to keep the person around so they would continue getting the support money? Instead, she treated me like dirt, actually worse than dirt. She made it unbearable to live there by locking me in my bedroom, constantly belittling me, and not feeding me. That's no way to treat a person if you're depending on the money you receive for housing a person."
Jane shook her head and replied, "Francis, your Aunt wouldn't have been able to treat you as she did had the CPS caseworker assigned to your case been an upstanding person. As it was, that caseworker looked the other way so she could continue getting her cut of the money your Aunt was receiving for your care. As a result of her actions, an investigation is being conducted of the entire CPS department, and so far, two other caseworkers have been discovered to be receiving kickbacks as your former caseworker was receiving. You now have a new caseworker who sees no reason you can't return to live with the Willows. And, should your Aunt Penny's cancer return, whether you remain living with the Willows will be solely up to the Willows, not the CPS."
Watching Francis closely, Jane hoped her news wouldn't set Francis off as she had before when she had her meltdown. This time though, while tears were sliding down her face, she also had a huge smile on her face. "Oh, Aunt Jane, that's the best news I could ever receive. Just knowing Aunt Agnus won't be in my life anymore is wonderful to hear. And that she will finally pay for her actions is even better to hear. I do, though, feel bad for my Uncle. He's a real nice guy who didn't deserve to be treated as my Aunt treated him. I'm guessing he's divorcing my Aunt?"
Nodding her head, Jane answered, "Yes he is, Francis. He didn't believe what he was told at first, but when he remembered what you told him he finally accepted the evidence."
There was a sudden knock on the study door before it opened and they heard, "Hey, Janie. These hungry animals out here told me to tell you they want to eat. Are you two coming?"
Francis knuckled her eyes, then chuckled as she watched Jane shake her head, look toward the ceiling, then say, "Oh, the people I have to put up with." Jane turned to face Sherry, still standing with only her head in the study, and said, "What did you tell me the other day about private sessions and not interrupting them?"
"Yeah, okay, Janie. You two coming to breakfast? It's getting cold."
Looking at Francis' smiling face, Jane asked her, "Shall we go to breakfast so the savage animals can obtain sustenance?"
Francis couldn't help herself and laughed out loud, telling Jane, "Maybe we should, Aunt Jane. I could use some of that sustenance myself."
They both pushed their chairs back, stood up, and with Jane's arm around Francis' shoulder, they both walked out of the study; Sherry had left the study door open.
When Jane and Francis walked out of the study, they saw everyone but Toby standing behind their chairs. Toby was standing behind Jane's chair, waiting to seat her first. "Et qui a toujours insisté pour que le petit-déjeuner soit pris chaud (And who always insisted that breakfast be eaten hot?)?" Marie asked, as Jane and Francis reached the dining room table.
Jane looked at Marie with her dragon glare as Toby helped seat her, telling Marie, "Je crois que nous avons déjà discuté de votre situation en matière de logement (I believe we have already discussed your housing situation.)."
As Toby seated Marie next, Sherry, Susan, Francis, and Charlotte, had their hands over their mouths, trying not to laugh at the two women's antics. Marie laughed as she said, "Oh s'il te plait. Vous ne sauriez pas quoi faire en cuisine sans moi. Et vous le savez (Oh please. You wouldn't know what to do in the kitchen without me. And you know it.)."
The next thing said came from Toby, who was standing between Jane and Marie. Looking from one woman to the other, he said, "La seule équipe de comédie que j'ai vue mieux que vous deux est Abbott et Costello (The only comedy team I've seen better than you two is Abbott and Costello.)."
The statement Toby made, and the look Jane and Marie gave him, caused the others to burst out laughing. Sherry dropped to her knees because she was laughing so hard. Susan had to hold onto the back of her chair as she laughed. And Charlotte and Francis were holding each other up as they laughed. As Toby walked around to Sherry's chair to help her sit down, Jane and Marie's stares followed him as he walked. Toby stood looking down at the still-laughing Sherry, before looking back at Jane and Marie. The look he saw on both of the women's faces told him volumes. He turned and slowly walked back to stand between the two, put his arms around the shoulders of both of the women, telling them, "You two are two of the best friends I've ever seen. Please, don't ever change, it would be a tragedy." He then kissed each woman on the cheek before walking back to Sherry's chair and finally being able to help seat her. He then seated Susan before moving on to Francis and Charlotte. After seating himself, everyone waited as he bowed his head for his short prayer.
Everyone looked at Jane and Marie as they both took a few moments to clear their throats, after what Toby said to them. When Jane was finally able to speak, she said, "Thank you for those kind words, Toby." She then reached over and grasped Marie's hand. "True friendship is a rare find, and should be maintained once it's found." Jane then reached over and grasped Sherry's hand, giving both hands a light squeeze. Letting go of Marie's and Sherry's hands, she told the teens, "I believe Susan said Sherry would be administering IQ tests to you three today. Sherry, I believe the study would be adequate for that purpose, so Susan may continue in the library. While one of you is taking the test, the other two should be working on the lessons Susan has given you. That's after Marie is satisfied with your endeavors in the kitchen. And that's after you three don your work clothes and deal with the stable. Toby, adequate work clothes will be lying on your bed once you finish in the kitchen. Do what you are able but don't overdo it. Understand, young man?"
More laughter was suppressed as the expression on the faces of Charlotte and Francis turned to one of disbelief upon hearing they'd have to muck out the stalls in the stable. Toby not knowing what they'd be doing asked, "What are we going to do?"
In a deadpan voice, Charlotte told him, "Muck out the stalls in the stable. I hope you can hold your breath for a long time."
There was some laughter before Toby said to Charlotte, "Horses? I finally get to see the horses? They're beautiful animals, Charlotte. Their excrement is unique to them. I've been around them before and it isn't that bad. Now if you want flying killing stench, work around pigs. The animals don't stink, but their excrement would gag a maggot."
Jane cleared her throat, getting the three teen's attention. She gave them her 'you've forgotten something' look, causing the three teens to say in unison, "Yes Aunt Jane."
Dishes were passed from person to person, each taking the portion they wanted. Jane's inquiries into the lessons Susan was giving them turned into a round-robin of questions and answers and discussions before their breakfast had come to an end and the kitchen work began. When the teens were all in the kitchen, Sherry told Jane, "You know Toby paid you and Marie a very high compliment? And he thinks the world of you two, right?"
Jane nodded her head and replied with, "Yes I do, Sherry. It means a lot to both of us, coming from one of our wards. Something of that nature only occurs, if it occurs, several weeks into our girl's stay. Marie and I will miss those three when they leave, they are the epitome of the boys we want all of our boys to become before leaving us."
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
An hour and a half later, Jane was in the kitchen rinsing out her mug when movement caught her eye through the kitchen window. "What in the World?" She exclaimed, as she looked out the window.
Marie got up from her chair at the kitchen table, walked over, and stood by Jane, saying, "Oh, dear. They appear to have immersed themselves in the work." Jane and Marie were watching as the three teens slowly walked back to the house from the stable, each trying to brush the other off, looking as though they'd been playing in the mud. The three were covered from head to toe in… everything they'd taken out of each horse stall. "This should be an amusing explanation, I think," Marie chuckled, as she turned, along with Jane, and made their way out of the kitchen and to the back door of the house.
Sherry and Susan were still sitting at the dining room table when Jane and Marie came out of the kitchen, both chuckling as they walked. "Susan, you and Sherry should come with us. Those three are going to have an interesting explanation as to why they are covered from head to toe in horse manure and straw," Jane told the two women.
Both women smiled at the prospect of hearing the explanation and wasted no time getting up from the chairs and following Jane and Marie to the back door. When they reached the back door, Jane opened the door and stepped out onto the small porch, stepping aside to allow the other three women to do the same. When the three teens reached the porch, Jane asked, "Why do you three look as though you've been playing in the mud? Charlotte, you and Francis have been shown how to muck out horse stalls, and at no time did those instructions include appearing as you now appear. So, who would like to explain why you are as you appear in front of us?"
The three took a moment to look at each other before saying in unison, "Pinto."
Jane looked at the three with her dragon face before telling them, "Toby, you're new to Seasons House so don't know I require more than a one-word answer when requiring an explanation." She then looked at Francis and Charlotte and said, "But you two have that knowledge. You two also know I do not like repeating myself, and there are often consequences if I must repeat myself. So, girls… try again."
"Aunt Jane," Toby said, getting Jane's attention. "They can't explain how it started because they were in your mare's stall still cleaning it out. Guess I better start at the beginning."
"Yes, Toby, that's always the best place to start," Jane told him, still looking at the three with a stern look on her face.
"When we first got ready to clean out the mare's stall, we found out the three of us and the cart was too many objects in the stall. So we decided the girls would pull everything out of the stalls and I would shovel it into the cart. I positioned the cart so it was between the mare's and Pinto's stalls, that way I would be out of the way so the girls could go into and out of the mare's stall easily. I had just put one shovel of stuff into the cart when I was pushed from behind. I lost my balance and ended up face down in the pile of straw and other stuff. I must have cried out because Francis and Charlotte came out of the mare's stall to see if I was alright. They came around behind me so they could grab me under my arms when they cried out and both ended up lying next to me in that pile."
"I better continue, Aunt Jane," Charlotte said. "Both Francis and I had been pushed from behind, like Toby. I pushed myself up and looked back at Pinto, who had her lips folded back and was whinning as she shook her head up and down. Aunt Jane, I think she was laughing at us. I finally was able to get up and out of the pile, then walked over to her and stood in front of her. She still had her lips back, whinning, and nodding her head up and down. When she stopped I asked her if she pushed the three of us into the pile. She looked at me for a moment, then pulled her lips back, started whinning, and nodded her head up and down. She admitted pushing the three of us from behind and causing us to fall into the pile. By then, Francis had gotten herself out of the pile and was having a hard time helping Toby back up, so I went back over to the pile and helped her get Toby out."
Francis continued with the story by saying, "We tried brushing each other off but we were only able to get the straw off. Toby changed positions so he was facing Pinto and Charlotte and I went back into the mare's stall to finish cleaning it. We weren't in there very long before Toby cried out again, and Charlotte and I found him once again lying face down in the pile. We asked him what happened and he told us he'd been pushed from behind again. Charlotte and I looked at the mare but she ignored us, acting as though she knew nothing about what happened. Even when I stood in front of her and asked her if she pushed Toby, she ignored me, which I found unusual."
"Let me guess," Aunt Jane said, "as you two tried getting Toby out of the pile, you two were pushed from behind again?"
Nodding her head, Charlotte replied, "Yes, Aunt Jane. We were pushed from behind again. And when I looked back at the mare, she acted like she knew nothing about us getting pushed from behind. But Pinto was laughing again."
"Okay, that explains why your front side looks as though you fell into a mud puddle, but not the back of you three. How did that happen?" Jane asked.
Susan and Sherry excused themselves and went back into the house. When the back door closed, even with the back door closed the two could be heard laughing. When they had it out of their systems, they came back out onto the porch and, as the mare had done, acted as though nothing had happened. Jane looked at the two with a stern look on her face; both women covered their mouths again.
Turning back to the three teens, Jane said, "Well… I'm waiting for an answer."
The women watched as the three teens looked at each other before Toby spoke. "After getting pushed into that pile twice, we decided I would watch the mare while Charlotte and Francis finished cleaning her stall. Then after her stall was ready for her, we'd put her back into the stall before picking up the pile and starting on Pinto's stall. With me watching her, she behaved herself, even going calmly into her stall. The three of us then picked up the pile and the cart emptied without a problem, though we stayed near the mare's stall as we picked everything up. I stood with Pinto as the girls pulled everything out of Pinto's stall. I was standing facing Pinto's left flank, the girls had just turned to go back into the stall, when Pinto stepped to her left and knocked all three of us backward into the pile. And yes, she was laughing at us again. Charlotte and Francis were able to get out and helped me up, only to have Pinto step to her left and knock us backward into the pile once again. This time Charlotte and Francis crawled out of the pile toward the mare's stall, then pulled me out in the same direction. The three of us then raked the pile more toward the mare's stall so Pinto couldn't knock us into it again. I stood in front of Pinto this time as the girls finished cleaning Pinto's stall. As I look back, I believe the mare was laughing each time Pinto knocked us into the pile, but when I looked at her, she ignored me. We didn't touch that second pile until Pinto was back in her stall."
Francis chimed in with, "We tried brushing each other off the best we could, but were only able to get the straw off, much like we were doing as we approached the house."
The three were now silent as Jane stared at them. Marie nudged her, causing her to look at Marie. Marie nodded her head toward the stable then the three dirty teens. Jane was confused until Marie said, "Showers."
"Oh, wie vergesslich von mir (Oh, how forgetful of me.). I neglected to show you girls but there are showers out in the stable. If you go into the equipment room and open the door on the left as you enter the room, you'll find enough showers for each of you to shower. You'll find shampoo, conditioner, bath soap, and towels in a cabinet to the left as you enter the shower room. Girls, clean your faces well, you'll have to reapply your makeup after you return to the house. And if Toby needs your help, please help him. After taking off your dirty clothes, please put all of them into a trash bag you'll also find in the cabinet. Toby, I hope you don't mind, but we'll bring your robes to wear back to the house until you get to your bedrooms and put on clean clothes."
Toby shook his head, telling Jane, "No, Aunt Jane. I don't mind. The robe would be better than shocking anyone watching us. Sherry, I think we need to talk about how I need to deal with others seeing all the scars I have and will have after I'm completely healed."
Sherry was nodding her head as Toby addressed her. "Toby, I believe Jill is bringing someone with her tomorrow when she comes to examine your back. She may have a solution to get rid of those scars or to reduce their appearance. But we'll talk about it as you want. However," and she laughed, "right now I think it best you three go take the shower Jane told you about."
The four women watched as the three teens walked back to the stable. "Those two horses must really like those three to play with them as they did. But it is funny what they did to those three," Susan said. And with that, the snorts and chuckles became full-blown laughs.
Marie went into the house and upstairs to each bedroom, gathering the three robes and three sets of slippers she'd take to the stable. As she walked into the house and back out, and to the stable, she chuckled as she thought back to the teen's story and how they looked as they walked back to the house. When she reached the stable, she stopped at the mare's stall, asking, "Why were you such a méchante fille (bad girl?)? Do you like those three that much?" At first, the mare ignored Marie's question, but her last comment caused the mare to nod her head up and down. "Well… next time think of some other way of showing how much you care for them, oui?" Rubbing the mare's muzzle, Marie went into the supply room, then into the shower room where she said in a raised voice over the running water, "I have brought your robes. They will be placed with Toby's on the left as you face them, then Charlotte's, then Francis'. I have also brought your slippers, so it will be not so much pain on your feet as you walk back to the house. Do not linger or you may soon be showering in ice-cold water, as Jane will turn off the hot water. And Toby, you will meet with Sherry first. So hurry." Before she left the stable and returned to the house, Marie stopped at Pinto's stall, eyeing the mare who seemed to be smiling at Marie. "So, you started the Spielereien (shenanigans?)? You must care a lot for our wards." As Marie said that, Pinto nodded her head up and down, then laid her head on Marie's shoulder. "Now now, no one is angry with you. We all thought it was very funny and clever of you. But you should not make it an every-time game with them, oui? They come to keep your stall clean for you so you are comfortable. You wouldn't like it if they stopped coming because you keep playing games with them, would you?" Pinto lifted her head off Marie's shoulder, looked Marie in the eye, then shook her head from side to side. "Charlotte was right, you do understand what's said to you." Rubbing Pinto's muzzle one last time, Marie left the stable and returned to the house, again chuckling to herself as she walked.
Marie and Jane were standing at the kitchen window when the three teens came walking out of the stable. "They are much cleaner than before," Marie commented. "Hopefully they smell much better," she said before looking at Jane.
Jane slowly turned her head to Marie, giving Marie a stink eye she knew didn't affect Marie, and asked her, "Are you suggesting I should smell them after they return to the house? Are you not capable of doing such a thing?"
Chuckling with a gleam in her eye, Marie answered, "Oui, I am able to test their aromas, but you are the head of the house and as such, you decide what aromas you want inside your home."
Jane narrowed her eyes as she looked at Marie, telling her, "Alte Frau. Eines Tages wirst du zu weit gehen und die Konsequenzen tragen (Old woman. One day you will go too far and suffer the consequences.)."
Marie belly laughed as she replied, "Jane Thompson. Das haben Sie mir gesagt, seit wir Seasons House gegründet haben. Aber ich bin immer noch hier. Gehen Sie jetzt hin und sehen Sie nach, ob sie sich richtig gereinigt haben (Jane Thompson. That's what you've been telling me since we started Seasons House. But I'm still here. Now go and see if they have cleaned themselves properly.)." Marie then kissed Jane on her cheek, before watching Jane turn and leave the kitchen.
Jane waited by the stairs for the three teens to enter the house. When they finally entered the house, Jane stopped them next to the bench in the hallway. Walking over to them, she told them, "Before you three enter further into my house, I want to make sure you properly washed yourselves. I will not have you three make a mess of my home." Jane watched as all three sucked their lips inside their mouths, suspecting they were trying not to smile at what she just said. She walked around them closely, looking for anything still 'hanging' from their hair, face, or arms. She had almost told them to remove their robes, only to change her mind as she felt she would have gone too far this time. She also took deep breaths as she walked around the three, determining if the stench of the stable had washed off with the other material. Determining the three in a fit state to be in her home, she told them, "Francis, Charlotte, you two cleanse your faces well before using moisturizer and reapplying your makeup. Toby, after you are dressed, you are to meet Sherry in the study for your IQ test. You two, Francis and Charlotte, after you are dressed will return to the library where you will continue your studies with Susan. Are there any questions?" Jane didn't give them time to ask any questions before saying, "No, good. Then off you go." The three had taken the first step on the stairs before Jane asked, "Ah, Toby. Does that robe bother you?"
The three stopped climbing upon Jane's question to Toby. Francis and Charlotte looked at Toby as Toby looked at Jane. Toby surprised Jane by answering, "Why should it Aunt Jane? It's just a robe." Francis and Charlotte looked at each other, giving the other a raised eyebrow. They looked back at Jane and saw her nodding her head at Toby's answer, before waving them up the stairs.
As Jane watched the three climb the stairs, she couldn't help but wonder, 'Would he feel the same if he was completely dressed as a girl?' Sherry was in the study getting the material ready to administer the IQ tests. After Jane walked into the study, she told Sherry, "Toby should be down in a few minutes. The girls will be in the library with Susan, so you can send for them when needed. With your permission, I need to check for any pertinent emails and I see the light on the fax machine blinking so a fax has arrived."
Sherry had looked up as Jane came into the study. After listening to Jane, she told her, "I don't see any reason you can't check your emails or print out the fax before I start testing Toby. However, once I start testing Toby, or the girls, I will require everyone to be kept out of the study until the test has concluded. What they see out of the window won't be as detracting as someone in the room."
Jane nodded her head at Sherry's statement, before putting in a code that allowed the fax to be printed. Once the fax had been printed, she took the fax then sat down at her desk and turned on her computer. After logging in on her computer, she pulled up her emails, spotting one sent from Ruth. She opened it and started reading.
Jane,
Further discussion took place with the Willows and they are adamant in having Frank live with them again. They learned everything Agnus did to him and Penny's husband had to calm Penny down because of what she wanted to do to Agnus. Frank's new caseworker is already preparing the necessary paperwork and will have it all in place by the time you release Frank back to me. I must confess that I too had my own thoughts about what Agnus should suffer, but since she'll have an interesting experience in a few months, I'll let that give her what she deserves. I wonder how her fellow inmates will take to her attitude. Something tells me they will have a way of showing Agnus the mistakes she'd made.
Please give Frank the concrete news he deserves to hear.
Ruth
Jane smiled at the news from Ruth. "Good news I hope," Sherry said, seeing the smile on Jane's face.
"Yes it is, Sherry. When Frank leaves Seasons House he'll be living with the Willows, it's written in stone. Nothing was certain before when the Willows wanted Frank back with them, but he was still hopeful it would happen. Well, it's happened."
Sherry smiled upon hearing the good news, "You better sit him down before you break the news to him. Try not to be the dragon when you have him sit down, or he'll take it as a sign he's in trouble."
"Oh, so I'm supposed to waltz into the library all smiles and radiating a syrupy grin?"
Sherry rolled her eyes as she looked up at the ceiling. "Geez, Janie, you know what I meant. Don't go in there blowing smoke and with your fangs bared. Treat him as you've learned to treat him so he gains a better sense of himself. But don't go in there like a Pixie high on pixie dust, that'll scare the hell out of him."
"Yes, mother," Jane replied, just before looking toward the study door as someone knocked on the door. "Come in," she said and watched as the door opened and Toby entered the study. She got up from her chair and walked around the desk, intercepting Toby in the middle of the study. "So, feeling better after a shower and clean clothes? How are your injuries? Nothing opened, did it?"
Toby reached Jane as the two reached the middle of the study. "Oh, gads yes I feel better. Not only was I grimy and smelly, but itching too. I guess it was a combination of my wounds healing and the staw down my shirt. As far as I know, nothing broke open while doing the work, at least there wasn't any evidence of it on my shirt or underwear. And surprisingly, I seem to be walking much better as well."
As they talked, there was a noticeable clearing of a throat coming from the direction of the window. "I do mean to break up your hen party so I can get the testing down today instead of next year," Sherry said in a sarcastic voice.
Jane and Toby looked at Sherry as she cleared her throat, then looked back at each other after what she said. An unspoken word passed between the two, and they turned to face Sherry before they both stuck their tongues out at her. Sherry just shook her head before waving Toby over and pointing to the chair opposite her. She shook her head again as Jane and Toby high-fived each other before Jane left the study and Toby walked over and sat down in the indicated chair. "Are you ready to begin or are you going to continue being s-o-o-o mature? You're as bad as Jill can be."
Toby smiled at Sherry, telling her, "I'm sorry, Sherry. I'm just so excited to finally be able to take this type of test. If I didn't like you so much, I wouldn't act as I do with you sometimes." He reached across the table and took Sherry's hand. "And I want to thank you for helping me, I never realized how close I was to fully losing it." He gently squeezed her hand before adding, "Thank you very much."
Clearing her throat, to give her time to calm herself, she replied, "You're very welcome, Toby. I'm glad I could help you get through it and get it out into the open. Now, let's get you tested, shall we?"
And so it began. Toby was in the library 90 minutes before Francis took his place. When 90 minutes passed, Charlotte took her place. When the testing was over, Charlotte returned to the library where she collapsed on the couch, letting out a big sigh. "I do NOT want to take another test like that one ever again," she exclaimed as she let her head fall back against the top of the couch.
Toby chuckled before he told her, "Aw, it wasn't that bad. We aren't going to be graded, there's no homework, and no one will yell at us or make fun of us if our scores are just above what a pumpkin would score."
Charlotte had slowly raised her head and was now looking at Toby. "Relax, Charlotte. He's just doing it again. He knows full well a bag of rocks could score higher than a pumpkin," Francis said to Charlotte.
Charlotte had been looking at Toby and the wide smile on his face. But when they heard what Francis said, they both slowly turned their heads to look at her. "Et tu, Brute?" Toby asked, picking up a pillow and throwing it at Francis; Charlotte had once again laid her head back on the back of the couch. Now it was Francis' turn to have a wide smile on her face, until there was a knock on the door and Jane walked into the library.
Right away, Susan recognized the neutral expression on Jane's face for what it was. However, the three teens thought Jane's neutral expression meant they'd stepped into it again. Susan covered her mouth with her hand after seeing the 'deer caught in the headlights' look on the teens' faces. Jane looked at Francis, who was still holding the thrown pillow, then at Charlotte and Toby. In a neutral voice, Jane asked, "Francis, why are you holding a pillow that belongs on the couch? Charlotte, why is your head leaning back on top of the couch instead of your person sitting up straight?"
Wincing, Charlotte sat up straight before telling Jane, "That test gave me a monstrous headache. It feels like someone is playing kettledrums inside my head." After saying that, she resumed her initial position, her eyes closed, and pain bouncing on and off her face with each pounding in her head.
And Jane's response? "I see. And the pillow, Francis?"
Francis looked at Toby, who looked back at Francis, who looked back at Toby, both trying to get the other to explain about the pillow. "If you two are finally finished looking at each other, somebody tell me about the pillow," Jane came close to shouting.
"When Charlotte came in the library after finishing her IQ test," Francis started. "She said she never wanted to take another test like that. After she said that, Toby tried to cheer her up, as he tried at the dinner table that one time, by saying our scores might be just about the score a pumpkin would get if it took the test. Then I said a bag of rocks would get a score higher than a pumpkin, and that's when Toby threw the pillow at me, which I caught, and it didn't get hurt… Aunt Jane."
Again Jane replied, "I see." After Francis stopped speaking, Jane noticed Charlotte had raised her head, her face still wincing with the pounding in her head, and she was looking at Jane. Toby and Francis were also looking at her, the three having an expression that told Jane they thought they'd crossed a line.
Before Jane could say anything more, there was a knock on the library door and Marie entered the room carrying a tray holding a pitcher of iced tea, five glasses, and a bottle of aspirin. After setting the tray on the table, Marie picked up the aspirin bottle, popped the lid off, and told Charlotte, "Hold out your hand, chère." Once Charlotte held out her hand, Marie shook two tablets from the bottle before replacing the cap. Setting the bottle back on the tray, she picked up a glass of iced tea and handed it to Charlotte. "Drink plenty so you make sure they go down."
They all watched as Charlotte popped the tablets into her mouth, took a sip of the iced tea, swallowed, then took a longer drink. Francis' natural curiosity made her ask, "How did you know Charlotte could use the aspirin, tente Marie?"
Everyone was still looking at Charlotte, so Francis missed Jane and Marie looking directly at Charlotte. By the looks on both women's faces, Charlotte knew they were asking her not to say anything about the cameras she knew were scattered around the house. So instead she said, "Francis, when doesn't Marie know what anyone needs? She's psychic." Both Jane and Marie gave Charlotte a small smile as thanks for keeping quiet about the cameras.
No one had a chance to say any more, as they heard a knock on the library door. After the door opened, Sherry stepped into the library and asked, "Jane, may I speak to you and Susan in the study?" She didn't wait for an answer, or close the door behind her, she simply turned and left the library. Jane and Susan exchanged looks, Susan shrugging her shoulders before she stood up from the couch.
Looking at the three teens, Jane told them, "You three have work to do and are to be on your best behavior, or else. And Francis, please return the pillow to the couch." Jane turned after speaking to the teens, hoping Francis would realize she never said how she was to return the pillow to the couch. Just after closing the library door behind her and Susan, she heard an, "Hey," from Toby, and a giggle from Francis. Francis had figured it out!
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Sherry was standing in the study by the opened door, her hand on the inside doorknob. The minute Jane followed Susan into the Study, Sherry abruptly closed the door and started in with her diatribe. "Those three canNOT go back into public education. It's killing their intellect, it's stifling them to the point they've almost completely given up trying to do their best. Those buffoons running those schools should be barred from every school in the world. They can't see their butts from a hole in the ground. They've got three students who aren't being challenged by a curriculum those three consider mundane. Toby's already admitted to doing only the bare minimum to get by in his classes, and you two have seen what he's capable of doing just by observing him in the library. What'd he score on the first section test, Susan? A 100, right? Think about what he'll do on the rest of the tests you're going to give him. In every subject you'll have them study. GAWD, I want to go to each of those schools and kick a few heads so far up their asses they'd be able to see what they're eating at the moment."
Sherry finally ran down, turned, and walked over to the study window, crossing her arms across her chest. Because of the deep friendship the two women shared, Jane knew if Sherry had her arms crossed across her chest, and she was tapping her foot, she was super pissed off. Susan could sense Jane was about to say something, and put her hand on Jane's right arm, causing Jane to look at her. She held up her left palm, signaling Jane to wait a moment. "Sherry," Susan said the woman's name, as she slowly walked toward Sherry. "You are in good company about public education, exceptional company. Many renowned educators have voiced their opinions of today's public education, and how it's wasting the time of those students attending public schools. They have reams of facts showing how public education is failing those attending the schools. Even though they have facts to back up their opinions, those running the schools don't care, can't care or they risk losing their jobs. School boards are dictating how the schools will be run, and have made it clear what will happen if those working at those schools don't toe the line. You have teachers who don't agree with the current policies but like the administrators, if they deviate from those policies, they risk losing their jobs. Many want to teach, but too many fear losing their jobs to revolt against the current garbage."
She reached Sherry, put her arms around her, and turned her to face her. "You aren't the only one who's blown up over the stupidity coming out of the school boards. But the public won't listen, or don't care. School board after school board has faced angry parents, only to have those 'disruptive' parents removed from the meeting. Those boards don't want to hear the truth, a truth that shows how badly they've screwed up the public school system." She pulled Sherry to her, held her, and finished with, "Until every member of a school board is removed through elections, nothing will change. We'll still have students like Toby, Charlotte, and Francis, sitting in classes they shouldn't be in. And we'll end up with what we have now, adults who aren't prepared for the world they're going to live in. Adults who make rocks look smart."
Susan's last statement was meant to make Sherry laugh, and it did. "Smart rocks, I like it," Sherry said, laughing despite the anger she was still feeling. "How do you do it, Susan? How do you associate with an entity that's full of morons too stupid to be dumb? I've seen some morons in my field, but they don't last long after they get called out. Are people that ignorant not to see how their kids or other kids are turning out? Or is it the 'they're not my kids' attitude keeping those without kids voting for the assholes over and over again? Maybe they're the ones who need the butts kicked up between their shoulders. Maybe they need to be the employers trying to hire people who aren't ready for the workforce."
Sherry let go of Susan, walked past her, and looked at Jane. "You've been quiet throughout this whole exchange. I know you have your opinions about all of this, so give."
Jane walked up to Sherry, put her arms around her, and pulled her close. She put her left cheek to Sherry's right cheek and softly said, "I've been told several times to concentrate on what I'm good at doing, and leave those events bothering me to those having the ability to deal with them. I agree with you about your assessment of the public education system, and with you about those three not returning to that cesspool. However, I lack the education and position to affect any meaningful changes where they need to be made. The only changes I can possibly make within that cesspool are at the ballot box, where I can vote out those who don't belong on the school boards or are trying to social engineer our school systems. Marie and I do what we can here at Seasons House, and we're damn good at what we do. If that is the only way I can help provide a boy with a quality education, then it will be my contribution toward fixing the problem." Jane lifted her head off Sherry's cheek, kissed her cheek, then looked Sherry directly in her eyes. "You are a damn fine psychologist, Sherry Daniels. Besides helping all of us here at Seasons House, I have no doubts you've helped others who are as grateful as we are for all the help you've given them. Continue doing that Sherry, be that wonderful, caring psychologist who steps in to help when it's needed. Help fix a problem outside your field where you can without going off the rails. Now. You got yourself all worked up only after those IQ tests, why?"
"Thanks for all of that, Janie. You could always be level-headed when you wanted to be." She kissed Jane on the cheek, then said, "Let me show you why I got all worked up." She let go of Jane, turned, and walked over to the table where her evaluation papers of the tests lay. She picked up the papers, then turned to face Jane and Susan. "Given what the two of you have seen of those three, which one would you expect to come out on top?"
It was Susan who spoke first by saying, "Well… given what I've seen of Toby, I'd have chosen him."
"So would I," Sherry responded. "Jane, who would you have expected to have the highest score?"
Jane gave Sherry a funny look before answering, "I have a feeling you're not talking about Charlotte, are you?"
"No, I'm not, Janie. Not by a long shot. That quiet young man you've had with you before Charlotte and Toby came scored a 139 on his IQ test. Charlotte and Toby each acquired a 138. Now you see why I was so angry, Janie. Those three can't be returned to a public education system not suited for them. They need a higher level of learning. I've no doubt Charles would do his best no matter what educational institution he attended, it's who he is. But if Frank and Toby go back to those dungeons, they'll only do enough to get by, and their grades will reflect it. Even though we know they can do better and want to do better. Look how Toby and Francis reacted when they learned Susan was going to be giving them AP lessons. Look how excited they both were to be given the opportunity. Hell, Susan, look at what Toby's done with that AP physics book you gave him. Those two want to learn, they need to learn, it's who they are deep down inside. And they aren't going to get that back at their respective high schools."
Susan walked over to Sherry, put both hands on Sherry's shoulders, and told her, "Welcome to the club. Jane, Marie, and I, have discussed this very topic, but knew it would have to wait until the other garbage was resolved. We agree with you one hundred percent, they can't go back into the public education system, a system that's stifling them intellectually. It was even suggested I could continue teaching them. There's only one problem with that suggestion, where they'll live after leaving Seasons House. Charles will go back to his parents. Frank will go back to the Willows, where he wanted to live before it went south for him. And Toby will go back to his dad, and a better life, we hope. I can't be in three different places at the same time, and they can't stay up here because there aren't any accommodations for those three teens. We hope to find a private school with a challenging curriculum where those three can thrive." Susan's chuckle drew a questioning look from Sherry. "Marie said if we wanted to truly challenge them, then teach them Latin and teach them in Latin, as was once done at major Universities." She sighed, then said, "But… until Toby is safe, and Charles' name is cleared, all our wants and wishes are just smoke in a room. Now if you want to get angry at something, get angry at that bastard Strom who put Charles here, and Toby's brother, who beat Toby into submission and forced him into shoplifting."
Susan felt a hand on her shoulder as her voice increased in anger. "Easy, Susan," Jane said. "We've gone this route before and it's done none of us any good. Sherry's been kind enough to point it out to us, among other things. So, Susan, what are you going to do now you know their IQ scores? Your knowledge evaluation gave you a starting point, which you've had to adjust. Will you have to adjust their coursework again because of what you've now learned?"
Susan dropped her hands from Sherry's shoulders and walked to the study window. She was silent for several minutes, before saying, "Toby and Charles have a lot of knowledge but still need the basics before moving on. I'll have to reexamine their knowledge evaluations to see what can be changed and where they lack basic knowledge. But I won't keep them from learning at their own pace, which could cause a problem if I don't emphasize their individual learning isn't a competition. And Francis, our seemly language savant? If he finds the current lessons that easy," and she threw her hands up in the air. "I'll have to go back over his knowledge evaluations to see if he has the basics or needs to work on them, though I doubt it."
Sherry chuckled before saying, "Excuse me for a moment. I need to speak with Francis." Susan and Jane looked at each other, before watching Sherry leave the study. She was gone only a few moments before returning and seeing the questions on Jane and Susan's faces. "I had to ask Francis for permission to tell you about his Aunt Agnus. The woman is a major bigot, big time. She hates to hear anyone speaking anything other than English."
"Frank had a Mexican friend from school over at his Aunt's house to do schoolwork. She said something in Spanish to Frank and his Aunt proceeded to ream her butt for speaking Spanish. In her sweetest voice, she told his Aunt, in Spanish, to go fuck herself with a broomstick. When the Aunt asked Frank what she said, Frank told his Aunt she had said she was sorry for upsetting her. And each time the girl was over at the Aunt's house, and spoke Spanish, and the Aunt blew her gasket, she'd use variations of her original insult. Of course, when the Aunt would ask Frank to interpret, he'd say something like she forgot not to speak Spanish or some other thing."
"He and his Aunt were at the grocery store one day and they walked by two Hindi women who were speaking Hindi, discussing what they needed for their evening meal. When his Aunt heard them speaking Hindi, she threw a fit, telling them to only speak English. Now here is where it gets strange. Frank doesn't speak Hindi, but when the older woman basically told his Aunt the same thing as Frank's Mexican friend had initially told her, Frank understood what she'd said. He even gave her a thumbs-up behind his Aunt's back. When I asked him how he knew what they'd said, his reply was rather interesting. He said he just knew what the woman had said to his Aunt. It's as though his mind can interpret other languages with ease, even though he may not be able to speak the language."
Sherry had to pause after telling Jane and Susan each of the stories Frank told her, due to their laughing hysterically. After telling both women the stories, Sherry asked Susan, "How do you deal with a mind like his, Susan? And with his thinking the AP courses you're giving him are easy?"
Jane added to Sherry's questions by saying, "One night at dinner, we discovered he spoke fluent Spanish. When I asked where he learned it, he said it came easy at school and a neighbor worked with him. At one point I asked him in German if he spoke German. His reply was to tell us he thought I was asking if he spoke German, even though he didn't speak German. I then asked him something in French, and because Charlotte had been teaching him French, he answered my question in flawless French, though his pronunciation of some words needed work. He has a gift for languages, something that can be quite useful in the world."
There was a knock on the study door before it opened. Marie stuck her head past the door and asked, "How many for our evening meal, the girls need to know how many places to set."
Jane looked at Sherry, then Susan, both nodding their heads. "There will be seven for dinner, Marie," Jane told her. "Have they behaved themselves in our absence, Marie?"
Marie laughed before saying, "Oh, oui, they have. Toby's almost read through the physics book. Charlotte is plowing her way through her book, and Francis is on their heels. Susan has given them an opportunity and they are taking advantage of it. Dinner will be ready in half an hour." With that said, Marie pulled her head out of the study and closed the door.
"Ladies," Jane addressed Sherry and Susan, "I have a fax needing to be read. If you two will pardon me I will read it before dinner." Jane walked over to her desk, pulled out the chair, and sat down. She picked up the printed fax lying on the desk and began reading.
From: Jeb Thorton, et al.
To: Jane Thompson
Re: Police surveillance paying off
Jane,
The undercover agents who've been following Strom's mistress have finally discovered where she's living. A debate took place on whether or not to infiltrate her home to see what could be found or discovered. I brought up the fact if that was done without a warrant, whatever case they built against her could be thrown out of court because of fruit of the poisonous tree, namely, entering her home without a warrant. Myself, the District Attorney, and the Chief of Police have a meeting scheduled with a judge we believe will side with us after we lay out all the evidence we have so far. We believe, after presenting our evidence, she will grant us a warrant we can then use to search her home.
Our problem stems from not wanting her to know we searched her home but not violate the law pertaining to search warrants. We want to find out if she has anything in her possession pertaining to the shoplifting spree both in our area and the other state, and the murders of those kids. Because the undercovers have seen her scouting out groups of kids, we think she may be the one killing the kids and is after any still on the streets who were involved with the shoplifting. The undercovers have taken pictures of the groups she's watched and are in the process of showing the pictures to the kids still in police custody. It's hoped they can identify any of the kids in those pictures who were involved with the shoplifting and if they can, then the police can get them off the streets for their safety. Because of what she's currently doing, the police discussed using a decoy to try and force her hand, if she is the one killing the kids.
That's all I have at the moment, I'll send you more information when it's available. Give our love to Charles.
Jeb
Sherry and Susan were standing at the study window, quietly talking to each other. Their conversation ended when they heard Jane say, "You sure Fred and Bill wouldn't like to make some fast money, Sherry?"
The two women turned to face Jane before Sherry asked, "What is it this time, Janie?" Holding out her hand, clutching the fax, in Sherry's direction, she was inviting Sherry to read the fax. Sherry walked over to the desk, took the offered fax from Jane's hand, and began reading. As Susan and Jane watched, Sherry shook her head every so often, mumbling to herself as she did so. After she finished reading the fax, Sherry let out a sigh, gave the fax back to Jane, then told Jane, "Yeah, after reading that," and she pointed to the fax in Jane's hand, "I can see why you'd ask after Fred and Bill. And if it was the right thing for us to do, hell, I'd pay them myself. I'd even supply the map, shovel, and flashlight. I share your exasperation, Janie, we all do. But let Jeb and the police deal with it. We need to stay out of it or we could foul up any plans they have in place. And… possibly screw up the court case against Strom and that woman. I'm hungry, let's go eat."
Jane barked out a laugh before asking Sherry, "What is it with you and your stomach when something like this arises?"
After Jane's question, Sherry had an expression on her face that caught Jane off guard. "Janie, I'd rather feed my stomach on this side of the bars, than do what I'd like to do and feed it behind bars."
She stared at Jane for a few moments, before shaking herself and walking toward the study doors. Jane quickly got up from her chair and almost ran to catch up with Sherry, grabbing her from behind and embracing the woman. "What have you been telling me about calming down, Sherry?" Jane asked Sherry, as she felt the woman relax in Jane's embrace.
Sherry gave out a soft chuckle before telling Jane, "What doctor ever follows their own advice, Janie? But thanks for the reminder." Squeezing Sherry once more, Jane released her and opened the study door, motioning for Susan to follow them out of the study.
During dinner, the women tried to compliment Marie on the excellent pot roast, carrots, potatoes, and gravy, but were rebuffed as Marie told them, "Vos éloges sont mal orientés. Ils devraient être adressés à notre jeune cuisinier (Your praise is misdirected. They should be addressed to our young cook.)."
When the four women looked at Charlotte, she was again trying to sniff the contents on her plate. "Charlotte, please sit up," Jane told her. After Charlotte sat up, Jane asked, "Why do you find it so hard to accept praise so rightfully deserved?"
Chalotte continued looking down at her dinner plate, feeling all eyes on her. Toby reached over and put his arm around Charlotte's shoulder, telling her, "There's nothing wrong with accepting praise if you deserve it and you've done your best. Any time you do something, I've only seen you do your best, you never take shortcuts of any kind. I've eaten pot roast before, but none as good as what I'm eating now. This pot roast is more tender than anything I've eaten. You deserve the offered praise; your Uncle would be proud of your culinary skills. You should think about passing on those skills."
Everyone had to strain their ears to hear Charlotte tell Toby barely above a whisper, "Thank you. It isn't hard to do with the right ingredients."
Sherry picked up Jane's initial topic with, "You haven't answered Jane's question, Charlotte. No one here will think anything less of you if you tell us why praise is so hard for you to accept. We are concerned about you, Charlotte."
The four women could see the argument Charlotte was having with herself, it was written on her face. She pursed her lips before sighing, then looking up at Sherry, said, "You remember my telling you what those two boys did to me in elementary school? When they dunked my head in the toilet? We had a contest at school and I entered it. It came down to me and one of those boys, and I won. He wasn't happy he lost and swore I'd regret winning. Everyone else was happy I won and said so for the rest of the day. I was in the boys' restroom when those same two boys came in as I was peeing." Charlotte suddenly became deathly quiet, again looking down at her plate.
Softly and with as much compassion she could put into her voice, Sherry asked, "And, what'd they do, Charlotte?"
Tears were sliding down Charlotte's face, a soft weeping sound escaping her lips. Francis got up out of her chair and walked around to Charlotte's right, while Toby put his arms around her shoulder from the left. "It's okay, Charlotte," Francis whispered, "We're here for you."
Looking up at Sherry, her eyes red and face wet with tears, she said, "Back then, the urinals were a long fixture that we peed in, unlike the single ones today." Charlotte started crying before saying in a distressed voice, "Both of them picked me up, one grabbed my feet, and the boy I beat in the contest grabbed my shoulders, and they put me into that urinal. Like the time they put my head in the toilet, with my crying and the noise they were making, laughing and calling me names, a teacher came into the restroom to investigate and discovered what they'd done. Because water is constantly flowing in those types of urinals, I was soaked worse than before. Our parents were called, and my parents were asked to bring me a change of clothing. I was taken to the nurse's office so I could take off my soaked clothes, and was given a smock to wear until my parents brought me a clean set of clothing."
Charlotte's crying had slowed but she was still upset. "After all of our parents had arrived in the principal's office, the principal told their parents what they'd done to me and that both boys had caused too much trouble before and she was expelling them from school. I remember the smile on the faces of both boys, until one of the fathers leaned down and asked his son if he remembered what he was told the last time he got into trouble. His face went white after what his father said. The father explained to the principal what they'd told their son after he got into trouble the last time. He was going to a military school, a girls military school. He was going to become just another girl at the school. The mother of the other boy leaned down and told her son not to laugh, he was going to a private girls school. He was going to become just another girl at the school. Both gave it one last try by acting brave and saying they'd run away from the schools. The same mother grabbed her son by his left ear and told him he wouldn't get the chance; she never let go of his ear and she marched him out of the principal's office. The father of the other boy did the same, only he pulled the boy's ear up harder, causing the boy to almost walk on his tiptoes as they left the principal's office. The parent staying behind filled out the required paperwork removing their sons from the school. Both of those parents apologized to me for what their sons did, though it didn't mean anything to me right then. So, ever since that day, I get upset anytime someone offers me praise or a compliment for something I've done. It brings back that unpleasant memory."
Charlotte became silent after her telling, looking down at her hands in her lap. Sherry got out of her chair and walked over to Charlotte. She pulled Charlotte's chair out from the table with Charlotte still sitting in it, then kneeled in front of her. "Sweetheart, why didn't you tell me about that horrible event? Were you ashamed of what happened to you?"
Still looking down at her hands in her lap, she nodded her head. "The whole school found out what they'd done to me and I started getting teased. Even when I went into the restroom and other boys were there, one of them would ask if I wanted to get into the urinal again. Mom had to start sending extra clothes with me because I ended up peeing my pants. I'd run out of the restroom after they'd say things like that and never got to pee."
Charlotte started crying in earnest, leaning forward and grabbing onto Sherry. Charlotte couldn't see the looks on all of the faces of those sitting at the dining room table. And none of those looks were kindly looks. Sherry held Charlotte as she cried, wondering why schools waited until a trauma took place before taking drastic action. She believed when such events happened, those causing the problem should be removed from the location immediately, taking them away from those who wanted to be in those schools. And yet, as she had told those around the table, she could only do what she could do in her corner of the world.
Sherry addressed Charlotte, but also meant for those around the table, "Sweetheart, don't let those memories rule your life. They have happened, they can't be changed or altered. Accept them as just the memories they are, and move on with your life. When you experience one, tell yourself it's just a memory as many times as necessary to let it wash over you and not control you. I know what I'm telling you is harder to do than it sounds, but you can do it. Anyone can with practice. Come on, let's get you upstairs so you can fix your face."
Saying that to Charlotte, Sherry helped Charlotte out of her chair and held her as they walked through the living room, up the stairs, and into her bedroom, where Sherry and Charlotte talked more before Charlotte cleaned her face before reapplying her makeup. The entire time Sherry and Charlotte were upstairs, the only noise being heard were forks attacking the food on the plates. Each person lost in thought to a time when in school at the age of Charlotte's trauma, though two more recent than the rest. Thirty minutes later Charlotte and Sherry returned to the dining room table. Before Charlotte sat down, Jane saw what Charlotte was about to do and told her, "Charlotte, you owe no one an apology for what took place. I for one am glad you felt secure enough to finally talk about the experience, tragic though it was. Never apologize to anyone around this table for talking about something bothering you from your past. We're all here to help you and each other."
Seeing the slight smile on Jane's face, Charlotte chuckled and answered, "I seem to apologize for a lot of things, don't I? I'm not yet that comfortable talking about my past, it all seems so fresh." She then looked at Sherry and added, "But I'll try." She pulled out her chair, sat down, and continued eating, feeling a bit lighter than she had in a long time.
Jane realized the teens would not be in any mood to continue working on their lessons, and maybe needed to be with Charlotte. That realized, she told the three teens, "After the kitchen is done, you three may have the rest of the evening before bed to yourselves. I think Charlotte could use the company for this time."
Charlotte looked up from her plate before telling Jane, "Thank you, Aunt Jane."
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
When Charlotte pulled her chair back in and began eating again, Toby and Francis reached over and each one squeezed one of Charlotte's arms, smiling at her as she looked at each one. When the meal was finished, the three teens asked to be excused, and after being given permission to leave the table, began to clear the table. It was forty-five minutes later when the teens walked out of the kitchen and walked into the living room, where they sat together on the couch, huddled together with Charlotte in the middle. Watching the three, Sherry asked Jane, "Have you ever had such comradery with your past Girls, Jane? I realize this is a special situation, so my question might be redundant."
Shaking her head, Jane replied, "No, your question is not redundant, it's a legitimate question. We have had two boys here at one time, a new boy, like Toby, and a boy like Francis, who was with us before the new boy arrived. There was concern by the 'old' boy, but not to that extent," and she nodded to the three teens sitting on the couch. "Toby and Charles came with an abundant amount of compassion for others, while Frank may have had the same compassion for others, but shut it off because of his Aunt Agnus. If I were to make a guess, it was Charlotte who helped him rekindle the compassion he hid. But as to having previous boys with so much compassion as those three, no. We've never seen that before. And as you said, Sherry, this is an unusual situation. And being an unusual situation, what can we honestly compare it to from the past? Nothing."
The rest of their time sitting at the dinner table was taken up with Sherry offering Jane and Susan information about the three teens. Susan was questioned about her planned lessons, and whether they'd meet the needs of the three teens after learning of their IQ scores. "What they are doing now would be considered the foundation classes at a college or University. I believe the current course of action is the proper way to go before they start classes a college or University sophomores would take." Susan softly chuckled, then said, "Toby is a few pages away from finishing that physics book and the last section test. He's the one I'll have trouble keeping up with. If he has a question about something, and we discuss it as a group, I'm afraid Francis and Charlotte will not have the needed grounding to contribute in a useful way. Of course, they might surprise me and know more about Toby's question than I realized, I'll have to wait and see how it works out. I am certain about one thing, given the speed Toby reads, and his ability to retain what he reads, he could obtain a BS in a few months, instead of the normal four years. And I believe Charles and Francis wouldn't be too far behind him."
Sherry and Jane nodded their heads in agreement with Susan's assessment. It was Jane who brought up the one thing the three women failed to mention. "Everything you said seems to be true, Susan. The only problem we've discussed deals with where they would be allowed to learn at their desired pace. I believe they'd desire you as their teacher, Susan, but the constant traveling would be a burden for you. We know the type of school they need, but making that determination right at this juncture is not prudent. The current situation has to be resolved before anything else can be determined. Until then, this is a central location where you can meet with them."
Sherry had been quiet while Jane spoke, her hand lying on the table with her fingers intertwined. Separating her hands, she now started sweeping invisible crumbs off the table, something Jane had seen her do in years gone by. "Okay, Sherry. Every time you've swept invisible crumbs from the table, you've had something to say but didn't want to intrude in the conversation. So, give, what's on your mind?"
Sherry was now using the palm of her hand to sweep it back and forth across the tabletop, a kin to a kid shuffling their foot in the dirt. "Well… I was thinking. Have you thought about hosting those three after this whole mess is over? You have plenty of rooms available, and as you said, this is a central location where Susan can meet with them. Or, if Susan can locate another location, they could live here and attend school with Susan there. You would have to evaluate the impact on your normal activities. Of course… it's just a thought, Janie. You understand?"
Throughout Sherry's suggestion, she kept sweeping her hand back and forth across the tabletop, never looking at Jane. Jane reached out and put her hand on the back of Sherry's hand, stopping the movement and causing Sherry to look over at Jane. "Your suggestion has merit, Sherry, and one I've not considered. Marie and I would have to discuss the idea in depth before it could be considered and brought to the guardians of those three. What we do here is based on isolating the boy so we can have complete control over everything he does without outside influences. Seeing three other boys here could interrupt our control and make it harder to guide him in the direction we want him to proceed. However, as I said, Marie and I will discuss the merits of the idea before any decision can be made."
"I understand, Janie, and I wouldn't want my idea to make your work harder than it already can be. It's the reason I added finding another place Susan can meet with the three kids. But… that's then, the mess is now and must be dealt with first."
Jane patted Sherry's hand, telling her, "I know, Sherry. You know the importance of the work Marie and I do here at Seasons House, and you would never want us to interrupt that in any way. Still, your idea does have merit." Jane then turned her attention to the teens still sitting on the couch. "Girls, Toby, it's time you three get ready for bed. Girls, you know the routine with your faces, so I don't need to remind you."
The, "Yes, Aunt Jane," was more solemn than previous answers, likely because of the news Charlotte shared at the dinner table. They stood up from the couch together and even walked to the stairs together.
Sherry shook her head and said, "They still hurt after hearing what Charlotte went through. Too bad we all can't be that compassionate with each other. I better go, Janie. I believe I want some compassion when I get home."
"I'll walk you out, Sherry," Susan said, "I think the idea of compassion tonight is warranted. Thank you again for the meal, Jane. That young man is going to melt a girl's heart with his cooking."<?p>
Jane arose from the dining room table and walked to the front door with Sherry and Susan. After opening the front door, she hugged both women and waited until they were safely in their cars and leaving before she closed and locked the front door. No sooner had she turned to walk back into the living room, when she saw the three teens descending the stairs. She waited in the usual spot in the middle of the living room until the three reached the first floor and walked until they were two steps in front of her. Jane had to keep her facial expression neutral this time because of a first for Toby. He, along with Francis and Charlotte, was wearing the girls robe over his pajamas. "Toby," Jane addressed Toby. "Why are you wearing that robe this time? You do know it's a girls robe, correct? And that you aren't required to wear it?"
Toby had a small smile on his lips as he replied, "Yes, Aunt Jane, I know it's a girls robe. And I know I'm not required to wear it, but I started thinking I might be a bit immodest just wearing my pajamas. In searching the closet in my bedroom, this was the only robe I found, so it will have to do. As I said before, it's just a robe."
Nodding her head, Jane told him, "While I didn't find you to be immodest just wearing your pajamas, I understand your reasoning and applaud you for it. I also applaud your attitude toward wearing it." She then turned her attention to Francis and Charlotte. "Let's have a look at your faces, girls." Jane leaned close to each girl, examining their faces for any trace of makeup. "You both have done an excellent job cleaning your faces. Now off to bed, the three of you."
After receiving three, "Yes, Aunt Jane," she also received three hugs and three "Goodnight, Aunt Jane," from the three before they chained themselves back up the stairs to their bedrooms. Marie came out of the kitchen right then and stood by Jane, watching the last of Francis disappear up the stairs. "Those three think the world of you, you know. We must make sure to get the backstory of the next boy sent to us so we treat him as is appropriate. I'm not saying we don't establish our authority, but as we discovered about Francis, he may have reasons why he took the wrong path."
Jane put her arm around Marie's waist, saying, "You're right on both counts, Mein lieber Freund (My dear friend.). While some may need our normal routine, someone like Francis would need a special program. I also believe Sherry and Susan should be involved with our next boy. Sherry because she could give us insights into the boy's mind and nature. And with Susan's help, we'll know what courses the boy needs to be given. We've learned much during this unusual situation, knowledge we can put to good use next time." Jane turned and kissed Marie on the cheek before bidding her a good night. Marie returned the gesture before checking the doors and lights on the first floor, then venturing to her bedroom. Both would mull over everything they had learned before sleep finally took them away.
Jane came out of her bedroom at seven in the morning. She had just reached the dining room when she heard a 'shave and a haircut, two bits' knock on the front door. She shook her head and murmured, "That crazy woman." She knew there was only one woman who'd knock that way and discovered she was correct after unlocking and opening the front door.
There, standing in front of three other people, with a smile too big for that time of the morning stood Jill. "Hey ya, Thompson. What took ya so long to answer the door? We've been standing out here since last night, ya know. What's for breakfast?"
Behind Jill stood a man. Behind him stood Susan. Behind Susan stood Sherry, and all three had a hand over their mouth, trying not to laugh. Jane looked at the three and told them, "It's fine, go ahead and laugh at this crazy woman. She's usually this way after too much coffee or something she took out of her office."
"Whoa, there, Thompson. You know darn well I never take any loopy stuff from my office. Not when I can get it directly from you."
Jane gave Jill a death glare, telling her, "Now it's you who are to hold on. You know very well after that one time I gave up all of that. Now if we're going to be spreading rumors, I remember that time on the beach with you and that cute guy."
Jill's smile abruptly vanished, replaced with a horrid expression. "Please, Jane, not that one. Please, Jane, don't." Jane saw tears in Jill's eyes, and heard her say, "Not that one."
Jane saw the frightened, pleading, look on Jill's face. She didn't hear the anguish in Jill's voice, but Sherry did and pushed her way past Susan and the man. When she reached Jill, she could see Jill shaking. Putting her arm around Jill, she looked at Jane and in an almost angry voice told her, "Sometimes, Janie, you go too far without realizing you've gone too far. We'll be in the study." With her arm still around Jill, Sherry led Jill past Jane and to the study.
The man held out his hand and introduced himself to Jane. "Ms. Thompson, I'm Thomas Glean. A plastic surgeon Jill consulted about Toby Camber. I hope you and Jill haven't had a falling out, she speaks highly of you."
Jane had a puzzled look on her face after what Jill had said. She was puzzled because she didn't know what she said that had upset Jill or Sherry. She did recover though, when Thomas introduced himself. "Mr. Glean, it's a pleasure to meet you. And it's Jane. Please, come in. And you too, Susan. No sense you standing outside this early in the morning."
Laughing, Susan said, "Why that's magnanimous of you, Jane. I feel so special."
"Careful, Toliver, the stable stalls need to be mucked out today. The girls and Toby can teach you how it's done."
Putting on her best Southern drawl, Susan said, "Oh please, Miss Jane. Not mucking out the horse's stalls. I just can't tolerate the putrid aroma of those places. You wouldn't want me retching the entire time I'm here teaching your darlings, would you, Miss Thompson?"
Thomas did his best not to laugh, but asked Jane, "Are they always like this? And it's Thomas, Jane."
"Thomas, you don't know the half of what I have to put up from those three. Please, go with Susan, she'll show you around the first floor. I need to go see why Jill is so upset. If you'll excuse me."
Jane turned and quickly made her way to the study, disappearing after opening the study door and walking into the study. "She's extremely worried about Jill, isn't she, Susan?"
"Yes, Thomas, she's extremely worried about Jill. Jill and Sherry go way back with Jane. Together, they kept Jane from self-destructing. Those three are closer than three sisters could ever be. I will tell you something else. Jane hasn't a clue what she said that upset Jill, and that bothers her. Come on, I'll give you the nickel tour before breakfast." Susan closed and locked the front door before showing Thomas around the first floor. She refrained from giving Thomas any information about Seasons House true purpose, believing Jane should make that decision.
When Jane entered the study, she saw her dear friends in the middle of the study, with Sherry holding a crying Jill. Jane walked over and put her arms around Jill from behind. "Jill, I'm so sorry for upsetting you with what I said. And yet, I don't understand why what I said has upset you."
Jane felt Jill reach up behind Sherry's back and put her hands over Jane's hands. In a crying, stuttering voice, she said, "It…It's…no…not…you…your…fa…fault…Janie. I…I…nev…never…tol…told…either…either…of you." Sherry had moved her arms so they now were around Jane's back and pulling her closer; Sherry and Jane had sandwiched Jill between them. Sherry and Jane remained quiet as Jill's crying finally eased, waiting on Jill to speak when she was ready. The warmth they felt for each other only intensified by their physical closeness at the moment, listening to Jill take shuddering breaths as she slowly relaxed while being between the two women. "It had to do with that boy who was with us that day on the beach near those rocks. You two had gone into the ocean while that asshole and I stayed on the beach. He told me he knew of a small alcove in the rocks that had some beautiful crystals embedded in the rocks, and asked if I wanted to see them. I was so stupid I didn't suspect anything. The crystals were there, alright, and when I bent down to take a closer look, he came up behind me, grabbed me around the waist with one hand, and reached between my legs with the other, and started rubbing me hard. I told him to let me go but he said he could tell by the way I looked at him that I wanted it. I tried pulling his hand from between my legs but he only got rougher. Finally, I stomped on his left instep as hard as I could, and that caused him to let go of me. I turned around and faced him, and before he knew it, I'd kicked him as hard as I could right in his balls. I was so mad at what he'd done, that while he was still on his knees, I gave him a roundhouse kick to the side of his head that knocked him out cold. That's when I came and told you two we needed to get back to the hotel to get changed so we could get to the restaurant before it got crowded."
Sherry had brought one hand out from behind Jane and was now gently stroking Jill's hair. "Why didn't you tell us, sweetheart?"
"Tell you, Sherry," Jill all but shouted. "I knew exactly what you two would have done to him had I told you what he tried to do to me. You two would still be in jail and I'd have been alone back then."
"Did you ever see him again?" asked Jane.
Jill nodded her head, then chuckled, before saying, "Yeah, I saw him again, but he didn't see me. He was with a different girl at that club we went to the next night. When I saw her go into the ladies, I followed her and told her about him. She took my hands in hers, then with a feral look on her face, she told me she hoped he tried it with her. She found me the following night we went to that same club, and it was delicious. She was all giggles, as she told me he tried to rape her while they were at a secluded place. When I asked her what she did to stop him, she laughed and said she put him into the hospital, called the police, and pressed charges against him for attempted rape. When word got around about what that woman did to him, and he was being charged with rape, several more women came out and told of being raped by him or him trying to rape him. He got himself in a heap of trouble, plus several broken bones." Jill got quiet for several minutes before adding, "I'm sorry I didn't trust you two enough to tell you back then. But I didn't want either of you to be arrested because of what you'd have done to him. And knowing your states back then, you both would have hurt him something fierce."
It was Jane who spoke for both her and Sherry by telling Jill, "I'm glad you didn't tell us then, Jill. We would have killed that son-of-a-bitch. Back then, no one hurt one of my dear friends without paying dearly for their actions."
There was a light knock on the study door, but the door remained closed. Jane knew Marie would have come into the study after knocking, so it had to be one of the teens. "Come in," Jane said loud enough for the one on the other side of the study door to hear her.
When the door opened, Toby stuck his head into the study just enough to tell Jane, "Aunt Jane, breakfast is ready." When Jane thanked Toby for informing them, he pulled his head out of the study and quietly closed the door.
Jill let out another shuddering sigh before Jane asked, "Well, girls. Anyone for breakfast?" When both said yes, Jane then said, "Well, I guess we can't go to breakfast as we are. We'll have to let each other go."
Jill turned her head as far in Jane's direction as she could, and told her, "No shit, Sherlock. How long did it take you to figure that problem out?"
Jane glared down at Jill, telling her, "You do have a crude way of putting things." She then leaned down and kissed Jill on the cheek before adding, "And don't you ever change, Doctor Jill Peters."
Jill let go of Sherry, turned around, and put her arms around Jane, pulling Jane tightly to her, and put her head on Jane's chest. "Damn you, Thompson, you say the nicest things." She abruptly let go of Jane, looked up into Jane's stern face, and said with a huge smile, "Right, I'm hungry, let's eat."
Jane looked up toward the ceiling, shaking her head. Sherry laughed and let go of both Jane and Jill. Together, with Jill in the middle, the three women walked to the study door hand in hand. When they reached the study door, Sherry stepped forward and opened the door, watching as Jill and Jane walked out of the study still holding hands. Under her breath, Sherry said, "Gawd, I love those two women." She stepped through the open door, closed it behind her, and made her way to the dining room, where she found Toby waiting to seat her.
Toby was the last to sit down at the table. After bowing his head, he looked at Jill and asked, "Are you okay, Jill?"
Jill looked at Toby, a concerned expression on his face. "It's sweet of you to ask, Toby. I'm better now, just a bad memory I neglected to tell my friends about."
Toby smiled and replied, "I've got an extra tee shirt you can have."
A burst of laughter escaped Jill before telling him, "Naw, I've got enough of those tee shirts, more than I need. Toby, the gentleman sitting next to you is Dr. Thoman Glean, a plastic surgeon. After I make sure you haven't done anything to set back the healing process, he's going to give you a good once-over to see what he can do to lessen all of the scars you have. And trust me when I tell you, he's an excellent surgeon."
Toby held his hand out to Thomas, which Thomas took. "It's nice to meet you Dr. Glean," Toby told the man. "I hope there's something you can do because I'm a right mess."
Thomas smiled at Toby and told him, "Toby, and to everyone around this table, it's Thomas. There's no need to be stuffy." Thomas had looked up at everyone around the table when he said that. "As to you being a mess, as you say, I've brought some before and after pictures, you'll be surprised at what I can do, Toby." Thomas then looked at Jane and said, "Everything I can do for Toby is pro bono. You and Marie helped my younger brother many years ago, and my family is truly grateful. He went into law and started his own firm; they help those who've been abused. He's built a reputation that causes other lawyers to cringe if they have to meet him in court. He's never forgotten your lessons, Jane. He preaches them to any kids he defends, and they seem to listen to him."
Jane smiled after hearing about Thomas' younger brother. She remembered Steve Glean, and how long it took before he finally came around to what Jane was trying to teach him. She gave Jill another stern look when Jill said, "Jaanniiee, can we p-l-e-a-s-e eat now? I'm hungry."
The woman just had a meltdown and here she is with another big smile on her face as she asked her question. "How can you only think about your stomach, Peters? There are other important things to be considered." Jane had schooled herself as she faced Jill's huge smile, a smile Jill knew always got to Jane.
With a gleam in her eyes, Jill asked, "Do you want the simple answer or the clinical answer?"
Jane shook her head, saying, "Neither... let's just eat our breakfast."
The table broke out in laughter when Jill fist-pumped the air and exclaimed, "YES!"
Sherry turned to look at Thomas before telling him, "Thomas, you'll have to forgive our diminutive friend. When her body is deprived of protein, her mind wanders into the void." Sherry gave Jill a big smile when Jill looked past Susan and gave Sherry a dirty look.
Jill then slowly turned to look at Thomas, when he said, "Yes, Sherry. I've noticed when her nutritional level is low she becomes a bit spastic." He smiled at Jill as she gave him a dirty look.
Looking at Thomas, Jill said, "Et tu Brute? What is it, kick Jill Day? You two do know revenge is best served cold, right? See if I steer any more patients your way, Thomas. Spastic indeed!"
The teens could no longer hold their laughter, and caused the entire table to start laughing when they led the way. They laughed even harder when Jill sniffed the air, then picked up the bowl of scrambled eggs and put a spoonful on her plate before passing it to Susan.
Jane sat back in her chair and examined her little family. She watched as they each took what they wanted before passing it to the next person. She listened to the talk as it started while each served themselves. She watched the teens and was proud of them for the way they were helping each other through their school work and adversity. When she looked at Marie, she saw Marie looking at her. Marie laid her left hand on the back of Jane's right hand, lying on the table, before saying, "Tout va bien, n'est-ce pas (Everything's fine, isn't it?)?"
Nodding her head, Jane said one word, "Oui (Yes.)."
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
When everyone had eaten all they wanted, Jane cleared her throat to get the teen's attention. They looked at Jane and heard, "After you three have reassembled the kitchen to Marie's satisfaction, change into your work clothes and clean out the stalls. If I might suggest, only take one horse out at a time and wait to pick up what's removed from their stalls until you return them to their stalls. In doing so in this manner, you run less of a risk of looking as though you three have played in the mud."
Jane watched as the three teens looked at each other before Francis spoke. "Um, Aunt Jane, thank you for the suggestion, we appreciate it, but we already decided to do it that way. Toby will mind the horses while Charlotte and I clean out the stalls. Once we have new straw in their stalls, food and water placed for them, and they're back in their stalls, then the three of us will scoop up everything and put it into the cart. We thought it would be quicker if three of us picked up everything instead of Toby doing it alone." Almost timidly, Francis added, "At least that is our plan."
Jane looked first at Francis, then at Charlotte and Toby in turn. "You three have devised an excellent plan, an excellent plan. But first, the kitchen. Go!" To the teens, Jane's 'Go' was the same as being excused from the table, and they wasted no time clearing the table and getting the kitchen work done. With a smile on her face, Jane directed her question toward Jill by saying, "Jill, why don't you take Thomas out to the stable and show him around? You two can use the time to watch Toby and assess his current condition."
Jill nodded her head, telling Jane, "That's not a bad idea, Janie. It beats sitting around this mausoleum waiting for those kids to return to the house."
"A mausoleum, is it? I'll have you know, Peters, this house is in excellent condition for its age. It's in better condition than your broken-down body."
With an indigent snort, Jill replied, "Broken down body? Broken down body? I'll have you know, Thompson, my body is far from… " but she never finished her sentence, as she looked at the four women and Thomas, all doing their best not to start laughing. "I should have known what you were doing, Janie. I should have known. Come on, Thomas, let's go look at the stable and leave these misfits to themselves." She abruptly got up from the table and hurried out of the dining room and through the living room to the backdoor, never waiting for Thomas. Just as she reached the backdoor, she heard laughter break out from Thomas and the four women. Smiling, she said to herself, "That damn woman. She gets me every time."
Jill stood on the porch for the backdoor, waiting for Thomas before walking to the stable. She didn't wait long, as the backdoor opened and Thomas stepped onto the porch. "Ready, Thomas? Did you get it all out of your system in there with those misfits?"
Thomas chuckled, then told Jill, "They think the world of you, don't they? It's the only reason they'd keep pulling your leg."
Noticing Jill's somber expression over what he said, he watched as she used the steps to leave the porch and start walking toward the stable. He hurried to catch up with her only to have her tell him, "Yeah, Thomas, we're close, really close. Sherry and I kept Jane from self-destructing back in college. And she almost did when I was away at medical school. If it hadn't been for Sherry… " and Jill wiped her eyes and cleared her throat, "If it hadn't been for Sherry, Jane Thompson wouldn't be here today. And I don't think Sherry or I would be where we are today. Jane's death would have devastated me and Sherry. I couldn't have completed medical school and Sherry might have dropped out of college. Jane meant that much to both of us."
Thomas was silent a moment longer as they walked. "You know, even if she had died, she might have wanted you both to continue your studies and get where you are today. She seems to be that type of person."
"Yeah, you may be right, Thomas. But I'm damn glad we didn't have to find that out." Jill remained quiet as continued their walk but became animated when they reached the stable. "Well, here we are, Thomas, the horsey barn. That black one there is Jane's mare. And that one over there, is the infamous Pinto, the stinker. The one who helped make those three teens look as though they'd been playing in the mud."
Thomas reached out and started rubbing the mare's muzzle, only to feel the mare press her muzzle up into his hand. "She's beautiful, Jill. Is Jane the only one who rides her?"
"As far as I know, Thomas. Those two have a bond I've seldom seen between a horse and the rider. She knows exactly what Jane needs and how Jane is feeling any time they're together."
As Thomas started walking toward Pinto, the horse started stepping backward into her stall. When Thomas reached the door to the stall, Pinto had backed herself into the corner where Charlotte had first seen her. Turning to Jill, Thomas asked, "Has Pinto been abused by someone? She seems scared."
A new voice coming from the entrance to the stable answered his question. "Yes, Thomas, she was abused before Jane purchased her. The man who previously owned her mistreated her using a bridle. She has scars at the corners of her mouth and pulled back because she equates you with that man."
Thomas turned and saw the three teens standing at the entrance to the stable. "Was that man punished for his mistreatment of this fine animal?"
Charlotte walked over to stand next to Thomas, who was standing in front of Pinto's stall. "Aunt Jane never said, but someone should have taken a bullwhip to him for what he did to Pinto."
Francis chimed in with, "Aunt Jane and Marie worked for three months to put Pinto at ease, and Miss Horse Whisperer standing next to you got her to come up to her in about ten minutes. Those two have been best buds ever since. After yesterday, I wish they weren't."
Thomas looked down at Charlotte and asked, "What happened yesterday?"
Pointing at Pinto, Charlotte said, "That stinker thought it'd be funny if she pushed all three of us into the muck we took out of the mare's stall. We pulled both horses out of their stalls, and started cleaning the mare's stall. Because the wasn't room for all three of us and the cart, Toby and the cart were outside of the stall and he would shovel the muck into the cart. He had shoveled one scoop into the cart when that stinker," and she pointed to Pinto, "Push him from behind, causing him to lose his balance and fall face first into the pile of muck. When Francis and I heard him cry out, we came out to see what had happened, only to find him lying face-first in the pile of muck. Francis and I went around behind Toby so we could help him up by lifting him by getting under his arms. That's when that stinker," and she pointed to Pinto again, "Pushed Francis and I and we ended up face down in the same pile of muck."
"Oh, but that was just the beginning. Toby went around to the other side of the pile of muck and had just put another shovel full of muck into the cart when he was pushed from behind again. Of course, he fell face down into that pile of muck again. His cry brought us out of the mare's stall, seeing him once again in the pile of muck. Francis stood in front of the mare and asked her if she pushed Toby from behind. But she ignored Francis, she looked completely over Francis' head, acting like she knew nothing about what just happened. So this time, we finished the mare's stall, put her back in her stall, then the three of us scooped up the pile of muck from the mare's side of the pile. We then started on Pinto's stall and had just pulled a large pile of muck from her stall. The three of us were between Pinto and the pile, when Pinto sidestepped to her left and knocked all three of us into that pile, causing all three of us to land on our backs in that pile. Francis and I pulled Toby out of the pile in the direction of the mare's stall, before the three of us scooped it all into the cart. That way, the pile would be gone and Pinto couldn't push us into it again. And the kicker?" Pointing at Pinto a third time, "That stinker was laughing at us the whole time. She was having the time of her life." Then looking at Pinto, Charlotte asked, "Weren't you?"<./p>
With her lips back, Pinto whinnied and threw her head up and down. Thomas couldn't help himself and was laughing loud and long. When he could speak again, he said, "I'm sorry, Charlotte for laughing, but that's a funny story. I bet you three looked a mess when you finished in here."
Charlotte, nodding her head, told Thomas, "We were such a mess, Aunt Jane had us take showers out here in the stable; there's showers through another door in the tack room. She even made us put our clothes in a plastic bag. Marie brought our robes to us to wear to the house." Charlotte turned her attention to Pinto by saying, "Why are you still standing in that corner? This man isn't the man who hurt you, he's here to help Toby. You remember Toby, right? You pushed him into the muck a couple of times." She then held out the apple she'd held below the top of the stall door. "She this? If you want it, you'll have to come and get it. I don't fancy having you push me and make me fall into your muck." Like a kid who was told to do something, Pinto dithered where she stood, stepping forward and then stepping backward. Handing Thomas the second apple she'd been holding, below the top of the stall door, she wiggled the apple she held out to Pinto. A kin to a kid stomping his feet then doing what he'd been told, Pinto stomped her feet, dropped her head, shook it, snorted, then slowly walked to Charlotte and gently took the apple out of her outstretched hand. Pinto stepped forward so Charlotte could rub her muzzle. "See, he isn't a monster, and he isn't going to hurt you."
Slowly, Thomas raised his hand holding the second apple. "I've another apple if you want it," he told Pinto. "I have two horses at home, not as big as you, but just as pretty." Pinto leaned back when Thomas raised his hand holding the apple, still unsure about him. When Thomas only held out the apple to Pinto and didn't try anything else, Pinto hesitantly leaned forward and took the offered apple. Thomas then gently stroked the side of her muzzle, telling her she was a pretty pinto. His gentle manner with Pinto won her over, as she stepped right up to the stall door and placed her head on his shoulder. "No one should have treated you as you were treated. You're too gentle of a spirit to be mistreated." What happened next caused Charlotte and Thomas to smile, as Pinto used her muzzle to rub Thomas' cheek.
"Charlotte, you gonna play with that misfit or help us muck out the mare's stall," Francis called. "The sooner we get this done the sooner we can return to our studies." When Pinto heard Francis call her a misfit, she lifted her head off Thomas' shoulder and slowly turned her head to look at Francis. After staring at her for a moment, she snorted then neighed at her. Francis just looked at Pinto and said, "Yeah? Well right back at you. We were a mess after you had your little bit of fun. See if I give you an apple any time soon." Pinto pulled her lips back and whinnied, shaking her head up and down. Francis walked over to the basket of apples, took one, then walked over to Pinto. Holding the apple out to Pinto, she told her, "Here you go, you crazy horse." After Pinto took the apple, she laid her head on Francis' shoulder, causing Francis to say, "Oh, now you're trying to butter me up, huh? Trying to get me to forgive you for the other day, huh?" Francis put her arms around Pinto's neck and added, "Well, I guess I can forgive you this time." Pulling back to look Pinto in her eyes, she told her, "But it better not happen again."
There was a gleam in Pinto's eyes that Francis missed but was seen by Charlotte and Thomas. "Francis, Pinto is like that pixie sitting over there on the haybale," and Charlotte pointed to Jill sitting on the haybale. "She'll always think of something when you don't expect it."
Jill was sitting on the haybale now, but the three missed her falling off the bale while laughing so hard at Pinto's antics. "Hey, we resemble those remarks," she called out. "It makes life more interesting."
Toby had walked over to stand next to Francis, telling Jill, "We'll bring both horses out of their stalls and muck out the mare's stall. Then you can start scooping the muck into the cart with your back facing Pinto. I'm sure Pinto would love having a fresh target to hit." The five stood there and watched as Pinto pulled back her lips, and started whinnying while throwing her head up and down. "See, even Pinto agrees with me." Just then the mare, who'd been standing at her stall door, whinnied and started throwing her head up and down. "Even the mare agrees with Pinto. They both want a chance to push you into the pile of muck." Looking at Francis and Charlotte, he asked, "Are we going to get all of this done today or do you two want to stretch it out through next week?"
Charlotte chuckled, then said, "Yeah, we better get this show on the road." They followed the plan they outlined to Jane, bringing out the mare, completely cleaning out her stall, laying down a good bed of straw, making sure she had food and water, before putting her back into her stall, and then scooping up the muck and putting it into the cart. They followed the same plan with Pinto's stall, and no one ended up face down or on the backs in either pile of muck. They were sweaty, and a bit smelly, but they didn't look as though they'd been playing in the mud.
When they finished with the one stall after Pinto's, there was no doubt they needed a shower and clean clothes. As the three started for the house, they called after Thomas and Jill. Jill told Charlotte, putting a big smile on her face, "You three go ahead, we'll wait for a moment until the air isn't so… pungent." The look Charlotte gave Jill made her laugh for a few moments until the three had turned and started for the house. "Everyone here will miss those three when they leave, Thomas. They're like a breath of fresh air and sunshine rolled into one. I can't remember three teens who've bonded quite like those three. It might have something to do with how Toby had been treated, or their misconception of him. I do hope there's something you can do for him, Thomas, otherwise, he may never take his shirt off in public ever again. Or let any girl he befriends and they become a couple ever see him naked. He may seem brave, Thomas, but deep down, it's the scars on his back he's self-conscious about."
Thomas sat looking down at the ground as Jill spoke. At her last statement, he nodded his head and told her, "We've had several patients who've been extremely self-conscious about their scars, especially burn victims. Some have had to see someone while we treated them, to accept the scars on their bodies. And some have accepted them and moved on with their lives. Based on what I've seen of Toby so far, I think he falls in the latter camp, though you may be right Jill. I think we've given the air enough time to clear and they should be clean by now. Let's go see what I can do for Toby, shall we?"
Before leaving, Thomas picked up three apples, giving one to each of the three horses. He and Jill chit-chatted as they walked back to the house, checking the soles of their shoes before stepping one foot into Jane's house. Jane and Susan were sitting at the dinner table going over some papers when Thomas and Jill walked in. With a questioning look on Jill's face, Susan pointed to the library, where the three had gone to resume their lessons. Walking to the library door, Jill lightly knocked on the door before opening it and she and Thomas walked in. After closing the door behind them, Jill said, "Toby, Thomas would like to look at the scaring you have to see what he might be able to do to lessen them." Toby stood up from the couch and started to remove his shirt when Jill added, "He'll need to see all of you. As in, birthday suit, naked, au naturel, peeled, unadorned, bare, in your nothingness, déshabillé (undressed), you get the picture. So we'd better go to your bedroom, because I don't think Jane would appreciate you flashing anyone going by that window," and she pointed to the big window in the library.
Toby had pulled his shirt up to his armpits but pulled it back down after Jill made it abundantly clear Thomas would need him undressed. The three looked at each other, all three rolled their eyes, then looked at Jill with Francis saying, "Gosh, Jill. You sure took your time telling Toby he had to be naked for the exam. I'd have offered him five bucks just for a peek." Charlotte and Toby slowly turned their heads to look at Francis, who sat there with an innocent look on her face. As Jill and Thomas watched, a pillow sailed in Francis' direction and was deftly caught by Francis. Francis then looked at Jill and Thomas, who were laughing at the teen's antics, and told her, "If this keeps up, I could play baseball. Now if I could only hit the ball." Having said that, Francis launched the pillow back at Toby, who wasn't paying attention, and it hit him in the head.
The pillow hitting Toby caused Thomas and Jill to laugh even more. "Alright, you monkies," Jill said, breaking the current joyful mood. "Toby, come on, let's get you naked and let Thomas have a gander." Nodding his head, Toby launched the pillow again at Francis, before following Jill and Thomas out of the library.
Toby had his hand on the doorknob to pull the door closed, when the pillow hit him in the back of the head. When he looked back at Francis, she appeared to be reading her textbook again. Giving Francis a death glare, Toby told her, "Vous allez payer pour celui-là, espèce de seau de crottes de porc (You're going to pay for this one, you bucket of pig shit.)." Being the mature person Francis was, she just stuck her tongue out at Toby, who laughed before closing the library door behind him.
Jill and Thomas had waited on Toby before walking to the stairs. As they walked by Jane and Susan, still looking over a set of papers, Jane said, "Toby, Bitte achten Sie in meinem Haus auf Ihre Sprache (please watch your language in my house.)."
Chuckling, Toby said, "Sorry, Aunt Jane." Jane just nodded her head and continued going over the papers with Susan.
With a gleam in her eyes, and as mature as she is, Jill stuck her tongue out at Jane. "I saw that, Jilly," Jane told Jill. "Very mature of you." But Jane had never once looked up from the papers she was examining.
Jill and Thomas followed Toby up the stairs to his bedroom, Jill keeping an eye on Toby as they ascended the stairs. When they reached his bedroom, Toby opened the bedroom door, then stood aside to let Jill and Thomas enter first. As Toby stepped into his bedroom, and closed the door behind him, Thomas asked, "Would you be more comfortable having Jill wait outside, Toby?"
Toby all but laughed, before telling Thomas, "Thomas, Jill has already seen me naked several times. I was naked the first day after I arrived here, napping, but naked."
A puzzled expression crossed Thomas' face, and he asked, "Why were you naked after you arrived?"
Toby pulled the chair by the closet door over to the bed, turning it so it faced the bed. He motioned for Jill and Thomas to sit on his bed and asked Thomas a question. "Have you ever heard of Petticoat Punishment, Thomas?" When Thomas shook his head no, Toby continued explaining. "Petticoat Punishment is used to alter a boy's behavior by having him dress and act as a girl. He wears everything a girl might wear, from a bra and panties to a garter belt and stockings, to slips, dresses, and heels. He's also taught how to apply makeup and eventually has to apply his own makeup. The mistress uses the boy's ego against him, asking for his word of honor to do what he's told without complaining. Here at Seasons House, Jane welcomes the boy after a long train trip, treating him to lunch and a small glass of wine to welcome him. What the boy doesn't know is that his small glass of wine is laced with a sleeping potion, which after the long train trip, makes him extremely sleepy. The boy is shown to his bedroom so he can nap after his long trip. During his nap, Marie goes into his bedroom and removes all the clothing he brought with him, including whatever he is wearing as he naps. After a couple of hours, Jane goes into his bedroom, wakes him, and if the boy is as most boys are at his age, he becomes embarrassed having a grown woman seeing him naked. Of course, after realizing he's naked, he uses the bed coverings to cover himself before Jane tells him she wants to see him in the study in a few minutes. It's at that point the boy brings up the fact he hasn't anything to wear, and Jane points out the robe lying over the back of the chair in the room; a chair like the one I'm sitting in. The boy tells Jane the robe is a girls robe, and Jane counters by asking him if it isn't clothing. The boy doesn't realize Jane never said anything about it being a girls robe, just that it's clothing. The question only has one answer and it's the one the boy gives, yes. Jane then tells the boy to wear the robe and slippers beneath the chair or come naked, it doesn't matter to her. Again, a boy that age would be embarrassed to sit in front of an adult woman naked, so he puts on the robe and slippers and goes down to the study. By wearing the robe and slippers, he has taken his first step into the world of Petticoat Punishment."
"There's already one of Jane's girls in the house when the boy arrives, and her job is to instruct the new boy, such as knocking before entering any room if the door is closed. This helps the new boy after being told to meet Jane in the study, as he knocks on the study door and waits to be told to enter or come in. He's told to sit on the bench near the backdoor until Jane can see him, causing his anxiety to build. After being allowed to enter the study, he's directed to sit in the high-back chair directly in front of Jane's desk. It's uncomfortable and meant to be, to keep the boy uncomfortable and wanting to get out of the chair. Jane will then explain she requires his word of honor to do what he's told and not complain no matter what he's told to do. And if he can't give her his word of honor, then she'll send him home on the train dressed just as he is in the robe and slippers. What he doesn't know is that she won't do that because it would be trouble for her if she did. Once he gives her his word of honor, she's got him, hook, line, and sinker. Marie then takes him upstairs and teaches him how to wear the girls clothing, which he has to learn quickly. There's a trip to the salon for hair and makeup, and a few other things, then he's taken to the Mall, so the boy can experience what genetic girls go through. He even gets to be a clothing model at a clothing shop in the Mall. If at any point he balks or refuses to do what he's told, Jane throws his word of honor in his face. It may seem strange, Thomas, but I would have liked to have gone through the experience. But as you're about to see, I wouldn't have been able to have the experience."
Standing up, Toby moved the chair back near the closet door before sitting down and removing his shoes and socks. He removed his shirt then his pants, saving his briefs for last. He walked over to Thomas and Jill, turned around, and told Thomas, "See why I couldn't have the experience, Thomas?"
Toby heard the intake of air from Thomas, before Thomas asked, "My word, son. Who treated you in this manner?"
In a soft voice, so soft Thomas almost didn't hear Toby's answer, Toby said, "My brother, Thomas. He started slapping me around after our mother walked out. Then it graduated to beating me with anything he could get his hands on. He did it all to force me to become involved in the shoplifting ring he belonged to. The newer marks are because I got caught the last time I shoplifted, and was arrested. He and the man that ran things drug me to two pipes in a warehouse, tied me spread eagle to those pipes, and my brother did what you see. I passed out after the third blow, so I don't know how many times he hit me." Toby reached up and wiped the tears hugging his eyes, causing Jill to get off the bed and hug Toby from behind. Toby reached up and held onto Jill's arms, using her to support him as he cried.
Jill held Toby tight, telling him, "It's okay, Toby. Everything will be okay." She held him until he stopped crying, then asked, "Better?" When he nodded his head, she let him go and sat back on the bed.
Thomas patted Jill's leg before asking Toby, "Toby, would you please step back a bit?" Toby took one step backward and heard, "That's good, Toby. Toby, do I have your permission to touch you?" When Toby nodded his head, Thomas then said, "I'll try to be gentle, but let me know if my touching hurts, okay?" After hearing, "okay" from Toby, Thomas began feeling the scars on Toby's back, working down to his butt, then to his legs. "Toby, may I have your permission to take pictures of your back, butt, and legs? I want to show them to my team so we can decide the best course to help you." Again, Toby nodded his head, then heard, "Would you take a couple of steps forward, that's good, thank you, Toby." Thomas pulled out his cell phone and began taking a series of pictures, long shots, and closeups. "Okay, Toby, you can get dressed. We'll see you downstairs and talk some more." He and Jill stood up and left Toby's bedroom, talking as they descended the stairs and walked into the living room. Thomas sat down hard on the couch, asking Jill, "Who in the hell treats a person like that, Jill? They could have killed him if the beating had lasted much longer. His body wouldn't have been able to endure the shock of the beating. I have my own opinion on what should happen to people who do that to kids, and it isn't nice."
Jill sat down beside Thomas, putting her arm around his shoulder. "Thomas, you're in good company with the thoughts you have on how to deal with those types of people. Some of us think a map, shovel, and a flashlight, are how to deal with those people. But rest assured, they are about to get what they deserve. Oh, and Toby's brother? The one who gave Toby those newest scars? They tried to kill him. Two policemen found him near the door of a warehouse they'd been using, he'd been shot three times. So in a way, he got what he deserved. He'll get more, of course, since he was involved in the shoplifting, but how much more depends on whether or not he cooperates. Ah, here's our Toby now."
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Thomas indicated for Toby to sit next to him on the couch. "Toby, I find it unconscionable that someone would do such a thing to another person, much less someone your age. You'll understand if I'm angry because of what you experienced, and I hope I haven't taken my anger out on you in some way."
When Thomas finished speaking, Toby shook his head and told Thomas, "Thank you for caring, Thomas, but you haven't taken your anger out on me. You've been compassionate the whole time, something I appreciate."
Thomas smiled and replied, "Thank you for that, Toby, I can sometimes get a little overzealous when I get angry. Now, in examining your scars, and those recent ones, your body has a great deal of healing to complete before we can do anything. I'd like to see them look like old scars before we start treating them. My knee-jerk reaction is to not start with surgery. Your body has undergone a severe shock due to the beatings, it doesn't need any more brought on by surgery. My first thought is to use a good scar cream to see if that would lessen those scars. The cream may work better on your legs than your butt and back, but we'd have to wait and see. That is just my initial thought, though my team may have other ideas. Do you have any questions for me?"
"How long would the cream treatment last? And if surgery was necessary, how would you deal with all of my scars?"
Thomas had nodded his head at Toby's questions, answering, "The cream I'm thinking about isn't toxic at all, so it could be used as long as we wanted it used. As to surgery if necessary, I can't answer that question, Toby. My team and I would have to meet with you to get crisp pictures of the scars. We'd then have to sit down and decide the best approach without causing any more scars. But how about we wait on that solution until we see if the cream does the trick? I think it will, but before anything is done, all ideas have to be approved by my team. We have to reach a consensus on the best course of treatment. However, we need to let your body completely heal itself before we do anything, so don't fret over what we might decide. Oh, and just so you know, everything I'm doing is pro bono, so that's one worry you can throw out."
Jill chimed in with, "If you don't have any more questions, Toby, it might be best if you head to the library. You don't want to get behind in your lessons."
Toby shook his head when asked if he had more questions, and snorted when Jill hinted at getting behind in his lessons. "I've no more questions right now, I may have more later when a course of treatment is decided. Get behind in my lessons, Jill? Ha! If anything, I'm ahead of the lesson plan Susan had for me. She gives me a textbook and I'll be halfway through it before she turns around. And I've aced every test I've been given. I think her hair is getting thin."
Insinuating Susan was pulling her hair out over Toby, caused Jill to laugh. "You better go, Toby, before Janie comes in here and gives you what for."
Holding out his right hand to Thomas, after Thomas took his hand and shook it, Toby told the man, "Thank you for what you're doing, Thomas. If I'm completely honest, I was worried about what my back, butt, and legs would look once everything has healed. At least now there's a chance they won't look too bad."
Pumping Toby's hand again, Thomas told him, "You're more than welcome, Toby. I'm glad there's something we can do to help you. I think I see Jane coming out of the study."
Toby turned his head to look toward the study, watching as the door opened and Marie walked out of the study, closing the door behind her and heading toward the kitchen. "I better go," Toby announced, before getting up from the couch and heading to the library. Jill and Thomas heard him knock on the library door, then the door opened and closed, the voices being heard cut off as the door closed.
Thomas was looking down at the floor when he said, "That's a fine young man, Jill. He's gone through hell and came out the other side without losing himself. Whatever he does with his life, others will benefit. I think I've done all I can today and better go. Are you coming, Jill, or do you have more you want to do?"
"Ah, no, Thomas, I'm all through. I just wanted to check Toby to make sure he didn't break anything open. It all looks good so far. We better go find Janie and talk to her before we leave, she'll want to know what you've decided or are planning. She's funny like that."
They got off the couch together and walked over to the study. Jill knocked on the door, opened it, and after sticking her head through the opening, asked, "Janie, you got a minute?"
Jane was on the phone but waved them into the study. Jill led Thomas into the study before closing the door behind her. Jane held up a finger, then pointed to the table near the window. They walked over to the table but sidestepped it for the window itself. "Ever since my wife and I moved up here, I always marvel at the beauty of the area. It gets colder than a witch's tit in a brass bra in winter, but the spring, summer, and fall, make up for it. They'll bury me up here, Jill."
Jill was silent for a moment after Thomas spoke, then said, "I never looked at it that way until I came back to practice. Now, I couldn't live anywhere else."
Arms encircled Jill as the voice added, "Thomas has it correct. The spring, when everything starts to wake after a long cold time. The summer, when everything is in its full splendor. And the fall, when everything is getting ready for a long sleep. Then you have to tolerate the cold so you can witness it happening all over again." While still holding Jill, Jane asked, "So, Thomas, what's your initial assessment? Will you and your team be able to help Toby? He's brave, but I suspect worried about his appearance once his body is healed."
Thomas turned and walked around the table before pulling out a chair. He waited until Jill and Jane did the same on their side of the table and sat down. After sitting down, he began outlining his findings. "As I told Toby, Jane, nothing can be done until his body is completely healed. Not having consulted my team, my initial thinking is to use a scar cream on his back, butt, and legs, before considering surgery. His body had experienced one hell of a shock being beaten like that, Jane, and to opt for surgery right off, before his body is over the shock of being beaten, could cause him more problems. And there's the fact it involves his entire back, not a patch or two. If surgery would be called for, we'd have to come up with a way to remove those scars without making him look like a patchwork quilt. But right now, he needs to heal completely and I need to consult with my team. I will tell you something, Jane. That's one fine young man staying with you. He's going to be a benefit no matter what he does with his life."
Jane looked at Thomas a moment before she spoke. "Thank you for the initial assessment, Thomas. Even I could see it would be difficult in dealing with all of those scars. He surprised us when he arrived, Thomas. We'd been led to believe he was an arrogant and rude individual, only to find the young man you met. Would it surprise you to know he wants to become a psychologist? He's worried it won't happen because of his involvement in the shoplifting spree. That outcome depends on the prosecuting attorney, whether they accept he had little choice if he didn't want to continue being beaten."
Thomas slowly shook his head at Jane's words. "They can't be that stupid, Jane, not to see he had little choice in stopping the beatings." He then added, "Yeah, given his demeanor, I can see him as a psychologist, an outstanding psychologist. Well, if you don't have any more questions, I better be going. Jill will keep me informed about Toby's progress, then we can get to work helping him."
Jill put her arm around Jane's shoulders, leaned into her, and kissed her on her cheek. "I better go too, Janie. I have two appointments this morning and need to get ready for them. I like how well he's healing so will see him again in three days. If he still looks good then, I'll stretch out the days. As usual, if anything comes up, call me immediately. Otherwise, don't let him do anything that over-stretches his skin." She gave Jane another kiss before the three stood up and Jill and Thomas followed Jane to the study door. Jane opened the door and allowed the two to exit the study first, closing the door behind her after walking out of the study. She walked with them to the front door, unlocked it before opening it and bidding the two goodbye. Jane watched until they got into Jill's car, and Jill backed out of the driveway. Jane and Jill waved at each other before Jane closed and locked the front door, happy something could be done for Toby.
Before Jane had a chance to turn around and return to the study, a pair of arms went around her waist and she felt a chin rest on her right shoulder. "So, will Thomas be able to do something for Toby? Or, as I suspect, it's too early to form a working plan?"
Jane leaned her head into Sherry's left cheek, and reached up with her right hand to gently stroke Sherry's right cheek. "Let's go into the study and discuss what Thomas told me," Jane said to Sherry, stroking her dear friend's right cheek again. Sherry lightly kissed Jane on her right cheek, lifted her chin off Jane's shoulder, and took her hands from around Jane's waist. After letting Jane turn around, Sherry took Jane's left hand and they walked together to the study.
Opening the study door, Jane pulled Sherry into the study with her, stopping to let Sherry close the door behind them. Jane began speaking as they walked over to the table. "Right now, there's nothing Thomas can do until Toby's body has completely healed," she told Sherry, pulling out a chair on the window side of the table and sitting down. As Sherry pulled out a chair on the opposite side of the table, directly across from Jane, Jane told her, "Because of the severity of the scarring, he doesn't want to opt for surgery right off because they'd have to come up with a way to deal with his entire back. He's worried surgery would cause Toby to end up looking like a patchwork quilt. His initial assessment is to use what he called scar cream, it's specifically made to help lessen the appearance of scars. But as he said, Toby's body would need to completely heal, and he'd have to present his assessment to his team."
Jane had her hand folded in front of her on the table as she spoke. Sherry reached across the table and took Jane's hands, asking, "So, love, how are you doing? Do you still want to go bastard hunting, or are you content to let the experienced hunter lead the way?"
Jane smiled at Sherry's hunting reference, replying, "If I let myself, I'd be happy to hunt down those bastards and remove them from the face of the Earth. But what would happen to those boys Ruth sees who are redeemable if I did that? She'd have no choice but to send them to juvenile detention, where they'd be sucked deeper down the wrong road. No, Sherry. I've decided to let the experienced hunters, as you put it, take the lead and do what they do best, while I do what I do best. Though I will admit something to you, I feel lost."
Sherry gave Jane a questioning look before asking, "Lost how?"
Jane took a deep breath, sighed, then explained her feelings to Sherry. "Sherry, when Marie and I have a new boy with us, we have to get him to do what he's told when he's told without complaining. As you can imagine, being told he's going to be presenting as a girl, wearing all girls clothing, every type of girls clothing, will shock him. And naturally, he will balk, complain, or dig in his heels and flatly refuse to do so. He learns all of this only after I have acquired his word of honor to do what he's told when he's told and not complain. So, when he throws a fit because he's about to be presenting as a girl, I throw his word of honor back into his face, challenging his ego with it. I also threatened to send them home dressed as they are, you can imagine how that went over with them. That usually had the desired effect, and we had little to no trouble with that boy doing what he was told. However, some of our boys did complain even after giving us their word of honor, which resulted in consequences for that boy, usually more of the same but a touch worse."
Just as Jane was about to continue her explanation to Sherry, the study door opened and Marie walked into the study carrying a tray on which sat a pitcher of water and several glasses. She sat the tray on the end of the table, reached out and patted the women's hands, turned, and left the study, closing the door behind her. Sherry had watched as Marie walked across the study, sat the tray down on the table, then left the study. She shook her head, then told Jane, "You know, the way she always shows up when she's needed, does make it seem mystic. And, if I didn't know better, I would believe she is psychic."
Jane chuckled before saying, "Well, let's keep our secret between us. We don't want our boys to learn they are being watched."
"Okay," Sherry began, "You have explained how you normally work, so what's got you feeling lost?"
Sherry watched as Jane pursed her lips, knowing this was a sign Jane was organizing her thoughts. "When Frank arrived, Marie and I began our usual program. When I awoke Frank, I could tell he was scared, but only recently discovered why he was scared; being sent back to Agnus scared him. Because Frank was scared, it became easy to have him give me his word of honor and do what he was told when he was told. But he just went through the motions, he seemed dead inside. Nothing Marie and I tried sparked him in any way. Then Charles arrived, which started to anger me because I'd swore never to have another Kenneth in my home, though Ruth explained she had little choice except to let Strom take him to Federal Court and add additional charges. Charles spotted Francis as a Frank right off, thanks to his being given dispensation to take an Anatomy and Physiology course at a University near his home. Plus, he already knew about Pettycoat Punishment because of a paper he had to write for a class and came across the reference. Do you see that chair over there," and Jane pointed to the straight-back chair sitting against the far wall. "When our new boys come into the study to meet with me, I have them sit in that chair I then have sitting in front of my desk. Oh, Sherry, that's the most uncomfortable chair you'd ever sit in. The seat is completely flat, like sitting on a board. The back is completely straight, making the boy sit up straight. You might tolerate it for a few minutes, but my time with the boy is calculated to last long enough so he starts to find the chair uncomfortable. At that point, he wants nothing more than to get out of the chair, so getting him to give me his word of honor is his way of doing just that."
Jane stopped talking and reached for the pitcher of water, pouring water into two glasses. She offered one to Sherry before taking the other and taking a long drink. "After a few minutes, Frank was squirming while sitting in that chair and quickly gave me his word of honor. But Charles was different, the uncomfortable nature of the chair didn't phase him. All through our talk, he sat there ramrod straight, never once fidgeting or squirming. I also found it interesting how he looked me directly in the eyes, never once shifting his eyes away from mine. As we talked, he said something I could latch onto and use to my advantage. His parents told him experience is the best teacher, and I milked it for what it was worth. I pointed out how being one of my girls was an experience he'd get nowhere else, unless someone had a costume party, and he ended up going as a girl. I kept emphasizing that point, and he eventually decided to become one of my girls. And then he did something a student would only do to their sensei, he gave me a ritual bow, pledging his honor to me. Since that time, he has never refused to do what he was told, though, at the salon and The Style Shoppe, he was scared when he found out what he'd be doing; afraid he'd be seen for a boy dressed as a girl. Fortunately, Carolyn at the salon, and Gale at The Style Shoppe, reasoned with him, asking if he wasn't perceived only as a cute girl when he was at the Mall. He couldn't deny it, as the reaction of a few proved they thought he was a cute girl. Oh, Sherry, I do have something you must see, and I hope you're a wise woman who carries a spare pair of panties with you. Because after watching the video, you may need them. And if you spread what I'm about to tell you, you and I are going to the pond and you're going swimming. After watching Charlotte walk the runway dressed in all-black lingerie, I so wished Art was here when I got home."
Sherry laughed with a surprised look on her face. "Why, Jane Thompson. You mean to tell me one of your girls got your motor running after she did her best doing what you told her to do? Oh, this I gotta see.
They both pushed their chairs back, stood up and Sherry followed Jane to her desk. Jane sat down in the high-backed chair, pulled out a set of keys, and unlocked the security drawer. Pulling the drawer out farther than normal, she removed a panel that appeared to be the back of the drawer. Reaching into the opening, she extracted a long wallet-type case. After opening the wallet-type case, it turned out to be a thumb drive storage case. Taking out the highest-numbered thumb drive, Jane inserted it into a USB port in the computer, opened a file labeled, Charlotte, found the video she wanted, and started it playing. As Sherry watched the video, while standing behind Jane, she watched as Charlotte modeled several styles of dresses and swimwear before she watched her model lingerie. When it came to the part Jane told her about, Jane smiled when Sherry said, "Oh, my, gawd! Where did she learn to work a runway like that? Wait, I know that movement, and that one. She's doing Katas as she walks. My, gawd, she is so hot doing that."
"Look at the women in the audience. And the men and boys watching from the Mall. She that woman there," and Jane pointed to a woman in one shot of the video. "See how she's fanning herself while others are sitting calmly? See that boy right there," pointing to a boy who had just grabbed himself before rushing off toward the men's room. Or those two men there," pointing out two men not exactly grabbing themselves but not exactly not grabbing themselves either, before they too rushed off. More women were fanning themselves, and more men and boys grabbing themselves, but they were out of the camera's frame. That was the most sensuous walk any of my girls have ever done, and it had some profound effects on the viewers."
When the video ended, Jane heard Sherry say, "Oh, damn it," before Sherry hurried out of the study. She came back several minutes later, only to find Jane laughing when she came back into the study. "I'm so glad to be one of those wise women you asked about, I couldn't believe how wet I got watching the last of that video. If you spread what I'm about to tell you, we'll see who goes swimming in the pond. But I'm going to need some copious amounts of TLC when I get home, regardless of the time."
Jane started laughing again, before telling Sherry, "Don't say I didn't tell you so. Brenda told me after the show was over, she needed some loving when she got home. And I've no doubt several women in the audience had the same thought as Brenda, given how they reacted to what Charlotte was doing on the runway."
Sherry walked over to the table, poured more water into her glass, and drank three-fourths of the water before sitting down in her chair. "Whew… that was some video, but let's get back to Frank. You said he was just going through the motions before Charlotte arrived. How did things change when Charles arrived?"
Sherry watched as Jane removed the thumb drive from the computer and returned it to the storage case. After Jane closed the case, she put it back into the compartment built into the drawer, returned the panel before she closed and locked the drawer, then pushed her high-backed chair back and stood up. As she slowly walked toward the table, she began telling Sherry the effect Charles had on Frank after his arrival. "After Charles accepted my proposal to become one of my girls, Marie took him to his bedroom and gave him girl instructions. We ran him through our usual routine, having her come back to the study for my inspection. It was also our routine to have the girls walk five circuits of the study with a book balanced on their heads, needing to start the count over should they let the book fall to the floor. Charlotte had little trouble with walking the study and became better with time presenting as a girl. He even did well during his first visit to the salon, even giving Sandy better than she gave; he angered Sandy more than once. He picked up on Frank's emotions and attitude and talked with him about his attitude toward me and Marie. He read Francis the Riot Act about how he'd been treating me and Marie. About keeping her bedroom clean as a guest should do, and about doing the best she could regardless of what she had to do. Charlotte got through to Francis when Marie and I couldn't, and we couldn't because she thought of us as her Aunt Agnus. I'm ashamed to admit it, but I never considered how our treatment of her might have reminded her of her Aunt Agnus. It wasn't until Charlotte came to me and explained it all. Because of Francis, Charles, and Toby, our next boy will be vetted extremely well. We will know the circumstances leading up to his being with us. We will know his family background and how he was treated by his family. You and Susan will be involved, so we don't repeat the mistakes we made this time. While we will begin with our normal routine, and establish our authority over the boy, we will be very careful next time not to remind him of anyone who caused him to act out and be sent to us." Jane chuckled before saying, "And I said the same thing when Kenneth was with us, and here we are again with two boys who don't belong here. Maybe I should wait and see before getting out a hammer and chisel and carving our plans in stone."
Sherry reached across the table again and took Jane's hands. "Janie, could of, should of, and would of, are regrets everyone runs through. Some get so hung up on those regrets they never move forward. Others see them as learning experiences and continue with their lives. You have to decide how you'll treat your regrets and whether you'll let them mire you down or move you forward. Knowing you as I do, I don't think you'll let them hold you back. You may piss, moan, and groan, about them. And you may even get angry when even with your best efforts, what you don't want happens anyway. You're wiser than you were three weeks ago before Charlotte arrived. You've made a plan to counter any injustices with the next boy sent to you, but that doesn't mean things will go as you planned. Janie, sometimes you are so narrowly focused, you miss the little things standing right in front of you. You need to open yourself up and observe everything around you, especially the little things. Charlotte showed you how to see not only with your eyes but also with your heart. Question why a boy isn't responding as you want. Observe his behavior, his attitude, then ask yourself why. And if your head can't find an answer, use your heart. You're afraid to show others your big heart because you believe it will diminish your authority. Trust me, Janie, you radiate authority, so no one will dismiss your authority if you show them you also have a big heart. Whether you realize it or not, you've done that very thing with Francis and she still recognizes your authority, though I suspect it's better to say she respects you, respect you earned by not being her Aunt Agnus."
"Janie, didn't you tell me Charlotte asked you why she is here? Why fate put her here at this time? Look at everything she's accomplished since coming to Seasons House. She helped pull Francis out of her shell. She helped you see why Francis was just going through the motions. She helped a girl named Barbara when she was Carolyn's makeup model. She has helped Toby in ways I don't think either of them realizes yet. How many girls who visit the Mall do you think she saved from those assholes? Marie may not admit it, but she's even touched her as well. You, Marie, Francis, Toby, and everyone else she's encountered, have all been affected by her one way or another." Sherry looked into Jane's wet eyes and asked in a soft voice, "And hasn't it worked out as you wanted, developed as you hoped it would? Isn't Francis where you want all your boys to be before leaving you? If Charles hadn't come to Seasons House, you would still be Francis' Aunt Agnus. Francis would still be going through the motions. Barbara would still be a pariah because of her acne, Sandy would still be a terror to your girls, Charles would never have questioned his manhood when he didn't get aroused as he saw three beautiful girls naked, or have saved countless girls from those pigs. And what about Pinto, a horse you and Marie couldn't get to trust you two? And it took Charlotte, what, a few minutes to gain her trust?"
Jane dabbed her eyes as Sherry drank her water, then refilled both glasses. She waited until Jane had a drink before continuing. "Everything everyone has been experiencing is cause and effect, Janie. Think about it. If Toby's brother hadn't been involved in the shoplifting ring, he wouldn't have beaten Toby. If Toby hadn't been forced to shoplift, he wouldn't have been arrested at Taylor's department store. If Toby hadn't been arrested, he wouldn't have seen Charles and falsely accused him of being involved in the shoplifting, and Charles wouldn't have been sent to juvenile court. If Strom hadn't threatened to take Charles to Federal Court if Ruth didn't find him guilty, he wouldn't be here now. If Frank had been left with the Willows, he wouldn't be here now."
"You and Marie were frustrated with Frank's progress. You needed something but weren't sure what you needed. Carolyn needed something to help Barbara but wasn't sure what she needed. Sandy needed someone who wasn't afraid of her to give her better than they got. And it's likely the Mall staff were frustrated with those boys at the Mall but didn't know what they needed to stop them. However, Frank had to live with Aunt Agnus. Toby was beaten and forced to shoplift. He was arrested at Taylor's department store and falsely accused Charles. Ruth had to find Charles guilty to keep him out of Federal Court. And Charles was sent here where he chose to become one of your girls and an answer to the problems all of you were facing. Cause and effect, Janie. And if Charlotte hadn't gone ballistic, I wouldn't be here now to help all of you. Because you wouldn't have needed my help. Cause and effect, Janie."
It was Jane this time who reached across the table and took Sherry's hands in hers. "I never thought to look at current events that way, Sherry. It does, though, answer Charlotte's question to me. We needed her here at this particular time. We needed her skills and the heart she wears on her sleeve. Even I needed her counsel with how Marie and I were treating Francis. How can one person be the center of a pinwheel and have such an effect on the blades of the pinwheel? And from one so young, Sherry?"
Sherry gently squeezed Jane's hands, telling her, "Age has little to do with needs, Janie. All of you were in need, and Charlotte had all the qualifications needed to effect change. It's… that simple, Janie."
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Jane let go of Sherry's hands and sat back in her chair, looking at Sherry intently. "All of the events leading up to our current state had to have occurred at just the right time and in the right order. With your cause-and-effect idea, Sherry, you sound like a higher power set up everything. I'm dubious of that idea, Sherry."
With a gleam in her eye, Sherry answered, "Be dubious all you want, Janie. But we both know the events happened just as I laid out. 'A' led to 'B,' which led to 'C,' which led to, well, you know the rest. What if it hadn't been his mom's 35th birthday and he hadn't been at Taylor's that day? You want me to run through what wouldn't have happened again? I can if you want." Sherry laughed when Jane waved her hands back and forth in the air, signaling Sherry not to repeat her flow diagram. "I thought not," she replied to Jane's hand waving. "Janie, whether it was a higher power, fate, Karma, the stars aligning correctly, or anything else you want to site, the events lined up in the correct order for Charles to end up here with you. And provide the help you all needed at the moment it was needed."
Jane leaned forward, reached across the table, and took Sherry's hands. "You make a strong case, Sherry, the results can't be denied. However the events aligned, I'm thankful they did and we received the help we unknowingly needed. But right now, my love, I must see if my home is still standing." Jane looked deeply into Sherry's eyes, telling her, "I am still profoundly grateful for everything you did for me when I was a total mess. I'm profoundly sorry for what I put you through during that time. I can only offer you my undying love and eternal respect, and be there any time you are in need."
They both reached up and wiped the tears off the other woman's face. When Sherry could speak, she told Jane, "I couldn't let anything happen to you back then, Janie. You were a need I had to have at the time, a life-saver if you will. I may not have shown it then, but I was a real mess inside. Needing to keep you from self-destructing helped me pull myself together enough to finally be rid of the mess inside of me. I don't think Jill would have gone on to medical school if it hadn't been for your needs. She may never tell you, but she was messed up more than I was. Caring for you, being there for you, helped her focus on someone besides herself. And in that moment, she had a realization that helped her pull herself together. We may be even more grateful to you and you are with us. We're never going to leave you, Janie, until our times come. If you need us, we'll drop everything and be here as quickly as we can." They again reached across the table and wiped the additional tears sliding down their faces.
They were silent for a few moments, staring into each other's eyes as they held hands across the table. Jane finally broke the silence by saying, "Well, I better go inspect my home. No telling what those kobolde (goblins) have been up to."
Still holding hands, they rose from their chairs together and continued holding hands as they walked to the study door. When they reached the study door, and before Jane opened it, they turned to each other and embraced. Looking into each other's eyes, they told each other, "I love you so much," before kissing the other on the cheek. As Jane released Sherry, turned, and opened the study door, Sherry said, "Would you please have Toby come and see me? He's worried about how to handle what people think of his scars." Jane nodded, then left the study, leaving the door open and Sherry standing at the door.
Sherry was lost in thought when she felt a light tap on her arm holding the doorknob on the study door. Shaking herself, she saw Toby standing in front of her, a big smile on his face. "I've only seen that look on someone's face when they are mulling over something they've said, and whether what they said was the right thing to have said. Care to talk about it? It might make you feel better?"
The smile on Toby's face was infectious, causing Sherry to smile. "Hey! I'm the psychologist here not you, at least not yet," and she gently tapped Toby on his nose. "Get in here and go sit down, you rapscallion." Sherry kept talking as Toby walked over to the table and as she closed the study door. "Do you realize everything about the current state of affairs has been cause and effect?" Sherry asked, as she started walking over to the table, sat down, and looked at Toby, who had waited until she sat down before he pulled out his chair and sat down. "It all started with you and your brother."
Toby gave Sherry a puzzled look, asking, "Me and my brother?"
"Yes, you and your brother. Think about it, Toby. If your brother hadn't been involved in that shoplifting gang, he wouldn't have forced you to help by beating you." Toby nodded his head. "You wouldn't have started shoplifting to save yourself from more beatings." Another head nod from Toby. "You wouldn't have been caught at Taylor's and falsely accused Charles." Another head nod. "And you and Charles wouldn't be here now. Neither would there be a price on your head. Cause and effect Toby."
Watching Toby closely, Sherry watched him grind his mental gears until the light came on behind his eyes. "And if all of the things you described hadn't happened, Charles wouldn't have helped everyone he's helped since he's been here."
Despite herself, Sherry clapped her hands, then said, "You got it in one, Toby. Francis would still be going through the motions instead of being open as she is now. Those boys Charlotte tangled with would still be running amuck at the Mall. If you didn't know, the girl she helped at the salon would still be hiding in the back because of her terrible acne. And your two guardians would still be treating Francis as they normally treat their girls."
She saw more gears grinding in Toby's mind before he said, "But… "
Leaning over the table, an excited smile on her face, Sherry said, "Go on. But what, Toby?"
He got a constipated look on his face before going on with, "But that would mean events would have had to happen in just the right order and at just the right time. Are you trying to say there was divine intervention involved?"
Hearing Toby state a logical conclusion, Sherry threw her hands up, clapped, cheered, laughed, and threw herself back into her chair all in one motion. In a sardonic voice, Toby asked, "Are you okay? You act like you just won a million-dollar jackpot or a trip around the world."
Laughing, Sherry threw herself forward, reached across the table, and took Toby's hands, the excited smile still showing broadly. "You are the million-dollar jackpot, that trip around the world, Toby. Given the little I told you, you reasoned out that events had to occur in a specific order, and at a specific time."
"Yeeaahh… okay so? Anyone could have figured that out."
Shaking her head, Sherry countered with, "No they couldn't, Toby. Most people don't think in a linear manner. Their thoughts are all over the map. It's like they're in one of those glass tubes on a games show, trying to grab as much of the wind-blown money as they can. They may eventually get there, but only after struggling to find all the pieces. You, on the other hand, saw all the pieces, and after carefully examining them, came to the only logical conclusion possible. If those events I described never happened, I wouldn't be here, you wouldn't be here, Charles wouldn't be here, and those having been helped would still need help. Now, as to your divine intervention question, who's to say? What are the odds of everything lining up and falling into place at the right moment and… at the right time?"
Answering, Toby said, "Probably as likely as flipping a quarter into the air and it landing on its edge and not falling over. But it all sounds so, I don't know, mysterious. If you watch life around you, it's chaotic, unorganized, random, unpredictable. Oh, some things can be predicted, and are accurately predicted, but for the most part, it's like throwing a handful of confetti into the air and trying to determine where every piece will land, during a strong wind."
Still smiling, Sherry said, "Good analogies, Toby, but for whatever reasons, things came together at the right moment, and at the right time, it all did happen. And personally, I think there was a big hand involved." Toby smiled after Sherry gave her personal opinion, then heard, "I'm afraid I got us sidetracked from the reason I want to speak with you. You wanted to know how to deal with people who question all the scaring on your body."
Sherry watched as Toby presented an uncomfortable expression on his face. "What do I tell them when they ask? I could be rude and tell them it's none of the damn business, but I couldn't be rude to someone asking an innocent question. Do I tell them the truth, make up a story, or just ignore them? I've seen my back. I know no matter what Thomas and his team can do for me, I'm going to have scars on my back. And… " Toby paused, looking down at his hands being held by Sherry. "And what do I tell a girl I might want to be with? Will those scars turn her off? Will I be a Quasimodo to her?"
Sherry reached up and gently wiped the tears now staining Toby's cheeks. Taking his hands again, she told him, "Esmarelda learned the truth about Quasimodo, the big heart he had despite his deformities. She looked past the ugliness others saw and saw a heart of gold, and a mind to match. He wasn't allowed to use his mind because it was equated with his ugliness. Many girls will take one look at the scars you have and go running into the night, screaming as they run. But the girl meant for you will be your Esmarelda. She will look past what your body holds and see the heart and mind you possess. And, how handsome a young man you are. Again, it's my personal belief I'm telling you now, but I believe we all have that special someone waiting for us, and waiting to meet us. But sometimes, because of something happening in our lives, we miss that appointment and the opportunity to meet that person. We allow what happened to us limit our actions. We hide ourselves away, letting life pass us by. Missing opportunity after opportunity until it's too late."
Sherry stopped speaking, picked up her glass of water, and took a long drink before she continued speaking. "Toby, it isn't about the assholes who'll be rude and ask rude questions about your scars. Or about the innocent questions you'll receive or those who stare from a distance. It's about you, Toby, and how you choose to handle all of this. You can hold your head up and tell the assholes where to go. You can be kind and explain it to the one asking the innocent question. And those who haven't learned not to stare, you can ignore them and go on about your business. Or, you can let others see how self-conscious you are about your scars whenever you're out in public. They may see the scars on your legs if you're wearing shorts, but unless you walk around without a shirt, or you're an exhibitionist and go buck naked, no one will see your back or butt. Except, maybe… that one girl who becomes your steady. The one meant just for you. Have I answered your questions, Toby? Have I helped you see how it isn't about others and their responses, but your choices that matter? There are plenty of people who've lost arms and legs, or the ability to walk, or have terrible burn scars, who have got on with their lives despite their losses or appearances. You can do the same, Toby, if you choose to do so."
Toby was quiet after what he heard from Sherry, the occasional tear sliding down his cheeks. Then, softly, he said, "You make it sound so easy, Sherry. Just as water rolls off a duck's back."
Reaching across the table again, she took his hands then replied, "Oh, no, sweetheart. No no no no, that's not what I'm saying. I've counseled many who were in your position, and I know it won't be easy. What I'm telling you is that it's your decision how you'll respond or how you'll carry yourself. Toby, I've seen an extremely confident young man the entire time I've been here and around you. Like Jane exudes authority, you exude confidence. People see it in you, you practically radiate confidence. Why, your confidence radiates so brightly, you could walk down the street on a moonless night and not need a flashlight."
Sherry chuckled when she watched as Toby rolled his eyes and shook his head. "Gads, Sherry, you want me to get you a wider brush? The one you're using is a tad small."
Smiling, Sherry playfully swatted Toby's right hand, replying, "Yes, I know I'm laying it on thick, Toby. But it's all true. Jane, Marie, Jill, Susan, even the girls would agree with me. You. Exude. Confidence." Sherry punctuated each word by gently tapping Toby's left hand. "You may be shaking on the inside, but outside, no one notices. I'll tell you something to drive the point home. Not too many days ago, Jane was going through a rough patch. She was sent riding and her mare took her to the pond. She was explicit in telling Jane to get off and sit on the bench at the pond. It was the fish that got Jane's attention with their antics, as they made ripples in the pond, then ducking back under the water afterward. It was their way of telling Jane to let the ripples pass over her and continue on with her life. Let those who have no real interest in your life say what they want. Let their words pass you by and continue on with what you're doing. Choose not to care what they have to say, but neither let them walk all over you."
Toby let go of Sherry's hands, stood up, and walked around the table to stand in front of the window. "You've given me a lot to think about, Sherry. So much, in fact, it's making my head hurt."
Getting up from her own chair, Sherry stepped behind Toby, gently put her arms around him, before saying, "I'm sorry, Toby. I know I gave you a lot of information to process. But I have faith in you, Toby. I know, if you choose, you can stand tall and walk through another hell storm and come out the other side even stronger. Come on, we better get you back to the library, or wherever Jane wants you to go."
Sherry walked Toby to the study door, her arm around his shoulder. "For now, Toby," she said as they walked. "Before you go off the deep end with worry, wait until you see how Thomas' treatment helps you. You may discover you have nothing to worry about from others. I know, I know, it sounds easy, doesn't it? It can be if you decide to let it be easy." When they reached the study door, Sherry opened it and asked, "Would you please ask Charlotte to come and see me?" Nodding his head, Toby walked out of the study and to the library. Talking to herself after Toby left her, she told herself, "A lot of things are easier said than done, aren't they, Sherry?"
Brightening as she saw Charlotte walking toward her, Sherry called out, "Are you ready for another session with me, Charlotte?" Charlotte answered Sherry's question by giving Sherry a Galic shrug before she walked into the study. Sherry closed the study door and followed Charlotte to the table. After the two sat down, Sherry asked, "Do you have any more ghosts in your past, Charlotte? Anything from school or elsewhere?"
Watching Charlotte think about her questions, Sherry picked up her glass of water and took a long drink. She filled her glass, then poured a glass of water for Charlotte. Because of previous sessions with Charlotte, Sherry could tell that Charlotte was ready to give her an answer. "Sherry, except for those two times I finally got out into the open, I can't think of anything else from school hiding in the shadows. I do, though, feel sort of bad about what I had to do to James Conner the day this whole thing started. Even though I know I was only defending myself, I hate it when I have to hurt someone."
Sherry heard a creaking sound in her head, a realization Charlotte had just opened a door for her. "And how do you feel about the boys at the Mall you hurt? Do you regret what you had to do to them?"
Frowning, Charlotte sat there examining her feelings about what she had to do to those boys at the Mall. She looked at Sherry and said, "I wish it didn't have to happen, Sherry. But I was just defending myself and Aunt Jane."
Boring into Charlotte's eyes, Sherry said, "That isn't what I asked you, Charlotte. I asked how you 'feel' about what you did. You're evading the question again, Charlotte. Why?"
Charlotte didn't try to pull her hands away when Sherry reached across the table and took her hands. That episode in her life had been brought out into the open and she no longer feared someone holding her hands. "You told me you'd been trained by people I'd never heard of, so I imagine during your training they taught you to disassociate your feelings when dealing with an attacker?" Watching Sherry nod her head, Charlotte continued. "I was taught the same during an attack. While my senseis sparred with me, during the times they wanted me to learn not to let my feelings dictate how I fought, I got my butt kicked multiple times because I'd get mad while we sparred. Even after the sparring ended, I'd be furious because I couldn't do what I wanted to do as we fought. Then one night, my dad was there watching as I sparred with one of my senseis and saw how mad I got as we sparred and afterward. After I'd changed and we were leaving the dojo, he chuckled after I walked right by him and out of the dojo, still fuming over my failure that night. We didn't go right home but stopped off at an ice cream shop; dad knows I'm a sucker for ice cream when I'm angry. After getting our ice cream, we sat down at a table and because I was still mad, I was eating my ice cream like tomorrow wouldn't come. Dad reached across the table and put a hand on my right hand, stopping me from putting the next spoonful in my mouth. Then he told me something I hadn't considered. He said, 'You're trying to run before you've learned to roll over. A baby lies on their back for a long time, then one day, they do something that helps them roll over. The parents put them on their back the next time and they roll over again. Now when they're put on their back, they roll themselves over and lie on their stomach. Then one day, they do something and they end up on their knees. Of course, they fall down the first few times but eventually stay on their knees. Then one day they move an arm or a knee and bring the other arm or knee up to steady themselves and end up slowly moving from place to place on their knees. They just learned to crawl. Then one day they find a couch or chair, and pull themselves up to a standing position. (The first time you did that, you let out a happy squeal before plopping down on your butt.) The baby plops down over and over until they finally get the hang of keeping their balance. Well, once they discover their balance, they have to be watched like a hawk because they then start using whatever they can hold onto and start walking everywhere. Then one day they discover they no longer need the support of a couch, chair, or anything else because they learned to balance while walking unaided. That's when the fun really begins. It starts slow at first, but eventually, they're running all over the house, and they're fast, Charles. And because they now can walk, anything you don't want them getting into has to be locked or put away where they can't get into it. Charles, you're trying to run before you've learned how to roll over. I was the same way during my first several court cases. It wasn't until one of the older partners in the firm I was with, sat me down and explained what I've just explained to you. As I started practicing rolling over when I entered the courtroom, I got better as a lawyer. Then the day I learned how to run, the minute I entered the courtroom, I'd left my personal feelings and attitude out in the hallway.'
"I thought long and hard about what dad told me that night, about how it all made sense if you needed to be completely focused while doing something. It was hard at first, I'd still got mad, but gradually, over time, I learned to run. So the only answer I can give you to your question about my feelings over what I did, can only be after it was all over. Because when someone attacks me, I lock my feelings away and become focused solely on the attacker. I just wish I didn't have to hurt them at times. I wish they'd listen to me as I try to talk them into going away. I tried to do that to the kid I eventually slammed into the window of that store. Or when those boys blocked me when I was looking in a store window. He tried to touch my face, then got mad because of what I initially did to him and tried to punch me. We tried to reason with Peter and those other two boys outside the Mall that one time, but all four didn't like some girl, or woman, telling them what to do. So, they got hurt."
Letting go of Charlotte's hands, Sherry reached up and wiped the tears Charlotte was shedding. Sitting back in her chair after wiping tears from Charlotte's cheeks, she looked at the hurting boy sitting in front of her presenting as a girl. Her mind was racing, looking for a way to approach Charles to make him see it wasn't wrong to hurt someone in defense of yourself or another person. She thought of an idea and decided to see if it would work. "Charles," Sherry said softly, "Let's go over what you had to do and see if there was another way you could have handled those situations, okay?" Seeing Charles nod his head, she began. "James Conner put his hand on your shoulder without identifying himself and you put him on the floor with your knee on the back of his neck and his arm twisted up behind his back. Instead of just putting you into the holding room, he shoved you in the room and followed you, closing and locking the door behind him, intent on making you confess to your involvement in the shoplifting. He thought he'd intimidate you with a police baton, which you eventually used to not only break his left collarbone but the ulna and radius in his right forearm."
"Now you're here at Seasons House, volunteering to be one of Jane's girls. She takes you to the Mall so you can experience what many girls your age experience from the pigs that roam such Malls. The first pig is deaf and ends up being slammed into the window of a store you were in front of. He tries it with another girl and you point it out to the Mall security guards. The next boy tries to touch you, only to end up on his knees with his hand painfully bent backward. He doesn't like that, does he, so when the security guards are busy with his two friends, he tries to punch you, only to have you knock him out. Then the first boy is waiting for you outside the Mall, where he tries to attack you as you exit the Mall. He didn't count on Jane dealing with him, did he, and he again ends up on his knees with his hand in a painful position. Then the boy's so-called friends show up, and you and Jane deal with them, with you kicking one boy in the stomach, causing him to drop to his knees, with breathing troubles. So why were those boys assaulted by you and Jane?"
Having a stern frown on his face, Charles told Sherry, "We didn't assault anyone. We defended ourselves. And when I'm with Aunt Jane, no one is going to attack her."
Sherry's idea had worked, she got Charles to admit he was defending himself and Jane. "So, there wasn't another way you could have stopped those boys? You had to assault them?"
"Damn, it, Sherry! I told you, we defended ourselves! And, no, unless we wanted to be hit by those boys, there was no other way." Charles shot back.
Charles saw the smirk on Sherry's lips just as she said, "So, you hurt those boys to keep from being hurt, right? Nothing you could have said would have prevented them from hitting you, right? And neither you nor Jane instigated the conflict initially, right? Those boys chose how to react, right? They instigated your responses, right? You had to hurt them to end their assault on you and Jane, right? Neither you nor Jane went to the Mall to get your jollies off hurting those boys, right? It was you or them, defend yourselves or get hurt, right?"
Sitting back in her chair again, Sherry watched Charles mull over everything she just asked him. She chuckled when she saw his face drop, look at her, and tell her, "Ya, know. You're a sly piece of crap, Sherry. You wind me up, then push me in a direction that makes me see the point you're trying to make. Damn, you're good, woman." Sherry laughed for a few moments before Charles continued speaking. "I see your point, Sherry. We couldn't have said anything to those boys to stop their attacks on us, their egos had been assaulted by a girl and a woman. They couldn't let the assault on their egos go unchallenged, so they attacked us, causing us to defend ourselves. They got hurt, but it was their own doing, they bit off more than they were able to chew. And because we hurt them while defending ourselves, we, rather I, shouldn't feel bad they got themselves hurt. Right?"
"That's right, Charles. You got it in one. You were not taken to the Mall to kick ass and forget about names, though had you done that, you might have had to deal with one angry tiger, and I feel you could have dealt with that tiger. But it's what happened while you were there. So you have no reason to feel sad because someone attacking you was hurt during the attack. However, if during those attacks, you accidentally hit someone not involved in the attacks, then feeling sad they were accidentally hit would be a justifiable reaction. And you should feel sad. But you have no reason to feel it was unjust to hurt someone when they attacked you."
Taking a drink of her water, Sherry broached another subject. "Now, I have another question for you. Thinking back to the two times in elementary school, when those two boys shoved your head into the toilet and put you into that urinal, were you angry at those boys for what they did to you?"
Throughout her career, Sherry had honed her observation skills to the point she could determine what a person was thinking about after she asked them a question if she'd met with them more than once. As she watched Charlotte after her question, Charlotte's expression told Sherry she was thinking back to the time in elementary school. After that expression was one telling Sherry Charlotte was talking to herself, asking herself the question Sherry asked. And now came the expression that told Sherry she was ready to answer the question. "I'm not sure, Sherry. I wasn't happy about what they did to me, though in the end, they paid the price. But I can't remember being angry with them. Why would you ask such a question, Sherry? Have I been acting angry because subconsciously I'm still upset over what happened?"
Looking at Charlotte with a critical eye, Sherry asked, "Have you? Are you aware of recently acting angry? Do you feel angry at times because something reminds you of that time? And what made you bring up your subconscious? Is that an area you're interested in pursuing?"
Again, Sherry watched as the expressions portrayed by Charlotte told her how she was thinking and about what. Then Charlotte's 'I'm ready to speak' expression arrived, followed by Charlotte saying, "I don't think I've been acting out because of being angry over what they did to me at that time. I was angry at Toby when he first arrived, all because he lied about my involvement in the shoplifting at Taylor's. But after seeing what he'd been going through just to survive, I lost what anger I originally had. As to bringing up my subconscious, yes, it's something I'm interested in pursuing. I want to attend medical school and specialize in psychiatry, it's a strong desire I've had for a number of years. When I'm not reading ahead in my classes while in the library, or reading material I'd take in my sophomore, junior, or senior years, I read what the library has on psychiatry. I've even gone through everything the library has on medicine. As I once said, I received a dispensation from our local University to take Anatomy and Physiology, so if/when I get to University, those two courses are out of the way. And before you ask, I received straight 'A's' in both courses. Would you care to hear my dissertation about those two courses?"
Laughing, Sherry relied, "Gawd, no, I had to work my butt off to get through both of those courses. I aced them, but have no want to remember them. So, psychiatry, huh? Why not psychology? You won't rack up a huge debt, and you'll be practicing much sooner. With psychiatry, you have what, four years at University, another four or five years of medical school, then your residency? So it will be what, nine or ten years before you start practicing?"
Charlotte shook yer head, saying, "More like twelve years. There are four years of college or University, four years of medical school, and then four years in a Psychiatry residency program; I looked up the requirements when I realized I was interested in that field. But I don't think it will take me that long to get through University and get my degree. You see, I looked up the courses I'd need to take at our local University to get my BS. Then, during the summer, I'd go to our public library and check out what books they had for those courses. And if the library didn't have those books, dad would go with me to the University library or the University bookstore and we'd buy the books I'd need for those courses. Sherry, I honestly believe I could test out of almost all of the courses I'd have to take to get my BS. There are some I'd have to take because of labs being involved. But the bookwork classes, I could test out in all but a handful of courses because I couldn't find the required books anywhere."
Sitting quietly after what Charlotte told her, Sherry planned her next set of questions. When she spoke, her first question was, "Do you think it wise to rush through school to obtain your BS? I've no doubt, given what I've seen you do here, you could test out of those courses you've already studied. But what about being in a class and allowing others to hear your ideas and answers? Ideas and answers they never considered or ideas and answers that might help them at some point. Then there are the individual professors and instructors. Might you learn something from what they have to say on the subject they're teaching?" Sherry leaned across the table before saying, "And why in thunder are you in such a rush to get where you want to go? You want to go into a field dealing with people's lives by delving into their minds. If you rush through your higher education, you might miss something critical you may need in helping someone one day. Charles, education isn't only about bookwork and/or labs, it's absorbing knowledge through observations. I've seen how observant you are and how well you can read a situation. Use that ability as you attend your schools, learn about behaviors by observing behaviors. Watch your classmates, your instructors, life as you walk between classes, when you're at the student union, or in the cafeteria. You'll learn just as much, if not more, by observing the people around you."
Leaning back in her chair again, she watched as Charlotte thought about everything she'd said, then chuckled and said, "Jeeze, Sherry. You think I could answer one question before you act like a Gatlin gun with more questions?"
Before Charlotte could say more, Sherry leaned across the table and asked, "So you want one question at a time, huh? Okay, first question. When you defended yourself from those three boys, did you think of them as the two boys who stuck your head in the toilet and put you into the urinal?"
Charlotte sat quietly for a long time before saying, "Thinking back, I don't remember thinking that, Sherry, but if I did subconsciously, I wouldn't know, would I?"
"No, Charlotte, no you wouldn't. But it is something you need to guard against. There something called a Root cause, ever heard of it?" When Charlotte shook her head no, Sherry started explaining it to her. "Let's take your not wanting praise because of what happened to you in elementary school. You were embarrassed over what those two boys did to you so you shied away from anything you'd do where someone would praise you. The Root cause of you shying away from praise of any kind are the events that took place when you were in elementary school. You never dealt openly with them so they stayed buried, influencing everything you did in your life afterward. But we've dealt with them, brought both out into the open so you had no choice but to face them head on. While you seem to be handling being pulled into the shoplifting mess okay now, the more you talk about it with me the less of a chance it'd become your next Root cause for something that could happen later on. Now, to my next question, Charlotte, about rushing through higher learning. What are your answers to my previous questions, knowing the field you'll be entering?"
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
As Sherry watched, Charlotte's contemplative look said she was trying to come up with answers to Sherry's school questions. Sherry had a speculative feeling what Charlotte would tell her, when she told her, but right now the answers eluded Charlotte. As Toby had done, Charlotte got up from her chair, walked around the end of the table, and walked the short distance to the study window. She stood there silent, hands clasped behind her back. Sherry got up out of her chair, stepped to the window, and silently stood to Charlotte's right. "Kind of hard to answer questions when you don't know the 'whys' yourself, isn't it?"
The two stood there silently for several minutes, until Charlotte said, "Yeah, it is. And to tell you the truth, Sherry, I don't know why I want to get through everything as quickly as possible. I can't come up with a valid reason, I just feel this need to rush, Sherry. I can't see where it comes from, but it's there."
Turning to look at Charlotte, Sherry asked, "Aren't you rushing through the AP courses Susan is giving you? Couldn't that be the need you're feeling, unless you've always had the feeling? The need to get through as many AP courses as possible before going back to your high school?"
The study was again silent, the two gazing out the window. Sherry didn't have to see Charlotte's face to know she was again thinking about her questions. Charlotte leaned her head against Sherry's left shoulder, asking, "Can't you ask me simpler questions? Like the possibility of two plus two equalling more or less than four? Or if a rock has more mass than the earth? Or how it feels when you slam your toe into the leg of a chair? Ya, know, simple questions."
Sherry put her left arm around Charlotte's shoulder, pulled her toward her, then replied, "I might ask you simple questions if you were a simple-minded person. You are not a simple-minded individual, so you don't get simple-minded questions. I give you questions that require thought, which you are quite adept at doing. You may not have an answer because you're too close to the reason and can't see it. And it stems from the horrid schools the three of you attend." Charlotte looked up at Sherry, giving her a questioning look. "The three of you have asked to take AP courses at your respective high schools, only to have those morons tell you no. So now, when you have the opportunity to take AP courses, you three are flying through as many as you can before going back to your respective high schools, and the boring classes you're forced to take. I see that in all three of you. Only you, Charlotte, haven't stopped with just the AP courses, you're extending the need to rush through your courses to the University, and I dare say, Medical School, a place you can't rush through no matter how hard you try. You won't be allowed to rush through your medical or psychiatric residency because you'll first have to become a doctor before you can specialize in psychiatry. And you won't be allowed to rush through your psychiatric residency because you'll have a lot to learn in dealing with various mental problems. So, my eager friend, do what you can while you're here, but slow down after leaving Seasons House. Use every experience at the schools you attend to learn your craft. But for now, let's get you back to the library so I can snag Francis." With her arm still around Charlotte's shoulder, they both turned around and headed to the study door, where Sherry opened the door and together they walked to the library. Looking at each other and smiling, they both reached up and knocked lightly on the library door, before Sherry opened it and allowed Charlotte to walk into the library. Standing in the doorway, Sherry said, "Francis, how about you and I congregate for a few moments in the study? I'm sure you have some fascinating tales to tell me."
Frowning when Francis didn't look up from the book she was reading, Sherry started to walk over to Francis, only to hear Toby say, with a big smile on his face, "Hé, cerveau à l'égout, la dame te parle (Hey, brain down the drain, the lady is talking to you.)." Even his playful insult didn't stir Francis. However, when the pillow hit Francis in the head, she suddenly had a reason to look up from the textbook she was reading.
Looking up from the textbook after her head was pelted by the pillow, Francis first frowned then said, "What do you mean my brain is down the drain, you seau de guano de chauve-souris (bucket of bat guano?)?" When Toby pointed to Sherry, Francis, said, "Oh, hi Sherry. I didn't see you come into the library, I was rather busy, until that," and Francis pointed to Toby, the big smile still on his face, "interrupted me."
Despite herself, Sherry was laughing at the two teen's antics. When Francis had spoken to her, she asked, "You had your nose buried in that book and didn't hear me calling your name, or Toby speak to you. But after he got your attention with that pillow, you remembered what he'd said to you. How? Most people lost in what they're doing, as you were, can't remember anything someone says to them."
Francis gave Sherry a puzzled frown after she asked the question. Francis then looked at Toby and Charlotte, watching both shaking their heads no. "They can't? Hmm, that's weird. I've been able to do that as far back as I can remember."
Shaking her head after what Francis told her, she then said, "That's a remarkable ability, Francis. But right now, what say ye we doth venture forth to the room of the study?"
As if it had been rehearsed, all three teens groaned before face-palming themselves. Not wanting to miss a given opportunity, Toby asked, "Sherry. Doth thou partake immense quantities of The Bard as you sojourn the day? Should that be so, perhaps the métier (job) you engage in serves all better?"
Giving Toby her best Jane Thompson look, Sherry told Toby, "Thou presents thyself near close to the precipice and a fall. Thou should present your studies with as much interest." Then doing the mature, adult woman act, she stuck her tongue at Toby, before telling the laughing Francis, "Come on, Francis. Let's go blather, and leave these droll specimens of humanity." Francis was laughing so hard she couldn't stand at the moment.
Charlotte barged in with, "Hey! I'm just an innocent bystander here. Don't include me in with the âne déguisé en chèvre (donkey disguised as a goat.). We did not collaborate on the 'dothing.'"
What Sherry did next, caused Charlotte and Toby to laugh, and kept Francis laughing. She bowed as a Shakespiring male actor would bow, taking a step backward with one leg, bending over at the waist, while taking off his head covering. "Oh, malady, I beseech you to forgive this humble servant for believing thou to be in league with the âne déguisé en chèvre (donkey disguised as a goat.). I humbly excuse thou from any blame in the matter."
Then Toby did something to cause even Sherry to break out in laughter. Lifting his feet off the floor, he said, "It's getting mighty thick in here. You two better go before it spills out into the hallway."
Still laughing, Sherry waved for the still-laughing Francis to come with her. "Come on, Francis," Sherry said as she laughed. "Let's go have our talk." Sherry's laughter slowed to chuckles, as did Francis' laughter, as the two left the library."
As the two walked past the dining room, they heard chuckles coming from the kitchen. Francis then said something taking Sherry completely by surprise. "Guess they watched and heard our whole exchange in the library."
Sherry said nothing until they were in the study with the door closed. As they walked to the table to sit down, Sherry asked, "What did you mean by what you said just now, Francis?"
When she reached the table, Francis poured herself a glass of water, sat down, then drank half the water in the glass. Shrugging, Francis told Sherry, "Aunt Jane has cameras and microphones in the rooms her girls would use. I discovered them the first day I was here. I was sitting in my bedroom looking around the room when I spotted something odd near the ceiling of one corner of my bedroom. To get a better look at the odd thing near the ceiling in the corner, I acted as though I was inspecting my bedroom as I walked around the room."
Taken aback, Sherry asked, "And you never let on you knew about the cameras and microphones? Why?"
Shrugging again, Francis pursed her lips before saying, "When I first saw Aunt Jane at the train station, I could see her concern for me in her eyes. Even though she acted sternly, there was compassion shining in her eyes. Also, I was away from Aunt Agnus, thank goodness. Those two things helped me to respect Aunt Jane right off. Even after she used me against myself, and I ended up as Francis, this is her house, and because she is concerned about us, she has every right to place whatever she wants to look after us. And, I didn't want to upset her by letting her know I knew about the equipment."
Sherry admired the boy for thinking of the welfare of someone else, but he'd opened a door Sherry would gladly use. "But didn't you upset Jane by just going through the motions before Charlotte talked with you? If you initially recognized the care Jane had for you, shouldn't you have done your best for her before Charlotte came?"
Nodding, Francis asked, "What's the saying, Sherry? Hindsight is 20/20? I see now how I should have acted before my talk with Charlotte. But even though I respected Aunt Jane right away, she started reminding me of Aunt Agnus by the way she was treating me at the time. And my time with Aunt Agnus was a fresh open wound memory."
Recognizing there was a whole different side to Francis, Frank, she sat back in her chair and stared at the boy/girls sitting across from her. "Have you always had concerns for others, Francis… um… Frank?"
Shrugging again, Francis told her, "I don't go out of my way to hurt anyone, Sherry. I try to do what mom and dad told me when I do something. I try to consider how someone else will feel when I'm going to do something, or if I know something."
"You mentioned your mom and dad, Frank. What is it they told you?" Sherry saw the tears build up in Frank's eyes as she mentioned his mother and father. She sat up in her chair, reached across the table, and gently took Frank's hands. "It's okay, Frank. Tell me when you're ready. You obviously loved your parents very much, so it's no shame to cry when you think about them." And cry he did, causing Sherry to get out of her chair and walk around the table to take Frank in her arms. "It's okay, Frank. Let it out. I'm here for you."
The study door opened, and Jane stood looking at Sherry holding the crying Francis. Jane cleared her throat to get Sherry's attention, wanting to know if Francis was okay. Hearing the sound Jane made clearing her throat, Sherry turned her head to look at Jane. Understanding Jane's silent question, Sherry nodded, then mouthed, parents. Nodding her understanding, Jane quietly stepped out of the study and silently closed the door behind her. As Jane walked to the kitchen to speak with Marie, she became resolute in her decision to have their next boy speak with Sherry and to have Susan determine the boy's level of knowledge. They would also get a complete picture of the boy's life before coming to Seasons House. They were not going to be caught flat-footed again.
Back in the study, Frank had started to calm down, though still feeling the loss of his parents. It wasn't long before he told Sherry, "Yeah, I miss my parents, Sherry, and loved them an awful lot." He was quiet for a few more minutes before saying, "Mom and dad always told me to consider the feelings of others before I did or said something. They said I should put myself in the position of someone else and try to imagine how I'd feel if someone did or said something that'd hurt me. And I've always tried to do that Sherry, it's why I haven't told Aunt Jane I know about the cameras and microphones."
"You are a remarkable young man, Frank Winslow. In fact, all three of you are remarkable young men," Sherry told the boy still cradled in her arms. Marie had left the box of tissues sitting on the table from her visit with Sherry. Sherry reached over and removed two tissues, handing them to Frank so he could wipe his eyes.
Frank chuckled as he wiped his eyes. "Calling me a young man right now seems kind of silly, don't you think Sherry? I don't look anything like a young man right now. Although, when I leave Seasons House, I'll be that young man you spoke of."
Laughing, Sherry said, "Maybe you're right Frank, but you're still a remarkable person no matter how you look. Are you feeling better now?"
Nodding, Frank answered, "Yeah, I think so. There are times I miss my parents so much, Sherry. I often wonder how things would be if they hadn't been murdered. I know I wouldn't be here now, I wouldn't be Francis, not that it's been that bad. Being Francis is nothing compared to the ordeal Toby experienced. It's like the saying about having no shoes until the person sees a person with no feet. Their complaint then falls flat, just like any complaint I'd have about being Francis."
"Sometimes, Frank, it takes us witnessing something worse than what we're experiencing to remind us we aren't experiencing anything so bad. Something we haven't discussed, Frank, is your goals after high school. Do you know what you'd like to do with your life? Is there anything interesting to you at this point in your life?"
Seeing Frank's thinking face, Sherry waited until Frank was ready to answer her questions. When Frank was ready to speak, he began hesitantly before acting excited. "I have an interest in biochemistry, Sherry. I read an article on biochemistry I really enjoyed, then because of that article, I went through what the library at school had on the subject. I'd go to the public library when I could and read what was there. I had some questions after reading that article, and some ideas, but not enough education in chemistry to answer the questions or bring my idea forward. I tried to find answers, but I must be asking questions no one else has asked. Because of that article, I'd like to go into biochemistry so I can get answers to my questions and see if I can't bring my ideas forward."
Moving back to her chair, and looking at the once quiet boy, Sherry was impressed with his life choice. "Are you taking chemistry at school?"
Francis shook her head, saying, "Naw… I was told I'd have to take biology as a Freshman. When I asked when I could take chemistry, they said I might not be able to because of my grades. They didn't think I'd be able to handle the course in my Sophomore year. At the time, when I wasn't allowed to take any AP courses, and because of 'that woman,' I just didn't care anymore. So I did just enough to get by in all of my classes. As much reading as I've done on chemistry and biochemistry, I think I could test out of the chemistry class at our high school. Buutt… I don't think they'd even give me the opportunity."
Calming herself down, she told Francis, "Don't give up, Francis, you'll make it into biochemistry down the road. Things are in the works for the three of you. Is there anything else you'd like to discuss?" When Francis shook her head, Sherry let her leave, asking her to have Susan come and see her.
After getting up from their chairs, they walked to the study door. Just as Sherry started reaching for the doorknob, Francis turned toward Sherry and hugged her. Telling her, "I'm so glad you're here Sherry. You've really helped me deal with a lot of things."
Returning the hug, Sherry smiled as she told Francis, "I'm glad I could help you, Francis. I think once you got it all off your mind, you were able to do a lot better with your studies. Now, get going, and don't forget to ask Susan to come see me." Opening the study door, Sherry watched as Francis walked across part of the living room to the library. She had to calm herself down again, after hearing about Frank's school roadblocks.
Susan had a smile on her face as she walked toward the study, seeing Sherry waiting for her in the doorway. "Have you shaken all the cobwebs out of their heads?" Susan asked, reaching the study and walking through the open door.
After closing the study door, Sherry answered, "I think the worst of their problems are now out in the open and they're better able to deal with them. But I wanted to ask you, do you have any ideas about schooling for those three? I know the shoplifting mess has to be settled first, but I just thought… well, you're the educator and might have some ideas."
Instead of walking to the table and sitting down, Susan walked to the window and stood there looking to the outside world. Sherry walked to the window and stood next to Susan, waiting for Susan to answer her question. Susan did something she'd only seen little kids do when they've been caught doing what they shouldn't be doing, sliding a foot around on the floor. Still, Sherry waited. When Susan did answer her question, it came out like a little child trying to explain why they did something they knew shouldn't be done. "Weell… I've been talking to a few people, people I've known for some time. People in a position to make things happen. One person is on the State Board of Education, the other a member of the Board of Regents at a University. After I sent them the IQ scores you acquired, and my test results, they were more than a little pissed. And when I told them how the three had been treated at their respective high schools, a few times I had to pull the phone away from my ear. Or when I told them about Toby asking to be tested and being refused because it would upset the class dynamics. My friend at the University told me she'd give them full scholarships when they finished high school, she was that interested in those three. My friend on the State Board of Education thought it was time to have a talk with the principals at their respective high schools, maybe even make a few personnel changes. I cautioned them not to do anything at the moment, due to an ongoing police investigation into another matter. Warning them if they did anything at the moment, it could compromise the investigation. I said I’d keep in touch, letting them know when it was safe to do something for those three."
Sherry digested what Susan told her, asking, "Can you trust them not to say or do anything right now? Toby's in hiding, so any information gets out about his whereabouts, and they may send people here."
Susan turned to look Sherry square in the eyes. "Yeah, Sherry, I can trust them. It happened years ago when we were in college together. We went to a Frat party and a couple of guys… um… they were drunk. No, they were beyond drunk. Cornered me in the kitchen. They wouldn't let me leave. They… um… they started pawing me, feeling me up. I… I tried fighting them off but they were a lot bigger than I was. I must have screamed, or something, because the next thing I knew, both of them were lying on the floor out cold. When I looked up, my two friends were standing there, each holding a metal pot in their hands." Susan chuckled before saying, "Those two hit those two in the head so hard they dented the bottom of the pots. And then, as I watched, those two crazies completely undressed those two pigs and took their clothes with us as we left the party. Oh, yeah, and one of them wrote 'pig' on their chests with her lipstick." Susan turned back to the window and resumed looking at the outside world. After a few minutes, she said, "Yeah, Sherry, we can trust them."
Putting an arm around Susan's shoulder, Sherry said, "Oh, Susan. I'm so sorry to hear you went through something like that. Did you talk to anyone afterward, or did you report them to anyone?"
"Yeah, I reported them to the Dean of Students the next day. He told me it'd be my word against theirs, until I told him about my two witnesses. Once he heard their stories, he had no choice but to take action. Word got around what I'd done, and more women came forward to tell their stories about those two pigs. Not only did they get expelled, but the police had to be called because those two raped several of the women who came forward. Last I heard, both were sentenced to prison and labeled as sexual predators. I haven't a clue where they are today or what they're doing, but it was satisfying to know they served prison time." Silence lingered again before Susan said, "I did talk to someone, my mom. She was like you, I mean, she was in the same field as you. You know how angry you got when you found out the boy's IQs? I thought dad and I would have to tie her down after she heard what they'd done to me. She made even Jane's anger seem tame. If those two boys had been there after I told mom what they did, they'd be sitting down to pee the rest of their lives. Oh, Sherry, she was beyond angry. I'd never seen her so mad. I do miss her, though. You two would have got along famously. It was cancer, before you ask. Took all of us by surprise. Three months after she found out, she was gone. I think dad died of a broken heart, mom's death hit him hard. You would have liked my parents, Sherry. Those two would put Jill's pranks to shame. They were two peas in a pod, they were, Sherry."
Sherry kept her arm around Susan, as Susan let tears slide down her cheeks. Sherry wracked her brain for something to put Susan at ease, but came up short. They just stood there in each other's company, thoughts of lost ones running through their minds. There was a knock on the study door, causing both to turn at the sound. They watched as the door opened, and Jane stepped into the study. "Is everything alright, ladies? I wanted to inform you our noon meal is ready, if you two wanted to eat."
Sherry nodded her head, then told Jane, "Yeah, we're okay, Jane. Just going through some painful memories. We'll be out shortly." Nodding her head in understanding, Jane stepped backward and closed the study door behind her. Looking at Susan, Sherry asked, "You doing better? Want to go eat or talk more?"
Taking a shuddering breath, Susan answered, "Yeah, I'm okay. It was good to get that off my chest. We'd better get out there or they won't eat until we do." With Sherry's arm still around Susan's shoulder, and Susan's arm around Sherry's waist, they walked to the study door, opened it, and made their way to the dining room table.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
When they reached the dinner table, Toby was standing by their chairs, everyone else had been seated. Toby pulled out Sherry’s chair, helped seat her before pulling out Susan’s chair and seating her. He then walked to his chair, pulled it out, and sat down, bowing his head after sitting. Before Jane had a chance to speak, Sherry said, “If I may, Janie,” looking at Jane as she said it, “I have something I’d like to say.” With all eyes on her, Sherry told them, “After meeting with each of you several times, and seeing the progress you’ve all made, I believe it’s time for me to return to my practice. That isn’t to say I won’t be back to speak with each of you, just that I believe all of you are in a better place than before. I plan to come back once a week, or until you three,” and she pointed to the teens, “have gone home. If you need me urgently, I’ll come back sooner; Jane knows how to contact me. Evaluating all of you together, I find you’ve developed a little family, a family deeply concerned for each other. And you, Janie,” Sherry put her right hand onto Jane’s left hand, “have shown those three your heart without losing your authority and their respect for you.” Jane turned her left hand over and intertwined her fingers with Sherry’s. “The memories you have are just that, memories. Good or bad, they happened. They can’t be changed or altered, they are now part of you. Savor the good ones, let the bad ones wash over you, and get on with your lives. Don’t let the bad memories you carry with you rule your lives, all of you have so much to give to others. Now… how about we eat, I’m hungry.”
In the history of Seasons House, Jane’s dining table had always been one of decorum and proper etiquette. Young ladies sat up straight while they ate. They didn’t shovel food into their mouths, but took small bites and waited until they swallowed what was in their mouths before taking the next bite. Polite conversation carried on while they ate, specifically about the lessons they were working on. And for the first time in Seasons House’ recorded history, decorum, and etiquette were thrown to the wind in favor of hurling balled-up napkins at Sherry. Who either deflected or deftly caught them, knowing the meaning behind them and causing her to wipe her eyes. Jane gently squeezed Sherry’s hand, before letting go and beginning the meal by serving herself and passing the dish along. Sherry sat back and watched as the interplay occurred between them. Marie caught Sherry’s eye, nodding to her, silently telling Sherry she highly approved of the work Sherry had been doing while she’d been at Seasons House. The smile on Sherry’s face vanished as she got an elbow in the ribs from Susan, who sat there looking at Sherry with a smile on her lips and holding a plate of fried chicken.
“So, Susan. How are my wards doing with the lessons you’re providing? Have there been any problems?” Jane already knew how fast the three were moving through the lessons Susan was providing, it’s why she smiled at Susan after asking the question.
Susan’s right hand, holding a spoonful of broccoli, froze between the bowl of broccoli and her plate. Putting the spoonful back into the bowl, and setting the bowl on the table between herself and Sherry, she asked Jane, “Problems? What problems could there possibly be with my lessons?” Sherry eyed the bowl of broccoli sitting on the table next to Susan, and then Susan, as Susan spoke to Jane. Knowing it would be impolite at Jane’s table to help herself to the broccoli before Susan, Sherry sat there and stared at the oblivious Susan. “Aside from the fact my overall lesson plans were blown out of the water by the speed those three,” and she pointed to the teens, “flew through each course, and I’ve missed some much-needed sleep and some… um… other things. What possible problems could there be?”
Sherry looked from Susan to the bowl of broccoli sitting on the table next to Susan. She kept this up until Susan got annoyed and asked, “What in thunder are you doing?”
Face-palming herself, Sherry replied, “I’m waiting for you to stop blathering and help yourself to that broccoli, unless of course, you don’t want any.”
Susan’s face dropped at Sherry’s explanation. “Well, why didn’t you just help yourself while I spoke to Jane? And I don’t blather. I speak.”
Sherry shook her head, telling Susan, “Because, at Janie’s table it’s impolite to help yourself to a dish until the previous person has helped themselves or declined the dish. And you do too blather.”
Susan saw the smile on Sherry’s face and realized what she was doing, and decided to go along with Sherry, she answered, “I told you I don’t blather. I communicate, converse with, speak to, but I definitely don’t blather.”
Marie, Toby, Charlotte, and Francis, had a hand clamped over their mouths, trying not to laugh at the antics of Sherry and Susan. All four watched as Jane put her hand to her head, as she looked down while shaking her head from side to side, saying, “My gawd, I have two adult children sitting at my dinner table.” Looking up and dropping her hand, Jane said, “SUSAN, please take a spoonful of broccoli and pass the bowl on to Sherry. SHERRY, please take a spoonful of broccoli and return the bowl to the middle of the table. SUSAN, please take some of the bread sitting to your left and pass the plate to Sherry. SHERRY, please take some bread and return the plate to the middle of the table. Do you two understand my instructions, or do either of you need a detailed flow diagram to help you?”
Marie cracked first with a snort. The teens followed with first a snort then outright laughter. Those four were joined first by Susan then Sherry. And Jane sat there with a stony look on her face. When the laughter died down, Jane asked, “What did I do to deserve all of this at my dinner table?”
The six started looking at each other, a silent message passed from one to the other. At an unvoiced signal, they told Jane in unison, “Because we love you, Aunt Jane.”
As they all watched, Jane picked up her napkin and wiped her eyes, catching the tears ready to slide down her cheeks. It was Sherry who said, “Janie, have you ever read Callahan’s Crosstime Saloon©? If you haven’t, you should, because that’s what you have right here at this table at the moment. He helped a bunch of regulars become so comfortable with each other, they started opening up to each other. You have a group of people around this table, of various ages, who’ve become so comfortable with each other, that they opened themselves up to everyone. And from experience, I assure you, that’s an extremely rare occurrence. Savor it Janie, let it feed you, replenish you. Bask in its nurturing power.”
Reaching toward Jane with her right hand, Sherry took Jane’s left hand and intertwined their fingers. Jane sat silent for several moments, still wiping her eyes. When she was finally able to speak, she said, “We’d better eat, our food is getting cold.” She squeezed Sherry’s hand before letting go and eating the food in front of her. When Sherry looked around the table, Jane wasn’t the only one wiping her eyes. Smiling, she took the bowl of broccoli from Susan, helped herself, and sat the bowl of broccoli in the middle of the table.
When Jane was able to speak without a catch in her voice, she asked Francis, “Francis, I understand you’re taking a math course right now. How are you doing?”
Still chewing a bite of fried chicken, she swallowed the bite, then told Jane, “I’m doing better than I thought I would, Aunt Jane. When I’ve run into trouble with a problem, Susan and Charlotte have been helpful walking me through the thought processes of solving the problem. I’ve applied the same processes with other problems and have been able to work through the math book rather quickly. When I compared the help they provided to the help my high school math teacher offered, I realized my high school math teacher didn’t provide any help. When someone asked them to explain how something was done, because they didn’t understand what had been said, our teacher used the same explanation she initially used. Between Susan and Charlotte, I received two different explanations that pointed to the process of solving the problem.” Francis chuckled before continuing. “It was like the time I had trouble with the math you gave us, Aunt Jane. I didn’t understand factoring, so I asked Charlotte for help. Instead of using the problem itself, she asked me to list every combination that added up to 45. As I listed all the combinations, it suddenly dawned on me I was factoring 45. Once I realized that, I had no further problems working the problems in the book.”
Nodding her head, Jane told Francis, “I’m happy to hear that, Francis. And of the other courses you’re taking, how have they been?”
Jane again caught Francis with a bite of food in her mouth. After swallowing, Francis answered, “I’m halfway through World History, though it isn’t my favorite subject. I learned there was more stupid stuff that happened than good. I mean, why kill thousands of people just to take over as king, emperor, or warlord? Those still alive will hate the person because of what they had done, and will want that person dead. And if that person is killed or when they die, it starts all over again. It’s just so dumb, Aunt Jane. Then there’s the slavery. People are forced to work but treated like they’re nonhumans. Why, Aunt Jane? Those people were worked to death in most cases, causing more slavers to be sought. Again, doing this only angers those in slavery and causes them to plot against the slavers. And what’s the garbage of killing people because they are different in some way? It sounds like black and red ants killing each other.”
Jane was nodding her again, partly with understanding and partly with acknowledging Francis’ complete explanation. “I have to agree with you, Francis. History, no matter its form, can be dull if a person doesn’t have a burning interest in it. I also agree with you on the stupidity of killing thousands just to become the leader. You are also correct in your assessment of the attitude of those left alive. More than one leader was killed after a plot was devised, partly because of what the person had done and partly because the person was a terrible leader. Those who killed the leader didn’t count on a worse leader taking over. It became a vicious cycle, Francis. As to the killing of those who are different? It’s a mindset and a ploy, Francis. Some simply can’t tolerate someone who is different, and they only think of one way to deal with that hate. It’s also used as a ploy to churn up others so that person can eventually rise to power. If a person can get the majority of a society on their side, they have no trouble taking over, and doing whatever they want. What good did you discover during your reading?”
Francis brightened as she said, “Mathematics, science, clarification of the universe, cures for various diseases, a better understanding of the human body, an understanding of genetics, flight, all sorts of things we take for granted today. Many of those who dared to devel into those areas were shunned, arrested, or killed, all because those condemning them were ignorant of the work those people were doing. They also believed those explorers were going against what they believed God created. I wonder if ignorance isn’t more dangerous than someone wanting to take over, it sure seems like it is.”
Sherry spoke up after hearing Francis’ last question. “Francis, ignorance is more dangerous than the most dangerous person wanting to conquer the world. Gregor Mendel is considered the father of genetics, due to his experiments with peas. However, because the church didn’t approve of his work, he was banned from further experimentation and they destroyed all of the data he’d gathered. They believed it wasn’t necessary to understand what God created, it should just be accepted. Even Christopher Columbus was ridiculed when he told the church the world was round, not flat as they believed. Even after demonstrating how a toy ship didn’t fall off a globe of the world, but moved from view around the globe. Francis, ignorance has caused numerous problems throughout history. And it still causes problems today.”
There was silence around the table, as thoughts ran through the minds of those sitting at the table. It was Marie who noticed how the three teens each started pushing their food around their places. She caught the eyes of the other three women, nodding her head toward the teens. When the other three women looked at the three teens, Marie said, “Toby, Charlotte, Francis, vous trois semblez avoir quelque chose en tête (you three seem to have something on your minds.). Pourriez-vous s'il vous plaît nous dire ce que c'est (Would you please tell us what it is?)? We’re concerned about the three of you.”
They looked at each other, each egging the other on to say what they felt. With three shoulder shrugs, they said in unison, “School.”
“My Aunt Agnus,” Francis said.
“My brother,” Toby put in.
Charlotte remained quiet until Sherry asked, “Charlotte. What is it, sweetheart?”
Charlotte looked at Toby then Jane, but continued shifting food around her plate. It was Jane who then asked, “Are you worried if you say something, you’ll hurt someone, Charlotte?”
Knowing Jane hated her girls to shrug their shoulders, she did it anyway before answering in a soft voice, “Yes, Aunt Jane.”
Pushing her chair back and standing, Jane walked around the dining table, pulled Charlotte’s chair out with Charlotte in it, kneeled before her, and pulled her into a hug. Trying to keep her own tears in check, Jane said to Charlotte, “Sweetheart, we all have learned something about ourselves since you’ve come to Seasons House, even me. You’ve helped others when they needed help. They may not have thanked you, but they were thankful for your help. You’re worried if you say something, you’ll hurt me and Toby, aren’t you?”
Charlotte began crying with her head on Jane’s shoulder. Two more sets of arms went around Charlotte as she cried, those of Toby and Francis. “Charlotte, none of your words can possibly hurt me more than I’ve already been hurt. I’m thankful for the support you’ve given me, even when I felt you shouldn’t have. So just say what you’re afraid to say.” After speaking, Toby reached up and wiped his eyes.
Sniffing her nose as her crying ceased, Charlotte told them, “Being in this whole crappy mess. I’m sorry, Aunt Jane, I don’t mean to hurt you, but I hate being here. I want this whole mess to be over with.”
Jane had to tighten the chains holding her monster back after what Charlotte said. “Sweetheart, we all want this mess to be over,” Jane told Charlotte. “And sweetheart, I’m not hurt or offended by what you said. I want my girls to be ready to leave Seasons House, and the three of you are more than ready. Unfortunately, we have a roadblock and a few decisions to make after that roadblock is removed.” Jane then looked at Francis and told her, “Francis, you may be angry with me, but while you are ready to meet with Judge Ruth again, I’ve kept you here because I think you’re as much help to Charlotte and Toby as they’ve been to you.”
As the three other women watched Francis, she was shaking her head after what Jane told her. “Aunt Jane, I’m not angry with you for not letting me leave. In fact, if you tried to send me back now, I’d break my word of honor and tell you to stuff it. I wouldn’t let you send me away right now, not until Charles and Toby can leave. We are all for one and one for all.”
There was a mixture of snorting, admiration, and a feeling Francis had stepped over the line from the other three women, due to what Francis just told Jane. Jane held Francis’ steady gaze, thinking back to the first time Frank arrived and before Charlotte arrived. Standing before her was no longer the timid young man she first saw or existed before Charlotte. Standing before her now was a very confident young man, willing to stand up for someone beside themselves. With a stern look on her face, Jane said, “You think I’d tolerate someone speaking to me like that, young lady? You think you’d have the right to speak to me in that manner, young lady?”
Jane was pushing Francis to see if she’d back down or stand her ground. Francis did something Jane wasn’t ready for, she bent down, kissed Jane on the cheek, then told her, “You may not like it, Aunt Jane, but it’s what I’d have to tell you. Plus, I’d have to tell you, I love you, Aunt Jane.” She kissed Jane on the cheek again, causing Jane’s eyes to water. As Jane was trying to collect herself, Francis and Toby put their arms around her and held her, causing her watery eyes to release the moisture they’d been holding. Charlotte was no longer crying, but also holding Jane.
The four stayed like that for some time, basking in the love they had for each other. Finally, Jane said, “We’d better finish our meal, girls, Toby. You three still have kitchen duties to deal with, plus we have an appointment at the salon for the three of you.”
Jane’s announcement of the salon appointment wasn’t well received. But it wasn’t because of Sandy or her treatment of the girls, it was the girls’ concern for Toby. “But is it safe for Toby to go there, Aunt Jane?” Francis asked.
“Aren’t people still trying to find him?” Charlotte asked.
Trying to put the girls at ease, Jane told them, “Let’s all return to our seats and I will explain.” The three teens released Jane and the three returned to their seats at the table. “Now,” Jane began, after she was back in her seat. “We are going today because Carolyn told me today is always slow. She only has three clients scheduled and will be finished with them by the time we arrive.”
So concerned with Toby’s safety, Francis butted in with, “But will Toby be safe, Aunt Jane? What if Sandy says something to someone about you being with two girls and a boy instead of three girls?”
Jane and Marie looked at each other, the smiles large on their faces. It was Marie who told Francis, “Francis, votre inquiétude pour Toby est admirable et n'est pas déplacée (Francis, your concern for Toby is admirable and not misplaced.). Sandy has been made quite aware by Carolyn and others, who can deal with her should she say anything, how urgent it is to ignore the boy with Jane. We don’t know what the others said to her, but we are told Sandy may be quite subdued today. So let’s finish our meal and get you three to the salon.”
It was Francis who voiced Charlotte’s thoughts. “I hope she’s more subdued today. After what she said to me the last time we were there, I’d just as soon not go unless Carolyn was doing my hair.”
With an almost animalistic look in her eyes, Jane told Francis, “Francis, you won’t have that problem ever again with Sandy. Carolyn and I made it crystal clear she stepped over the line, and the consequences should it happen again. However, if we don’t finish our meal, and the kitchen work isn’t completed to Marie’s satisfaction, we will never arrive at the salon to discover how subdued Sandy is today. Will we?”
The three teens knew the current expression on Jane’s face meant business, and wasn’t to be questioned. So they gave Jane the only answer they knew she’d accept, and in unison said, “No, Aunt Jane,” and resumed eating their meals. The three teens never saw the smirks and smiles on the four women’s faces, as they too resumed eating their meals.
When the last bit of cherry pie had disappeared from everyone’s plate, the three teens asked and were granted permission to leave the table. They wasted no time clearing the table and getting on with the kitchen work. While Jane, Sherry, and Susan, were still sitting around the dining room table, the three teens came out of the kitchen and Francis and Charlotte proceeded to head to their bedrooms without being told. Toby, on the other hand, had started walking to the living room, before Jane spoke to the three. “Girls, where are you going?”
Answering for Charlotte, Francis said, “We’re going to get ready to leave for the salon, Aunt Jane.”
A slight smile appeared on Jane’s face before she replied, “Very well, continue.” Getting up from the table, Jane turned to Toby and told him, “Toby, please come with me. I have an idea to adapt your appearance somewhat.” With Toby following her, she went upstairs. At the top of the stairs, Jane turned to her left and walked to the second door on her right. Opening the door, a second set of stairs could be seen. Jane climbed the four initial steps to a small landing, turned to her right, and continued climbing those stairs. Reaching the top step, Jane opened another door that closed off the attic from the stairs. After entering the attic, Toby closed the door behind him before following Jane to a series of storage trunks sitting toward the front of the house. “Now, I want to change your appearance by having you wear different clothing, and an accessory or two. I want you not to be quite dapper, though having a more casual look other than tee shirts and jeans. I think nice dress pants and a sports shirt would do. Also, a pair of used-looking dress shoes, a coordinating belt, and a pair of color-coordinating socks. We’ll recomb your hair to form another style, and I think a pair of clear-lensed glasses should give your face a different appearance. But first, we have to locate everything we need. So, let’s start by opening these chests,” and Jane waved a hand from the chest to her right down the line of the three other chests to her left. “If you’ll start at that end, Toby, I’ll start here and we’ll meet in the middle.”
After walking to his left, and stopping in front of the last chest, upon opening it, Toby found it filled with dress pants of all colors, textures, and types, all enclosed in plastic bags. He moved to his right and opened the next chest, a chest he found to contain dress shirts of all colors, styles, and fabrics, those too enclosed in plastic bags. Stepping toward where Jane was now standing, after opening her two chests, Toby saw that chest contained a vast array of male shoes, neatly arranged by style, color, and size. Glancing at the first chest, Toby could see socks, belts, and other accessories. “Well,” Jane started her question, “did you see any pants or shirts that caught your eye? We don’t want any outlandish combinations, the idea is to make you blend in. And of course, they need to be in your size, but I don’t think that will be a problem.”
They walked to the first chest Toby opened, which contained the dress pants, and upon closer inspection, Toby discovered there were three sizes of each color and style. Sorting through the pants, Toby found a pair of cloud-colored twill pants, a neutral light gray color, in a 28x30-inch size. Carefully removing them from the plastic bag, he held them up at his waist to gauge the length on him. “What do you think, Aunt Jane? These seem long enough, stopping at the tops of my shoes. And with the color, almost any color shirt would coordinate with them.”
Jane had Toby turn to face her so she could gauge the length herself. “I believe you are correct, Toby, both about the length and the ability to combine them with several different colored shirts.”
Carefully draping the pants across the mouth of the pants chest, he then stepped to the chest holding a vast array of colored shirts. He dismissed outright the highly patterned shirts or the brightly colored shirts and settled on a light-brown cotton shirt in a medium size. After carefully removing it from the plastic bag, Aunt Jane took the shirt from him, had him turn his back to her, and held the shirt up against Toby’s back from shoulder to shoulder. “This shirt appears to be a good fit on you, Toby,” Aunt Jane told him. “However, we won’t know if it fits you well until you try it on. So now is a good time for you to undress to your underwear and put on this shirt and the pants you’ve chosen.”
Jane had been mindful of the color of pants Toby chose, and as Toby was getting undressed, looked in the trunk with belts and other accessories, and found a brown patterned belt she felt would look good on Toby. She then stepped to the trunk holding underwear and socks, and eyeing the color of the shirt Toby chose, found a coordinating pair of socks in a light brown. Jane laid the belt across the trunk filled with shirts, and the socks on top of the belt, then turned her attention to shoes. “Toby, what size shoe do you wear?” Jane asked, eyeing a tan pair of shoes in the shoe trunk.
Toby turned to face Jane at her question. “I wear a 7 or 7 ½, Aunt Jane. It all depends on the shoe. I take a 7 in some shoes and a 7 ½ in other shoes, Aunt Jane.” After putting the belt on, Toby sat down and put on the socks Aunt Jane had chosen. “Does everything look alright so far, Aunt Jane?” Toby asked, facing Jane in his stocking feet.
Looking up from the shoes she’d been picking through, Jane used a critical eye to evaluate Toby’s overall look. She had him turn around to make sure the pants and shirt fit his backside equally well. Satisfied with what she saw, she had him turn back around and returned her attention to the shoe trunk. Finally finding a size 7 tan pair of shoes, she handed the shoes to Toby for him to try on. Sitting down on the edge of the shirt trunk, Toby first put the left shoe on then the right, tying the laces before testing the fit by walking around the attic. “How do they fit, Toby?” Jane asked. “Is there room for your toes as you walk?”
Jane saw Toby think about her questions as he walked. “My toes aren’t bunched up at the toes of these shoes and they don’t feel loose as I walk. I think these shoes will do fine, Aunt Jane,” he told her as he walked up and stood before Jane.
Handing Toby a pair of horn-rimmed glasses in a light brown, Jane told him, “I want you to try these glasses on. They have clear glass in the frames, so you won’t have any problems seeing while wearing them. I think a pair of glasses with help change the look of your face, maybe enough so you aren’t recognized by anyone looking for you.”
When he put on the pair of glasses Jane gave him, the temples were too long, causing the glasses to slide down his nose. Taking those glasses off Toby’s face, Jane found a second pair of the same color and handed those to Toby. When Toby put on that pair of glasses they stayed up on the bridge of his nose, but were a bit loose behind his ears. Taking the glasses off, Toby bend the end of the temples down a bit before putting them back on. “I believe these will fit, Aunt Jane. Do they look alright?”
Jane backed away from Toby so she could see him from a distance. After appraising him from the front, Jane had Toby turn first to the left and then to the right, gauging his profiles. “I believe wearing those glasses gives your face an entirely different look. From a distance, I believe it will be hard for any of your pursuers to recognize you. We are done with your clothes, let’s go sort out your hair.” As they walked to the attic steps, Jane put her arm around Toby’s shoulders and told him, “If I was several years younger, Toby, I’d be pursuing you.”
Toby put his arm around Jane’s waist and told her, “Aunt Jane, if you were several years younger, I’d be pursuing you.”
Laughing as they reached the attic door, Toby opened the door and allowed Jane to descend first. Closing the attic door after taking a step down the stairs, Toby followed Jane to the second floor of the house. Jane was waiting for Toby when he reached the second floor and closed the door to the attic behind him. They walked together to Toby’s bedroom, where Toby again opened the door and allowed Jane to enter first. Jane had Toby sit in the vanity chair, before opening one of the vanity drawers and taking out a brush and comb. Once she was satisfied with the work she’d done, she spritzed a bit of spray on his hair, using that to help hold his hair in the style she just formed. “Alright, young man, stand, and let’s have a final look at you before we go,” Aunt Jane said, as she backed away from the vanity, giving Toby room to stand. After standing, Jane again appraised Toby from the front, sides, and back. Satisfied with the views, she told him, “One day, Toby Camber, you are going to be inundated with young ladies throwing themselves at you. Just make sure to choose the one meant for you. Come on, our appointment is gaining near, and I don’t want our young ladies waiting any longer than has been necessary.”
After leaving Toby’s bedroom, Jane told him about Sandy. “Sandy will likely be trimming your hair. She’s had a rough time a few years ago and still harbors ill will toward men and boys. I allow her to keep my girls on edge by how she treats them but don’t allow her to cross the line. She is likely going to question why you are with me and the girls, possibly questioning why you’re not one of my girls. Our story is that you’re staying with me while your parents are dealing with a family emergency. If she asks about the nature of the emergency, you don’t know, your parents didn’t explain things to you. I give you free rein to verbally, and if necessary physically, handle Sandy. I might suggest subtly delving into her past abuse, causing her to shift her focus off you and onto herself. We’ve seen how you’ve helped Charlotte and Francis, and I believe you can do the same with her. If you must defend yourself physically, please don’t break anything, Carolyn needs Sandy as much as Sandy needs Carolyn.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Francis and Charlotte had been sitting on the couch in the living room when Jane and Toby descended the stairs to the first floor. When the girls saw Toby coming down in front of Jane, and the way he was dressed, they looked at each other and the fun began. "Oh, my," Charlotte said, putting a bit of a Southern drawl into her voice, and plastering a big smile on her face. "I do declare what my eyes reveal to me at this moment is the most astonishing young man I do believe I've ever laid my eyes on."
Francis sat there trying not to laugh out loud while Charlotte spoke. When Charlotte finished speaking, she said, "He does look good enough to eat, don't you think? Or at least play with."
Toby stood at the entrance to the living room with a 'ha ha very funny' look on his face after the girls spoke. Jane, on the other hand, standing behind Toby, schooled herself not to laugh. After the girls quit laughing, Toby said, "Oh, you two think you're sooo funny, don't you? I was going to escort you two to the car and into the salon. But now, after the way you two have acted, I'll let you follow me to the car and into the salon."
As Toby turned to his left and took a step toward the front door, Charlotte and Francis jumped up off the couch, hurried over to him, and Charlotte still in her Southern drawl said, "Oh, please kind sir. You cain't leave two damsels in distress. We need a strong and handsome young man of your stature to help us as we meander from this abode and into a styling shoppe. Oh, kind sir, won't you reconsider your decision? Please?"
When Charlotte stopped speaking, she fluttered her eyelashes at Toby. He dropped his shaking head before lifting it, looked at Charlotte and Francis, and told them, "Aunt Jane doesn't need to grow any corn with you two around. You're full of it." Gesturing with his head to 'come on,' Charlotte and Francis rushed to Toby's sides, with Charlotte on his left and Francis on his right. Using her right arm and Francis her left, they put their arms under Toby's upper arms just as Toby crooked each arm. Together, the three started walking to the front door, stopping to allow Toby to open the door and let Charlotte and Francis walk outside first.
Jane had stood silent the entire time the three ran through their antics. She sensed she was being watched and turned to see Marie watching from the kitchen door. "Glaubst du, dass sie jemals miteinander auskommen werden (Do you think they will ever get along?)?" Marie asked, a smile standing on her face.
Just as drole, Jane replied, "Man würde hoffen, dass sie sich irgendwann sorglos einigen würden (One would hope that at some point they would come to an agreement without a care in the world.)." They both chuckled before Jane turned and followed the three teens out of the front door. As she closed the front door behind her, then locked it with her key, she put on her stern face and told the three, as she walked to her car, "When we reach the salon, I expect you three to be well-behaved. There will be none of your antics or ideas for any antics. Also, I believe you three have come a far ways, so nothing Sandy says to either of you should upset you, correct, Francis?"
Francis kept her head up, looked Jane directly in her eyes, and told her, "Ripples on the pond, Aunt Jane."
Jane unlocked the car doors with the car’s key fob, then told Francis, "That's right, ripples on the pond. Alright, let's go."
Opening the front passenger door, Toby helped Francis enter the car before shutting the door and opening the rear passenger door. After helping Charlotte enter the car, and closing the rear passenger door, he then walked around to the driver's door, opened it, and helped Jane enter her car. After Jane thanked him, he closed the driver's door, opened the driver-side passenger door, and got into the car, closing the door and putting on his seatbelt.
Unknown to Jane, as she backed out of the driveway, two guardian angels were monitoring her and the teens from a thousand yards away. The two had started monitoring Jane, the teens, and Seasons House ever since the attempt on Toby's life. It was Jeb who reached out to the two and asked for their help to keep an eye on them until the shoplifting case was settled. Jeb and the two men went back to their military days, saving each other's lives several times over during their deployment. That type of debt doesn't have a time limit on repayment. They left their hiding place and shadowed Jane as she drove into Kingston, keeping an eye out for any tails Jane may have acquired. Finding an out-of-the-way place across from the salon, the two settled in and watched the salon while the four were inside.
They were both startled when the back passenger door opened and a voice said, "Easy, boys. I have a 1911 and I know how to effectively use it." Marie climbed into the backseat, the hammer of her 1911 ready to slam home on the round in the chamber. "Now, boys, why don't you explain why you're following Jane and the kids before it gets messy in this car?"
Both men laughed, with the passenger saying, "Boy, Jeb said you were good, but didn't say that good. After the threat on Toby's life at the hospital, Jeb reached out to us and asked us to keep an eye on all of you and the house. So if you wouldn't mind, lower the hammer on that cannon and make it safe," the driver told Marie.
Looking at the two men, Marie asked, "Why would Jeb reach out to you two? What does he have on the two of you?"
Holding up his hands in plain sight, the driver turned to face Marie and the barrel of her 1911. "The three of us owe the others our lives. Years ago, when the three of us were deployed, we saved each other's lives more times than I can remember. Because of that, we made a pact to come to the other's aid when they called. No questions asked. Someone saving your life under those conditions can never be repaid in full during one lifetime." He then reached up and gently pushed the barrel of Marie's 1911 aside, watching as she held the hammer with her thumb, squeezed the trigger, and lowered the hammer with her thumb. She then slid the safety lever to safe and laid the handgun in her lap. Letting out a sigh, he said, "Thank you, Marie. We feel much better now."
They chit-chatted for a bit before Marie asked, "So, how long you boys staying around? I'm just asking so we don't meet like this again or worse."
Both men chuckled at Marie's last statement, before the front passenger replied, "We're in it for the long haul, Marie. We'll stay until this whole crap mess is settled, and Toby can go home to his dad. It's not so bad out here, the pretty country and all, makes it easier to blend into the background while we watch. Oh, and pass this along to Jane. If anyone she doesn't know comes to the door, tell her to stay back in the doorway. If things go south, I'd hate to mess up her pretty face with splattered blood."
Marie asked one more question before she vanished. "How far?"
With a dead serious look on his face, the front passenger replied, "A thousand yards if it's a fly, longer if it walks on two legs." Nodding her head, Marie grabbed her 1911, opened the rear passenger door, and was gone just as she had appeared. Mysteriously. The two men looked at each other after Marie disappeared. Looking out the windshield at the salon, the front passenger said, "I'd hate to have her after me. She's like a fricking ghost."
The driver, also looking out the windshield, scanning left and right, replied, "I think that's what she did in another life, if my information is correct. And yeah, you didn't want her after you."
Inside the salon things were much different than they'd previously been. Because trimming Toby's hair would take less time, he was first with Sandy. "So," Sandy said quietly, "I understand you've been through hell and back. Did you deserve it?"
Toby smiled, then replied, "Yeah, I went into hell and came out the other side. scarred, but still alive. I understand you went through your own hell. Did you deserve it?"
Sandy bristled before answering, "No, I didn't deserve it. He was a nasty drunk, treated me like his very own punching bag. How about you?"
Toby was silent for a few moments, trying to think of a way to tell Sandy what he went through without being specific. "Well… my brother wanted me to get involved in something I wanted nothing to do with. It started just after our mother left for brighter lights, she ended up a junky. So, when I told my brother no, he started beating me, using whatever he could grab. In order to stop the beatings, I went along and did what he wanted, and when I got caught, he and the man running things tied me spread eagle to a pair of pipes and my brother took pleasure beating me. I passed out after the third hit, so I don't know how long he hit me or how many times. But my back, butt, and legs are now scarred. Dr. Jill doesn't know how I survived after such a beating, but here I am, having you trim my hair."
Sandy was quiet as she worked on Toby's hair after what he told her. Several moments later she said, "Damn, kid, no one should have done that to a kid like you. Is there anything that can be done about those scars?"
Sandy pushed Toby's head forward before she started on the back of his hair. "Yeah, Dr. Thomas says they may be able to use a cream made to lessen scars, he wants to try that before considering surgery. You know, Sandy, no one had the right to use such an attractive lady for a punching bag. Have you spoken with someone about what you went through? You know, a psychologist or someone like that? Do you know Sherry Daniels? You might want to contact her and make an appointment. She's really good, she's helped all of us at Aunt Jane's house, even Aunt Jane and Marie. You need to get what happened out of your system so you don't relive it every day. You are reliving it every day, aren't you? Sherry can really help."
Sandy couldn't understand why Toby was easy to talk with about what she'd experienced. She felt he honestly cared about her. "Yeah, Toby, I relive it every day, even when I sleep." Then, with her scissors poised to trim a quarter inch of Toby's hair in the back, something registered that Toby said, something he said about her appearance. "Did you say I was attractive? Did you mean honestly mean that? You think I'm attractive?"
Sandy had placed her hands on Toby's shoulders before she bent down and softly asked him the question, intending it only for Toby's ears. Toby reached up with his right hand, gently taking Sandy's hand on his left shoulder, and gently pulled her around the chair until she was facing him. He didn't whisper as she had or even lower his voice, when he told her, "Yes, Sandy, I think you're an attractive woman who didn't deserve to be treated as you were. If you don't believe me, ask Charlotte or Francis." Sandy turned her head so she could look at Charlotte and Francis. What she saw stunned her, as both were nodding their heads. "See, even they think you're attractive. Please, contact Sherry, let her help you. You deserve to be happy instead of hurting all the time."
Jane and Carolyn had been watching the interaction between Toby and Sandy. What they witnessed next both shocked and pleased them, as Sandy broke down and started crying right where she was standing. Toby got out of Sandy's chair and pulled her into a hug, followed by Charlotte and Francis. The three held her as she cried, even wiping their own eyes a few times. The teens didn't see it, but Carolyn seemed to have something in her eyes as well. Staging whispering, Carolyn told Jane, "I see it but don't believe it, Jane. Even after all the things Sandy said to Francis, she's even holding Sandy. In all the years you've brought your girls to this salon, I've never seen anything like that."
Staging whispering back, Jane said, "In all the years I've been doing this, I've never seen such a wonderful sight myself. It all started when Charles arrived and continued with Toby's arrival. We've all learned something since those two have been here, including myself. May I use your phone, I need to call someone Sandy needs to meet."
After making the call, Jane sat back down next to Carolyn. In a low voice, Jane told Carolyn, "You know, Carolyn, nothing about this current session has been as we've conducted our past sessions. It started normal enough with Francis but began to change when Charles arrived. It took Charlotte's explanation of why Francis was only going through the motions, for me to change how I treated her. And look at her now. When Toby arrived, it took his explanation about Charlotte for me to reevaluate my treatment of her. She'd never been treated in such a way and finally revolted. Oh, Carolyn, sometimes I think it's time Art and I go away and enjoy the rest of our lives together, instead of what we're doing now."
Frowning, Carolyn put her right hand on Jane's left thigh and told her, "Jane Thompson, do you how many men right here in Kingston who are grateful for the work you do? Or all of those you've helped who live elsewhere? I've seen the respect they have for you every time you're out with your girls. Just think where most of those men would be today if not for the work you do. Don't be discouraged because you didn't spot why Francis wasn't responding to your ministrations. Or why Charlotte blew up on you. You may have experienced 'not seeing the forest because of the trees.'" Jane gave Carolyn a questioning look, causing Carolyn to add, "You were so focused on your program, that you lost sight of other possibilities. Your program has worked for so long so you believed it would continue to work on those three over there," and she pointed to the three teens. "I believe Toby said Sherry even helped you and Marie, did he not? Maybe your program was upset when Charles and Toby arrived because it needed a new perspective. Maybe it took both of them to show you how something added doesn't ruin the program you already have in place. You're discouraged because things are different this time around, different from your normal program. But aren't you after results? Aren't you after a change in the attitude and behavior of the boy sent to you? Haven't you seen exactly that this time around? It wasn't according to your normal program, but it did occur. Jane, your program is a means to an end, a useful end. Adding to your normal program has resulted in more than a change in those three," and she pointed to the teens again. "It's helped some who weren't involved in your program. You should see Barbara now. Her face is clearing up and she and Patty and Mel have become good friends, all because of Charlotte. What about what happened at the Mall? And you saw what happened just now with Sandy. How long have we watched her dish hate and anger toward your girls or any man she encounters? And it only took one boy who knew what she was going through to reach her. Jane, you've been shown something that doesn't diminish your program, but adds to it, strengthens it. It's something you'd never considered on your own."
Just then the door to the salon opened, and Sherry came inside. The girls turned to see who'd entered, offering their, "Hi Sherry," greeting as she walked by them. Even Toby offered his, "Hi Sherry," when she stopped in front of Sandy's station. Sandy looked up after Toby spoke, recognizing Sherry as one of her clients. "I know you," Sandy offered. "You're my Thursday at 2 appointment."
Smiling, Sherry said, "Yep, that's me. Your 2 girl."
As the teens let out three groans, Toby said to Francis and Charlotte, "You girls better lift your feet, it's starting to get thick in here."
Carolyn started laughing as Jane told Sherry, "Sherry, please don't give up your day job. You're much better at it than trying to construct a pun."
Sherry turned to face Jane before telling her, "Janie, Jill was right. You are a killjoy." Then Sherry did the mature thing, she stuck her tongue out at Jane, causing Jane to chuckle.
While Sherry was still standing in front of Sandy's station, Toby said, "Sherry, this attractive woman behind me is Sandy. Sandy, the attractive woman standing before us is Sherry Daniels, the woman I told you about."
Charlotte and Francis looked at each other and smiled, they both saw the look on Sherry's face and knew what was about to happen. Carolyn and Jane looked at each other, both knowing what Toby was in for. "Well, listen to Romeo will you?" Sherry said, as she sauntered over to the left side of the chair, swaying her hips as she walked.
With a smile on her face, Sandy saw what Sherry was going to do and moved to the right side of the chair before replying, "Oh, I'll say. He's quite the handsome Remeo."
Using her right hand, Sherry reached over and placed her hand next to Toby's left ear, then slowly drew her hand down until she swiped his chin. Sandy, using her left hand, mimicked Sherry on Toby's right cheek. Then the two women looked at each other, a gleam in their eyes, as they bent down and did more than give Toby a peck on each cheek. By the time they were done, and standing up to admire their handy work, Toby had two perfect lipstick lip prints on both cheeks. And as everyone watched, Toby turned a lovely strawberry red. Of course, Francis and Charlotte were laughing. Laughing so hard, they were leaning on each other to keep from falling out of their chairs. After seeing what had just occurred, Jane and Carolyn were no better, both wiping tears out of their eyes as they laughed.
It was Sandy who gently placed the fingers of her left hand under Toby's chin, turned his head to face her before telling him, "And don't you dare ever change. The girl meant for you better consider herself lucky to have a boyfriend like you." She then bent over and this time, gave Toby a peck on the cheek.
Still smiling, Sherry asked, "Are you finished with this handsome young man, Sandy?"
Smiling back at Sherry, Sandy answered, "Yes, with his hair, anyway."
More laughter ensued as Toby slowly turned his head to look at Sandy, a stunned, questioning look on his face, only to receive a Cheshire cat smile in return. She gently tapped him on the nose before removing the cape he'd been wearing. "Then how about we go talk, just the two of us?" Sherry asked Sandy, who nodded her head in return. After putting her equipment away, and folding the cape, Sandy walked from behind the chair, put her arm around Sherry's waist, and with Sherry's arm around Sandy's shoulder, the two women walked to the back room where Carolyn held her makeup classes.
Standing up, Carolyn asked, "Okay, girls. Who wants to try their luck with me first?" As Jane and Carolyn watched, Charlotte and Francis looked at each other before they did rock, paper, scissors. Charlotte lost.
Meanwhile, in the back room, Sherry walked around to the other side of one of the tables, before pulling out a chair and sitting down, she didn't want to make Sandy feel she was trapped in the room with Sherry. Sandy pulled out a chair and sat across from Sherry, asking, "Is there any specific way we do this, or do you ask me questions and I give you an answer?"
Sherry listened intently to Sandy's questions, nodding her head as Sandy spoke. "I will ask you questions, Sandy, but I don't have a script I go by. I prefer to just talk to the person, listen to what they have to say. I found a script doesn't work for every session, so I fly by the seat of my pants. I find it better to formulate my questions based on what the person tells me. In that way, I believe I help the person better. Now, we aren't in any hurry. You can tell me as much as you want or nothing at all. You can leave at any time, though I hope you'll stay and let me try to help you. Also, because you are my client, without your permission I won't discuss what you tell me with anyone. Now, I've only heard you went through a rough patch some time ago, but none of the details. Do you feel up to filling in those details? It's okay if you're not, but from experience, some rather recent, you'll feel better if you do."
Sherry sat patiently waiting for Sandy to speak. While watching Sandy, Sherry saw an expression on the woman's face that she felt meant Sandy was thinking about something. The expression didn't last long, as it was replaced by one of uncertainty. An expression of resolve crossed Sandy's face, before she pushed her chair back, stood up, and walked to the back room door. She opened the door and walked out of the room, leaving the door open. Sherry could see and hear Sandy without any trouble, as she saw Sandy stand before Jane and ask, "Jane, if it's alright with you, I'd like Toby to be in there with me. I'd… um… like his support."
Jane turned her head to look at Toby and asked, "Toby, would you be willing to give Sandy your support while she speaks with Sherry?"
Toby stood up when Jane called his name, slowly walking toward Jane and Sandy. With a smirk on his lips, one not lost on Jane and Sandy, he said, "I don't know, Aunt Jane. She did leave a lasting mark on me." As he finished speaking, a huge smile broke out on his face, as he was now standing directly in front of Sandy. Sandy playfully swatted his arm, before he reached out with his right hand and gently touched Sandy's left cheek, telling her, "Of course, I'll come and support you." Then with a twinkle in his eyes, he added, "And maybe get another lasting mark on my cheek."
Sandy again playfully swatted his arm, telling him, "You're not only a handsome young man, but a cheeky bugger too."
It was Sandy's turn to have a huge smile contort her face, as she reached up and took his hand in hers. Just before they started for the back room, Jane reached up and took Toby's left arm, causing him to look down at her. "Thank you for doing this, Toby."
Reaching with his left hand, Toby gently took Jane's right hand, telling her, "You're more than welcome, Aunt Jane." As Sandy led Toby to the back room, he said loud enough for everyone to hear, "I do hope I'm not about to be ravaged by these two beautiful women." No one heard the retort from Sandy or Sherry, as he closed the door behind him after stepping into the back room.
When Jane looked at Carolyn, she noticed that Charlotte had raised her feet off the footrest attached to the salon chair. She turned and looked at Francis, who had also lifted her feet off the floor. She was puzzled for a moment, but just for a moment, as she remembered something Toby had said earlier. In as stern a voice as she could muster, she told the girls, "That boy is becoming a bad influence on you two."
With smiles on their faces, the girls looked at each other before turning to Jane and in unison saying, "We love you too, Aunt Jane."
With a stern look on her face, Jane said, "Petulant children." It didn't work. Not only did the girls start laughing, but so did Carolyn. And after a few moments, so did Jane.
Author's Note: When I first wrote Complicit In a Lie, I had no thoughts, or ideas, to write a sequel. But thanks to a few readers, who asked about a sequel, ideas formed that made writing this sequel possible. It is necessary to have read Complicit In a Lie to understand why Charles is now with Jane, who the boy arriving in Kingston is and how he's involved in Charles' Court case. And to understand where Mr. Corporate, George Strom, fits into this story. This story starts off after Charles says, "When do we start," in Complicit in a Lie. So if you haven't read Complicit In a Lie, the beginning of this story won't make any sense. Hint hint!
Sandy's grip on Toby's hand told him she was frightened. He stopped walking, causing Sandy to stop and look at him. "Sandy, there's nothing to be frightened about. Sherry isn't a monster who'll eat your firstborn or breathe fire if you don't give her the right answer to a puzzle. She, we're, here to help you. Until I came here and later met with Sherry, almost every night I'd dream about what my brother did to me. Until I talked with Sherry, I'd wake up in the middle of the night drenched in sweat. It got to the point I became afraid to go to sleep, fearful I'd dream about being beaten." Toby looked at Sherry, smiled, then continued with, "And ever since sitting down and talking with her, I've been able to sleep through the night, no longer afraid to go to sleep. Francis, Charlotte, and I, know how hard it is to talk about what we experienced, but though it was painful to recount our experiences, Sherry made it easier to do. I imagine trust is something you find hard to do because of what you experienced, but I can tell you from first-hand experience, you can completely trust Sherry."
Toby reached up and gently wiped the tears from Sandy's cheeks. She tried to say something but it caught in her throat. When she could finally speak, she asked Toby, "Why do you care so much about me? We just met today. Neither of us owes anything to the other."
Toby reached up and cupped Sandy's left cheek, saying, "I care about you, Sandy, because it's the right thing to do when you see someone hurting because of a terrible experience. And we all do owe something to each other called concern. Too often we ignore those we see who are hurting because we think there's nothing we can do. Well, we may not all be professionals, but we can just be there and listen."
Sandy nodded her head in understanding, then pulled Toby into a hug and thanked him for being there with her. She wiped her eyes, then sat down in the chair she first used, watching as Toby pulled out the chair next to her and sat down. There was a knock on the door before it opened and Jane brought in three bottles of bottled water. After setting them down on the table, she patted Toby on the back before turning and leaving the room, closing the door behind her. To lighten the mood a bit, Sherry turned her attention to Toby, asking, "So, young man. You fear being ravaged by two beautiful women, is it? Are you afraid you can't handle to beautiful women at the same time?"
Huge smiles formed on Sherry and Sandy's faces, watching as Toby's strawberry red coloring started to return. "Um… well… I… uh… I've never been with any girl, so I wouldn't know what to do if it happened."
After saying that, Toby hung his head, his eyes looking at his hands folded together on top of the table. It wasn't until Sherry saw his tears drip onto the tabletop that she realized her quip had hit another sore spot with Toby. She reached across the table and placed both of her hands on top of Toby's hands, saying, "Oh, Toby, I'm so sorry. I was trying to lighten the mood with my quip and never realized it would hurt you so much." When Sandy saw Toby's reaction to Sherry's quip, she'd put her arm around Toby's shoulders, leaning into him for support.
Shrugging his shoulders, Toby responded, "It's not your fault, Sherry. I had bigger problems to deal with besides not ever being with a girl." And as Sherry and Sandy watched, Toby raised his head, a beautiful smile forming on his face, as he said, "But I'm with two beautiful girls now, aren't I?"
Her own tears slowly sliding down her face, Sandy told him, "Yes you are, Toby. And if we were several years younger, we'd both teach you a thing or two. We'd make it a moment you'd never forget."
When Toby looked at Sherry he saw she was nodding her head, agreeing with Sandy. "Toby, you possess all of the qualities many young ladies look for in a boyfriend. You're concerned for the welfare of others. You're kind to a fault. You aren't boastful, and you know how to treat girls with respect, as you've shown on several occasions since you've been here. You are also not afraid to stand up with your friends, no matter the consequences. Those are all qualities young ladies with heads on their shoulders are looking for in a boyfriend."
In a soft voice, Sandy added while looking at Toby, "Toby, one day you're going to bump into a girl who's going to fall hard for you. She's going to see you as the boyfriend she's been waiting for. And you, young man, are going to fall hard for her. And when that happens, we want to meet her and be invited to your wedding, because there will be a wedding." Sandy and Sherry chuckled at the shocked look on Toby's face. When Toby looked at Sherry, she too was nodding her head at what Sandy said. Feeling much better than she had at the beginning, and after kissing Toby on the cheek, Sandy turned to Sherry and said, "I think I'm ready to tell you my story, Sherry, since we've now got Romeo headed in the right direction." Toby playfully swatted Sandy's arm before putting his arm around her shoulders as she began telling Sherry about the painful experience.
"I met him when I went into an investment firm to start an investment portfolio with some money I'd saved up. He was a dream come true, Sherry. He was extremely handsome, rugged looking, and had a smile that'd melt butter. And he knew his stuff, guiding me through the maze of investments. He showed me the best stocks to invest in as a new investor and was right about the choices because my investment doubled within the first thirty days. I guess he was taken with me as well, because he called a few days later to ask me out on a date. He was like you are now, Toby, kind, considerate, caring, and respectful. After about a month, he asked if I'd move in with him, and was so taken with him, I immediately said yes. The first two months were wonderful, Sherry. We couldn't get enough of each other and did everything together. Then things started to change the third month we were together, just little things at first. Where he'd once been immaculate in everything he did, he started becoming sloppy. He started coming home late, telling me he was dealing with overseas investors. I was familiar with the time differences so didn't suspect anything. Then, one night during the fourth month, he came home dead drunk. I had fixed something he really liked, but he threw a fit when he saw what it was. He picked up his plate of food and threw it at me, narrowly missing me. I had fixed a mixed salad, which he picked up and threw it as well. I forget what he said after that, but he left and I didn't see him again until the next day when he came home and acted like nothing ever happened."
Opening one of the bottles of bottled water, Sandy took a long drink before she continued with her story. After setting the bottle down, she continued with, "When he got home that night, I asked what had bothered him the night before, telling him he came home dead drunk. After I said that, he looked at me as though I had two heads or something. He denied coming home drunk the previous night, told me he'd been dealing with overseas investors the entire night. I even showed him the dent in the wall where his plate hit it after he threw it at me. Again he denied it, saying the same thing he'd said before. I decided not to push it, just agreeing with him I must have been dreaming. Three days later he again came home dead drunk, and again started throwing the plates of food around. This time he hit me on the arm with one of them, when I saw it coming, and raised my arm to protect my face. I had a bruise on my arm for a week after that. He left again, only to come home the following afternoon as though nothing had happened. He asked about the bruise on my arm when he saw it, and I just told him I banged it against the kitchen cabinet when I reached for something. He just said I needed to be more careful."
Toby was rubbing Sandy's back as she told her story, wiping his eyes every so often. He and Sherry watched as Sandy drank the rest of the water in her bottle before she continued speaking. "I knew he needed to see a doctor for the lapses in memory, but if he didn't remember doing them, how was I going to convince him to go? I stopped putting food on the table because I never knew what state he'd be in when he came home. And the nights he came home stinking drunk, I headed to our bedroom to keep out of his way." Sandy's voice had started getting thicker the further into her story she ventured. Her tears were ever present, also getting more intense as she spoke. "One evening, about two weeks after I was hit with one of the plates he threw, he again came home blotted. I'd been sitting on the couch reading a book, and when I realized he was beyond sober, I put the book down and got up off the couch, intending to go to the bedroom." It started becoming more difficult to understand what Sandy was saying due to her crying while talking. Sherry reached across the table and took Sandy's hands, gently squeezing them, encouraging Sandy to continue. "I just turned to my left when he grabbed my hair from behind and threw me to the floor, causing me to land flat on my back and hitting the back of my head on the floor. I was woozy after that and had a hard time breathing. But he wasn't done, oh, no, not by a long shot. He reached down, grabbed the front of my blouse, and pulled me up. Then while holding me up, he began slapping me first with an open hand, then he'd backhand me. At one point, he slapped me so hard, he knocked me onto the couch. I don't know what happened after that because I must have passed out. When I came too, the apartment was quiet, I was lying on my side on the couch, my feet dangling over the edge of the cushion. I slowly sat up, feeling woozy again, and listened to make sure he'd gone out as he usually did. I was finally able to stand up and make my way into the bathroom, I had tasted blood in my mouth. When I looked in the bathroom mirror, I didn't recognize myself because my face was swollen. My left eye was almost swollen shut, I had a shinner under my right eye, and my lower lip was split."
Sherry pushed one of the unopened bottles of bottled water over to Sandy, who, with shaking hands, opened it and down half the water in the bottle. "After rinsing my mouth out, spitting out blood, I took a hand towel and made my way to the kitchen, where I got an ice pack out of the freezer, wrapped it in the towel, and placed it against my left eye. I made my way to the couch and lay down, shifting the ice pack around my face every so often. When I was feeling somewhat better, I took a shower and went to bed in the other bedroom which had a deadbolt on the door and a lock on the door handle. For good measure, I wedged a chair under the doorknob, I didn't want that bastard getting in the room. The next afternoon, when that bastard came home, I was standing in the living room holding the biggest butcher knife I owned. When he saw my face, and the knife I was holding, he asked me what happened to my face and why I had the knife. I couldn't believe it when I told him he did this to me and he denied it. Telling me he'd never do anything like that to me. He stepped toward me, only to have me tell him to stay back or I'd gut him like a fish. He said I was crazy. He said I should see a doctor. I laughed and told him it was him who needed to see a doctor because of his memory lapses. He laughed, telling me he didn't need to see a doctor, and his memory was fine. I told him supper was in the oven before going to the other bedroom and locking myself in for the night."
Sandy's crying had lessened, somewhat, but intensified as she told the last of her story. She had just begun continuing her story when she felt two pairs of arms encircle her from behind. Looking to her right, she saw Francis standing there. Looking to her left, she saw Charlotte. Francis told her, "It's okay, Sandy, we're here for you."
Turning back to Francis, Sandy stated, "After everything I've said to you over these past months, and you're here for me. You are a dear, sweet, young man Frank Winslow. Don't you ever change!" Sandy was quiet for several minutes, gathering her thoughts and the courage to relive the worst part of her nightmare. Taking a deep, shuddering breath, Sandy continued. "It seemed his memory problems hit him every two weeks, so after two weeks, I was on edge, waiting for the evening he'd come home plastered out of his mind. The swelling on my face had gone down by then, though I still had a bruise under my right eye." Sandy's tears increased, and her voice thickened, as she said, "It was on a Wednesday of the second week when he came home blasted out of his mind. He was so drunk he smelled up the living room. I was again sitting on the couch reading my book and when I stood up to go lock myself in the bedroom, he grabbed me and began punching me in the face. He kept calling me a bitch whore, as he punched me. I tried blocking his blows, but he'd punch me in the stomach when I did, causing me to drop my arms to my stomach."
Sherry and Toby had gotten out of their chairs and joined in holding the extremely distraught woman, who was close to wailing, as she spoke. Even though her words were thick, they understood her. "At one point, he punched me so hard I fell backward and landed on the floor. With a malevolent look on his face, he straddled me on the floor and continued punching me with his fists. I don't know how long I lay there on the floor, but when I came to, he wasn't around. My face hurt something fierce, as did my chest. I managed to crawl to the phone and pull it off the end table. I dialed 911 and told them my boyfriend had just beaten me and I needed help. I was later told when they found me lying on the floor, I was still holding the phone. When I came to, I discovered I was in the hospital, a doctor standing over me and a nurse next to him; an IV in my right arm. I tried to speak, but was told by the doctor not to, they had to wire my jaw shut. He went on to explain that my left and right cheekbones had slight fractures and I had three broken ribs, which they'd taped. I guess I fell asleep at that point, because when I awoke, it was the next day." Sandy reached out and took the opened bottle of water and drank the water left in the bottle. Still crying, and now shaking, she continued with her story. She chuckled a bit when she told them, "The next morning when they brought my breakfast, it was a glass of some green stuff with a straw in it. I was told I couldn't eat anything solid until my jaw healed; the green stuff was pretty tasty. It was while the doctor and nurse were there that he came into the room, causing me to flip out. With my jaw wired shut, I did my best to tell them to keep him away from me and to get him the hell out of my room. I guess I was going nuts, 'cause the doctor had to hold me down while the nurse pushed him out of the room before she got on the phone and called security. And just like before, he didn't remember beating the hell out of me. When I'd calmed down, I told the doctor everything about his memory lapses. How he'd come home stinking drunk, go into a rage, leave the apartment, then come home the next day like nothing ever happened. When the two security guards came into the room, they took one look at me and while one called the police, the other made sure he didn't go anywhere; he was still trying to get into my room."
By this time, Jane and Carolyn had come into the back room, Carolyn had first locked the front door, turned the 'open' sign to 'closed,' and pulled down the shades over the front windows. They both reached in and helped hold Sandy, now wailing as she spoke. "When the police arrived, the doctor left my room but the nurse stayed, as did one of the security guards. A woman officer came into my room and I heard her exclaim, 'Oh, my gawd,' after she saw me. She started asking me questions, and I told her everything as best as I could with my jaw wired shut. I later learned the doctor had somehow convinced him to undergo a brain scan, and that when the scan was complete, it was discovered he had a brain tumor that was so advanced there was nothing they could do to remove it. They told him he had about three more months to live. The officers asked if I wanted to press charges against him, but how could I do that and deprive him of what time he had left to live? I told them he was already under a death sentence, so no, I wasn't going to press charges. I was discharged a few days later, they'd called my parents to inform them what had happened to me. On the day I was discharged both mom and dad were there to help me. They even took me back to the apartment and helped me pack up everything before they took me home."
With her story concluded, Sandy had a major meltdown, The six held her for all they were worth, none of them having a dry eye. Her wailing was worse than anything heard at Seasons House during the sessions with Sherry. Nothing at the moment mattered but being there for Sandy. Time wasn't important, lessons undone weren't important, absolutely nothing was important at that very moment, but Sandy and her welfare. Ratons laveurs (Raccoons) and Toby held Sandy as her wailing lessened to crying to eventually soft whimpers, her breathing coming in shudders after all the anguish she released. Eventually, that too regained its normal pattern, the pile of used tissues increasing in the middle of the table, many containing black smudges. Slowly the room became quiet, only the soft ticking of the wall clock breaking the silence. Then as abruptly as Sandy's wailing had started, she suddenly said, "Oh, crap. I have to pee," causing everyone to either snort, laugh, or chuckle. She must have had to really go, because she almost took Sherry and Toby with her as she quickly stood up, turned, and headed for the restroom in the salon. The others had released Sandy and stood back to let her out of her chair, finding it amusing as Sherry and Toby were suddenly sitting on the floor.
They all started laughing when Toby, sitting on the floor facing Sherry, and with a big smile on his face, said, "I guess going was rather urgent."
Charlotte had picked up the used tissues and threw them in a nearby trashcan, taking a seat next to where Sherry had been sitting as she held Sandy. The others did the same, finding seats on the opposite side of the table or either side of where Sandy had been sitting. Sandy caused more laughter after coming back into the room and saying, "Ho, boy, that was a close one. And me without any spare panties."
Before Sandy returned Toby and Sherry had picked themselves off the floor and were again sitting in their seats. Upon hearing Sandy's statement when she returned, he face palmed himself, shook his head, and announced, "TMI TMI TMI," forgetting Francis and Charlotte were also boys under their clothing, who, like the others, started laughing as Toby's pretty strawberry color returned.
Smiling because of what Toby said, and his now red coloring, Sandy sat down in her chair facing Toby. Sandy put a gentle hand on his left shoulder, asking, "Did I embarrass my prince Charming with my talk of panties?" As Toby nodded his head, Sandy saw the tears forming in his eyes, suddenly remembering their earlier talk. "Oh, my gawd, Toby. I'm so sorry," she told him as she pulled him sideways into a hug, his tears now flowing freely down his cheeks. "Oh, my sweet boy, I'm so sorry." Sherry quietly explained about the conversation when they'd first come into the back room, helping everyone understand why Toby was upset and Sandy's apology.
Carolyn hadn't seen Sandy pull Toby into a hug, but she heard Sandy's apology and Sherry's explanation, as she'd gone to get more bottles of bottled water. She did, however, see Sandy holding Toby as she returned to the back room, setting a bottle in front of everyone. Walking to stand behind Toby and Sandy, Carolyn laid a hand on Toby's back, leaned over his right shoulder, asking, "Will you be okay, Toby? If you want to talk about it we'll listen."
Toby's head gyrated in several plans before he shrugged his shoulders and answered, "Yeah, I'll be okay. It's just a wish I've had for some time."
Sandy and Jane knew Carolyn had a wicked sense of humor if she had the right opening. Both women knew what the big smile on Carolyn's face meant, and they weren't disappointed when she asked Toby, "What, getting into a pair of panties?"
Sherry, Francis, and Charlotte suddenly caught on to what Carolyn had asked, knowing she asked a question having a double meaning. Those three leaned over so they could see Toby's face, while those on the opposite of the table just looked at his face. As they watched, Toby frowned for several moments before realization showed on his face. He sat up, breaking Sandy's hold on him, slowly turned his head to the right, and seeing Carolyn's huge grin, said, "You do realize that's a double entendre question, right?"
Nodding her head like a bobblehead toy, she replied, "Yes, yes I do. You gave me the perfect opening and I just had to take it." Shaking his head several times, he thanked her before lightly kissing her on the cheek. Ruffling his hair, she told him, "Any time, kid. I hate seeing such a wonderful kid like you hurting."
Sandy looked at the women around the tables, saying, "I guess I don't have to ask how I look, I can see how I look." There were chuckles all around. Then Sandy got a serious look on her face and told them, "I can never thank all of you enough for being here for me. I've never had anyone show as much love and concern as all of you have shown me." Turning to Sherry, she said, "If you let me know when you have an opening, I'd like to continue talking with you for a while." She then turned back to Toby, gently stroking his cheek. "Toby, don't you give up hope finding the girl for you. She's out there, you two just haven't met yet. And don't you ever change who you are," and she playfully tweaked his ear. "Or I'll hunt you down and kick your butt, got it?"
Smiling, Toby answered, "Got it. And I'll be sure to invite you to our wedding."
Looking at the clock on the wall, Sandy sighed then said, "Well, looks like I closed the salon for today. I'm sorry about it, Carolyn."
Reaching across the table and taking Sandy's hand, she told Sandy, "Ah, no, I closed the shop. You are much more important than more clients today. But I am kind of hungry. How about you and I get cleaned up and go out to eat? Your treat."
Seeing the smile on Carolyn's face, a shocked Sandy jerked her head in Toby's direction and said, "He isn't the only cheeky bugger around here." The room erupted in laughter.
Jane pushed her chair back, she started walking around the table before telling the girls and Toby, "Girls, Toby, I think it's time for us to return home. We all need to clean up before supper." Jane stopped behind Sandy, placing a hand on her left shoulder. Sandy reached up and held Jane's hand as Jane told her, "If you need anything, anything at all, call me." Sandy's throat tightened at Jane's offer, so she nodded her head in response. Carolyn followed Jane, the girls, and Toby to the front door, unlocking it before hugging the four and letting them out of the salon.
Looking through a small pair of binoculars, the passenger said, "It must have gotten emotional in there. Jane would never allow herself to look as she does now."
His partner used his own binoculars, and replied, "Oh, you got that right. She was always sticky about that point."
Lowering his binoculars, the passenger asked, "How do you know that?" Realization hitting him, continued with, "Wait. You were her guest, weren't you? Oh, I'd like to hear that story."
The driver replied, "Yep, got the tee-shirt to prove it. We'll have time later for my story." They waited until Jane drove away, then started shadowing them, watching as another car pulled out from behind the salon and headed toward Seasons House.
The drive back to Seasons House was somber, everyone's thoughts on Sandy's welfare. Francis and Charlotte, in particular, realized they'd not had it that bad compared to what Sandy and Toby had experienced. When they arrived at Seasons House, Toby was his usual gentlemanly self, helping first Jane then the girls out of Jane's car. The three quiet teens followed Jane up the sidewalk to the front door, and waited until Jane unlocked and opened the front door before following her inside her house. Turning to the three teens, Jane said, "Please shower and put on clean clothing. Girls, make sure you clean your faces thoroughly before showing." Their 'Yes, Aunt Jane' responses were also somber, there thoughts still on Sandy.
As the three started the short climb to the second floor, Francis turned and asked, "Aunt Jane. Will Sandy be alright? She was so upset then."
Proud at the concern Francis had for someone else, Jane asked, "Did you feel better after talking with Sherry? Do you feel better, now that you faced the hurt you carried? Don't you Toby, Charlotte, feel better now that you've faced your demons?"
With a synopated reply of 'yes,' the three teens turned and continued ascending the stairs. Marie came out of the study, turning to watch the teens disappear out of sight on the second floor. When three bedroom doors were heard closing, Jane asked, "Well?"
Marie turned to face Jane and told her, "Jeb sent them. Or maybe it's better to say he asked them to come and watch over us. Seems the three of them have a life debt, helping each other with no questions asked. They aren't leaving until it's all over."
Nodding her head, Jane asked, "How far?"
Smiling, Marie answered, "A thousand yards, if it's a fly. Longer if it walks on two legs. Oh, and if it goes south, the passenger said for you to stay away from the door opening. He didn't want your pretty face to be splattered with blood." Chuckling, Jane turned and started for her bedroom and a shower. She was part way through the living room when Marie said, "Oh, and Jane," causing Jane to stop and turn to face Marie. "The man driving was one of our girls some years ago." Jane nodded her head once, smiled, then turned and continued walking to her bedroom.
Marie was in the kitchen, gathering the ingredients for their supper when the three teens entered the kitchen. Right away, she could feel the atmosphere in the normally bubbly kitchen drop to somber, as the three went about their tasks mechanically. Francis and Toby were about to leave the kitchen to set the table when Marie ordered, "Everyone stop what you're doing and sit down at the table." She watched as the three sat down before asking, "Who wants to tell me why you three look as though someone took the last piece of your favorite pie?"
She had tried to lighten the atmosphere in the kitchen but saw it had no affect. She almost laughed as she watched the three look from one to the other, each playing a mental game of rock, paper, sissors. Francis sighed, then said, "We're worried about Sandy, tante Marie. She went through something even worse than what Toby experienced." Marie looked at Toby, the boy sitting in a chair, nodding his head. "She became even more upset than the three of us did when we talked with Sherry. The guy she was with ended up being Dr. Jeckle and Mr. Hyde because of a massive brain tumor. And Sandy happened to be there when Mr. Hyde was around. He beat her several times, not remembering he'd done anything when Dr. Jeckle was present. Tante Marie, the last time Mr. Hyde came out, he beat her so bad he almost killed her. She ended up in the hospital, then with her parents help, they moved her back home so she could get away from him and let her body heal."
Marie placed her left hand on both of Francis' folded hands on the table, trying to offer her some comfort, as she watched tears escape the girls eyes. "Francis, I think you'll find Sandy has become a much stronger person because of her experience. You may have heard the saying 'What doesn't kill you, makes you stronger?'" And Marie looked at each of the teens as she recited the saying. "Aren't you three stronger because of the recent experiences you've had? All three of you faced your demons with Sherry's help, and you came out the other side. Don't you feel stronger because of that? It is admirable you three are concerned for Sandy's welfare, Jane and I would be disappointed if you weren't. But her burden isn't your burden, and you can't carry it for her. You can help where you are able. You can be concerned as you currently are, but you can't let it take control of your life. Understand you did what you could do when she needed you three the most. Now, you must get on with your lives and have faith Sandy will be okay. Do you understand what I'm telling the three of you?"
In unison, the three nodded their heads, with Charlotte adding, "Yeah, but it still hurts to see Sandy hurting, tante Marie."
Smiling, Marie told the teens, "Yes, it hurts, chère. It hurts because you care. It will always hurt if you truly care about someone's welfare. Now, perk up, know Sandy will be alright, and get about your tasks or supper will be late. And you know Jane hates a late meal for no reason." The three teens chuckled, then did perk up because of Marie's last statement, getting up from the kitchen table and going about their usual tasks to help get supper ready. Marie stood back and watched the three teens work, cooperating with each other like a well oiled machine. She once again took her own words to heart, as she tamped her own hurt down once again, knowing those three would be alright in the end.
Talk at the supper table that evening centered around Sany, brain tumors, their treatments and the effect the turmor can have on the brain and a person's actions. Charlotte was able to provide some information because of the physiology class she'd taken at the nearby University, but it wasn't until the following morning, when Jill arrive to check on Toby, that a better explanation would be heard at breakfast.
Seasons House took on a normalcy unlike any Jane and Marie had had in the past. For the next two weeks, the teens kept their bedrooms clean and tidy, without being told. They were out the backdoor at 6 a.m. to muck out the stalls in the stable, trying not to play muck-a-boo with the mare and Pinto, without being told. They then showered and after getting dressed, helped Marie get ready for breakfast. Their time until lunch was filled with Susan's lessons, an activity causing Susan to plan much further ahead because of the speed the teens covered the lessons. They would then help get lunch ready, followed by more lessons until supper time. All of this done without being told to do so. Jane would have to tell them to relax after supper or they'd be back in the library studying. They also had the weekly trips to the salon, where the first thing the teens did was to make sure Sandy was doing okay, something she greatly appriciated. Much to their surprise, she was doing better than fine, as they found out she was as much of a practical joker as Carolyn. They also discovered her puns were more poignant, if not pungent.
Jeb had been quiet of late, not sending Jane any undates about the shoplifting case. It was the Monday of the third week after helping Sandy, that two events occurred simultaneously. Jane and Marie were sitting at the dining room table after breakfast, and Susan and the teens were in the library studying, when the phone in the study rang and there was a knock on the front door. After getting up from the table, Marie went to the study, while Jane checked the monitor near the front door. The camera watching the front door showed two men dressed in workman's clothes. Both wore a blue work shirt with a company name and logo above the left breast pocket. The man in front carried what looked to be a toolbox, while the man behind him carried a roll of Romex insulated electrical wire. Both were wearing workbooks. With a practiced eye, Jane could tell neither man bore the marks of someone in the electrical trade.
Jane immediately went to the living room, pulled the rolling ladder over to the exact spot she needed, climbed it, took out the fake book spines, opened the small safe behind them, and took out her Glock, closing the door of the safe but did not lock it. After replacing the fake book spines, she climbed down the ladder and returned it to its storage location. She pulled the slide on her Glock back just enough to make sure a round was chambered, before quickly walking to the library and barging in, telling Susan, the girls and Toby to follow her and ask no questions. They followed Jane into her bedroom, where she stopped at a door near the far wall. After inputting a code on the keypad next to the door, she opened the door then told them, "At the bottom of these stairs, you'll find a panic room. After entering the room, turn the large wheel on the inside of the door, that will throw bolts around the parameter of the door into the door frame. Then pull down the bar at the top and bottom, both helping to secure the door. You'll be safe in that room, as there is food and water and fresh air will be pumped in after you secure the door. There are two phones in that room, a red and white one. The white one is a house phone, while the red one is a direct line to the police and sheriff office. I will call you on the house phone, the white phone. If I tell you 'bingo clear' you can exit the room and return upstairs. If I tell you 'Charlie bingo' pick up the red phone and tell the sheriff and police that Seasons House needs help, they'll understand. If the white phone rings and you don't hear my voice, or Marie's voice, pick up the red phone and tell them we need help. Got it?" When they all nodded their heads, Jane then said, "Alright, go. I'll stay here until I hear the bolts thrown on the door."
After hearing the bolts on the panic room door go home, Jane closed the door and quickly made her way to the front door, seeing Marie standing at the study door with her 1911 in her hand and the hammer ready to start a delivery. "That was Jeb," Marie told Jane. "Ask those two which side they butter their toast on. They should answer, 'the side you put cinnamon sugar on.'"
Jane thumbed the safety on the Glock off, then pulled the hammer all the way back, before putting her right arm behind her back and walking to the front door. After turning the knob pulling the bolt back, she opened the front door and stood next to the open door with her left hand on the doorknob. "Yes, gentlemen. How may I help you two?"
"Good morning, Ms. Thompson. My name is Robert Thomas and my partner is Jerome Roberts. We're with the District Attorney's office and have been sent here to interview Toby Camber."
Jane evaluated the man's statement for any lies or deceit. Satisfied he was telling the truth, she asked, "And which side of the toast do you butter?"
Jerome smiled before replying, "The side you put cinnamon sugar on, Ms. Thompson."
Giving both men a small smile, and dropping her right arm, she watched the surprised look in both men's eyes at seeing her 9mm. "Please, come in gentlemen," Jane told them, backing to her right so she was out of Marie's line of fire. "You may put your props there," and she pointed to a spot about five feet from the front door.
After setting the toolbox and Romex roll on the floor, it was only then they saw the 1911 Marie was holding. It was Jerome who said, "You ladies seem to have had a spot of trouble," as he pointed to the Glock and at Marie.
Jane looked Jerome in the eyes and replied, "Indeed we have, Mr. Roberts. It's why we are taking precautions. Do either of you have any material you need to acquire?"
It was Robert who told Jane, "All we need is in the toolbox. If I may?" He asked, not wanting to know what it felt like to be shot.
Nodding her head, Jane said, "Slowly, Mr. Thomas. No sudden moves, please. It'd be a shame if I had to have these floors replaced because of spilt blood." Robert did exactly as Jane said. He slowly flipped the two latches before opening the lid by holding the side of the lid. He took out two business folders, handing one to Jerome. After he stood, Jane said, "If you two gentlemen will follow Marie's instructions, I'll bring Toby to you in the study. You gentlemen understand Marie will be in the room the entire time you’re with Toby, for Toby's protection. And I would advise you to follow her instructions to the letter. She isn't always as patient as I am and might do something regreteable."
A statue in place, Jane waited until Marie directed the two men into the study before she headed for the library. Once in the library, she picked up the phone and dialed a two digit number, saying, "Bingo is clear. I say again, Bingo is clear." After hanging up the phone, she went into her bedroom, standing where she could watch her bedroom door and the door to the panic room. It wasn't long before the secure door opened and the four came into the bedroom. "Toby, please come with me. There are two gentlemen from the District Attorneys office who want to ask you some questions. You're not to worry, though, because Marie will be in the study the entire time. And if anything goes wrong, drop to the floor, don't hesitate. Just drop. Understand?" When Toby nodded his head, Jane then told the others, "You three can return to the library. I will be in the dining room, sitting at the table. If anything happens, I'll come and get you and you'll head to the panic room again. No questions asked. Do you understand me?" She watched as all three nodded their heads, before she led them out of her bedroom. She stopped Toby once they reached the library, giving the three time to enter the library and close the door behind them. She walked Toby into the study and over to the table near the window. Seeing that the two men were sitting on the bookshelf side of the table, away from the window, she said, "Gentlemen, please move to the opposite side of the table, I want Toby out of sight of anyone outside." After the men moved to the opposite side of the table, and Toby sat down opposite them, Jane told the two men, "And you need not worry about anything you say or discuss leaving this room. Marie only watches, not listens." After both men nodded their heads in agreement, Jane left the study, closing the door behind her before heading to the kitchen.
During the two hours of questioning, the men started by asking Toby how he became involved with the shoplifting. When they questioned the part where Toby talked about being beaten in to submission, he stood up, tore off his shirt and pulled down his pants and underwear before turning around and asking, "Do all of these scars look like bullshit to you? Would you like to see the pictures they took right after I arrived at Seasons House? Those would give you a better perspective of what I went through. Shall Marie have Aunt Jane bring them to us?"
Marie had reached the table just as Toby finished speaking. He was pulling up his underwear and pants and putting what was left of his shirt back on. She put an arm around his shoulders then said with a kind voice, "Beruhige dich, Schatz (Calm down, darling.). They mean you no harm. It they can't believe what you tell them, no one will believe what you tell them." Then turning to the two men, she told them, "This young man has been through hell and has only just come out the other side. Take that into account with your questioning. I will have some water brought to you." Marie walked backward to the study desk, picked up the phone and dialed a two digit number. "Would you please bring water and glasses to the study. Thank you." Without looking for the straight back wooden chair, Marie backed up until her calves hit the chair stretchers and she sat down, never taking her eyes off the two men. It wasn't long before Jane walked into the study, not bothering to knock on the study door. She offered Marie a glass of water from the tray she carried, before taking the rest to the table, all the while staying out of Marie's line of fire.
She backed her way to the study door before opening the door and backing out of the study. Once free of the study, Jane returned to the kitchen to monitor the study through the hidden cameras placed in the study. She had to fight the urge to storm into the study and pistol whip both men because of some questions they asked. But she understood the reason for the questions, since Marie had already explained it to Toby. At the two hour mark, both men decided they had enough information, and told Toby with the information they had in his own voice, he likely wouldn't be called to testify. Jane shut down the monitor and closed and locked the cabinet, before leaving the kitchen and taking a seat at the dining room table. When the study door opened, and the two men emerged, Jane stood up and walked toward the study. Toby and Marie had followed the two men out of the study, Marie sent Toby back to the library. As Jane reached the two men, she asked, "Did you gentlemen get everything you needed or wanted? If you must return, please advise us several hours before arriving, it eliminates a great quantity of stress. And the possibility of needing to replace the flooring in my house because of unwanted liquids."
Both men agreed before Robert opened the toolbox and returning the two business folders inside. He then took the large coil of Romex and placed it inside, giving anyone watching the impression their work had been completed. Jane opened the front door and closed it after both men had left, going to the living room window and watching as both men got into a work truck branded with the same company logo as was on their shirts. Once they were gone, she pulled the rolling ladder over to the right spot, lowered the hammer on the Glock and safteying it, she climbed it and set aside the fake book spines, before opening the safe and placing the Glock inside. Locking the safe this time, she replaced the fake book spines before climbing down the ladder and moving to its storage location.
Jane then walked toward the study, just as Marie came out of the study empty-handed. "I'll let our friends know we're okay," she told Jane as she started up the stairs. Jane nodded her head once, before turning and walking to the library, where she knocked on the door before opening it and giving everyone the all clear.
Marie turned left once she reached the second floor, walking to the door leading to the attic. Once she reached the attic, she pulled out her keys and unlocked a trunk near the front wall of the house. Taking out a spotter's scope and an led flashlight with a strong beam, she walked over to a small window, opened it and used the spotter's scope to find their friends. Once she spotted them, and saw the passenger was sighting in on the house, using Morse code, she told them they were okay and the men were from the District Attorneys' office. The passenger messaged back, 'Thanks, Marie.'
The days went back to what had become normal for Seasons House this time with girls in her house, and Jane was in the kitchen rinsing out her mug at the sink when she spotted the teens gengerly walking back to the house wearing bath towels that were kept in a cabinet near the showers in the stable; they were barefooted this time. Without turning to face Marie, she said, "I wonder what their explanation will be this time." Curious, Marie got up from the kitchen table and looked out the window, laughing as she was the three towel-wrapped teens gently walking back to the house.
"Their explanation should be good this time," she chuckled, before following Jane out of the kitchen and onto the deck off the back door.
Hiding their amusement, both women put on their stern looks, Jane asking the teens when they reached the steps to the deck, "Well, who will explain why you had to shower at the stable instead of your own bedrooms?"
The teens looked at each other before Charlotte let out a sigh and said, "It was the mare."
Then Francis let out a sigh and said, "It was also Pinto."
The teens saw the looks on Jane and Marie's faces, knowing they were still waiting for an explanation. It was Toby who took up the story as he said, "We followed the steps we'd always used, taking one horse out of its stall, pulling everything out, cleaning it completely, putting down fresh straw and returning the horse to its stall before picking up the muck and putting it into the cart. And that's what we had done this morning until the three of us were knocked from behind into the piles of muck first by your mare, Aunt Jane, then by Pinto. Both had been put back into their stalls and the doors latched, only those two have figured out how to undo the latch and push open the doors to their stalls. And when they want to, Aunt Jane, they can be super quiet.
The teens saw the surprised looks on Jane and Marie's faces, as they suddenly felt unexpected weight on their shoulders. All three teens jumped in various directions, away from the weight, only to discover the mare and Pinto standing there, their heads lowered. The teens also didn't expect to be standing in front of Jane and Marie in their birthday suits, as they'd dropped the bath towels they held closed around them. It was too much for Jane and Marie, as both women broke down in ruckus laughter, holding each other up as they did so. The first thing the teens did was to snatch up their bath towels and cover themselves. They then walked over to the two horses and hugged both, telling them it was okay, that they were okay, "Just don't do it again," from Francis.
As all of them watched, both horses turned around and walked back to the stable, Jane saying, "You three go finish drying off and fix yourselves, I'll check on those two," pointing to the two retreating horses. Jane and the teens passed each other as Jane stepped down off the deck while the teens climbed the steps to the deck.
Marie had just put her hand on the back door doorknob when the four heard Jane chuckle. Turning, they saw her shaking her head, chuckling each time as she did. Shaking her own head, Marie finally said, "Come, you three. We still have breakfast to prepare and you must be dressed properly before that can happen."
As the three climbed the stairs, they could hear Marie chuckling as she walked toward the kitchen. It was Toby who said somewhat saracastically, "I'm glad we could be their source of amusement this morning."
Charlotte nodded her head in agreement, but it was Francis who said, "It's better to be their source of amusement than the alternative they could have had us doing." That statement caused Toby and Charlotte to stop on the stair tread they were on, trying to picture what alternatives they could now be doing.
As the three resumed their climb, Charlotte saying aloud, "I'd rather have Aunt Jane and Marie laughing then have them upset with me."
When Toby reached the second floor, he stopped and turned to faced Charlotte and Francis, who were one and two steps from the second floor. "You got to admit, it was kind of funny, being outsmarted by two horses." That caused all three to laugh, as they made up lost time by rushing to their respective bedrooms.
When Jane reached the stable, she was still chuckling, but witnessed something that totally surprised her. The stall doors were up against the wall, but before Pinto and the mare went into their stalls, each took a foreleg and placed it behind the bottom edge of the doors. They then pushed each door away from the wall, using the bodies to move the doors until there was enough room for both of them to enter their stalls. After turning around, they used their chins to pull the doors shut, causing the latches to engage. Looking at both sternly, Jane asked, "Okay, that's how you both returned to your stalls, how did you both get out?" Jane had watched as the teens looked at each other, appearing to have a silent conversation before one of them spoke. But she'd never observed her horses doing the same, as after looking at each other, they both lowered their heads, and using their teeth, lifted the latch and pushing against the inside of the door before both doors swung open, allowing both horses to walk out of their stalls. Shaking her head, Jane told them, "That's clever of you both," first walking her mare back into her stall and then Pinto, closing the stall doors afterward. "But you shouldn't just get out when you want, you could hurt yourselves and we wouldn't know about it until we came out to check on the both of you. So please, no more. Agreed?" Pinto and the mare looked at each other again, before both nodded their large heads, receiving an apple each from Jane; Jane’s other mare wasn’t left out of the apple giving. While she was there in the stable, she walked into the shower room to inspect it after the teens had showered. As their bedrooms and en suites were clean and tidy, the teens had left the shower room clean and tidy. They'd wiped down the shower curtains, cleaned the floor of any muck they tracked in, and their soiled clothing, which would have to be thoroughly rinsed before they could be washed, were in separate plastic bags sitting near the door. Jane chuckled again, until she realized how much she'd miss those three and reached up and knuckled her eyes.
Taking the bagged clothing with her, Jane returned to the house, dropping the bags off in the laundry room. From the laundry room, Jane went into the study to check her emails and the fax machine. After going into the study, and closing the door behind her, Jane saw the ready light on the fax machine blinking, an indication a fax was ready to be printed. After inputting a code on the fax machine's keypad she waited for the fax to print, then turned on the computer, entered her password, and opening up the email program. She had just started scanning the emails when the fax chirped, an indication the fax had been printed. She got up from her high-backed chair, took the two steps to the fax machine, and took the printed fax off the outfeed side of the machine. Sitting back down in her chair, she started reading the fax.
From: Jeb et al.
To: Jane Thompson
RE: Killer has been caught
Jane,
Great news, the person killing the kids involved in the shoplifting spree has been caught. The police used a decoy and let it be known where the "kid" lived, hoping to flush out the killer. It was on the third day when the bait was taken, and the killer surprised the decoy in a stakeout house. I was told she was more surprised by all the police who jumped out and forced her to give up, after the decoy coaxed her into telling why she was going to kill him, and they had it all on tape. Turned out to be Strom's mistress, probably not a surprise, since she was involved in the shoplifting spree in the other state.
They discovered where she was living, and after executing a search warrant, hit paydirt. She must have thought she'd never be found out, because they found mountains of documents, items from the other state with the sticker price still on them stored in two of the four bedrooms. They also found enough evidence on Strom to have him arrested, a big surprise when the police arrived at his home with the warrant.
The gun she was caught with, including the silencer attached to it, were rushed to ballistics, and placed at the top of the list of guns to be tested. Every bullet taking from the dead kids, and the three taken out of Tylor, matched a test fired bullet from her gun. And the nail in her coffin, the only finger prints found anywhere on that gun were hers, even though she tried to claim it wasn't hers.
Because this case involved killing kids, the Distric Attorney emphasized to the police the necessity of dotting every 'I' and crossing every 'T,' she didn't want any defense lawyer to find a flaw that you get her off. After seeing the evidence they had against her, if her attorney doesn't have her pled guilty instead of having a jury trial, that attorney has more guts than brains. Even if she requests a jury trial, killing those kids will get her a life sentence, plus however many years the judge adds on to the sentence.
As to Toby and Charles, Toby won't have to testify due to the recording Robert and Jerome made during Toby's questioning. With Strom in custody, and unable to following through with his threat to take Charles to Federal Court, and Toby's testimony, Ruth and dropped all charges against him, and expunged his record. As to Toby and his involvement in the shoplifting spree, the Distric Attorney has decided not to charge him with anything, deciding there are extenuating circumstances due to his being beaten into submission. I won't repeat exactly what she said when she saw the pictures of Toby when he first arrived at your home, but it also included a map, shovel, and a flashlight.
Not knowing how Toby feels about his brother, you might want to speak to him alone about his brother. Tylor did turn States evidence, but the DA is going to try and charge him as an accessory to the murders, Strom as well. Even if the accessory charges are denied, both are going to prison for a minium of ten years, no time off for good behavior; the DA whats them to spend every bit of the ten years behind bars.
The DA spoke with the DA of the city in the other state where all the previous shoplifting took place, and he agreed the charge of murder carried more weight than any shoplifting charge he could bring. So, Strom's mistress is all ours!
Now a personal favor. Toby's dad has been in contact with me, asking after Toby. Seems he has some good news and wants to meet with Toby to give it to him in person. It has something to do with getting a new job in your area, a much better paying job, and he's excited to move up there. Also, now that Charles has been cleared, Lynn and I would like to come out and break the news to him and take him home. Please let me know your decision soon, Toby's dad has a time limit before needing to report to work.
Give Charles our love,
Jeb
Jane sat the fax on the desk then leaned back in her chair, mulling over Jeb's request. She found the main portion of the news satisfactory, but allowing Jeb and others to come to Seasons House? That bothered her. She picked up the phone, dialed a two digit number, then said, "We need to talk," then hung up the phone. A moment later the study door opened and Marie came into the study, a worried look on her face, not that she left the teens in the kitchen, but because of Jane's tone of voice.
Jane picked up the fax and handed to Marie, who was now standing in front of the desk. She got up from her high-backed chair and walked to the window, her hands now clasped together behind her back. Marie slowly walked toward the window, reading the fax as she walked. "I think a map, a shovel, and a flashlight is the best for Strom and the woman. Tylor? Let him rot in prison, or let me teach him a lesson. Any brother who treats their brother as he did deserves no less. He cared nothing for his brother, so we should care nothing for him."
Jane released her hands behind her back and placed her left arm around Marie's shoulders, feeling Marie's anger from the tension of her shoulder muscles. "I agree with you about Strom and the woman, but I think the courts should administer Tylor's punishment and not you. You would be a bit too, um, enthusiastic in administering his punishment, and we would only want him to learn a lesson, not end up in a grave."
Marie chuckled after Jane's last statement. "Oui, je serais trop enthousiaste à l'idée d'administrer sa punition, car je me souvenais de ce que j'avais vu après avoir déshabillé Toby (Yes, I would be too enthusiastic in administering his punishment, as I remembered what I saw after undressing Toby.). I do not, though, see a successful outcome in trying to link him to the murders, having almost been murdered himself."
Jane listened quietly to her friend as the spoke, nodding her head in agreement in regards to Tylor being linked to the murders. "I am more concerned with Jeb's personal request, something we've never done."
It was Marie's turn to place an arm around Jane's shoulders, after Jane dropped her left arm and once again held her arms behind her back, her hands clasped together. "Chère, nothing we've been doing is anything like what we would normally do. Oh, we started our normal routine, and carried it out until Toby arrived and brought something to our attention. Even Charles brought something to our attention that gained us the results we were after. Look how they stand shoulder to shoulder if punishment is to be delivered. And you can't deny we've all gained much more this time than we've ever gained in the past. But the question you're asking yourself, the real question you're asking yourself, is whether to let Jeb and Toby's father actually see what we do here by how we have our boys present themselves. And if we let two see for themselves, shouldn't there be a third in the Willows? Perhaps instead of you and I answering this question, we should ask those who it would affect more?"
Jane released her hands behind her back and put her left arm around Marie's waist. "Keeping you around has been a wise decision, one that warms my heart."
Marie chortled before replying, "You keep me around because you can't boil water, and you know it."
Their decision made, the women turned as a unit and walked across the study arm in arm toward the study door. Opening the door, Jane let Marie leave the study first, and after closing the door behind her, they resumed their arm in arm walk across the living room and to the kitchen. When the teens saw Jane and Marie enter the kitchen, they froze, believing the boom was about to be lowered. "Charlotte, Toby," Jane addressed the two teens first. "Your fathers have important news they want to deliver personally by coming here. Francis, if we allow Toby and Charlotte fathers to come, we are thinking of allowing Penny to come as well. I want you three to think on the matter, not only your wanting to see your guardians, but in what manner you see them. We will discuss it more as we eat, so carry on with our breakfast preparations."
Having said that, Jane abruptly turned and left the kitchen, the teens still frozen in place. Francis broke the silence with, "Why is Aunt Jane upset, tante Marie? Is it something we've done?"
Marie shook her head, telling the three, "No Francis, it isn't anything you three have done. Come, sit down and I will explain, we have time to talk." After the three teens sat down at the kitchen table, Marie told them, "It isn't about your father, Charlotte, or yours, Toby, coming to Seasons House. It's about whether or not to let them see what we do here at Seasons House. Many in this area know what we do, and how we do it. Those who've been here are grateful for what we do, others not so much. Toby, it wouldn't be a problem for you because you haven't become one of Jane's girls. Your father would only be concerned with the scars he likely want to see. Francis, you and Charlotte are another matter. Jane is asking herself if we let your guardians see you as you now are or return you to the boys you are. She is worried how each of your guardians will react if they see the two of you as you are now."
Marie watched as the realization dawned on the faces of the three teens. "Aunt Jane is worried they'd go back and tell what they saw, isn't she Marie?" Toby asked as he stared into Marie's eyes. "And she's worried there'd be terrible repercussions, isn't she?" He added, his face now etched with worry.
"Yes, cher she is," Marie said, addressing Toby's concerns.
Charlotte chuckled before saying, "My parents would think it was a once in a lifetime experience, and glad I stood up to it. Plus, knowing my parents, it wouldn't be there story to tell, but you might gain additional wards because of it, if Jane explains everything to them."
Marie then looked at Francis, who was still mulling over what she heard Marie say. Finally getting the 'I'm ready to speak' look on her face, she told Marie, "I don't think Penny would be upset. I think she might even believe it was good for me to have this experience. I think she'd believe it'd help me be more cognizant of a girl's feelings and what girls often experience."
After hearing Francis use the word 'cognizant,' both Toby and Charlotte slowly turned their heads to look at Francis. "Where in the world did you dig up that word?" Charlotte asked, causing Francis to take on a haunting, upstart appearance.
Sniffing her nose, and trying to use a British accent, she replied, "In a book, peasant. You should try reading one once in a while."
Toby turned to look at Charlotte before saying, "Lift your feet, Charlotte. It's getting thick in here." All four then broke out in laughter, the tense atmosphere lightening considerably.
Marie stood up before saying, "Think about all of this as you continue getting breakfast ready. It's important Jane knows how you three feel about this."
When breakfast was on the table, and Toby had seated the ladies then sat down himself, bowing his head after doing so, Jane and Marie could see the concerned looks on the three teens faces. Jane said nothing at first, taking a helping of scrambled eggs before passing the bowl to Marie. She then took a helping of hash browns, then bacon, passing each bowl or plate to Marie, who would then pass it to Charlotte. Once everyone had been served toast, Jane broke the silence with, "I can see you three have been thinking about what I told you. I can also see you have concern on your faces. Who would like to tell me why you are so concerned?"
The three looked at each other before Toby spoke. "We're concerned about you and Marie, Aunt Jane. Charlotte's parents may not say something about way she's dressed, or Francis' Aunt Penny. But I'm worried what my dad might say if he sees how they are dressed and what he might do to you and Marie, Aunt Jane. Charlotte and Francis feel the same."
Jane calmly took a bit of her hash browns, dabbed her mouth with a napkin, then said, "I'm honored you are thinking of Marie and myself before yourselves. That shows great maturity on the part of you three." Jane then noticed the look on Francis' face, concern and something more. "Francis, you have something else to add?"
Francis pursed her lips several times, each time trying to say something but shaking her head each time. Jane was patient, knowing now how difficult it was for Francis to organize her thoughts to say exactly what she wanted to say. Finally, she nodded her head and said, "Aunt Jane, if more people learn what you and tante Marie do here, I'm worried they might try and stop you two. Even have you both arrested for something they perceive as abuse. I've heard the whispers when we've been at the Mall and other places, how many of the men who've been here are glad you and Marie were here," She chuckled before continuing. "They weren’t happy how you straightened them out, but they're grateful you did. And while I will admit I'm not thrilled how you showed me a better way to behave and think about things, I too am grateful for the work you and Marie do. I just don't want to see anything happen to both of you." Picking up her napkin, Francis dabbed her eyes, then looked down at the plate in front of her.
Jane and Marie had to clear their throats after what Francis said. Both had to dab their eyes as well. It took several minutes before both could say anything, to the teens or each other. It also took several sips of water from their glasses before Marie told the three, "Never before have we had any of our wards be more concerned about Seasons House than themselves. Many were grateful, as you said, Francis, but not about Seasons House itself." She looked at Jane, who gave her a barely preceptible nod, before she added, "To put your fears at ease, Francis, some important people were with us in their youthful years, and have never forgotten us. So anything happening to Jane and myself over the work we do is slim. There are many out there who've been our guests over the years, and not all from this state. If they felt someone not totally understanding what we do were to make waves, they might step in and help explain things to them. That doesn't mean we still don't have to be watchful of some overzealous person who would take acception to what we do and try to hurt both of us. I'm so proud how much you three have matured as not only individuals but as a trio together. You embody the 'all for one and one for all,' line of the Three Muskateers."
Charlotte face palmed herself as she saw the gleem in Jane and Marie's eyes, before saying, "Oh, no. You wouldn't? You can't! Would you?" Toby and Francis looked at Charlotte like she was crazy, neither understand what she was going on about.
Frncis was about to ask Charlotte what she was talking about when the realization hit her like a slap in the face. She slowly turned her head to face Jane and Marie, and said in an unbelieving voice, "Oh, you got to be kidding me. You two wouldn't?"
Toby was looking between the two girls, trying to determine what had them questioning Jane and Marie. When Charlotte and Francis saw how confused Toby was, they said in unison, "'all for one and one for all'."
Toby was still for a moment, digesting what they told him. Then his eyes went wide, his head whipping around to look at Jane and Marie, seeing the big smiles on their faces. "Aw, you can't do that to us. Do you know what something like that will do to us if it gets out? All the questions we'll have to answer by those who know the story?"
Both women were nodding their heads as Toby spoke, their smiles remaining. Jane finally spoke, saying, "Didn't you three stand before me as one when you thought one of you was in trouble? Haven't you helped each other while you've been here, not asking anything from each other in return? And didn't the mare and Pinto pick on all three of you? Even they see the bond you three have formed with each other. And calling you The Three Muskateers is so wrong? You should be proud if someone calls you three by that name, you've earned it."
The teens looked at each other, then at Jane and Marie, then each other again before saying together, "Eh," and continued eating as though nothing had just taken place.
Jane caused the teens to pause as forks were in various positions of picking up food from their plates or putting food in their mouths. "Just to put your minds at ease, you three, your parents or guardians know what we do here at Seasons House. Judge Ruth asked to speak with all of them and explained what Marie and I do. She had a few with her who'd been with us, each telling where they'd be today if not for Ruth and Seasons House."
Francis was about to put a fork full of scrambled eggs into her mouth before Jane told them about what Ruth had done, her mouth hanging open. Closing her mouth, she shook her head then said as if she didn't have a care in the world, "If it isn't the mare or Pinto, it's Aunt Jane or Marie." As if she hadn't said anything, Francis opened her mouth and put the fork full of scrambled eggs into her mouth, an innocent expression on her face as she chewed. Toby and Charlotte did a slow turn of their heads to look at Francis. Jane and Marie had humorous shocked looks on their faces. And Francis was oblivious to it all, until balled up napkins came flying from Jane and Marie's direction; decorum again put aside at the dining room table.
The other four resumed eating their breakfast, decorum finally returning to the dining room table. When everyone had finished eating their breakfast, Jane saw the three teens about to ask to be excused, causing her to hold up her hand and tell the three, "You three haven't given me you opinions about your parents or guardians coming to Seasons House and seeing you as you are now. Because they know what Marie and I do here, I'm not worried they would tell a story that isn't there's to tell. However, seeing you, Francis, and you, Charlotte, as you are currently dressed, things could become... dicey. If you two believe your parents, Charlotte, and Penny, Francis, wouldn't be upset seeing you as you are now, then it would be Toby's dad we'd be concerned about."
Breaking the silence brought on by Jane's comments, Francis to Jane, "Aunt Jane, Penny would only be happy I'm going to live with her family again. She may be surprised, but would accept it as part of giving you my word of honor to do as you say. She's like you in that regard, Aunt Jane. If someone says they will do something, or not do something, she holds them at their word. And… I'd like to see how she would react seeing me like this," and Francis waved her hand from her head to her waist.
Charlotte snorted after what Francis said, adding, "My parents are the same, Aunt Jane. If I give someone my word, they expect me to see it through no matter how unpleasant it might be. And in a way, I feel the same as Francis. I'd like to see how they'd react to seeing me now. I'd also like to see how true they are to their words about new experiences. If they truly believe in what they say, then I believe they'll be proud of me for going through with this."
Toby had sat in silence, listening to Francis and Charlotte give their opinions. It was only then he realized all eyes were on him, causing him to clear his throat and try to speak. "Aunt Jane, my dad used to be a stickler for someone keeping their word. But ever since mom walked out on us, and his working three jobs to keep a roof over us, and food on the table, I don't know any more. I believe I was told he was shown the pictures of me when I first arrived here, so he may be more worried I'm okay, and want to see what Tylor did to me. He also used to be a live and let live kind of a person, but now, again, I don't know."
Both Jane and Marie were nodding their heads as Toby spoke, Marie waiting until Toby was silent again before asking him, "Then maybe it's time to let him see you and the girls for himself. Maybe he's still the man you remembered and will only be concerned about your welfare. You may discover he's more upset with himself for not paying attention to what your brother was doing and doing to you, than upset with you or how Francis and Charlotte are dressed. We always fear the unknown, fearful of something that has yet to occur. You three may discover your parent or parents or guardian are proud of you three for passing through this phase of your lives and emerging on the other side better than when you entered. Because of you three, Jane and I have learned something we will carry forward with out next girl."
When Marie finished speaking, she and Jane could see from the look on Toby's face that he was having an argument with himself. It was Jane then asking, "Toby, you're worried about how you dad with accept Francis and Charlotte, aren't you? You don't know whether to say yes or no to his coming because Francis and Charlotte have chosen to allow Penny and Charlotte's parents to see them as they are now."
His throat tight, and tears welling up in his eyes, Toby croaked out, "I don't want him to say anything that will hurt Charlotte or Francis. And I'm scared he might."
Francis and Charlotte leaned into Toby and held him, as his tears finally overflowed his eyes, slowly sliding down his cheeks. Jane understood how Toby was feeling, but also knew he had to overcome his fear or would question himself for the rest of his life. "Toby, it's alright to be scared of not knowing an answer to a serious question. But if you give that fright control over your decision, you'll continue questioning yourself for the rest of your life. It's better to face your fear headon instead of playing 'what if' for the rest of your life. If your father has a terrible reaction to Francis and Charlotte, then Marie and I will deal with him sternly. He will be made to realize the error of judging others without knowing the whole story. Though I still believe his sole focus will be on your welfare, and what occurred to you."
Wiping his eyes, then clearing his throat, Toby told Jane, "Alright, Aunt Jane, I see your point. It still scares me, but I'll agree he should be allowed to see Francis and Charlotte as they now appear. I can always kick him in the shins if he says anything derogatory." Toby's last quip brought not only smiles but chuckles. And it arrived just as they all heard the 'shave and a haircut, two bits' knock at the front door.
They all laughed out loud after Jane said, "Oh, gads! The child is here. Francis, would you be a dear and let the child in, please. And if you can, be as formal as possible. I want to yank her chain a bit." That last statement brought snorts and chuckles from everyone but Francis, who seemed to have converted herself into a stern looking young lady.
After opening the front door, and speaking loud enough to the four still sitting at the dining room table could heard, Francis addressed Jill by saying, "Ah, Miss Jill. So nice to see you once again. I do hope you haven't been thrown out of another outhouse again because of causing a stink. Please, won't you come in. And if it's necessary, please remove your shoes. Aunt Jane would not want any muck to mar her beautiful floors."
Toby and Charlotte were holding each other up, trying their best not to laugh out loud. Jane had closed her eyes and dropped her head, shaking it from side to side. And Marie? Marie had put both elbows on the table and was now resting her chin in the palm of both hands, waiting to see how Jill reacts to Francis' outlandish welcome. And it didn't take long, as Jill gave Francis a strange look before marching into the dining room and asking, "What the hell was that all about, Janie? Have you been force feeding her old TV programs, or something?"
When Jill marched off after Francis' welcome questions, she forgot she left Sherry and Susan standing behind her. Francis motioned for them to quickly come into the house, their faces aglow with quiet laughter. Both patted Francis on the back, a big smile hanging on her face. She held up a hand, then put a stern look on her face and quietly walked after Jill until she was right next to the excited woman. Jill was so intent on getting an answer from Jane, that she never realized Francis had quietly walked up and was now standing to her left, facing her. Jill did a bug-a-boo scare move when, Francis, in her best Lurch imitation voice asked, "Would madam care for a cup of tea."
Jill had jumped, turned, and crouched all in one motion. She was now looking up into the stern face of Francis, her eyes wide with fright. She only caught on what was occurring when Sherry walked over, looked down at her crotch, then told Susan, "Ah, nope. She didn't pee her panites. Now pay me the five bucks."
They all somehow knew Francis wasn't done yet, as she held out her hand and asked using her Lurch imitation voice, "Would madam find it more comfortable sitting at the table rather than the floor?" It was then everyone died laughing, as Francis helped Jill stand.
Jill saw Jane attempting not to laugh, but failing miserably. Jane had got her again, by proxy this time. "Thompson, one of these days, I swear, one of these days." After Francis seated Jill, she turned to her and told her, "You know, you're down right scary using that voice, and yes, if you please, I'd like a cup of tea." She then looked at Jane, a scowl on her face, telling her, "So, you can't do your own dirty work. You got to send one of your girls to do it for you. That's really low, Janie, even for you."
Putting on a haunting expression, Jane sniffed before replying, "I'm quite capable of doing my own, um, dirty work, as you put it. I simply asked Francis to answer the front door. Whatever she did was purely her own improvisation, I gave her no direction or instructions."
Francis returned from the kitchen carrying a try holding three cups on saucers, each filled with steaming tea. She served Jill first, giving her a kiss on the cheek then telling her, "I never do that to people I don't care a great deal about."
After Francis moved around the table to give Sherry and Susan their tea, Jill reached up and felt the place on her cheek where Francis had kissed her, only realizing right then what Francis had meant by what she said. She had looked down at the table in thought after what Francis had told her, and when she looked up to find Francis, she saw all eyes were looking at her. Francis had laid the tray on the sideboard and returned to her chair. Jill looked over to her and softly said, "Thank you, Francis. That's very kind of you."
Jill watched as Francis shook her head before saying, "No, Jill. It's us who should be thanking you for taking care of Toby. You not only helped him medically but helped keep him safe at the hospital. And when those men came to the hospital, you put his safety before your own by getting him out of there and to here with Aunt Jane and tante Marie."
Jill had a questioning look on her face as she watched Toby push his chair back and get up from the table. He walked around to where she was sitting, stood behind her and bent down, put his arms around her from behind, giving her a kiss on the same cheek as Francis before saying, "If it wasn't for you, twice, I might not be here right now to watch these people pull your leg as often as they do. You do realize, people only do that to someone they value and consider a true friend, don't you? I owe you whatever life I have left in this world, and all you have to do is call and I will be there, no questions asked. And if I do become the psychologist I want to become, any patient you need help with I'll do pro bono for you and you alone."
After wiping tears out of her eyes, she reached up and held onto the arms encircling her. "You are a sweet young man, Toby Camber. Don't you ever change that about you. And I'll hold you to your promise when you do become a psychologist. And I'll bet a hell of a good one." She turned her head in his direction and kissed him on the cheek, patting his arms, before he released her and returned to his place at the table.
Serious once more, Jane asked the three, "So we are in agreement? It will be Francis and Charlotte who will be seen and not Frank and Charles?"
All eyes turned toward the teens, as they waited for their responses. The three teens looked at each other, a silent agreement passing between them. Charlotte spoke fir with, "I agree, Aunt Jane."
Toby went next with, "I too agree, Aunt Jane. And we'll deal with any fallout then."
Now the eyes were on Francis, including Toby and Charlotte. As everyone watched, Francis wiped tears out of her eyes before saying, "If it wasn't for being sent here, I've no idea where my life would be right now. I owe each of you for being where I am today. I can do nothing more than agree too, Aunt Jane. If we run into muck when they arrive, then we'll get the tools and cart out and deal with it. But I'm done hiding from those who might object to my appearance or words. I no longer fear standing up for myself when necessary."
No covert signal was given. No signal of any kind could be detected by the women watching the three teens. But as one, Toby and Charlotte pushed their chairs back stood up, and both went over to Francis and put their arms around her, hugging her for several minutes until they'd felt she'd calmed down again. When the two returned to their places at the table, Jane then addressed Jill, Sherry, and Susan. "I'd also like you three ladies to be here day after tomorrow. Jill, because you can explain to Martin your first observations of Toby, his subsequent treatment, and what Thomas has said about treating Toby's scars. Susan, consider it a parent/teacher conference. Plus, I believe you'll have something of your own to broach the parents and guardian with? Sherry, for the obvious reason if everything goes south, I'd like you there to help calm everyone down. Help explain what you've learned during your sessions with the teens. And what your initial testing showed. I believe together with Susan, you two could make a strong case against the three being sent back to the hell holes they were attending."
Susan was nodding her head after Jane's last statement. When Jane stopped speaking, she said, "I've put a bug into the right ears, Jane. I have a feeling those hell holes, as you call them, are about to have a change of leadership and attitude. In fact, I think those I spoke with have had enough of the foolishness they've been hearing about and are bring in others who can do something about those on the school board who are pushing all of the crap. Anticipating being here when the parents and Penny arrive, I have their files ready to be presented. And yes, you are correct. I will have something to say day after tomorrow, but the final decision rests with Penny and the parents."
Satisfied with what she was hearing, Jane nodded her head before returning her attention to the three teens. "I take it by how clean you three were when you returned from the stable, you three had no more trouble being mucked yourselves?"
She watched as Francis and Charlotte looked at Toby, nodded their heads, and listened as Toby spoke. "No, Aunt Jane, we didn't have any trouble." He then paused, looking first at Charlotte, then at Francis, both nodding their heads again. "I don't know if you'll believe what we witnessed, but when we reached the stable, all three horses opened their own stall doors and walked out of the stable at the far end. I swear it's the complete truth, Aunt Jane. And when their stalls were ready for them to be put back into their stalls, they walked back into their stalls and closed the doors behind them. Again, I swear I'm not making this up, Aunt Jane. But Pinto picked up a dandy brush lying on the hay bales and gave it to Charlotte. She wanted to be brushed. So Francis went into the tack room and brought out two more dandy brushes and we groomed all three horses. And Aunt Jane, I swear all three were purring as we brushed them."
The worried look on Toby's face was replaced when Jane told him, "I believe you, Toby. You three have made quite the impression while you've been here, and not just with the people around you. Now, if no one has anything more to say or add, you three may be excused to attend to the table and kitchen. After, Toby, I believe Jill wants to check you healing progress, and then you three are to be in the library with Susan. And unless I miss my guess, Sherry is wanting to have a word with each of us." After Jane said that, they all saw Sherry nod her head. As the teens pushed their chairs back and stood, Jane added, "Oh, and tomorrow we go to the salon to get you three ready for the day after. Carolyn and Sandy will also be here the day after to get you, Francis and Charlotte, ready to go home. Now, off you three go." Knowing they were dismissed, Francis and Toby started clearing the table while Charlotte headed into the kitchen, leaving the women to talk amongst themselves. As the teens took care of the table and kitchen, Jane excused herself and went into the study to make a phone call, letting the person on the other end of the line know about the teen's concerns. He assured her there would be no problems from anyone.
While the girls headed to the library with Susan after they all were finished in the kitchen, and Marie had pronounced it to her satisfaction, Toby and Jill went to Toby's bedroom upstairs, where Jill pronounced Toby's progress as excellent. Even though his body was doing well healing his wounds, it would yet be some time before he'd need to see Thomas.
Sherry did pull each person into the study to have a chat to see if they were having any problems or to continue where they'd left off the last time they'd spoke. She covered more of the field of psychology when it was Toby's turn to visit her, giving him tips he could use in getting reluctant patients to open up and speak with him. She also told him not to be hesitant to be firm with his patients, getting them so upset they'd open up if only to get him to stop being firm with them; she didn't tell Toby, but she used the same application to get Charlotte to open up to her. Tody did tell her he was worried how his dad would react seeing to boys dressed as girls, hoping he'd understand the reason for it being done. She assured Toby that Jane had already thought of that and had planned for anything he might do or say. Jane would not let his dad hurt Francis or Charlotte. When she and Francis met, she asked more questions about the ideas and questions Francis had concerning biochemistry. She had to stop her and ask for the simple version when Francis went into great detail using more scientific terms than she was familiar with. In the end, she dearly hoped the right company would snatch up Francis and release her ideas to the general public. She and Charlotte mostly spoke of how Charlotte went on about her school life after the two restroom events, with Charlotte saying most kids went on to the next big event and forgot what'd happen to him. While they talked, she asked what he hoped to accomplish by becoming a psychiatrist, listening as she explained some of her reasons. Her main reason was due to a boy he knew in school who'd gone off the deep end after being taunted so much at school because of his looks. Even after speaking with the school counselor, and those taunting him were punished by a two week suspension, the taunting continued by another group of students, only out of sight of teachers and school staff. His parents were of no help, they kept telling him not to listen to what others said, something hard for a thirteen-year-old kid to do. His parents found him in their basement, a note sitting on a table nearby. It took his death for the school to make drastic changes in how they handled those who bullied others. The expulsion for bullying change came too late for him, but it did help others through the years.
Jill still had Sherry's ears over what had been done to Toby, and her want to do something in revenge. But as Sherry pointed out to her, if she did anything it would make her no better than the man who beat Toby. Jill saw her point, but still stewed over what occurred. Susan too was still upset, but over the teens denial of advance classes at their respective high schools. Still, as she told Sherry, the change in that situation was in the works. As to what she discussed with Jane and Marie? It was the teens, and how much they'd learned from them and would apply that learning to the next boy sent to them. They both individually confessed how they would miss having the three teens around. They always brought sunshine with them, even though they may be having a bad day. They each would like to see everyone get along and support each other as the three had been doing. Then as Marie sat with Sherry, it was Sherry's turn to tell tante Marie her troubles, a tale that never left Marie's lips for the rest of their lives.
The established routine continued at Seasons House. Lessons for the teens, with a break after two hours, a forced break. More lessons until it was time for lunch. A distraction by Jane, usually taking the girls on a ride, since Toby was still unable to sit on a hard surface for long. A shower for the girls after their ride, then back to lessons until supper. In the evening, Jane gave them their own reins on what to do, usually finding them in the library hard at work on their lessons. When she'd find them there, she wished every student was as enthusiastic about learning as those three. But then, not every student thought the advance lessons they were taking would be snatched away from them when they left Seasons House. Then, at 9 p.m., it was bed time. And as the teens got ready for bed, later coming down to bid Jill, Susan, and Sherry a goodnight, Jane would assess the girls faces and inquire how Toby was feeling. After the teens left for their bedrooms, the five women sat around talking, with Sherry, Jill, and Jane reliving some of their antics for Susan from years agao; Jane actually correcting Sherry and Jill as they embellished their stories a bit. At around 11 p.m., Jane bid her three friends a goodnight, as she and Marie then put Seasons House to bed, thoughts of the day after tomorrow constant in the minds of both women.
Things didn't go quite as planned the next morning with the teens cleaning out the stalls in the stable. All three horses had again opened their stall doors and calmly walked out into the paddock, waiting until they could get brushed and go back into their stalls. But as the teens were about to pick up the muck from the stall of Jane's third horse, the teens suddenly found themselves face down in that horse's pile of muck. When the three turned their heads to see if it was Pinto or the mare who had knocked them into the pile of muck, Jane's third horse was standing their with what appeared to the teens as a smile on its face. And to show they weren't mad because of what it had done, after helping each other out of the muck, they stepped up to the horse to reassure it they weren't mad. With the three standing directly in front of the horse, Pinto let out a snort and the horse stepped forward and turned sideways, knocking the three teens again into the muck, causing them to land on their backs.
Marie was alone in the kitchen and standing at the sink when the three teens again came gingerly walking over the ground with bare feet, towels wrapped around them. "Oh cher. Ils l'ont encore eu (Oh dear. They got it again.)," she chuckled, shaking her head as she walked across the kitchen, pushing through the kitchen door and walking to the study. She opened the study door and told Jane, "Ces trois-là l'ont encore eu (Those three got it again.)," chuckling again as she spoke. Leaving the door open, Marie walked down the short hallway to the backdoor, followed shortly by Jane. As Jane and Marie stood on the small deck outside the backdoor, both tried to keep serious expressions on their faces, even though it was hard to do while watching three teens, who looked like wet rats, walked toward them. When the three reached the deck, Jane asked, "Who was it this time, Pinto or my mare?"
Both women were a bit confused as all three said at once, "Neither one."
Then Francis added, "But Pinto was in on it."
It dawned on the two women, with Marie asking, "You don't mean… ?"
Before Marie finished her question, the three replied as one, "Yes!" Then Charlotte told the entire story, including Pinto's role in the drama. Even telling how the three horses walked over and looked down at the three lying in the muck, their upper lips pulled back in what could only be described as a smile, before the mare and Pinto walked into their stalls and closed the doors behind them. It was at that point Marie and Jaen's stern facade broke, and both held onto each other as they laughed. The three didn't wait to be told to go and get dressed. They walked past Jane and Marie, still laughing and holding onto each other.
As their laughter died down into snorts and chuckles, Marie told Jane, "I will miss having those three here with us. Their presents has been a joy to experience." Nodding her head, Marie and Jane turned and reentered Seasons House, Jane back to the study and Marie to her kitchen.
The teens arrived back downstairs a few minutes later, the girls able to pass Jane's inspection and Toby smartly dressed. They were somber, something Marie picked up on as the three entered the kitchen to help get breakfast ready. Before Marie let Toby and Francis out of the kitchen with the plates and silverware they were holding, she had all three sit down at the kitchen table and told them, "Okay, give. Why do you three act as though you lost the last dime in your pocket?"
As Marie had seen before, the three looked at each other, holding a silent conversation between them before Charlotte said, "We're going home, tante Marie."
Marie puzzled over Charlotte's statement. Seeing the quizical look on Marie's face, Francis told her, "We won't get to see you or Aunt Jane again, tante Marie."
"Or get to do Susan's lessons, Marie," Toby added.
Marie sat down at the head of the table, capturing the three teens gazes. "Oh, no no no no no. No one ever said you couldn't come back to see me and Jane. We'd like to see you three again, hear how you're doing and what you're doing. It may not be for several years, but you are always welcome to come for a visit. Plus, you can visit your mucking buddies while you're here."
Toby caught the gleem in Marie's eye after her last statement, saying, "Double entendre, Marie." Francis and Charlotte understood what Toby referred to and all four burst out laughing.
Then they heard a shout from the dining room. "I heard that," coming from Jane. The kitchen door swung open and Jane asked, standing there holding the door open, "Might I suggest you four get off your brains and get breakfast ready. We do have an appointment to attend to today." She stepped back, letting the kitchen door swing shut, smiling as she heard laughter occur because of what she told them.
She sat down at her place at the table, watching as first Toby carrying plates came out of the kitchen, followed by Francis with the silverware. As each one placed their holdings at Jane's position, each gave Jane a kiss on the cheek before telling her, "Good morning, Aunt Jane." The two didn't notice how Jane had something in her eyes, since they'd returned to the kitchen.
As they finally sat down to breakfast, Marie caught Jane's eye and nodded toward the teens. Frowning at first, Jane observed the three, noticing how quiet they were and rather melancholy. Setting her fork on her plate, she asked, "Alright you three, why the horse faces?" Marie bit her lip after Jane used the expression, wondering if the teens would understand its meaning.
Francis looked a bit green as she said, "Aunt Jane, please don't talk about horses right now. I'd like to forget how we were beat by them again."
Toby had seen Charlotte drop her head and was now shaking it. "Is something wrong, Charlotte? Why are you shaking your head?"
Charlotte lifted her head, rolled her eyes, nodded once, then asked Toby, "Don't you understand what Aunt Jane was asking by using horses faces?" When Toby shook his head, Charlotte told him, "She's asking us why the long faces. Horses faces, long faces, get it?"
Jane and Marie had sat there with the left arms across their chests, supporting their right arms, with their right hands over their mouths trying to hold back both smiles and laughter at the teens antics. Jane realized, not for the first time, how much she would miss having those three with them at Seasons House. Marie and Jane almost lost what control they had as they heard Toby utter one word, "Oh."
Charlotte wiped her eyes with her napkin before telling Jane, "We've come to think of this place as our second home, Aunt Jane. We'll miss you and tante Marie, the house itself, and our mucking buddies in the stable." Jane almost completely lost it when she heard how Charlotte referred to the horses, and pressed her hand harder over her mouth. "It's like we've become a family, Aunt Jane, and going home is like saying goodbye to family members you've enjoyed being with." She wiped her eyes again before going quiet.
Charlotte's word caught in Jane's throat, rendering her mute for several moments. When she could speak again, she told the three, "Marie and I feel the same, Charlotte. We too feel as though we've developed a small family, and will miss not having out family members with us. However, as with other families, you may visit when it is convenient for you three to do so. And I require each of you to keep Marie and I up to date on your lives after you return home. Now… our breakfast is getting cold and we have an appointment at the salon after breakfast. So, eat." Jane's words lifted the teens a bit, but only a bit, as they then believed they'd be returning to the hell-holes of their respective high schools.
As they had done since arriving at Seasons House, they asked to be excused after everyone had finished eating breakfast. After being given permission to do so, Charlotte headed into the kitchen while Toby and Francis started clearing the table. The thought of leaving Seasons House weighed heavy on the three as they took a bit longer getting the kitchen squared away than they'd normally take. Without being told, the girls went to the bedrooms to freshen their faces, while Toby waited in the living room, already dressed casually smart. Even the footfalls of the girls coming back downstairs was subdued, each one taking one step at a time as in slow motion. Jane thought it best not to say any more as she did a quick inspection of the girls before the four walked out of Seasons House and were aided into Jane's car by Toby.
The cheerfulness of past rides was gone during this ride to the salon, each teen lost in thought of what they'd miss being away from Seasons House. Scheduled clientele at the salon had been taken care of, so when Jane pulled her car in front of Marisha Chalet salon, no one was there to question Jane being with two girls and one boy. The atmosphere in the salon even changed, as the three teens walked through the door. Even Sandy and Carolyn could see something was bothering the usually boisterous teens. Both women met the four at the reception desk, with Sandy asking, "You three look like your pet rat has just been eaten by your cat. What gives?"
Both women snorted as they watched the teens form a mental picture of a cat eating a rat, and the expression it caused to form on the teen's faces. Then, after wiping her eyes, Francis told the two women, "We're going home tomorrow. We won't be coming here anymore."
Happier than she'd been in years, the real Sandy came out when she enthusiastically said, "But that's a good thing, right? You'll be with your families again, see your friends, you'll be yourselves again."
Toby spoke up by saying, "All you say is true, Sandy. But we won't get to see you and Carolyn, Aunt Jane and tante Marie, or Seasons House. Plus, we won't be able to take Susan's classes, we'll have to go back to boring classes."
The teens were standing shoulder to shoulder, with Charlotte on the left, Toby in the middle, and Francis on the right. Sandy walked around behind the three, put her arms around Charlotte and Francis' shoulders and pulled the three tight together. "Listen you three goof balls. Who said you can't come back and see it all, especially me and Carolyn? I bet Jane even told you she was more than fine with you coming back to see her and Marie, and that mausoleum she lives in." The three teens snorted when Sandy called Seasons House a mausoleum, which was Sandy's intention. "Carolyn and I owe you three so much and will give you the best hair cuts you've ever had on the house when you come back to see us." Sandy had looked at Carolyn as she said, 'on the house,' seeing Carolyn nod her head in reply. Dropping her arms, Sandy walked around to stand facing the three teens, looking into the faces of each one, and telling them, "If it hadn't been for the three of you, I'd still be tied up in knots inside. You three helped untie those knots and for the first time in years, I'm truly happy with life. I am going to dearly miss the three of you and the enthusiasm you always bring with you. But just because we'll be apart, doesn't mean you can keep in touch with Carolyn and myself." Then she tapped each teen in the chest with her right index finger and told them, "And I expect to see that sheep skin when you three graduate from the University or College you'll attend. You will bring it back here so we can have us a little party," and she winked at the teens, causing them to chuckle at her antics. "But for now, Toby, I'll butcher your hair first, so off you go to my station and into the chair."
Jane and Carolyn had stood back and let Sandy's true nature try and brighten the teen's mood, which it had, somewhat. Sandy looked first at Jane then at Carolyn, shaking her head slightly, before going to her station to trim Toby's hair. Stepping up beside Carolyn, Jane whispered, "I'm not sure those three truly grasp what they've done for Sandy. They've only seen her for a few months, not the number of years as you and I have, so they may not realize the torment she suffered all of those years. I believe even your customers will appreciate the new Sandy working on them." The two women stood and watched as Toby and Sandy carried on with an animated conversation while Sandy trimmed Toby's hair.
Their attention was redirected as both heard a whistle, and Francis say loudly, "Hey, how does a person get service around here?" When both women looked past Sandy and Toby, who were also looking toward Francis, they all saw Francis sitting in the chair at Carolyn's station, waving her hand at them.
Jane felt her ire rise, and took only a step before Carolyn put her hand on Jane's arm. "Don't. We all needed that. Look at Charlotte's reaction." As Jane looked, even Charlotte was smiling for the first time that day, rolling her eyes, shaking her head, but she was smiling.
Jane nodded, then said, "I believe you're correct, so I'll not say anything this time. But, only this time."
Shaking her head, Carolyn told Jane, "Jane Thompson, will you lighten up for once? Stop trying to be so stoic when the three best kids you've ever had are about to leave you. Let them see how much you're going to miss them, 'cause I can see it in your eyes."
Jane turned to look at Carolyn, a smirk playing on her lips. "Put you best 'angry' look on your face and follow my lead," Jane told Carolyn, as she put on her dragon face and started slowly walking toward where Francis was sitting, her hands behind her back. Unknown to both women, Charlotte had heard what Jane had said, and knew what was coming would not go as Aunt Jane planned.
Toby and Charlotte had taught Francis well, so she wasn't fooled by the angry looks on Jane and Carolyn's faces. She had a big smile on her face as both women stopped in front of her as she sat in the chair at Carolyn's station. "Since when does a young lady act like a drunken construction worker when she's out in public?" Jane asked Francis, trying to put as much venom into her words as she spoke.
"And I don't find it appropriate for a customer to make a scene in my salon," Carolyn, she too trying to sound upset over Francis' actions.
But the big smile on Francis face didn't falter, it got even bigger, as she told the two women, "You both forget I've see you both angry and upset. I've observed your body language and facial expressions when you both are angry and upset. While you are doing an adrimalably fine job looking angry and upset, your eyes say something altogether different." Looking at Jane, Francis said, "I love you too, Aunt Jane," then held her arms out wide, inviting Jane into a hug.
Jane shook her head before softly saying, "Damn," and stepping into Francis' embrace, wrapping her arms around Francis. Holding Francis tightly, Jane asked her, "So you think you know me, do you?"
With a thick voice, Francis replied, "Better than when I first arrived, Aunt Jane. Words alone can't convey the gratitude I feel for everything you've done for me. You have a heart bigger than Olympus Mon on Mars." Francis pulled her head back far enough and kissed Jane on the cheek, telling the woman, "I'm going to miss you and Marie and everything about Seasons House. And if you'd let me, I'd like to consider you one of my real Aunts. Because I'd like to come back and see you like I would one of my real Aunts."
Because Francis was facing away from the mirror behind the chair, she couldn't see the tears freely falling from Jane's eyes or the look on Jane's face. But Carolyn could, and was surprised when Charlotte, then Toby, both walked up and joined Jane and Francis. The two were standing to the right of the chair, and when Jane realized they too were holding her, she took her right arm and placed it around the two teens, pulling them in as far as the chair allowed. Then Toby told Jane, "What Francis said, Aunt Jane," and the four stayed as they were until their tears ran dry.
It took Carolyn a moment to realize what she took as a face of anguish reflected in the mirror, was actually a face of unexpected joy. She watched as more tears of joy made their way down Jane's cheeks, before Jane gently untangled herself and stroked the cheeks of each teen before saying, "Well, yes… yes, well… " then slowly walked toward the door for the back room. With her hand on the doorknob, she turned to look at the three worried looking teens and again said, "Well, yes… yes, well," before opening the door and walking into the back room, closing the door behind her.
Carolyn stepped up to the three teens, pull all three into a hug, then told them, "To answer the worried looks on your faces, no, you did nothing wrong. And yes, Jane is alright, just very surprised by your request, Francis.” Releasing the three, she stepped back then told them, "You three must understand how Jane has to run Seasons House when she has boys sent to her. You, Francis, must know that better than Toby and Charlotte, you know how she was when you first arrived. It has to be that way for her to gain the control she has to have if she is to start that boy in the direction she wants him to go. But then you, Charlotte, came along and did something she's never had a boy do. You volunteered to become one of her girls. Then, Toby, you arrived, and everything she was told about you turned out to be wrong. And because of you two," and she pointed to Charlotte and Toby, "Things as Seasons House changed, and changed for the better. Not just for you three, but for Jane and Marie also. Neither one had to do what they'd normally do to get the boy to do what they wanted, you three did it without being told. You gave them both the respect they deserved and acknowledged their authority without making them exert their authority over you. You also did something neither one expected, you showed them love and that you honestly cared about them. This is something neither one expected. Understand, you three, they both care deeply about the boys sent to them for help, but both have a hard time expressing that care because of how they have to run their program. And when you three openly showed your love and care to them, they don't really know how to react. You three are actually the best thing to happen at Seasons House in years. Now, Charlotte, go pester Sandy while she does your hair. Toby, Sandy did a nice job on your hair. Get yourself something to drink and/or snack on from the front case, if you want. You get to sit and wait on these two," and she waved a hand at Francis and Charlotte. "And Francis, I'll be with you in a few moments."
The three watched as Carolyn turned and headed toward the back room, opening the door, walking into the room before closing the door behind her. They were so focused on the door to the back room that they all jumped when they heard, "Hey, short dude! How does a gal get a customer around here to get his ass into her chair?" Regaining their wits, Toby and Charlotte turned around to look at Sandy, while Francis bent down while sitting in the chair at Carolyn's station, trying to look around Toby and Charlotte.
All three saw Sandy standing there, hands on hips, a big smile on her face, standing behind the chair at her station. Then, taking her left hand off her left hip, she pointed a finger at Charlotte, turned her hand over, then using her left index finger, made rapid movements with that finger, telling Charlotte to 'come here.' She then moved her left hand until it was above the chair, then made a pointing motion with her hand several times toward the chair. Then, looking at Toby then Francis, Charlotte asked, "Ya think she's enjoying herself a bit too much?"
Francis nodded her head before saying, "Yeah, just a bit too much."
Toby shook his head, saying, "Naw, I don't think she's even started yet."
As the three watched, Sandy started to slowly walk toward them, her hands behind her back, a mischievous smile on her lips. Francis was still bent over while sitting in the chair, as Sandy reached them. "So, you two think I'm enjoying myself too much, eh? And you," and she pointed to Toby, "Think I haven't started yet, eh? Well...." And as quickly as she could, and as awkward as it was with Francis sitting in the chair, Sandy threw her arms around all three and pulled them into a hug, hearing the protest, groans, and muffled cries, all the while laughing. Releasing them suddenly, she stepped back, a huge smile on her face, and laughed. The three watched as her smile faded before she told them, "If it wasn't for you three I wouldn't be enjoying myself right now. If you three hadn't been here, I'd still be taking my anger and hurt on every boy who is sent to Seasons House. Now, because of you three, I can once again enjoy my life, be myself, and have some fun with the next boy sent to Jane instead of being the ogre I was." This time when she stepped up to them, she gently hugged each one before kissing them on the cheek. She then put an arm around Charlotte and said, "Come on, let's go make your hair look purrttyy." As Toby and Francis watched, the two walked to Sandy's station, Charlotte's left arm around Sandy's waist.
It wasn't long before the door to the back room opened, gaining everyone's attention. As they watched, Carolyn came out first, followed by Jane. After Carolyn closed the door, she put an arm around Jane's waist and started walking her to the waiting chairs near the front of the salon, where Toby currently sat. As they passed Francis, Jane gently patted Francis' knee, garnering a smile from Francis. She did the same as she passed Charlotte, gaining not one but two smiles as she and Carolyn continue walking. When the reached Toby, Carolyn forcibly turned Jane and sat her down in a chair next to Toby, giving her orders not to move. When Toby gave Carolyn a questioning look, she told him, "She had other ideas on her mind, but I talked her out of them." With a final, "Stay put," to Jane, Carolyn turned and headed to her station and Francis.
Ever present concern for his Aunt Jane, Toby, still looking at Jane, asked, "Care to talk about it? I'm all ears, well, mostly all ears. Well, not mostly, but I listen well."
Despite how she was feeling at the moment, Jane chuckled anyway, telling Toby, "One day you will be a find psychologist, young man. I was, am, feeling extremely embarrassed after what you three did for me a short time ago. I wanted to leave, then come back to pick up the three of you. I was chastened and reminded I'm your guardian and couldn't leave you three to the wilds of those two women."
Joining in the conversation, Sandy said, "We ain't wild, Jane Thompson, we're just plain crazy."
As if they had rehearsed it, Jane and Toby said together, "Don't we know it," causing as six to burst out in laughter. Toby put his arm around Jane, causing her to lean into him. Then, the three pairs continued in their own worlds with laughter and talk.
Across from the salon, and in an out of the way place, the two angels sat in the car and watched. The rear passenger side door opened and the car rocked slightly as a person got into the backseat, closing the door afterward. Without looking around, the driver said, "Thanks for meeting us, Marie." Shortly after Jane and the teens left Seasons House, Marie received a telephone call. The caller's message for short and to the point, "Meet us, same place," before he hung up. "We just wanted to let you know we'll be leaving after Jane and the kids return to Seasons House. Seems the bitch who put out the contract on Toby is now unable to finance the deal, seems she got her butt in a big sling and is now without finances. So the players who had wanted a payday are going elsewhere, even the crazy ones. According to what we were told by Jeb, she'll end up as dust in prison. So no one will be bothered by her again. Also seems that last State wasn't her only racket. Seems three other States had a problem with her, but like the last State, couldn't prove anything. Seems she liked to kill her partners, the ones who tried to take over from her. Strom was smart, he just became her 'yes man' and is still living. When everyone found she was killing kids this time, they sent all the evidence they had from her time with them, especially the bullets and casings they kept as evidence. Stupid woman kept the gun and silencer she'd been using, and everything matched that gun. Stupid bitch! So… after today, you, Jane, and the kids, should be safe until the key is turned one last time on her."
Marie chuckled after the driver told her they should now be safe. "Oh, it wouldn't be us you'd have to worry about being safe. It'd be those who tried anything who would be the ones to worry about. Me and Betsy and Jane and her little friends can do quite nicely when need be."
Incredulously, the passenger asked, "Betsy? You call that cannon you carry, Betsy?"
Sniffing, Marie told him in a haunting voice, "Yes, I call her Betsy. Like any good woman, she remains quiet until you piss her off. Then she gives you her opinion loud and long. So, what do you can that slug thrower you use, Jack or some other ominous name?"
At that point the passenger became super quiet. The driver turned and glared at Marie, inpreceptiously shaking his head. An erie silence hung in the air like fog when conditions are right for it to form. Then, "We were on deployment, two days until we'd be sent back to the states. We'd just returned from a nasty mission, and were kicking back waiting for the next assignment. I was told the commander wanted to see me, I was thinking it was another mission right away. He said my wife and son had been killed during a home invasion. Seems the two shitheads weren't content to just rob us, but one took my wife into our bedroom and the other had a thing for little boys." He nodded his head toward the driver before continuing with, "When I got back to the tent, he and Jeb had to basically sit on me because I was going back out to do some more, serious, killing, my way, the way I'm good at. When the commander found out, the three of us were sent back earlier, him," and he nodded to the driver again, "and Jeb to keep me under control. When I viewed their bodies, they looked worse than any I'd seen while on patrol."
"Oh, dear Lord," Marie said, before putting a hand on his shoulder. He reached up with his right hand and took Marie's hand and held it. "Thanks, Marie." Then, reaching into the right breast pocket of his shirt, he took out a business size card with his left hand. Pushing it into Marie's hand, he told her, "Any time you need us, no questions asked. We'll be there, even Jeb if it's necessary; his words, not ours."
Marie sat back in the rear passenger seat and looked at the card she'd been given. When she turned it over, all she saw was a phone number. "Day or night, Marie, any trouble, call," the driver told her.
Patting the passenger's shoulder, Marie told him, "You know how to reach me if you want to talk. I'll show you my tee-shirt sometime." When the passenger nodded, Marie opened the rear passenger side door and got out of the car, causing the car to rock slightly before she closed the door and was gone.
Looking at his friend, and saw the silent tears slide down his cheeks, the driver told him, "You should take her up on her offer. If she's got the 'tee-shirt,' then she knows how you feel."
The only response the driver heard was, "Yeah, I'll think about it." They watched as Jane and the kids came out of the salon, and watched as Toby opened the doors for the women. They both chuckled when Jane looked at them, nodded her head at them before getting into her car and having the driver's door shut by Toby. They were really shocked when after opening the driveside passenger door, Toby looked at them and signed 'thank you' before getting into Jane's car. Both men chuckled, afterward the passenger saying, "Gawd that kid is preceptive. Sure hope he gets to follow his dream. Maybe we should pay a visit to the Prosecutor or that judge, Ruth, I believe is her name."
Shaking his head, the driver replied, "Naw, from what Jeb said, with Toby's voice testimony and the way he was forced to shoplift, neither one is going to do anything but nothing to him. They should be far enough ahead, let's go, we got things to pack." And in no particular hurry, the driver started their car and shadowed Jane and the kids back to Seasons House, then where they uncovered their spotters nest and put everything into the car. A glint from Seasons House caught the passenger's eye. He pulled out the spotter scope and read it as it flashed. Picking up a powerful flashlight, he flashed back, 'You're welcome, Jane.'
When they'd returned to Seasons House, Jane told the teens to shower and put on clean clothes, she did it to give them something else to think about. When Francis and Charlotte returned to the first floor, Jane carefully inspected everything about them, not really needing to reestablish her authority but making sure both girls were okay. Toby arrived just as Jane had thrown her head in the direction of the kitchen, since it was close to noon. Toby caught the last of Charlotte entering the kitchen, so without Jane saying anything to him, headed for the kitchen, running into Francis as she came out of the kitchen with untensiles laying on the top plate of the pile of plates she was carrying. Taking the utensils, Toby followed Francis, laying forks, knives, and spoons, everywhere Francis placed a plate. They then returned to the kitchen for the drinking glasses, which they placed at each place once they'd exited the kitchen.
As Jane watched, she realized they were only going through the motions, lacking the gusto they previously had while setting the table. She realized something had to change, so after getting up from her place at the table, she walked over to the kitchen door, pushed it open and in a firm voice said, "You three, couch, living room, NOW! Jane stood back and watched as the kitchen door swung open and the three teens, led by Toby, came out of the kitchen. She followed Francis into the living room, and waited until Francis had sat down on the couch before she began. In the past, when she'd be standing in front of them, they'd be looking at her intently. But now, all three were inspecting something they found on their hands. "Please, look at me," Jane said to them, trying to sound authoritative but sympathetic as the same time. When Charlotte had finally lifted her head and was looking at Jane, she continue speaking. "Look, I simply cannot have you three acting like you're about to have your last meal and are heading to the gallows. That simply won't do." Jane kneeled in front of the three teens before continuing. "We have explained to you three how you are welcome to return and see us. We insist upon it. We want to know how you're doing, not only in your studies but once you start your careers. Yes, Francis," Francis was about to say something, but Jane already know she was going to bring up leaving family, once more. "We have formed our own little family, and Marie and I are going to miss all three of you. But it isn't going to be forever. Think of how much all three of you have changed by your visit here. Think of how much you'll have to tell us when you come to visit. Think about all of the new adventures you're about to embark on once you leave Seasons House."
When Jane stopped to take a breath, Toby said in a depressed voice, "We know all that, Aunt Jane, and we will come back, we want to come back to see you and Marie, and those mucking horses. But it's going back to our high schools and being bored out of our minds. I can, the three of us can, learn more on our own rather than sitting through all of those boring classes."
Realization struck Jane like a hammer, and she reached up and grabbed Toby's chin, hard. She kept her dragon caged for some time, but it was out now and spiting fire. "You listen to me, Toby Camber, all three of you. None of you will drop out of school. I don't give a damn how bored you are at your high schools, you will stay there and face the situation you're in with the same determination you've face situations while you've been here, however unpleasant they were at the time." Releasing Toby's chin, and caging her dragon again, she went on with, "If you drop out of school to pursue your own learning program, it may give pause to any University or College you apply to. They'll see you as someone who might quit at any time, and feel you aren't worth their time, when there are others who endured the grind of high school." Jane paused for several moments, choosing her words carefully, hoping to play on the teen's desire to return to Seasons House. "Marie and I will be deeply disappointed if you three give up and walk away from your high schools, from you possible futures. And we'll have to reconsider your being welcomed back to Seasons House." She let her last statement hang in the air, as she stood and stepped back a step from the couch. "Now, no more of the sad faces. You're returning home tomorrow, starting the beginning of your future careers, careers I demand you be the best you can be while in that career. But for now, there's a lunch to prepare, and I'm getting hungry. So, off you three go, help Marie where she directs you."
Jane watched the three teens look at each other before getting up from the couch. When they did, they didn't start directly for the kitchen, they took a small side trip. A side trip that had them hugging Jane, with Toby on Jane's right, Charlotte in the middle, and Francis on Jane's left. She pulled them tightly to her, squeezing her eyes tightly shut or the tears she felt would escape. Before they saw the water inching its way out of her eyes, she said, "Yes… well, off you go. Marie wants your assistance."
Releasing the three teens, she watched as Francis and Charlotte headed to the stairs, not the kitchen, likely to repair their faces. Toby, by contrast, wiped his eyes as he slowly walked to the kitchen, his head down, a hand wiping his eyes a second time. Jane was about to tell him, 'chin up,' but realized the words had caught in her throat. Jane then headed to her bedroom.
Conversation during lunch was like searching for a Yeti, hard to do, frustrating when nothing proved its existence. Even when asking about their studies, their answers were less than enthusiastic. Jane tried another tact, saying, "Enduring something you don't like is part of growing up. You will find times during your lives where you have to do something very distasteful, but it must be done. But by enduring it, you're proving you have the fortitude to take something on and see it through, you can be counted on to complete what you start. Yes, the three of you hate your high schools. Yes, you're bored out of your minds, but you study on your own when you have free time. But only one of you is doing the best you can do given the garbage you're given, and that's you, Charlotte. Francis, Toby, you two slack off because you don't want the attention you deserve. You two are worried what others will say if you ace your tests, speak up in class, and prove you have what it takes to take AP classes. If you two only do the minimum to get by, what do you think those at University or College with think when they see your lackluster grades? You might be questioned as to why you think you have what it takes to study the fields you two want to enter." Jane had no intentions of telling the three teens they wouldn't be going back to the idiots at their respective high schools, she'd let them think that until they heard it from Susan tomorrow. She was trying to impress on them to do their best no matter the circumstances, to always do their best even when they were given crap to work with. After targeting Francis and Toby, and the possibility they might not be allowed to pursue their field of choice, she saw a spark in their eyes, as though they'd never considered the possibility they'd never reach their goals because of their grades. Jane also saw both had made a decision, causing her to smile inwardly, knowing now they'd do the best they could and to hell what others thought or said. "Susan will be here after lunch to continue your classes. I expect the three of you to be as diligent in your studies, now, as you shown yourselves to be in the past few days. You will not slack off because you believe this is the last time you will have the opportunity to take AP courses. Do I make myself clear?"
As Jane watched the three teens, she wondered if they understood what she just told them without telling them anything specific. Judging by the expressions on their faces, it was possible all three fully understood what she had told them. The realization first hit Charlotte, who's face lit up just as though she'd realized the solution to a problem. The same expression occurred on Toby's face then on Francis' face, their enthusiastic "Yes, Aunt Jane," telling Jane they understood what she had told them without being specific. Their enthusiasm was back, as was evident as they when they'd finished their desserts and asked to be excused from the table. Jane had to remind them how they are to act while in her house, slowing them down some, but not enough to dampen their desire to get back to their studies.
Marie had sat silent throughout their lunch, only now asking Jane, out of earshot of the teens, "Why didn't you just tell them outright? Was it wise to tease them as you did? If it falls through, they'll be crushed."
Jane patted her dear friend's hand lying on the table, telling her, "Charlotte will do her best no matter the situation, her currect grades prove that to be true. Francis and Toby needed the reminder of what minimal grades might not get them. As to teasing them, didn't you see their faces light up at the realization of my statement to them? All three realize they have more AP classes in their future. Besides, it won't fall through, Susan has told me it's set in stone and I wanted her to be the one to explain it all to them. She also has another surprise for them, one which depends on them finishing high school."
The kitchen door didn't exactly blast open, but it opened a bit harsher than either Jane or Marie cared to have happen. Just as all three teens had entered the dining room from the kitchen, it was Marie who came close to hollowering, "STOP! Was denkt ihr drei, was ihr da tut, wenn ihr so aus MEINER Küche kommt? Ihr wisst, dass das KEINE akzeptable Art ist, MEINER Küche den Rücken zu kehren. Geht zurück und versucht, MEINE Küche ordentlich zu verlassen (STOP! What do you three think you're doing coming out of MY kitchen like that? You know that is NOT an acceptable way to remove yourselves from MY kitchen. Go back and try leaving MY kitchen properly.)."
Not one of the three hung their heads, instead, they looked Marie directly in the eye, then at each other, then they lined up next to the sitting Marie, and one at a time, told her, "Sorry, Marie," bent down and kissed her on the cheek before going back into the kitchen. This time when they came out of the kitchen, they did so as they'd done countless times, before going into the library, Charlotte closing the door behind her after entering the library.
Marie was semi-shocked after what the three teens did. Sitting at the dining room table, she had a questioning, curiously puzzled, look on her face. "I've lost my touch," she softly said. "I've lost my touch," she repeated, looking at Jane. "I no longer can put the fear of God into our wards, Jane. I'm losing it!"
Just as Marie finished speaking, there was a knock on the front door. Jane patted Marie's hand as she started pushing her chair back, telling her, "No, my sweet friend, you haven't lost it. You've gained their respect, something more precious than gold." Patting Marie's hand again, Jane stood up and walked to the front door, checking the monitor for the camera watching the front door. Surprised, she stepped to the front door, unlocked it, and opened it, finding Susan and Sherry standing there. "Ah, a surprise guest, I see," Jane said to the two women, both smiling at Jane. "And what bids you visit today, Sherry?"
Stepping aside, Susan and Sherry entered Seasons House, as Sherry said, "Well, those three are leaving tomorrow and I wanted to make sure they were okay. They seem happy being here and leaving might cause them to be unhappy, anxious, sad, scared, pick the word you want."
Jane chuckled, then said, "I believe all of the words you just used will suffice. But I'll let them explain it to you. They're in the library."
Jane followed the two women after closing and relocking the front door. As they reached the dining room, three cups of tea waited for them on the dining room table, courtesy of Marie, who welcomed Susan and Sherry. Knocking softly on the library door, Susan opened the door and walked into the library, followed by Sherry and Jane. As expected, as was their habit by now, the teens had looked up from their work to see who was coming into the library. Sherry saw their faces brighten before it faded, replaced with a melancholy look. After Susan sat down on the couch, next to Toby, and Jane had closed the library door and stood by the door, Sherry walked to the table, sat her cup of tea down and asked, "Okay, who wants to be the first to tell me why you three look like you lost your best pair of underwear?"
Toby and Charlotte snorted, Francis face-palmed herself before saying, We're leaving tomorrow, Sherry. No more mucking horses, or Aunt Jane and Marie, and Susan." She quickly put in, "Or you," which wasn't missed by Sherry.
Smiling, Sherry told her, "Oh, gee, thanks, Francis, for remembering me last. I'll miss you too."
Charlotte saw the hurt expression on Francis' face, elbowed her in the ribs and told her, "She didn't mean it like that, you dingbat. She's pulling your leg… again."
And Francis’ response, as usual, "Oh."
Sherry pulled an empty chair around to the head of the table and sat down, asking, "So, you're leaving tomorrow. Shouldn't you be happy about that. I understand both you, Charlotte, and you, Toby, are free birds with the Courts, so that should make you both happy, right?"
Toby and Charlotte exchanged looks before Charlotte said, "We are happy that's no longer hanging over our heads, but it's like Francis said, we won't be here anymore. We're going to miss this place and Marie and Aunt Jane, oh, and the mucking horses."
Sherry turned so she could see Jane, who looked up once then shook her head in resignation. While looking at Jane, she asked the three teens, "Hasn't Jane told you three you can return to visit? Hasn't she said it's like leaving a relative's home after a long visit?" Seeing Jane nod her head, Sherry turned back so she could look at the teens. "Well, didn't she say that? Didn't Marie say the same thing to the three of you?" Getting a mornful, 'yes' from the three, she continued by saying, "Look you three. This is not a hotel where you can stay for as long as you like by paying your bill. Think of this as a summer camp, you come, you go, at the right time, and the time for you three to leave is tomorrow."
In a saddened voice, Francis told Sherry, "Yeah, but no more Susan either. And no more AP classes." The usual observant teens missed Susan biting her lips, or the knowing look that flashed across Sherry's face.
Exasperated, Sherry tried another tact with the three. "Haven't you three ever heard the expression, 'make lemon aid out of lemons?' Haven't you three had to do things while you've been here you haven't liked? Such as mucking out the horse's stalls? Or helping get your meals? Or, Charlotte, Francis, being models for Carolyn and The Style Shoppe? Has any of that harmed you in any way? Toby? Look what you endured at the hands of your brother? While it harmed you, you survived, didn't you? Aren't you three stronger for those experiences? Hasn't it given you a new perspective, a different way to view events, actions, life in general? Toby, Charlotte, I can tell you from experience that the fields you two have chosen are not easy fields to survive in. You both will hear the troubles of those who come to you, expecting you to come up with some clever words to help the person get through a difficult time. But who do you tell your troubles to when it all gets too much? And how will you handle it when you lose one by their own hands? Life is full of unpleasant situations that must be endured or they won't get accomplished. Those boring classes you three have to take are easy examples of what much be endured if you are to reach the goals you've set for yourselves. And… you have to do the best you can do regardless of how you feel, how you make others feel, or what you're told." Sherry let everything she said hang in the air, as she got up from the chair, replaced it where it had been and walked toward Jane, who had opened the library door and stepped out of the library.
Closing the library door behind her, Sherry said to Jane, "That will give them something to think about for the rest of the day. Now, how about you, Marie, and I go have a chat. My tea has gone cold."
Chuckling, Jane led the way into the kitchen, where Marie already had more water boiling for fresh tea. The three sat down at the kitchen table and rehashed the feelings about the three teens leaving Seasons House. Jane and Marie went on to explain to Sherry all they'd learned by having the teens with them, unlike previous times. They wanted to include her and Susan as part of their program with the next boy sent to them. After what Sherry had witnessed, she felt her involvement could be beneficial but only after Jane and Marie had established their authority over the boy. By doing this first, he might be more willing to speak openly to Sherry and at the same time, help himself. But Jane made it abundantly clear, they would not change their overall program, they would still use Petticoat Punishment as a means to get the boys attention and establish their authority. But they would also listen to Sherry after she'd spoken with the boy. Their talk then focused on the adults who would arrive tomorrow, and the steps they'd put in place to deal with any unexpected events. Jane and Marie didn't feel there'd be any real problems, since the adults arriving tomorrow had already been told about Seasons House, but Jane and Marie were prepared just in case. Jane reminded Sherry that her presence was requested, as was the presence of Jill and Susan, the latter already confirming they'd be there for breakfast, and Sherry now doing the same. With the important matters taken care of, the three women then sat and chatted about all of the unimportant things they could think of, mostly of the antics of the three teens and again, that Marie and Jane were going to miss them.
Sherry left Seasons House after about an hour, telling of patients she had scheduled. She left Jane and Marie with a final thought, telling them, "After those three leave tomorrow, you two should take a break. Go somewhere for a while, do something you've wanted to do, just don't dwell on missing those three after they leave. Reflect on everything they've unexpectedly taught the two of you. And, when you're ready for me to get involved, call, you have my number." And with that, she hugged both women before disappearing from the kitchen.
Jane and Marie looked at each other, similar thoughts running through their minds. They needed to stay busy or risk total breakdown. Jane suddenly remembered work she needed to do in the study, while Marie suddenly realized she had something to get read for supper. They hugged before going their separate ways, neither one seeing the other wipe tears out of their eyes.
The rest of the afternoon was nothing to write home about, because nothing special happened. It was just another afternoon at Seasons House, with Jane in the study, Marie in the kitchen, and the teens in the library frustrating Susan with how fast the were completing their lessons. The usual for Seasons House.
The kids were somewhat more lively when getting the table set and helping Marie get their evening meal ready. Their jovial banter had returned, but with an untone of melancholy they couldn't shake. Instead of Jane drilling them on their lessons, Susan took up the mantle and was merciless in her questions and required answers. Even when she asked a few questions incorrectly on purpose, she wasn't disappointed when the three corrected her and not only said what the question should have been, but gave the answer to the question. The speed at which the questions were asked and answered, made Jane and Marie feel they were the audience of a game show, and the teens the contestants. Soon, though, supper was finished, the table cleared, the kitchen cleaned to Marie's satisfaction, and no sooner had the three been allowed the evening to themselves, it was time for showers and bed. The regular pre-bed inspection was more than somber, as tears flowed as each of the teens hugged Jane before wishing her a 'good night.' Jane did her best to keep herself composed during this time, but the teens could see how wet her eyes were. What they didn't see after they'd climbed the stairs and entered their bedrooms, was the tears that freely flowed as Jane slowly walked to her bedroom. Or Marie's eyes, as she checked the house before climbing to her bedroom, stopping at each bedroom door and muttering, "Portez-vous bien, petite, dans votre vie renouvelée (Be well, little one, in your renewed life.)," before going into her bedroom at the end of the hall. They never saw all the tears she shed as she readied herself for bed.
As usual, Marie entered each bedroom to make sure the teens were up, their beds made, they night clothes folded nicely and under the pillow, except for Toby, who's pajamas were neatly folded and lying on top of his other clothes in his open suitcase sitting on his bed. With a sigh, Marie headed downstairs and to the kitchen, taking a detour after hearing a knock at the front door. After checking the monitor, she opened the door to the three women standing there, a mixture of expressions on their faces. The usual boistres Jill asked somberly, "Where are they?" Before she hugged Marie and made room for the others to follow by going into the living room. She never saw each of the other two ladies hug Marie as they entered Seasons House, or the wet eyes each tried to hide.
Marie followed Susan after closing and locking the front door. Jill had turned around to look at Marie, waiting for an answer to her question. Marie chuckled then said, "They're out with the horses, performing their morning duties, and likely saying their goodbyes." As Marie walked past Jill, she told the three women, "Come into the kitchen and have some tea while I start breakfast. No one is expected until 9 o'clock anyway."
The teens had been up much earlier than Marie had believed, and had gone riding without telling anyone, a big no no. But it was something they needed, and as Jane watched the three ride off toward the pond, she wished them well. Only something had occurred neither Jane could see or the teens expected as they entered the stable. All three of the horses were standing outside of their stalls, Pinto holding her halter and the mare and other horse holding their bridles. "Well," Francis said to the air, "It looks like we're going riding before we clean their stalls. I'll get the brushes."
After showing Toby how to brush down the other horse, Francis brushed down the mare while Charlotte brushed down Pinto. "This is the last time we'll get to do this, 'ol girl, we're going home today. I guess this is goodbye," she said before dropping the brush and desperately holding onto Pinto's neck as she cried. Pinto rested her head gently on Charlotte's shoulder, doing her best to comfort the teen as she cried. Finally regaining herself, somewhat, Charlotte pulled her head back and told Pinto, "I'm going to miss seeing you every day. And those stupid antics you keep trying to pull." When Charlotte said that, Pinto snorted the whinnied, her lips pulled back in what seemed to be a smile.
With all three horses brushed, and a halter on Pinto and bridles on the other two horses, the teens led them out to drink their fill at the water tank, while they went to the tack room and got blankets and saddles. Charlotte and Francis helped Toby blanket and saddle the third horse, helping him to mount and making sure his butt wasn't bothering him, before saddling their horses. As they left the corral, all three horses jerked their heads hard enough to jerk the reins out of their rider's hands, making Francis and Charlotte realize they were not doing the driving that morning. Gripping the reins, but keeping them loose, the let the horses slowly walk them to the pond, where they saw another unexpected sight. Usually, when someone needed reassurance, they'd sit on the bench near the pond and wait for the animals to come to them. On this morning, the day of departure, the animals were waiting on the three teens. The deer were lying in their usual location. The skunk and racoon the same. The frogs and ducks lining the edge of the pond and the fish bobbing up and down a short ways off shore. And the porcupines, sitting within an arms reach from the bench, all just waiting. The teens didn't need coaxing to dismount as the horses stopped near the bench, they did so without saying a word. All eyes watched them as they walked the short distance to the bench and sat down, as soft, unknown, voices were brought to them on the suddenly gusty wind.
The teens took the time to look at each group of animals, lingering on them as though listening to each group was speaking to them individually. Then, as happened previously, when the message had been delivered, all of the animals slowly made their way back to what they'd been doing, leaving the teens sitting on the bench by the pond. Even the wind died to a soft breeze. Francis and Charlotte leaned over onto Toby, who'd sat in the middle. They put their arms around each other, having become much closer than they wanted to admit. They knew it was time for them to leave, and get the stalls cleaned, as each one felt a muzzle push them from behind. The ride back was much the same as it was on the way out, except now they had to muck the stalls. They took care of the horses after the ride, before starting on the stalls, leaving all three in the corral. They were quiet as they worked, saying one last goodbye by giving each horse an apple after returning them to the stalls. As they walked back to the house, they walked with arms draped over shoulders, silence speaking louder than they did as they walked. No one greeted them as they entered the house, or reminded them about removing their shoes before entering the house. Thirty minutes later, the three made their appearance in the kitchen, greeting the four women before going about the duties they done a number of times. Neither of the three said a word as they worked. Jill interrupted Toby after he'd helped set the table, by telling him she needed to see how well his body was healing. He never replied, never said a word, as he silently left the kitchen with Jill behind him and together they climbed the stairs to his bedroom. When they returned, Marie tried to get the teens to respond by telling them in a stern voice, "Ach… ihr drei seid heute Morgen nutzlos. Setzt euch ins Wohnzimmer (Ach… you three are useless this morning. Go sit in the living room.)."
As the four women watched, the teens just nodded their heads, before slowly walking out of the kitchen. It was Jill who quipped, "Wow! Tough crowd this morning, Marie. They're really taking leaving hard, aren't they?" Marie nodded before turning back to their breakfast.
Jane then came into the kitchen, shaking her head as she walked. Addressing Marie she asked, "You know they went riding this morning, though I don't think it was their idea."
Nodding her head, Marie replied, "Yes, I knew, but it was something they needed to do. Also, you are right, it wasn't their idea. After leaving the corral, all three horses jerked the reins out of their hands, actually taking those three to the pond. When they arrived at the pond, they had quite the reception waiting for them. Those three have made lasting impressions while they've been here."
Suddenly, Jill jumped up and asked Marie if she had a small paper bag. Marie pointed to a lower cabinet, then stood and watch Jill, as did the other three women. She pulled out four paper bags before finding the size she wanted. With a mischievous smile on her face, she gathered the top of the bag then blew it up the bag. She then walked to the kitchen door, quietly pushing it open and looking out. "Oh, this is perfect," she said, then quietly left the kitchen. Jane, Marie, Susan, and Sherry, didn't sit on their thumbs as the all tried to position themselves at the kitchen door so they could see what Jill was up to. The teens were sitting on the couch, looking down, wiping there eyes at times. Jill quietly walked through the dining room and into the living room, stopping when she was right in front of the teens. She turned her head to look at the four heads watching her, then raised the inflated bag in front of her, and with all the force she could muster, slammed her left hand into the bottom of the bag, causing a loud BANG to occur. Jill's antics had the desired affect, as all three suddenly jumped where they sat, then fell off the couch. When they regained their wits, they looked up to see a smiling Jill standing in front of them. As they watched, she waved at them then said, "Hi," before walking back to the kitchen.
The teens were still sitting on the floor as laughter broke out in the kitchen after Jill's return. The women laughed even harder when Charlotte yelled, "You'll pay for that, Jill. You wait and see if you don't."
After the laughter died down, Jane pushed the kitchen door open and watched the teens. She bit her lip when she heard Francis say, "Aw, crap. I need to go change my panties."
That was followed up by Charlotte adding, "Aw, jeeze, so do I."
After Charlotte and Francis stood up and took one step each, Toby chimed in with, "I can't believe it! Hey, wait up you two. Someone should teach that menacing imp a lesson."
The teens were so focused on their wet undergarments, they didn't notice Jane watching them. They did, though, hear the laughter start again as they were walking up the stairs.
Jill's antics had changed the mood of Seasons House that morning, and it continued throughout breakfast. Even through clearing the table and the kitchen, the teens were more jovial. It wasn't until the Grandfather clock struck nine, and a knock was heard on the front door, did the teens finally returned to their somber moods. Jane sent the teens into the library, telling them to wait until she came to get them. As they walked off, she called after them, "Thinks will work out, wait and see."
Jeb had sent Jane pictures of everyone who'd be coming to Seasons House to take their boys home. As Jane looked at the monitor for the front door, she saw only those who were to be coming to Seasons House that morning. Marie came out of the study, her hands behind her back, her 1911 held in her right hand, thumb on the hammer, finger on the safety lever, and one in the pipe. As Jane looked at her, she nodded her head once, telling Marie it was safe to open the front door. Taking the step to the front door, Jane unlocked the door and pulled the door back so she was standing out of Marie's line of fire in case her line of fire was needed. "Jeb Thorton," Jane said to the man standing at the head of the line. "Welcome to Seasons House. And who is this lovely women who puts up with you?" A smile crossed Jane's lips as she said it.
In mock anger, Jeb replied, "Jane Thompson, you are nothing but a scallywag, always have been, always will be. And this lovely lady who puts up with me is my wife Lynn. Lynn, this is Ms. Jane Thompson. And the other lovely lady, though rather deadly, you see standing there with her backup behind her back, if I'm not mistaken, is Marie, the other cohort of the duo." Hearing what Jeb just said, Marie smirked and nodded her head, confirming Jeb's guess.
After shaking Jeb's hand, Jane shook Lynn's hand, telling her, "It's finally nice to meet the better half of your duo." Both women laughed as Jeb went along with the gag by acting shocked at Jane's words. "Please, come in the both of you." Jeb then hugged Jane, whispering in her ear as he did so.
As the two walked toward Marie, Lynn asked her husband, "What did you just say to Jane back there?"
Jeb put his arm around Lynn's waist and said, "I thanked her for taking care of Charles." Lynn smiled, then leaned over and kiss him on the cheek.
When they reached Marie, she and Jeb stared at each other, stern expressions on the faces. Lynn saw the looks and started to become uneasy until both broke out in grins and Jeb stepped up to Marie and hugged her tightly. Marie still holding her 1911 in her right hand, hugged Jeb with her left hand. She looked over to Lynn and asked her, "How in the world do you put up with this 'ol war horse. The last time I saw him he needed a bath desperately."
Lynn laughed, then replied, "I remember that time, and you're right, he smelled horrible. But I fell in love with him that very day, and it's only through love that I endure."
Looking incredulous, Jeb said, "Hey, what is it, roast Jeb day?"
The three heard a voice behind them say, "Children! Please play nicely. I don't want to have these floors replaced because of spilt blood." The all looked at Jane, who was looking at them with a smile on her face.
Jane turned back to the lone man standing in the door way, Martin Camber, Toby's dad. "Martin, welcome to Seasons House. Toby is a wonderful young man you should be extremely proud of. I'm only sorry we're meeting under these circumstances."
Martin stood a good 6'8" or 6'9" and weighed around 265. His hand enveloped Jane's hand as they shook hands, Jane being told, "I blamed myself for how things turned out. Had I known what Tylor was doing to Toby… well, let's just say I might have found it necessary to make sure Tylor was never found. He may be my son, but no one treats another person the way he treated Toby, or the trouble he got Toby into."
Looking into Martin's eyes, Jane told him, "Many of us had the same thoughts about Tylor after we saw what he'd done to Toby. However, Martin, we knew we couldn't do that as it'd make us no better than he was, then they were. Be proud of a boy who went through hell and emerged on the other side a stronger person. Please, come in." Jane then gestured toward Marie, telling Martin, "The woman standing there is Marie, my partner in crime."
Jane turned back to the door as Martin walked up to Marie and shook hands with her, her helper then being held in her left hand behind her back. As Martin had walked toward Marie, he could tell she was packing, and was not to be trifled with when it hit the fan. As they shook hands, Martin leaned toward Marie and softly said, "Oorah," then straightened and gazed into her eyes. He watched as she slowly nodded her head several times, before directing him toward the living room.
As Martin was greeting Marie, Jane had returned her attention to the couple standing in the doorway. "And you must be Penny Willows, the wonderful woman Frank spoke about."
The two women shook hands before Penny told Jane, "Ms. Thompson, this is my husband, Tom."
Shaking Tom's hand, Jane told him, "It's a pleasure to meet you, Tom. Actually, a pleasure to meet the two of you. There's a lot the two of you need to be told. Please, come in. The woman you see there," and Jane pointed to Marie, "Is my cohort, Marie. Please, please, come in." After Penny and Tom entered the house Jane closed and locked the front door, something not lost on Tom.
"You seem to take security seriously, Ms. Thompson," Tom told Jane.
Jane looked from Tom to Marie, seeing Marie nod her head once. "We do, Tom. We've had a few, um, experiences in the past that made us very cautious. And please, it's Jane and Marie. There's no need to be so formal."
Tom and Penny walked over to Marie, both shaking hands with her before being directed to the living room. When Jane reached Marie, they exchanged a look, before Marie stepped into the study, returning with both hands empty. After Marie returned from the study, Jane said to everyone, "If you will make yourselves comfortable around the dining room table, we'll get started with the explanations you all need to hear." After everyone had taken a seat at the dining room table, Jane stood behind Jill and introduced her. "This woman is Dr. Jill Peters. Martin, she and the hospital treated Toby and kept him safe." She saw Martin was about to ask a question, and held up her hand, telling him, "Please hold you question, Martin. All will be explained in a moment." Moving behind Susan, Jane told the group, "This is Susan Toliver, the tutor who worked with the boys." Stepping behind Sherry, Jane said, "This is Dr. Sherry Daniels, a licensed psychologist, who has been instrumental in helping all of us deal when this unusual situation."
"I understand it has been explained to all of you what Marie and I do here at Seasons House. so I'll forego the entire explanation again. The method Marie and I use, Petticoat Punishment, is used to drastically snap the boy out of his current thought processes by having him live as a girl in every way physically possible. He is dressed as a girl during his entire stay, even participating in those activities many girls might participate in. We use his own ego against him, his fear of being discovered as a boy dressed as a girl. The boys sent to us are deemed redeemable by Judge Ruth Walinkiewicz, a juvenile court judge. Frank was just such a boy, Penny, Tom. Did either of you hear why Frank couldn't return to your family after your cancer was in remission, Penny?"
As Jane looked at the couple, Tom's face started turning red with anger. Penny laid a hand on his arm, telling Jane, "Frank's case worker said they were concerned the cancer would return and they'd have to go through the whole process again of finding Frank a place to live. So staying with Agnus was the best solution."
Even though Penny had calmed Tom, he said through gritted teeth, "It was a bunch of BS, pure and simple. The doctors told us there was zero chance the type of cancer Penny had would return. We even showed that cow the doctor's reports."
Jane didn't tell the couple she'd also seen the reports, but went on with, "There was a simple reason the case worker wouldn't allow Frank to return to your family, she was getting kickbacks from Agnus. Agnus was giving her half of the support money she received for Frank. None of that money was ever used for Frank's living expenses. Agnus was only keeping Frank for the money. If it hadn't been for a neighbor lady, I don't believe Frank would be with us today. It was also the neighbor lady who contacted the right people to get an investigation started. It was discovered that not only Frank's case worker was receiving kickbacks, but several other case workers were doing the same. Agnus and the others are now spending time behind bars, contemplating their misdeeds."
Jane paused while Marie sat cups of tea before everyone sitting at the table. Once Marie returned from the kitchen, Jane continued. "I want Susan to speak next on her and Sherry's discoveries, you might be surprised and angry once they're finished telling you what they discovered."
Susan gave Frank's folder to Penny and Tom. Toby's folder went to Martin, while Charlotte's folder went to Jeb and Lynn. "Jane and Marie have a fine educational program set up while a boy stays with her. It's a much better program than he'd find in the school he'd been attending. When I was called in to help them, my first step was to have the three fill out an assessment paper." Susan chuckled before saying, "I had to repeatedly remind them it wasn't a test, just an information paper for me so I know what they knew or didn't know. When I saw the results of those papers, I knew something wasn't right, given their school grades, except for Charles, who we discovered would do his best even if he hated every minute of it. Toby and Francis, we discovered later, were bored to death with the classes they were taking at their respective high schools, but their assessment papers told a different story. If you'll look at the IQ test scores in your folders, you'll see what Sherry discovered after we had her give them an IQ test. We later learned each of them had asked to take AP courses, but were turned down because the administration didn't want to upset the social structure of their entire class."
It was Martin's turn to speak through gritted teeth, asking, "You mean to tell me with an IQ that high, those dic… um… morons wouldn't let Toby take any advance classes? Did those as… um… dopes even test him?"
There were smiles around the table, as everyone realized what Martin was about to call the administration at the schools, catching himself in time. "Martin, we've use worse words to describe the administration at those schools, but thank you for trying not to be so, crass." Susan thanking Martin caused him to chuckle, even apologizing for almost crossing the verbage line. "To answer your question, Martin," Susan continued. "No, they didn't test him, they wouldn't test him. Toby told us they said his grades didn't warrant him being tested. So, he did the bare minimum of school work to get by. However, during his free time at school, he'd go to the library and read those textbooks used in the AP classes, and any he could find the library had on psychology, a field he wants go enter. It is my feelings, and I believe Sherry's as well, all three of those boys could test out of high school without any problems. We don't recommend it though, for one glaring reason. If they tested out of high school and entered University or College, they'd be the youngest students attending those schools. Research has shown that while young students do well in the higher learning atmosphere, they are social pariahs, often harassed by the older students. Sherry and I have tried to impress upon those three not to give a toot to anything anyone says if they do the best they can. We've especially tried to make that point with Frank and Toby, since both were doing only the minimum to get by. The school might not like it, but they need to blow the doors off the Bell Curve and not care if it bothers anyone."
Susan nodded to Jane, who took over with, "Thank you Susan. As I told all of you, this time at Seasons House has been most unusual. Marie and I usually only have two boys with us at one time, the experienced boy helping the new boy. This time, we had three boys, one who had walked through hell and come out the other side without losing who he was going in. If you would, Jill."
A moment of anger passed over Jill's face before she began speaking. "Martin, in all my years of practicing medicine, I've never come across another person who was beaten more severely than Toby. All of us who saw Toby's condition when he first arrived wanted to deal with Tylor using a map, flashlight, and a shovel. But as Jane said, it wasn't our lot in life to be like those people. That morning, after seeing Toby for the first time, I couldn't understand how he was still alive. Many of his wounds were infected, and the new ones were deep, almost bone deep. He was rushed to our hospital where we cleaned out the infection and put him on a heavy dose of antibiotics, keeping him sedated throughout the procedure. Once we removed the sedation, he finally came around the following day, when he told Jane everything. I was told you were shown the pictures we took, Martin," and when he nodded, Jill went on with, "Well there was more. Jane was told those animals had started killing the kids who were involved in the shoplifting, probably to shut them up. Our police department had received a heads-up that an attempt would be made on Toby's life. They worked with the hospital and set up a plan to deal with anyone coming into the hospital asking for Toby. Toby would have stayed in the hospital longer, if not for the two men who came into the hospital acting like his Uncles and asking if he was there. Those two never knew what hit them, as the hospital and police's plan worked perfectly. Both were discovered to be armed, with one having a silencer on him. When the alert had gone out in the hospital, two of the hospital's best security gurads, both vets, stayed in Toby's room until the all clear was given. But I was still worried others would come so I called Jane and told her I was bringing Toby to Seasons House, where I knew he'd be safe. And he's been here ever since, and his body is healing nicely. Also, a plastic surgeon I know, Dr. Thomas Glean, has volunteered to treat Toby, pro bono, after his body is completely healed. Martin, pictures don't display what you'll see with your own eyes, he'll need Dr. Glean and his team's help."
When Jill looked at Jane, Jane said, "Sherry, you're up to bat."
Sherry took a sip of her tea before she began to speak. "Except for Toby, how much to you, Jeb and Lynn, and Penny and Tom, know about what Charles and Frank have been through? Penny and Tom, are you aware what Agnus did to him while he stayed with her? Locking him in his bedroom for the day? Refusing to let him use the bathroom while he was locked in his bedroom? Refusing to let him out for meals? Or the times she slapped him around?"
Penny's face took on an expression that would make statues cringe. It was Tom who put an arm on his wife's arm as she said with restrained anger, "She did all that to him? Not feeding him or letting him use the bathroom?" Calming down a bit, she then asked, "What’d he do for food or when he had to use the toilet? No one said he had to be hospitalized for malnutrition, so he must have eaten. And using the toilet, what'd he do?"
Sherry smiled then replied, "Your Nephew is a resourceful person, Penny. Agnus forgot his bedroom had two windows, and he took the screen off one of them and went to the neighbor lady's house. She let him use the bathroom, even showering, and fed him too. If it hadn't been for her, he'd have been in a world of hurt. And as we said previously, it was she who contacted the right people who found out what was going on between Agnus and the case worker. But there's more, Penny, Tom, much more. Frank bottled up his feelings about what he was being put through, which came out during one of our talks. It's out in the open now, but I'd like to continue meeting with him on a regular basis."
She then looked between Martin and the Thortons, taking another sip of her tea before saying, "The same applies to Toby and Charlies. Martin, you already know what Toby went through, but he too bottled up his feelings and they emerged much like Frank's did during our talks. Jeb, Lynn, do you remember what happened to Charles in elementary school? The time two boys forced his head into the toilet, then the time the same two boys put him into the urinal because they were suspended from school because of the first incident?"
Lynn looked thoughtful for a moment, then said, "Yes, I remember those incidents. But it didn't seem to bother Charles at the time. He seemed to have shrugged it off."
If was Jeb's turn to look thoughtful as Lynn spoke, saying, "I remember something about it, but because Charles never made a big deal out of it, I just put it aside. I take it he was still harboring feelings about what happened?"
Nodding her head, Sherry told him, "Yes, Jeb. He was still harboring feelings about what those two boys did to him. During our first talk, he kept answering my questions evasively, always trying to counter my questions with a critique of my attempts to get him to talk to me. He finally broke down when I grabbed both of his arms from across the table, and his bottled up feelings surfaced. I never again want to hear boys cry the way those three cried when they let their bottled up feelings out. It's a sound you'll never forget once you've heard it."
Marie had just poured more tea into Sherry's cup, just in time for Sherry to take another sip. "Toby is outgoing, while Francis chose to remain quiet because of his experiences at school. Charles is the more intellectual of the three, though he has started opening up more while he's been here. Martin, now that Toby doesn't have to fear Tylor, I think you're going to find you have a much different son than the one you remember. Penny, the same goes for Frank. But beware, he has a sense of humor that'll take you unaware. Jeb, Lynn, you've done a wonderful job raising Charles, but don't let him close himself off again, he can be as bad as Francis if he wants. Also, I'd like to set up a schedule to meet with all three of the boys at least once a month. Given what each one has been through, I'd like to make sure they don't revert to their former selves."
Sherry nodded her head to Jane, who then said, "Okay, why don't we take a break before the boys come out to see everyone. We've a bit more to cover before they'll need to change to go home. There's a restroom there," and Jane pointed to the door for the downstairs restroom.
Most of the adults took advantage of the break to use the restroom, others talked amongst themselves. They watched Marie carry a tray holding three glasses and a pitcher of water to a room, knock on the door before opening it and going inside. The same door opening caught their attention, and they watched as Marie came out of the room carrying an empty tray.
After the restroom break was over, and their tea cups had been refreshed, Jane got everyone's attention before she told them, "I've explained how Marie and I get the boy's attention by having them dress and act like girls while they're here. Frank was the first sent to us, so he was Francis, and very convincing dressed as a girl. Charles came next, though he already knew about Petticoat Punishment. So I gave him a choice to stay himself while he was here, or have an experience he'd likely never get an opportunity to have anywhere else. He chose the experience and became Charlotte, and more than convincing dressed as a girl. Toby, for obvious reason, could never have the experience, but he was very supportive the entire time he has been here. Marie and I are very protective of our girls, so if any of you says or does anything to make Frank or Chalres feel more anxious than they are already, you WILL be bodily thrown out of my house." Giving Martin a stern look, she answered his silent question with, "Yes, Martin, I can do it without any trouble. Don't test me!"
Giving the Thortons, the Willows, and Martin, one last stern look, Jane walked to the library, knocked on the door before opening it and going into the library, closing the door behind her. It was a few moments later when the library door opened, causing Jeb, Lynn, Penny, Tom, and Martin to stand, watching as the teens filed out of the library. Martin reacted first, rushing over and picking up Toby in a bear hug. "Oh, God, Toby," he said, sobbing as he spoke. "I'm so sorry son, I'm so so, sorry. I should have paid more attention to what Tylor was doing."
Tears were streaming down Toby's cheeks, as he held his dad tightly. "Dad, it's okay. You had to keep a roof over our heads and food on the table. I'm so proud of you for doing that after mom left." Martin then carried Toby back to where Martin had been sitting, sat down and sat Toby in his lap, never letting go of him.
Lynn and Jeb stood in front of Chalotte, Lynn placing a hand over her mouth. "Oh, my. Jane was right. You do make a very cute girl." She then kneeled and held out her arms, which were quickly filled with Charlotte's presence, as she too cried on her mom's shoulder. Jeb stood next to the pair, his arms hugging both his wife and son.
Penny had done the same as Lynn, put a hand over her mouth in surprise. Francis stood there, tears welling up in her eyes, saying, "You're ashamed of me, aren't you? Ashamed I'm dressed this way, aren't you?"
Then, to the parents and Penny's surprise, Charlotte said, "Oh, gawd, not again." Not only did she stand up and walk over to Francis, but Toby got off his dad's lap and walked over to Francis. "You dope, they aren't ashamed of you. Can't you see how happy they are to see you, no matter how you're dressed," Toby told Francis as he and Charlotte took Francis' by the arms and led her over to where Penny and Tom were standing.
Kneeling in front of Francis, and wiping her eyes, Penny told Francis, "Francis, Frank, we are not ashamed of you in any way. Tom and I are just happy you're alright and are going to be living with us. We've also talked about adopting you, that is, if you'd like us to adopt you."
Trying to comprehend what her Aunt just said, Francis asked, "You want to adopt ME? ME? Why? I've been such a mess and I still could be."
Tom kelt in front of Francis and told her, "Yes, Francis, we'd like to adopt you if it's what you'd want. As to why? If we make you our legal son, no one can take you away from us ever again. And judging by what I've seen right now, I don't believe we have to worry about you still being a mess. If I might also say, like Charlotee, you're cute dressed as a girl." With tears in her eyes, Francis fell into the arms of Tom and Penny, crying as they held each other."
As the teens became reacquainted with their adults, Jane and Marie heard a knock on the front door. Looking at each other, Jane walked to the monitor by the front door, while Marie made a quick trip into the study. When Marie came out of the study, Jane told her, "It's Carolyn and Sandy, right on time." Making another quick trip into the study, Marie emerge empty handed, and stood near the stairs, waiting to take Sandy and Carolyn up to Francis and Charlotte's bedroom. After unlocking the front door, and letting Carolyn and Sandy into the house, she quietly told them to follow Marie, she'd take them up to the bedrooms where they could set up. Both women remained quiet as they walked to Marie and followed her up the stairs to the girl's bedrooms.
After closing the front door and locking it, Jane rejoined the group in the dining room, waiting a few more minutes before they continued. She wasn't Sherry, but even she could see that those three boys were deeply loved and would do fine when they returned home. Getting their attention, Jane said, "I think Jeb has something he like to say at this time."
Standing up, Jeb opened a business case he'd been carrying, taking out several sheets of paper. Addressing Toby first, he said, "Toby, you're voice testimony was invaluable to the District Attorney. That testimony, and what you suffered at the hands of your brother, the District Attorney has dropped all charges against you. You're record is clean once again." At that point he handed Toby an order by the Court and one from the District Attorney, both exclaiming the charges against one Toby Camber were dismissed. He then turned to Charlotte, saying, Charles, or, um, Charlotte, Judge Ruth, Terry, and the prosecuting attorney knew everything against you was a lie. But Strom threatened to take you to Federal Court if Ruth didn't find you guilty. Like Toby, all of the charges against you have been dropped, as stated in these two papers. And like Toby, your record is clean once again." Jeb closed the case then sat down, taking Lynn's hand after sitting.
With smiles on their faces Toby and Charlotte high-fived each other, until Charlotte said, "We may be free of the courts, but we have to return to our schools."
Letting out a groan, Francis said, "Do we have to? That place is so boring it's more fun watching paint dry. Or watching grass grow. Or...,"
Francis never finished her third comparison, as Toby told her, "We get it, pea brain. It's super boring."
Looking at Toby, Francis asked, "Who you calling pea brain, muck for brains?"
Charlotte shook her head before saying, "Oy vey! They're at it again." Turning to her parents she said, "Francis does have a point. Even though I was getting 'A's', it was boring. I can handle it, but they," and she pointed to Toby and Francis, "Need another school."
Clearing her throat, Susan said, "I think I can help with that small problem." She then pulled out six pieces of paper, handing two to each teen. "The top sheet is an acceptance letter from a private high school not far from here that will fit the needs of all three of you. They're offering full tuition, room and board, books, and meals. All you three have to do is work at your studies. The second paper is a letter from a University offering all three of you a full ride when you graduate high school. And, that University offers majors in each of the fields you three want to pursue. It's all up to the three of you and your parents."
The three teens were standing together comparing their papers, talking excitedly. Martin cleared his throat, stood, and said, "Toby, I, um, lost those three jobs I had. Because I was offered a job not far from here as a manager in the field I first started in. We'll be moving up here, out of that city and into God's country."
Toby stood dumbfounded, until Francis and Charlotte took him over to his dad. "You're not just saying that are you? You really got a job in this area?" Toby asked, still stunned over the prospect of moving into the area, living not far from Seasons House.
Martin pulled Toby into him, telling him, "Yes, son, it's the truth. I've already found us a nice place to live. It even comes with a few animals."
Toby was hugging his dad when Jane spoke up. "Francis, Charlotte. Carolyn and Sandy are waiting for the two of you up in your bedrooms. You'll also find all of your clothing lying on your beds. So you best go and not keep them waiting."
Jane never told the girls which woman would be in their bedrooms, though Sandy chose to undo Charlotte. As hard as the tears flowed downstairs, they flowed just as hard upstairs, as prosthetics were removed, makeup thoroughly removed, and this time hair cuts given instead of stylings. One last shower and Frank and Charles were ready to once again face the world. Last hugs to Carolyn and Sandy, with promises to come and see them, and the two boys, carrying their suitcases, made the last trip from their bedrooms to the first floor. As if on cue, when Toby saw the two boys, he said, "My gawd, you two clean up nicely." Frank and Charles looked at each other, a silent message passing between them. Charles started walking around the head of the dining room table while Frank started walking around the end where they'd sat for so many weeks. Looking between the two boys, malice on their faces, Toby said, while holding up his hands, "Joking, I was only joking," and had backed himself up against the wall next to the kitchen door. The two boys looked at each other again before both grabbed Toby and started carrying him toward the back door, Toby yelling all the way.
Marie was standing by the back door, opening it as the three reached her. "Thank you, Marie," Francis said as the two boys carried the still yelling out the back door and toward the stable.
Everyone followed the boys out of the back door and onto the back porch, while Frank and Charles carried the still yelling Toby into the stable, Martin asked, "Have they always been that close, Jane?"
Thinking back, Jane replied, "No, Martin, not always. Only when they decided to be open with each other and support each other, did they become that close," and she pointed to the three disappearing into the stable. Then Jane added, "I don't think we'll have to worry about Toby needed another shower. I think they're just going to say goodbye one more time."
Jane was right, it was a last goodbye to the horses by the three boys. Frank and Charlotte set Toby down, then the two walked over to the basket holding the apples and each took one. Charles walked up to Pinto's stall, the horse giving him a questioning look before Charles spoke to her. "Yeah, you crazy horse, it's me, back to being Charles. Here, one last apple before I leave. You be nice to Jane and Marie, and help the next boy sent to Seasons House, you hear?" Pinto accepted the apple, then as Charles hug the horse's neck, Pinto laid her head on Charles' shoulder, whinnying softly, her way of saying goodbye and thank you.
Francis told the mare much the same, and received the same response as Charles received. Toby, not having ridden but the one time, gave the third horse her apple and thank her for the nice ride, getting a cheek rub by that mare. Looking around one last time, arms around each other, the three walked out of the stable and back to the house for the last time as teens; everyone was still on the small back porch, waiting on the teens to return.
When the boys reached the porch, Jane said, "So, it was goodbyes and not mucking?"
Looking happy and sad at the same time, Francis answered with, "Yes, Aunt Jane, just saying our goodbyes one more time. And we're not dressed to be mucking anything or anyone," and he looked at Toby who held up a fist in Francis' face, causing all three to laugh.
Toby sighed before saying, "Well, if we're going home, I guess we better get going. If I remember right, it's a long trip."
The three took a step toward the porch, then looked at the smiling faces of everyone standing on the porch. "Okay," Charles began, "What is it you all know that we don't? It's as though we've been left out of a gag of some sort."
Susan stepped off the porch and put a hand on Franks and Charles' shoulders, who were standing to Toby's left and right. "Well, boys, you aren't going home. At least not right away. You're going to school right after you leave Seasons House." The three had blank looks on their faces, then looked at the faces of their parents, each on nodding their head. "You remember that paper I gave you about being accepted to that private high school? Well, they meant for you to attend starting today, not after you go home."
"But we're still enrolled in our other high schools," Toby said, looking to his dad, who was shaking his head.
Looking at his son, Martin told him, "When Susan got confirmation from that high school, she contacted all of us. And we withdrew the three of you from your high schools, and basically told them where to go at the same time. The five of us came in a van pulling a trailer, with all of your things inside. We are going directly from here to that school, and help you three move in. Plus, they've put you three in the same dorm room, so you'll still be together to help each other when needed. And Toby, Jill will still want to see you, and will contact the school when it's time."
When Martin finished speaking, Jeb spoke up with, "And boys, we've set up a schedule where you three will meet with Sherry twice a month. And you will speak with her, won't you Charles? Oh, and Charles? I think you'll be glad to know you won't get to slack off on your training. We've been told they have a sensei on staff, she teaches the math courses."
Smiling, Charles answered, "Yes, dad, I will speak to her. And it's good to know I can continue my training, though I might be a bit rusty."
Turning, the adults went back into the house, and continued on toward the front door, Jane and Marie following the three boys. When they reached the front door, Sherry, Susan, and Jill stood off to one side, while the parents saw what was needed and continued out to the van. None of the boys could speak, but they did hug all five women one last time before running out of Seasons House, wiping their eyes as they ran. The five stepped outside and waved as the van pulled away from Seasons House, Marie suddenly saying as the van disappeared down the road, "I believe tea and cake would be the order of the day right now." Her voice was raspy, but no one disagreed with her either.
Strom's mistress, the mastermind of the shoplifting ring, received life in prison plus 150 years, without the possibility of parole.
Strom, because he'd supplied her with pictures of the kids she killed, was deemed complicit in the murder's and given life without the possibility of parole.
Don Obler, the former store manager of Taylor's Department store, was given ten years in prison for his role in the shoplifting. As was James Conner, the former head of security at that store.
Tylor Camber, because he turned state's evidence, had his ten year sentence cut in half to five years, with the possibility of parole after serving three years.
Mary Myles, the woman corporate sent to that Taylor's Department store as assistant manager, and who helped uncover the truth about the store, was voted by the board of directors to become the new CEO of the Taylor's Department store chain.
The State Board of Education investigated the claims made by the parents of the three boys. As a result of their investigation, all of the administration and counselors at the three school were summarily fired, and replaced with people who cared more about academics than the social structure of the schools. And the administration of those three schools, fired any teacher who refused to follow the new program to bring back academic excellence - teachers who felt social structure was more important than academic excellence.
After the State Board of Education finished their investigation, and replacement of administrations, the State School Board ordered all eighteen school board members of the three high schools to report and answer allegations against all of them. In the end, the State School Board didn't like the answers given by all of the eighteen school board members, and removed them from their school board positions on the spot. There were angry shouts from the former school board members of lawsuits, but their lawyers told them they'd have zero chance of winning in court, as they had brought it all upon themselves.
And the boys, Frank, Charles, and Toby? Just as they drove Susan to frustration over the speed they learned the material she gave them, they did the same at the private high school they were attending. Upon graduation, there were three valedictorians named, Frank Willows, Charles Thorten, and Toby Camber. The three did receive a full scholarship from that University. Studies at the University slowed them down a bit, but only a bit. Sherry was right when she told Charles he wouldn't be allowed to speed through the medical school, but he turned out to be number two upon graduating from medical school. Frank and Toby went on to get their Masters then their PhDs. As luck would have it, Frank was offered a job at a chemical manufacturing company being built by a major chemical corporation, not far from where Toby and Charles opened a private practice together, about twenty miles from Kingston, and after their intern periods. And one more small fact about the boys. There is now a Mrs. Beth Willows, Frank's wife. Toby met and married Tina Moore, a sharp young lady from Kingston. And Charles? He acquired his high school sweetheart, Sandra Glean, (yes, Thomas Glean's daughter) while attending the private high school, they married after Charles graduated medical school and they're expecting their first child in seven months.
Dr. Thomas Glean and his team worked with Toby after his body completely healed. The scar cream they used slowly started reducing the severity of the scars after three months. After a break of two weeks, and a bit of tweaking of the cream, they continued the treatment. Given the results of the tweaked cream, they believe when his treatment is completed, all that will be seen are white lines where the horrible scars had once been.
And when time permits, the mare, Pinto, and the other mare, guide the boys to the pond, where the animals are always waiting for them to arrive.